A
JAPANESE GRAMMAR,
JAPANESE GRAMMAR. BY
J. J.
HOFFMANN,
MEMBER OF THE BOYAL ACADEMY OF
SECOND
LEIDEN,
SCIENCES, ETC. ETC.
EDITION.
E. J. BRILL.
1876.
533
The work
is
published in Dutch also under the
JAPANSCHE SPRAAKLEER DOOR J.
J.
HOFFMANN. LEIDEN 1868.
And
in
German under the
title
of
JAPANISCHE SPRACHLEHRE. LEIDKN 1876
JAAI 2 8
B66
^C 7 /
?
title of
HOMAGE TO THE LATE
J.
J.
ROCHUSSEN L.
GOVERNOR OP DUTCH
L.
D.
EAST
INDIA,
MINISTER
FOR THE DEPARTMENT OP THE COLONIES, MINISTER OP STATE
FOR THE LIBERAL AND ENLIGHTENED MANNER
IN
WHICH HE
HAS PATRONIZED THE STUDY OF THE CHINESE AND JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.
E F
.A.
O
TO THE FIRST EDITION.
The Grammar of the Japanese language which accompanied with ,
is
this Preface ,
simultaneously published in the English and in the Dutch languages,
original
work, not a remodelling or an imitation of any other works of that
stamp at present literature, its
it
existing.
As
written
describes the
ancient, as well as in
the result of a
its
language, which
many
or book
as
language,
own
it
really exists in
observations on the domain of the
his intercourse with native Japanese in France, in
especially in the Netherlands has afforded
opportunities,
years' study of the Japanese
modern forms.
It also contains the author's
and
an
is
him ample opportunities
spoken
Engeland to
make;
which have been the more valuable to him, in as much as that
they brought him in contact with people belonging to the most civilized and the
most learned, as well
as with those of the inferior classes of Japanese society.
Thence he derives the right, even though he has never actually trodden the of Japan, to embrace the
and to
treat
it
The author
spoken language
in the range of his observations,
in connection with the written language. is
convinced that,
whatever their character,
all
he has quoted from Japanese writings,
genuine: he
is
relies
upon
the experience of others, unprejudiced, will find that
With in all
its
soil
regard to the
phenomena
manner
treated
be in consonance with the
it
it it
himself, and trusts that is
so.
in which he has conceived the language, and
analytically
spirit of this
his daily experience confirms this,
and synthetically, he believes
it
language, simple and natural, and,
thoroughly practical.
to
PREFACE.
known
This method of his, was made
in general outline ten years ago,
he published the Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst door Mr. TIUS,
and the
whereas Mr. tion:
seal of
s.
approbation was affixed to
it
method, but with
and dialogues
a few exceptions, followed
The Grammar, now published, followed by a treatise
it
in English
Grammar, on
in
its
and the
whole extent.
claim to completeness, ought to be
lay
for
which are prepared.
It
work, and be of small compass.
these aids, initiated in the
make
to
on the Syntax, the materials
will be published as a separate
with profit,
CTJR-
by the judgment of scholars,
Japanese, not only founded his Introductory remarks on the
By
DONKER
H.
BROWN, who, in 1863, published the very important contribu-
R.
Colloquial Japanese or conversational sentences
Author's
J.
when
treatment
of the language, the student
may,
use of the Japanese-Dutch-English Dictionary, for the publi-
cation of which the author has prepared all the materials necessary,
and by so
doing he will have at his disposal the most important means of access to the Japanese literature.
THE AUTHOR.
LEIDEN, May 1868.
NOTICE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
As
the
first
edition of this
Grammar
Majesty's Minister for colonial affairs
being
now
published in 1867 by
out of print, the publisher
is
proprietor of the Chinese types,
Government, has resolved on a
command
acquired by order of the Dutch
to alter or
modify the matter of this
work; only a few words have been occasionally inserted, others of
grammatical
rule.
to
get
room
BRILL,
re-issue.
The Author has found no inducement
removed in order
E. J.
of His
for
a
new
instance
more
fit
less
to
importance
elucidate the
There are also some notices added, as on page 157 concerning
the Introduction of the Western Calendar, and page 172 some words about the
new
Gold-currency.
PREFACE.
Some
other additions are to be found in the ADDENDA to the book.
of both editions of words treated L.
is
the same; the second, however,
on in the work,
SERRURIER and w. VISSERING,
for
is
accompanied by a REGISTER
which the Author
who have
used this
The paging
is
indebted to Mess*8
Grammar
as
-
a basis for
the study of the Japanese language.
The Author, being now engaged in printing the Japanese-Dutch and Japanese-English Dictionary mentioned in the Preface to the in J.
recommending C.
to
first
edition,
is
happy
the student the valuable Japanese-English Dictionary of
HEPBURN, Shang-hai 1872, and the Dictionnaire Japonais-Fran^ais
,
public
par LEON PAGES, Paris 1868. LEIDEN, 26 July 1876.
THE AUTHOR.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION
I-,.-.
Page 1.
Connection of the Japanese with the Chinese
The
language.
3.
language
1.
2.
4. Application
of the
Chinese
C.
6.
proper.
13.
.
82. 34.
Old Japanese
85.
New
38.
Japanese General conversational
Language spoken. language and dialects
89.
Epistolary style
42.
14.
On
42-
15.
Glance at the arrangement and connection of
6. 7.
Kdna-
the parts of speech
words in Japanese
44.
7.
signs
The Irova
in
Chinese characters and in
Kdta-kdtia signs of
ETYMOLOGY, NATURE AND FLECTION OP WORDS.
9.
syllables.
Stenographic 11.
Stops
Remarks on the Japanese system and the expression of
9.
29. 30.
6.
The Japanese phonetic system
signs.
Style, a.
4.
expressed by Chinese and Japanese
8.
29.
B. Books written in the Japanese language.
writing, to the
The Fira-gdna
Repetition
22.
or book language
,
Chinese text with Japanese translation. 3.
A. Systematic arrangement of the 47 sounds ,
7.
Written
of the written and the spoken
The Japanese writing a. The Kdta-kdna
B.
22.
Chinese dialects in Japan
writing of the Japanese language
6.
Synopsis of the Fira-ffdna-ch&mcters most
A. Exclusively Chinese
the writing of the Japanese
Introduction
b.
b.
in Fira-gdna
in use 12.
On
language of China into Japan
5.
The Irova
necessity of uniting to the
study of the Japanese, that of the Chinese
2.
a.
it
CHAPTER
IN-
I.
of sounds,
with our letters
Doubling of consonants by assimilation
10.
Accent and rhythm
11.
The Japanese running-hand Fira-gdiM.
Mil .
.
...
12. 18. 18.
$
AS
1.
The root
49.
2.
Radical or primitive word
49.
Radical in composition
49,
;j.
CONTENTS. l-
Page.
A. Coordination
50.
B. Subordination
50. 50.
e.
Genitive subordination
I.
Objective subordination.
II.
/
Dative of the thing
69.
g.
Terminative
70.
The
V.
radical form, as definition before
51. in
Kara.
particular
CHAPTER
By
Ko
and
Mi
and
8.
I.
Me, old-Japanese Ki
expressions for the
Particular
distinction II.
53.
of
A. Singular
53.
Da
Plural expressed by repetition of the 54.
which
a
signify
III.
b.
Immediate compounds of the other ad-
II. d.
55. 56.
expressed
c.
II.
e.
Sara, Nami, Tatti, Siu, Gata and
6.
J7, $
1.
wa;
Mina, Nokordzu, Koto-
noun by the
suffix r\,
II.
III.
IV.
III.
rt, ba
60.
63.
Ve
No,
Na
Terminative.
suffix,
64.
and Tsu 66.
The
67.
.
.
.
.
.
68.
85.
87.
89.
Mi, Midsukdra, Waga-mi ....
89.
borrowed from the Chi-
B. Expressions 1.
Sin,
2.
Zi-sin,
3.
Zi-bwi,
Zi-zen
93.
IV. Expressions of reciprocity: Tagaini, Ai. 95. V. Pronouns indefinite: Tito, Aru-fito, no.
Mo-
Dare mo and Nanimo followed by
a verb negative
95. 97.
VII. Interrogative pronouns derived from Ta or To, vulgo
Ni, as sign of the
Dative or Ablative.
.
VI. Relative pronoun Tokoro
suffix
(ye).
The a.
and
.
2.
62.
Genitives suffixes
Re
Kare, 4) Kore. 86.
89.
Accusative
Dative
3)
.
01.
2.
Are, Ore,
Onore, onodzukdra
4.
....
2)
1.
61.
Ga, no index of the subject
83.
Tare (Dare), Tore (Dore), Idzure. 88.
Nominative. Vocative
Genitive
suf-
No
Ware,
nese:
1.
words indicating place, by
Determinative and reflective pronouns. A.
va;
Declension I.
7)
59.
of the
Isolating
80.
5) Sore, 6)
unite the idea of multitude to the predicate verb,
Tsi,
Substantive pronouns , formed from ad-
1)
IV. Plural expressed by adverbs, which
gotoku
(ku),
.82.
verbs of place, by suffixing 56.
as suffixes
Ko
with
place
80.
Pronouns possessive, formed from ra-
fixing
Ra, Tomo (domo), Gara,
Nado, used
of
Da-ga, Wa-ga
dical
collective
by
79.
Wa ...
II.
II.
Chinese forms
as
To, So,
Immediate compounds with
55.
Japanese forms
plural
Wa, A, Ka, Ko,
(Do), Idzu
Tsira and Isutsi
2.
words
place
verbs
1.
The
77.
a.
quantity,
generality
74. relations to
II.
Plural expressed by nouns used adjectively
names of human
Pronouns proper , formed from the adverbs
Number
II.
74.
distinguish the person concerned 53.
noun
74. ,,I"
B. For the person spoken to 53.
of sex
nouns, which serve as pro-
Qualifying
A. For
52.
male to objects without sex
I.
II.
nouns
C. Application of the ideas of male and fe-
B.
71.
51.
Gender expressed by Ono and Meno. 52.
D. Chinese
.
prefixes
Me
and
70.
characterized by Yori or by
.
51.
Gender indicated by the
De
To, Nite,
VI. Ablative,
50.
names
$
69.
50.
A. Gender logically included
$ 5.
69.
Dative of the person
50.
50.
3.
69.
indirect
Gender
2.
Modal Casual and Instrumental
direct
adjectives
1.
c.
(1.
2.
Euphonic modification
B.
68,
1.
III.
$ 4.
.;.
Local
b.
1.
Da
Nani, what?
or
Do
97.
98.
CONTENTS. Page. 2.
Ikd, how?
Page.
101.
24. Definition of adjectives by adverbs ,
Interrogative pronouns with the suffix,
denote
mo
102. 25.
102.
The 1.
.
130.
...................
131.
Distinction between the attributive and predicate forms
.'
The adjective
105.
26.
The
.................. .......... relative superlative ..........
a.
27.
The
28. Expression of the
Adjectives
in
ki,
4. 5.
6.
The ancient Japanese
30.
The Chinese
31.
The ordinal numerals
32.
The
33.
34.
The doubling or multiplying numerals. The sort numbers
35.
The
distributive
$ 36.
The
fractional, or broken
106. ku, as adverbial form.
isolated
by the suffix va. 106.
Si , form of the adjective
as pre-
,
106.
As such, superseded by Kari
.
.
Sa, forming nouns abstract
107. 107.
List of adjectives in ki
<
37.
II.
Examples showing the use of the forms
iterative
Numeral I.
107.
The adjective according tothe ken language
Examples, showing the use of the forms.
112. .
.
numbers
112.
Derivative adjectives.
141.
142.
numerals
143.
11.
and garu
113.
$13. Derivative $ 14.
ndrti,
na and
.
.
116.
yaka
117.
H
keki or koki.
,
nki
119.
kd-nki
124.
17.
$
ka
16.
//
19.
.
.
148.
Chinese numeratives
149.
Enumeration of years
154.
Chronological notation of years
155.
1.
after the cycle
2.
after the years of
155.
21. Adjectives
.
beki
with the negative prefix
.
.
157.
Introduction of the Western Calendar in 157.
42. Enumeration of
.
.
159.
160. 162.
166.
127.
168.
127.
$47. Measures of capacity
168.
$
129.
$
48. Weights U)
Iron
,
copper and bronze coins.
50. Silver coins
$51. Gold
28. Definition of adjectives by adverbs, which in
158.
Measures, weights and coins. $45. Measures of length
,<
demote the presence of a quality
months
$43. Enumeration of the days
128.
22. Adjectives with a previous definition.
solar year
46. Superficial measures
Na,
or the Chinese Fit
degree
156.
governments
119.
12B.
naki
20.
146.
147.
44. Notation of hours
ni-siki
,>
.
.
114.
tarv.
15.
18.
.
substantives
$41- Division of the
adjectives in ,
144. 145.
numbers
Japan //
144.
114.
aril
12.
.
numbers
40. Enumeration of years by year-names. 10. Adjectives in karri
137.
.
Notation of time.
spo-
.
cardinal
cardinal numbers
Japanese numeratives
110.
cited II.
29.
105.
used as nouns
dicate b.
IV.
NUMERALS.
ki.
The termination
a.
135.
136.
.
Ki, termination of the adjective,
The same, 3.
of a quality
CHAPTER
concrete 2.
excess
134.
105.
used as attributive b.
132.
in the written lan-
A. Joined to a noun substantive
1.
higher
absolute superlative
guage.
B. Adjectives in
.
de-
equal
Attribution of a quality in a
ADJECTIVE. $
I.
a
quality in
degree
THE 9.
a
Attribution of a quality in
2.
III.
of
relative or real comparative.
gree
CHAPTER
presence
degree. Absolute comparative
higher
VIII. Arrangement of the personal pronouns in the conversational language
the
which
coins
The new Japanese currency
full 180.
169.
171. 171. 172. 172.
CONTENTS. Page.
CHAPTER
Page.
V.
Modifications introduced by the spoken
2.
.
,
203.
.
.
Examples of the use of the gerund. 52.
Adverbs proper
I.
173.
73.
173.
74.
Improper adverbs, or adverbial expres-
II.
sions
The verbal root tive form).
The
.
1.
Nouns
173.
tomo
Verbs in the gerund
173.
expressed by
Distribution of adverbs according to their
$
75.
.
.
205.
(subjunc-
205.
.
form expressed by mo or
concessive
2.
the Local
in
.
206.
domo or iddomo
208.
The form of the Future
208. .
$ 53.
signification
173.
Adverbs of quality
173.
Etymology of
174.
Examples of the use of the forms
176.
The
$ 54. $ 55.
//
$ 56.
,/
//
$ 57. $ 58.
//
//
degree circumstance place and space
177.
time
178.
manner
The simple Future
I.
of the
211.
written
212.
language
The periphrastic Future.
II.
181.
A. of the written language, formed by 1.
.
Alphabetical synopsis of the adverbs cited. 182.
2.
..naramu, narame, naran.
3.
.
.
aranan
4.
.
.
swran
213.
5.
.
.
mast
213.
connecting propositions
CHAPTER
VI.
With
77.
The continuative verbal form
78.
I.
.
.
.
.
II.
.
.
tari,
.
.
193.
Alphabetical synopsis of the words expres.
.
.
te ori,
..
218.
te iri
taru
.
Forms $
79.
.
.
tari,
$
80.
.
.
eri,
81.
.
.
ki,
82.
.
.
ken,
83.
.
.
tari-ki,
.
te-ki ,
192. .
.
.
219.
186.
192.
a previous accusative
195.
.
84.
CHAPTER
215. iri,
(art,
217.
te ari,
used as words ex-
sive of relation treated.
214.
form
suppositive
ori, uri)
as expressive of relation.
B. With a previous local, or dative
213. 213.
re-
pressive of relation
A.
arinan
The
185.
in the gerund,
.
185.
words expressive of
lation
Nouns, used
=
212. .
ken language
Retrospect of the inflexions
63. Verbs
aran, arame , ran
76.
(POSTPOSITIONS.)
61. Distinction of the
.
B. The periphrastic Future of the spo-
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
62.
Future
certain
209. cited.
182.
59.
$ 60.
208.
form
this
.
[..], .
VII.
.
.
.
esi, si,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
kesi,
.
.
.
te-si
.
.
.
222.
ereba
.
224.
keru,
tari-st,
.
.
eru,
ken
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
keran
227.
tan-ken.,
228.
ten
..nan; \_..nun\,
..nu,
nureba ,
220.
taru, ..ta
.
.
.
of the past tense.
..nuru,
nuran
229.
85. ..tsu, ..tsutsii; ..tsur)i, u, eba, fut. an. 231. 86. Synopsis of the inflected forms $ 64.
65. $
Voices of the verb
197.
Moods
197.
66. Tenses 67. Person
The
The verbal root
198. 199.
I.
70.
Closing-form of the verb
200.
II.
71.
The
201.
III.
$ 72.
substantive and attributive form.
.
.
Gexund. 1.
Origin of the form
234.
238.
passive form.
198.
The imperative mood
68. $ 69.
.
88. Causative verbs in sime
198.
and number
233.
87. Causative or Factive verbs in si or se.
89.
90.
202.
Its derivation
On
and
i.
,,
240.
signification
Passive verbs of the
first class.
.
.
.
240.
second
.
.
.
241.
third
...
the government of the passive verb.
.
242. 245.
Examples of the use of the passive forms. 245.
CONTENTS. Page.
The negative form 91.
I.
of the
form
92. Continuative
93. 94. 95.
Form
.
of the negative verb.
of the forbidding Imperative.
Forms
.
.
.
.
249.
.
250.
.
251.
of the negative preterit
Forms
$ 96.
307. verbs.
Verbs compounded with substantives. 309.
I.
Verbs compounded with verbs
II.
....
264.
Distinctive verbs and verbal forms
265.
expressive of courtesy.
100.
Conjugation of nondeflecting verbs in
I.
III.
Ni, Nite, Nan, to
be.
.
i.
.
i.
.
.
.
.
Nar)i, u, to be
Nar)e, u, eru, uru, to become.
.
.
IV. Nas)i, u, to cause to be 101. Mas)i, u,
311.
112.
The honorary
312.
270.
113.
271.
si
Si, acting as verb
of si
On
II.
si
Beku, may, can,
shall.
.
.
Derivation and signification
115. Being. Famberi,
Inflectional forms of
Ben
IV.
1.
Tokus}i, u, uru, to be able.
2.
Atavdz)i, u, not to be able.
the government of Besi
279. 280.
$
117. Seeing, Showing.
5
118. Saying. Ivi,
desiderative
285.
$
kdri,
294.
.
.
295.
should be
...
Agari,
Ma323.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
296.
121. Classification of the Jap. conjunctions.
.
326.
formed by Maki
297.
II.
Tami
298.
Simavi
$
122.
I.
$
123.
II.
The adverbial form of a verb
299.
108.
The
300.
j
125.
to exist.
.
.301.
327.
Disjunctive conjunctions
329. .'Wl.
j
126.
j
127.
334.
IV. Conclusive conjunctions
335.
V. Explanatory conjunctions B.
form meri
Copulative conjunctions
124. III. Adversative conjunctions
298.
107.
Coordinative conjunctions.
A.
of an
off
I.
Naku, not
Ide,
Mairare,
Tsika-dzuki
CHAPTER
297.
109. Nari, Naki,
Coming.
Mairasare,
321.
Mairi,
formed by Ta,
verbs,
action
derivative
Tan
293.
296.
//
and
Mairase,
291.
295.
Verbs expressing the leaving
III.
319.
120. Going
Tordsime, Tordse,
319.
Oose,
282.
.
desirous $ 106.
li-masi, Nori-tamai,
etc.
Kikase, Moosi
$
The
318.
Mi, Mise, Hoi-ken
119. Giving. Age, Sasdge, Kudasare, Tsuke,
.
V. Ahete, Aete, daring
105.
317.
292.
On
it
Moosi
116. Doing. Si, Ita&i, Asobasi
291.
III.
VI. Too-sen tar)i, u,
316.
$
281.
to do
I.
315.
114. Mdtsuri, to attend
the government of S)i, u, uru,
104. Besi, Beki,
314.
Tamavari, Uke-tamavari
II.
279.
Use of the root-form
Compounds with
A Tamai
Distinctive verbs expressing.
Synopsis of the conjugational forms
III.
Tamavi,
I.
passive form
276.
103. S)i, u, itru, to do
II.
111. General observation
269.
274.
102. Samurairi, Sorai, Soro
I.
309.
265.
273.
to abide; 2. to be
1.
305.
forms and
inflectional
263.
II.
$
.
Nakii-nari.
4.
of the
.
260.
Synopsis of nondeflecting verbs in
$
Nakeri,
.
Nakari,
98. I, Ite, Iru, to be in 99.
$
3.
2.
Nakii-se,
303.
304.
Or)i, u, to dwell
97.
$
110.
becoming
to be
Ar)i, w,
NakU-si,
Remarks on the compound
to be.
causing
.
derivatives of Na)si, In, leu
Examples of the use of the negative forms. 254.
and the
1.
Synopsis
253.
Verbs expressing the being, the
302.
Naku
V. Verbs compounded with
252.
of the negative future
not
IV. Naku. the adverbial form
248.
Inflection of the negative verbs.
301. is
Naki, &Nai, the adjective form.
III.
formation of nega-
Na
Nasi, b.Nai, there
II.
247.
Jive verbs II.
The root
I.
Theory of the Derivation
Examples
Pag*.
of the Japanese verb.
Subordinativc conjunctions. I.
Conjunctions of place and time.
.
.
336.
CONTENTS. Page.
128.
$
129. III. Conj unctions of causality.
II.
Page.
ADDENDA.
Conjunctions of quality and manner. 338.
$
I.
of an actual cause. 339.
a.
Conjunctions
b.
Conjunctions of a possible cause
II.
On
arbitrary grammatical signs in Japanese
books
349.
On
quotation
350.
341.
III.
On
Accent
343.
IV.
On
the dialects of
344.
V.
346.
VI.
Alphabetical synopsis of the conjunctions treated. 348.
VII.
(Conditional conjunctions)
130. 131. 132.
IV. Congunctions of the purpose
....
V. Conjunctions of concession
The
relative comparative of propositions.
Remark on
351.
Han, U, and Tdng.
Si
Remark on Zari to kayo,
.
351. 352. 352.
353.
VIII. Masi in the epistolary style superseded tyMoosi 353.
INTRO 33 TJOTIOIST.
1.
LANGUAGE. CONNECTION OF THE JAPANESE WITH THE CHINESE SITY OF UNITING TO
-
-
THE NECES-
THE STUDY OF THE JAPANESE, THAT OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE.
In
its
general character,
it is
true, the Japanese
and Mandju languages, but with regard to
its
is
cognate to the Mongolian
development,
it is
quite original,
admixture of Chinese words, has remained so notwithstanding the later and subjects them to its own consince it rules these as a foreign element,
and
it
struction.
In the Japanese language, as
it
is
now spoken and
written,
two elements,
so doing, form a mixed the Japanese and Chinese alternate continually and, by has followed the same course as, for instance, language which, in its formation, Romance element, which forms a the English in which, the more lately adopted
woof only, in
is
manner,
like
is
the Anglo-Saxon. governed grammatically by
of the two elements, of the Japanese language the distinction (in the study the Chinese element is rooted in the Chiof the importance; and as greatest
thence is to be explained, the nese language, both spoken and written, and of the Chinese language, as shall student of Japanese ought to know so much enable
him
to read
The Japanese
and unterstand a Chinese
learns Chinese
by means of
text.
his
mother tongue, thus one, who
2
INTRODUCTION.
is
not a Japanese and does not understand Japanese, but wishes to learn
must make himself master of Chinese by another way; obliged to
make
it,
to do this, he will be
use of the resources which already exist in European languages.
Whoever supposes
that he can learn the Japanese language without, at the
same time, studying the Chinese theoretically or practically.
Even
will totally fail of attaining his object either let
him be
so far master of the language spo-
ken, as to be able to converse fluently with the natives, the simplest communication from
a Japanese functionary, the price-list of the tea-dealer, the tickets
with which the haberdasher or mercer labels his parcels will remain unintelligible to
him; because they contain Chinese,
Thus
of Chinese.
grammar,
is
,
if,
indeed; they are not wholly composed
whoever wishes to learn Japanese thoroughly by means of ,
this
supposed to possess, in some degree, knowledge of the Chinese
written language.
2.
ON THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE.
The Japanese write Chinese but have,
at the
same time,
their
own
native
writing derived from the Chinese and which they, in imitation of the Chinese, write in perpendicular columns which follow one another, from the right to the
left.
Our alphabet,
for that purpose
I
would have
hand
to be written thus:
INTRODUCTION.
coupled with ours have, in conformity with
is
writing
3
writing perpendicularly, and from
left to
it,
adopted the plan of
right, I likewise
have relinquished the
manner formerly adopted, and now have, together with the Chinese, reduced the Japanese writing to the rule of ours, and applied to
it
the modification in the
order of the signs already generally in use for the Chinese writing.
The Japanese running-hand, on the contrary,
is
too
columnar system to be susceptible of any modification in
much its
confined to the
direction.
INTRODUCTION OP THE WRITTEN AND SPOKEN LANGUAGE OF CHINA
3.
INTO JAPAN.
The
knowledge of Chinese-writing was carried to Japan by a prince of Corea in the year 284 of our era, and after the tutor then, first
immediately
that prince,
a Chinese,
named Wang
tin
(3Er),
to
,_
having been invited, the
Japanese courtiers applied themselves to the study of the Chinese language and literature.
According to the Japanese historians,
of the Chinese language in Japan
Wang
zin
was the
first
teacher
').
In the sixth century, the study of the Chinese language and system of writing
first
became generaUy spread, by the introduction of the doctrine of BUDDHA.
Then every Japanese,
in polished society, besides being instructed in his mother
tongue, received instruction in Chinese also, consequently read Chinese books of morality, and aimed at being able to read and to write a letter in Chinese.
The
original pronunciation of the Chinese,
that to such a degree, that
new
dialects of it
it
is
true, degenerated early
and
sprung up, which were no longer
intelligible to the Chinese of the continent; but notwithstanding that the Japa-
nese, on account of their knowledge of the Chinese writing, and their proficiency in the Chinese style remained able, by means of the Chinese writing to inter-
change ideas not only with Chinese, but with Chinese.
Japan.
)
the peoples of Asia that write
The Chinese written language has become the language of It,
still,
is
This historical
fact
science in
such and will yet long remain such, notwithstanding the in-
fluence which the civilization of the
1
all
is
Nach Japanischen Quellen von
West
will
more and more exert
there.
The
mentioned iu Japan's Beziigc mil der Koreischen Halbinsel und mit China. j.
HOFFMANN, Leyden, 1839, page
111.
INTRODUCTION.
4 Chinese written language
is
though
,
the palladium of Japanese nationality
,
and
,
the natural tie which will once unite the East against the West!
And, however
be the influence
slight
hitherto exerted
till
on the Japanese
language written as well as spoken, by the study of the Western languages and, to wit the Dutch, formerly the monopoly of the fraternity of interpreters
and a few
Chinese
or
knowledge
as a bridge, over
which the
spread over their country, by means of just as little will
Japanese translations,
the study of the
if
this
West was imported and
of the
skill
men, who used
literary
Western languages should be ever
be in future, even
it
so greatly extended, as
the consequence, of Japan's being at last opened to the trade of the world.
APPLICATION OF THE CHINESE WRITING, TO THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE
4.
LANGUAGE.
When,
the introduction of the Chinese written and spoken language
after
into their country, the Japanese adopted
not in the least cognate to the Chinese
is
words into
its
simplest
to write their native language,
it
which
instead of resolving the sound of the
,
elements, and expressing them by signs, like our let-
ters, they took the sound in
whole, and expressed it syllable for syllable
its
by Chinese characters. Every Chinese
monogram
posite
radical
it is
word,
(character)
known,
which has
its
expressed by a more or less com-
is
peculiar ideographic
and phonetic
To choose an
instance, such
value --its peculiar signification and pronunciation. is
^^
the Chinese word for a
pronounces
it
and
calls it
or, by the Chinese
Koye
nese character,
1)
for a thousand is
tsi.
considers the peculiar pronunciation of every Chinese character
the Japanese word ,
he
says tsien, the Japanese
the Chinese monosyllable, modified by the Japanese accent, as
e.
i.
and the Japanese word
sen,
The Japanese
thousand. The Chinese
also
The
blisher
called
by him
uses the Chinese terms
distinction
of the
therefore,
is
on the other hand
between
Siemens de la
important
Koye en
its
,
-^jj~
i.
e.
the READING or MEANING for which
Kun and
agrees
with
G'ammaire Japonaise par
to maintain the contents of this
SOUND,
Yin, which he pronounces won;
which expresses the MEANING of the Chi-
Yomi,
q/jjf
Tomi
name
its
,
this,
le p.
h
Toktt
'jjM
as
it
is
EODKIGUEZ
1
).
The
+*
:=
,
above
made by the compiler and puin $
1
of that work, and
it
is,
paragraph as quite correct against the misconception,
5
INTRODUCTION.
quoted,
may
thus stand as an ideographic character, pronounced by the Japanese
as sen or translated
the
or
tsi,
it
or the syllable
sen
syllable
by
is
only used as a phonetic sign and expresses That, by such a confusion of Koyd en
tsi.
Yomi, the whole writing-system of
on an unfirm
this people rests
basis is evi-
dent at a glance.
Departing from the principle, to write Japanese with the Chinese writing,
and to express the Japanese words characters,
syllable
by
syllable,
by means of Chinese
some hundreds of the Chinese characters most in use were pitched
upon and used
phonetic signs, Kdna.
for
[The Japanese word Kdna, pronounced as Kdnna, has arisen from e
kar na by assimilation of the r, and means
name,
(pC
taken upon trust,
or
kai*- or
borrowed
thus a phonetic sign without farther meaning, in distinction fron
name. The word Kdna
^=t)i a real
characters
'jUt
^1~~yT^^
^j
kia
,
tmng
is
generally expressed by the Chinese
borrowed name;
,
^ Kdna-monzi,
Ma-na
the
Kdna sign
and the Kdna writing
j^
^^
^*
is called
,
Kdna-gdki.]
These phonetic signs, just as the Chinese writing generally, were at written in full, either in the
whenever a Chinese character, composed of several strokes,
is
produced of
is
written in one continuous pencil-stroke
a
full
itself,
Running hand forms
draught.
The standard-form, written
J^^;2> Sei-zi,
the real,
mal writing, and nese Chronicle
running hand, which
or in a
standard-form,
first
2J
and gives rather a sketch of
^
for
in full,
are
e.
commonly
^
Kt?
g.
called
also
proper character,
^T^'-flf
fjj
,
^
*
*TP
it
,
than
COD \Q)
Ty
"^.^^^ Sin-si or ^ Kai-sio nor,
^jj>
Gyoo-sw, text-hand, was used in the Japa-
f^ US
Yamdto-bumi or Nippon-sw
the oldest history of Japan, from 661 B. C.
till
ki
containing
'),
696 A. C. and published in 720
A. C. as manuscript in thirty parts.
The running-hand form was used
on the ground of which,
KODRIGUEZ and
against
the
Rung 1)
treatise
AI.COCK, pp
his publisher.
Poems
9 and 10 of his Elements of Japanese Grammar, takes the
Yomi, nevertheless, means the same,
as the Chinese
word
gfjl
field
^ Kun,
of ALCOCK.
The work :
R.
in the old Japanese Bundle of
Japan's
is
written
Beziige
Nippon-Archief. 1839.
in
mil
Chinese, and was one der
Koreuchen Hatbinsel
of the principal sources, in the elaboration of
und
mil
Schina
;
published
in
my
VON SIEBOLD'S
INTRODUCTION.
6
ISV ^ :| ^X
3
/ 4t|
^ " Man-yov-siu or the Collection of the Ten Thousand Leaves,
compiled about the middle of the eighth century.
The
first
the other
Kdna-iorm was, consequently,
Man-yov-Kdna
( !j||
5.
An
^ ^ 'jjjj.
called
Yamdto-kdna
l
)
(^ Jfa ^ ^
),
).
s
JAPANESE WRITING PROPER.
abbreviation of the two forms of Chinese writing led to the formation of
another
in
opposition to the
Chinese character writing, was
writing of the Japanese Empire,
the
as
styled,
which,
writing
^ ^C~^>
IH
jj 2JS
Nippon goka no mon-zi.
The Kdta-kdna.
a.
standard writing gave
Abbreviation of the Chinese gdki. It
was, originally, intended
racters, to express in
when
placed side
by side with the
remarkably smaller writing either their sound
meaning (yomi) and was therefore denominated Kdta-kdna-mon-zi ,
^^^!^),
i.
e.
side-letter
ventor of this writing
is
2
The Fira-gdna
The more or
hand
(I^J^^
letter-writing,
unknown
It
is
and the invention of
,
1) to
is
who
caUed Fira-gdna-gdki (2f>
according
another
to
since they take
official
as the
Tamdto, contracted from Tama ato,
2)
,
3 ),
*
the in,
died in 757.
$% ^g
^j*
documents, as well as are written
)
or the
even
(
Jjf jjji
^
behind the mountains, is
at the
It has the
properly jthe
same time applied ,
p.
letters
name
3) The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-dzu-e. Vol. 16, p. 35 v.
and Hira-kana.
and by
advantage
of the Province,
to the Japanese
Empire. See
4 verso.
of some Japanese writers seems less correct , as by Kdta-kdna were meant
4) People say and write too lira-kana
),
and printed, and thus
proper.
under Tamdto, and the Japanese Encyclopedia, Vol. 73
The notion
*
has been incorrectly
it
reading, Firo-gdna
popular writing,
which the Mikado's court was removed in 710,
Fak-buts-zen
^ ^
up the whole breadth of the writing-column.
number of Japanese books
must be distinguished
-A
form of the Chinese running-hand or short
the running hand in which
the greatest
far
fr *
).
Sdo-zi)
broad letters,
i. e.
(koye), or their
4
less abbreviated
or,
(
Chinese cha-
According to the Japanese sources
).
attributed to the Japanese statesman, KIBI DAIZIN,
b.
Kdta-kdna
rise to the
half-letters.
INTRODUCTION.
over other forms
of writing,
7
that the letters of a
word can be joined
to
one
another.
6.
ON THE JAPANESE PHONETIC. SYSTEM.
The number of sounds or
Japanese was
syllables in
that in imitation of the Brahmanical- writing
12 vowels and 35 consonants
').
The
(
went
tutions of
fixing of the Japanese phonetic system
(^ $% ~fc
BUDDHA and who
during a stay of three years
,
5
i
n
h* 8 31st
acquired there
,
,
insti-
among
of the Brahmanical writing (Sanscrit) and the phonetic
that
was understood by the Chinese Priesthood
it
wn
fflj)
is attri-
China in 804 A. C. to study more closely the doctrine and
to
other knowledge,
system, as
47 and
fixed at
_3^ Bon-zi} , which distinguishes
^^
buted to the Buddhist Priest KOO-BOO DAI-SI year,
first,
2 ).
A. SYSTEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OP THE 47 SOUNDS, EXPRESSED BY CHINESE
AND JAPANESE K ANA-SIGNS.
The Japanese phonetic system with
Chinese and Japanese Kdna-signs
its
systematically arranged according to the organs of speech ,
are produced,
1.
is
Palatal soundsS).
as follows:
|fcf
f
JfflJ
#
(
jjL^"}"'^
,
a
,
ka.
g|
^ ^/
.
ffi -f
}H
?;
'
|=f
i.
^p
,ki.
^$
,
f)
,
by which the sounds
\sir
u.
ft
2
,
^ 3~
6 (ye).
2.
3. Lingual sounds 4)
.
^
-ty-
,
sa
-J-
,
na.
.
:
,
si.
^fj
^
^J
X
fj-
,
su.
^
,
nu.
1)
^
~
The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-dzu-e.
2) The way
in
,
ni.
,
-fc
ke.
_
B
3
,
se.
^
)/
,
ne.
TJr
J
,'ko.
,
SO.
(tsu).
(tsi). 5.
-
,ku.
, <>.
^
j
,
no.
Vol. 15, p. 85 v.
which the Chinese translators have copied, syllabically only, by means of Chinese
characters,
the Sanscrit words in the Buddhist writings imported from India,
the work:
Method* pour
dechiffrer
nois, inventee et demontree par
et
transcrire let
M. STANISLAS JULIEN.
noms
is
placed in a clear light by
sanserifs qvi se rencontrenl dans les livres chi-
Paris 1859.
INTRODUCTION.
6. Labial sounds I).
7-
8. Palatal
9.
sounds.
Lingual sounds.
,
fa (va).
(vi).
,
ma.
mi.
,
ya.
'
10. Labial sounds.
,
ra.
,
?
fl
,
-f
,
i.
)J
,
ri.
^
wa
,
,
fu
,
fe
,
me.
,
ye.
(vu). ,
I
3. yu.
]g
)ly,ru.
^l/,re.
^7 WU.
/X
wi
,
2
>
fo (vo).
(ve).
mu.
,
,
,
M
^
,
mo.
yo.
gt7.ro.
we
^
-
wo
-
(1).
We
give this
view from a Japanese source
Japanese Kdta-Mna sign placed next properly, the
a
-we
must, however, remark
Chinese signs of the sounds are not generally those, from which the
that the
,
2),
Kdta-Mna
it,
by way of abbreviation,
is
derived, for,
sign:
answers to the Chinese character
,
,o,
vulgo
,
,
tsi,
,
,
ne,
,
,
fa,
,
mi,
,
mu
,
me,
,
ru,
,
wi,
,
wo,
a
"fa
.
thousand,
Jap.
the cyclical sign for
tsi.
mo use, Jap. ne.
..
,
.
,
According to
three, Jap. mi.
.
woman,
i
Jap. me.
.
,
this
system,
some
well, Jap.
dictionaries,
ivi.
particularly
those of the un-
mixed old Japanese language have been arranged.
2)
system
Wa-kan SeU'yoo moe sau bukuro, is
given with Japanese Kdta-kdna.
p.
38,
r.,
where the pronunciation of the Sanscrit phonetic
D=J.>J.JJo/'/7/t
//i/,
-Japanese
J A-,-
j->
j j
Grammar
^r
Jbi >^rt
A
M
/'
//
'-
/
<
/S/Y //s/////s /r ///
/
.
^'
ss/s
/
9
INTRODUCTION.
This system of 47 sounds or syllables, however, and indeed with relation to the consonants,
is
It is
incomplete.
not
-sufficient to
express
the sounds of
all
Therefore, to supply the defect, recourse has been had to
the Japanese language.
a modification of some Kdta-kdna signs, and for that purpose points, or a small ring, have been placed next them.
opposite the row of sounds
;t
~fl
?7
Thus
A-
is
placed
~^ the modification
"if
^V
}j*
L*
~^f
ga,
gi,
gu,
ge,
go.
zi,
zu,
ze,
zo.
ka, ki,
ku, ke, ko
sa,
su,
se,
so
za,
tsu,
to,
to
da, dzi, dzu, de, do.
si,
ta,
tsi,
fa,
fl,
The sounds, thus modified,
fu,
fe,
ba,
bi,
bu, be, bo.
pa,
pi,
pu, pe, po.
fo.
are called Nigordru koyd (y||j
i-
"^)
confused
e-
or impure sounds, the points used to indicate the modification Nigori, and the small ring Mdru.
In the Yamdto- and Man-yov-kdna the modified sounds are expressed by proper Chinese characters chosen for that purpose. syllable ka is expressed
fe-
RT
fr-
fir-
by one or another of the characters
ffi-
to express the syllable ga
may
While, to give an instance, the
,
^r-
m-
JfjfJ
* *
m-
one of the characters
.
,
^ ^ .
.
|l^
^ ^ ^ l-
BB.
.
.
^
-t-. .
.
$jjj
.
^
be chosen.
B. THE
To
IROVA
facilitate
IN CHINESE CHARACTERS
AND IN KATA-KANA
the learning of the Japanese
SIGNS.
sounds or syllables,
they have
been so arranged as to compose a couple of sentences, and as these begin with the word Irovd, that position of the Irovd
name has been given is
to the Japanese alphabet.
attributed to the Bonze, KOO-BOO DAISI,
already mentioned, the writing-form he used for
hand or Fira-gdna.
it
was,
it is
The com-
(who died in 834) asserted, running-
10
INTRODUCTION. THE IHOVA.
THE IROVA WITH CHINESE
TRANSLATION.
TRANSLATION. Color and smell (love and
Iro va nivovet6 tsirinuruwd.
o
enjoyment) vanish!
Waga-y6 dare zo tsune naram.
In our world
who
(or what)
? ft
wil be enduring?
U-wi no 6ku-yama kevii koyete
the deep
Asaki yumemisi, evi
mo
%
If this day passes
,
sczu.
Then
away
/~\-=3# PS V* V^ y
into
mount of its existence, it
was a faint vision;
it
does not even cause giddiness leaves
(it
you
cold).
signs of the Irovd, which stand in the place of our alphabet,
The Kdta-kdna
and according to which the Japanese dictionaries are commonly arranged, are which are likewise used, and that by way of
derived from Chinese characters,
Capitals or large letters.
are:
They
wa.
g
,
7
^ ^
>.
,
)~\
,
fa (ha), va.
,
-^
,
ni.
,
/Jl
,
fo (ho)
,
vo.
,
^s
,
fe (he)
,
ve.
^>, 'j
n
wi,
Jfjn
,
JJS
,
^r
,
,
ta.
/jiL
,
,
re.
,
,
,
so.
,
^
7J
,
-^ ^1
,
^-
,
ti, tsi.
,
))
,
ri.
The
characters
panese word
tsi
2^
-y*
,
o.
tu, (tsu).
,
,ne.
,
,
na.
,
,
ra.
,
,
mu, m.
,
n.
marked * stand
(a thousand),
(woman), and mi
The sign
*
i.
* ,
??
"^
T
,
ku.
,.
me.
,
ya.
,
mi.
,
^r,ke.
y 17
X 7
,
fu.
,
,
ko.
,
,
ye.
,
,
si.
we,
e.
fl(hi), vi.
mo. se.
te.
for ideographic signs,
ne (mouse),
,
,
s
,
ma.
answering to the Ja-
wi (well), ye (bay), yu (bow), me
(three). ,
mu, which was
also
used in the old Japanese for the final
11
INTRODUDTION.
m
sound
has
(at present n)
more
in this quality,
,
2S n
lately acquired the sign
,
,
as a variation.
REPETITION OF SYLLABLES.
7.
The ;
repetition of a letter is expressed
thus, for instance,
^ stands
As stenographic signs,
for ^>
by
yay
<*>'>
STOPS.
A
of dis- or trisyllabic words by
,
Q
for
,
iro-iro,
some Japanese words that frequently occur, in
for
connection with the Kdta-Mna, the following are to be remarked:
Hi f r
k
i
to
J3^
y> ^:
~\j
Hs5f
fo&i,
,
*oH
i
-
sake.
5
time.
^
/ ^T
_y
^
time.
,
for y*
^(
^
,
tama.
Stops.
As
stops,
only the
The use of them
,
comma
however,
is
and the point
(^)
(
or
occur in Japanese.
.)
use
the beginning of a new period, and thus begin that with a point,
also at
while others with the same object place a somewhat larger ring, there.
Some
wholly to the option of the writer.
left
The comma
the repetition sign
"
Q
stands on the right of the letter (for instance
or a
^)
A
while
(
)
is
placed on the diameter of the column of letters (for in-
,
stance ^, kuku).
The
principle of separating the words from one another in writing
most part
quite lost sight of in writing with the Kdta-kdna
,
of a whole period are written at that for an unpractised person
the Japanese, successive
it
Kdna
is
him
to read, to enable
With
as it is
has to divide some
him
to read
and understand
separating
done by the author of
Note.
improvement of
it
is,
fifty
or a hundred
a view to perspicuity and not to require
it, it is
this
grammar.
their writing-system.
For the sign of quotation see Addenda
is
in the highest
the words should be applied to
separating word for word were adopted by the Japanese, step in the
of
be already acquainted with the period which
degree desirable that our method of the Japanese,
for the
not already pretty well acquainted" with
how he
signs into words. shall
is
,
and the Kdna signs
equal distances. The consequence
who
very doubtful
from the reader that he offered
,
,
is
p.
349.
it
If the
method of
would be a great
12
INTRODUCTION.
REMARKS ON THE JAPANESE SYSTEM OF SOUNDS, AND THE EXPRESSION OF
8.
WITH OUR LETTERS.
IT
To promote
we have adopted
characters,
As
LEPSIUS.
own
and
,
Universal or Standard alphabet, by ROBERT
the
alphabet enables people of various nations to reduce to their
this
graphic system
uniform
the words of a foreign language
,
every one ; and as
intelligible to
,
uniform and
,
at the
most
a.
a open as heard in the Dutch vader;
i.
i
pure as heard in the Dutch
i.
i
long;
1
i
short.
u.
u pure
,
Jap. ^7
$~
ii,
short, silent u.
e.
e close
tion
;
e as
e
she
Jap. -f
;
y
.
.
in
weh
;
Jap.
e.
e
open as heard in the Dutch berg
German Bar,
o close
as
Ton
Jap.
it is
o in lose ; -
frequently pronounced with a
,
meer
,
geven
Eng. a in face
;
,
no-
2
short.
elre;
,
wu.
e
;
,
Jap.
Eng. oo in good poor,
;
a word
5.
o.
English father, art;
Eng. he
,
heard in the Dutch bgzig
German
adopted.
;
Dutch goeA
At the beginning of
soft labial aspiration, as
,
t'eder
character the following signs borro-
.
as oe heard in the .
influential Missionary
,
wed from the Standard alphabet have been
Jap.
,
same time very simple system of writing.
Roman
In reducing the Japanese text to
manner systematic
language will be welcomed by every one
Societies, its application to the Japanese
prizes a sound
in a
,
has been adopted by the prin-
it
cipal philologists in all countries, as well as. by the
who
Roman
the unity necessary in the reduction of the Japanese to
;
Eng. a in hat
;
French
e
in mere ,
fett.
heard in the Dutch Jong, gehoor;
Eng. borne;
German
.
6.
o short.
a,
a sound between a and o, leaning rather to the a than the o, as heard in
the English water,
all
and oa in broad.
p.
When
the sound a inclines rather to the o than a,
an.
In the
dialect of Ye'do "j*
"$? (flu)
it is
expressed by
o.
changes to ao, because the a, for ease
in rapid pronunciation, inclining to the u changes to a, while the w, to ap-
proach more nearly the a, changes to
o.
INTRODUCTION.
In some dialects of Western Japan
7
and arau
to 60,
particularly that of Kiu-siu , au changes
,
7 by aroo (Q,
(7) is superseded
The etymology
13
~T
n).
considered, however the written form au or au
is
to be
preferred.
on.
Etymologically ou
in the dialect of Yddo sounds oo, being the hard
()
open o heard in the Dutch loopen, German mond, followed by the u ning towards the
and
as oo
is
soft o.
By some Japanese this diphthong is also pronounced as well. On the etymological principle we write ou, ,
written so,
in distinction from au, or au o
^
eu.
(2
k,
as in
ig
)
incli-
pronounced
') '
eo.
Dutch, German, and English. -
~J]
,
^,
-
^7,
= ^a
^7
,
&i
ku, ke, ko.
In Western Japan, particularly in Kiu-siu,
g.
pronounced as ga,
German
in the
gi,
In the dialects of Eastern Japan
,
~ff
^*,
,
impure ^r
^7*,
??,
on the other hand
of Yedo , the g has the sound of the ng in the
thus a really
^,
,
^
,
If are
gu, ge, go, thus g as the medial of k, just as the g
French ^a^on, English
~)f
German
go.
particularly in that
,
English singing
la,ng ,
sound, by no means the medial of k; and the series
If, are prononced nga,ngi, ngu nge, ngo according to
,
the Standard-alphabet, na, ni, nu, ne, no.
Eren might
the pronunciation of Ytdo deserve preference above that of
the other dialects,
still
we
we ought
think
to retain the g for the representa-
tion of the impure g, because this form of writing
adopted, and also because the n does not appear with writing.
wanga
it,
even in the Japanese
Therefore without wishing to dispute the freedom of others to write
for
speak so, saki,
as good as universally
is
^7
and Nangasaki
~)f
we adhere
for -j-
~Jf i}~
to our already adopted
4^
>
because people in Ytdo
written form waga and Naga-
and say wdnga and Ndngasdki.
Te Dutch guttural g (#aan #even) = y of ,
,
the Standard-alphabet
is
quite
foreign to the Japanese organs of speech. s
s.
1)
sharp, 1j"
LEON
Dictionnaire la
FAofes,
,
^ ^ ,
also
has
Japonais- Franfais
compaynie de Jesus.
kept
,
-fe
this
traduit
Public par
,
}/
,
=
distinction
aa, si, su, se, so.
in
view,
and expresses
Si and se, in the pro-
7
by
6
du didionnaire Japonau-Portuyais compote par
LEON PAGKS.
Premiere livraisou. 1802.
and
f
by 6.
lex missionaires
d*
14
INTRODUCTION.
German
nunciation of Yddo have the sound of the
and thus answer
she, shay,
forms
to the written
/ and
for
Etymology, nevertheless, requires
leaving she and shay, and sometimes also z,
soft s
si, se
the English
of the Standard-alphabet.
the written form
-fc
tse,
schi, sche,
si
and
se,
to the pronunciation.
impure, being heard, in the dialect of Yddo, as a combination of n
and z or
also of
d and
z.
?
*))"*,
,
^
if, ]y =
,
za, zi, zu, ze, zo (nza,
nzi, nzu, nze, nzo or dza, dzi, dzu, dze, dzo), consequently
y
^
oc-
Y4do
this
^7
curs as ardnzti or arddzu. s,
Dutch
German
s;,
consonant
English sh, French
sch,
by
Yedo
,
\
(siya,
as siya
siyo),
siyu,
siyu , siyo
,
first
appear, leaving z.
The Dutch V'^i ^n
t.
^(
,
^-
is
heard which inclines rather to sa, su,
y
^r
,
so.
Since
the etymological value of these combinations
lets
pronounce them sa,,su, s
English
,
in measure
,
so or sya, syu, syo.
the softer pronunciation of
For the sake of etymology, we write ziya, ziyu,
2a, zu, zo. ,
pronounced by some Japanese of
to give the preference to the written forms siya, siyu, siyo,
French j
zj ,
is
,
to the reader to
it
which,
o, so sa, su, so, is expressed
with a scarcely audible y whereas from the mouths
,
pronunciation
we think
sound with a, u,
this
of some others, a sound the
at
of the Standard-alphabet.
s
The combination of *L,
As pronounced
distinguished as a palatal variety of s which, as such, ought
is
to be represented
by ^i
ch.
y* =
,
ta, tsi, tsu, te, to. Properly, -*f~
mological; but these combinations of sound are,
,^?,ti and
at once,
s.
ziyo.
tu are ety-
foreign to the
Japanese organs of speech and are whenever they have to be adopted from ano,
ther language, expressed
by ^
tei
and
tou.
^-
(tsi),
commonly pronounced
tsi as in the English cheer.
d-
%
i
^T
i
"9^1
?*' Y
,
rfa,
dzi, dzu, de, do, according to the dialect of
Yddo nda, ndzi, ndzu, nde, ndo.
ts.
d by qi
(nt.)
The Dutch
tsj,
English ch in
according to the
Some
audible.
dz.
The Dutch
Ydo
chair.
The Coreans express the impure Japanese
%, J,
If,
etymologically tsiya, tsiyu, tsiyo,
pronunciation tsya, tsyu, tsyo, the y being scarcely
are heard to pronounce
dzj, English
it
tsa,
g in George, j in
t$u,
,/udge.
tso.
^,
*_,
^, etymologically
dziya, dziyu, dziyo, according to the Ye'do pronunciation dzya, dzyu, dzyo,
in the mouths of some also dza, dzu, dzo. n.
-f-
,
,
5
,
"?
,
J
,
na, ni, nu. ne, no.
INTRODUCTION.
;V
,
n
,
final letter ,
15
serves as well for the dental , as the nasal final sound
which approaches the French
end of a syllable and
faint n at the
is
,
expres-
sed by ng (n of the Standard-alphabet).
Formerly, instead of the
and pronounced
as a
nasal final sound final
Chinese words, on
sound n as in our
In composition, the sonants following z, d, b,
the JTana-sign 2^
/ 3J? ty
-j-
stands for the faint
the contrary, for the clear dental
k, s,
and
t
into the impure sounds
/
less like
ny,nz,nd,
sound nb, in pronunciation, changes to mb; Tanba (
mu was used,
sound n has a euphonic imfluence on the con-
final
which are pronounced more or
Tamba; Nanbok
,
,
man, dan."
and changes
it
,
mute m. In Japanese words 3/
in
,
3/
final letter
For the sake of unity in
),
The combined
nb.
% ;v )Y)
(
^
NamboTc; Kenbok ( %-
i$
is
pronounced
ty
spelling, although in the dialect of
pronounced as the French faint n
,
we
),
Kembok.
Yedo
retain for the final sound
3/
it is
the
,
written form n, since long current, and continue to write Nippon, leaving it
to the reader to
f(h), v.
(X
)^
\^
,
,
^7
S,
,
it
pronounce *]>
,/a, fi, fu, fe, fo or ha, hi, fu (not /*), he, ho.
sound /, which has been retained in some
Originally the aspirated labial dialects
,
in others
,
Nippong.
on the contrary superseded by the
soft h
,
which occurs in the Spanish also
,
in which the
/
;
a
phenomenon
of the Old-Spanish language
has, in later times, passed into the soft aspirated or scarcely audible
In the dialect of the old imperial city of Miyako vinces, the
/
is
retained, and so
where commonly fdna, fit6, Yddo, on the contrary, the hito, ftiru (fu
far as
,
we know,
and
its
dependent pro-
in Sanuki and Sendai,
furii, feri, fokd, are heard.
/
h.
In the
dialect of
has been quite driven out and there, hdna,
remains fu), Mri, h6kd are
said.
This distinction of the two sounds, according to fixed dialects, rests on
communications made to us orally by Japanese. That, in the language of Miyako, where Japanese as also in the dialect of Sanuki, the
been assured by a native of Yddo while another native of Yido
1)
OHO-GAVA KITAROO, mechanician,
2)
ENOMOTO KAMADZIROO, un
a )
/
who
spoken the purest,
occurs to the exclusion of A, I have
has passed some years in Sanuki
has mentioned to
me
resident in the Netherlands since
officer in
is
),
the province of Sendai
1863.
the Japanese Navy, also resident in the Netherlands since 1863.
16
INTRODUCTION.
and the North-eastern part of Japan exclusion of A,
In the middle
,
or at the end of a
word the ,
/
or h in the pronunciation
passes over to v or a pure labial (not labio-dental)
*7 (wa) supersedes )^ or
)^
(ra): ~J]
,
^ A
On
the contrary the syllables \^
,
y
a vowel precedes reject the aspirate, and as aw (aw),
*>
>jj"
^
The
y
as
*\ as
ae
T ^ as
->
aspirated labial }^
on the contrary
,
travellers,
]^
,
y?
,
in |^
}>
,
is
,
^\,
ty *7
ve, ifc
?l
^
"?
kiva, kucd,
ro,
,
written.
is
,
pronounced as
whenever
y
at,
as ?M > *?
/^d man sounds ,
^7
^
as
like a ftii or
fwi
In the Yedo
hi,
,
easy to be pronounced.
is
the h often occurs as a palatal aspirate
it is
not possible to express with our
,
which whenever ,
we have only
confirmed by our observation; and
(fit6
What
letters.
GOLOWNIN, MEYLAN and others have said about
mouths of some from Yedo the word ]^ y* even
and even in writing
pressed through the closed teeth, forms a sound quite strange to Euro-
pean ears, which
now
vu,
,
ll as
"f
i
4~ >^
,
,
o e*c -
whistled with the mouth, and
it is
a
^7
n',
?,
A are heard kava,
ty
i
kawa, kiwa, ktiwd, for which ^/ *7
also
to the
in use.
commonly
is
which the /,
as districts, in
this
former
sound
')
is
to add that in the
man) became
or hit6,
sto.
Since for the syllables )^
come into
,
\^
,
w/s v
^JT
,
two forms of writing have now
existence, in proportion as one or the other pronunciation
is fol-
lowed, one with /, the other with h, the question becomes important, which of the two forms of spelling deserves the preference. If Japanese
written
to be
the accent of Ye"do, then, naturally, the h must be
according to
adopted, just as, to let the dialect of Zeeland enjoy oofd
is
must be written
its
rights, Olland
and
Holland and hoofd, or, not to do injustice to the
for
Berlin dialect, Jabe, Jott and jut must be written for Gabe, Gott and gut. If,
1) ,,No is
,
Ji.
however the pronunciation most generally in vogue, with the exception
European," says GOLOWNIN, I have practised at
it
,,will
two years,
succeed in pronouncing the Japanese
but in vain.
word
As the Japanese pronounced
for ,,fire," it,
it
it
seemed to
be fi , hi, psi, fsi, being pronounced through the teeth; however we might wring and twist our tongues into
every bend, the Japanese
Riusisch-Kaiserlichen
1812 und 1813.
'Marine
still
stuck to
GOLOWNIN
Aus dem Russischen
,
in
their-.
der
iibersetzt
Begebenheiten des Capitains von der
,,not right.""
Gefangenschaft
von Dr. c.
J.
bei
den Japanem in den Jahren 1811,
SCHULTZ. 1818. Vol. II,
p. 30.
INTRODUCTION.
of Y6do
that of
,
We
adopted.
Miyako be preferred
do the
The Japanese
1.
and that
last,
17
then must the h be put aside and
,
for the following reasons:
philologers themselves have,
the consonant of their series of sounds )^
made
are
\^
,
at all times, characterized
^
,
>"\,
,
jfc as labial,
signs, fixed
to represent this series of sounds
upon
sounds which, after the Chinese pronunciation, begin with a
all
and
equivalent to the labials of the Sanscrit.
it
The Chinese Kdna
2.
/
an /, whereas the sharp aspirated h of the Chinese words, just the Sanscrit,
is
expressed by k, and
-f
~)j
kai
,
is
p
,
or
as the h of
written and spoken for
the Chinese hai.
In Japanese,
3.
Dutch and English,
in
as
the
sharp
/
between two
vowels passes over into the soft v or w, and beside the older written form
A ^
~J]
~)]
i
~}]
,
~}j
From
4.
"\i
2
i
~Jj
*J?
,
~Jj
17
i
kawa, kawe, kawo, has gradually come into vogue.
the beginning Europeans,
nese, generally wrote
/
their contemporary, FR. p.
which we must write kava, kave, kavo, that of
for
THUNBERG (1775),
CARON (1639); also more
In
Fauna, Firando, Fori.
intercourse with the Japa-
and not h; thus the Portuguese missionaries, and
TiTsiNGH
J.
who had
l
)
and
(1780),
h
this century the
lately, E.
others.
first
KAEMPFER (1691),
All wrote Farima,
appeared, because then
Europeans came more frequently in contact with interpreters and natives of Yddo.
If
now we
adopt the
7i,
then will
all
connection with what was forhistory and geography of
merly done for the knowledge of the language,
Japan be broken
off,
we
of Japanese words
b
impure
,
reans,
A%
whenever they write Japanese words in
If
^
,
3.
,
fluctuates
Soft
r.
1)
In
)t, tf
7i***>
,
7*1 "^i *K> P (I
i
The Dutch
y.
have a double spelling.
shall
from the sound arisen from the blending of n with
,
mp (nH).p-
a door opened for endless confusion, and for thousands
English y
j;
HI
,
3
j
//"
?
between wi,
//"
yi,
?
I
pi P M
in yard; //<'
ft',
guttural r, just as the
TITSINGH'S Bijzander heden
tf?> b
i
//"
'
p*i
bi ^
v,
which the Co-
their character, express
bu
>
by
be > bo -
p-
French
y.
The pronunciation of
^
is
not fixed
,
and
and L English r in part, art, r of the Standard-
whenever an h occurs
in
Japanese words,
it
has been placed there,
from a mistake of either the writer, or compositor.
2
18
INTRODUCTION.
alphabet.
^7
,
1)
\/
)|^/,
,
t?
,
,
m,
from the root of the tongue, which dental r cannot be uttered
This
is
mouth
the Japanese
1
kept almost motionless.
is
by a thorough-bred Japanese of
the case with our
also
The Japanese
rw, re, ro.
rz,
I;
sound too
this
is
r,
Our
trilling
Ye"do.
quite foreign
Instead of adopting a proper letter for the
).
comes
I,
to
the
Japanese, whenever they have had to reduce words of European languages
made
to Japanese writing, have
the foreign
equivalent
I
to the
and have
r,
used their r for both sounds; a mistake, by which they subjected themselves
and
to a perpetual mutation of the letters r
I
when writing
a foreign lan-
guage, and induced our philologers to suppose that the Japanese r was
an intermediate sound between
I
and r which,
now
as it
appears,
is
not
the case.
In combinations of sounds such as \/ "^
ren,
,
^7
})
,
riu,
^
\)
"$?
,
riyau (ryoo), the guttural r so nearly approaches the lingual d, that, with the utmost attention
This
is
to be
it
,
remains doubtful
whether the r or the d
,
is
meant.
remarked especially in words adopted from the Chinese, and
which in that language begin with
Z,
which becomes r in Japanese, such
as den for ren (Chinese lien), dyu for ryu (Chinese lung, dragon), dyoo-ri-nin
and doo-sok
for
ryoo-ri-nin and roo-sok (Chinese liao-li-nin,
cook,
la tsu,
wax-candle).
worthy of remark, that with the Chinese just the opposite takes
It is
place, that they can
The German pure
w.
9.
If the letter
^
labial w.
is
tsti,
lately expressed
1) This has
^7
,
^7
I
,
but the r not at
easily,
^
,
wa
,
icu
,
wo.
which
is t
k, s,
by
^-
mostly pronounced as the or p, then
it
ts
mute, occurs in a
passes over to the latter sound
.
hecome quite evident to me, from the instruction in the Dutch language which
panese have received under
my
superintendence. After having
first
pronounced the
I
sibly rail
also, has observed that
pronounce his name.
grove,
is
too
much
for
thorough-bred Japanese of Tedo, with
,,They cannot say
them."
J.
L"
he adds, ,,they
call it
R.
whom
I.
he met, could not pos-
The word
w. SPALDING, The Japanese expedition.
several Ja-
as the guttural r, they
cequired long practice before being able to utter a sound, that in any degree resembled
SPALDING
all.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS BY ASSIMILATION.
compound word before a and
pronounce the
glove, which they
Redfield,
1855.
p.
233.
INTRODUCTION.
y
im
"1 itsit-ka
written,
is
pronounced ikkd (one).
19
INTRODUCTION.
20
ON ACCENT AND RHYTHM.
10.
In Japanese distinction
made between accented and unaccented
is
syl-
lables.
To
unaccented belong
the
sounds are scarcely heard at
Thus,
e.
sita
^^
,
sime
Z/%
,
siki (like)
^?^
,
(let)
,
sounds as
^?3/%
tatsu (dragon)
5 A
,
yomu
(to read)
naru
(to be)
IT >v, *? ])
As
especially at the
i
,
tats
,
sounds as yom,
sounds as ndr,
make) sounds
tsukuri (to
as tskurt, etc.
the peculiarity, that as a final letter
has, moreover,
the words, and to be
ski,
sounds as
in Japanese the
i
and u mute have not ceased to be
necessary
to the
distinguishing
Even
to be expressed in all philological writings.
(mitsu,
three) sound as mits,
do
in
so
theirs,
racterize the
distinguish both
weak vowels,
the
g.
a
long
in
~'
^r
weak and mute by writing
as
whispered.
real elements of
of them, they ought
(rnitsi
,
y
way) and
the Japanese
mits u
,
mitsi
and
The
mitsii.
answers that purpose
also.
pronounced either long or short-close. Thus
is
?
L
is
words and write mitsi and mitsu, or cha-
form of writing adopted by some, mits and
The accented vowel
\i
it
our writing we must, because
in
1
e.
end of the words.
masi, masu, masita sounds as masi, mas, masta,
,
,
The
or u, in which these
sounds as smd,
^?
y
i
(beneath) sounds as sta,
,
I/
and that
all,
ending in
g.,
2/2
^
chiefly those
mdtsti
,
(pinetree)
,
short-close
fy
?
,
sake
is,
(strong
drink).
The consonant, following a ciation,
7 -$
,
though not in writing. Thus,
dsa (the morning) as dssa;
Since
,
^ >"
e.
g.
vowel
^^,
is
often
doubled in pronun-
fdna (flower) sounds as fauna;
sake (strong drink) as sdkke.
with regard to the correct indication of the quantity of the syllables
the Japanese graphic system
more
short-close
is
defective, it behoves us to keep it in view the
carefully, because the accentuation,
nunciation of Japanese, pronunciation.
is
,
an
provided
it
be based on the pro-
indispeiisible help in the acquiring of a correct
21
INTRODUCTION
r.
Hitherto the only European
words, and expressed
manner of writing
it
who
,
a
after
it
has paid attention to the accent of Japanese
fixed
might be gathered
,
that
are pronounced as tats ands mats, thus with as
ydmma, mindto and
ten books about
thereby have
it,
3y
,
,
,
^y
and
'Y*?, S-l'
who have
From
KAEMPFEE.
E.
dragon
an a long,
tatsbdnna. Later travellers
,
his
pine-tree
,
and ^f-'^-f
l
Japan and writ-
visited
have been either unable or unwilling to follow his example, and
left their
readers in uncertainty with regard to the arrival of natives of
Only recently, since the
panese.
was
principle,
rhythm of Ja-
Japan in Europe, have
our linguists had the opportunity to hear Japanese spoken by Japanese, and so to
become acquainted with the rhythm peculiar
we have
selves of this opportunity,
Availing our-
to that language.
already been able to publish the reading of a
1 Japanese text ) supplied with a continuous accentuation. See Addenda II
we
If
cast a hasty glance over
the Japanese phonetic
most
requirement of being able, with
satisfy the
as it is
glish,
let
spoken,
The Japanese
languages.
with regard to
said,
system, the writing, the pronunciation,
that the Japanese phonetic system
clearly,
itself,
what has previously been
all
its
appear
It does
not
being applied to foreign
their attempts to write
have been able to
after their ^Tana-system,
will
to write the Japanese language
alone the possibility of
with
,
it,
it
very defective.
is
p. 350.
effect
Dutch French or En,
nothing
else,
than -
caricatures of those languages.
From
defective
their
syllabic-writing are the Japanese behind not only the
Western nations, but other Asiatic peoples neighbours writing
who
rejoice in the
languages, the Chinese alone are worse
The sions
intricate, often equivocal
more
difficulty
for
those,
study of the language
and even the Coreans,
possession of an original,
not borrowed from the Chinese.
,
also,
With regard
and simple character-
to the writing of foreign
off.
writing with which Japanese
is
who have not grown up with
itself,
their
written , occait,
than the
witness the Japanese running-hand, whose
turn comes next.
l) Thf version.
Grand Study
Part. IT,
(To,
Hio or fiaigaku). Part. I, The Chinese
Reading of the Japanese text in Roman
c/utracter,
text with
by
J.
an interlinfary Japanfte
HOFFMANN.
Leiden, 1864.
INTRODUCTION.
22
11.
a.
The Irovd in Fira-gdna.
The Irovd
in Fira-gdna- writing
with Chinese signs,
THE JAPANESE EUNNING-HAND FIRA-GANA.
learned in schools and, in connection
it is
generally in use,
is
running-hand,
as
,
consists
of the following
which are derived by abbreviation from the Chinese characters placed
next them.
A ka
t
^
jt
M
fa(ha),va
',
J
,
yo
,fo(ho),vo
^L
Jf i,
re
ve
Ijf
A
so
fe (he),
,
6
p]
to
,
,
"^
,
tsu
ne V)
&.
^
ri
,
J\
',
na
31$
?J, wi
TJr
^), no
|J|
^
4^'
&
V9^'
^
{
ku
^
j^>,
-{j^
y^, ya
^^
/SL, mi
,
^ ^ g-j*
/
,
y,
^>
^j,
B
L,
ma ke fu
ko
^
^ ^
^*,
J;fc
^/\,
,
ki 3
me
si
e fl
(hi),
vi
^
the Fira-gdna- writing confined to the 47 or 48 signs cited,
with a slight exercise in writing with the pencil, be more
learn, than the Kdta-kdna.
But the
desire for fariety,
rendered this writing so abundantly rich, that to
gdna
,
Synopsis of the /Ym-^a'na-characters most in use.
Were not,
sa
,
;
texts
possible,
a
synopsis
of
these
signs
it
would
difficult
to
change and ornament, has
make learning
to read Fira-
has become an absolute ne-
cessity.
With owes
its
the synopsis, origin.
we
give at once the Chinese character to which each sign
23
INTRODUCTION.
SYNOPSIS OF THE JAPANESE
FIRA-GANA.
Bf
KI.
u.
B
<
it If
-
tf>
KO..B
c r T T
T
T
24
INTllODUCTION.
TA.
*
t si.
TSI.
su.
SO.
TO.
i-jfc
t
t X
^
k
k
T
INTRODUCTION.
25
?
/
A
r
as
NI
=t=
-
X
hi
1
1
KR
;?
Jt 17?
.
N0
-
*
^
7) 7>
ft
^T
INTRODUCTION.
26
71
MI.
ft
*H
19>
MA
Y0.3 >>
_ i7
V
V-
=<
I
INTRODUCTION.
27
r r v
>
x/>
>
*^
la
t KU
-
RE. w
wo
-
?
"V
INTRODUCTION.
28
The synopsis of Japanese running-hand
on the preceding
characters, given
in reading Japanese books and manuscripts, pages, collected by ourselves
serving of remark on
account of
its
As we
correctness.
1
few proof impressions, to a respected friend in Japan
was
MATS MOTO
so
our synopsis to a
strict
with the conviction that
gdna
on whose invitation
we were
and
revision, it
will
if
we have given
it
enabled to submit
a place here,
it
is
be a faithful guide in the deciphering of Fira-
texts.
To become for
),
kind as to undertake the revision and correction of
This impression being returned to us,
one of them.
being
we, some years ago, sent a
submitted to the criticism of a clever Japanese,
Mr.
its
appreciated
de-
is
basis,
familiar with this .writing, the Chinese character should be taken
and attempts made at learning
to write with a pencil the
more sketchy Fira-gdna forms derived from
it.
By
more and
following this practical way,
the student will most quickly become so conversant with this writing, as to be able to read without hesitation a text written in
it
provided the printing of
,
it
be not too bad.
In the Fira-gdna writing the
one another. The way some Japanese liarities
in the
texts
2),
in which this
in which
more or
letters are is
less
obviously
done will be best learned by copying
will at once be discovered
it
manner of attaching them
attached to
,
that some pecu-
are only the natural results of a quick
handling of the pencil.
The
stops (*),
I
ya,
sounds
impure
pure to
gu, "^
and the sign
dzi,
is
^?
,
by which in the Kdta-kdna the change from
indicated, are used in the Fira-gdna also,
dzu, J^l
ba,
^
bu,
e.
g.
^T
etc.
The point, which in the Kdta-Mna, placed under a
letter
shows that
it
is
repeated, in the Fira-gdna runs together with the letter into one stroke. Opposed 2k ^* to laid and tada, are the Fira-gdna forms
The
1)
w.
repetition of
j.
c.
two or three
syllables is
HTJYSSEN VAN KATTENfiYKE, Knight,
shown by
Commander
of
/
the
.
Naval-detachment
in
Japan in
1857, 1858 und 1859. 2) the
The Japanese Treaties, concluded at
United States and France.
Tedo in 1855 with the Netherlands, Russia, Great-Britain,
Fac-simile of the Japanese text.
The Hague, MARTINUS NIJHOFF. 1862.
INTRODUCTION.
29
As stenographic abbreviations come under for
3
notice
koto (sake).
l|
f)
12. WRITTEN OB,
,
/y
*
for
|||
yori.
BOOK LANGUAGE.
Books among the Japanese are written either in the Chinese, or in the Ja-
panese
language.
Chinese
A. Exclusively
who make
men
use of the Chinese written language, just as formerly our learned
did of Latin.
nicle of
are scientific works, intended for literate persons,
To
this class of
books belong
,
among
others
,
the oldest Chro-
Japan (Yamdto-bumi or Nippon-ki), in which the pure Japanese words,
such as the names of persons and places, are expressed phonetically with Chinese characters, the Japanese Encyclopedia
Wa-Kan
nen-kei, the Japanese
Wa-Kan
san-sai dzu-e, the Chronicle
Government- Almanac,
etc.,
while furnishing the
books, which are written for the general public and in Japanese, with at least a Preface in Chinese,
of
tions chiefly
Buddhist
considered to be in good taste.
Chinese texts must also be reckoned the Chinese transla-
the pure
Among
still
is
works,
originally
written
hummed by
imported from China, are
in
which translations,
Sanscrit,
Japanese Bonzes in a peculiar Chi-
nese dialect.
That a Chinese text can be read aloud with a Chinese pronunciation
by
literate
Japanese
is
become acquainted with dialects;
but
nunciation
that
of the
to its is
its
whole
pronunciation sentences,
characters,
doubted and now, upon Chinese text with
its
contents and,
Mr. TSUDA SIN-ITSI-ROO.
when
also,
and
this according to certain
read aloud, according to
are intelligible to
listeners,
we have
the authority of a learned Japanese
ideographic
signs
is
),
the
pro-
constantly
dare deny.
The
there, to be apprehended according
for the Japanese, the translation into his
included in this apprehension.
1)
(koyd)
a matter of course, for, with the Chinese character, they
The apprehension and
mother tongue
translation of a Chinese
INTRODUCTION.
30 text
is
therefore very justly called its
Wa-kun (^fl
or
reading (Yomi)
j||l| ),
reading in Japanese. Respecting the Chinese dialects, which have been here mentioned,
the
the
following ought to be added.
In Japan the pronunciation of three been
have
^
U
and
1
e.
Tang
Jjtj
won (g!* i.
which are
adopted,
^f),
dialect of
Han,
U
The dynasty of Han
the
after
called
Chinese written language
Chinese dynasties
)^|
Han,
Japanese pronunciation Kan, Go and Too), Kan-
(in the
Go-won
dialects of the
(^^D
and Too-in
(0*^)
or Kara-koto,
and T'dng. ,
which had
its
seat in the country of
on the borders of the Hoang-lio, nourished from 202 B. C. dynasty of U, settled on the Yang-tse-kiang tuated, existed from 222
,
till
220 A. C. The
where at present Nan-king
is
si-
The dominion of the dynasty of Tang
280 A. C.
till
,
Ho-nan-fu thus
embraced the period between 618 and 906. If with
the Japanese
it
be accepted, that the said dialects were not local
next one another, but changes which the Chinese language has
dialects existing
undergone in the lapse of ages, then the introduction and continued existence of those dialects in Japan would not be without importance in the knowledge of the old Chinese language. is
it
writing,
lects too, that
to
On
with the defective Japanese Kdna-
since,
impossible to represent any Chinese dialect faithfully, those dia-
have wandered to Japan lose
confine ourselves to
use
But
the question of their
all historical
introduction
the
first
point the Japanese works at our
As the
first
teacher of the
scholar from the country of
Han
do not find recorded. Such also is
attributed
country of U. also
first
ciation
to
* flj||
As both had
called
and the
is
Kan-won,
^^ ^
^ (
suffi-
Piao Sin-kung, a
mentioned, with the addition, that he came
which
this
happened we
the case with the introduction of the Go-won,
is
Kin
,
settled
Tsusima-won
shed
Li-sin
and another Bonze from the
on the island of Tsusima, the Go-won was
2^
~? jjfjj
^ -&
^) or the
may
be assumed as certain, that the
Tsimmanian pronun-
a ).
With regard
1)
into Japan,
command do not
to Fakdta in the country of Tsikuzen; but the time at
at
and we therefore
which they have been applied.
cient light.
which
value,
to
the
second point,
The Japanese Encyclopedia XV, 33
verso.
it
Fak-buis-zen under
Kan-won and Go-won.
INTRODUCTION.
Go-won was the
31
which the Bonzes read the Buddhist writings, im-
dialect, in
ported from China, and that
it
still,
with a few exceptions,
is
in vogue
among
them, whereas the Kan-won, the use of which was, in virtue of an edict pu-
by the Mikado
blished
Chinese language
whole profane
1
as
792, made obligatory in the study of the
as
early
prevailed in the
),
domain of
See Addenda
literature.
science,
and penetrated into the
III.
In the Chinese- Japanese dictionaries the pronunciation of each word given in both dialects and that, instances
won
,
^
I 1 v
and
^
The
T or
^
and
-^ ^
first
I$J
* or ^
t$J *,
? and $ are
T'dng (Too-in), as
it
has been fixed by means of the Kana-
We
it
(
language (Kwan-hoa),
just as unintelligible as they, to a Chinese.
|_L|
Kan-won
is
&
by the monastic order of the
Go-san) at Miyako.
on the three
cimen by which the difference Too-in.
also said to be used
is
3fl
close this digression
Wa-Tcun.
is
official
found mostly in works about China, used in the description of
or convents"
hills
but
dialects,
the names of places, and
Five
dialects
shown in
Go-won.
with a quotation of the spe-
te Japanese Encyclopedia.
Wa-kun.
Too-in.
O
Kan-won.
ani otitono gotoku, mala, ivdlcu , fibiki no Japanese translation: Tatove va Flats no koeva i.
e.
The two
Go-won.
^
f
ffotosi,
Kan-
as Go-won.
than the two other is
placed as
*
i *
dialect of
dialect
found,
Kan-won, and then in Go-won. In the
in
writing approaches more nearly the ordinary Chinese
This
is
dialects, to use
an example , are like brothers. It
is
also said:
zivakomago no
The assonances or
are like sons and grandsons.
I)
Wa-nen
kei oder
GeschicMstabeUen von Japan, aus dent Originate
iibersetst
von
i.
HOFFMANN.
finals
INTRODUCTION.
32
Chinese text with Japanese translation. In Chinese there are books written, which contain a
complete Japanese
at the side of the text.
translation
There are also some, in which the Japanese translation
is
incomplete, and
of words are explained. In this case are only here and there words or fragments
found either only the principal ideas translated, or merely the terminational inflections
It
given.
is
supposed
knows the
that the Japanese reader
here,
signification of the Chinese character and the word corresponding his
mother tongue, or not being acquainted- with
Japanese dictionary, to supply
Were to
the construction
nese.
at
the
of
side
But there
of each Chinese
would
it
character by
deficient.
is
suffice
a Japanese
and to read Japanese in the same order
it,
simply
word Chi-
as
one point, from which the two languages diverge; to wit,
is
the Chinese verb has
its
objective (complement, regime), whether a simple
or a substantive phrase objective,
give an instance,
which the translation
that, in
in
it
he resorts to a Chinese-
of the two languages alike,
the signification
represent
placed
all
it,
to
after
it,
the Chinese construction
the Japanese has
it
one to say:
requires
book: he desires to go home;" on the contrary, the Japanese:
He
noun
before.
He
To
reads a
a book reads;
he homewards to go desires."
Thus in the reading aloud of the Japanese translation of a Chinese sentence a transposition, a skipping over of the Japanese words as the case in question occurs. This transposition is
the
of the Chinese text translation is
called
-
^jjftt'pjl?
or also Kaytri,
^
IV
Geki-toku-suru
,
necessary, as often
shown on the
right-hand one being occupied
by numbers or equivalent
-
is
left-hand-side
by the Japanese
signs. This, transposition of the i.e.
against
(the order) in
words
reading,
turning back, and the transposition-signs Kaydri-tenor
marks
of going backwards. These marks are 1)
the hook, ^, which indicates the transposition of two words following each other
2)
3)
,
as
^
055
*
inotte
the Chinese ciphers
-,
i
korewo - korewo motte (thereby)
=,-(1,2,3) when
skips over
two or more characters;
the signs
J:,
f,
T
;
the translation of a character
(above, in the middle, beneath), whenever the parts of
a sentence, that have been already marked, must be again skipped over;
33
INTRODUCTION.
4) the cyclical signs
The
ciphers
and signs
position-sign , thus:
A of the
z,,
,
for a further skipping over.
cited
B]
&,
c-,
Pa
occur in connection with the simple trans-
may &,
ife,
it;
&, &.
ffi,
practical indication of the use of these signs will be found in our edition
Grand Study
(Ta-Aid), a few lines of which are subjoined as a specimen
of Chinese text with a
as well as a
complete
fragmentary
translations in
Japanese,
CHINESE TEXT.
1
,
jHhi
"^T
2, with a fragmentary translation in Japanese.
with a complete translation in Japanese.
^
2 AE & *5*
-/FT
,,Tfc
in '
r^\
{J
O
fc,
* ffii
^
Bif
7
Jfc,
T ffi
r
ffij
BB
B5
-*.
I
in Japanese: Reading of the translation
Dai-Gaktino mitsiva mei tokuwo akirakani
siirtiniari;
tamiwo
ardtftni su-
rttni arl; si-sen ni todomarti ni ari.
Todomartikoto notsi
wo
yoku sidzuka
sitte, slkauslte notsi
nari.
Sidzuka ni
sadamartikoto
site,
ari.
Sadamatte, slkauslte
slkausr^ notsi y6kti yasusi. 3
Yastiu-
INTRODUCTION.
34 sikauslte notsi yokti
site,
as here, the Chinese text
If,
the
omdnbakaru.
Kdta-Mna
is
is
OmOnbakatte
,
slkaustte notsi yokti
u
1
).
in the standard form written in full, then
used for the interlinear translation in Japanese, whereas the
Fira-gdna accompanies the Chinese running-hand.
Books
B.
written in the
Japanese
language.
In these, the national writing, whether Fira-gdna or Kdta-kdna, forms the
chain, in which a larger or smaller number of Chinese
.characters are
inserted.
the Chinese characters represent ideas, for which the reader, in
In this
style,
case the
meaning of the Chinese character has not been already expressed
of
side
it
Japanese writing, must substitute Japanese words and connect
in
them with the character.
which the writer has placed
inflectional forms,
Here
also
the
proper
is
after the Chinese
Kdta-kdna accompanies the Chinese standard- writing
and the Fira-gdna the Chinese running hand. literature
at the
written.
A
In this
,
style the whole Japanese
Japanese text without an admixture of Chinese
ideographic signs, women's letters excepted, has never yet come under our notice.
To exemplify what has been style.
said,
we
subjoin a few lines written in
this
In the one specimen the translation in Japanese will be found written
next to each Chinese character, in the other chiefly in official
it
is
the latter happens
left out;
documents.
o
O -*-
# 5
3
t*
^ *
y
1)
Translation.
vating the people,
The
The way of the Grand Study it
point where to rest heing
a calm unperturbedness there
end
.
may J.
consists in illustrating illustrious virtue,
it
consists in reno-
consists in resting in the highest excellence.
may
known
be attained.
,
the object of pursuit
To
is
then determined
:
that being determined
,
that there will succeed a tranquil repose. That being attained,
be careful deliberation, and that deliberation will be followed by the attainment (of the desired
LEGGE, Chinese
classics. Vol. I. 220.
INTRODUCTION.
Reading of the Japanese
35
text.
Nagasaki oyobi Hakodate no minato no foka, tsugini nosuru ba-slyo ki-gen yori akubesi
wo sano
1 ).
The frequent use made of Chinese ideographic
signs in this style of writing
has for consequence, that even people of the lower order are more or less ac-
quainted with education,
and
it
make ample
work-people
panese
appreciating a sort of knowledge
,
use of
which,
it.
We
possess written communications from Ja-
written in the prevalent epistolary
more Chinese characters than Japanese It first
which pleads for a good
,
stile,
contain
letters.
stands to reason that, to understand texts written in this style, in the
place,
an acquaintance with the Japanese language
is
necessary, since the
connection between the parts of the proposition and the ideas indicated
logical
by the Chinese characters
is
expressed in Japanese letters, thus in Japanese.
C. Style.
Just as every living language the Japanese too has turies,
,
during the lapse of cen-
undergone change and had a gradual development, which
a litterature of
more than a thousand
years.
This
is
in
not the place to investigate
those changes or to indicate specimens of different periods. direct
is reflected
We
desire merely to
attention to the difference which exists between the old and
new
Japa-
nese language, written as well as printed. a.
Old Japanese.
The old language,
Ftiru-koto,
is
an idiom
free
from foreign ingredients,
that has been developed freely and independently in the isolated Nippon. Originally
the language of the ancient Mikado-dynasty, that was settled in Yamdto
660 years B.
and therefore
C.,
also called Yamdto-kotobd or the
language of Ya-
mdto, this idiom had, with the political, intellectual and spiritual power of that dynasty obtained supremacy over the other dialects of the empire and was, for ages long, the general written language, expressed at one time in Chinese, and
then again in Japanese writing; but declined,
and
lost its direct influence in the
language shared
1)
That
is:
when
its
Besides
at the following periods.
fate:
it
at last the
power of
this
government of the empire,
dynasty this old
was superseded by a new idiom, and supplanted in
the Ports of Nagasaki and Hakodate, the places mentioned beneath shall be opened Art. 2 of the Netherlands-Japanese Treaty of the
18^ August, 1868.
INTRODUCTION.
36 the political
As the
forgotten. its
but by no means driven from the mouths of the people, or
life,
vehicle of
an extensive
and
literature,
this language has kept poetry and of the old religion,
held in respect, since the literature founded on cient civilization ,
the people,
is
poses
its
an an-
and the old
service of
Kamis which
still
,
lives
,
on among
rooted in this language.
most
reflects
as the expression of
it,
is still
,
Considered from a philological point of view
which
stand, and
its
and as the witness of a past glorious in the eyes of the nation
finds its admirers ;
still
by the power of
chiefly
faithfully the
,
the Yamdto-kotoba
is
the mirror
being of the Japanese language, the most ex-
organic structure, and sheds a clear light on the grammatical forms
also of the
new
now become
idiom,
prevalent.
The student of the Japanese language, who
is
not
satisfied
with the mecha-
nical learning of grammatical forms, but wishes to penetrate into the
knowledge
of their origin and being, must, in the etymological and grammatical treatment of that language, take the Yamdto-kotoba for basis, following, in this respect, the example of the Japanese themselves
who,
to be able to lay
any claim
to
li-
terary proficiency, apply themselves to the study of their old language and read
the old authors
and poets, and sometimes even imitate
The Japanese
literature is rich in
in philological resources
nese language
is
,
works in the Ftiru-koto, but not
chiefly in dictionaries , in
illustrated
by
their versification. less rich
which the old or pure Japa-
The
citations of the sources.
principal
sources
works on mythology and history, the oldest of which are those which 7 have been designated with the name of the three records" ^n^ are the
(^*
^f
^
San-bu fon-siyo). lg> *"* 3 1.
Original
ip^^^JCf MUMAKONO
account of the old events of former times,
ffit* Sen-dai ku-zi
STJKUNE,
^Q^
"f^^
W^
fon-ki" executed by SIYAU-TOK. DAI-SI and Sogano
by order of Mikado SUI-KO, in 10 volumes, beginning with
the god-dynasties, and extending to 620 (the 20th year of the said Mikado). 2.
The
Book of
antiquity,
FUru-koto-bumi or
~^
3
^.^
jf^l* Ko-zi-ki,"
written by Oho-ason YASU-MARO and presented to the Mikado GEN-MEI in 711 or
712, 3 volumes. 5th
It begins
with the mythological times and reaches to 597 (the
year of the Mikado SUI-KO). 3.
The
Japanese
book,
Yamdto-bumi
or
J
^
2Jf
^^^E*
Nippon
siyo-ki" completed by TONERI NO SIN-WOO and Oho-ason YASU-MARO, in 720, in
INTRODUCTION.
20
volumes,
beginning
37
with the creation and ending with the year 697
l
).
These works, executed before the introduction of the Japanese Kdta-Mnawriting, are, as appears from the copies, that
we have
ten with Chinese writing, partly ideogrophic,
partly
which
of them, generally writ-
phonetic;
at the side of
found the reading in Japanese expressed with Kdta-kdna, but
is
an addition of
As
later time.
we
a specimen
here subjoin the
first
this is
Unas of the
o 0*
0*
mi
45*
ft*
*
ft
Reading: ^OT^ tsutsino fazimeno toki taka-mano farani ndrimdseru k ami no mi-navd Ante no minaJka-
nusino kami, isugini Taka-mi-musubi no kami, isugini Kami-musubi no kami, vd mina
fitori garni ndrimdsite, mi-mi
Translation:
The
three gods
:
Kono mi fiuirano kami
wo kdkmi-tamdviki.
Ame no
mi-naka-nusi no kami , Taka-mi-musiibi no kami, and Kami-musubi no
kami, at the time of the creation of Heaven and Earth existed in the high expanse of heaven, were
solitary
gods and hid themselves.
As
sources for obtaining acquaintance with the FUru-kotQ
physical and historical descriptions lected
1)
1839
as
Of in
early as 713
this
work
I
come further under
It
TON SIEBOLD'S
,,Nippon-Archiv" under the
might be expected, that the
manners;
it is
;
but the opposite
the topographical ,
Fuu-to-ki) of Japan, col-
notice; the laws
and precepts edited
title
of Japan's Besiige mil der Korntehen Halbinsel
Quellen bearbeUet. style, in is
which these annals are written, would be characterized by una-
the case.
The
oldest Japanese prose
verbose and diffuse, and any one, unless he
the divine worship,
nB^
,
have made ample use in the elaboration of an historical treatise, which appeared in
tmd mil China. Nach Japanischen
dorned simplicity
(^.^ db
^
is
lies
hid
completely subservient to courtly
penetrated, like the
which they display towards the prince and
behind the richness of courtlike expressions
is
authors themselves , with
his house, will discover but too soon that
poverty of ideas.
INTRODUCTION.
38 in three different periods
and 907;
of Lyric
collections
poems
(
^*
Jy^^
and romances
Historical narratives
-
-
^5 ^
(En*
titd)
San-dai kdku-siki} of 820, 869 -
($fy^
as well as the
,
Epic poems and Melo-dramatic pieces (Jll^
leaves;
As
Intfft
Mono-gatdri}',
Bundle of Ten thousand
Man,
or mai) etc.
aids towards illustration of the Ftiru-koto deserving of men-
philological
tion are:
^
^p
Wa-mei-seo, or explanation of Japanese names, collected by
^b
MINA-MOTONO siTAGAVU
(
^
j||| )
,
a famous poet,
who
died in 986. 20 volumes.
There are editions of 1617, 1667 and 1851.
M
n/
;
3M** 'JP*
W^" PI \/
^fl^ 18^^ Ga-gen 7Iv 3. >>t*
correct language," #*
Ladder to the old language." 1765.
bdsi, or
siyu-ran or Miydvi-koto-atsume
View
,
of the
by ISI-GAVA GA-BAU. 1812. *
=5* ^* -j|^
fl~H
u koto no
w*/
^i
2^
*
^.
Ga-gen ka-zi kdku
,
Standard of the correct lan-
in JTa/za-writing, by ITSI-OKA TAKE-FIKO. 1814. guage" O O .
H^
|l|
TANI-GAVA 6.
^
SI SEI.
New
^f^
<_j *
/
TFa-^Mwwo siwori, or Guide to the Japanese language ," by
1830.
Japanese.
Opposed to the FUru-koto since
the
16
th
century,
New
the
is
for the
Japanese,
as it has
newest type of which the style
been in vogue
may
pass, in
which the diplomatic documents of our time, particularly the Treaties concluded with the Western Powers in 1855, are composed
The for this
1
).
distinguishing characteristic of this style does not lie in the spelling ,
as the literature of this people
has undergone but few changes,
-
-
,
,
dating more than a thousand years ago
but in the analytic character,
by wich
,
it
forms an opposition to the antique-synthetic Japanese, and chiefly in the strong
mixture
of Chinese, or, properly, Japanized Chinese words, wich,
are governed
it
by the Japanese element, but play so important a part in
this style has been,
is
true,
it,
that
not with injustice, called the Sinico- Japanese.
Rising in the opinion of the Japanese, above the popular language proper, in dignity,
conciseness
larly a possession of the
at another less,
and strength of expression,
more
this style is
civilized classes of society
and
,
more particu-
at one time
more
,
impregnated with the foreign element, forms the book-language;
1) See p. 28. note 2.
INTRODUCTION.
as
39
has penetrated to the lower classes of the people, and exercises
such,
its
on the polite conversational language and the epistolary
influence even
style. It follows
guage
as a matter of course , that in our treatment of the Japanese lan-
,
prominent place, and
this style occupies a
back upon the old as well, view, to illustrate the
13.
new
it
is
if at
the same time
we
look
but to be able, from a grammatical point of
as it requires.
LANGUAGE SPOKEN.
GENERAL CONVERSATIONAL LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS.
Almost each province of the Japanese Empire has
its
peculiar dialect, and
the difference of dialect becomes greater, in proportion as the provinces are more distant from one another.
confirmed by the testimony of different Japanese
It is a fact
,
whom we
have
questioned on the subject, that a native of the southern part of Japan and one
from
northern cannot understand each other's
the
dialect.
The merchant or
functionary passing from Yddo to Nagasaki, understands the dialect spoken there just as little as,
on the other hand, a native of Nagasaki understands the lan-
guage of the common people of Yddo.
The
just the
same with
dialects of
Japan, as with the
case
is
lects,
which,
e.
many
dialects
one general polite written and
g.,
- -
High German,
exist
It is the
ses alone
).
uttered,
the
it is
spoken by the polite clas-
we here quote the very words
is
of
everywhere given in that lan-
OHORAVA KITAROO
as
we noted them down,
6sik" koimoa bakdri ,,Miydkono st6 bu-menwo yomi-mds toorini handsi-mcu; tdn-Hffa-yubti yor
gozdrimas. Eddono
kotoba wd,
ki-ninica, yorosiki kotoba nite Adnari-mdnt, i.e.
speak as one reads in a book, and therefore
only the polite
- -
Since the influence of Ytdo spreads to the most remote parts of
) In confirmation of this assertion,
when
spoken language,
spoken language, at present in general use in Miydko and,
the empire, and the instruction in the schools
1
as amidst those
general polite spoken language has obtained ad-
with slight modification at Yddo also, but here 1
But
dia-
has gained the ascendancy there, so in Japan also, (instead of
the old Yamdto-kotoba) a mittance.
next one another in Germany.
many
man
speaks good language.
The
have only good language. With regard
inhabitants of
Miyako
to the language of Tedo,
INTRODUCTION.
40
use of guage, every well-bred person in the provinces makes
with the educated
and leaves the
,
who wish
To
foreigners,
at
Kandgava or
at
to get
they
If they choose for language-master a servant taken
from
them
it
is
not a matter of indifference to
good Japanese, declares what really
sell
is
not good," and, although
them the means
to
lower classes of the people.
some knowledge of the spoken language whether
the street, he will
good Japanese
in his intercourse
whom
Nagasaki,
apply for instruction.
local dialect to the
it
afford
his patois for
may
it
- -
Japanese functionaries
not be his intention, gives
As
amusement.
in every
language, so in the Japanese also, the dialects have their unquestionable right to existence,
and knowledge of them
of importance, as well for the daily in-
is
tercourse with that portion of the population that do not rise above their dialect, as for comparative philology; but to intercourse with the well educated part of
whom
the nation, with level,
the foreigner will certainly wish to place himself on a
he gains admittance only by means of the general polite
guage, and
for this
he must look about him.
use the word watdk&si for
To take an
I," just as the gentleman
and not accept the porter's
wdtski or
spoken lan-
instance, he will then
and merchant of Yddo,
wasi" or a servant-maid's
watdsi" or
watdi" instead, or please himself with the ataksa from the district of Yosihara.
The ordinary conversational language in respect of diction and pronunciation. concise,
the conversational
from the book-language, both
If the book-language
more circumstantial and
is
sequence of the task laid on
which prescribe the form of
differs
of
it
coming up
diffuse;
is
succinct,
and
the natural con-
to the rules of good-breeding,
social intercourse in the different
ranks of society.
These rules require from every one respectful politeness to his superiors,
From a
strict courtesy to his equals. obtained
among
people that, like the Japanese, has
the Western nations the reputation of being the most civilized
and most courteous on the earth
J
),
it is
to be expected that its conversational
language should express that character, and this liarly
spoken
a person,
is
who
has not been brought up with it
regard to
(p. 21), the same
1)
the case: the language fami-
a concatenation of courtly expressions and goes even so far, that
expression, acquit
With
is
it,
will not, to use the mildest
of exaggeration.
pronunciation,
phenomenon occurs
of which as,
among
we have
already spoken above
the Western languages, in the
In 1862 in the Netherlands we became acquainted with some exceptions to this rule.
INTRODUCTION.
41
French: the pronunciation deviates from the written form, and
this deviation
from the original inadequacy of the Japanese phonetic system
arises partly
cannot possibly express
all
,
which
the existant combinations of sound, partly from the
development of the language, in which the pronunciation has undergone
many
a change, whilst the once adopted, old orthography, with but slight modifications, has maintained its historical claim.
Specimens of the Japanese conversational style
in the form of dia-
logues have only very lately reached us.
about forty years ago, a
It is true,
gues found
its
book about Japan the
in
Japanese,
into a
way *)
Museum
it
style,
Dutch
of
dialo-
in the Netherlands, and later a place in a
and every one who attached importance to the study of
,
supposition that that translation was also in the Japanese
conversational style, had then
we have been
Japanese translation
to attach
no small value to
it;
but,
now
that
become better acquainted with the familiar conversational
able to
appears that people were misled: the translation of these dialogues
not written
in the conversational, but in the book style, and therefore loses
is
its
supposed value.
The
first
specimen of the
was a pocket- work published
genuine at
conversational language that reached us
Nagasaki for the use of Japanese merchants
which we, with a view to the wants of the non- Japanese in 1861 with the
Japanese
it
title
contains,
recast
,
,
and published
of Shopping-dialogues in Dutch, English and Japanese. The
is
the pure conversational style in use
among
the trades-
people.
This specimen was in 1863 followed by Familiar dialogues in Japanese with English and French translations for the use of students; a contribution with which the names of E. ALCOCK and LEON PAGES are connected.
Now
the
prominent,
want of aids and as yet
luctantly see the their
it
to oral intercourse with is
Japan
is
daily
becoming more
not to be expected, that the Japanese,
who
re-
attempt of the foreigner to become in any degree master of
language, will themselves cooperate therein and publish dialogues, from
which the foreigner may draw
profit,
it
may
be hoped, that for that very
reason the zeal of such Europeans, as apply themselves more particularly to the
study of language in Japan,
1)
Bydrage
tot
or do so in their intercourse
with Japanese out
de kermis van het Japansche Rijk, by VAN OVBHMF.BR FISSCHKR. 1833.
INTRODUCTION.
42 for the
of Japan,
Japanese language
new
will succeed in collecting
more or
expression
-
manner of
*).
_
epistolary style is
it
language purified;
..
;
subject to
equally
and deferential
(
?/
^ ^ y Bun ,
The Japanese
Knowledge of
politeness.
model
old distributed the
^tNa,i.
the noun substantive, the
a model of
whom
the letter
is
is
ad-
defined.
ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
14.
The Noun,
is
letters, in which, the
and expressions
dressed being considered, the choice of words
The Japanese have of
the conversational
rendered easy, because
it is
rank between the writer and the person to
difference in
is
siyau)
stamped forms, and
every popular encyclopedia contains a series of
1.
soil,
and distinguishing in them the
the correct and the incorrect
Epistolary style.
courtliness
not grown fast to the Japanese
series of dialogues
of speaking,
less polite style
is
name
e.
(nomen).
pronouns,
exponents of relation, which
words of their language in three
last,
To
this category
the adjectives, the
classes
:
belong besides
numerals, and do the
placed as postpositions,
the
office
of our so called prepositions, as well as, in part, of our conjunctions also.
The Verb,
2.
|^j
b
Kotoba,
i.
the word (verbum) by eminence, and con-
e.
sidered as the living element (Fataraki-kotoba
of the sentence.
Particles, formal or constituent words, generally suffixes (suffixa), which
3.
do the iro,
working word)
of our terminational inflections (casus) such as the particles
office
va,
te, ra,
and therefore comprised under the name of Teniwova or Teniva.
Remark
1.
the written form
By
name Teniva by which
for the
tributed to the word,
these particles called
buses,
in
T
fc=
^^
the signification of
or
jj^J
T
3|P|^,
opening leaves"
used is
at-
one must not be misled into the supposition, that
might be actual shoots of words, or what are sometimes
organic terminational
writing quoted
Jfj
is
nothing
inflections,
else,
and not
suffixes.
The form of
than one of the frequently occurring re-
which, to arrive at the truth, the meaning of the characters
employed must be overlooked.
Remark
1)
When
2.
plubishintt
the
In one European Grammar first
edition
of this
Colloquial Japanese, Shanghai 1863, which 2)
RODRIGUEZ, Mem.
67.
may
3 )
these particles are also called
grammar we were not acquainted with
S.
be recommended to students of the Japanese.
R. BROWN'S
43
INTRODUCTION.
and
Sutegana"
Wokiy ," names,
(^5
Sute-gana foundling child
111*
^^t^)'
which require a farther e
*
-
of Japanese words
to the
terminations
expressed with Japanese -STana-writing between, or at
the side of .Chinese characters
,
which words themselves are only indicated
Chinese characters
ideographically by
or foundling-letters (a
name given
called sute-go) is the
is
deserted,
illustration.
^L Kou-siNO notamavaKU
l
).
The marks J no and
^
(= saying OF Confucius), or
?
ku in
vu in
J^
f, 0, omoVU
thus foundling-letters that must be taken up in the
are
translation.
Oki-zi
jlf
(
:f TT
of impression
^ ^
is
^)
the written form Wokiy appears to be an error
said of those characters of a Chinese sentence which,
in the translation into Japanese, must not be translated separately, but
passed over,
as
in
"ffi
V _|
San-tsiu-ni asobu (= walking
among
the
111
-*. The
mountains).
Oki-zi thus are characters to which, in translating into
Japanese, the part of statists or mute players
is
_j.
assigned.
By more corporal or }ff
^
bodily word
Youno
h
P^)
recent Japanese grammarians the
name
of
^<
_^
p^|
~f
:
Taino kotoba
(substantive) has been given to the noun, and that of
kotoba, or Fataraki-kotoba
,
- effective word
to
the verb,
whereas for the particles the name of Teniwova has been retained. If the classes of
Japanese grammarians confine themselves to the distinction of three
words
,
we
,
to be able to fix the logical
and grammatical value of the
words properly, must apply our grammatical categories, our distinction of the parts of speech to the Japanese language.
Consequently we distinguish
(under which are included
Adjectives, 4. Numerals, 5. Adverbs,
6.
Verbs,
flections,
1)
7.
2.
Pronouns,)
3.
Suffixes (postpositions) simple,
and such
Compare pag. 34.
as
1.
Nouns,
answering to our termi national in-
answer to our prepositions and conjunctions,
8. Interjections.
INTRODUCTION.
44
GLANCE AT THE ARRANGEMENT AND
15. A
CO1S7 NECTION
OF WORDS IN
JAPANESE.
The laws also
arrangement of words, which govern the Japanese syntax,
for the
govern the formation of the words themselves,
which that language, from
manner
the
as
fore, precede the theory of the
is
A
still
forming new ones,
is
subject to
concise view of those laws should, there-
grammatical forms of words.
The Japanese construction of words Predicative Apposition,
the manner, in
which the elements of sentences standing in
in
one another are governed.
relation to
is:
monosyllabic roots, has formed words, and from
has formed, and
those existing words
the same laws,
its
that
is
based on two principles
,
viz
that of
:
and that of Subordination or order of dependance.
A. Predicative Apposition.
The subject,
if it is
named, precedes, the predicate follows, the subject
being mostly separated from the predicate by an isolating particle reas
the predicate, in the absence
)^
),
of personal inflections of the verb,
joined to the subject grammatically. sign of the nominative, a
(
As
the subject too
is left
whe-
not
is
without a
of predicate and subject properly so called
congruency
does not exist. B. Subordination.
Every modifying word precedes the word Application 1.
to
which
-
belongs.
:
The attributive
definition, be it a genitive, or adjective, is thus placed
fore the word to which
it
tsuno ante, summer-rain; Tsuyokiame, heavy rain;
hdda yorosiku , very
well. Consequently the
under, before, after, for, by
etc.
etc.
Instead
is of
Toku ,
well
connectives
become suffixes
This takes place also with the noun, which
The verb
is
;
answering to oar in
to the
word, which
is
go
,
because he goes ,"
at , of, through
,
Nd-
rain-fall, raining;
Tokuwakdri, understanding well ,
;
Hdna-
with, on
,
their attributive definition.
to be considered as the attributive definition of the inflexion.
placed before the connective (conjunctio), because I
be-
belongs.
Thus Ydma-mori, mountain-wood, Mori-ydma, wood-mountain; Ame ga furu,
2.
it
an expression in used answering to
it is
governed by
he to yo because
j j
it.
/
going am."
3.
The adverb precedes the pendent proposition
,
adjective or the verb,
and the subordinate or de-
in quality of adverbial definition
,
precedes the principal
proposition. E.
g.
,,The tun
brightly
ohining
is"
instead of our ,,The sun
is
shining brightly."
INTRODUCTION.
The
4.
is
predicate
45
placed before the copula, because the
the predicate adds a definition to the copula (be, E. g. ,,The flower in bloom
The
5.
is"
for our ,,The flower is in
object direct, as well as the indirect,
stantive phrase objective
(I
home(wards)
The verb
6.
letter
a,
is).
blossom," or ,,the flower blooms.".
placed before
is
he knows that I he
sends;
I come
\\
shall
come," expressions are used answering
shall that,
it."
knowing
placed before the auxiliary verb, whether
is
verb; the sub-
its
placed before the principal proposition governing.
is
Instead of ,,he sends a letter home; to ,,he
meaning included in
be affirmative
it
or, in
consequence of the blending with a negative element (= not), negative. Instead of ,,he will go
go
willing is ;
I
\
(to)
\
I will not go ;" expressions are used answering to ,Jie
;
The verb, by means of which a derivative verb
7.
this verb placed before
The saying:
The
! let
go
vntt,
or he
\ \
(to)
go willing not am
formed, has the root of
it.
him go,"
is
rendered by an expression equal to
and certain exclamations
interrogatives
is
/ him go
(interjections),
let.'"'
word
follow the
or proposition they characterize.
Oh
Instead of ,,Understand you?
eh?
Heavens,
When then the
heavens!" we meet with expressions answering to
You understand
ohT""
several definitions independent of one another belong to one predicate ,
important precedes the
less
more important: the
definition of time is
placed before the definition of place; the object indirect (Dative, Local, Instru-
mental, Ablative) before the object direct (Accusative). Coordination.
In coordination of words, the last alone receives the characteristic of grammatical relationship, while the preceding ones are
Thus
be a series of
if it
nouns, which
left
are linked together,
them
receives the terminational inflection, that refers to
Our saying: ,,The OF three lightr
(
Q
three lights OF sun,
&
^}
^
**
j||
moon and ;
* EELf jfc
** **
linked together gets the terminational inflection of the accusative, thus
kaze,fi
The case
is
nasareta ?
just the
of the last proposition,
the last only
all.
stars" gets the Japanese form of
In the saying: ,,Who has made heaven, earth, sun, moon, water,
WO go-zdku
undefined.
***, moon, tlart,
sei-NO tan kwoo\ air,
fire?" only the last of the
Daregaame,
ttutti t fi t ttuti,
Both examples, corrected, have been taken from RODRIGUEZ
noun*
mu/su,
lem. $ 88.
same with propositions linked together, the verb only in
like
manner, receiving the terminational
while the verbs of the preceding propositions,
left
undefined,
inflection,
retain their ra-
dical form.
The Japanese and the Chinese order of words, with regard
to the
attributive
INTRODUCTION.
46
definitions,
agree,
precede the word
as in both these languages they
to
which
they belong; but they differ from each other, in respect of the object (complement),
which, as
it
has been shown on p. 32, in Japanese
is
placed before,
in Chi-
nese after the verb. Might etc.
it
be objected that in Chinese there are
which have the word they govern
positions are
placed after
prepositions
also such as
them, we must observe
"fc^
,
-T*
,
H
,
[-ft
that, in our opinion, those pre-
verbs, and therefore have the complement after them.
Inversion.
Inversion Japanese.
or
transposed order of words
The Syntax
will show,
how
it
plays
can step out of the monotonous march
of the regular order of words , and without violating cipal elements
an important part in
and the definitions of a sentence
its
laws
rhetorically.
,
set off the prin-
ETYMOLOGY, NATURE AND INFLECTION OF WORDS.
NOUNS. 1.
THE BOOT
the monosyllabic element of a word. Roots are,
is
i,
to go,
ki,
2. is
The
called the
sag, to descend,
tor, to take,
tat,
to stand.
RADICAL or PRIMITIVE WORD. are the
names
either of objects or qualities, or verbs, as:
Tdka, high,
river,
Kuni, land,
If a
ag, to ascend,
mi, to see,
JFikt,
3.
kik, to hear,
to come,
Ydma, mountain,
Mitsi,
g.
verbal form, on which derivative or inflectional suffixes are grafted,
The Radicals Kdva,
e.
low,
Itdri,
gone,
Kiki, hear,
Kitdri, come,
Age,
Firo, broad,
Miye, seem,
Sdge, abate,
way,
Ndga, long,
T6ri, hold,
THE RADICAL
IN COMPOSITION.
word
in
its
coordinate, or the case the rule
is,
radical
raise,
Tdte, fix, place.
form stands before a noun, then both words are either
first is to
the second, as a definition, subordinate. In the latter
that Japanese words are combined with Japanese, Chinese with
Chinese. 4
CHAPTER
50
NOUNS. COORDINATION. SUBORDINATION.
I.
3.
A. Coordination takes place in expressions as: Ame-tsutsi, heaven-earth;
sun (and) moon;
Fi-tsuki,
^^
Mb^
S3
^C
^
^/
B.
^ Zit-get, sun (and) moon;
J -^ JjJ
K6ku-ka, country (and) people; jp,
~fc
^ Sau-mok
,
plant (and) tree.
Subordination. Subordination by
I.
Kusa-ki, plant (and) tree.
heaven (and) earth;
Ten-tsi,
*
- -
of genitive or adjective definition
way
place in
takes
compositions, as:
Kava-oso, river-otter;
Oso-gava, otter-river.
Kava-yeda, river-branch;
Yedn-gava = branch-river.
Ydma-mori, mountain- wold Taka-ydma, high -mountain
;
;
Mb
7,
Yoko-hdma, cross-strand. Firo-no, large
Naga-sdki, long-cape;
^
Mori-ydma, wold-mountain.
^
Ten-zin
JIJJJJ
JJlfp
\/
Tsi-zin , earthly gods ;
*
heavenly gods
,
H ^ ^ ^ K6ku-zin
,
country-men
field.
;
,
inhabitants ;
5
^j^^J^^ The
II.
its radical
The
1.
object direct
,
K6ku-zi, country- writing
the Kdta-kdna.
or indirect, if taken in a general sense,
form before the verb radical
,
is
placed in
').
form occurs as object
fori, the hole-digger; Kava-watdri, one
direct (Accusative) in
who
compounds
as
Ana-
crosses a river; Srtnd-tori, sand-fetcher ,
sand-skipper; Midsu-kosi, water-filter; Ama-terd*u, heaven-lighting. 2.
The
radical
form occurs as object indirect in Ama-kuddri, (from) heaven
descending; Te-tori, asi-tori, to seize (any one by the) hands, seize (by the) feet;
Me-gake, (in the) eye hold; Me-sasi, (with the) eye show, give a wink; Ana-dori, (in) holes catch.
m.
The
radical
form as a definition before adjectives,
quick, handy, dextrous; Asi-foya,
high, high-legged; 0-naga,
-
= foot-quick,
e.
g.
Te-boya
- hand-
swift of foot, fleet; Asi-taka
= leg-
tail-long, long-tailed.
Remark. In composition rules of euphony are observed and bring about modifications of sound, as well
1;
Comp.
H.
with regard to vowels, as to consonants, whenever
STEIXTHAL, Charakteristik der hauptsacUichsten Typen des SpracKbaues
,
p.
184, 185.
CHAPTEK
their
is
meeting
+
u ra
-
i
Ydma
-
-\-dto,
rich-creek,
cock-roach, Aburozi,
From Asa
-\-ake,
hill-behind, behind the hills,
name
the
51
4.
of a place,
dawn,
is
Yamdto; from
Toy6ra; from Abura-miisi,
etc.
As we must draw up
we
NOUNS. GENDER.
embarrassing to the pronunciation.
formed asdke; from
T6yo
I.
the rules of euphony from the grammatical
phenomena
be able to refer to them, insert the rules at the end of the Ety-
shall, to
mology.
GENDER. Grammatical gender does not
4.
exist.
If the gender
must be
definitely ex-
of objects in which a distinction of sex exists, then this distinction
pressed
made, A. either by means of particular words or B. a he-animal" and
le-servants and. female-servants,
by placing ;7 O, man, and
^
Me, woman,
as in English, in
a she-animal"
is
which ma-
are spoken
as attributive before the
of,
word.
A. To the particular names belong: Mi-kddo, - the sublime port, the sove* Kimi-sdki, princely reign, king or emperor. Kl-saM'. originally 3^| ^p fortune of i.
,
the queen or empress
Kami, Kan, =
thence in the Mythology which
,
under the name
prince, chief, includes the gods, the expression Kisdki-gdmi^
higher being (kdrni) that
e.
;
is
consort (kisdki), to indicate a goddess,
who
is
the consort of a god. Tsitsi,
Fava (haha),
kazo, father.
irova, mother.
Mama-tsitsi, stepfather.
Mama-fava, stepmother.
0-dsi, uncle.
0-ba, aunt.
Ani, eldest brother.
Ane,
- father-bird, cock.
Tsitsi-tori,
B.
1.
By
the prefixes ;?
0-vi, o-i, nephew.
0-ke-mono
l
),
male-mammal.
stallion.
0-inu, dog.
1)
Fava-tori,
and ?t
Me
the sex
= mother-bird, brood-hen. is
determined in
Afe-vi, me-i, niece.
Me-ke-mono, female-mammaL Me-ust, cow.
0-ust, ox.
0-mumd,
O
eldest sister.
Ke, hair, hairy, mono, being.
Me-m%md, mare. Me-inu, bitch.
CHAPTER
52
I.
NOUNS. GENDER.
0-in6-ko, boar.
Me-in6-ko, sow.
/
0-fits%zi, he-goat.
Me-Jite&gi. she-goat.
0-sikd, stag.
Me-slkd, hind.
0-ndko, he-cat.
Me-ndko, she-cat.
0-kuzira, male-whale.
Me-kuzlra, female-whale.
Mono
Me
and
Instead of the radical form
2.
the genitive attributive
Ono-ko, male-child, boy.
Meno-ko, female-child,
Ono-kami, a god.
Meno-kami, goddess.
sounds k,
From
s,
When
Ono and Meno are contracted
!)
On
-|- fort,
female bird,
^
^^n/
rw
-j-
mezdru (pron. menzdru); meno
,
tf 5* 3.
with
%
9 ondori
^
K
+
and
^
9 mendori,
female-monkey,
mendora and ^ K3* medora (pron. mendora); from mewo
2
g (n), z (nz), d (nd)
K
J
girl.
and Men, then the pure
&
ono -\-tori, male-bird, becomes successively
medori (pron. mendori); from meno
zdru and
to
t if following, generally pass to the troubled
(pronounce ondori); from wewo
o<7on
K
Ono and
also occur.
Remark.
71
4.
K
1).
9
and
^ ^^/u men-
female-tiger,
^
^
S*>
kataki, female-enemy,
-J-
me-gatdki (pron. mengatdki).
There come under notice also
Ko (-^
3 )
and
Me
(jfc*), lad and
lass,
antecedent attributive definition.
Ot6-ko*), lad, man.
Oto-md, virgin, maid.
Musu-k6 = begotten son, (my)
son.
Musu-m6= begotten maid, (my)
Ftk6, young nobleman.
Ftm6, young
Kana-ydma fik6 no kami, the god of
Kana-ydma flmdno kami,
the ore-mountain.
lady.
the goddess of
the ore-mountain.
Mi-koto, Sublimity, Highness.
Fim4-gami, goddess.
Ono mi-koto, His Highness.
Flmd no
The
daughter.
old- Japanese also has
ki and
mi
mi-koto,
Her Highness.
instead of ko and me, probably with
a view to the vocal-harmony; thence Izana-ki and Izana-mi, - male-goer to
and
fro,
female-goer to and fro,
name
of the divine pair that
carnally.
1)
Comp. Introduction,
p.
15, line 8.
2) Ota, old-Japanese for ono, genitive attributive of o
(/ft
), small, young.
first
mingled
CHAPTER
C.
The
NOUNS. NUMBER.
I.
53
5.
male and female are sometimes transferred to objects without
ideas of
sex, for the purpose of characterizing the one as big, strong, rough, the other
weak and
as little,
the sexes
;
e.
mild, or to indicate other peculiarities of one or the other of
0-matsu the masculine
g.
,
Me-mdtsu, the feminine
Two
firtree,
also
firtree
or Kurd-matsu , the black firtree
,
Aka-matsu, the red pinetree
islands being next each other,
when they
l
)
;
8 ).
are of unequal size, are of-
ten denominated 0-sima, man-island, and Me-sima, woman-island.
Me-ikusa, a female-army, means a weak army (= Yowdki female-rainbow, is
the
name
the
is
name given
tile
(0-kavdra),
D. The Chinese expressions
,
and male, are for quadrupeds and yuu,
e.
g.
$&*
4b
a
of the faint by -rainbow. Me-kavdra or feminine-tile
to flat tile (Jira-kavdra)
vdra), as the masculine
iktisa); me-nizi,
on which the rollshaped (mdru-ka-
,
rests.
used in connection with Chinese names for female
4b
f ^fc^
fi
n an d bo; for birds $fc^ tffcp
fin-ba, mare; fljfc^
]$*
w
yuu-tsi, cock-pheasant.
NUMBER. 5.
The grammatical
noun used
in
its
radical
finite sense as
it
is
wanting. The
is
form expresses the idea generally and leaves
mined, whether the said object
Only when
and plural
distinction of singular
is
it
undeter-
to be adopted in the singular or plural.
strictly necessary to
make
the general idea appear in a de-
something either singular or plural
,
such
is
expressed in one
way
t K
one;
or another.
A. In Japanese words the singular
is
expressed by the numeral
Ftt6 kddo^ one corner.
Flt6 yo, one night. tose,
one year.
>
tdbi,
one time, once.
>
in Chinese words
'*
by
fSi* J9f^
,-r
jgJ
More amply, when
1)
JU*,
Pinu* motioni*** LAMB.
;
katamdri, one clog.
/ana, one flower.
ikka or ikkdno, as
^ ka
**y
J-fk* ikkdno
one p^ ace; tsi,
one piece of ground.
treating of the numerals.
)
*
*w^"
Sin.
et
Zuc.
/Ifrf,
CHAPTER
54
The plural
B.
5.
expressed: for so far as
a distributive generality
repetition includes the idea of a plural.
by the
indicated
NOUNS. NUMBER.
repetition of the noun,
a
By
I.
is
I.
Ydma,
hill;
1)
Ydma-ydma,
hill.
every
The number of such
repetitions
on the
ciation the accent lies
first
is
determined by custom.
part of the
as a soft prolongation of the sound,
In the pronun-
compound while the second occurs ,
and the consonant, with which
it
begins,
undergoes a softening and becomes impure. Examples:
^ kuni
country
,
province
,
=
;
^
r kuni-guni, each country
,
every
province.
*
*
kohori, ko6ri, district;
*^ mura, village;
^
sato
T
;
mdtsi, ward, street;
\
2
V
'^f
X
village
,
^
V ^ V
hd, 3d, house, family;
koh6ri-goli6ri , every district.
^*
murd-murd, each
{
r sato-zato
,
village.
each village.
{
matsi-matsi, every ward.
i
y'h.4-'ih6,
every
house,
each
family.
" fe
he
,
,
door
family
,
\
;
^
fe ~fe
i
door for door,
every
family.
y ^
.
i
yasiro
5 ydma
,
i
chapel hill
,
,
^V
;
mountain
;
JJJ
5
V
{
^
yasiro-yasiro
,
every chapel.
ydma-ydma, every hill or mountain.
3 tokoro
,
place
H^Q X
;
T tok6ro-dok6ro, every place, eve-
rywhere.
? sumi, corner; space, (place and time).
ma, #:
j
1)
i',
^ fdsi
,
hdsi
,
or70,
one;
^
/?M
one
,
,
bridge
man
;
;
Sprachbaues , pag. 158.
die
wir
^^ V 59 5
Wiederhohmg der Substanzworter
sondern distributive Allheit,
\
V 'nij'x V ig-5 V >\ h V
space between;
/
,,Die
rp|!
am
^
^
sumi-zumi, every corner.
ma-ma, every space, every
mean- while.
i
ai-a?,
^
fdsi-bdsi,
{
time.
every bridge.
r ftto-lVtd, every one.
oezeichnet nicht den Plural, aueh nicht schlechthin Mehrheit,
besten
dorch ,,jeder" wiedergeben."
STEINTHAL, Typen det
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
oya, old; office;
ydk&,
yo, age, time of
fo&, time, hour; 1) color,
ft^-***!
<>
2)
sama
2) sort;
1) degree, rank,
,
II.
The
y'tkfi.-yaku
"
i,
is
\
^| 5
sound;
plural
3
V J^ Y ^x ^ ^x V
the mien ;
knsuri, medicine;
,
\
,
office.
every
yo-yo, every age.
each year.
tosi-tosi,
{
N*
y*-^i every-day.
f toki-doki, always, each hour.
iro-iro, every color or sort.
{
^ tina-zina, every quality, every article.
journey, turn;
tafo',
\
^jfflr
the look
,
&7
quality.
sort;
.s?yw,
\
>
/, day;
iro,
\
ift
year;
tow'i
oya-oya, both parents.
TpLY
V ^ u V B^p^ V n V jjp|^ V
life;
55
5.
T styu-zlyu, every sort. i*
i
fama-zama no of every form. tabi-tabi,
each turn.
f kusuri-gtsuri, every medicine. f koyt-goy4, each sound.
expressed by nouns used adjectively, which signify a quan-
tity, generality. 1.
In composition with Japanese words (yomi) are used:
^.^/, oh6kuno, odkiino, many. 06kuno much money, in opposition to sukost no kane,
flt6,
many
little
money.
people.
-^c% ^jlb^s, tai-seino, in great power, in multitude.
OokH no kane,
Tai-sei no /Wrf,
people in multitude. ,
7
ill
t^Lo
V
fdna,
all
i
x
iro-irono, of every color or sort, of all sorts. Iro-irono
sorts of flowers. Iro-irono
V
V^ M IT V
of every sort.
of every rank. ytkn wi, functionaries
sina-zinano, of every quality.
^' sama-zamano,
rent judgements.
A E*.
exceedingly.
oV/J? lilt/ t&ku-sanno, abundant.
pp^ V ^' 1jm%
tai-sg,uno, tai-soono,
of all sorts.
Sama-zamano mono,
{', kazii-kazuno,
Samn~;mano
things of
teak,
all
the difie-
all sorts.
numerous.
'
Pi
siyu-ziyu no
,
su-zu
no.ofeverysort.
Slyti-zlyu no
fUo, people
CHAPTER
56
NOUNS. NUMBER.
I.
is-saino, all.
',
5.
is-saino
~tj7J
stu-zlyau,
all
liying beings.
Moro-moro no
all.
,
moro-moro no mono,
moro-moro no
tori
all
[from
3^n'
woro, both]. Moro-morono
things; moro-moro no tsutsi-rui,
wo kdsumu
the falcon plunders
,
all
/W,
all
people;
sorts of earth.
all
birds.
In composition with Chinese words (koy) are used:
2.
number, many.
jgjj^, su,
,
su-dai,
many
generations.
su-man many tens of thou-
su-nen,
many
years.
sands. su-sen,
|T,
su-get,
many
months.
;
su-zit,
many
days.
-,
su-zin,
many
,
W
I
^^
thousands.
many
su-bydku nin
,,
,
many
hundreds of men.
people.
siyo, every, all. ,
,
,
,
siyq-kdku, the countries.
slyo-ydku, the functions.
L the arguments.
siyo-fau^ the regions. siyo-buts, the things.
gfyo-mn, mankind, the
I
people. ,
I
III.
The
the arts.
^^,
styo-kei,
^1^'
siyo-si,y6ku
^^,
slyo-siu, the sects.
^
every trade.
the warriors.
siyo-si,
plural of a
noun
is
also expressed
by one or another
suffix,
which
signifies
a quantity or generality, and either must be considered as coordinate,
as
Co in
e.
g.
/ and Company
man-kind for men. These
lective
word, as
nami,
tatsi, siu, gata, nado.
Ea
1. e.
g.
(
e. g.
T|^)
for we, or with the preceding
signifies a
suffixes are, ra,
word forming
a col-
domo, gara, bara,
class of persons or things without any distinctive,
Ydtsukdre, subject or vassal;
Ydts&kdrerd
(
ffi
^),
subject
and
class, all
that belongs to the category of subjects, the subjects (or vasals).
Otdko,
tegory of
man; Otdkord
man and
all
class,
that belongs to the ca*
man, men.
Ftyak-tfyo* rd people,
(^ T0,
(
W%
s j$-
or Nou-min rd g 7 ^jf ^),
(
;|
' -7
^f ^ '^
^),
country-
CHAPTER
Ware, the
Warerd
I;
(^^),
Kort, something that
Korerdno nozomi, such a
NOUNS. NUMBER.
I.
I
and
we. Nandsi, thou; Nandsird
class,
here, this; Kordrd
is
57
5.
this
(f^^f),
desire, a desire of that nature
J
C.
,
Migird,
right, in a writing referring to
the aforesaid, yfr
M
gird no sfyo niu-fi, the expenses of
all
kimi,
Kamono
^F '*
-
^r
that
all
? ' B& P"
what prece-
^ AV = j X
8 ).
is
included in there and here.
kimird ga oya nari,
this is the father of the
liberty to consider ra as a coordinate
word, and then
again as a suffix that forms collective words, logic will require the
/ and Company
that such an expression and case with the expression 2.
my
Tomo, domo, mate,
im-IS* .^^
,
Wani and Kamo.
princes (princely houses) of
Remark. If we are at
5
the aforesaid
Atsi kotsi, there and here; Atsira kotsira,
Kova Wanino
^fr), such
).
that precedes,
all
(~& ^&
2
such persons
Migi (pronounce mingi), on the des.
class, such.
Koto, matter; Korerd
).
no koto, such a matter. Sono mono, such a /me; Sono monord a one and
and
first,
really answers to we, which
company, by which
I"
seeing
not the
is
be excluded.
may
companion, particularly in the spoken lan-
fellow,
guage, for persons and things.
Watdkusi no tomo
,
mate or friend
my
;
we; Watdkusi domo no hon, our book. Ko,
Ko-domo ra
Watdkusi domo child;
(
^ ^t
)
I
,
Ko-domo, a mate who
Ko-domo domo, (my or
and mate is
,
a child,
and mate,
(my
or his) child;
(my
or his) children. Ke-rai, attendant; Ke-raidomo, attendants, the suite of a
prince.
Sono mono domo
we. Mi, I myself; selves,
our
own
(
lit ^ "^
y /
or
such persons ^jr^ ^^ / \*^),
Mi domo, we
prince.
ourselves;
Mtdomoffa
Oh6kuno taka domo
,
his) child
4
Ware,
).
Ware domo,
I;
kimi, the prince of us our-
falcons in multitude.
Yebisudomo wo
tairakdsimu, he has the savages subjected. Taka no na tomo wo rirfot, to give up"
the different horse; 3.
names of the
Neko, the
falcon.
cat;
Nekodomo, the
Mumddomo,
horses.
Gara,
row; division of objects distributed in
series,
FM6, man; Fttd-gara after the
(^
manner of men. Fi-gara
1) The treaty between the Netherland* 2) Ibid. Art. VI,
al.
9.
(
Q
^.)i
series of days.
Ftto-gara no
VIII,
2.
yaum,
Koto, matter; Koto-
and Japan, concluded at Ttdo, IS* Anyutt. 1868, Art 3) Ibid.
.1/tfnuf,
classes.
series of mett -
Affi)'
fa
cats.
4) Ibid. VI,
10.
II. al. If.
58
GHAJPTER
gara, series of matters.
Tomo
W
W)'
c
gara
(
row
a
^^
)
(
companions, a
the class of the I
,
5.
JfQ), fellow, mate; Tomo-gara
o
series or class (of ,
men
or brutes). Waga-tomo-
we. Nandsi ga tomo-gara
^)
Ndzumi no tomo-gara (jj^
of you, you. 4.
f
NOUNS. NUMBER.
I.
(
|||
Tjjj )
the class
,
the mouse-kind.
*),
Bara, group.
Taka-bara
group of
(
^^
)
bamboo-wood. Mdtsu-bara
,
Nandsi-bara
firtrees.
(
fy
^jjj )
,
^
(
your group
,
yjyjt )
firtree- wood
,
you. Tono-bara
(
*&
,
*jj
a )
,
they there without.
Nami
5.
(
^
)
series.
,
Fi-nami, series of days. Tsuki-nami, series of months. Se-ken-nami, the com-
mon
people. Flt6-nami
Tatsi
6.
(
^^;*)
the people.
,
3
Wa-nami
row of persons who
),
(
^-
are, or
^j$^ )
may
my
,
series
we.
,
be, in an upright posture
or at a given time, host.
for,
Ydku-nin functionaries.
fasira-no
functionary
,
Ydku-nin-tatsi
;
Kami, god; Kami-tatsi
(j[j|j}
(
*$?
s^ ),
Kamiva mina Wataravi-agatam masu
J^ ^^ ) series
,
row of
of gods,
functionaries
,
Kono mi-
gods.
.Kami-tatsi nari, these three gods
Kono futd
are a series of gods residing in the district of Wataravi.
fasira no
kamiva minasokd-ni narimasdru Kami-tatsi nari, both the gods are gods sprung from the bed of the
river.
Tomo,
fellow,
friend;
Watdkusi no tomo-tatsi,
my
friends. 7.
Siu, Siyn
su, in the written
su, also
C^^^)?
siu-dsyu, company, circle of persons. Ondgo-siu, circle of
Samurai
sin,
language A^^PJ-lf\
band of warriors, warriors,
women.
Remark. Bot expressions, samurdi-siu and ondgo-siu, already given by COLLADO as forms of the plural, are acknowledged by natives of Yddo, in answer to our personal inquiry
,
to be good Japanese
Grammar
in Alcock's Japanese
,
in colloquial style.
(page 19, line 6 from the bottom)
Thus is
it
ked: RODRIGUEZ speaks of a fourth (particle expressing the plural), this appears to
dicative
tedly
,
as
are,"
1) Jap.
be always a
alleged , it
prefix.
of rank
appears
that
,
It has reference to
number, but
while the other three (5*^
K^
the difference between
^^
there
Encycl. 39, 6, V.
2) Instead of
=Sy
occurs i|||
,
but only as the phonetic representative of
tatsi.
,
when remar-
soo, is
JS )
su,
but
not in-
undoub-
number,
CHAPTER
NOUNS. NUMBER.
I.
^^
multitude (see page 56), and the notice
of.
}H ^
P
ment and signed 8.
^^
?V
rfu,
used elliptieally
x the persons who put |fc
not taken
is
their seal (to this docu-
it).
pronounced ngata, = no gata,
Grata,
m,
59
5.
side of.
Mi-kata, the side or party of the Mikado. Tekino kata, the hostile party. To indicate the plural gata
is
used for high persons, and characterizes deep respect
towards them.
Dai-miyqu, - great name, nobleman; Dai-miyau-gata blemen,
the
-
nobility.
noblemen.
-
Sir;
Te-mae-sdma-gata
9.
-ffi
o
tsiu
Dzyo
gata
young
,
you, Sirs or gentlemen.
the gentlemen house-mates, your family.
,
Highness's children, your children. of quality,
,
the no-
),
Tono sama, young nobleman; Tono-sdma-gata
Te-mae-sdma, you,
Ka-nai-sdma-gata
^ ^r
(^
0-ko gata, your
*
("fa*
^*0, women
tjj
young gentlewomen.
Nado from ,
nani-to , nando
whatever
,
,
and so forth
house and so forth, house and such *\^)' lyt-nadoi
,
and such
(
^5
,
vulgo
Samirdi-
like, houses.
nado, warriors.
As the grammatical
distinction of singular
compound words, which express a
plural, have
and plural
is
wanting, so the
no separate declension.
Remark. With a view to courtesy, which particularly dominates the spoken language,
it
is
not a matter of indifference which of the words given,
Ra, domo and nado
to indicate the plural.
things and therefore are used
when one
own
people, or in general of objects, to which no importance
side, the highest respect,
which
is
used
refer directly to a class of persons or
speaks of his
and bara belong to the written language.
is
- -
is
or of
subordinate
attached. --
Oara
Tatsi implies respect, and gata,
on the part
analogous to our
of the King"
from the King."
for
It is natural,
that
more or
less elevated expressions,
are used to others, are not applied to
IV. The plural
Nokorazu
(
is
also
^^^g),
are offer
all
yordsil,
good.
the
adverbs,
as
Mina (f|f*),
without exception, and Koto-gdtoku
article
to
itself is
(
;jjJ ).
together, generally,
which they belong, for instance, Moto together good,
the articles themselves
San-kan nokordzu mitsvki-mono wo tntd-ntatsuru the three empires ,
without exception tribute.
shoots generally,
oneself and one's own.
expressed by
which then precede the predicative verb sinawa mina
which from politeness
all
-
Tane koto~g6tokH me wo iddtS nan, the seed
the seed shoots.
60
CHAPTER
OF THE NOUN.
NOUNS. ISOLATING
I.
6.
ISOLATING OP THE NOUN. The
6.
)% va, *7 wa, )Y
suffix
Every one, who
*>a.
for the first time hears a Japanese harangue,
continual repetition of the
struck by the
is
word wa, which pronounced in a sharp and
little
high tone and followed by a pause, breaks
which the speaker then proceeds in
off the
equable flow of words, in
On
his ordinary tone of speaking.
acquainted with the language, this
word with
little
its
a hearer, not
resting point
makes the
impression, that the speaker would emphasize what he has just said, and separate
from what
it
language )\ isolate
We
va,
,
follows. is
And
that impression
an emphatic
some word or saying, and
do the same,
when we
suffix or rather
to separate
it
raise the voice at
Wa,
correct.
is
*7
,
in the book-
an interjection, intended to
from what immediately
some word and,
follows.
after a pause,
continue, speaking in our ordinary tone.
Va
or
wa
therefore
the predicate, as in
is
used, in the
Tdmavb ydmaydri
come out of mountains); and
(jewels
idsu,
it
= the jewels
may not
||
from
mountain out come
cause surprise when, on that
understood as characteristic of the subject and consequently as
it is
account,
place, to separate the subject
first
the sign of the nominative, which,
strictly considered,
it
is
not.
It is indeed
joined to the subject, but not exclusively, and serves to isolate every other relation, every
,
Lat.
wat
,
.
.
.
Whenever va
aangaat
,
finds its equivalent in
to, .quant a Fr.
,
quoad, quod
attinet
Dutch.
definite
a euphonic modification of va,
The
power of va
isolating
isolates the subject,
has the signification of a
As
The
with regard
as to,
expressions like
ad
case.
dependent
it
answers to the Chinese
^
tse,
which
something" and passes for a relative pronoun.
)Y ba
also occurs.
and the predicate are not always separated by va, but how ne-
subject
cessary this separation sometimes is,
with the omission of va,
may
appears from the instance quoted, which,
also signify:
jewel-mountain from come,"
i.
e.
be produced from a jewel-mountain.
Examples: nari, the lion
^f% ^ ox,
he
Oso va
>j|jj}j^
is
^ ^ E0 is
v"
^'^W
the head of
^
isn'^t
lif
a field-ploughing
sui-tsiu ni
sumu = the ,
all
^
H/t^^
^pt:
^" 9
i
Sisiva fdku-ziuno tslyau
brutes, or: as to the lion, he
^" 9
domestic
is
Usiva tawo tagavesu tsiku animal.
the head etc. nari',
l^f ^ ^K^
otter in (the) water lives.
as to the
^P J
~^
**
>
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
61
7.
DECLENSION. 7.
by
The relations of one noun
suffixes,
to another word, or 1
particles (Teniwova or Tsukd-zi)
by
its
cases, are expressed
which generally have a
),
defi-
nite signification, and, arranged, according to our declension, are limited to the
following.
Nominative (subject) and Vocative.
.
.
wo
Accusative (object direct)
^7
Genitive
Jf ga (pronounced
.
nga,
exact writers often
J
Qualitative Genitive
I'M), ~J]
no, old- Japanese also
among
in-
ka.
-}-
na and
y
tsu, originally tu.
S Dative and Terminative
ve, he or
X ye, e
(wards).
Index of the relation of the Place,
Means and Instrument
3
Ablative
7"
^
nite,
})
yori,
;7 wo alone, which indicates an object direct of declension, signification. it
for
is
the
te.
ni, .
is
7*
de (pron.
~ft
y
tide).
kara (out, from).
characterized as a real form
the other inflections belong to the suffixes, that have their If,
own
notwithstanding, they are here already cited and illustrated,
behalf of those,
who do not
willingly dispense with the ordinary
declensions.
Explanation. I.
NOMINATIVE. The primitive form of a noun
is
at the
nominative, which thus has no inflectional termination.
grammarians the ristic
may
suffix
be of use with other cases,
definite characteristic of the
1)
See Introduction,
2) ,,Keine
altaische
$
In imitation of former
)^ va, vulgo *7 wa, has been considered as a characte-
of the Nominative, but as this suffix also
same time that of the
Nominative
it
is
merely an isolating particle, which
must not be longer considered aa a
(subject)
*).
14. 3. pag. 42.
Sprache hat einen Nominativ."
Typen det Sprach bauet , I860, pag.
186.
H. STEINTHAL,
Ckanuitrutik itr ha*pU*f)ditktit*
62
CHAPTER
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
7.
VOCATIVE. The poet sometimes stretches or doubles the final sound of a noun to
make known,
that his feelings are thereby
affected,
or that he invokes the
This emphatic prolongation of sound, by which the vocal-harmony comes
object.
into play, belongs properly to the interjections,
exclamation
Mnaa!
flower;
torii!
Mi,
mii! (lEl
three;
.
^
(^f
Tori, bird;
To, four; .
and has the same
our
effect as
or Oh!
!
Hdna,
.
,
(
,(^ J
y6o! yowo! ...
u;
7 )
^}
o flower! oh the flower!
o bird!
(
uwo!
As exclamation ^, wo
e. g.
occurs,
with the smell corruption o!
e.
i.
in Irova nivoveto tsirm%ru'w6 = the colour ,
oh!
that the colour with the smell should
vanish! Besides, 37 suffix
and
,
Yi
just as in
German: Feuerio! Mordio!
added to the simple root of a verb
used as an emphatic
is
strengthens the Imperative
,
e.
,
g.
To wo akdyo, open the door! n. ACCUSATIVE.
the verb'
e.
g.
Kusd kari,=
tivus definitus), e.
g.
Kusdwd
indefinite,
verb in the primitive form and the logical accent
the
placed before
If the object direct of a transitive verb is
it
is
grass to
characterized by
mow.
If the object
wo and
karu, = grass (or the grass) to
mow.
If
it is
is
accentuated,
to be brought out
with emphasis as the subject of conversation, then the accusative
by the
particle va besides,
passes over into
and the form
woba, and
Examples. Tori-odosivd
nari,
is
catching-net,
miru, to see the
tdru
a fish catching-net.
mounting
mdtte simowo ts&kgu koto nakdre chief, they
must not charge
J
),
scarecrow
amivd uwow6
- -
of the smoke.
||
toru
is
gu
Midzu kumi, water
Kamird mkumu
Kefurino tokdro o
ba
with that which people disapprove of in their
their inferiors.
In the book on the Middle- Way
J)
Uw6
ndri, the
Ikdno midsuwo kumu, to scoop the water from a pond.
scooper. nobdruwo
fish
isolated
obtained, which for euphony
kedamonowd oddsu mono
-something that frightens birds and beasts.
= the
is
is
frequently pronounced oba.
is
tori
wova
upon
definite (Accusa-
is
same time
at the
falls
it is
The Grand Study (Dai Gaku), X,
8.
(
f|l
^
Cap. IX) after what a
man may un-
CHAPTER dertake of what
is
summed up,
great has been
he cannot keep the
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
cannot,
it
-
Muma sar^woba
rtava nite
korewo sibdru, = the horse and the ape
with a rope (one) binds them fast,"
contains an unnecessary repetition of the
object, characterized as accusative. If the
ivo
in
is
super-
superfluous. (or
along) (
H
through the inland of
indicates a continuous motion
which we
by means of along, through.
express
GENITIVE.
III.
1,
~}f
a definite sense is
,
and has the
effect
in pronunciation sharp toned, cha-
na(^),
ga, nga,
racteristic of the genitive relation,
of ga
on
tsuku, to build a wall
permission to travel
The Accusative employed here
).
perserved, the kordwo
Nipponno bu-naiwo riyo-kau-suru men-g!yo
$^^R ft^SlctT^^^S^)' Japan
is
must remain, the wo being
Kai-henwo isi-kabewo
the seaside, deserves notice.
1
wo ba
Muma sdruva
fluous; if the kordwo remains,
The use of
that can one not keep." The form an accusative. On the other hand the
-
plain, pass for
is
wdb* yo| ife Tsiu-you if it were: >7Vm-youwfr, kortwo
effect,
- but the Middleyokusu bekardzu Way
saying:
but
Middle-Way," which the Japanese translation very cor-
kusu bekardzu. It would have the same
wa
there follows as antithesis:
>^*K*. Iff* *'**/$* v/*Tf B
rectly expresses
Tsiu-you
63
sets
of of
forth the object as something taken in the.
The
genitive subordination by
thence the speaker applies
considered disrespectful;
it
means
only to himself
and to persons and things of which, having higher persons in view, he makes no
case.
One
of
him
but ga
;
says, indeed, is
bailiff of is
Ko
= of the
I, of
not used with those nouns and pronouns
persons are addressed or indicated
Examples.
or Watdkusigd,
Wdregd
,
me, and Are go,
with which respected
2 ).
va Misima-agata-nusi gd oya nari, this
is
the progenitor of the
Kono kamivd N. N.ra gd oya
the district of Misima.
wart, this god
the progenitor of the N. N.s.
Flt6 mina Sukunegd kau-rikiwozo kan-zi keri, each admired Submit* strength.
1)
Netherlands and Japanese Treaty
2)
This
RODKIGUEZ
also
s'emploie cotnme proiiom de
I.
3.
must have meant, when he, according la troisieme persoiine,
par humilite." Let the misprint
Grammar
pour
of 1861
p.
A
to the
les inferienr*,
coin me pronom" be altered
agreement with our assertion will be found. in Alcock's Japanese
al.
pronoun, ga
,
to
et
,,apre$" or ,,pour
does not exut.
18, where we read: ,,f y,
used aa a pronoun in the third person for inferiors, and in the
French edition f 7,
comme prouom de
first
person
le
la
sy:
,/
praniirc,
pronom," and the
The ame mistake
is
met with
n of the genitive in noons,
u
a term of humility."
is
CHAPTER
64
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
Kai-mongd dake, the peak of the to the
sea-port (Kai-mon
7.
the
is
name
of the entrence
bay between the provinces of Odsumi and Sdtsuma).
Sagdmino Miura gd
sdki, the cape of the
in the province of
SagdmL
sublunary world.
FU6wo
sitd
Amegd
Sagdmian Miura (
^
~~J\ )
the cape of Miura
,
under the heavens
,
the
,
nai gd sironi su, to estimate others at the value of
nothing, te consider others of no value.
Kdru, being
the reason of the being so, on account of the state of
=
for
Watdkusigd
ki-
Kdrugd
so,
affairs.
yuejii,
mono, the dress of me.
Ga, no index of the
~Jf
The
particle
ga
Now
the subject.
considered
also
is
subject.
genitive, can also be one of the
an emphatic
is
effect, which
is.>
instance will
ascribed
make
Is there
Now
for it."
arrangement,
in is
to
it
an emphatic
MONEY
and which
for it?"
the question
money
is
There
is
the question:
has the
day's having
/7wa
and the subject
There
which
first
after the
of
to:
become dark
the snbject exists.
2) This instance
1810, letter/.
is
money
is,
i.
e.
there is" lo-
attributive
*).
ga.
The
the answer: Kanegb, drimdsu.
day, and kuretd, become dark. ||
has become dark?
end? as answer, follows: Fig& kuretd = the the day
in Japanese
See Introduction
money
Japanese
the presence (is)"
kuretakd? = the day (as to the day)
must be kept in view that
nition with
y?,
is
brought into conversation,
money," as subordinate
Kanew& drimdmkd?
the
is
genitive, emphatically characterized by
money" changes
day approached
has that
of the subject.
answered by:
the subject,
Another instance consisting of the words
1) It
why ga
reasons,
characteristic
is
placed first and, as a subject
question sounds in Japanese:
e.
cases,
Speaking of an undertaking the question
definition, precedes the predicate, as
The answer:
The
negative.
value of a characteristic of the
its
light the
clear
as
this clear.
gically has the greater weight,
i.
is
by va or wa. In the answer, on the contrary, the predicate
isolated
To
most evidently
considered as an emphatic nominative termination, are capable of
is
genitive, and besides places in a
proposed:
it
definitive characteristic of the
nominative. The answer
a conception, which leaves to this particle
An
definite characteristic of
the question arises, if a particle, which, as
appears from the instances cited,
in which ga
an emphatic
as
has become dark
3 ).
no congruency, properly 80 called, of the predicative
defi-
15 A. p. 44.
taken from the ,,Japansch en Hollandsch Woordenboek van den Vorst van Nakats"
CHAPTER
The Shopping-Dialogues
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
65
7.
are rich in instances, which plead for this conception.
E. g. pp. 1 and 2:
The buyer.
I
The
What
seller.
have come to buy something = WatdkusiTrb kai mononi maitta.
The buyer. What The
you buy ? = Naniwo
whill
there? =
is
kdi ndsdrft
' h-
Ndni ga dri-mdsuka?
There are lacquered goods inlaid with mother of pearl = Awo-gdi
seller.
mono ga dri-mdsu.
The buyer. Are there any gold-lacquered goods? = Mdki-ye mom>wa
dri-
mdsftka?
The
seller.
hand =
Yes, gold-lacquered goods are at
Hei. Maki-ye
monoga
drimdsu. ko
Question:
how do is
they do?
samagatavra, ikdga de irasertire mdsuka?,
- -
Answer: S&dno ko ga sugure masfan
1
your children, the youngest child
),
not quite well. Therefore
come down
is
is,
snows" Yukigo, furn or furi-mdsu, = of snow whereas Yukiwa, furu - with respect to the snow, it is coming said rightly for
it
down, would be a
definition
snow. The same
the case with Fokdno
is
come down," the
which attributes
fundg&
tsuki-mosta
predicate, to the
9
there
),
is
another
ship arrived, properly the arrival of another ship has happened, whereas
another ship --is
no fund-w& tsuki-mdsta, would signify: ject
now
being
another ship" the idea
and on which the attention
is
first
butive genitive of the predicate Altaic languages
3 )
to. which
and in the Chinese
,
also
is
(or was) a
man, Japanese KwaivB,
,
saying of CONFUCIUS:
ficfl^ i
- Hoei's a
man
to
be
-*+
^**
(is),
*\
+.
l^s \/J
\
.*,
A |
}
Hoei
flto to nari.
Hoei
-{{^ *),
is
said.
BROWN
,
Colloquial Japanese t p.
3) STEINTHAI, Characteristik 4) Tschung-yuny ,
Cap. VIII.
etc., p.
I
,
n.
186.
6.
tee! is
On
:in
in the
y\ means
here the subject
the contrary the
on the predicate >to
Hoei was eminently a man."
Familiar diatoytut, pp. I, Copied, with correction, from R. ALCOCK,
2) R.
subject to attri-
Japanese JTwoi'fft/ttrftd
lays the accent emphatically
be a man," which we might express by
1)
U**
attached,
plays an important part. Thus, to
brought under consideration, of which something
9
is
commonly occurs
^ ^ fy
choose a classical expression, the saying [gj
Hoei
the most importance
a phenomenon, that
is
arrived," the sub-
The degrading of the
fixed.
Fokd
CHAPTER
66
worthy of a place here,
Still
BROWN'S remark
R.
is
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
7.
in his Colloquial Japanese , pp.
XXXIII and XXXIV,
his opinion concerning; the power of both particles being fully confirmed by our illustration.
,,Wa, which follow
Wa
it
is
,
around a
of vinculum
a sort
is
word or
isolative particle, serving to separate a
merely an
is
not a sign of the nominative
though
,
words, distinguishing
from the other elements of the propositions....
that
it
seems to be more emphatically
except
but
translatable,
scarcely
is
be expressed by the
to
The
responding word in English.
wa
is
much
spoken of
present,
musters,
but,
would be Kono mihongi kini a
difference
J
No,
2.
or
more
irimas".
The
are.
if
to isolate it or
.
is
them,
native teachers say
as a distinct subject
singled out, being present or conceived to be
Here are the
say of a certain lot of teas; i.
e.
the musters,
as separated
from
it, his expression
would then be, that that particular sample suited him."
idea
these samples
cognate to ni, to be,
,
objects
as
a Japanese should
if
The
familiarity with the Japanese usage.
Kono te-honga kini irimdsu,
here at hand, and
wa and nga
difference between
made between Mi-AonVfA. (properly Te-honwa) kokoni arimdsu, samples
is
.
used for the same
is
buyer, taking one of the samples should say he liked
a
if
or ga (ff)
Nga
The
definitive.
the musters, would be Mihon wa,
his expression for
Thus here
Thus,
specifically.
the original packages,
when one
used
is
.
tone of the speaker's voice, rather than by any cor-
a kind of cordon drawn around a word or words,
of thought, and that nga
predicate
native ear at once perceives the difference , and a foreigner can acquire the
use of these particles only by practice and that
its
of words, and serves to give definiteness to this group of
collection
it
purpose,
from the words that
clause,
frequently stands between the subject and
it
is
-
are
please me.
used for the attributive subordination of
one substantive to another, and gives to the subordinated the character of an
As
adjective.
the use of ga
intended by no;
it
is
limited
is
by
^ ^^
~ :
(
^
i-siyo
(
^\ -f*
^^
ij^
)
,
r
the
Fazimtno
beginning of a year. split in
tosi ,
my
6no
n
also
is
marked
^
3
|^V
impure
V@Ti A!
j>
in the
dissolved
as
elision the
male bird;
tori,
i.
e.
gava
,
Tosino fdzimd,
New
,
tse.
year.
--
Kobe no
Akaganeno deru
silk.
Wa-
the place whence copper comes.
&
K
9
o of no
mendori
is 1
),
^
suppressed as in for
following consonant,
meno
tori,
^
K
9
ondori,
female bird.
The
which in the writing then
is
Sake of one night, becomes
u
Fito-yo-nzake. v
of an ellipsis,
Compare
a beginning year
Kung
Ama no
of the Grand Study.
(nigori), so, Fito-yo-nosake,
That no frequently has
1)
a writing left by
,
garment.
Remark. By way of for
way
)
Nisikino bousi, cap of colored
a wall.
tok6ro,-of copper the birth place,
tdkmin6 kimono,
distinction of person is
Fosi no fikdri, starlight.
the river of heaven, the milky- way.
fima, a
no
used for high and low.
Examples Kousi no Dai-gdku no mitsi
etiquette,
e.
4
,
g.:
A.
2.
^t Remark
still
another particle (case) after
Jf.y ?
p. 52.
^0
<
$j|>
it, is
JJft^y
?
^
the consequence
#|>
CHAFfER Usivo, dsttdnowo dsasivoto ivi,
kurdnowd
called the morning-tide,
is
ning
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
wa amari
mo
tsiisai;
1
yuuxico to /Vw
that of the mor-
tide,
),
that of the evening the
ookiinowo
sukosi
67
7.
Kore
evening-tide.
mise*), this (case)
me
too small; let
is
see a larger one.
Na,
3.
vid.
being"
12), old,
and in the popular lan-
used variation of no, in the mouths of the vulgar at Yedo da
still
guage,
(abbreviation of ndru,
-)-
(pronounced nda)
Simozamana manner, and
3 )
which
,
koto
however
,
(^ ^.)
to be considered as a syncope of de-aru.
baseness, vulgarity, from simo, beneath, taina,
,
Kova
koto, thing.
is
,
na-bakdri nari, that
is
only a name.
AVoma yawa,
bakdrina, mono, something (mono) that exists only in name.
(^
kaneno gawa
Taizid&
wd
(for Tai-zi de-aru) koto
y
Tsu,
4.
metal-brook, or kamino gawa
),
)\\
(^f)
f) also
(
gozdrimasdni'i
(
there
,
^
j(j|jj
is
jfpj"
for
), god's-river.
-
nothing of consequence.
old- Japanese characteristic of attributive relation, appears
?
only in old compounds, instead of no; sometimes, for the sake of euphony,
still
m
after
or n
passes over to du,
it
y and ^, X
instead of
dzu
X
su and
(
zu
^*). The oldest records sometimes have, also.
Examples. Amatsu kami, = of heaven khan, heavenly god.
Ama tsu
the expanse of heaven , the firmament.
Amatsu
Emperor).
Kunitm
the country god. -
try products.
or kunizu (>?
Ivdtsu imo, house potato
-
,
%)
)
5
mono, country objects, coun-
Ira tsu kok6ro, = prickle heart,
).
Aki,
name
Kibitsu
ground way. Instead
of
Sita, beneath, under.
of Japan).
ty*
6 )
^
y
1.
Sltatm
au-
glitter, 2.
Akitsu
Akitsu musi, the glittering insect (Liln'Unln}.
islands (a
Kunitsu kami,
the heavenly (imperial) crown. 4
sora,
the son of heaven (the
Nivatsu dori, the court-bird, the cock.
shrewdness.
tumn.
fitsuki,
miko
Amat#u
Wi,
i/itV#i,
glittering
an under-
Kiln'. take/lkd, the hero of
J L:7
J
,
Otsuko, bachelor, and
^
y
&*,
Otmmt,
X (L) ye, e properly
signifies
ty*
and otome also. spinster, occur in old writings otoko IV. DATIVE and TERMINATIVE.
-^ve
(he) or
2 verso. 1) Jap. Encycl. 57,
3)
2) Shopping-dialogues, p. 3.
From
both forms (7^-9 and 4) In the Nipponki, XXII, 20, 5)
Caladium esculenium.
6)
It
sary
NO
to
to
must seem strange, that the writer subjoin to this
ondzi,
i.
e.
name
the note:
oral
communication by 0. Y. from T4o.
7=7)
occur alternately.
of the Japanese Encyclopedia (78. 8. r.J baa thought
l"
'
TSU, an auxiliary word, the same as NO.
^b
><
57
'
T8t7r*
it
necet-
68
CHAPTER
side or direction,
e.
g.
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
Yamanove, the mountainous
:
direction of (towards) the mountains. -- Yukuv4, the
away.
Mav6, ma yd, vulgo mai =
or ato ye ,
= spur-side
As
suffix ve or
,
backwards
ye answers in
which any thing proceeds
tion in
,
,
all
look- wards ,
respects to our
dite",
,
indicates the direc-
Yedo-*waxds as distinc,
YMoveno
being in Yedo;
1
sou
itsu
=
fit6ve" okuru, to send victuals to others.
Kariva
Tovoki kunive
kamive no-
Ten-lei vd simove" kuddri, tsi-kivd
Motove moddru,
earth rise towards above.
mitsi,
for Japan.
the mists of the sky sink towards beneath (to the earth)
,
fune
wards and
have gone away towards the south.
sdrita, the geese
Atove
Nippon ve no miydke, presents
yuku, to go to distant countries. boru
by which one goes
forwards, before.
e.
Y6do-ve (or Yddo-he)
e. g.
Yedo-waxds road, the road to Yedo.
mindmivd
side,
behind.
tion from Yddoni, in or at Yedo, Yddoni
Examples: Siyok'-motsu wo
i.
side, the side of, the
the mists of the
,
Kara-
to return to the source.
Sagdmino Miurdga sakive feu-tsiyaku-su, a Chinese junk ran
(tteotf)
aground on the cape of Miurd, in the province of Sagdmi.
from the treaty between the Netherlands and Japan. Art.
Instances 17.
II,
Koku-daive furi-watasu, to make known into every part of the realm. -
Gun-youno siyo-butsva Nippon-yak' -siyono fokdve uru-be'kardzu munitions of war ,
may
not be sold to any other than the Japanese government.
zin ve (or ni) taisi
the Dutch.
V,
sul.
1.
(^
Ni indirect as
--VI,
(
9.
^j" ^
2
)
fau wo
(
J^ ^ ^ )
& 2/3.1^^.
^* ^T^"^'
^
n
^
and
object,
is
^'
,
to transgress the
according as the verb, to which
it
reached, or that the object makes
movement towards
Dative
predicate verb to
which,
people
people,
is
is
or is
it.
remote.
as well
means
of,
Thence one says Yddoye
to reside in Yedo.
by Ni may be understood
as:
Ablative, by which, in general, a
collateral relation to the
expressed. E. g. Fitdni tsikdki mitsi, a road,
near.
an
belongs, indicates that the place has been
yuku and Yddoni 6ru, to go to Yedo and
a.
law against
to, in general points out the relation of
therefore used to indicate the place at
relation expressed
Olanda-
communicate to the Con-
^
into which and answers to our in, at, unto, by and by
The
1.
everJ direction, towards every side.
"f), with relation
o
okdsu
V,
F^t6ni tovdki mitsi,
which with relation
a road which with relation to (for)
F'itoni fandruru, separated
from people.
fdnardnu, the silkworm does not remove from the foliage.
Kdvi ko kuvdni
CHAPTER to
Local,
b.
the
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
question
where
or
when. E.
Nusubitd tok6ro-dok6roni ok6ru, robbers
place.
--
6d
7.
Kono
g.
at
rise
toktroni, at this
every place (every-
figdsini nob6ri, nisini im, the sun rises in the east, and goes in the west. -- Ytdoni (down) kiyo-riu-suru yaku-t,'in, functionaries residing in Yddo. Ydmani iri ki wo kiru, = to go into the mountains and chop wood.
where).
Figa
in
Fnndni n6ru, kazdni sardsu
-to be load in a ship (to navigate). ,
to
hang up mountain-herbs on a rope and dry (them)
Kavikoni yamavi dekiru, by (among) the
noon. -- Yuvuni, in the evening.
noon"
Ni va
,
1 )
silk
Kono
todokovoru, to stick fast in speaking.
face of
Yunui-n^'urn tfinim tarn,
worms
in the air.
Iruni
exists sickness.
tosini, in this year.
/Vrui/i, at
Firu-garo dsani ake, yArublni
*//;////,
the
opens in the morning, and closes in the evening.
the relation indicated by ni isolated by va.
tsi-meiniva fan-mei ohosi,
among
(ni va) the
Nan-ltu
names of
,
Txfikdrlt-ben no :
places (J^Jj*
-f
f
*)
^e
country of Nan-bu and Tsukdru strange names are manifold.
Ni va sometimes
changes into nva
elliptically
(
i/
- -
)~^ ).
Aru
tokinird or
dru tokinvd, at any time.
Modal,
c.
to the question
how. E.
the quality of) hereditary Prince.
manner.
Dai-sini tatsi-tamavu^ he appears as (in
Ikdni, vulgo ikdn
Ikd-sdmani, in what (or which) manner.
Ookini, often, very.
-
is
preserved. E.g.
Yani
susumi tsikd-dzukdzu
,
whom, by which
or
by
here also the original signification, atardta, struck with
Fltoni damasareta, deceived by people (others). korite
^), how, in what
Saka~^cmtani% perversely.
to the question of
what, with which, with what, although to,
^
Sttmiyakani, suddenly, quickly.
Casual and Instrumental,
with relation
(-f
Makotoni, in truth, indeed. -- Tadani, mere, only.
Kotoni, particularly.
d.
g.
-
-
Dai-Minno
an arrow.
-
eiva fai-yuani
not Til-Ming's army, confounded by the defeat, doea
approach. e.
Dative of the person,
to the question to
whom.
E.g. Oyani
relation to the parents, to be like, to resemble the parents.
m'ru, with
Fltoni taisu, to
stand opposite others. -- Flto-ni mono wo atavuru (prou. a/^iura), to concede or give anything to others. /.
I)
Dative of the thing,
The
to the question to
flower of Phurbiiis Nil CHOIS, or Ipomoea Nil
what
or to
which,
for
which
CHAPTER
70
the
used
suffix to is
mulberries
Yumini ndvu
for
Nami
fdki-mononi tsukuru
into mats,
kaze
it
to
he will cut
our wards. E.
g.
wards) the west
it
movement
ve
--
Fdknsai
wind changes
i}ie
what,
(to
to within
to (veers to-
fini tsugu, to continue the night to the day.
To wo
KazJ_ ydmite (yande) fun& kisini tsuku, the wind shore.
which
which properly answers rather to
Kaz<[vd nisi-katani kavdru, =
side.
kirite
for food.
an object extends
directed towards
<
can be
it
Asiwo
and give (them)
signifying to
whither,
ndvani
bdsi,
can be worked up into shoes. -
off his feet
or reach, distinguished from
limits
its
Wdravd musironi oru
with regard to straw (waravd),
bdsi,
-
to use cocoons for wadding.
,
into bows.
the direction
provided the
(or taneto) tdru, to take
wind and waves become smoother.
nari,
besi,
Terminative,
whom),
wdta id tdru
can be twisted into rope,
mo tawoyakani
siyoku-motsuni atavu g.
Mdyu wo
wood worked
tsukuruki,
bdsi,
woven
seed.
7.
Kuvdno miwo taneni
E. g.
also. - -
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
yon Nippon ni watdrn, he
lulls
and the ship comes to the
passes from Fakusai to Japan.
Isini
ndru, to turn to stone.
V. To,
^
,
Dutch tot, ter, German zu, a
to,
particle that denotes the inherency
of a substantive in a predicate verb, which expresses a to, in general a working, which has an object for are the verbs nari, to become; nasi, to
make;
kuru, to name; miyu, to seem; kaku, to write, to nari, he becomes, of his
,
called
man. To,
n.
190.
Nite is
to ivu
~^"
,
especially,
rated from
nite
Mdjuwo ma-wata N. va
Vide Addenda
I.
,
called
is
to
tori to ke'site tobi-
Fttd to ivu
away.
to va), that which
serves as a sign of quotation.
in the spoken language
,
characterises
when it
alike
to be called
man,
the so
V. Tote page 343,
passing into nde
,
for
which ^r* (de)
Local and the Instrumental and it
immediately, but
is
is
used, sepa-
by the interposition of the subject or of the object direct. E. g. - in
to cross the river
komakdni kuddku
wo ydsindvu,
the
,
the predicate- verb does not follow
sedonite sivo faydsi,
wo watdru, usii
E.g. Midsukdra toravare-fito
20.
written,
Kono
va (by syncope Fttd
flies
sort
name; nddsu-
ivu, to be called, to etc.
making
Of such
apposition.
to silk wadding.
N. changes himself to a bird and
man; Ftto
its
accord (to) a prisoner.
make (work up) cocoons
nasu, people
yuku
own
or a
becoming
to
rear
,
this strait the tide is rapid.
by means of a temporary bridge.
to stamp rice fine in a mortar.
silk- worms
beings proceeding from eggs.
- -
with leaves.
Kari-bdsinite kava
Komewo Kuvd nite
kdrakdviko
Tamagonite siyau-zuru mono
Fdku-sai-k6kuniteva takawo Kutsin t6 ivu, in
CHAPTER the country of Fdku-sai, the
wo tsukavu nan,
nite
hawk
Aru
called Kutsin.
is
pff
kuniniteva kariko-ami used.
is
in the Middleland.
Hj^T^,
J
71
Morogosinite
Kuni-guninite, in each
with hands; Teniteno si-kata, gestures with hands.
nite,
Fast
to take hold of with eating-sticks.
fasdmu,
y*, contraction of
De,
7.
in a certain country the silk-worm net
va, in China.
-- Te country.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
I.
the relation of
the Local and
a.
and pronounced as nde, characterizes
ni-\-te
the Instrumental,
b.
but
alike
only peculiar to
is
the easy, spoken and written styles. Examples:
Miyakode, at Miyako.
a.
Yumino
below).
tamukeru, to flowers.
sit
Tsilkino motode avu, to
mdsu
awry on horseback.
how many
Fudede kdku,
Yotsu
blood.
Sononede
wa
mumdde
-
kaye mase'nu
^.J^l
Jj[
1.
Tsiwo
*),
sitdde
^ lutt
it
Ica-
maydvu, wander among
Ifllt
teukitrK, to build
waggon drawn with
that price
wa
into
dza
II.
ganwo
a
ardvu, to wash off blood with (or in)
tside
(
^ "V
it is
not to
four horses. -
sell.
The spoken
according to the English
)
5.
The book language generally
J$^
Iside
(for)
109.
Ikkadt dtki-
possible?
with
?), and uses for
-2
is
happen,
fikaseru kuruma, a
writing ja french. gia V.
Remark.
it
to write with the pencil.
language of Yedo Changes de
(
Fdnano
Mftmdno uyfde
insects chirping in the grass. --
days can
temple of (with) stone.
motte
-
-
TsUbamega yanagino fotoride mayovu, the swallow roams around wil-
ka, in
b.
meet with in a dream.
utsi de dvu, to
Kusa nakade naku musi,
lows.
meet under the moon (here
to
wash
expresses the Instrumental by off
.
. .
wo
blood with blood," the expression
Tsiwo m6tte tsiwo araru, = folding or using blood
(with blood) to wash off blood.
Remark. in schools
2.
For the explanation of expressions belonging
and school-books the spoken-language
to the book-language,
used, and this, whenever
is
ni occurs in the book-language as a characteristic of the Local or of the Instru-
mental, generally substitutes de for VI. ABLATIVE. Yori, indicate a
wards,
or
movement
^
s
7 *,
3
>J
it.
and kara,
# y
made, to,
afterwards.
Shopping-Dialogues t
p.
g
gj
|
),
out
of,
from,
in a direction from a place, in opposition to *^s, rv, totill.
If the point of departure
or an action, then yori and kara answer to our
I)
(
8.
from
.
.
to,
is
a period of time,
from, since; after,
CHAPTER
72
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
Examples. Firatoyori Nagasaki made san ziyu fdtsi
38
it is
gasaki
ri
Fdztmd
times.
(Japanese miles).
^
the arrival in the country
3
9
J
from that out high
this
Yori,
warm
mmte
German
i.
is,
Korewd
this is higher,
e.
mark
nari, this cape is a
(
^),
fj|j
thence,
-- Sore kara, so with.
-
^
^^)>
f
fi yori,
from
,
from now.
from the day of Fusi-
take yori takdsi, i.
e.
old
the ^wsz-mountain
sore-yori takdku drimdsu *),
than
that.
Kono misakiva
(medte) out of sea.
thing
comes
3
),
f
"t"1f
there
(kara)
is,
rather peculiar to the spoken lanfor that reason (= koreni
also therefore,
jfc^ ifl^
$
v% % ?
^?
^> Tehon-girega drimdsu kara, korewo Goran-nasare
are patterns at
tori-gakiw6 kudasare
5
hand (drimdsu), please
H^
too late (yohodo-6s6i)
,
I will
G
),
ki,
come).
)
,
miyau-nitsi kaheri masiyoo, as (kara) to day
come back
others ya, arrow, and yumi,
parture in;
since
to
morrow.
derive.
bow,
Preceded by a local
ni,
it is
yori,
(Kara seems
means
Kore-ni yoreri, from that flows forth.
to shoot,
from which,
to belong to the
to have its point of de-
Koreni
ytiriti
or yotte, in
consequence of, therefore.
3)
?
Age-masu kara uke-
see this.
Remark. Yori, verb continuative, derived from yi (#),
among
4
after (kara) delivery (agemasu) please, give a receipt.
),
Kon-nitsiwa yohodo 6s6i kara
1)
as
*
fil
root,
-^)
language seldom, and only in old com-
her, occurs in the written
guage. Kore kara
mj
|||
^=
from which any
direction,
pounds, as in Oki kara, out of sea, and
3
(
springs high,
Wunzen.
Kara, indicating rather the
yotte).
yori
f
subordinated by means of no to another substantive:
oki yori no
the
Ima
^
(
Fusi-yamava Wun-zenga
).
in higher than the peak of the
-
Inisive" yori
Kunini tau-tsiyakuno
,
out of the peak of the
is
-
from the beginning.
yori,
Y y
mountain
-
from Firato to Na-
ri dri,
The Treaty between the Netherlands and Japan, I,
pn"
;fjjj
-^j^
-Hi
4) Shopping-Dialogues,
p.
.
Wa-gun
23.
5.
2) Shopping- Dialogues
siwori , under Kara. 5)
Ibid. p.
14.
6)
Ibid. p. 41.
,
p.
35.
II.
PRONOUNS. \
8. I.
II.
The Pronouns
Nouns which
in Japanese are:
express a quality.
Pronouns demonstrative, which
or thing according to
They
are
its
point out something, either a person
relation to the speaker.
subject to the ordinary declension, and which the genitive suffix,
all
no, are used as pronouns possessive.
The
distinction
of
three grammatical persons
mained foreign to the Japanese language (the I), as well as that to
1
).
re-
All the persons, that of the speaker
which or of which
he speaks- (Thou, He), are
and thus, according
sidered as contents of the proposition
Thou, He) has
(I,
on-
to our peculiarity of
language, in the third person, and etiquette, having in view the meaning of
words expressive of quality, has to determine, which person, by one or another Etiquette distinguishes only between the
of these words
is
the
abases the one,
not-I,"
which in
it
this sort of
quette makes of
1)
intended.
Therefore,
as
it,
it
is
will
expression of this distinction.
and
words comes
exalts the other. Thus,
first
under notice,
Mon*
it
is
the
I,"
and
the meaning. us.-,
that
i-ti-
indicated.
be seen hereafter,
the
verb
has no ronjiigational snfnxc*,
which tend to the
CHAPTER
74
With
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
II.
use of the qualifying pronouns
respect to the
book language and the conversational I.
Qualifying nouns, which
A. For the
8.
especially, the written or
from each other.
differ
are used as pronouns, are,
I":
M Yatsu-k6
fjf?), pron.
(
Yakko, = house-boy,
written language. -- Yatsii-kare
(^^^i^),
Yatsu-bara (^Jj} ^j^'l), the
The Chinese
j^
^^
^ j^*
valets,
we
subjects.
Jap. gu, unintelligent, in compounds, as:
yfi,
,
Gu-nin
'
Gu-sa. the unintelligent.
man
the unintelligent
,
ppt^ CX
^- ^
Jj?k^
-^-^' Gu-sau, the unintelligent herb
7
j^
.v*
t~l
^
^*
Tgr
Gu-rau
,
A^^? *^
jeB^"
Gu-sin,
my
,
Nandzi fitoga me wo
Imasi
one another with Nandzi.
tsukete oru,
^^
(
)
to
Sanaa
(^^^
^j||^
,
= present
leaves
,
^fc
.
^
.
ffi>
.
to you.
uncertain
it
,
whether a
.
= the look, appearance, shape, ^9l^)> vulgo San,
Mindtono sdma yosi, the shape of the harbour
is
beautiful, the
e.
g.
harbour looks
was, originally, as a characteristic of modesty, applied by the speaker
well,
to himself;
speaker,
it
since
4. "gimi
(
the middle ages, however,
now
is
answers to our
^"
Te-maye
*J~)
conceded to a person beyond the
generally used as an expression of respect and at present
Sir, Mister." ,
Sir
,
It is subjoined to
Mister
;
Kimi-sama
N. N. kimi-samaye,
nour, lordship. 5.
.
Nobles, and
style,
you together, or every one looks up
person speaks to his betters or inferiors. J|5 ~f 3.
f^
nandziga-tomo-
,
you have attracted the eyes of the people.
shortened m&si
,
plural nandzira
;
language and to the solemn
Tdmi tomoni ndndziwo miru, the people look up
having a name,
originally Na-motsi,
,
gara. It belongs to the written literate persons address
I" of the Bonzes.
the
),
THOU:
name bearing renowned honoured
,
1
heart.
Nandzi (|^^), formerly Ndmiidzi,
name-having
I.
,
the unintelligent old man.
,
B. For the person spoken to,
2.
your servant.
valet,
'
*
1.
valet, servant; belongs to the old
(-=f*^
^0
"'),
to
Mr.
(
nouns and pronouns.
^" ^ ^| *")
life;
vulgo Kimi-san
ho-
NN.
vulgo Te-mai, Te-mee, = at hand, indicates the per-
1) Corporal, only to vegetate from the example of the Lotusplant,
duty of the Buddhist's
,
but to make the
thence the clerical (Bonze) considers himself as an herb.
spirit free,
is
the
CHAPTER son spoken
to.
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
II.
75
8.
Plural Te-maye-Wsi, vulgo Te-maird, Te-mee-tatsi. Te-mdye-sdnm .
vulgo Te-mdye-sdn, the gentleman at hand (present), you, Sir; plur.
Te-maye-
sdma-ydta.
On, O ($P**"), Ki conversational language the person, to
whom
Japanese authors
,
(1p
J|*), Son
honorary adjectives, used in the
and in the epistolary
or of
On, O ($P**,
6.
(
whom
abbreviated
|^ *
J^J.
f^.
.
an abbreviation of ~fc
names of things or matters that have applied by the speaker to respect
/.
your name.
Your honour.
0-ide, your
welcome! -- 0-agdri, your on!
0-negdi, your wish. if
e,
you plase."
bumi, your
letter,
as given
g.
any person in honour, and
rise.
As
a Japanese element on or o Yeilo.
let
me
may you
may your
rise
may your wish, the
rise
is
D-kola,
0-iw, "-
-
appear before your eyes.
0-agdri nasard, =
0-negai~tn6.se ,
-- 0-mise,
that the things or matters have
-- Y6ku 0-ide nasard,
rise.
his
and verbs, makes
0-Y4do, the princely
I shall
,
.
happen = be
happen, come
common
expression
see! -- On-tdd&unt, your inquiry.
-
">
-
etc.
In old- Japanese the place of On,
is filled
by Mi, thence J//-XWo, sublime
mountain. port; Mi-koto, Highness; Mi-ydma, chief 3 7. Go, the koye of O, is generally prefixed to Chinese words. It fjlp but from politeness
princely,"
by
however, prefixed to the
0-mi, the honoured body, Your-self
0-meni kaMri-matfyoo
eye.
it is,
o before substantives
the speaker.
beyond
compounded with Japanese words,
Your
.
beyond himself, for which he wishes to make
all
known, without the help of another pronoun,
the honoured side,
(^. tj v^),
60 , 6ond , great , sublime , answers to
reference to
known. Thus the presence of on or
reference to a person
pronouns possessive, of
spoken.
His or Her Highness" referring to a prince;
our
for
style as
is
also
means
used towards other persons beyond the
speaker.
Go-won, your favour.
-r,ii>,
Go-yon, your use. ~ ... n~ *.,,-, y 0ur wntmg.
-,.--? at ^
t;,,-k,ni-i.
,
your friendly
feelings.
^
9
*"
5
your look.
>
Go-sen before you in your ,
,
-'
^1 ?
'
Go-'Qu-**"'
venation. presence.
Go-za, sublime
seat.
'
sitiou. i
y ur permission.
G" **"*
*
~ y ur con
CHAPTER
76
O-maye, 6-mae
8.
(fjljj^
or ma-ve, - look-wards, that speaker,
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
II.
~jjft
^), vulgo 6-mai
8.
from the honorary o
,
before, thus something that
is
aiid
ma-ye
present before the
is
him imagined present and honoured, = Your Honour. The
or as by
lower classes of functionaries and small people
one another omae and omde-
call
sdrna , omdesan. Formerly by 0-mae was meant the place before tbe prince; thence;
Emperor.
Npn
II, 4,
^
p 7
Ki-kokn
'
Ki-ken f ^/ '
you" in genuine Chinese compounds,
t
wn
your
-
^' Ki-MyOi
ki-so,
^
your place,
Ki-tf'd-ff
f'
Ki-
f
Ki-men, your countenance.
f
,
'
^> ^,
your
^^
face.
'
ji^^
,
j7 s/j/o,
ki-so,
^, Ki-mei, your 10.
^
^
^"f,
,
^
^
i
~)j'+,'>
Son-kun, the worshipful gen-
^
*
HI
^
7 ,
Son-fu, the worshipful father,
^- ^
Son-bo
,
your mother.
Ki-fyu, ki-hoo, your
side.
,
your Honour.
your" in Chinese compounds, as:
/
i-kdk, the worshipful guest,
my ,"%,
guest.
Son-sau, the worshipful herb,
you, Bonze. ^, Son-tai, your body, your person.
your father. y
jfiTz-
Ki-fen,ki-hen, your side, your
'
tleman, your father.
^
-Ki-deni your Excellency.
^ Ki-sama
Sir.
Son-kou, the worshipful gen-
Ki-koo, ki-koo-sama, the no-
Ki-foo sama.
your writing.
Son, worshipful, reverend, =
tleman, 3
letter.
command.
your answer.
Excellency. Ki-fen-sama.
,
^
,
den sa,ma.
f Ki-kan, your pencil, your pen. S' Ki-zat, your
Ki-too
ble Lord, your Lordship.
Ki-ran, your look,
,
^
your house,
,
'
swer.
your Excellency.
^
7
I
care.
anKi-fau, ki-foo, your J ^ ^o
^lz2Jr I* ^>>>^
district.
y ur canton.
,
as:
your country.
your
?
-Ki-
T'
!
y ur
-K"'-/M i
'
to step before the
r.
lH'*, Ki, noble, honourable, =
9.
Omaeve maim,
**,
Son-gaiy your limbs.
CHAPTER
f
^^ >y S
n ~y u
'
II.
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
your appearance.
i
Y
^tS
'
Son-ran, your look.
fir
'
Son-fgu, the worshipful side,
fr
,
P-
'
~Jj f
^LS'
'
letter.
^ Son-sfyo, sort-so, your writing.
ttfj
f
^i$$ *'
'
Son-kan
,
your
L-
I! *^
>)
i"v 3' bon-nyo, your care.
y
^t^"
??
^ -^ p
,
y
>
*
"R
,
c oon-foo , your answer.
$ cw -^vm ?y our pencil? your pen.
y ur
^
S' Jli ~l ! tu
*
Son-k
that which
'.
,
the worshipful; the
letter.
will.
v
1-^^^'
^| '
f
Son-zat, your
|L
i
&<-', your o
'
IH f
77
8.
e
-
is
below
I" of the modest
speaker.
In proportion as any thing belongs to the speaker or to a person beyond frequently mentioned under different denominations, to express
him,
it
desty
on the one
is
sumed on
side,
and respectful politeness on the
abundance of names, and ample use
this
is
other.
As much
names of human
pre-
made of them, we may
not entirely overlook them here. They occur in popular books under the Particular
is
mo-
title
of
relations
i-rrtiyqu).
One's
own
father
is:
Ka-ku.
,
Another's father
s:
Gen-knn.
.
A *> Ka One's
own mother
^^-^r^, H
7
.to.
/Li
^
V
One's
x
own
is:
Another's mother
A
^
^
Zi-bo.
Rau-lo. eldest brother
Another's eldest broil n-r
Ka-kei. >
******
CHAPTER
78 One's
own youngest
II.
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
8.
Another's youngest brother.
brother
Ka-tei.
J,
?, A-tei. %, A-slyuk. A-tsiu.
'
One's
m
own
X S* lK
/?
son
-y. ?, X HP /
is
Another's son
:
/-,
'
,
(jrU-Sl.
^yj"
One's
own
m. I i- t l
A.
wife TV-
#.
-4-i:
^
^
own
One's
^
f0l| 17"J
One's
^7
(
,
Seo-seo.
,
Kei-seo.
^^ ^y^
Soku-sits.
.
country and town
1 *^
ill
1
#)
is:
Another's concubine
.-
Rei-tsnjou. Sei-tslyou.
Another's country and town
3
San-ken.
Ki-koku.
,
ben-ri. Fei-ri.
*
,
Ri-ken.
*
t",
^
.
'
,
''
\
.
^Y fl|' &* Hf
o
'
LI)
Rei-sits.
^, Sai-kun.
-y
concubine
own
^ ^ u
(
Sen-sits.
,
it r ,
Kan-kiyqu.
s:
Ran-giyok.
,
Nai-dziyo.
.
/
^
Siu-si.
^ ^ Sit
.
^
Sen-sai.
,
v
.
-j\ 3
^
Another's wife
:
Kei-sai.
lit. ,
>yc
is
J^
-f' ^, Rei-si.
^
^y ^ ~j Htj
(
JHf
,
^'-^w.
5B^
^'-^-
M
Kin-n.
prf
T7--
I) ' ,
s:
CHAPTER
own
One's
$S^ I^Y' !^l^
Ht^>
/T ^
>QE/7'
D
iM
Jj8[
l^f
^>
own
One's
dwelling place
^" ^ B'a
^
5
8.
79
Another's dwelling place
Kiiva-siya.
Kuva-sits.
Kau-tei.
^,
Kftra-tei.
>
^,
Ran-bau.
>'*,
Kan-siya.
letter
i
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
Toku-ro.
'
^^ ?
"\T ^
II.
'
Another's letter
s:
*
Sun-kau.
,
Siyu-t6ku.
it
^
f
'
? ft*.
Da-un. ASati-^an.
/.
,f'
3
* ,
Gu-kan.
\_
Pronouns proper, which
II.
^M
'
^ " c
point out objects with distinction of the place
they occupy in space. They are formed from adverbs of place. 1.
Wa
^7
(
king, to his 2.
A
are:
pointing to the centre of space, therefore to the person spea-
),
I."
y
(
They
),
anywhere, elsewhere,
indicates a place not sufficiently
known
beyond the speaker. 3.
Ka
( ~f]
4.
Ko
(
5.
Yo(jj7), yonder,
defined,
there, indicates a
),
here, indicates a
I? ),
definite,
more
distant place.
definite place in the neighbourhood.
which
indicates a place,
is
beyond a place already
and serves to suggest the idea of other, Dutch
<
ionium
/rr
andere, dussere. 6.
So ()/), so, indicates a place already mentioned or imagined as men-
tioned, and serves to form the reflective pronoun. 7.
The
and Itsu
(
interrogative elements -^
y
)
or Idzu
(
re?" and to the Latin qu in
^f
Ta
(
^?
)
or
To
^*), answering quis? quid?"
-
(
to
]^ r//
),
vulgo
in
j% and "^
Da
(
^) or Do
(
}<
),
who? which ? what? wheis
the written form occur-
ring in old books, that now, in accordance with the pronunciation of the people,
CHAPTER
80
is
PRONOUNS PROPER.
II.
^
more generally superseded by
and
To
).
Wa
the immediate compounds with the root
Wa-nusi
(
-^
^
3E f
)
proper master
>
form
first
perhaps be
may
and engravers.
attributed to the inaccurary of writers a.
The
J
^
8.
,
the master
(own, proper) belong: the master of the work-
,
people.
Wa-dono
(
Wa-nami
^ ^^
( ^jj-
Watakusi
1
jjjz
^jjfr
t)
or our master.
my
*),
the proper row, we.
,
(^ ^),
the
I," plural
Watdkfai-ddmo, we, among people of
fashion, and in the familiar language the ordinary
commonly abbreviated
It is
pronoun
for the first person.
Watdksi or Watdks, and Watakusi vd to Watdksd,
to
whereas the porter at Yedo says Wdtski. Wdsi or Wdsi, and the servant-girl
Whoever
Watdi.
Watdsi,
not wish to put himself on a footing with the
does
mentioned should, thus, use Watakusi.
last
About the meaning of panese etymologists keep .that subject always
now
tdkusi , the second element of this
adv.
popular language,
greedy,
whence the verb
tdkn,
^
Ko
J
3 (
j||
),
j^p
,
Compounds with Ko
Doko
tdkusi to desire,
to be
F
(^rf
:7
j||
),
Dokoni or Dokode,
at
',
into
place, region, 2) Tsi
in the popular language also Tsutsi
compounds indicate a place or 1)
desirous, in use
Thus Wa-tdkusi means self-love, egotism, and is tan3 ^ the ordinary Chinese compound self-love, egotism. $fa
1)
way, tract
(^^o
ffi
what place?
(
^
=f- ),
^-
)
plural tsira
province
,
,
(
^-
etc.
J
),
These
^
Dokono
which place?
(
immediate composition with
and are, as nouns, declinable.
places,
at
whence
tsurugizo,
this
sword? -
Dokovd or Doko yd,
what place?
Doko ye ydkuka, where
wards which place? whither?
is
it
to-
going to? whither
going?
Koko
3 (llfc
JH^
Kokode wakdru, herein S6k6
1)
(^^, vulgo J|)i greedy,
The remaining adverbs of place enter
words as
it
our question directly proposed on
derived.
is
tamount to b.
,
remained unanswered. Referred to our private judgement, we
recognize this word as the tdki
in the
is
likewise,
silence;
compound the Ja-
(^
Wa-gun
y
itt^j^f^o lies
^ ^ 3
siwori, under Tare.
^% S!')'
the difference. a
y j^lf
}i
this
Kokoni
Place oitd,
'
tere
'
Koko
or
herein.
pron. sko, such a place, the place of which
is
CHAPTER
cate
the
or
spoken,
of
place
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
8.
something, pointed out,
the person spoken to; plural sokora
(jt
y
81
II.
serving formerly to indi3
^f
ffi
?
S6ko-m6to, for
).
dsok6-moto = the seat there, serves as pronoun for the person spoken to: Thou,
S6ko-m6to naniwo kurdsu zo? in the spoken language: S6ko-m6to Ikdga kurdsi nasdru, how do you do? literally: how do you let (the time) go round, how
You.
-
do you wind round? where.
Doko
-
Asoko, pron. dsko - of some where the quarter, any
Kdsdkd, vulgo kdsiko kdsikd,
(
which quarter? -
-
there yonder.
$
j|
Koko
Kono yamayoii
)
,
= the place of there, that or yon
and yon place, here and
kdsiko ni, at this
kasikono
place.
remove from
to
yamave utmru,
this
mountain to yonder mountain.
Yoko, because
means
it
place, elsewhere.
cross"
litsuru, to
Yosoye
not to remove to elsewhere,
Idzuku
is
i.
e.
superseded by Yoso
remove
l>
(
to elsewhere.
s
to stay firm at (or in) one's place.
Some
kuniwd idzukude gozdrimdsu, your country
what
is
Idzukuyd, whither?
*, which
is
the
man?
-
Idztku
to every-where.
Idzukuye m6, whithersoever,
is it?
whence has he come? -- Idzuku yori m6, whencesoever, from every
ydri kitazo,
-
place whatever.
-
Idzuku ni
driizo,
where
idzukunkd yuku, whither
Idzukunzd,
-\
"J
Idzukonizo, -\y*i
meaning of
at
^X,
"^
^X,
^
*).
also,
force of
at home.
is
^7
ft?
*),
Uri
the ox going? originally
Idzuku nizo,
-f
7*^=X,
from the elements, of which
it
is
what place? where?", answers nevertheless
ground? why?" The
is
he? Iy4ni aru, he
is
Idzwkunikd, or Idzukunkd, where? whither?
Doittite*).
Q
which country
Idzuku no fitdzo, from what country
your country?
uas
consider
an abbreviation of kuni, country, and consequently write ft'* country?
f), another
J$
Yotoye ugok'mu,
||*^)> old- Japanese Idzuko, which place?
('ffif 1.
3
and with
this
meaning
is
old-Japanese
composed, has the to our
ranked with
T
A an
>on what to rtte
and
Idzukunzd appears most plainly in the Japanese transla-
tion of the Chinese expression following:
Kare idzukunz6 korewo sirdnt
Zl u/
tiu>
shall
= he
there on
what ground (why)
he know this?
The
speaker's object here
1) See p.
68, line 8 from the bottom.
8)
3) See
85.
4;
p.
*)
^
*^
fj?
is,
not to draw out an answer, but
MINCIVS (LIOOE, Ctimtir Cbftic*, Vol. II,
VoL
I.
Book
I.
Pt. I. Ch.
6
p.
l).
VH.f 7).
CHAPTER
g2 he will have
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
the assertion, but even understood that he not only doubts
it
one does not
convinced of the contrary: If the question proposed
known
by Idzukunzd
is
is
it,"
affirmative, as in the instance quo-
in view, the speaker has the negative contrary
ted,
II.
8.
if
however
it
is
negative,
then the positive, as in the phrase:
O
Imdda firokardzu? Kau-mtyau idznkunzo
pJ^
be spread everywhere?
The
>g *v
affirmative question
nardn? -
.
why
convinced, that
f
Jjjf
should his fame not
Why ^f t ^
fr
^
Idsukunzo ka-
i
that be" possible? implies that the speaker
shall
it is
is
form: Idznkunzo impossible; the negative
,
kanarazdranf =
why
The Chinese
_^
^
not be possible?,
a consequence of the con-
is
must indeed be done.
viction, that it
_,
shall that
characters,
3
/p
.
JOg*
word 'only the termination the force indicated only,
which are used # J=L
mo
is
^
-ii
to represent
3
3
Jjlf
Ijlf
* Idznkunzo are
^flE
^ ^ ne
'
j|
J a P aneSe
These characters have mostly found added.
when they occupy
a place before the verb of the pre-
a direct end of a sentence, where some occur likewise, they imply
dicate; at the
question. 2)
Compounds with Tsi
(^^
where? Do-tsi, which place?
%&*}
way,
,
place.
- Dottira, which places? - Dotsiye, whither? -
- Dottira karamd mukdi-dvn, to meet to everywhere. Dotrirayemt, whithersoever, it may be (from all sides). each other from whatever places
A-tsi (%\>
7
Atsvra, elsewhere.
J^),
kotsi to, plural kotsi or Otsi kotsi, Atsi
- -
Ko-tsi
(^ a
3&^),
here. -
Atsira kotsira, elsewhere and here, here and
there.
So-tsi (:
person, of
y
whom
serves to indicate the old-Jap., his place, plural Sotsira,
3f*), it is
spoken.
-- SoUira kotsira, those (the persons) there, and
those here. 3)
Compounds with
Tsutsi.
Do-tsutsi, which place? c.
The adverbs of
termination
#,
place
- Do-tsutsive, Ta
(vulgo Da) and
ga (pron. nga), which
Taga, vulgo Daga, or Darega, whose.
whither?
is
Wa
-
with the genitive possessive
written fj mostly, but improperly ,
(pron. Da-nga), arisen, perhaps
- Ddga
^ka,
whose house
will there be? arau (or aroo), whose compassion
(is
ka.
by syncope, from Tarega
this) ?
who
,
- Ddga awarM-koto
will
have compassion?
CHAPTER _
Wanga, own, mv
pron.
.
W^
wh lc h course^o from Waka, ^^iv
^o
r^f, also contracted
turn
home.-JTa,,
own
beloved,
my
m
my
own
(Sft & *
*n
-
behoof; I for
dg* mtntni sKd,
my own
I have
mononi ^a, he has made mavent, =
Mvu,
own
his
it
-
it.
Wdga
thence Agakimi
^ (WJ W
Adzuma,
suffixing
Wdga ttmo
ndi,
it is
de nai they
- *+*** not arbitrary.
fltd
of elsewhere,
view.- Wd<# t*m
own
sake.
-
WuJ
Ware
property. - Kare
sorM
property, he has appropriated
6ga
-
it.
its
mat, sitting
A
for
own
still
W
nya ma*ni it
Ago
my
Sir.
abbreviated for
beloved,
toa-
whenerw
hand*.
Wa, we meet with Aya
(^ ^>
abbreviated for Agatsuma,
eats,
my
husband
(
for
Wag*
- Aya FoAy*b,to? r db *),
no, the adverbs of place become pronouns possessive; that
Ano
(TS any
f1,t6
(7S% 2),
C S),
after the
one, he.
tatsi,
Ano
- -
Ytdo pronunciation: Ant kt6 and A*6*6t
Ano onna ()V 9
fttd gata, the
contracted Andta
men
(7t*),
*
\
),
a
woman
w
there, those people, they.
the side of elsewhere,
is
thou (you); plural AndtA pfta.
dewd gozdri-mastnu; watdkwi
myself,
zi-sinni
it
is
man
of elsewhere,
polite indication of the second person,
it
-
Ano, Kano, Kono, Yono, Sono, Dono, Idzuno.
And
kdta
wd
de)
de ni, with one's
-
*
t
_'
Pronouns possessive.
By have,
-
ff:*), abbreviated Agimi and Agi,
our Buddha.
^
SK
(
(fp j|^).
wife d.
she.
J)i
(|$ J.
mt
>I" in a woman's
- Kavilco *6n6 stJdwd sardzu, wit*, k*vd mo
before
~"^
subject of discourse, whether the speaker, or a
In the old-Japanese, which used
my
my own
the silkworm does not leave
food comes
son.
JPilfa
relations or clan, we.
m^ni- (or
that
before the I" of the
being beyond him.
also;
*e
Wdga t6mo o^.
own
....
son. -
sake, or he for his
made
udtive countrv
_ Wtga 1m ao( m*
,
Wdga
-for diatineti.,
home
rikntsuw6 tattnu, not to persist in one's perverse
own
rtbd,
J
t6mo-gdra, one's
authority, arbitrarily.
Wdga for
^/itown
JZ.
~
rr K'
-
person, ray person, --
Wtga
mvj
ra , he return8
Wdgatdtsi, one's own station, we. are not of ours.-
house.
- Wdgim6ko, old-Jap, for
TF<% a
body, one's
-j-
own
^^ %,
W,,a
wife.
II.
according as the subject of dis-
own countrv ^
,
tsoo).
wn
Wqiyt,
M
wife. -
little
Waoa
(or
nw n,
or his
g.
the speaker or another person,
is
W/inn Kimi i^i^-f ruga,
_
_i.w.
\.
-fers,
v Aug. vounsr. j
5
PRONOUNS PROPER.
II.
not yon;
I
Ano
Used at a
An&* hare done
04
CHAPTER
Ada (7*), Ware
to used with the signification of other, opposed
is
Anda,
Pron.
Mino, own and MidzuMra,
I
8. II.
PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
II.
self.
the other world. K^okisi (*; * *), the bank (or shore) yonder, Kano fttd, that man. kata, yon side. Kono tott, this time, this this world, this life. Konoyo (3 ; 3), Kono aida, between with relation to time, since. Kono kata, this side,
-
-
-
-
meanwhile.
*"
ft ]J
therefore.-
for this cause,
-Konoyntni,
t
articles.
same as
else; the
%,
rono
FMno /
to
son
(^ ^, *^ **-)* (M* A^ ^f A - 8M* ^6
mentioned.- Yono
that has been already
one
on the outeide, other, with reference
(3 S ), without,
Tono
,
?> or
(
whom
of another physician than he,
%,
option.
is
it
an additional physician.
(:?),
S6n6 ,4no
/W
^ !**. ^
MM) ***
- fV6
ohject
his, its.
fM^sdnu,
btt6 titoO sdsidsfontwt
one misses his aim.
arrives at his place,
= each one misses not his aim,
- Kun *M Ur,Uni so-M oh***, -si
to his station, what the nobleman acts according
-SMmi,
long for
men must (
*
"
B*
his body, himself.
B
M
)
,
fore
or after the
-Sono
to
do,
sono mini motomu,
^
^
; T&. +>
pronunciation:
(^^
ffi*
)i
.
oto Sono moto
(
to
5 '
upon.-Soo
yi,
else, otherwise.
SMI
tM-^Kro'
F
"),
at t
KMri-M
the god of the
at this place.
ace where
moon-bow
Tsuini
also.
,
/*.,
yon
SM
undertake
someone
- JTom.no dwells.
VMsivo ka
^o
-
for that cause, so,
- &mo
ti
toMni, thus
side, the familiar
ho (JtJ #3>. Pk it! = Nandn ka,M,.
domicile or seat, for
"
6
vyi(^^
*w|, moreover, besides,
S
you; vulgo
ff*) = yon
~ ^ ^ J "^
^^ ^ ^.^2^' Sono _t
contracted: Sonata, his (or its) side,
Nad*i, your Honour,
uk&e
(ff
fi
fljSono fen (iB^ y y thereafter. )
(-#s&' J. ^ ^ ^ ^ y
YMo
.
to,
&
nor
xM,
fttdwt
beyond that, he
is
- AyamcrtsM
- Sono
behind that, thereafter, there
Sbno for
there.
that point of time. nAttf ooTio notsi
abouts.
sono
themselves. seek for the fault in or with of the act that ^ b time , such a period , the period j| || ?) , its
tin, ju^been lenfened,
(3t $0),
h
you,
ye.'
moto, seat of gods.
mor^-^o^too *** m ino m otoni
receives the divine charge
(
ftp
)
and descends. At length
CHAPTER
PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
II.
comes to the seat of the goddess of the harvest. have brought.
Kuni-gum
no
nite iro-iro
H.
8.
85
Sono moto
motsi-kita ,
you
i-fau art; ono-ono sono ydr6Akin{ Ata-
gavu besi, in every country different ways of acting exist; people ought to keep to the best (yordsiki) of each (ono-ono-sono).
Sono
his share.
Ta no
T6 no
or
-
where?
D6no
-
who
as the
whom,
or to
whither,
are
who?",
how
yau na,
(
*)
to his pleasure.
it
,
-
-
D6no
or
tokdroni,
fa
polite interrogative
Donna
fa t )
(
at which
place?
--is
Donatdye yuk* zo,
Donna
(fa t ^^y), which matter? which way? how? Yort dono P f on. dono ydo,
*
Htp>
kotozo
the night?
is
In the popular language Dono yau or D6yau resolves into Doo, which written
or
Thence: Doukd (-^-*), pron. ddokd,
also |~'.
D6u m6,
how?
how
the matter
however. V. page 326. is
is
it
how
will people
Dou-si, = so to do.
-
-
z6,
to
D6u-sit6
ndi to iwareu
sdmukqu
how
is
do? (
fa
Ka-yau-si c
fa ]%
(
o
$
*
Jj^j ),
^
2^),
e.
Ano flt6no
name? -- Kortwa will it
be good,
= how doing?
could people say, that
it
is
Dou-At4 mak6to dt
not true? --
War4
should I be against it?
how done? how?
D6usttd koto gd dr&, what sort of matter
used adjectively.
- what
his
=
contracted Kqu-si, Koo-ti,
Dou-sit& (an abbreviation (apocope) of Ddusltdr*), -
kotozo,
2^^,
koto ted doundttaJcd,
by what making
this,
f
is
have to make this?
^o,-how
how
what
called?
dou tsuknriti ydkardo kd, - what concerns e.
Ano
122. 1.
I.
Douz6(fa
become? what has become of the matter?
(it)
nd wd dou iukd, = his name how
i.
,
D6natd ga anatani kortwo 6*iyr-mdAta
you going?
has taught you this?
D6no yau
*o
u, = each gets
kdta, or contracted D6nat&, which (what) side? where?
same time used
at the
kd,
,
which (what) man? who?
fttd,
ka^e
_fi:^ ijt ^ _S^) Da no or D6 no ( fa commonly (
teo
which? what?
the interrogative
D6no
makdse
ni
i
Ono-ono-sono bun
sort of matter?
is
there?
is
Dotuttti
what matter?
Substantive pronouns.
By refer to
suffixing re the adverbs of place
something
present in a place.
become substantive pronouns, which
(whether person or thing, remains undetermined) as being
The termination re
by a mutation of sound, has
arisen
is
indeed an abbreviation of are, which,
from or, to be. The pronouns thus formed
are declinable as every other noun, with the genitive termination no, are used as attributive adjectives, and, in this form,
answer to our pronouns possessive
86
CHAPTER
(mine,
thine"),
Ware, *7 I/
II.
also, in
which case
noun, are declinable.
The substantive pronouns 1)
8.
however, used as substantives
they are,
they, as every other
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
the
are:
I," understood as that which
is in the midst, in the which the (wa), by person thinking or speaking supposes himself surrounded. The characters used for it are **5& ^ # ftl ^^Si ^T- o Ft o tt o 3, V& o ^ >H o v o 1 _^ The Mikado uses for I" D for which Tsm, formerly Maro JJ} ,
circle
^
We ^^
^
^& ^
.
(jjfc-
was used, which word however has
The Tai-kun generally
Ware
%*)-
uses for
A
(^ t
fit6
(^ ^|||^,
wasuru
wareno nari ($
^
tj
^
Or
*
)
forget the I,
j*, t
,,),
when
conversational,
Are,
German refers to
- Kono
kdsava
1
mine
).
Ware domo, we;
Wdrerd(^^^}^
ours.
Ware properly belongs
2)
Ware icarewd
I forget myself.
this hat is
Plural: Ware-ware, Wdre-ware-dznrt,
Warerdgd,
- -
)
(not to be confounded with
the I and another.
,
g
become an appellative of youth.
^ ^ S
I"
bo
I
at present
Y
to the
book-language, nevertheless
the speaker exalts his
\^ (ffi
j),
er; plural Are-are,
Then
I."
something that
is
some where,
something (person or thing) of which no case his book.
Areva
tare?
mi-tdi, I long to see
there, also
it,
he, she,
he or
just as
it,
it,"
made.
is
= something what?
him
In old- Japanese Are occurs, as a variation of Ware,
Aremd, = that
used in the
is
answers to our WE.
it
Arera, Being short in matter
Arega hon, that one's book, what is it? who there? Arewd
it
(or
i.
e.
it).
I.
A-itsu and Ko-itsu - that there and ,
this here, or
A-itsume", Ko-itsume" are opprobrious terms.
Ore
iSL^)' variation of Are, in the mouth of a plebeian of Yedo 6ra,
with derogation to another person, whereas from humility, the speaker,
refers
with
(S*
it,
also designates himself.
Oreva fitowo
iydsimete ivu kotoba
mentions another disrespectfully; in
nari;
kou-sei
later times persons
^
3)
Kare,
>(/
I/
4)
Kore,
I?
I/, something that
1) Here an eUips
takes
(
^c
place,
as
the
o
midzukdramo have applied
|g), something
word
but once. Comp. pag. 66, line 4 from the bottom.
is
here,
E^a,
i.
Ore
it to
that
is
a word, with which one
belongs
-
Fu^.koiono
there, he, she,
this, (^iff*
which
is
themselves.
to
^M
Wareno
2x*A-
also,
is
basi.
it, that.
^s*).
expressed
CHAPTER
Kortwa amari
and
those
these.
-
^f"")'
(itfc
and tne
The
yV
yotte
so!
often superseded \>j
is
Kova
-
human
the progenitor of the
is
'
(5fe
c
-- Sore kore so or such.
toUm
hour
(till
itdru
the next hour).
also so it is good, I will
earlier
time,
(
I& ^
= such
|Jf ^),
- Soreni
race.
-
how much
such?-- Ware
is
also that is good.
buy
earlier than. ...
jjjfc|
l
*or6*on,
*ort\c6
wAganumo
^^),
is
till it
comes to the next
concerning that
unnecessary.
-
- Sored4m6 y
-- Soredhca, kai-maloo, so
(this
being so
to Sort kard vyi, = from there upwards; in relation
it.
- Sore
- SoreyM
upon
(
^ ura
S&reno tokin6 fan yrfn trf-
property.
tsuitt
-
Sfirtwd deln-mdrtka, can
ones.
comes not to such, such
it
than, before.
afterwards, there
my
8Ucn
so
taat
made, = from the half of such an hour
niwd oytbi-mastnn, =
then)
=
have made such (or that)
ni sitd, I
sometm n g
IU j)>
Sorevd ndnidt, gozdrii, what
such happen?
e.
Kortni
-
).
5) Sore,
i.
and
2
it?
or
kore, that
ikura si-mdsiikd, the price (nedan) of this (article),
Kono nedanwa
gln6
Are
Kortuo
).
Koreno continually, by Kono.
attributive
nari, this ao-flt6-kusdno fazimtno oya
is
Korerd
isolated
a
this is too small
go from here.
to
innrii,
87
II.
Kordde ym, so far well, good
Kore-kore, Korera. 3
Kova
8.
knowing the foundation.
-- Kortkara
?)' therefore. Plural:
^5 /JN|^),
(ft^*7
siru to iu, this is called
motowd this,
tsiisai
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
(
simo,
m ayt, = proceeding
from there forwards,
= proceeding from there downwards,
e.
i.
- Soreyori kono kata (ffi ft), = proceeding - Sort-soren6 m^rd, things which are since.
^
J#
y6ri
).
.
from there on or so. so.
this side,
- Sore-sore^
i.
e.
sitagdlte,
= according to the
The poet employs So wo
for Sore-wo,
e.
or so or such, in proportion as it is so g.
mireba, seing such.
Sowo
attributive definition the beginning of a sentence as happens to be at then it reflects on that, which has pre(such) of a noun immediately following, Mention has been nude of the same subject already; e.g.: viously been said after some general remark* the historical commencement of Japan;
If Sort
continues: too so
M,
&rtf Nippon-gokuva
Tsiu-kvano to^HF
what concerns SUCH country Japan,
so Central Blooming country (China),
it
Sore eastward of the sun. Evidently
is
but
is
1)
of the
same value,
as
2, 23, 24. Shopping-Dialogues, pp.
is
as
,,ll,,l
/
it lies
th,
towards the east
^
N
here, not as a mere eipl
the Latin
relative
,/u/
at
ti
beginning
,
88
CHAPTER
sentence such as:
Quae
I.
3).
In cases such as
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
8.
II.
contumelia non fregit eum sed erexit. (C. Nep. Themistoclthis,
we supply
the place of the reflective pronoun with
the demonstrative, and the Japanese Sard
Nippon goku
equal to: this coun-
is
try Japan.
Soregasi = such a man, formerly used only by princes as a modest indication
own
of their
persons towards higher
inferior persons
and
,
6)
Yore
^
7)
Tare,
y zo,
%
lx/
is
).
now usually Dare,
^ \/
o
^b), = who?
,
(^*
,
wno
pfl*')'
(or
who
is
there?
this
Arewa
Dare to ondzi
are you?
whom
Dar6t6 fandsi suru, with
dorega nandzi ni ydkizd
books pleases you?
-
-
(
yfc
^jjf
;
indifferent
^^
y Fp
koto,
how many
Remark
In the
1.
as
Nandzi,
itsi
calls
^
Wa-gun
^
^
^ *$ - 3
3.
Nandzi
he.
y)
,
whom
-
to
which of these ^
Dore-fodo
ran ("39th Mikado, 10th year,
siwori, under Soregati.
he? = vulgo
=.
('(of
^*)
from here
5
h
w
to the
distinguish the interrogative sentence
himself Soregasi, whereas
the letter written by me.
is
who
it?
The Japanese does not
Nippon woo dai
him
is
is
6ru,
Korerano siyono nakade
who.
Dore mo, whatever, each.
(miles)
sirite
does
with what identity?
Kokoyori tsugind matsi made dore-hodo arimdsu,
next town
whom
Daret6 tomoni druzd, with
to talk?
Dareni yordzu,
dwell together?
dare no ko dakd
man who
Arewa) dare da kd (properly: dardde drukd) , who
who
Sore
the morning-star.
Dardga yoku ,
va darede druzd,
much?
,
too faintly lighted, to be
that? vulgo:
is
Kono ftt6wa dardde dri-mdsuka =
well?
Ano fitdwa
still
Sumire darega tamdni nivdvu, = the violet for
Sdkdni darfya druzdj
it
what boy
Kavd-dar4-t6ki (= the
there?
ig
Kavd-dard-bosi
the morning twilight.
ko de gozarimdsuka ,
smell?
addressed by
(g||
by Daga.
(dakd - de drukd).
2)
8
there ?-hour), the hour at which objects are
dare no
1)
= somebody, quidam
old language,
,
(= karevd) dare
recognized well
knows
,
which of many? By suffixing the emphatic particle formed Dardzo, abbreviated Dazo, who? -- Darega, whose? (cujus?),
Kavd
it
J^
Dore, y^ \/
often superseded
is
or
placed on a footing
is
,
taken
is
not in use.
is
Lat. quis?
wa
used by them to speak modestly of themselves. It ,
with tbe Chinese
who
has come into vogue with
it
latterly
),
amalgamation of Sorega nusi Mister such a one and
for a
is
is
J
now
I
Oth month), the Emperor's brother,
every one speaks of Soregdsigdkditafumi,
CHAPTER
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
8.
89
II.
from the affirmative by an altered order of words; the sentence must, therefore, as
it"
who
the subject of discourse, be expressed by
is
dardde arimasukd, and not, as in the Ban-go zen
J
II,
),
39
r.
is
is
it?"
SWwa
the case,
by Darega sorede arimasukd.
Remark
2.
The question, whether Dare, = somebody,
signification of drufitt,
just as the Latin gut*, with the
used as an indefinite
is
has been answered negatively by a literate Japanese
y*lX (fJ fb
Idzure,-f
which?
fa), mostly
^
-f
pronoun,
*).
I/ Itsure, who?, what?,
used rather in poetry and in the epistolary style,
superseded in
is
the ordinary conversational language by dore, doko, dotsira or dou.
Idzurega masdru (^fcT
Imdda idzurdkd been
settled,
s )
which (of the mountains mentioned)
Idzweno
3
tewo kuddsan
)
on? where
man?
which
)|&*)i wno surpasses? which
-
kata,
to begin?
(fa
Idzuremo
idzuremo,
7
9
i
III.
e.
whichever,
plural,
which no doubt means:
it is
to be
-
myself, himself, herself,
Ondre = Individual ,
is
;
year?
fomo, whoeyer
reflective
pronoun
expressed by
I/ (l!; (vulgo
(being), thus
ondredomo, ondrera, also ondra
3-H.
3
l\
$|ift
3)
Ka, an interrogative
Q)
|f
something that
allied in sense to fltdri
dual,
(
e
is
|g), from
tl
on6,
= single, and
single, single being, indivi-
+ ori, being alone, ^) n W Japanese.
(=fit6
single, alone); plur.
i
11 suflBx.
in
6n6dziikar& , apart, by oneself.
Ondre, ^r are
it
pronouns.
1.
=
-
In
Mi, = body, person; Midziikara, personal; Waga-mi, = own body.
ore,
-
* ^f ^ J jl| river," mo is left out.
vessel.
met with in every
koto naku.
{pti
2.
J
one
-- Idztreno fu6,
Idziirt nari
myself, he himself,
I
will
-
Idzureto (or Idztiretomo) niX*u, =
all.
Determinative and reflective
1.
*).
without anything whatever, = Dorito
Self, determinative pronoun in
A.
which place
is.
Idziirdmo, V. pag. 326. Idztrdtomo,
Idzurdno utsuva nitemo, in somewhere a
be.
may
i.
has not yet
Idziireno ton, which
-
whoever, whichever, = Dordmo, dotsiramo. without whatever,
at
= Dordkara fozlmeu zof
which side? which province?
it
this (the Pung-lai-.c/i
~f\ -^-)
]|
Idzureno yo, which age?
-
the better?
is
kore (Fou-rai-san) ndru yd tsiimdbirdka nardzv,
Idzurdno tokdronikd lay hands
^
Mr. TKJDA
rWIIOO.
CHAPTER
90
As
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
the speaker applies
to himself
it
it
betrays modesty,
and, just as the variation Oddre (X K
and make
L^),
The Princes of the Empire
of contempt.
word equal
this
nese suknndki /fid,
the
itself
Examples
object of
its
action,
O
A.^
^ i^RA A fay A T? JF jl
*
j
/ll>
Ondre
themselves, on6re, to the Emperor,
man
\
.
t
i^
-
_-^v
.
^M
L_^
or objectively, refers to the subject as
,
and answers
to;
fMono oydwo
uydmavebd, FVtd mata ond-
his
Then
ft*
'
&*s
^
-fta "*
$@ V
~>f
5^v/ -T^^
one
may now
you
improve
substitute for the
word
individual," in the
and say:
own
conduct.
set oneself aside 6iti,
own -
-
-
-
Onore wo okonau
Ondre w6
and to act
sutete,
for the
(
when one
advantage of others
On6rew6 taddsm
rules
himself
then one experiences no hatred.
(I B
),
= from
oneself.
^f F^
fit6no tamdni su
fitono kotoniwd sewayaku, to give up one's
interests of others. ndsi,
will.
improve
first
saying
If I
honor
may
be referred
Onoregd kok6ro-sdsiwo okonqu (^~f 2i
to the second person (thou, you).
do his
,
In the second saying,
other also honors mine."
however, ondre, in consequence of the Imperative there used,
to
ta-zin
others.
then the
another's parents,
First
yourself,
thou thyself (you yourself), or he himself,"
I myself,
Mddzn
tassento hossurebd,
others honor the parents of the individual.
Will
^^ M
rt
'I
,
own, himself.
an individual honors the parents of others
If
II
|^
^> tft "*
^k )
Japa-
WO
^
^ ^
h
one's
,
').
Onoregd mi wo t.
Any
kiva-zin
J^ ^
oiidwi read t7 v
F1 "^ / *-^
}.-< \
j
3*
At?5^
shows a want of respect
it
:
O
~fo^L
whereas applied as a de-
^ to the Chinese expression J|^
Ondre, used attributively (genitively)
being
and,
understood as a epithet expressive
is
call
an insignificant
e.
i.
er, einer,
without any compliment. Therefore, when
,
monstrative pronoun to any one beyond the speaker
j^-X
German
the subject of a proposition Ondre answers to he,
just as these words, indicates a person
8. III.
(his
sitd,
own
,
),
(^
2t
^ y\)'
^
= Wdga
koto ivo bd sast-
business
and serve the
fVtoni mdtdmdzdrebd
individual)
^.
behave oneself,
to
,
sunavdtsi urdmi
and seeks nothing of others,
Onore ni katsu r
self- victory.
Onore-yori
CHAPTER
II.
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
8. in.
Remark. If we have derived ondre from on6 and attributed
one, the word on6-ono pleads
fication of
man,
&
gly,
no longer
is
dividual,
On6re
Mi
3
(Jfp
his
use, comes under notice: Onazlki
is
body stand,
on the contrary, and by which navdzu mono, his personal
(
Q *)
body, person, understood
^J
(
^), not in-
l
which some Japanese phi-
),
is
is,
Mi wo
tatsuru
all
that does not belong to self,
mono,
- one (mono) who makes
one who makes the most of his person; Ware wo tdtsuru mono one who places his
I, his will, his interests
on the foreground,
in general, understood a self-willed person.
one
is
as the concrete self, whereas the
taken in opposition to
is
it
by Ware or Ondre
indicated
is
-),
when
idea of self,
each
= man and
an abbreviation of On6re.
lologers consider
2.
equal to Fltt-toto,
is
i.e.
identical.
e.
i.
in
frequently superseded by Ore
is
one and one,"
each man, everyone. As derivatives from this ono, which, sin-
e.
i.
kd, and
to this tile signi-
for this conception, for ono-ono,
as a repetition of ono, has the signification of
one, answers to the Chinese
91
dignity;
who
Sono miiro
itri-
does not throw himself away, does not lose sight of
on the contrary Ware ware wo wasur&tti,
I do not forget
i
my
I,
my own
do not lose sight of
interest.
Kare ondrewo
icasurtni, he does
not forget himself (his individual in opposition to others). -- Onoretcd hointru,
=
an individual; mi wo homeru, to praise one's own person.
to praise oneself as
Examples:
^
7
liant
iHv name
Mi
_^
1
ten-kano ken-meiw6 usinavdzit
ne himse tf
')
in the
Empire
(y
).
knows the way
himself
siru,
if
* "fC
hi8 personal conduct) does not lose his bril-
Mi wo
dmimiiru
yudnwo
one knows the way
to rule others. --
uru,
to sell his
tute themselves for hire.
to allow oneself rest.
forms himself with his
Sw
^ * _^ * ^ *
Miw6 mmdni
to rule
,
the noble
sirtba, tunanitfi
man
/W
oneself, then one
makdsttt hlgd-gtirinu
,
yielding
to the horse, he escapes.
Waga-miwo
t,
Jf'
Kun-si sono miwd fmlztikaslme:*
2
brings no disgrace upon himself.
w6 osdmuru yudnwo
^ (
p. 80.
Wdga-miwo
Wdga own
own body
(himself);
one's ydstimdru, to let
deni wdga-nuwo wdruu
hand.
J)
t***9-y*i.
said of girls
Cap. XVIII,
f
siiri
who
prosti-
own body
rest,
mono, one who de-
CHAPTER
92
Women
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
Waga-mi and Mi,
use
when we have come Mi-mi (^P
5
"
^(*~}i
for
thime of our coming
= Highness'
I.
Midomoga
mditta toki,
l ).
in old Japanese the self of illustrious
self,
Kono futd fasirano kami mo
e. g.
persons,
at the
Midomo,
plural
8. III.
.
.
.
mi-mi wo kdkusi-tamaviki
both
also
,
these gods kept their sublime persons (themselves) concealed.
^
Midzukara,
y^
as a part
mething that,
37
~)]
compounded of mi (body), dzu (piece,
,
of a whole,
means a separate something that
from
of itself,
itself.
It
apart for
exists
satisfactorily explain this
We
numbers
(thus: fito-dzu,
=
futd-dzu,
the form
used in
futd-dzu-dzu ,
=
the idea of body
a
Kokdro (3
^ ^), kara free
of dzu-dzu,
>
gives
futd,
double, simplus to
to a
separate
person (opposed to
same derivative elements
of the
n),
to be the
for the
same
suffix,
duplus), and which, by means of repetition,
Whereas now
in
distributives:
mi kara
(=
fito-dzu-dzu
,
from a body)
all
other persons).
(f'ft
>), from Te (7), hand, and
i.
e.
with one's i.
e.
(^-
^
own hand, and Kok6ro-dzii spontaneous (from one's
own
movement).
self)
,
form Midznkara
its
is
originally an adverbial definition (- of it-
and as such not susceptible of declension
ndri, he
;
e. g.
Midzukara toravdre fit6
becomes a prisoner of himself, he surrenders himself a prisoner.
kdra kuvdwo toru, to pluck feeding leaves of mulberry trees with one's
The words given
1)
in
RODRIGUEZ Siemens
to be reduced to the forms:
Midzukara is
g
word, as they leave the
heart, will, are formed the words Te-dzu-kara
/^*#>)i from a separate heart,
According to
it
e
taken quite generally, and only opposed to something else, midzu-kara, refers to
= from a separate hand,
(A^^
,
numbers the character of
these
[fj
our
one, two;, forms of them proportional numerals,
singuli, bini, one at a time, in couples. is
separate body,
By means
(fito,
single,
^=
to
acknowledge now, and that
from the genitive termination tsu,
to be distinguished
time, dzu,
so-
that mi-dzu,
expressed by the Chinese characters
is
Remark. As the Japanese etymologists do not
that, added to the radical
so
body) and kara (from), answers
is
dzu unnoticed, we must explain the derivation given here. first
itself,
e.
i.
Sui
=. Mino,
Sibi
Se
pp. 11
and 80 ought,
Ware-tomono
=. Mini,
ni,
ni
=
wo,
wo.
Miioo,
Tddzuhands.
for the correction of typical errors,
Waga-mino,
also occurs there with
always nndeclined.
,
own
t6
the inflectional terminations no, ni and wo, although in original texts
CHAPTER
However
it
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
m.
8.
93
also used (in the quality of subject or of object), for I
is
my-
he himself, and for they themselves.
self or
Midsukara
used as subject, whenever another object
is
the verb of the predicate;
e.
g.:
is
mentioned before
Midzukara omovdkuva fakdri-kotowo
has himself, as he thinks, attained what he intended.
Afidzikara
yetdri, he
also cha-
is
racterized as the subject in the proverb:
O
HH ^ *
a
one sees another's
If
then one must oneself be grieved
with him.
As
"*-*
s^*^
grief,
_L,
it
akirdkani
luiri
siirft
(
TO
{?
/^
g,v UA 7
mean:
sayings) ..
V'
5fiiJt
_^> ^
(
7
g
m^
(Q
8)
)
f^)
to
3
cultivate
to
),
enlighten
yomin-suru mono
Jl/.
self.
Jf
(
^
)
g.
'),
-
self-culture.
kokoromit
one who
,
)
e.
self-deception.
oneself,
M.
stand on oneself (to rely on oneself).
{ft
used,
Midzukara
oneself.
deceive oneself,
to
?
is
immediately followed by a transitive verb;
is
Mina midzukara
,
on the contrary, Midzukara
object (= himself),
whenever
J\^f/
"fltr.
<
Mm,
~
r
[|j
Ta-ninno urtiwd mitevd, sunavdtsi midztikara tomoni ur/r*
is
-
I/,
om,
to
to take the proof of one-
,
fond of himself.
-
self-torture.
mu,
On6dzukara ($T individual,
kara,
is,
J
*P
from oneself, of
with regard to
own
revolution.
to
What
self, Lat. sponte.
has been said of Jftfefr-
applicable to
adverbial character,
its
Onodzukdrd kuru-kuru
^oQoS^S.B^^^.flS^)^ **
~ft
Onod&tnra
mavdrti mono, things turning themselves, having their
0. mauktrft fit6,
one who, of his own accord, immigrates.
which are self-evid.-nt 0. ndru kotowdriwo miyo! behold reasons, B.
As Chinese
also.
-
'
the determinative and reflective pronoun self expressions of
are in use: 1.
^v>
2.
S ^ ^^'
Sin
bod y'
in
as
mrftta,
1)
JW
who
Sono miwo aMrtf ,/W.
my own
person (myself).
= You have done
.
I. 4.
At'
to
others.
-'"
own body
Zi-sinwo aisurn f1i6, one
same
PP sed
self '
it
loves his
own body,
- !Tafttt* Anit
.--*,'
i.,'
Go-d^inm
in your Honor's
t) Ibid. VI,
i.
1.
own
e.
who
i*
or person.
fond of oa.e. the
.MWoM * (
ffi
gy
person.
)!!.
111. 4-
%
\
CHAPTER
3-
one,
^ [=1
who
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
= own part,
ffi?/i Zi-bun,
loses sight of himself,
his part.
his interest.
Zi-bun
8. III.
wo
mi-suUru mono,
Zi-bun ni suwdtte 6ru, - midzu-
Zi-bunno sai-kuwo suru, to do one's own work.
kara 6ru, to be substantive.
Zi-bun no mono to naru, to become property. 4.
of
self,
^ |||
Zi-zen (by some pronounced as dzi-zen), also zi-nen , = being
$^ t>,
original, natural,
un worked.
that this
Sore f'ttono tsi-druvd zi-zen nari,
Ydmano uy6m
something natural. natural
Yumdni ^
fire.
(involuntarily).
[=}
^
f,
in
which
the former case
zi, it
at
$1
%
X',
= Lat.
human understanding
zi-zen no fo dri,
zi-zen ni mirn, to see
Besides these, there occur (self),
Zi-zenni, or zi-zento,
is
sponte.
there,
on the mountain there
many more
compounded with
expressions
one time, has the meaning of
own," then
of
own
country.
own
trade,
*
own
house.
own
fabric,
own
pencil,
person.
own
drawing,
own
own
^
own body,
^
owu
S5'
?'
own
self.
clan.
own
person.
^ > own strength. '
^ v>^
Zi
is
'
own
|f|
,
,
answer.
own whim.
own
Boiling.
own
interest.
as:
compounds
self-love.
^' self-prostitution.
self-praise.
* IP ^, self-injury. r^
self-existence.
5,
l_f*
1
self-sale.
*
,
,
,
^, zi
self." In
own
disposition.
objective to the verb in standard
,
a
stands adjectively before a substantive, in the latter objectively
^,
"
is
to exist of itself (spontaneous existence).
EJ ^j zi, enters adjectively into compounds, as:
5
a
something in a dream, of oneself
before a transitive verb.
,
is
self-confidence.
self-bondage.
self-nomination.
5, self-murder. .
^
JX?
self-destruction.
CHAPTER.
PRONOUNS. EXPRESSIONS OF EECIPROCITY.
II.
These compounds by suffixing the verb to verbs, as Zi-fits-suru ,
suru
si, era,
can be changed
(to do),
own hand;
to write with one's
95
8. IV.
Zi-san-tmru, to praise
oneself.
IV.
Expressions of reciprocity.
The
reciprocity of
an action
by the adverbial (modal)
*o
5*T=
S)'
verb
Am
fies,
whenever
(7
(*#;=,
Tagavini
pronounced fa-nyatm,
(J \L$$\L~), = reciprocal, or also by the vulgo Ai (71). The last means meet each other" and signi-
t), it
is
and that; Atsi
Remark.
definition
or Ai-tagaini
prefixed to another verb,
that the action takes place reci-
The meaning of Tagai,
generally explained by Kart tore.
procally or mutually. this
expressed in Japanese not by pronouns, but
is
here and there;
kotsi,
Japanese
etymologists
is
Ware
fito, self and another.
ascribe
')
to
the
Tdydn
meaning of
-^^ IH *>
Ta-kavi, - changing of hands, by which nevertheless the change
of the k to
the troubled g (- ng)
reason for this,
= meeting of shuttle see in
is
we
think
with the
k',
a
-\-
We,
other.
by a fusion of mitkdsi
means: the
Fi-mulcdisi kdta,
side (kata),
thus,
phenomenon that frequently takes
In Figdsi (pron. fi-ngdsl), - East, likewise the troubled g
called into existence
mfi&fri,
weaving when the
thrown with one hand and caught up with the
m
able to give a
consider Tagavi as a fusion of ta
(or with) the hands, as this takes place in
g (ng) a fusion of the
place. is
we must
To be
not explained.
is
to ngdri.
/Y-wiHw,
in gdsi
originaDy
whence the sun (/) has come
to
meet (mukdisi}. Examples:
Jt ??
Tf=
he becomes guest and host. mini, see each other, meet.
-i*-'
Tt 'i" i!
"'./"-'//" /<: "">"
T&gdvlni mkn //*/?, hate each other.
-
Kwan-nin
litt'-mi/biri.
FoMin
1
).
by turns
-
yoritio oturi-flti t6
Mandarins came out of (the town) to meet, and ext&gdmni ai-sdtsu tamdvikf, with the people sent from Pekking. changed welcome-greetings Avi-nitaru mono iitsn,
V.
one another. \ $[ | ^/^), things resembling .lri-.v/n/, know one another. come to blows. -
ffl
strike each other,
katdrti.,
converse (speak together).
-
Ari-ttitmini
(
Jg J
5f =).
An-
reciprocal.
Pronouns Indefinite.
In Japanese,
I)
(
Wa-gun
tiwori.
if
the subject of a proposition
2)
MMCiua (tioot,
CMmf
is
indefinite, it
tUui*, Bock
V.
Pt
remains unex-
II.
Ck. III. f
.)
CHAPTER
96
PRONOUNS INDEFINITE.
II.
V.
8.
common.
there, propositions without subjects are something very
pressed;
Our
idioms do not permit this, and having to represent the subject of a proposition indifinite, in
by a pronoun or
one" (people)
use of our
it."
one," in a more
Besides, for our
and Aru-fit6, = some person,
meni kakdri
atte)
^Something" however
tdsi,
or
there
g.
is
anything"
something
is
expressed by
some one who writes
the signification of thing or something and
is
something written; in Mono-kaki, mono
same verbal
Mono, which
Korewo kdku mono
writer,
writing,
man, there
is
drtte (or
somebody, who wishes to appear before you.
- a written something, a writing - Fumi-bito a
Kaki-mono,
as,
(J^^J^^^^},
Fitdga druyd
applied to living beings.
it is also
a this- writing-individual,"
is
e.
found Fito,
definite sense are also
-Fitoga Fft6ga nandziwo tovu, someone asks for you.
anybody?
a
we make
such sentences
(
~y
this,
){$!)
thing," means,
^ ^^ *
(
^f" ^)
distinguished from
an d from Mono-kaki, -
In Kaki-mono, mono, has
(Ji*)-
defined by the verbal root is
Kaki
the objective definition to the
root.
Nani, = what?
used as our
somewhat," with the
is
also
is
intended something without contents or substance,
signification of
^something." If
by
nothing"
expressed by the noun-substantive Mai, = something of no value;
e.
g.
it is
Fito wo
naiga sironisu, to consider anyone as worth nothing.
nobody," when no
Our
particular accent falls
upon
it,
is
somebody" with the negative form of the verb connected with
superseded by
it,
the negative
(not") being thus taken from the noun or pronoun and incorporated in the termination of the verb.
Fitdga ari-mdsu, there
masenu, in the written language Fito nasi
= there If,
is
(
fiE
,
is
somebody.
^
^),
Fltoga
dri-
somebody is-there-not
,
nobody.
however,
it
wished to bring out
is
phasis, the expressions
which signify
nobody" and nothing" with em-
whoever, whatever,"
are used in con-
nection with a negative verb.
Dare korewo sirdnu means: who does not know = not know). this,
Darem.6 korewo sirdnu,
nobody knows
nanimo
stnu,
Dokonimo
it.
whoever (who
Kare naniwo
= he does not whatever
this? (sirdnu, verb negative
it
senu,
may
ardzu, wherever not to be, = to be
it
may
be)
knows not
- what does he not? be,
i.
e.
Kare
he does nothing. -
no where.
CHAPTER
the
Consequently
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
Shaug-hai 1861, page. 23, Dare mo kokoni kimasinanda, not come here," and not
Relative pronouns substitute for
relative clauses,
which they
to
refer.
used, answering to
the
them
the present -
Grammar,
whoever has
We
are not at
to overlook, that in
equal to a confirmed assertion.
is
are wanting, because the Japanese, having
Instead of
enemy has sacked,"
mean:
nobody here come (honorific) has not"
Japanese the negation of a negation
VI.
will
Dare mo the meaning of Nobody, and
liberty to assign to
97
VI.
in the Elements of Japanese
cited
instance,
8.
adjective clauses,
man, who
the
man"
is
no
which precede the word,
present,"
(Arii fit6)\ instead of
an expression
is
the town, which
of the enemy-to have-sacked-town."
In such cases, moreover, the substantive Tok6ro is
also used to intimate the
TsUkuru koto
is
passive something.
the fabricating, the fabrication;
TsUkuru mono, a fabricating being; Tsttkuru ftt6, a fabricating
man, one who
fabricates;
Tsftkuru tokdro, the place of fabrication;
Fit6no tstikuru tokorono mono
something (mono) of a man's (/JMno) fabri-
is
cating- (tsUkurtt-) place (toMrono),
e.
i.
tokdrono nen-g$u Initfye ydri motsi^Uru
is
something that somebody
fabricates. -
a year-name (uen-gau) of a place, where
times has used, (not which) one from ancient
i.
e.
a year-name used from an-
cient times.
ToMro,
in
seems to do the work of a pronoun relative,
its
Thus we, although the Japanese that position also, in which
it
that of proper signification, namely
In the Syntax
VII.
do so, give to philologers do not
pi ace."
this construction will be treated again.
Interrogative pronouns.
of the pronouns, those, of In the previous pages, treating of the formation Da or Do, and Itro, rulgo which the interrogative elements Ta or To, vulgo been explained. To embrace them in one have
Idzu are the foundation,
already
are: glance, they 7
CHAPTER
98
Da wo,
which?
Doko, where?
p. 85.
Dare, who?
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
88.
p. 80.
Darega, whose?
Dotsira,
Daga,
Dotsutsi,
Dazo, who?
Done, which?
Dare no ka, whose?
Donna,
Darenozo*),
D6nata, who?
VII.
where?
Idzttku,
82.
Dotsi,
8.
p. 81.
IdzUkunkd, Idzukunzd*), on what ground?
how? Idzure, who, which?
85.
89.
Idz&rend, whose? *)
Zo
is
an emphatic
suffix.
how?
Donoyau, Doyou, dou, Dousite,
Dore, which? Besides these are still Nani,
87.
what? and
Ika, how?, which from the im-
portant part they play, deserve an acquaintance more than superficial
how much?,
Iku,
as
1
),
whereas
being related to the numerals, will be treated of with
them. 1.
Nani,
Nanra
('ffiif
abbreviated
('ffif ),
-J-
^), what?
which?
Nan,
^
*j-
obsolete
,
Lat. quid? quod? It
is
Nam,
A, plural
-f
used both substantively,
and adjectively, and very often strengthened by an interrogative suffix, ka or
by the emphatic
zo.
Substantively, with the
Nani wo
yerabi mdstikd?,
kai nasdru kd?,
=
motte?, wherewith?
what
Nani wo
whereby? -
4
what
1)
).
after
what do you seek?
yd?,
Naniwo
2
t6vu kd?,
3
"2
Korewa nanini for
what do you buy?
Nani wo
as:
_^J^ ^f^ _H ^ )' Naniwo motte waga kunitvo' ri-sen, wherewith advantage my empire? Nanigd dri-mdsitkd?, what is there at hand? ). -
Jj[
shall I
what do you choose?
Nani wo nandziga motomuru
do you ask?
fipif
meaning of what?", Nani occurs in expressions
The
is
motsii-mastika?,
what
is
the use of this?
Soreva nanini yoikat,
such good?
greatest stumbling-blocks in oral intercourse with the Japanese, are the interrogatives
stand by the term every word, by which inquiry after anything
is
(we under-
made), and the ways of using them.
Uncertainty in that respect brings about misunderstanding on both sides; one answers to what the other has
not asked; and the speakers, weary of the continual deviating answers, probably end by thinking each other reserved, tive
if
not by suspecting each other of a want of understanding.
pronouns
.
a view to this, the interroga-
and the combinations formed with them are here treated of with the
2) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 4;
With
2.
p. 2.
3) MENCIUS (LEGGE
,
Chinese Classics, II.
diffusiveness required.
Book
I.
Pt.
I.
Ch.
I. $
4).
CHAPTER
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
= to what, whereto, as appositive definition ') va nanito ii-mastikaf, - your name what (how) is it called?, what
Nani
99
VII.
8.
Andtano
to,
Nani to
ivu
=
(fa
Nanito ivu
called.
koto,
fa
,
= a what
^7*
is
calling matter?
i.
anything
^
$S
(
Nanito
our
if
^
y
-
which
sort of or
Nanito ndku, without
Nanito ivu zo, what says
f r
)
^ ^
it?, supersedes,
Na-ndote, from Nanit6 *#4, = to what?, tending,
,
Nanito te kordwo itdsimdsitaka
- -
whereto? wherefore?
t ^7% fa
done this? Nande,
$
,
to
what end have you
why?
,
fat), Nani kara
(^fj
Nanini y6tte (fa = -
-
what
,
your please."
te, also -J-
Nani yori
7* ^7 call? how?
).
/J>
Nanito zo (fa = like doozo,
e.
*).
-)
= what to
written,
Nanito mousi-mdsukd?, what do you say?
matter?
your name?
is
~j^^), in the popular language contracted to
pronounced Na-ndeo, for which
na
^5 J^l
*
(^g
fat), =
of what?, whereof?
= on what ground?, whence?
JSSf)'
-
3 Nanini y6tte waga fii )' Ed T v FJ #' - '"J ,v on what ground, (how) do you know that I am able for that?
T*F
=^
Nazeni, from nan-se-ni, = drukaf,
your
what?
e.
i.
happen?,
why
to do,
do you refuse?
Nan sure zo, how x
I
Irb
).
^
^
*ni
^.,*, 5^
^^
^
^^ '
if
-
Nan
why? fa J$
sore
o, pro-
.
whv
Vincr fonsidftra this as crood.
fVifi
does not
^ e Can7 ^ ou^
^
Nanizo (f = X o
Na-nzo (tX), how? in what way, of a direct question.
characteristic
-
mosi korewo yositoseba, sunavatri namure zo okoitaoa-
Wau
^
why?
doing, on account of which,
3f ~^
->
^ ^~ ^ ^ ^
= why does not
4
Nani-sini, Nani-sini kd, variation of Nazeni, perly
for -
fa ),
abbreviated
Nanso (t d^X),
what reason? -- occurs
3i
also as a
^V
fa^. V 0'; ^J'i')'
the word advantage? riwo tan. - the king, why does he mention
"Sf?
S?
Nanzo
7
ife
fatTs^^
B
) 8
)-
faiau beken,
how can one
^'u y^ u nanzo eraban
*
abolish (such)?
wh y
A\ 1) See
to
*>
^
fW
ffi
-
*$-,
n
MM
mere
1
2f.\
ox and
*>e*W6e11
cno 8e
also
1O
page 70, V.
(7A*n
Ch v 7)
entm
Nazeni sorevo
why?
agdri nasardn&ka*
Nazeni
does not one such?
why
rise
for
$
Ch. VII.
p.
15.)
4
Vol. II. Book 6) Jttxcius (utooE,
H-
8)Ibid. Ch. VII. f7.
I.
Pt.
I.
Ch.
I.
J3).
CHAPTER
100
Nanzo
goat?
you?
pleases
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
VII.
is
there
mono go. gozdri-mdsu,
kini iri-mdsu
JR ^^ -^^ "^
TjnJL^.
8.
^
Nanzo
')
anything that
sono motoni kaverazdru,
not return to the foundation?
why
Nanzo ya, ^a'X-Y, does
it
:fX*Y
obsolete
o
^of ife
is
how
this,
and preceded by a subjective
as predicate closing the sentence,
happen?
= how
$P
'fcf
clause.
Tami ohokikotowo kuvavezaruva nanzova*), that the people does
+.
E3L
^
^jf,
^
\
not increase
its
number, how
this?
is
-
*}*
/fcrr
v
1RJ
x
^ix
Nazo-nazo. = how? how?,
'
'
Nani naru
?
}
^
^
itsu.
^ 'fof
V
y*
'
= what? being.
Nani naru mono,
or koto,
^|
what? in the expressions: Nani no fi(^S[- J u), 3 Nani no koku ('ffif = $A?)i what hour? i^C =
adjectively
what day? vulgo J\]j)
),
what thing, or what matter?
Nani no, nanno,
N
3
riddles.
^
4 )
what was
-^ore makotoni nanno kokorozoya,
'
really
(my)
opinion concerning that? JVam' and
Nan
Kimi konomU
what matter?, what?
what
lingly
have,
t
^),
('(of
ner?
Nani-yau or Nani-zama
j^v)i wna* volume?
(^ t
Nani-mono
quantity? the quantity. gokdro
(^=
^t _j\^^),
why
^t ^^
s
that?
|^g|
of? master, finite
Compare Sore
^ ^y
^^
Combinations with
Nan-guwats
(
^
(^f"
v^M
1) MBNCIUS (ibid. Ch. VII.
3) Not Naniru,
Nani-
^J
may
^
1 ^
do
(
_3B?
what cause?
^L^i
JBf=
X
(^ t
X*
^^),
JVam' bltoni
this.
after J aP- etymologists from
(^)
what man-
(^"^ ^f)' wna^
Nani-kore, obsolete Nani-kure
any-(some-)one" gasi, p.
^^j
Nani gokdro naku
what somebody, now in use only with the
pronoun
Nani-bun
^"/)' wna ^ being, what?
Nani-yUd
kagirdzu kono koto wo ndsu koto ydzu, nobody
Nani-gasi ('$$= ^f^)'
(^"=
/
without any purpose.
-^T)
JBf=
why?
Nani-fodo
which heart, which sense?
^\j>^)
Nani-yu^ni sorezo?,
what one?
(^=
(
= that which you wil-
tokoro nani-gotozo,
Nani-goto def, wherefore,
it)?
(is
what part?
Nani-ven
/
occur adjectively in the expressions Nani-goto
Naniga
nitsi,
= where-
signification of the inde-
and applied by the speaker
to himself.
88.
Nan f)
(-f
^)
are:
wni cn month?
$ 23.)
Nan-nen ('fnfv Nan-doki
wich year? -
/
( jnf
2) Ibid. (Ch. II. 4) Ch.
^v)
VII. $ 7.
Bjjp
$
I).
^),
which (what)
CHAPTER time? what hour?
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
II.
(how many)
are
pieces
$$ | ^|), against what time? '). Kono iroga nan-dan drtmdjtXka ? *), what
(fa
Nan-doki-goroni
Nan-dan (ffit$ji*)i which
pieces?
there
101
VII.
8.
of that color?
Nan-gin?*)
(fat /f ?) now
many pounds? Nanzo occur
Nani,
with the signification of the indefinite pronoun
also
any-(some)-thing." - Nandzivd sono kotoni
nanzo
tsuitd
6r*kd, have you
kikitt
heard anything about that matter? 2.
Ika, -f
irfa), how?
(#pfa
1]
Current combinations with Ikd are: >
Ika-mono
(5f
(
^f"/)'
wna*
thing. /
Ika-sama, vulgo Ika-yau, Ika-yoo
(
^T^jf) which way.
H!
fnf
yauni, in what way, how.
Ika-ygunimo, however.
however
ndrit
mono
mo
koto de (
it
may
sdru, do whatever thing
it
may
^3E*)
fnf
power.
-
much? how much
tomo, however
Ika-bakari,
how
yet
(still).
how much
be, do every thing.
how much?
is
Jk-a-fotlono
interspace,
Iku-fodo ook*
such sold?
Sono koto wo ika-bakari kurinka, how
how
will people
Ika-narU kotozo, what sort of thing?
being, of what sort.
The modal terminations of Ika
man
is
-
-roco, what
Ika-naru
there?
-f
^ -X,
abbreviated Ikan,
are: Ikani, -i
^ f,
-f
#
Ikanika,
=,
Ikanzo
-\
* ^X,
*-
-f
or eren Ikade,
1 fty (pronounce Ika-nde, 1 # 7 # Ikaaekn, Ika-mleka how? Lat how? how is such? According to the rule of Soreva ikan? = such t
,
nese arrangement of words ikan, as predicate, follows
may
also be a subjective clause,
that there ... is?
arazaran,
I)
how
name?
your)
subject
Ika-
or whatever.
soever?
Sok6ni ika-naru fitdzo, what sort of
Ikanizo,
Jka-yqu naru
be sorry for that.
(still)
Ika-naru,
(is
who
- how much
Ika-fodo no aida,
Sore wo Vkd-fodoni uruya, for
long?
be,
Ika-fodoka,
quantity. -
Ika-yau ni ndri tomo,
sort of thing.
sort of being or thing
how much
tstkdra,
mono, what
/
Ika-fodo
yet
Ika-yau
mo, what
nite
yauna
be.
may
it
Ika-
how
g ---- aruvd
or*ra as subject
ikani,
how
Ikade (vulgo doude) iraterare mdttkd, how
should there not be,
17. Shopping-Dialogues, p.
3) Ibid. p. 11.
e.
does
)
-
P-
"'
** ItwdrtioB.
p.
44,
it
*).
l,
A.
The
happen,
goes it?
why not?
*) Ibid
l<>.
the Japa-
CHAPTER
Ikaga, -f
~ff
~J]
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
pronounce ikd-nga
,
$f|
how do you do?
- -
kurdsizo?
,
VII.
8.
-j^
-JBf ,
Soko-moto ikaga
ho w? probably
-ftif ),
is
= how do you
,
your passage?, let (the
Ikdga no obdsimdsfzo
a fu-
how do
time) go round?
Ikdga sen, how will one do (anything)?
what matter?
Ikdgand) koto,
(
Ikdga On watdri sorooya = how
sion of ikd Vka.
you do?
II.
Ikdgandru (or
what opinion? what do
,
you think? Interrogative pronouns with the suffix mo.
Connected with the
gative pronouns embrace
all
^
mo,
suffix
that
reckoned under Dare or If the interrogative
comprehended in the interrogative as indivi-
is
Dare mo, the same
duals together.
(= also, Latin que, cunque), the interro-
whoever, everyone that
as quicunque,
be
qui.
mo
joined to a substantive,
is
is
placed after
it is
declined, after the inflectional termination.
-
b6si,
every arrow
Dokonimo
be called kara
may
may
(shaft).
-
mo
Idztireno ya
and
it,
if
karato tin
Dokoddmo, wher-
or
ever, everywhere.
temo
Instead of mo,
= whoever
may
it
in whatever year
whereas
it
to
te
think or say),
is
is),
(7"
t)
often used;
is
e.
may mo
in expressions as
Nani
to
')
characterized
think
is
te
mo
2
),
Nanitomo, Ndnt&mQ.
Ndntomo omowdnu,
of it?
= whatever
trouble themselves about
by
mo
(= also
means think or
to (nanito),
te.
Nani
it
may be
to
te
not expressed
mo, thus stands
called or be.
An
abbre-
Ndnto omovuka, what do people
people think nothing of
it,
people do not
it.
Arrangement of the personal pronouns
VIII.
site"
- whatever people (may
mo,
te
the same as an ellipsis, being the verb that
Nanito iyu
of which
viation
Idzttreno tosinitemo,
be: temo having, by apheresis, arisen from
but only indicated by the termination
elliptically for
Dare" temo sono ziwo hdme'tart,
be (everyone) has praised this poem.
say, and that governs the apposition itself,
g.
in the conversational
language. The
choice of the words, which are used in the oral
not indifferent, but
nouns,
is
rience,
if
speak of
1)
it
after ,
Compare
it
is
prescribed
by
intercourse
etiquette.
as pro-
From our own
expe-
an intercourse of more than two years with Japanese we may
and from the information given by a learned Japanese gentleman
p.
70, V.
2)
Wa-gun
siwori.
3) Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIEOO.
3 )
CHAPTER
II.
ARRANGEMENT OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
8.
103
VIII.
the following expressions, used as pronouns, enter into the conversational lan-
guage. 1.
1)
For.
I.
The humblest expression
is
Te-m&e, plural Te-mae-tatsi, in the popular tongue
of Ytdo which frequently changes a to is
2)
at
hand or present
Temee. =
e,
at hand,
i.
e.
that which
to the person opposite.
Watakusi, plural Watakusi-domo
a modest, and, in confidential intercourse,
,
most usual expression. Every respectable man speaks of himself thus; and the
man 3)
of the people at Yedo says for
it
Wasi
Ore, plural Orera, in the Ti^o-dialect Oira,
(icascfii).
mention on page 86
after the
supported by a quotation from the Dictionary of the old-Japanese language, a self-humiliating expression, 4)
Ware,
plural
Warera, the
is
now
I" and
considered as one of pride at Yido.
>We"
mouth of a
in the
prince,
when
he speaks to his people. 2.
1)
2)
Ware,
For the person spoken plural
Warera, the most humiliating expression, which
only to low people. Probably confounded with
Are?
Te-mae, the same
fit
as given above for
servants, and answers to the well 3)
THOU, YOU, YE.
to,
Temae-sama,
plural
I,"
Temae-sama-gata
,
is
O-maS, in the T&fo-dialect Omee, middle
5)
>JSr" and
equal to You, Sir,
plural
applied
for subordinate persons
known German
used by a person of quality towards those 4)
is
is
and
*."
You gentlemen ,
,
somewhat below him. O-mad-gata, in use among the
class.
O-maS-sama, = Your Honor, more
periphrastical
and consequently more so-
lemn than 0-mde. 6)
Anata, plural Anata-gata, used, with preference, by their equals
7)
polite people
towards
J
).
Anata-sama, plural Anata-sama-gata,
is
expressive of the greatest respect
towards the person addressed. 3.
1)
For the person spoken
Are, plural Arera,
1)
The members
is
of,
HE.
put down for disrespectful.
of the first Japanese embassy, which
came
to
Europe
was appointed as one of a committee by his Government, generally used
in
18,
A*4U
tad to which the author
mutually.
CHAPTER
104
2)
II.
ARRANGEMENT OF THE PERSON AL PRONOUNS.
Ano mono = that ,
person there
,
Ano
fit6
,
plural
Ano
Ano O
fit6,
plural
fitd-gata , polite indication of one's equals.
Ano O
the person spoken of 5)
Ano
kata, plural
Ano
is
mere
respect.
or functionary speaking of another intimates 4)
VIII.
characterizes the person spoken of as a
object (mono), deserving of no 3)
8.
fitd-gata,
him by
A no
somewhat more
One
officer
fit6.
stately, is used
when
related to the person spoken to.
kata-gata = the side there, and ,
Kono kata, =
the side
here, looking from the person, and only indicating the direction, in which
he 6)
is,
Ano O
both belong as our Your Honor, to the very respectful expressions. kata, plural
Ano O
kata-gata,
The above arrangement of the pronouns
is
"indicative of the highest respect.
of the conversational language agreeing,
in general, with that adopted by R. ALCOCK in his Elements of Japanese
page 21, contains, however, a few deviations which, the reader observe, rest
upon the authority of Mr. TSUDA
SIN ITSIROO.
Grammar,
will please to
HI.
THE ADJECTIVE. The
9.
adjectives attributing to the idea, expressed
by a noun substantive,
one or another quality, have, in proportion as they represent an attribute or a different
predicate,
forms which, though strongly prominent in the written or
book language, are, on the contrary, more or
The forms of
sational.
the written
,
will
,
less obsolescent in
therefore
,
the conver-
be treated before those of the
spoken language. I.
THE ADJECTIVE IN THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE.
A. Construction of the adjective in its radical If the quality expressed by the adjective
is
represented as present in the object
from the very beginning, then the adjective definition in its
radical form, joined
to the substantive in a
is
Akd-t#ittsi,
red earth, ruddle.
Sir6-g
white ore
1.
a.
first
compound word;
also:
Ktir6-tttU*ii black-earth.
Nagd-sdki, Long-cape.
Adjectives in
a subordinate attributive
as
is,
Taka-no, = Highland, German ffocklanJ. Thus
B.
form with a noon. -
Amn-sakt*
(silver).
foi,
sweetbeer.
the old-year.
ki.
-- If the quality Ki, termination of the adjective used as attributive.
to be
attributive,
attributed
to
the object expressly,
the adjective,
to
be used
M
a derivative termination, which acquires a conjunctive, or properly
CHAPTER
106
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
Takakino, =
for a particular class of adjectives, is ki; is
high
Takano =
distinguished from
,
saki, a
Nagdki Akdki
tstitsi,
Sir6ki gdne,
The
,
9.
a high land, land that
highland. Thus also
Kurdki
long cape.
:
black earth.
tsfttsi,
red earth (ruddle).
Amdki
white ore.
FUruki dto,
sweet beer.
sakd,
old traces, ruins.
which
adjectives belonging to this class generally express a quality, to
activity is not allied. Remark. The termination Ki , whose vocal / is
derived, means
,,being so" that
is
the root
,
from which the continuative verb ari
to say, as the essential
is
the essential part to the verbal element can be no other, than that of an
Yama
the mutual relation of Takaki and
on page 96
said
is
line 15 et sqq. concerning
white
The
b.
substitute
now
e.
to the verb
whereas
,
Compare what has been
word.
ka
for the adjective termination
may
eminently high
,
be used substantively
Yama
takaki or
,
Yamano
nouns
as
takaki
or the highest of mountains
,
is
yama
being a subordinate definition to takaki.
2.
Ku, adverbial
adverb, then fly
i.
be,
).
-concrete, and then as such are declinable. ,
implies.
adverb
:= to
relation of
J
adjectives with the termination ki
the high of mountains
The
Kaki-mono.
The vulgar language of Nagasaki ki, thus sirdka for sirdki,
compound
that of a
word
part of the
form.
The adverb in ku under
high.
If
an adjective of
this
class
is
used as an
form assumes the termination ku. Takakft tobu, = to
radical
its
- -
all
circumstances remains an adverb, yet re-
presents in the coordinate sentence, whose predicate verb must be in the un con-
jugated radical form
nating in
s
),
the undefined radical form of the adjective verb termi-
si.
by the
Isolated
suffix
va
the verb, which brings out
its
(
6) the adverb acquires a position separated
idea with
more emphasis.
from
Odsik&vb, = manifold,
often (frequently). 3.
1) if
a.
The
Si,
form of the adjective as praedicate.
the termination ka
preter ,,is
When
-
an adjective of
this
question, formerly mooted in the ,,Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst" by D. CUETIUS, 1857, p. 34,
by Japanese for
-
orally,
is
as
really peculiar to the dialect of
in writing by the late E.
Nagasaki , has since been answered
DE SAINT AULAIEE, who was
the Japanese language, at Nagasaki. ,,The adjective termination in
really used generally in
who have had
a
little
Nagasaki and the lower
education,
know
class of the people
very well, that
2) See Introduction, p. 45, Coordination.
it
is
affirmatively, as well
stationed, as
inter-
," wrote the latter to
understand nothing
not right."
Dutch
else
;
me,
those however
CHAPTER used as a predicate
class is
Yama
is.
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
its radical
,
form acquires the termination
takasi, = the mountain high to be, i.e. the mountain
which taka stands
relation in
si
3
and designated G-en-zaino
=
,
high
to be
1
).
,
The
si,
or the
)
verb.
its
the auxiliary verbs (Ziyogo) *)
among
placed by Japanese grammarians
,
is
si
to si, is, in the spirit of the Japanese language,
again no other than that of an adverb to This
107
9.
si
of the present tense, undergoes no
verbal change.
of
now
If
b.
a verbal change to indicate term
am
the continuative verb ari,
si,
4
and mood
used, which added to the
is
(= exist),
)
required, then instead
is
adverbial form ku, fuses with this into kari; from Takaku ari, continually high to
comes Takakari, a derivative verb, which
be,
accordance after the general plan of conjugation
the change of
By
si
to be conjugated in
Instead of art, eri
).
is
also
80.
used, as expressing the praeteritum praesens, see 4.
now
is
5
into sa thase adjective verbs are
made nouns
abstract;
Takasa, = the height. Remark. Sa the
is
contraction of the
a
Takdsi predicate
=
,,is
predicate,
high ," whereas va
and the
m. Ta*
isolating
raises this idea to a
therefore include*
ubUntire
noun
,,the height.**
"
The Chinese
follows the
5.
same way, when
LIST OF
idea of ..height" by expresses the abstract
it
THE PRINCIPAL ADJECTIVE ROOTS IN
KI.
Fik*-ki.fa$ $, low.
1.
Taka-ki,
lgf|, high.
2.
Fiki-ki,
S.
Fnkarki,
5, deep.
4.
A*a-ki.
'fl!
jg
5.
Naga-ki,
||J>, long.
6.
MMsika-ki,
$@f,
7.
Fir6-ki,
J{
8.
Sel>a-(Sema-)ki ,
^T<.
9.
FM6-ki,
^fci, thick,
)
[Ooi-naru,
1)
In
^|
BROWN'S
E.
is
**
-ff
V ~> xC
/
8)
$S,v^Y
4)
Not tar*, nor yar,
5) See
6)
The
v
,
11.
large.]
t
p.
XXXIX,
36
et .qq.,
no doubt a printing wholly overlooked,
1 1It
^
wr
ra-r*
as it is printed in
Atco
under
Si.
Am.,
p.
fine.
fault
*.'
.
u
that
we may
It
10.
adjectives placed
the autithesis.
between bracket,
[
1
do not belong to
tti.
'
cited a. the tenottiti.
ot
lero
Compare lODftioun. page 66. 7,
narrow.
/J^ 8maU
TuuaM,
line
fifc,
pq
*yj 3
IB
r
short.
^^.
10. Fo*o-ki,
coarse.
Colloquial Japane,e
the adjective predicate, and )
wide, broad.
,
;
c^ory,
a,
.
CHAPTER
108 12. Fira-ki,
,
j\
9.
13. Kevasi-ki,
# gibbous, con-
*.
[
THE ADJECTIVE.
level, even.
If,
14. Naka-daka-ki,
III.
15
Kubo-ki
.
')
steep.
|
|, hollow, con-
,
vex.
cave. '
7
16. Firata-ki,
17.
flat.
,
Mdro-ki\Maround.
19. Usu-ki,
,
thick.
20. Nao-ki,
,
right.
21. To6-ki,
,
far, distant.
18. Atsu-ki,
^
23. Amane-ki,
[Magaru
JH Hi
'So
*
o
22. Tsikd-ki,
eve ~
crooked.]
*",
,
near.
,
24. Suku-nd-ki,
seldom.
,
ry where. 25. 06-ki.
>
y
I
much, many.
,
1^1
%*<>
^
o
dense.
26. Stik6si-ki,
g
*/,
28. Mtind-si-ki,
t
,
little
few.
,
without
con-
ts
tents, void, 29. Matta-ki,
*
31. Kovd-ki,
\
'-? *3
^
,
entire, whole.
30. Ndki,
t without
,
hard.
32. Moro-ki,
io Ife^
,
.
,
.
.
less.
brittle.
y o ^^, weak,
33. Tsuyo-ki,
^5o^ ^cjft'
35.
harsh, rude, waste. 36. Om6-ki,
|[^, heavy.
38. Kdta-ki,
fc%,
40.
fy
difficult.
^
h
To-H,
o
pointed
,
,
gf,
[Yawaraga-
soft,
weak.]
ndru,
31.Kar6-ki,
^^ a
,
39. Ydsu-ki,
>^ ^
,
41 Nibu-ki .
light.
^7'
,
facile ,
easy.
blunt. /
sharp; quick. jljl^, late; slow.
42. Hayd-ki, early; quick.
44.
^,
Wa&a-K,
,
young.
4^-tt-
[Oitaru,
>C^
45. Furu-ki,
new.]
nlrl 1 f^,^
^p^
O1U.J
^,
o
ancient, antique.
46. To- (old. Ye-)
48. Sdmti-(SdM-)
1)
Kevasiki,
derivative form.
||
3
o
|gj,
and the
|| good, ,
well.
47. Wdrti-ki,
cold.
adjectives
cited
^ Jjgi
>
under Nos. 28, 30,
,
f$l ^ f
66 and 73 have
tiki
bad
i
,
base.
warm.]
(N.
71)
for their
CHAPTER 49. Suzu-ki,
3
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
cool.
9.
109
50. Nuruki,
^
)|, lukewarm;
o
lazy.
51. jfiTo-K, Keki,
iH
3
strong
,,^,
(of
52. ,
v
taste or color).
53. u4o-H,
^|
^, pale blue, pale
j
[Akirdkd-naru 58.
Amd-ki,
60.
Umd- (Mu-
,
l$J
white.
,
Jt^
light, clear.]
sweet.
)fp;*, itching.
64. Sibu-ki,
fiifcK
68. Sivd-ki,
red5. JJQCi
56. K&rv-ki,
2, black.
57. Ktird-ki,
$, dark, dusky. >x, acid.
61. Niku-ki,
nice, beautiful.
62. Kayu-ki,
Kauvasi-ki
54. Aka-ki,
59.
^ofPI' sweet,
ma-) H,
66. Kaubasi-ki,
or color).
jfct,
green.
.
55. Sird-ki,
raw
^^
S
*/,
e ;
63. Niga-lci,
acerb,
65.
fragrant.
67.
^, bitter.
tart
,
,
stinking.
,
ifeJZvrfii covetous,
6e".
Td-ki,
$C
|^
*.
scant like.
7Q.G6t6-ki,
-jffj^
jf,
71.
$H H
Sfe being such
5-&i,
as
= 73. Be-ki ,
i
[/fotonrfrM,
72. Sikd-ki,
J|.j:
v
j^ ^,
(substantive suffix .
.
.
ish
,
.
.
54.
'
desirous, willing.
... like).
allowable. "pf ^,
THE SAME ROOTS ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. .4fca
faint (of taste
,
difierent]
being so, or such.
110
CHAPTER
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
Remark. The termination ki,
as the
9.
characteristic of
distinguishing
ought to be placed on the foreground, deviating from
this class of adjectives,
the method in the Japanese dictionaries, which give these adjectives as adjective verbs with the termination si and, so doing, do not distinguish
from those, which terminate in siki (= expression
j\f
syncope of
fisdsisi,
but
*''
is
$* **/
is
defective,
since fisdsi
(=
of long duration) as a
is
in all respects the form of the
is
adjective verb, has
not nagasiki, but nagaki.
Examples of the use of the forms
6.
So, to give an instance, their
ish).
not fisdki, for adjective form, whereas the adjective form
fisdsiki,
of nagasi
e
them
amaki kakiva fayezdru,
[Ki.] Sibu-kakino tanewo uete,
the sour fig, then do not
grow
cited.
figs,
that are sweet,
from the country of Tanba people
kitstindwo sasdgti,
Tsikdra-ndki yumi
,
a powerless bow.
-
if
people sow seed of
Tanba-kuniyori kur6ki
-
offer a fox
which
is
black.
Tsikdra-ndki koto , powerlessness.
-
Ne-
ztimino sirokiwd siro-nezUmito /#, the white of mice (= mice that are white) are
FUrukiwd
white mice.
called
dtdrdsikini tsukti,
stitete
forsaking the old, to
apply oneself to the new. If objects are previously mentioned, from which a choice
made, then the expression
is
ll]5
HB Z
Ydma
good: Fitrukinowd
and take the new ones
reject the old (objects)
V
is
$J
$
because
it
*).
it
is
high;
Kidr&wo
"*
^
^
wood, people consider him
_
"*
,>
2 ^J ^ A
^%
y
5
;
to be respectable.
Mftsasabiva takdkiyori fikikini dmdmuku. Fikikiyori ta-
its
2 ).
The bat turns
head from above towards below.
towards above
it
may
itself
with
To climb from below
not.
9
[Ku.] Konofa akdkti takdktt
ttrite firtigaverti
tsftkuru. to build a
kttdri, the wild goose flying high,
1)
not considerable,
mdtte tattosito su, because he carries
kakini nob6ru-koto atavdzu
Iy6wo
is
if
j
y?
atardsikinowd toru, to
takdkiga yUdni tattokardzu, a mountain
-E^-fr
M/
stitdte
With regard
to this construction
,
the tree-leaf shining red
house high.
comes from
compare, page 86,
kin-moo dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. 2) JLasira-gaki
line
flies
around. -
Kdriva takdku tonde tookuyori afar.
10, in connection with note
1.
CHAPTER
% -to? 9
~
-__
/%
"f
the big-
is
strong in the wings.
he soars round high in the space of the
JH*
i
Tsubdsa
wart.
tobi-mfyiiru '), the eagle
the birds of prey;
among
gest
>5t ^ pr|
ku-tsiu takdku
HI* y^">
;*
nx
9.
Kuma-takavd takano ooi-naru mono
'
w
y
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
air.
t
Tsubdsa tsuydku stands to the next sentence in the relation of coordination, in consequence of
undefined and the adverbial form tsUydku (See above, page 106 ffifc^T
3.*%
vy!/
^*
4JcpE.
Aku-dauni
cheaper, = this
Z&
Z&Z*
of dri nk,
=0
J?
be thirsty.
to
haydkft ari-mdsit,
has happened,
Wdrukii ndtta
,
-
has become bad.
to turn into the
way
of virtue
this
is,
a
difficult
is
from that out,
Nomi-tdku, dri, desirous
).
speedy, a greeting at setting
rise is
-
ide
natdrc-mdata,
Wdrukti,
Yo fodo
-
=
Oide haydkft ari-md**, or merely
-
Y6ku
-
be welcome.
e.
i.
iri-qdtatt.
art-mart,
= your
out on a journey, and on the way. arrival
the case with ydssUku in the proverb:
is
cheaper than that
is
is left
used instead of the predicate t**y6d.
is
soreydri ydsuku
^5
grammatical relation
easy, to tread the
(is)
If 5-
its
sen-dauniwd
iri-ydstiku,
of evil
Korewd
''
The same
2.).
W
way
=^
_./
b.
which
wart,
well,
your
become bad.
to
takdru nori-mdsfi
-
*)
,
is
it
too high
(too dear). Remark. Do the adverbs B.
BROWN'S valuable
cate adjectives?
ku in the three
in
Colloquial Japanese ,
this question
is
p.
which we cannot
adjective,
to stand as predicate,
ni or de
,
and,
if it
is
is
,
an adjective,
perfection
in all
far as panese expression is, as
[Si.]
of the geese
is
high.
1)
is
XIII. Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzv-i.
3) Ibid. p. 37.
is
Yama
sivo faydsi, in this strait the
wktmtr
titit
eoetp-
called nominative termination
is
good,
,
an
these adjective* are governed aa aco,
answer to oar
,,be**
and ..beeoaM,"
how? or whereto P
in tie eaae
have ku before them, in the equivalent adverbial form. the weather
farm
or the weather becomes jrood
,
of
7V*-Ji
M
in
a
respects expressed by Tempetttu to** tit, or lom*jU, bat the Ja-
form
amdsi, the taste of the root
,jUuU
or are they predi-
adjective or a prfdieate adjeftie*,"
as regards their signification
concerned, equal to TtmpttUt Itne tit, or lf*f
Kono misdkiwd hanahada
-
an
a noun, to the question where?
yoku dri (yokari) or Ti-n-ki yoku nari; language nearer
it
cannot agree with the subject;
ordinate definitions , by verbs which it
it
As the Japanese has no properly
agree.
but their complement, when
,
which we hare taken npratlj
retain their adverbial character ,
answered in the place quoted in that SCUM,
(the adverb in ku) precedes a substantive verb, tion with
last expressions,
XL
nagdsi, this cape
sweet. toori,
stream
6.
recto.
is
-
-
Kariga
is
the mountain
Neno
very long.
tobu-k-vlo is
takan,
<
#1.
the
adti flight
Kono */
>,
Siyuni mazicfo* monovd akui
swift
8)
SAoppimy.DMywt ,
p. 95.
CHAPTER
112
fino kin-ziyove 6ku koto
is
THE ADJECTIVE.
whoever goes abouth with red
sun comes
III.
Fino
is red.
atdriitoko'ro, taki-
Subtle dsiki nivoviwo imu btsi, in a place where the
dstsi.
(and) in the neighborhood of
,
9.
(the eggs of the silkworm) to lay
fire
Kono sima
not good. In general people ought to avoid the nasty smell.
Neno
good.
is
[Sa.]
to think that it is
Yosito timo'vn,
adzi asisi yotte, because the taste of the root
existing between
difference
which
without inhabitants.
island is
this
nasi,
renownd
as
Yoxino, = a beautiful
the Beautiful
Kono misaki nagdsa
field,
see
is
nasty.
As
to the
and Yosino, - a place
field
N.
Addenda
fiio
IV.
san ri bakari nari, the length of this cape
is
only
three ri (miles).
THE ADJECTIVE ACCORDING TO THE SPOKEN LANGUAGE.
II.
The spoken language suppressing the k and the only the
retains
i
of ki, si and ku, thus
s
and the u, which now immediately follow a vowel. Thereby
they acquire. for aki
and
asi the
form ai and for aku the form au, pronounced as au, ao, 60.
eki
esi
ei
eku
eu,
iki
isi
ii
iku
iu.
oki
osi
oi
oku
ou,
uki
usi
ui
uku
uu.
The easy written
style,
eo.
60.
which follows the spoken language, has for au, eu
and ou , no fixed written form
;
it
(high)
supersedes the form of writing to be used by choice.
also
by
2% 7,
23
*?
(long)
t#7, T**
(desirous)
^^,
and
2
3
]
t*l
K^
K)
(without) (close)
K?
(far)
)
.
Examples of the use of the forms. [i
for ki].
pine-trees.
Nagai matsu yori otsuru yuki, snow Karoi kemuri noboru,
light
falling out of the long (high)
Fdna simono samuiwo
smoke ascends.
osoru, the flower fears the cold of the rime. [i
for si].
Kurdno
the flight of the geese
1)
figa akai, the evening-sun is
Shopping-Dialogues , p. 2.
high.
is red.
Korewa amari
tsiisai
Kariga tobu-koto 1
),
takai,
this is too small.
CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE.
.
.
is
nagai*),
Korewa
long. 4
dziyaiga usui
iroga koi*), this
..iroga warui*), this
nara
,
tori-masoo
I0
)
,
it
it
is
cheap
mausw, to speak
.
I shall take
,
am
be, = I
difficult to
is
Fitoga nai .
3
atsui
7
..iroga wui
color.
[u for ku]. Ari-gdtau or Ari-gdtoo, ari-mdsu,
- -
), 5
9
),
there
is
as
no one.
is
Kortwa
thick.
), is
this
),
bad of color -- Osoi kara
is
as
high.
this is thin of texture.
),
dark of
is
is
takai*),
.
.
113
9, 10.
light of color.
Ydsui
late
it is
it.
be, abbreviated for Ari-gdtaku
difficult to
Y6o
obliged to you.
moofft, for Ydlrii
Kaslkoo sum, for Kasikdkfi suru, to do wisely.
well.
wadzurdo, for Fukdku wddzurdvu, to be deeply involved in
Fukoo
difficulty.
In Japanese vocabularies the expressions of the conversational are mostly distinguished from those of the book language by an antecedent
that
is:
the word Kanari of the book language
('should not...) is
of the
book language
not) or as TLauteio* nai (=.so
is
is
is
A
or
Q
equivalent to Soredomoyoi of the conversational.
the same as Soosita koto tea nat
Mich tort of thing then
j,
there not; of the conversational-
DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.
10.
By
Adjectives
in karii and gartL
ku with
a fusion of the adverbial form
aril (being),
the form karfl
is
obtained (so being as the previous adverb indicates). Nomi-tdku-ar* , passes into
Nomi-takdru (J
L?%
v), = desirous of drink or being thirsty.
dr* being the
Derivatives of this stamp take the same inflections as art, attributive,
drt
the
predicate
and as the adjectives in
form;
which the idea of activity express a quality, to
k+ari
is
ki
themselves,
not allied, the derivative form
the continual presence of the not-active quality. expresses merely
Waka-ki tokoni, in youthful time.
Waka-ki, young. while or as long as one
is
Wakakdriti
young.
Wakakdr*
toki ydri, since
fafa'm',
the time
when
one was young. without. Naki, not at hand, being
Nakari, continually not to be at hand.
Sir61d, white.
Sirokdru, continually white.
Ydsuki, easy.
YdsZkdri, continually to be easy.
I)
6)
Shopping-Dialogue*, page
8.
page 23.
lg
>2-
)
1) ptg* IS.
8)
2)
PV p^
3-
4)
PV
1 1.
9)
PH*
'
<
8) <>) ^
PV f4
'
CHAPTER
114
lem+
The
nation, ga and
form lean explains the obscure
there mentioned on page 55, lines 8 to
gam
it,
glad. See
it
forms Yekkigdru, being
synonymous with Yekkindru
,
,
to be at hand, to be there, to exist,
Ndki (^F|p, not at hand, ....less. Ari is the radical (to be) the same time but by exception the predicate form (= there is) dru the
antithetical
and at
to
,
,
substantive form (the being) to derive adjectives
Kumova
there.
an
full of gladness,
aru.
Ari, aril (^(=fT o r,)i ver^ continuative
cloud
a fusion of the genitive-termi-
is
12,
55 and 57 of RODRI-
$J
12.
Adjectives in
11.
10, 11, 12.
aru peculiar to the conversational language exclusively. Joined to the Chinese word
Yek-ki 1 ), gladness, with
Yekkina, being
THE ADJECTIVE.
illustration of the derivative
Remark. This GUEZ,
III.
has
,
which
is
at the
an",
same time used
Iro ari, = there
from substantives. iro
;
attributively (being)
= what concerns the cloud, there
color. If the definition:
there
is
color"
is
become
is to
i.
color,
the
e.
attributive, then
now becomes an
acquires the attributive form dru', the subject iro
,
color or colors are
is
attributive
proposition of dru, and assumes the attributive form, thus the genitive termination no, in the spoken language, ga. Iro no or iroga aru colors present being clouds,
The cularly its
i.
genitive termination
when
e.
no
kumo means,
literally:
colored clouds or clouds which have colors. is
often omitted in similar expressions, parti-
the attributive definition joined to
radical form; e.g. Asiki riivdi druki,
aru
wood (M) of
is
a
verb,
which
a bad smell.
is
in
Nivoi, to
smell, smell.
Examples. Tsumi an, there Futd-kok6rono
criminal.
Om6i
hearted man.
is
Tsumi
guilt.
dru fito,
a
man who
futdtsu dru kotoba, a
word
of meanings (om6i) has, an equivocal word.
has a will, a firm character.
wered
silk-stuif.
business, busy.
^
E ,
has two hearts, a double-
(kotoba), that a couple (futdtsn)
who
Kok6ro-sdsi dru mono, one
Aya-dru ori-mono, flowers having texture, Yamavi-dru
flo-
Koto-dru having 3 7 Fima-dru or sukimaga dru, having free time. ^% ^) Sai-vai-dru
,
happy.
fito, a
man who
has merit.
Adjectives in naru, na and
By means
mono, a guilty person,
,
sickly.
,
:
Kou-dru 12.
dru,
^f T, ^tn^'
feki-aru, profitable.
taru.
of the substantive suffix naru, which
of the Local ni and of dri, dru, and thus
means
is,
in
my
opinion, a fusion
being lasting in
.
.
.
,"
from
n, THE ADJECTIVE.
and adverbs
substantives
adjectives are formed,
12.
115
which indicate a possession of
that which the root expresses.
The
familiar conversational,
and the epistolary
style abbreviates
-- Ki, vulgo da. yellow. Ki-uri, the yellow pumkin a
pumkin
that
is
-
yellow.
A
-
Fimdna
naru to na
Ki-ndr* or Ki-na
').
A
tokoro, a place of rest.
uri,
Kirei-na
nizi a beautiful rainbow.
With adverbs.
the inflectional termination ni the radical forms of this class are used as Odini, greatly.
Tsundni, commonly.
As words, which have naru 1)
0rf),
^|
TsttnJ,
Suguni, directly, straightly.
for their derivative
form are to be noticed:
great.
U4,
_h*,
above.
UJ?,
common.
Sttd,
"f^,
below.
Mare,
^fjt,
rare, seldom.
Mat,
JJJTX,
before.
Sugu,
yUfy,
right.
lya,
o
|,
~^\
^,
unwelcome.
Examples of the use of the forms. Ftt6 sono nave no 6oi ndruwo sirn koto worf j ),= that a
man knows
S\\$ 7
}
)
fatono 6otsd
X
*
~Y i//%
1
dri,
that his rice-crop '^
^S ^A
no katdvara naru taka-tokdro
slept,
By means
*9"
7
9
^ap> seo
P^
3
'"
mrrdra
ari; '6dt
ones; those which are big
little
his merit in great.
h'ari-ko
a high place at the side of the silkworms.
,
throw
not the fact (koto
--
In-kova dai
Sono kou 6ot wan,
kini nevurisi kavikova nve (or u^)
2)
so large (ample).
is
of parrots people have big and
have the bigness of a dove.
have previously
^
it is
naru kavawo nugi-idzuru = the silkworms that ,
off the skin
being (which
of naru, or na, Chinese words are
is)
upon them.
made Japanese
adjective*.
Zin-ndru, humane. Tsiu-ndrit, sincere.
Fu-tsiu-ndru, insincere.
Yuu-ndrii, brave.
1)
Cucurlita Pepo verrueoia
2)
Ooi, great,
after the old writing
ooi, derived from oo,
^^Y
and oosa
LWN.
much,
(f^
Dai Got*, VIII,
2.
**,
w>d the form* ooK, *o*i,
are frequently interchanged
for ,,8;reat,"
and
ooi-ntu-i
;
the
in
the
eoivwwtioMl
tamo writer frequently
and ooti m*ri for
>
rit.**
OM
by tnnu
in. THE ADJECTIVE.
CHAPTER
116
ft v
W?
r
fc^ ^
t flx
Sin-zits-ndrii , solid
'
-
-
.
.
&,
v
Bu-ki-rei-ndru , not beautiful.
?
.
.
a 1
Yumino yau na,
being as ...
ly,
,
"Sdo-st
lt^'
fair.
Ki-rei-ndru, beautiful,
^t^
7^-
real , sincere.
,
Tei-nei-ndru , courteous.
,
,,
r
12, 13.
1 ),
glad, joyful.
= cease laughing,
),
archwise.
Soo-si nari, It is not
feel pain.
to be laughed at, It is sorrowful.
Taru (2
n/),
=
te
is
aru,
^Ev^v^^'
words.
also used to
Gen-zen-taru
form Japanese adjectives from Chinese apparent, public.
,
If more adjectives thus formed follow, linked to one another, then only the
has the attributive form taru, whereas those preceding have the indefinite
last
form
tari.
O
^
j^
^
JZ. */
a.fe
*
7 JD^
n /\. Z
Jljj
^
A. Z
Derivative adjectives
The termination ka,
Ko
by the
in
my
word
is
,
there
is
a prince
opinion, allied to the adjective radical forms
evidence of the mutual affinity of ka, ke and first
Ke
indicates, that the quality expressed
present in a large degree or
kanaru, kanari and kani, the
)
in ka.
(page 109 n. 51), just as these, radical
2
worthy, perfect.
stately,
^,T.I TI
13.
and
Sit-tari, kan-tari, ft-tdru kun-si ari
is
strongly prominent.
As
ko may be adduced that the forms
being attributive, the second predicate, the
third adverbial, are frequently superseded
by keki, kesi and keku.
For kdnaru
and kdnari the conversational language uses only kana. Adjectives of this class are:
AMrdkd,
IfJ^^^j
Atataka,
^5^*'
Faruka jm ,
Kdsitkd,
I)
3)
,
^|*^,
solitary.
line 9
,#
bright, clear, light; allied to Ake, light.
warm
far.
?
allied to
Sono dtofarukd ndri or farttkana or farukdsi, his trace
remote, solitary.
Umino kazdva
Mitsiga kdsttkani farttkana, the
Both expressions are taken up here, and 10 sosina,
Daigaku,
Atatameru, to warm.
,,avoir
III, 4.
kasttkd ndri, the sea-wind is so
way is solitary and far. As
to illustrate the
do regret" and yekina,
is far.
to
ni see
160.
forms occurring in RODRIGUEZ Element, p. 55,
se rejouir."
CHAPTER in. THE ADJECTIVE.
Ktrdrakd,
Komakd
ffi
? #, brilliant; from Kira-kira, glitter; Kirara, glimmer, niika.
$gj ^ %
,
Komakana
117
13, 14.
$gj
o
^
fine
,
;
Komamtru
allied to
sund, fine sand.
,
to
make
fine, to
most minute par-
to the
Komakani, adverb,
make small. -
ticulars; minutely, exactly.
Nadarakd, tf$#7#, smooth, ironed out; from Nader*
Namerakd, J^f J ? ^, smooth,
to iron, to stroke.
,
Namert, suck, and
slippery; allied to
to
Namfa,
make smooth.
to
Nodokd,
p
'fijZ
$&*
>
se* fei r
(f
the weather); from -
Ogosoka,
jJE^y^,
severe, strict.
Ordsoka,
^^ y *>
negligent, lazy.
lay
down, put
Sadaka,
fr
^^ .
t
Or6ka
-
sldzuktsi, the
Ordsokanisu, to neglect; allied to 0rJ*u, to
off.
Saddmeru, to define, calm,
morning
is
- -
still.
Sadaka ndri or Sadaktsi,
Asa-Jiga sidzHka nan', or
The
Tavtrakd,
preserved in Sidzu-kokdro
^
,
,
cer-
fefcti*&ui,
SidzUkdni, old- Japanese also old
or
jfcfcuZ-uiii,
form SidziJcuni pleads for the in-
fluence of the vocal harmony. (Compare page 62 is
it is
fix.
so calm.
I/M^M, to go softly, slink, sneak.
Sidzu
stupid, obsolete 6r6U.
-fi
^.^i
Sidztikd, jffi^
^,
j^iS^
_^., certain, sure, definitive.
tain; allied to
Nodo, calm.
,
line 2).
The
radical
word
a calm mind.
or Tdlrakd, even, plane,
flat;
from
fa,
hand andytra,
flat,
thus
hand-flat-ish. ,y
Tsttmd-btrdkd
,
^-=? ? ^,
clear
and plain, decided,
Tsumdri, concise and firdku, to open.
-
settled; after the 5i iron
from
TVumo'&fra&im, or old-Japanese
TsttmablraMkti, adverb, plainly.
WadzUkd, ^j[Y 14.
J^,
scarce;
Wadztkdni,
Derivative adjectives
scarcely, hardly.
in yaka, in old-Japanese also vaka, )\
"ft
.
Attributive yakdnaru, predicate yakdnari (in the conversational language yi-
kana), adverbially yakani.
The
derivative
form yaka means as much as having the appearance of that
which the root points out
To
')
to the the words of this class, which have passed from the old language
new, belong:
1) This notice
*v#o
H,
of th6 meaning
of
a ya*a agree* with that which
Japuve
etymologi*
of
it:
CHAPTER
118
Asdydkd, $EE^ #
$E
HfJ
III.
and bright
fresh
,
THE ADJECTIVE.
naiva iro hana-hada asdydkd nari
From
^J
j|
^
^^ ^^>
Kirdviyakd,
^7^.^,
strong beer.
Hflr^-
*J
*
^'
is
bright (of the weather).
1) tight, close, dense;
2) ;<
narrow,
from Kirdmi, to
from Komi, Komu,
#$!'
Nigiyaka,
HH^^^,
Nikoyaka,
^ft^Y*? ^ne
Nobiyaka,
^*^Y*
elastic;
Oddydkd,
^ftlrY #
calm,
Savdyakd,
p
Sayakd,
fft\
^^ ^^
graceful;
^
%
jp|
,
Mamd,
reality.
from Nago, maid.
Nigiwavi, bustle.
busy, bustling.
^o
Knsdki
splendid, beautiful; allied to Miyaburi, courtly.
j^fj $^#' maidenly,
^^ ^*
fill.
precise.
Nagdydkd,
J
to
glitter.
Komayakanaru saM
J|J#, sincere, unfeigned, true; from
Miyabiyaka, ffj&^f
,
CiQ &^^-
Kure-
Aki-kaz6va Jiyayaka nari, the autumn wind
komayakana, grass and wood close growing.
Sindyakd
Also Azayaka
iro, a bright color.
/^
glittering; also Kirabiyaka,
K&mdydkd, ^|p|^ ^ #>
Mamfyaka,
(asa).
Fiya, cold.
Ke-zayaka,
tlf.
morning
very bright of color.
is
Fiydyakd, J^-v^, bleak, cold. bleak.
as the
Asayakd ndru
Azayagu, Asayuga, Azarakeki.
the safflower
14.
tender, soft, mild; from Niko, pleasing; fine.
from Nob)i, u, to still;
stretch.
from Oddv)i, u, to become calm.
bright; gay; brave.
^ Sayakeki,
^^
,
supple
,
clear (of light
pliant ; soft
,
and sound).
flexible
;
also Sindbiyaka ,
from
Sindmi, to bend (oneself).
^f'v#?
secretly,
^v*o
jP|
Sindbiyaka, /
Snkdyakd,
^gi
Sukdydkd and Sukiyakd; Sttmi'yakd,
= $$|?
from Sinob)i, u, to hide; to
suffer.
strong, full of power; also Siikuyakd, Sttkuydkd,
allied to
SnM,
support. (?)
%, quick, swift; allied to Stisitmi, pronounce ssmi, to advance.
Kava-osova midzu-nakawo fasiru-koto sttmiyakd nari, the motion of the river otter
under water
Tawdyakd, JUJj^fri logists
the
is
also
quick.
Tawayaka,
pliable, supple, soft; after
Japanese etymo-
from Ta, hand, and Yowa, weak, being the weaker sex, opposed to
man,
called
allied to
Tawoya-me;
Tawam)e,
kazemo tawdyakdni naru, Waves and wind become
Wakdydkd,
^*^
juvenile.
youthful warrior.
Waka-ki*, young.
Yuruyaka
eru, to bend.
Nami
softer.
Wakayaka ndru samurai t a
4ffe*s%, limp; slow; allied to Yurusi, to loose.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
Derivative adjectives
15.
Keki
or K6ki,
form
radical
119
15, 16.
in keki or k6ki.
Ke
or
Ko
(yf|),
= strong
(of taste or color),
already mentioned
among
of another word,
signifies that the object richly possesses that,
tioned by this word.
the adjectives in ki, whenever
Words
it is
joined to the root
which
of this stamp are chiefly characterized as old-Japanese ,
language supersedes the attributive keki or koki and the predicate
and the adverbial
kei or koi,
quite fresh,
,
l
13).
(
lying in a deep
Ne-koki,
very clear.
sleep.
Nure-koki , ~j^ , very strong,
thoroughly
Sdmti-keki,
very cold,
damp,
Sidzu-keki ,
very calm,
Fdrtt-keki,
Keya-keki
)
,
full
Tsuyu-keki
Adjective siki (i"f
not generally, mostly
wetthrough.
Sitsu-koki,
of dew.
,
Derivative adjectives
16.
The
class belong:
this
Azara-keki
kesi or kori
or kokti by keu (keo) or kou (koo).
kekit
forms keki and koki frequently mutate with the derivative form ka
To
men-
not totally excluded from the modern language. The conversational
although
with
is
sii
(
si
M
)
),
su
si
(^fP^), =
(shu)',
and siu
so, Lat. sic
with that, which
is
..
like.
in the conversational language by the elision of k and *,
(O'
Siki means, just as
=
adverbial slku (*/;?), predicate sisi (l^>), often, but
(
l/*?
substantive sisa
as
in siki',
.
.
o
2/7), the
(>f);
last
mentioned frequently pronounced Ikarl,u, = so to
continuative verb
be.
Root
>).
like (German
.
.
lich,
Dutch
.
.
lijk,
to which expressed by the root,
it
.
is
.
an/ki), joined.
equality
Being of a (
^j,
it
is
thus by a indicated in writing also by these Chinese characters,
word indicated in a false light rebus, which places the
As in old-Japanese many mination viation of
siki
or
of the adjectives in ki
(
9. B.)
occur with the ter-
consider the ki as an abbreii, the Japanese philologers
siki.
1) Distinguished
from Fdrv tetiti, spring-wrathcr
Zoo boo ti-mon
t*i*-loo
4, 1119,
under Sit*.
CHAPTER
120
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
16.
Siki forms adjectives from nouns, from adverbs and interjections, and from verbs.
1)
A-siki,
Denominative and Adverbial
jl 7
2/*
3f|$
derived from nouns and adverbs are,
Fino teri-kdmuva hanahada
learn badly.
is
wakemavdnu = not once to distinguish the,
it
,
^
2^
^
hada-siki,
Hon-tsiyquni towdru koto with our empire.
refers to
i.
,
Fi
Fage-siki
bad," not to
exclamation of sur-
',
^T^*,
,
Jisdsi,
is it?,
heavy; eager.
tf^* very, uncommonly; from hanahada, very.
it
is
how long
is it
lately.
FaktL-sai
that Faku-sai has intercourse
long,
Iku fisdsani nari-mdsukd
ago.
In Fisa
the sun or the day goes hence
e.
,
is
,
placed the meaning
or has gone hence
,
which
sdrist.
.
igif.
^^, =
of one sort; agreeing.
thickish ,
Ikdga-stki , jfRv lyd-stki,
it is
a stone-rain.
Fisdsa, length of time.
= what lapse of time
-^
Ay a!
n g ag> antithetic to Sibdrakv, shortly,
l
,
1^
1-
e. g.
,
handsome.
Hfci''
Fanafada- or Hana
of
good and
Yosi asiwo
,
from *K^, wonderful; singular;
*
^^ V
Bi-bl-slki,
is
,
Ayasiki ame, a wonderful rain
prise.
very injurious.
frothy; faint of taste; also Ava-ava-siki.
J^'*^*, "trf
Asiku mandbu, to
Asikdru continuative verb from asiku and dru.
distinguish good from bad.
Aya-siki,
g.
= the entrance of sunshine
aslsi,
an apartment where silkworms are bred)
Ava-siki,
e.
mono, any one bad in disposition,
asiki
Asitd utsuva: bad tools.
a person of bad character.
(in
e.
Kokdrono
bad.
,
i.
stout.
^j"**^^, interrogative,
^V2x^,
Kdna-siki, Jj. f 2/*
despicable,
inquisitive.
mean; from lya, no!
painful, pitiful; from
,
Kana!
Kdnasiki kdna!
alas!
how
pitiful!
J^^2^^,
Kibi-siki,
Kuda-kuda~siki Kuru-&iki,
,
originally Kimi-siki,
^
J^ ^
{
^C^i
authoritative, strict, severe.
piecemeal.
Kuru-kuru-siki
^^2^.^,
- masterly,
^Y
^Li
tiresome, disagreeable, grievous.
Mi-kuru-siki, disagreeable to be seen, ugly, misformed. Root Kur)i, M, to reel (reel off cocoons).
Kftvd-siki, j
j$
2x^
o
^
o
^,
fair, neat.
neat, precise. ,
poor, shabby.
Ktivd-sikima
,
a fair horse.
Jitvd-
CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE.
lE*^*,
Mdsa-siki,
Hand-slid,
real;
and no, without; thus
fsj^^*,
Sabi-siki,
Jg*^*.
^ ^
T&dd-dki,
from Mdsa, truth.
fruitless.
-
identical.
|#j
^
vSx *
- -
proper,
f
Sfc^
real.
often interrupted, by pausing.
JL.*,^^, glad, merry, joyful, pleasant. -- Watdkusimo Hrfaku gozdri-
Urt-siki,
am
also I
mdsu,
-
joyful.
gladness was boundless. verb, to rejoice.
(ooiwo) of the -
glad.
-
kagiri nakeri, the
be glad at the greatness
urtslgdrtl, to
of days (at a long
Urfamtt, transitive to make
life).
(e,
uru,
to get, acquire) as root.
j^
/'*,
lovely; agreeable;
lied to Itsuku-simu, or also
Y&sd-siki,
J^^^Ol^, meek;
Y&rd-stki,
^gtn2x^
^,
The
means of
nature, neuter.
On
stki,
,
to love.
apt,
fit;
well.
slki.
meaning of the verb, from which
class of
by
the dark.
To be
whose works are
least those, it,
indeed, but leave the
able to treat thoroughly and satisfactorily this
words which, from an etymological point of view, belong to the most
intricate,
we ought
also to be able to
compare the forms,
in the different dialects of the popular language.
we
is,
the manner, in which the derivation in one case or another
within our reach, preserve silence; they talk about itself in
adjectives are
passes over to the adjective too, because tfJn
brought about, the Japanese etymologists, at
matter
al-
honest, graceful.
transitive or intransitive
derived by
handsome; old-Japanese Its*ka-tiki;
Uts&ku-stmu
by means of
2) Verbal, derived
Us,
UrMta
-
Ur&ikdru or Ur&tgdrt, = Hrfakit-aru, continuative
Fi-kdzuno ooiwo
number
-
Ur&toa, gladness.
Ur4, Yakutic Yor, joy. -- The Wa-gun Siwori gives ffi
-
Utsuku-slki,
is
rusty; alone (solitary).
Suzu-stkdru, continually cool.
,
^
$L
$fr
o
2^*, cool.
Taye-daye-siki, ||Jf|
=
Miind-slku ndru, to become empty; to give
ghost.
Ond-ziki,
Suzu-siki,
121
without contents, empty; in vain; from mt, kernel, fruit
>gt-^*,
up the
16.
think
we must
confine ourselves to a
As
in
which they occur
these are
still
unknown
to
mere indication of the most con-
spicuous phenomena. Adjectives with a
causative meaning derived by means of
tive or factive verbs, from verbs, by which, as
it is
slki
from causa-
to
cause an ac-
known,
CHAPTER
122
THE ADJECTIVE.
III,
tion to take place or be carried out it
asi
vocal -harmony sometimes into
for
fond of,
and which in Japanese,
indicated,
formed by changing the verbal termination
will be seen, hereafter, are
(or
is
16.
osi).
From Kondmi, -
formed the causative Konomdsi, = to cause fondness
is
and from
to be fond of,
this the adjective
Konomdsiki,
into
to like, to be
for, to
lovely.
i
as
The
make one adjectives,
so formed, thus show, that in the nature of the object lies the action, expressed to exercise or to bring to light.
by the causative verb,
To
kind of adjectives,
this
&?*
Ibukdsiki,
among
others, belong: for: doubtful, su-
>&3f' strange, wonderful; polite expression
and
spected; from Ibukds)i, w, to excite surprise,
from Ibuk)i, u,
this
to be
surprised at something. Isogdsiki,
|r|j|
^L^
7T **'*
J
7^\
from Isog)i, M, to make
As a
-^
*7
variation of
the causative form Isogavdsi,
Isogds)i, w, to
make busy; and
this
Watdkusiwd
Isogdsiki tokoro, a busy place.
haste.
(^
kon-nitsiwd isogdsii siness to day.
K*' busy; from
^ ^>y ^Tj & "f ) 2 ) I nave much buIsogd-siki, we have Isogavd-siki derived from ,
to
make busy, which
proceeds from Isogdv)i, w,
= to be busy. Itamdsiki or Itavdsiki, ^jjj%
and
to torture,
^^ ^
smarting, painful; from Itamds)i, w,
St'
from Ildm}i, M, to
this
feel
pain, to suffer.
Kdnomdsiki, lovely, agreeable, from Konomds)i, w, cause to
and
love, to attract a person;
Medzurdsiki , 3^2T ^i(^o "wT to excite interest,
and
this
to have gladly
rest in
.
costly.
Every thing that
.
.
,
object of taste,
eye upon
'
is
is
from
this
from Mede, MedzUru,
(^).
of.
&p.
also
Medzuri, to take inte-
Distinguished from Medzurdkd, important;
strange and rare, and however insignificant, an
from Me-tsnki or'Mi-tswki, = to
an adjective with the
eye," must be formed by means of rivative
w, to be fond
exciting interest, interesting; from Medzurds)i, w,
called Medzurdsi. If
a thing,
Ktinoni)?,,
like, to excite one's
stki,
signification of
we
fix
the
attractive to the
should obtain Metsukdsiki, as de-
from the causative form Metsukdsi (= cause one to look), but not
Medzurasiki
2 ).
Mutsukd&lki, tiresome,
grievous,
vexing, J||, or also, by means of rebus, ex-
1) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 16.
2) This as an answer to the question, proposed in E.
BROWN'S
Colloquial Japanese,
XLI.
CHAPTER
^
pressed by
make
grieve,
=
kdr)i, M,
>gf |- and
and
sad,
^
123
from Mutsuk)i, w, whence the contin native Mutsu-
vulgo *|g|
is
Jj^,
the scent of flowers
natsukdsii,
16.
gjr^; from Mut*ukas)i, u, to vex, to
%-*
to be grieved (or sad),
$p Jg,
Natstikdsiki,
this
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
is
more in
use.
Fdnan6
attractive, engaging.
attractive.
- -
From NaMtkdt)i,
nin6vi
u,
make
disposed, excite inclination or love; and this from Natsuk)i, u, to be inclined,
have inclination A*.
to.
kJW
3ft
Omdmukdsiki , |lp ^
ij
^V'
a^ so by
contraction
Omogdstki, pronounced as
from Omd-mMlutyi, u, to
ngdsiki, attractive, engaging;
Om6-muk)i, w, to turn oneself with the face
^^
From muki, =
.
[Sj
go
,
this
towards a thing.
(om.6)
u, the causative form; from this
t
is
to be continually attractive.
that in a good sense, thus engaging, dear, kind; from Omovds)i, u, also
Osor6s1,ki,
j*
causing to think of one, keeping another's thoughts engaged, and
Om&v68iki\
v6s)i,
from
to meet, arises a continuative verb mu/vir)i, u,
whence mukavas)i,
to be turned towards;
derived dmdmukavdsiki
to
and
attract,
Omo-
u, to cause to think,
^fl^y^*,
frightful;
and
this
from
dm(jv)i, u, to think (,{,
from Osdr6s)i, M, to make
and
fear,
0md-
).
this
from
Os6r)d, uru, to fear. j
Saivagdsiki,
J^' ^^ make rustle,
^^ ^HtM*
Sawagds}i, w, to w,
the sea sei
make
rustle, is
site
Rokdrowo
mono wo
an ^ noise, stormy, turbulent; from
to disturb, to confound,
a noise, be uneasy
stormy.
savagasiku
^^^g
^
!
),
^
ifc
make
the
mind uneasy.
Saruva
= the monkey makes much
noise and
The old-Japanese has
injures every thing.
from Sairag)i,
this
^*
(t^
sawagdsit,
kai-su
and
)
as variation of
Sivo wwagati^
Sawagi also So-
and Sawagavdtfki, wagavi, rage, tear; Sawagavds)i, w, enrage,
Tanomd&M, u,
make
"Pf
^,
trust,
trusty, a thing
and
this
from
upon which one can
7Wm)i,
rely;
full
of noise.
from Tanomot)*,
M, to trust to, to rely upon.
make have disgust, to prejudice Urdmdslki, exciting disgust; from Urdmas)i, u, and this from against oneself,
rom), M,
to be disgusted with.
^
.
^ft-
of rebus y|[| jlj $ jR^), worthy of enyy; UrdyamdOki, (vulgo, and by way from %rdyamds)i, M, to make one evy? excite envy, and this from u, to envy.
1)
,^
^.
dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. Kasira-gaJd kin-moo
CHAPTER
124
Uruvdsiki, uruwdsiki,
from
this
^ o ^F*
^>
(^
from Utagav)i, u
this
5^, charming; from
jH^'^^*
2x
/
16, 17.
Ur&vdy)i
,
w, enliven, and
nrdvi, to be enlivened, or charmed.
ttmivi,
Utdgaodstiri, j^ff
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
doubtful; from utdgavds)i, u
^
o
to doubt.
1^),
o
make doubt, and
Utomdsiki, despicable, from Utomds)i, u to despise, properly to estrange, and this
from
w, to be strange, to be despised.
ut6rn)i,
y^
and
M, to tease,
Ydd&rdsiki,
^,
tiresome, teasing, plaguing, from Wadztiravds)i ,
from WadzUrdv)i^ M, to be plagued.
this
hospitable;
from Yddtirds)i, M, to lodge, take anyone in, and
from Yad6r)i, u (fgf Yawdstki, 3ft\^
ijjjj^.
P~
WadzUravdsiki, ^jPf-^SAaK, / "T
f), to lodge
somewhere.
^*, calming, from Yawds)i,
ness, and this from
this
make
u, to
rest, to reduce to
calm-
Yav)i, u; or Yam)i, w, to come to rest.
Y&rdkobdsiki , joyful, rejoicing, from Yordkobd$)i, w, to please anyone, and this
from Y&rtikdbi), w, to Yukdsiki,
and
^
adjectives
which
terminations,
are
considered
kamasi
make go through
(for
which kavasiki
The sign
Japanese
as
contractions
also occur),
etc.
and which
means to go through
j{j|
for...., in Japanese Kayovi or Kayovasi.
character to be remarked as a rebus here, or the
in ka-siki, ka-siku, ka-si;
derivatives
by Japanese etymologists
are indicated in writing by j|f|* Hfc^T-
of
^1.
in k&-slki.
in siki unite the
of kamasiki, kam&siku,
or to
o
* ^^r, urging on, impatient; from Yttkds)i, u, to make go; to drive;
Derivative adjectives
To the
^
be glad.
from Yuk)i, M, to go.
this
17.
rejoice, to
its
is
Is this
signification allied to that
termination? This question remains unanswered by the Ja-
panese philologers. The writer of the present, leaves the rebus for what
and
sees
in the kasiki in question nothing
more
,
adjectives
Kasi of
met with, and that
is
as
is
kasi"
!
1) I diletante.
in ki (page 109
)>
much
as,"
in
= the word Mister
borrow
this satisfactory
n.
72) with the
is,
than the frequently occuring
abbreviation of sika-siki , of which the radical form stka
the
it
( jffi
^)
meaning of
is
quoted
among
being so, such."
as a substantive predicate verb with the signification
simple is
as
expressions
much
such
as
Mister
tova
kimizo
as kimi; whereas the continuative verbal
example from a metrical
list
of Japanese and
Dutch words, by a Japanese
CHAPTER
form Karu
therefore, on that account],
is
The
exclusion of tiled. ish,
... some;
siki (masi,
to be).
to
.
.
.
To
17, 18.
siMru) in Karuga yfttni [= for reason
(for
so (kdrti), that
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
is
J25
(yitfni) of the (ga)
being
and that to
generally in use,
derivative forms kdtiki, kfalku, kdsixi or kasi thus answer
whereas kamasOd
is
this class of derivative adjectives,
Fadzi- (vulgo Fddzu-)
equivalent to a fusion of ttka-nuul-
among
$$ jg*
ka-siki,
others, belong:
gjr^
Fadti-
also
jfc |jr, timid;
(vulgo Fadsu-) ka-mdslM, or -kavdsild; from Fadzi, blush; Fadzu, Fadzttru, to blush. Fdrtt-kd-siki
0j|
,
,
j|| ^, clear (of the weather)
Kara-kaviga mdsiki,
droll, jocose;
;
also FdrH-kavdtfki', root Fare, clear.
from Kara-gam, to laugh, aud
from Kara
this
kara, = ha! ha!
^^ JJ* Sfci'* sleepy,
Ne-ka-slki,
Ya-kamdsiki,
Ra*^,
noisy; from ya/
Kokode yakamdsikiwo ni
yakamasi nai
site
Yume-ka-siki,
also
^J *M
Ne-kama-
(or fora) sT&t;
an exclamation
like
Heh! holla! ho!
sakeru, here people prevent what
(
*
from A>,
is
sleep. ')
Sidzuta
noisy.
^^
Pg|
^1^'
also Yum4-kama- (or ytaua-) *UT, as in a dream;
)
it
,
is
quiet and without
noise.
from Yume, a dream.
Derivative adjectives
18.
in ra-slki , = having a resemblance to ....
They are generally denominative. Ra
is
instead of ara, which has arisen by
the strengthening the final vowel of ari into a
thus means:
=
such
(slki)
ara-slki , by apheresis ra>slki
so as if there were."
koto, or
Makoto-rd-sta
,
it
were
probnbility.
Ba-siki therefore answers to the derivative termination ..ish, so far as
means
a
bluish
having 2
),
resemblance,
that,
which
is
indicated
it
by the root, as
whereas the Japanese termination gives at the same time, to the ad-
formed with
jective
to
,
Makoto,
truth, true; Makoto-ra-slki, such as if
probable. Makoto-rd-tiki
e.
i.
were there...," or
= being
truth; Makoto-narii ,
truth,
as
;
a diminishing, frequently also a contemptible signification
it,
in addition.
The
old
presence of
1)
way
of writing the predicate form Arari
^
which
,
Ta, yobi-kakunt koyeni
is
iveri,
is
^f
r
J{
9
^^
here ideographically , with the signification of
= Ta
ii
J42. 2) BRitt, Nederl. SpraakUer, 1854,
aid of a calling Toioe. .
1).
r^w /ivori,
The to be
unUr 7.
CHAPTER
126
on hand, = Jap. ari" pleads
THE ADJECTIVE,
III.
18.
for the correctness of the assimilation of ra-si to
and therefore against the supposition, that the ra used here might be
ara-si,
the characteristic of the plural
The
yquni okondi-mdsu dtdko
1
womanish
i.
),
man
a
e.
Warabe, Warambe, boy; Warambe-rdsiki
Ko-domo,
child;
Kodomo-rdsiki
domono yau ndru,
rasiki.
manly woman.
Onndgti-rdsiki ot6ko, a
Onndgd, woman;
page 56).
adjectives in ra-siki:
Otdko-rdslki 6nna, a
man;
1.
Nagasaki has raska for
dialect of
Examples of derivative Otdko,
III.
5.
(
,
childish.
,
man, =
(effeminate)
tinndno
conducting himself like a woman. boyish.
Kodomo-rdsiki handsi, childish- talk. Ko-
childlike.
Kimi, gentleman; Kimi-rdsiki, playing the gentleman. Dai-miyau, =
who Baka
,
madman
;
Baka-rdsiki stupid , foolish ,
Use, gossip, untruth; Uso-rdstki,
The
derivative F'itd-rdsiki
,
by which
Baka-rdsiki koto
to the examples quoted,
merit; Kou-aru waza,
,
meritorious.
Ri-kou
'' ,
7JJ|j
stupidity, folly.
hu-
human
have a signification,
being, that acts
Also words of Chinese origin are compounded with rdsiki,
^^
,
from Ftto, man, answers formally indeed to
only applicable to a not
it is
;
trifling.
man," must however, with a view
Kou,
vassal,
plays the prince.
fool
,
name, imperial prince; Dai-miyau-rdsiki hdtamoto, a
grea,i
= a merit being deed, a
e.
humanly 2 ). g.
deed, that really
is
Kou-rdsiki waza, an apparently meritorious deed.
p| ^
,
whetted mouth or tongue
eloquent, witty (but not blunt) man.
,
eloquence.
Rikou-ndrA fito
Rikou-rdsiki ftt6, a
man, who
,
an
plays
the witty person or the orator.
Ai, $?lf
,
kind; Ai-rdsiki, amiable.
Ka-wai, proper ll]"* ^f:^ Ka-ai, kind, agreeable. Kawai-rdsiki amiable, ,
lovely.
Ka-wai-ra$iku naki koto, ungraciousness.
Bin-bou,
^j^^J^Jjri poverty; Bin-bou-rdsiki
1)
Thus Mr. Oono Yasaburoo, when requested
2)
We know
this
,
poorly.
to describe the
word alone from a Vocabulary,
in
which
it
meaning of Onnagorasiki otoko, defined was translated j.menschlijkerwyze,'"
it.
CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE.
Derivative adjectives
19.
19, 20.
127
in beki.
Placed after the attributive form of a verb beki (~pf ) signifies, that what the verb expresses may, can, must and shall happen. The predicate form is besi, the adverbial bekii. will do this
work
Onna kono Uwazaw6
Korewa onnano
done by women.
stt-Mki tewaza ndri, this
= being allowed or
Su-beki,
women may,
stt-b&t,
able to do,
page 97
VI.
8.
Korewa f%6-Mt6no
highly.
one may, can and
tattomU-beki tama nari, this
want of
is
104.)
(
Derivative adjectives that, which
a jewel, which every
we
in naki,
shall refer
again to Beki.
= without, ...less, indicating the
mentioned in the radical word.
is
Na-ki fi|, in the conversational language Nai, from the
= not, used substantively means for nothing,"
Compare
values this jewel
shall value highly.
In the chapter on the verbs
20.
definition.
tamawo tattomn, every one
Fit6-bit6 kono
a work to be
here conceived in
is
an active sence, whereas the genitive onnano precedes as
is
can or
= nothing,
e.
g.
the good for nothing" or
Fltowo naiga sironi
:
good for nothing (of no value). Naiga
Used attributively
means
it
radical
is
>
word
Ifa,
something good
*M, to consider a person as
genitive.
not existing;" Naki-fitd
a not existing
is
man
,
one deceased; Nai-mono, a good for nothing, a not existing thing, a nothing.
Fitdno naki-kotowo kiku, to hear of a person's not existing
When Naki it
is
answers to the
(his death).
preceded by an attributive definition of what does not exist, suffix
-
...less.
or
Tsikdra-naki
Tsikaratio
nnki yu/ni, a
powerless bow.
The predicative form Nasi,
in the conversational language Nai
not being at hand of anything, be tsikdra nasi, this
bow
is
it
without inhabitants.
means the
Iwqu-ga-sima ftt6 now, the sulpher island rf f ^ J^** ^" Ari nasi wo tovu, _fljj ? ^\T) _flR^ * inquire about
powerless.
ft?
is
,
-- A~>m> yurm'uvi thing or circumstance.
t_
-
J"
J
the existence or non-existence of a thing.
Adverbially Nakii
-f?
J
not to
without
Na
J
*?
exist. .
.
.
,
(
7).
Ndku
j[J),
in the conversational language
Thence the continuative verb Nakari (= NdkA nari,
to
go to nothing,
to
die.
-
Nat*
)i,
+ ari),
u, to be
to want.
and the forms derived from
the chapter
N|u, Noo (1*^.
on the verbs
(
109.).
it
will be found treated
more
diffusely in
CHAPTER
128 21.
THE ADJECTIVE.
21.
Adjectives with the negative prefix Na, power comes before
ETa, with negative
causes
them
guage
has been preserved in for
seat,
or the Chinese 3^
adjectives as well as substantives,
This use of
the contrary.
to express
Na-yi (J"#), = no
= be
III.
expressions as:
earthquake"
Aa T
peculiar to the old lan-
no
Na-yami,
(^tjj
and
rest
(^
5C)'
J|p; Na-ivizo, = not speak,
silent!
The Chinese ~^>^', Fu, = not,
as a pure negative prefix to Japanese
To
expressive of quality has also got into use.
words
the few compounds of that na-
ture belong:
Fu-de-ki,
^
91
mis-chance, bad-growth.
>
De-ki, to proceed, to be
produced.
Fu-nari,
~J*^
f ^
^ a<^ growth.
'
Bu-rtari-naru ,
^^^f^^ti"
Fu-katte-naru
^
,
7
Fu-narino
tosi,
a bad year.
misshapen; Nari, shape. uncomfortable,
)f^* ^*^t
disadvantageous;
uneasy;
Kdtte, the winning hand.
Fu-mi-motsi-naru
^ 7 ^^ ^F^tV'
,
vior, Fr. inconduite;
Fu-ratsino,
7
j^f?/
~%*
Chinese Line
hehaving badly; Fu-mi-motsi, bad beha-
Mi-mot si, behaving extravagant;
>
(j^, vulgo J^),
as it should be.
absurd; improper, irrational; from the
after the
Japanese pronunciation, Ratsi,
Fu-ratsino koto, what goes beyond limits.
mit, fence. zon-zi yori
j^^.^^-^.
^-^*^ 1o|M
>
li-
Ratsi mo naki
an irrational opinion.
%i
Fu-sai-vai-naru sing;
^
,
^fettf*^, uuprosperous
;
Sai-vai, prosperity, luck, bles-
development, and favi, growth.
from
Fu-si-avase-naru
7
^
,
lucky; from Si-avase, chance.
excellent, not being particularly well.
Fu-sugurete imasn,
Fu-tsu-gqu-ndru,
>
the Chinese
>
inconvenient
,
incongruous; from
- altogether, the sum; thence Tokino tsu-gquni yori,
according to the time.
More numerous nese,
are the
7 which compounds with ~^\ adopted from the Chi,
and sanctioned by use as
the language of daily
As suffixes
attributive
e.
have penetrated even to
life.
definitions
no or naru',
classical expressions,
,
g.:
prefixed to Japanese words,
they occur with the
CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE. discordant.
]
^f*
7
^*^^*,, '
/ix,
t-
;n
t
nxj insufficient,
unfashionable.
i
desastrous.
f
129
21, 22.
,
unceasing gossip.
unchildlike.
imperishable
not enough.
friendship.
f|lv, unforeseen indisposed
not
,
^^, unexpectedly, by
well.
chance.
If the pure negative
-
without)
is
still
,
difficulty.
^7
,
of similar expressions
is
superseded by ^fc
7'
(bu^
the meaning of the word undergoes a considerable modification , which
frequently lost
sight
of.
^7
/flL-r
t n/ Fu-rei-naru,
uncourtly, and
is
^
7 equal to coarse, clownish. fiE ;f^gf t
^
j\^,
be rude behavior, which does not wound. ^| to the nature of politeness, thus misbehavior.
not at the time fixed;
^t
7*
^p^,
without ceremony," and u /|fL^,
^
ig
7
a behavior,
^> Fu-si
may
also
antagonist
is
untimely, i. e. u without fixed time, i.e. always; B^^, H^p
^
wrong-time, the improper time, the time at which something may not happen. 8 22.
Adjectives with a previous definition. to
Nouns, prefixed
an adjective
as definitive,
form with
it
a compound word,
the termination provided they are not characterized as an attributive addition by
-- JTuta', mouth; Naga, long; Te-naga zaru, long-armed ape. Omoki, heavy; Kutsino omdki ftt6, a man heavy of mouth or tongue.
no.
Te, hand;
Examples.
InisiM imdno na-takdki ftt6 High named (celebrated) persons of old and new times. ,
= of hand quick, of foot quick; quick-handed, quick-looted. Te-baya, asi-faya, Kotoba-fayasi, he
is
broad-mouthed.
Kotoba-oosi, he
ready of speech. - -
is
woordy.
Kut*i-jir6ki,
Me-akdki, red-eyed.
Mimi-t6ki flt6, a man, sharp of ears, a quick-hearing man.
Fara-bm6, thick of
Fardka uw6
(for
belly, a paunch-belly,
a fara-aka uw6),
fish
name
of a
fish.
red of belly, the red-belly.
Om6-sir6ki, white or clear of countenance, friendly.
Mono-Uyeno
naki yo, a night without sound, a dead night
Kok6ro-neno fir6ki kotoba, a word ample of meaning.
Kokoro-neno
warm
fito, a
man bad
of disposition.
Ke-no ara-mono, ke-no niko-mono, rough haired beings,
soft haired beings. 9
CHAPTER
130
The
23.
measure
23, 24.
any object in full or
definition, that the quality in
met with,
is
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
relatively full
expressed by adverbs or definitions equal to them, which
is
precede the adjective; as such are worthy of notice: 1.
Ma,
Jlfl^o j|
genuine unadulterated,
really;
indicates the full measure of the quality.
Ma-naka, or Man-naka, la.^ Pp#> the
bow
torn, just the middle of the
Man-nakano
iy6,
all
bow
fi^^p^^,
quite level, even.
Mdn-mdruki,
pL v HU '^
quite round.
Md-ydsuki,
M!^ v^^*'
Md-sirdki,
^ tlf
that occurs in Ma-koto
Masa,
Itsi-dan,
utsukiisiki
to seize, to seize the
Yumino ma-nakawo
-
Mdn-firdki,
just in the middle.
-
iff.
( tlf.
^
quite black, jet-black.
variation of jit ^f*
l|j. o
)
,
Mi =
in
a (
|f|
reality
,
truth.
Ma-gok6ro
an up-
,
really.
wholly.
adverbially:
-
-
Itsi-dan
Itsi-dan kek-kau ndrU, in
respects beautiful.
all
the same radical word,
), is
-
a whole piece,
J^>
woman
6nna, a
quite easy.
1^^,
truth; Masa-slki,
'^
>
lirja^' quite white, snow-white.
Ma, = effectively, really,
2.
just middle.
the middle house, standing between two others.
Md-kur6ki,
right heart;
Man, = effectively,
iu conversational language generally
5
respects excellent. 3.
Ikanimo, = however, in Ikanimo taydsuki,
possible. 4.
Zui-bun, ^j$j$
24.
tsiisaki,
as small
as
as easy as possible.
^^' = comparatively, is
faydku, pretty early;
Ikanimo
all respects.
also used
so
much
Zui-bun
as possible.
with the signification of
very early."
Absolute comparative.
Adverbs which, expressing a higher degree of the quality, come before the
words of quality, are: 1)
-
Mo,
real , with
^^
vulgo
which
Mo-gami, Mo-sotto ,
jj|f
^ 4Ji?
Mo-sukosi sakini,
,
more;
yet, yet
from
to be distinguished
Ma,
frequently mutates.
it
^ ST5>v ^ ^ _t a
Mo-ydsuki,
j^
?
,
easier
Mo-fayd,
Ig
-*p-v
still
less.
quicker or
earlier ; already.
higher up. yet
s till
Mo-suk6si, HS/^
rather earlier; just now.
x
^*?>
yet a
Korewa amdri
little.
tsiisai.
Mo-
CHAPTEE sukdsi ookiinowo
^J
Ookini,
2)
mise
*),
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
this (case) is too small.
me
Let
131 see one rather larger.
Ookini furuki, very antique.
greatly, very.
_,
24, 25.
Ooki
ni ardki, very rough.
3) Suk6si,
little, in slight degree.
/J^,
Sskosi takai tokdro, a place
high only in a slight degree.
Nao,
4.
>Jj|j
nao yoku nari, thereby so
it is
much
3fj!|
J,
becomes so much the
it
also
ya
or y6,
once as high.
lyd medzurdsiki
6) lya-iya or iy6-iy6,
versational language
Masii-masu,
1.
.
.
.
,
still
more.
Sortdt
Sore dake nao yorrfmt,
better.
Tydga
Y L
V
SHU
= once
gj;,
more
so.., far-
interesting. {>
more and more;
Jyo-iy6 fiikdki,
more and more.
^^,
o
Jyd taka yama, the mountain
more
&y
3 e
no.
?'ya,
still
,
Y o
still
in the con-
much
deeper.
Riyau-kokuno mdtfoari mdiu-md*u
the intercourse of both the empires extends more and more.
dtsuku ndri, 25.
5HJY
J
J!}
ther, more; to be distinguished from
7)
once more so
the better.
lya or Iy6,
5)
Navo,
f, old-Jap.
The
relative or real comparative.
If a quality be attributed to one object in
the likeness, if
it
is
tive by Yauni. Fodo
quantitative,
(^*)
is
the same measure as
expressed by Fodo,
if it
to another,
is
means quantity, Yauni, or Yooni
qualita-
($?),
in
the manner.
Namiva ydma-fodo yukino yauni
takasi, the
the waves
sirdsi,
Namiva
waves are as high as mountains. white as snow.
are
-
Y
=
siie of
mountains, and Yukino yauni, = in the manner of snow, are here adverbial definitions ,
which
ticle
vulgo wa,
va,
,
as such , precede the is
words of quality
W. The par-
and
takdsi
here necessary to separate the subject nami from the
as subordinate definition, belongs following substantive (yama, or yuki), which, to the predicate vSaw ri
fodo
word of
quality.
todsi, it is so far as three miles.
Ii yguni
kataki,
i.
e.
so hard as stone.
"^t?
W5 ^
versational
monowa
1)
1V
-3*
Zen fodo dai-sfan
n
'
tnere
language: Zen fodo
nai.
Shopping-Dialogue* , p.
^s
tm'rfi
no * n * n 8
tai-setsu
*
monora
-
stony hard,
^ ^^f ^^ ^^n ^t nrt, ^jJH^ 5 1E H
-
W
important as virtue; in the con-
na (or also
tei'-H
ta,
CHAPTER
132 If a quality
2.
is
ascribed to one object in a
with which the comparison
ture in the
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
is
made, the
25.
degree, than to another,
higher
latter is considered as the
ascription and, as such, characterized
point of depar-
by the termination yori (out),
immediately precedes the word of quality, which does not assume a comparative form; thus NamivB, iy<[yori takasi, = the waves are from houses out high.
higher than
the waves are
va or wa
particle
is
1
To
).
indispensible.
in Japanese the expression:
^? ami
ifei
- ^ ne norse
respect of the comparative, follow the
The horse
the expression:
>
e.
houses. In this form of speech also the isolating
The Mongolian and Mandju, in
way
i.
is
higher than the sheep,"
Mum d va fltsuzi yori
- -
ooi rtari
from the sheep out high
(
is
^
equivalent
x
^f
in Mongolian
Morin
Jj^^i
;
is
same
_~fc
chonin etse jeke.
Examples.
Meiva koo-mooyori lighter
karosi
(fjfjY
M
Ookamivd yama-tnuyori
than down.
V^f*
_^)
wolf
takesi, the
is
^ ne
^e
1S
bolder than the
Olanda-fundvd Too-senyori sakini tsiydku-yansu, the Dutch ship
wild dog.
KakYiretdruydri aravaruruva ram', = some-
lands earlier than the Chinese.
thing more manifest than the hidden, fest,
^f
^jlcc?
Riwo
than the hidden.
is
there not, there
kivamete,
is
nothing more mani-
Ten-kaw6 dsdmtiru-kotova
slyuyori
ooi-ndruva ram, what concerns the forming of the understanding, and the go-
vernment of the .
.
.
state
there
,
is
nothing greater than the doctrine of CONFUCIUS.
yori sukdsiku naru, less becoming than
Remark. ./tX&t,
rr
No
the land
comparison (tsutsi)
is
is
.
.
.
contained in the sentence:
Kono
steepness off (kono saka yori)" are an attributive definition of
and not of the word of quality
The (
24),
relative comparative
may
also
land (tsutsi)"
be defined by means of one of the adverbs e.
g.
:
Wasiva kuma-takayori
ooi nari, the eagle is twice as big as the bear-falcon (the
horned falcon).
Kuma-takava me-ono dai-siyau mina takani onaziku, takayori ooi-naru bai seri, with the bear-falcon (Spizaidos orientalis) the size of the female
1)
Compare
I.
J.
SCHMIDT,
CANON DE LA GABELENTZ
,
Grammatik der Mongolischen Sprache
lem.
de
la
of this
low (fiki)"
which indicate a higher degree of the quality;
mata-mata
sdkayoritsutsi
of this steepness off low; as the words
Grammaire Mandchoue ,
hauptsachlichsten Typen des Sprachbaues , von Dr. H. STEINTHAL
1832.
Berlin.
St
1831.
Petersburg,
page
86.
koto san
and the
S.
39.
Characteristic
Ifc60. page. 200.
der
CHAPTER
male generally
as with the
is
hawk amounts
the
The
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
hawk;
his size (ooinaru koto) with relation to (yori)
to threefold (san bai);
object, with
133
25.
which the comparison
it
e.
i.
is
made,
is
is
is
it
by
Kono
this house.
high again as
as
Kono
a subordinate adverbial definition; e.g.: 1y6 yoriv&
by va, when
also isolated
the word expressive of quality does not immediately follow
from
hawk.
thrice as big as the
nao
it,
but
is
separated
1y4 yoriv* mats
faX-ori,
takasi, is yet higher
than
this house.
If the object, with
remained
has
by the
without
m6
suffix
more than even called
which the comparison
--
this.
/ fifyj /">-f
-
reri
=
( ^ij rfl*
then
flier
(it
is
yorimd
the noble falcon)
are yori mo gakuriya de ari
#
^$S
J=
J&\
/>
(
more
which express a
* H&
/
0|
/
jfb
^ J^
rano dru kum
)
,
=
to be
is
'),
this also, or
faydti^ the bird, fleeter
is
J^
(
tJC
r
)
'
^
wno
man
this
_@
'
=
-
When
Remark.
e. g.
is
Pttdni ot6ru, to be
in the saying:
^T t*
'
H
It
is
(
%
;,,),
Idzurtga nandnni '
* am w '
ma ^rW*
^
fa
country better than
),
Wareni masdreri, he has
monova ndsi, there Siro-mayu-kavikoni masdreru silkworms of white cocoons.
more
no, among
to excel (praettare)', Otoreri
^ ^Sf
ffil
9
is
none bigger than the piony.
more tnan you? "" Kon
is
than eren
or a less, such as Masl, Maaari.Masa-
more,
country and rich in treasures.
this
characterized
is
$t* ftt 3
to be less, are used in the forming of comparisons;
masdru
it
Sau-m6kuno kwa-kiyauva Botan yori ooi-ndru monovd
also,
f,
something which either
is
expected,
ivu toriva taka
to
the flowers of the vegetable kingdom there
Verbs
made
Kore yorim6 oo, more than
Faydbusd
Kono ftt6wa
learned than even he.
not
is
(= also, even).
Faydbmd, or the quick
the hawk.
or
notice,
is
excelled me.
the nothing, that surpass* less
than others.
better not to go, than to go,"
would be usual order of words, according to which one deviating from the m* Yukdniiva (the not going) ynk-uyori (than the going) obliged to say (is
is
better},"
sion takes praestat)"
place, to is
subordinate racterized
I)
Yuknyorlv* yuk
expressed by
of the
make
it
appear, that the predicate
most importance.
definition
rhetorical inrer-
it is
better (=
Ut
Therefore the subject yufcfwi, as a
but precedes the predicate,
is
emphatically cha-
the yuku yori, contributed to the comparison, by ga, whereas
Compare KODBIOUEZ Element,
p.
80.
CHAPTER
134 isolated
by va,
is
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
25, 26.
Compare what
placed in front.
said
is
on
this subject,
e.
g.
on
page 64.
The poet supersedes yoriva by kara koso
Fanano sodatanu satovd
Udte miyo!
Kok6ro gara k6s6 miva Plant and look! There
outside
My
Koso, an emphatic
The absolute
*).
heart.
suffix.
superlative
The adverbs
expressed by one of the abverbs, which imply
is
quality and precede the
highest degree of the
word expressive of
quality.
are:
Fana-fada, or hana-hada,
1)
ndsi.
where flowers do not come up.
village
my
iyasikere
:
The absolute superlative.
26.
the
no
is
worse than
is
or gara koso;
Fana-fada
yet again.
is
t
,
old- Japanese Fata-fata, from, fata,
very;
Tsubame tobi-kakeru F.
very quick.
F. tdku-
F. sebdki, very narrow.
takaki, very high.
san ndru, very plentiful. of the swallow
^
koto
fana-fada fayd-si, the
flight
dmovu, to consider of the most
tai-se'tsuni
importance.
Mottomo, jjx?
2)
^Hf
^[J
kaneno nari mott6mo yorosiku,
"f o
mare nari,
however extremely
coin) is quite good, it is
3) Ito, ito-ito, j]|
itatte
^
5JJ
o
ig:
o
Aka-
Motomo, utmost, quite.
originally
,
as to the standard of copper (the
rare.
Jjj|
-
Ito ydsuki, very easy.
very.
,
Ito 6siki feme", a very lovely girl.
4) Itatte,
#7,
the gerund of Vtdri,
-
arrive at the place to
come; as adverb complete, entire, utmost, highest.
will it
551
is
quite good.
sit6 hoye" ooi
Itatte
nari, the
is
it
mean
,
if
ainari kino-dokuno itarini soro,
delay
is
the
summit
The Chinese .H?
the logical accent
$, v
*f
A
leaf in
^%
|
Itatte yor6si, itatte
is
is
^
^ ^ /
.
.
.
to
indeed utterly stupid.
to be placed
jjJ(i
tsiisdku
=
on 7
^
is
indeed the
itari.
^Z
En-in
7a
,
of vexation. 2x si,
=1tdtte,
also
that in composition with Chinese words
1)
that...,
place the inversion: makotoni or6kan6 Itari nari,
highest point of stupidity
which one
in form very small, yet in voice strong.
kokoro-yuruvd makotoni itatte oroka nari, Instead of
Sasaki va katatsi
faydku, very early.
wren
- -
used to express the superlative, and
is
;
e.
an album, written by FUKU-SATA, 1862.
g.
:
CHAPTER *"
3*
%
ffifr
,
JS^Wv? ^ 3p
^5
^
3j?
5)
T
^
^|j^
,
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
si-g6ku
top-point
,
si-zen, highest
si-beo
,
utmost.
,
good, perfectly good.
excellent.
,
si-you
135
26, 27.
,
Meppod (t ^ ^i^), which
needful in the highest degree.
said
is
to be in use with the signification of
most," but only at Y4do, was known to us only under the form of Meppou-ndrv, as
synonym
-
of Mono-os6re sfau,
nedanva meppoo takai might thus signify:
now
boldly high. But
this price is
annihilation-law"
Meppoo
takai
,
i.
e.
unavoidable dead,
by mortaly high. Some write $&$. ~tTf, and pronounce
6) Itsino,
'^ y,
Dai-itsino,
first;
kuni itsino yoki mindto nari, Tsuruga
northern provinces.
Nippon
the other hand
itsi
ijfc
%
the
is
itsino takeki
7) Itsi-ban,
$
--f
first
= the
,
first.
--
it
Jjr ,
translate
Mct-boo.
Tsuruga
Irita-
good (the best) harbour in the
mono, the bravest
man
in Japan. -
stands for utsi, = blow, in Itsi faydku, = quick as the
Ten-ka dai-itsino gdku-slya, the
lightning.
we most
we
as
recognize this word to be the Japanese pronunciation of the Chinese 9j
Mie-f&, signifying
On
Kono
caring for no danger, fearless, bold.
=
<5,
first
rank
first
scholar in the empire.
81.
(see
1)
).
Itsi-ban yoritiki, the
very best. 8)
Siigurete,
^F
-, excelling, surpassing.
SugHrttc mcdztrdslki , meet in-
teresting.
9) Kitsuku, kitsuu
Very common
also,
= very, utmost, which
,
PJ3
^
"fk"**,
,
Kitsuu sui mono, something very sour.
the following Chinese compounds with
are
5f
best.
iH?'
S r M*'
middlemost.
8ai
the highest fiwtJ
^to
rel ation *<>*"
= just now, presently, a few mo-
lowest, least.
ments ago.
first
KY 27.
o
express a superlative:
T _t.X> uppermost,
%
heavy, very.
8ftt
moet diligent
The relative superlative.
The relative
superlative
is
characterized iu that, that the objects snrpawed
in the genitive, or in the local, are expressly named, and this naming, whether thus word expressive of quality, by way of a definition, and is placed before the the stars is, after the Japanese subordinate to it. The bright of (or among)
CHAPTER
THE ADJECTIVE.
III.
manner of speaking, the brightest
of (or
27, 28. the stars, Fosino (or Fosi
among)
no nakani) akiraka ndru va.
Examples. Karasi fazikamiva, nano principal
of vegetables;
or:
Arano
tattokiva, karosi
among
the vegetables are mustard and ginger.
[^jj*^]
^ ^ ^tt" /
among
the medecines.
wr
28.
excess
AJz^'
too long.
"
*^>y
quality
Amari
J
),
is
least]
the Buddha-doctrine
among
is
all
expressed by:
Korewa amari dtsui
3
5 )
excessive
gin,
ti*^
)
is
^
Korewd amari
money.
Korewd amari
small.
iroga koi*), this
3
nagai
),
tsiisai,
this is
Korewa
too dark of color.
is
^E*) = excess, excessive, too
becomes too high (too
Tsikarano amari,
...
this is too thick of stuff.
,
yo-fodo takdku nari-masu,
^t^^
dear).
3
*
?fe
Yo-fodo
.
^1
.
.
,
it
= Amari. 7
9
"*"
^^
Soredewa 6
)'
os6i 7 ), it is too late.
19, page 25 verso.
2) Shopping-Dialogues, page 2.
5)
imdsu
= excess, adv. excessively, too
2
^"if /hl"f
1) Nippon-ki, Vol.
*
..
~Y
To-fodo, ?f$
Jl^
doctrines the most excellent.
^^ ^,
amari dziyaiga
'
sugurete
of strength. *?
#
^"^
The excess in a
Amari,
^
||| |5
Buppoova moro-morono norino nakani motomo sarani
,
...
^ ^ ^
- -
1/P ?
^ Ijfa^ lgd?*
fazikami nari, the principal
Kusurino nakano masdreru [pt6reru\ mono, the best [the
TO ?
JRcg
i/
mustard and ginger are the
tattoki nari,
page 24.
3) page 8.
4) page 23.
6) page 37.
7) page 41.
tnen
^
IV.
NUMERALS. The Japanese language has
its
the Chinese system of measures,
numerals and
the
own numerals; but with
the introduction of
weights and reckoning of time, the
Chinese marks of number came
Chinese
and generally
early
Therefore one has to do with two sorts of numerals, with the Japanese
into use.
and with the Chinese.
The Japanese
are connected with Japanese words, and
the Chinese with Chinese.
The ancient Japanese cardinal numbers
29.
^.
^
,
,
> ,
Fiitfc (P'ta)
two.
y*
^
Mi
three.
>/
four.
^
Yo
y
-)-
>
,
3, ,4
I?
Pltd (P't6, H'to)
,
f
one.
,
,
.
.
.
.
.
Xtsu
five.
Mu, Muyu
six.
Nana
seven.
*]~
eight.
3
Y&
The vulgar man
and says for Hito (1)
communication by OONO YASABUHOO BSQ.
J ,
>
,
Too = once ,
,
nine. ten.
ten , termination of teat*
Momo .
.
']";
K6k6n6
,
So
,
are:
.
fo,
hundred. .
.
vo, as termination of
hundreds. thousand.
Tsi
,
tt
y*, Y6rodu
Kokono (9), by way of abbreviation,
ffi
.
.
,
ten thousand.
and Koto
alto.
Or*l
CHAPTER
138
IV.
NUMERALS.
29.
These radical forms are used in the forming of compound words in which, according to the principle fixed in to be already
combined with the object,
Fit6-vino /ana, = one day's i.
sake
e.
that
,
e.
is
supposed
g.: ,
old.
- -
number
the idea of
A.,
Fltd-fdna
,
,
one-flowered.
Futd-gok6ro, a double heart.
Futd-oyd, the parents.
named
I.
Fttd-yono sake = one night's rice-beer
flower.
only one night
is
Pitta-go, a twin. dite.
9.
Fntd-nari, an hermaphro-
Futd-tdbi, twice.
Futd-nan6 sima, a two-
island.
Mi-ka, the day (a), which has the number three as characteristic, the third - the - of three also the
day;
moon
the
moon,
of the third day.
,
Mu-t6se
the square.
Mu-t6seno, six yeared.
third-day-
Mi-tose, the year three, also the period of
Mi-kusdno kayu, = three-herbed pap.
three years (triennium).
Yo-mo
Mi-ka-tsuki,
days (triduum).
period
,
the year six
,
also the period of six years.
Nand-ydma, the Seven mountains.
Used as substantive numerals, the cardinal numbers from
^
suffix
which
tsu, which just as the Chinese numeral-substantive the most ancient writings
in
piece of
bamboo
taken for
piece,
nouns
1
)
it
is
1 to 9 take the j|j|
number"
means, originally, a
assimilated,
2
we have
Consequently
).
the following
is
compound
:
Futd-tsu (Ftdts)
Mi-tsu Yo-tsu
.
one.
Mu-tsii
six.
.....
two.
Nand-tsu
seven.
three.
Yd-tsu
eight.
four.
Kdkono-tsu
........... ...........
Itsu-tsu (lists')
......
.
.
....
Flto-tsu-fa, a single leaf
number of
six,
noun used
attributively.
nine.
five.
These numerals answer to the question: Iku-tsu (a|?), how 3 ).
Mii-tsii-hdna
,
or
Mu-tsuno
many
pieces?
/tana, flowers to the
being Mutsu characterized by the genitive termination no as a
Nippon-ki.
2) "When, in 1857, I published
the
Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst van DONKER CURTIUS, I con
sidered this tsu as the old genitive termination.
3)
with
and, in a general sense, in the counting of articles,
Fit6~tsu (F'tdts, H't6ts)
1)
(ko),
The name
of Acrostichum Lingua.
CHAPTER
By combination with
individual, alone;
139
29.
Mi
ari or ori (= to be), Ftt6, Ftitd,
words Pitdri ($Jb), Fiitari
=
NUMERALS.
IV.
(zl
7
(H a
A?)> mtiai
and To form the
triad, three together;
pair, both;
and Yottari,
A?)'
noons,
four;
which are only applicable to persons, and thus are used as substantives, as well Kun-siva sono flt6riw6
as attributively.
own
his
person, himself alone.
The tens: 10, 20 which means ten
^
to
Mi-so, three ten, =
(just as ..ty in twenty). ;
they take as suffix
f
Let this
The tens
be distinguished from y
+
(H*
of 30 years
>
also
To6,
y, Yo-so,
To,
= once
contracted from
To6-tsi,
,
F&td-tsi,
,
F&td-tsi,
,
Mi-so-dzi,
number of
thirty.
,
Yo-so-dzii
number of
forty.
two
Lyf
forty.
3yf
,
y f*.
Ay ~f~
seventy.
*
3
ninety.
Fa-vo, 800; others
f Tsi, thousand; f 7 ^f ^, FWa-tsi-tsi, ,
B
(tt-(W*t), number of
^
,
*,
number of sixty.
A'in-wrf^oc/cj,
>
seventy.
number of eighty, rW(W', y y f A'otonrf-Wzt', > ninety.
^
,
- t10
'
" ho;
we have not met
thence r<>" r0f 400
"
with,
Tsi-tri, thousands.
two thousand.
rtfrd-rf, ten thousand. 7*,
Ma-sd-dzi,
y ^Tt
ifomo, a hundred; in combinations &, -/
5?
te-*6-dzi,
-Vyf,
eighty.
I-vo, 500,
^
-f
sixty.
,
*
commonly:
f
tens.
fifty.
y ^^TzJ-so,
B r,
ten.
,
use.)
thirty.
y ,Nand-so, Fa-so
57
one
tti,
fifty.
Ma-s6,
> ,
,
ten.
Itsu-so (W*-
7, /-so,
^t
tei
,
means the age
Compounds with
f
7, Mi-so,
^
^
OC^)-
y, twenty, not in
,
tsu)
are:
F'tdso,
y
7,
for Misozi
zi,
Radical forms.
?y,
ao,
thirty. If they are
(instead of
,
,
- thir-ty-number. Mi-so-dzino hdna, flowers to the number
dzi. Mi-so-dzi,
of thirty.
,
persons?
numbers followed by }/
only a modification of tsu, and for the sake of euphony also changes
is
,
how many
Iku-tari,
to 90, consist of the cardinal
used as substantive numerals
which
tsUtsusimii , the philosopher attends to
*
t * f Nand-tri, nine thousand. f Momo-tti, a hundred thousand. .
*
,
times ten thousand, or a Momo-ydrtdzu, a hundred
million.
hundred times ten thousand, or eight millions. raw-ydrd(fet, eight
CHAPTER
140
The Japanese numbers Momo,
Yorddzuno mono,
Tsi and
things; Momo-tsi-dori
all
If a numeral precedes another
Two and
e.
i.
its radical
is
.
.
.
Twelve
.....
.
.
.
.
One and twenty, Mu-s6-tsi mdri mutsuno Tcuni
Tsi-tose,
many
years;
l
).
form
then
,
the attri-
it is
expressed by Misodzi amdri (or simply
number of two. One counts
a number of thirty plus a
Eleven
plants;
all birds
thrice four; Miso-yotsu, thirty times four.
on the other hand,
thirty,
mdri) futdtsu,
is
all
,
numeral in
butive definition of such: Mi-yotsu
29.
Y&r6dzu are generally used in a ge-
and all; Momo-ktisd,
many
neral sense for
NUMERALS.
IV.
To6-tsi
mdri
thus:
ftt6tsu.
futdtsu
etc.
Fatdtsi mdri fitdtsu etc.
(^ A
~\^
4
^
'/^y
*fe~*l
'
@=)
the
^
Ya-fo yorddzuno kami, eight hundred times ten thou-
and sixty countries. sand gods.
The saying:
It is
more than 1792470 years, since the heavenly parents
we
descended from heaven,"
find in the ancient chronicle
Nippon-ki
III. 2 verso,
expressed by:
-K* ^5
-fc*
^^ T ^> f-
j|
I
O
H? II -L
iff
A matsu
^fr
mi-oyd no ama-kUddri-mdsite y6n ko-
tea ^
^
}
H
5 71
W^ \-
-
z^
3
|
-j
I
"*
_
'
3
7-
5
h
t
')
Ut
^3
1
7
7^
K&^?
-^
3
a *
*?
PA*
^
i^h
Momo yorddzn tose nandso yorodzii kon6 yorddzU
tose
(
X 10000 years) amdri
70 XI 0000 years) amdri ko-
tose
^
nandso
2
)
iose
years) amdri futdtsi
(9X10000
(2000 years) amdri yo-vo
If
^
tose
(100
tose (400 years)
(70 years) aman'
-
i
The numerals in tsu and
tsi serve
as
nouns substantive and are
with or without the genitive termination no, as attributives. ari,
-
stte,
kdktt) is
of body a unit, and has of faces four in number.
2)
The
yotsti,
is also
the
name
original, printed with
also used,
Kono simavami
this island (the island of the four countries, St-
fltdtsuni
1) Momo-tsi-dori
dn.
|
',.-?
6m6
aman
of the thrush, that imitates the voice of all birds,
some worn out forms, has nana instead of nanato.
CHAPTER
The Chinese cardinal numbers,
30.
The
NUMERALS.
IV.
column contains the number
first
4
*
o
=
30.
141
after the Japanese pronunciation.
in full.
?' Itsi
one.
..............
two.
San
three. fo ur .
Go
five.
.................. sitsi (*'*' at ra o A'fct) .......... /, Fatsi (/*&) .................. .......... ft Jl$S> Kiu Ku ....... at Ye do * ^M <^f. Eng. ;t), Ziy t& +S ? Piyak' (tyaV) ................ "Q"|, Sen ...................... -^vj 7f v >' Man (^) .................. Bikii
,
|
six.
seven. eight.
o
'
'
nine.
o
'
2
^
11
)
o
definitely
is
more
,
Go-ftyak\
Ni-ziyu, twenty.
,
Rop-piyik\
San-ziyu
,
Sitsi-f1yak\ seven hundred.
i
Fap-plyalc\ eight hundred.
,
Ku-flyak\ nine hundred.
ASftte/-
thirty.
,
fifty.
(7tVi)
,
,
,
,
five
six
hundred.
/*-#n , one thousand. Ni-sen
seventy.
z?'y?t,
etc.,
two thousand.
Itsi-man once ten thousand. ,
Fatsi-ziyu, eighty. i?3-,
hundred.
Is-ziyu, ten.
Rok'-ziyu, sixty.
Ku-ziyu, ninety.
Ni-man, twice ten thousand.
Ip-p1yak\ one hundred.
Ziyu-man, 10X10000.
N-flydk\ two hundred. Sam-llyak',
,
three hundred.
Ni-:iyu-man, 20X10000. Ftyttlc-nMii,
numeral Yo because Si written form
(4)
is
mostly avoided
also
means
?*r
would,
,,to
in
a million.
Ni-f1y
hundred. Si-flyak', four
The numeral Si
2) The
ten thousand.
determined by the units preceding them, thus:
Go-ziyu,
1)
a thousand.
tens, hundreds, thousands and tens of thousands
Si-ziyu, forty.
-f
a hundred.
o
The number of the
>?
ten.
rf
(
composition with nnuni,
and inpfneded by the
mill.
JapWMM
die."
in all respects,
answer rather to the Ytto pronuncution
,
it
howerer,
io
142
CHAPTEE
UTJMEUALS.
IV.
30, 31.
By the suffixing additional numbers all possible numbers Is-sen fap-plyak' roku ziyu roku Ziyu man itsi, 100001. The number If
are expressed; thus:
wen, the year 1866.
intended here as attributive definition belonging to this year.
is
however the meaning
is
1866 years, then the number
preceded by the ad-
is
Oy6so, J\^3 (pron. 6y6sso), = in sum, together, and the " followed by a numeral substantive (see 37). J\^ 3 -^ ^r [or -^
verbial definition
number itself
A&% ^f^*] fc^^ 59^
The
six (or six to seven) years.
nenno aida, = within
rok&'ka, [or roku sitsilsa]
Oy^so
necessity of taking
oydso in the translation,
up
naturally disappears in every language, that has a plural.
To
a
termination no.
Ziyu ra'no
twelve sorts.
iro,
Ordinal numerals,
31. 1)
the Chinese numerals are connected by the genitive
Japanese word,
The Chinese numbers
As
the first, the second.
A z, T
Itsi,
San
followed by ^jjf'
etc.,
To the question
means watch, and number.
the most in use are:
ban, that
^H'vi Iku-ban, = what
^g^
number?, answer '$
^'V'
Itsi-ban,
number one,
i.
^ v'
Ni-ban, number two,
i.
= :
*.
Ell
v 3
|7tJ
2)
"flf*
v Sam-ban number
^^^5, Yo-ban, number ,
preceded by
one according to order,
= Japanese chronicle, volume
volumes, 3)
r"y
"j^ ^*
~^^i
The compounds
thus Dai-itsi-ban
,
|jj|
e.
sz,
Ni-ban
the
the second.
^ Dai, = series; --
first.
thus:
With
^
-^,
Nippon-Id ken daini ziyu
27 according to the order of the
,
Sam-ban ,
first ,
,
etc.
,
second
preceded by ,
third.
fourth, exceptionally for Dai-si-ban; so also Dai-zlyu-yo-ban (14
yo-ban (24
j|=j
the third son.
Dai-ni-ban , Dai-sam-ban
,
e.
first.
four, exceptionally for Si-ban.
27, literally:
Dai-san
Itsi-ban
i.
the
three.
,
The Chinese numbers
Dai-itsi, sitsi,
:
e.
^ ^ Dai
Dai-yo-ban
th ),
;
,
Dai-ni-ziyu-
th ).
the genitive termination wo, these three sorts of compounds become
attributive.
If only
and
*g
Japan
^
itself,
two
objects are to be counted, the difference
Go, before and after.
not yet adopted.
from page 15 you
is
By
If the arrangement
is
is
made by
lam
,
Sen
limited to three classes,
a mutation of the French letters j and y, in the Supplement to RODR.
generally found improperly for
jott
(ten),
CHAPTER are
they ffj
distinguished as the topmost,
Tsiu and
i
Ato or
NUMERALS.
TV.
_t J
,
middle and lowest, by
f* fr
Ziyoo,
or as foremost, next and last, by
}
~^\^"Ge
ftsiro.
143
31, 32.
),
ft|
? y
*t*
S?
SI ?<> ~F ^
*^ e 8ee^
**
*
second, third quality.
The
first, with reference to the time,
Fazime, no ,first
first
:
Fatsu-mono, the
expressed by '*? /o/*fi, or
is
the
firstlings,
first
Famine no to, the
fruits;
year (of a period). 32.
The
iterative numerals, once, twice
Chinese, to the question:
Japanese, to the question: Iku-tabi, ^dl yjXrf x
$* /-'W
how
t-
etc., are:
often?
ft
Nan-do, -1 r
Ftt6-tabi, once.
~
Futd-tabi, twice.
*.
Itri-do, once.
|&
**,
Ni-do, twice.
Yo-tabi, four times.
P9
H ,
1
fi
**'
^L
Mu-tabi, six times.
3*
j^
-/c2 ^^ * -^
N&nd-tabi, seven times.
^
Kdk6no-tabi, nine times.
y\^ j^
To-tabi, ten times.
^L
also are
Chinese numbers
compounded with
Ziyu-itsi-tabi,
Yo-do, four times.
,
Rok'Jo, six times.
~
a thousand times;
*
**,
H '
-|-^ H
,
Fat*i-
^u-^'
n* ne t"068-
Ziyu-
eleven times, le,
g
many
,
a hundred times;
many
times. -
J
times.
TW-faW momo-fW,
-
-
-
^f TnlMi,
7W-teM,
^f
1
R5 S' $
V
{
Tabi-ttto, a traveller.
The yomi: Kami, Naka, Sio,
is
in
the
c-a
I.
,ation, -conliBg
to Ik.
oI
,
not in n*. a native of YeMo, there at least, 2) Also
tbffsji
.
*
often.
numbers form a compound word, with which the Japanese cardinal
means journey;
,)
times.
11
teii; thus
often. a thousand times, a hundred times');
TaJi,
s^
Sitn-doi
ffi
>K
five times.
Go-do,
etc.
Momo-tabi,
>)
San-do, thrice.
,
H
F
^fc
7
H
f6f AX^
Ya-tabi, eight times.
the
often?
Itsu-tabi, five times.
l'
how
,
**,
=r t*^ IS /^W
In numbers higher than
H
jg
16? >t
Mi-tabi, thrice.
3
,
how many
degrees;
11 J llti-do
,
l 1
,
m~Jo
ffi
'2
ete.
8)
Abo
hundred time of
CHAPTER
144
By
|3J
h
Me
suffixing
Sanyo (
*),
}E|
NUMERALS.
32, 33: 34.
do, three to four times;
which means eye and,
San
si
do, 3
4.
to
mark,
figuratively,
these
numerals become ordinal numbers, which with the genitive inflection
iterative T?O
^
3
in*
IV.
Iku-tabi-me
are also attributive.
Flt6-tabi-me
or Chinese
,
^
^
,
H
$% sy^ ^
H *.
J& %
^
>>*^*
^ ,
v
*-
*
what number of times? To-
Itsi-do-nie , the first time.
tabi-meno hanasi, a story for the tenth time. 33.
The doubling
or
multiplying numerals, single, twofold
noun "X, veorhe, vulgo JC
consist of the Jap.
preceded by the Japanese cardinals.
To
etc.,
ye ore, -fold (German fach),
,
the* question Iku-ye (=j^|? IfC^),
= how
manifold? answer: Itsu-ye, five-fold.
-yd, single.
Yd-yd, eight-fold.
Ftd-ye, two-fold.
Kbkono-ye
nine-fold.
,
six-fold.
Mi-ye, three- fold.
Mu-vd
Yo-yd, four-fold.
Ndnd-ye, seven-fold.
To-ye, ten-fold.
(obsol.),
Fatd-ye, (obsol.), twenty-f.
Ya-yeno fdna, an eight-
Fitd-yeno fdna, a single flower (flos simplex). fold,
i.
a
e.
full flower (flos plenus).
The counting by pairs = double, pair,
= 1
^*
t
7
'^
<
'fg
i
Ttsi bai,
,
Ni
bai,
one (or
two
pair.
-j-*
,
pair
-,
,
,
Ni-su
after the
......
San-su
Y6- (not Go-su
Ren-ziyak' va,
t)ai
PR)'
Si-) su
.
bai, ten pair.
Ziyu
is
also used.
~*^
^i ^
For sort numbers, as one sort, two sorts
2/3., Is-su
,
7
a hundred pair.
7, Fiyaku-bai,
numbers compounded with the Chinese
2/2.,
( a ^ so
a) pair.
pair.
kind. They are,
^^
expressed by the Chinese
in connection with Chinese numerals, thus:
Instead of bai,
34.
is
^Ifsiyu
Js-soo, one pair.
serve the Chinese
etc.,
(pron. su), which
means sort,
Yedo pronunciation: one
sort.
two
sorts.
tr >? i/ 2.
,
H'tsi-su
.... .... .
Rok'-su
three sorts.
,
Hdtsi-su
four sorts.
,
Ku-su
five sorts.
wo no nagaki
to
mizikaki
.,
T6-su,
to no ni-siyu art,
.
.
.
six sorts.
seven
eight sorts.
nine etc.
.
.
sorts.
ten
sorts. sorts.
of the bird Ren-ziyak
(Bombyciphora) there are two sorts: as well a long- as a short-tailed.
CHAPTER
With sin-too
sort, kind,
^ (
-J-
&o; sa,
etc.
si,
To
35.
time,
3L ^ )M 3 ^3
f.
Fvta-Kusdno
inst.
combined with the
different traditions, or
koye
The Japanese numerals are
the spirit-service of three kinds.
,
145
34, 35.
the termination no these substantives are used attributively: San-riyuno
compounded with Kusa, two
NUMERALS.
IV.
x) the
HL %%%. ./
ttutdye,
rano,
pluralsuffix
also used either
*
.
7t*urano
inst.
f.
'ftf
ye kinds of vowels occuring in fa, fa, fa, XY,
fi
etc.
express the distributive
numbers, one
two
at a time,
at a
are used:
etc.
1) the Jap. adverb
^*
^
dzts,= at a time, preceded by
dzu-tett, pron.
,
the Jap. numerals FM6-tsu, Futd-tsu (= one piece, two pieces), or also by the
Chinese numerals in connection with the object counted. Dz*t*&
To
by ^gl".
J
)
is
how many
the question iku-tsu dztdsu, jjfel 5flj,
expressed
pieces at
ft
time? answer:
Navawb As
it
^1
Fttd-tsu dzutsu,
h5
Futd-tsu dzutsu,
H?
one piece at a time.
jj, two
pieces at a time.
one spins ropes (fdru), two pieces at a time. futd-sudzi dzutsu fdru,
navawo (rope) appears, here the accusative
is
the objective direct to
whereas futd-sudzi dzutsu, by way of adverbial definition, object
and verb. -
$
?= Zl
kodomoni Too Mydku
to these boys a }
%oo
@
"g"
^
a
at
^toi-mVwm *m
ieri-fiuri
Too hfydku, one piece at a time.
time are at hand. --
H
placed between the
is
accordance with this
wo
)
H
=
^t|
is
-
!;t?la't
the saying: a*rfr
yari
>
xIl a
),
= gire
ST%^
and the same color, twehe
Ptt6-lro ziyu-ni dan dzutxt arl-mdffi, of one
^T ^^, pieces
(
Ht JS
--In
twice or thrice a day each time. ofcftfeowo
=
/am,
A 9 Rj %?/ ^
sfl^
^*
yoo 8 JnA at a time (=
two pieces of 2 fassak dzutsuno futd-kire*),
Jap. feet).
when persons are spoken One, two, three or four at a time, by F*t6ri dzutsu, Ftodri
1) to
The common
^^.
1857
,
written form
dziitsu,
$g ?
U
Misled by indistinct eiamples
Mitdri dz*t**, Yotldri d:*t*.
ineswt ' in
!t
'
^o^ ^
badly printed
1
J.p.ne
FUo-ds*ds* intel of FUo* page 64 improperly adopled Too kigtk N 171
tion OB the
new
of, i> expressed
to
*
h
book. w.
^
bt.
ta
*&* i.
f.
..a
handrtd (cwh) wortk," iMOrip-
of the period Ttm-too (tolgo Ttmfo). Jap. bronze coin
3) Shopping-Dialogues,
p. 88.
10
CHAPTER
146
= how many persons
NUMERALS.
IV.
at a time? (see
35, '36.
Ko
29.)
number of
kogi-kitdri, sailor to the
fnndkatd roku-ziyu fodo
fnndni fttdri dzwtsn noritaru sixty, seated one at a
time in a small boat, came rowing. 2) In the is
same manner
,
which means an object, that
used,
answers to
it
Ate ni
instead of dzutsu
(
^
T)
the modal of Ate
,
proportioned to another,
is
We
in respect of value or quality.
consider
it
and
fully
equivalent to
per
ration, in proportion."
Iku-tsu ateni,
$$%%
F$t6-tsu ateni,
]/LT =
uij
-^ Hf}
^
how many
'
^T=>
pieces per ration?
one pi ece P er ration.
Futa-tsu ateni, two pieces at a time.
Doru
mai ateni yarn,
itsi
Fractional numbers or broken numbers
36.
of Chinese ciphers and numerals. or
to give one dollar to each person.
The denominator
without no, precedes the numerator, thus
Kin-riyoono si-bu
= a fourth
or si-buno
itsi,
R/lyoo or
*^
^f*"
^^
^*
5f
7
l=f
7
^
fy
a third (part).
7
'^i
'^
SUsi-bu
'^
Fdtsi-bu
'^
Ku-bu
-^
'^?
'
^^^ 7
r
^
7 ~J^ ^. ^>-
^
,
Jfe^ '
In broken numbers
^- is
a sixth. a seventh.
itsi,
an eighth.
itsi,
a ninth.
itsi,
a tenth.
itsi,
Ziyu-itsi-bu
Sen-bu
^,
fifth.
itsi,
Fiydku-bu
'
a
itsi,
Ziyu-bu
,
a fourth.
itsi,
Roku-bu
-^ ^j^
^ ^*" ^
^
P^I
one of the four parts of a Riyoo gold,
itsi,
'^,
7 -j-*^
^
Y ^
Sam-bu
Go-bu
>;7
-^
PPH
the half part, the half.
'f'
7
/V?
-J-"
7 7>
-\^ fy
^-*
Ham-bun, =
Si-bu
^,
PJ^^f*-^
^" ^
as genitive, indifferently with,
*
^ ^" 7
^
e.
i.
by means
koban.
^jp^ fy^si
3t^
itsi,
are expressed
itsi,
itsi
itsi,
man-bu
an eleventh.
a hundredth.
,
a thousandth. itsi
man-bu san
a then thousandth.
,
,
three ten thousandths.
generally read 6w instead of bun
but improperly superseded by
^
7 *,
bu, the
name
,
and therefore often
of a superficial measure.
,
CHAPTER Mi-tsu
NUMERALS.
36, 37.
Mi-tsuni means one of three,
itsi,
number of
IV.
147
two of three,
three, being the denominator, which
properly of a
expressed by a Japanese nu-
is
meral, the partitive genitive of the numerator expressed by a Chinese numeral.
They count Yo-tsu
further:
one of
itsi,
Itsu-tsu
Mu-tsu
one of
itsi,
one of
itsi,
Nand-tsu
four.
Ya-tsu
five.
Kok6no-tsu
six.
Kok6no-tsu fatsi, eight of nine.
The division of
hundred by ten
a
"% If'K' Itsi-wari, = 10 per cent (10/ 50/ Ku wari, ziyu wari, - 90/ 100/ .
,
Bu,
fj*
Wari.
Bin, J|C^,
W"J
^
Itsi bu,
fr^,
~fc
The
3*
^
=
further:
so
^ ~' v JS v
definition
l
1
,
f[i]
^,
= splitting.
go trari, = 20, 30, 40,
.
^r
per cent. Ni,
Ni, son,
Wari,
*w,
JVt,
).
called
is
t
an,
the tenth part of Bu.
is
And
cent (TC/O).
is called
vulgo chiefly but erroneously
,
one of nine.
itsi,
one of seven.
itsi,
r
one of eight.
itsi,
',
go 6u, = 2, 3, 4, 5/
jjC, -
Si-wari go-bu san-rin ,
""t =
Jtiei
go rin, = TV.
si,
the tenth part of
tV
45,3*/
1%.
Ui per
tWo-
H^
that the import duty of certain articles shall be paid for with
,
on in Japan, belonging
to the Treaty of the 18
Japanese text page 25 verso line 2,
is
th
expressed by
shall
said articles a duty of
37.
35/
shall
~fa
^^
:
$j
"^
and plural
numeral, unity so
it
(see
that the object,
express
many
the Japanese
must have recourse
uses
cannon
definition
six-piece."
greater, than
cannon," or, in
The
is really
number of
necessary.
its
5),
to
gramma-
ditinguuh what
in the plural an a repetition of
to
is
an expression answering
to
deficient in the
certain names,
times, as the numeral denotes.
cannon," in which case tone-piece" and butive
to
which
U
page 53
enumerated as something in the singular, or
singular objects,
on the
Numeratives.
or
Numeral-substantives,
distinction of singular
&'$. e.
be paid.
Since the Japanese language, like the Chinese, tical
be car-
Aug. 1859, edition of the
A $fa ^^i Migiva san wari go bu no un-ziyquico komu &e, L
_t ^
is
tel
.
35 percent, in the Regulations, under which the Netherlands-Trade ried
.
be counted,
For
to:
which, joined to a present a*
is
one cannon,
six
tone-piece cannon,
cannons," si x
-piece
six-piece" have the value of an attriplace,
is
found: > cannon one-piece,
suchlike auxiliary
names
in
Japanese
is
Considering objects in respect of their outward
CHAPTER
148
as stags,
racteristic,
handles
,
NUMERALS.
37.
according to one
counted
are
they
appearance,
IV.
by heads,
fish,
another
or
brooms and objects with
their tails,
by
by the handles. Hence has arisen a distribution of
which are denominated
either
articles into classes
The Japanese names of
We
associated with Japanese numerals, the Chinese with Chinese.
one piece of wood" either the Japanese expression
A under
ki,
or the Chinese
2JJv^V^' Ippon
'^
of these classes has been taken
list
head of gj*^ -r^tS'
the
up
The Japanese-Chinese
of these words.
e.
i.
which
-^ (or also
have thus for
^ s ~fo*
2j
are
classes
Ipponnd)
,
Fit6-
ki.
some Japanese Encyclopedias,
in
Tsui-miyau,
pendants or matches; a denomination, racter
,
with Japanese or with Chinese names, and are
usually indicated with Chinese characters.
motono
cha-
noticeable
names which are used
very justly dictionaries
describes also
the
contain
for
cha-
lists
of
these words, being amassed, the Japanese under Fit6 (one), the Chinese under
'^
-^.
Itsi,
,
Itsu, but at the
same time being mixed with words which
indicate
an idea of measure or of a quantity,
bale of
rice.
As the
last
as
one grain of
rice,
one
mentioned properly belong to the names of the objects
contained in the dictionaries,
we
limit ourselves here to those auxiliary
which are alone used for fixing the idea of
number, and them we
names,
divide into
Japanese and Chinese.
I.
Japanese Numeratives.
1.
Fasira,
Iku-fasira
>^^,
^g ^
,
7^
post, column, for Kamis or gods of the Japanese myths.
^ how many ,
Mi-faswano kami, three gods. are wind-gods. of
Futa-fasira,
(gods) ?
Fitd-fasira no kami
Kono futd-fasirava kazdno kami here used
substantively
,
,
one god.
nari, both these
alone the idea
includes
both." Applied to statues of Buddhist saints, Fasira
Sv'^E* W?^*ffl /
T
^^|
'h|]!'
is
1
)i
expressed by
^ jjjjp
,= statue.
one Bronze statue of Sakya-
Buddha.
mouths,
for souls, that are not to be counted. Also Mund, breast.
2.
Kutsi, (U ^,
3.
Kasira, ]p|^, head, for stags and wild boars.
kasirano sikd, three stags.
1) Nippon-ki,
XIX, page 25
verso.
StM
mi-kasira, or
Mi-
CHAPTER
Pami, |gf, bit,
4.
IV. NTTMEEALS.
149
37.
ATmano
for reined horses.
ftt6- (vulg. fttdtsu)
;
one reined horse.
Moto,
5.
h
2f
pale, seat, for hunting-hawks, which are held on
,Hy,
perches; for trees. 6.
Fa,
Wa, ^J '\ ?
,
Hayabusavro futa-fa kakuru, 7.
O, JH^,
8.
Ori, ^ftf,
Kitino ftt6-va, one pheasant
feather, wing, for birds.
tail, for
to let start falcons
fish.
-
-
by
couples.
Compare page 130,
7.
Koifitd-o, two carp.
fragment, piece,
for perch
(Tan), which are
offered as
a
present, and from modesty are called a small piece.
Sudzi, ^JJ5^, line (from sumi, ink and
9.
long and thin.
one tendon, a
cfci,
Nova, Tddzund, Tsuru, Obi fU6-sudzi, one
one rein,
line,
girdle.
10. Fira, |jr|||
^,
spot, stretched, for things which are
Osi-gava fttd-fira, one piece of leather. 7 11. No, ijlg breadth, for rolls of writing.
Ma, ^jj^, room,
for apartments.
-
flat
and even.
Maki-mono fU6-no, one
,
12.
way), for things that are
roll.
Ne-dok6ro /W^-ma, one sleeping-
-
apartment.
Tomaya, "^ ^
13.
^v
Kira fU6-tomai t
vulgo Tomaz, for warehouses.
a warehouse. 14.
Nagare,
or fata,
two
Yeda,
15.
16. Furl,
for rivers
^**, stream,
rivers,
two
and waving
Fnid-naffdrt tarn
flags.
flags.
^J, branch. ^^, sway, for
Naginata fit6-yeda, one pike.
drawn swords.
A
-
>
/M
sword.
Chinese Numeratives.
II.
The scope class of
to
and
Grammar
excludes a complete
idle words. For such we refer the reader,
EDKINS,
J.
of a Japanese
Grammar
who
list
of this numeroui
wishes to see them
all
treated.
121 and further, of the Chinese Colloquial Language, page
restrict ourselves here to those
most in
use.
noun the In the union of the Chinese numerals with a successive numeratiTe allows Japanese spoken language as
it
itself
a few modifications of sound, which arise
were naturally from a rapid pronunciation, though
...
writing generally
remain unnoticed.
The
rule,
which the spoken language follows
in this retpect is: if the IMIU-
CHAFPER
150
merative noun begins with &,
numeral unites
Itsu-k
.
.
Itsu-s
.
.
Itsu-t
.
.
.
.
Roku-f
Is-s It-t
T>
.
e.
;
No
^
g.
.
.
.
|g|
illustrated
.
.
.
Ip-p
.
.
.
Rop-p
.
.
.
/
.
.
Ztyu-k ...
Zik-k
Zlyu-s ...
Zis-s
Zlyu-t ...
Zit-t
Ztyu-f
Zip-p
.
,
.
known by
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
the numeral
pron. Ik-ka.
,
assimilation takes place
y and w. The
then the
becomes Sam-b
.
when
,
the enumerative
noun begins with one
impure sounds g, z, d, which are pronounced as ng, nz, nd, or r,
/>,
on page 19.
assimilation are to be
to
and
(A)
consonant undergoes an
final
San-f
.
subject
*
and the
.
.
37.
or with the labial
,
closely to it,
becomes Ik-k
The combinations
^
s,
which has been already
assimilation,
Itsu-f
more
itself
NUMERALS.
IV.
characteristic of this class
the form
is
also
of the
with m, n, -^
^C^'
Emperor (Mikado)
alone.
e.
;
g.
Itsi-mai.
To the Chinese Enumerative nouns most
Nin
^^5
1.
'^
>
^^
Bon-si ni-nin
,
(
m an,
= the Only,
Itsi-nin^
two Bonzes.
vj? s^
for persons. is
applied to the
^^
-j-*
5^
;^
3
San-ninno onna, three women.
ten Shamans.
nm,
>\v)'
'^
in use belong:
J^ ^
,
Siya-mon ziyu yo
Go-ninno kwai-kokft-nin
,
five foreigners; Kwai-kokti-nin go-nin, foreigner five persons.
The conversational language uses
for one, two, three or four
words Fytdri, Futdri, Mitdri and Yottdri F&tdrino
merchant.
^*
2.
/
f@5 by
e
siii-fu,
two
abbreviation
(see
sailors.
/^
racterize as individuals, as a piece,
The counting according Ik-ka
or
^r
,
Ka
(
"^ f!|*)i the most gene-
answers to the Japanese
wished to cha-
is
it
^
,
1.
Go-ka,
5.
Ku-ka,
^
2.
Rok-ka,
6.
Zik-ka
San-ka,
^
3.
Hltsi-ka,
7.
Ziu-ik-ka
,
Si-ka ,
^
4.
Hatsi-ka,
8.
Ziu-ni-ka
,
Ni-ka
,
'?>
??/o
days.
Hn
(ts-so)
$T^'
^p^, Sikano
(page 138).
district.
:Elv y^
v*
10.
11. 2^ 2. cr
-^ J^)f^
?> San-ka
^? San-zitsu, the day three, the third day. Dai-'zi^ the four great temples.
9.
,
Ik-ka-styo, a district (by counting).
one and the same
^.5
tsu
to the Yedo-pronunciation is:
-f
,
the
Fttorino akindo, one
page 145).
used enumerative noun, applicable to objects, which
rally
persons
nitsi,
J3j -^r
12.
/
three
CHAPTER
To show
that a
NUMERALS.
IV.
quantity counted
is
pronounced 6y6sso, = in sum, together, ber.
^
fas /
59
+ ^r ^IIT, Oy<$so ik-ka
'
Oy6o
spoken is
151
37.
of,
the word
Oydso
generally placed before the
ziyu-ka geMi, ten months.
-
-
num-
fa$
nenno aida, the interval of one year (in counting),
i.
e.
a year long. 3
-
E$o
/Eo
.3ci
Kki. Hiki
E*)i
(
given in pairs, as horses, horned cattle,
some
woven
is:
stuffs
Ip-piki
.
.
etc.
.
The counting
at
Yedo
objects,
which are paired or
sorts offish, such as perch (Tot),
CHAFrEB
152
Midzu 8.
and
9-
NUMERALS.
37.
Tsa ni hai, two cups of
ip-pai, a saucer or a glass of water.
Mai
^Y'
flat,
IV.
(
$C?)' Candle, anything
'-
as boards, paper, prints, coined silver,
^*>
Pon, Hon
(
<),
-^ 2[
in general things long and slender, pencil (Fude),
fan (Oogi),
salmon (Sake),
etc.
tea.
single, leaf, for things thin
some
sorts of fish etc.
stem, stalk, handle,
for trees, plants,
which have the property of length,
as a
spoon (Tsiya-siydku), whip (Mutsi), needles (Fari),
At Yedo, they count: H'tsi-hon
.
.
CHAPTER ~w
15 feet.
-
Wj'
TV.
NUMERALS.
153
37.
-
Kiyaku, Kiak
(
$ )^Iv), foot,
for articles of furniture
baring
Tsukue, or Keu-sok ik-kiak, one desk. Siyoo-gi san-ftak, three couches.
TSo
16.
(
swing,
!,
are carried hanging
on a
bitsu or
ni-tso,
17.
Naga-motsi
|
stick.
for trunks
Norimono
it-tso,
a
and
traveling-articles,
which
or sedan chair.
Naga-
litter
two traveling trunks. vessel, for ships. Counting
is
done:
CHAFFER
154
^3
^l$$
IV.
* or
NOTATION OF TIME.
^"
^ nil
^
'
38.
Ip~P u n
so-kan
or
te-gami
one
,
sealed letter. 26.
J^ ?
Soku
,
?}, foot, for shoes:
' ,
(
-
Tabi
one pair of
is-sokti,
stockings.
NOTATION OF TIME.
Enumeration of
38.
K
Year, Japanese
The enumeration
1.
Iku
^,
tdsd
(
^g ^
4j ^
^
^
'.
^
-^
3
T6si, old- Japanese
how many
,
years ?
Fit6
ttise,
a full year.
,
Futd
t&sd,
two
4^t'
h'tf,
of years in pure Japanese
,
^^^,
IJy
.)
4]
years.
to
,
^
^s^j four years.
,
,
h
-J-
five years.
C
,'
^
,
,
The Chinese enumeration of
years,
on the question:
limited,
,
three years.
.Afrw.
:
six years.
how many
is
years.
^/i'
itsu tdsd,
2.
Jfoe, Chinese 4^i^,
Nand Yd
seven years.
tdsd,
tdsd,
eight years.
f^
K&kdno
1
),
TJ Wse, ten
nine years.
years. *
Momo ttisd, a hundred years. Tsi fos^, a thousand years.
on the question:
T,
>
rp
^
Nan-nen
,
years? or
Itsi-nen,
Ni-nen
Ik-ka-nen, a year.
'^
two years.
Ni-ka-nen,
.
,
San-ka-nen three ,
3 JJy
3 -ff .
^5o ^' Yo-ew,
Si-ka-nen, four
i^v
Go-ka-nen,
Go-nen,
.
etc.
etc.
The Chinese
si
(four) immediately before new is superseded
as they do 'nt like to
ffiff /fe
|Jt|
now
in)
3. is
^
^
p|
^^=t
')
^ -^
The question:
speak
of
~P^ ^v>
^^ ^f^v? ^ ne
Si-nen, the year of death.
y ear 40 -from the accession to the throne.
1)
it is
now
(it
goes
year.
how
old? = Japanese iku
tftse
answered in the Chinese manner of counting.
^^S7,
by the Japanese yo
X, Yo-tosi-meni or Yo-nen-meni nari-masu,
the fourth
five
(^^
J|| ^)
-p ^
-\^
5
\
bow many j^jfr
^ =T
years?
^g=
th year of his life he Ziyu-sitsi zai nite kurdini tsuki-tamoo, in the 17
Vulgo Kono
iose also.
CHAPTER
comes to the throne. 39. 1.
-
-
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
tosini
Nl-ztyuno
155
39.
or Tori ni-zXyuni, in his 20th year.
Chronological notation of years.
Japan uses the Chinese enumeration of years, which was introduced by a
buddhist missionary in A. D: 602
After this the years, as well a the months
').
and the days, are counted by sexagenary periods, and named sexagenary cycle, which
of a cycle of ten and one of twelre signs.
itself consists
The cycle often series
is
from the
called
known
after the
elements:
five
Wood,
Fire, Earth,
Metal and Water (Japanese Ki, Fi, Tsutsi, Kane, Midzti), which, each taken double, are distinguished as masculine and femine, or, after the Japanese conception, as the elder and as the
The names of the ten-series cycle 1-
EP
/
Y.,
x
3.
4.
T/
h
5.
(^Jf,
Ye and j^J
,
h ,
To).
are:
Kind ye.
JE
2.
1
younger brother
,
,
Kind to.
7
Find ye.
8.
Find to.
9.
-
$,
/ Y* Kanndto.
z
10.
n' Tsutsin6ye.
The twelve-series cycle has
relation
to
,
i.
M)de&n6yt. .1
/)
nrf to.
the division of the zodiac into
twelve equal parts, and bears the names of the Chinese zodiac, for which Japanese names of animals are used, as:
Ne .......
Mouse.
2.
Usi
Bull.
8
3.
Tora
Tiger.
9.
4.
U
Hare.
10.
1.
5.
s'
(pron. Taats) Dragon.
Serpent.
6.
If both series are let proceed side
sixty-series cycle or
Ktnfye neno
first
I) j.
is
Beziige
mil
HOFFMANN. 1839. Page 126.
now
by
-
r
?*'
Horse.
'-
Cock.
Ton'
11.
Hound.
12.
ENria*
side,
till
of which the
ton, and the sixtieth
year of the cycle
See Japan',
obtained,
AT ma
,
both are run out, then the
first
^^^
,
or
year
called
MWrimfto
current answer to 1864.
** *"
is
**.
Ep
ino
^^
tori.
The
CHAPTER
156
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
39.
SYNOPSIS OF THE SEXAGENARY CYCLE. i
i
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
n
in
iv
v
vi
vn vin
ix
x
CHAPTER
IV.
The second year of king
jJ
MH
ZIN
is
called
39, 40.
A jpljlf;
jj
J^l
jfl
i^a
H=4t.
(IX 11) 40.
NOTATION OF TIME.
Enumeration of years by year-names.
In 645 A. D. the reckoning by years of government was superseded by a
year-names, Nen
reckoning by
goo
(f,
or
-77*^).
Just as in China, these are appointed by the Sovereign, so are they in Japan
by the Mikado, and
after
changed by him
being one of the prerogatives of his crown. The adoption
,
this
the lapse of a larger or smaller
of his year-name pleads for the recognition of his sovereignty
The 68 Chinese words, from which
The
l ).
the Japanese year-names are chosen, are:
successive year-names of the current century are:
Klyoo-wa
38:
number of yean
1854.
1801.
7t
1804.
TC 186
-
rig: I
(
,
1864.
1844.
1868.
Tem-poo)
Koo-kwa
7C Addition to the edition Japan. The
1830.
first
1848.
of 1876.
1875. I
I
Introduction of the Western Calendar in
of Januar 1873 (according to the time calculation of Greenwich)
the Japanese Government has adopted the European Calendar with his twelf months.
Therefore the correctness of the Japanese ohronology, question, as 1)
is
The change
may
not be called in
done by some bookmakers. of the year-names seems,
in latter time*,
not
to
btve been known early enough,
with one yew-name, when another had taken iU place. reckoning has heen continued
M
158
his
B.
CHAPTER
weeks and Sundays C.,
which
five
and
fixed as the
day of the
first
hundred and thirty
A ^E
Bfj VJ
beginning of their era the year 660
thus the Japanese
month
first
three).
'^+3
M + 3L
,
of Januar
first
certain notarial Act:
B
is
,
J
equalized there with
and agrees with our 15 th Januar 1873,
continue making use of the Nen-go
still
The
of the Japanese year 2533 (two
The dating of a
^jK^iHH+H^H -^ ^
40, 41.
the foundation-year of the Mikado-dynasty.
is
1873 was thus the thousand
NOTATION OF TIME.
IV.
.
(
^^
).
Division of the solar year.
41.
The course of the sun and the (months),
called
solar year are divided into twelve equal parts
the zodiac, beginning with
after
half of which the winter solstice
falls.
the
arc
These 24 divisions, called
regulates his labour.
on
the 24
If the twelve arcs are bisected,
i minutes are obtained, periods of 15 days 5 hours and 14
bandman
of the Mouse,
by which the husSek-ki or
|jit*'
|[jf |>
modifications of the weather, are distributed by pairs over the twelve months of
the year
,
the
first
of each pair being called
Ris-sun
...
"BjJ
^
Setsu
3 Febr.
.
.
19 Febr.
.
\, Slyo-slyo
5 March.
.
Q ,
...
20 March.
<^,
Middle of the spring.
...
5 April.
a ,
...
20 April.
2
,
Seed rain.
...
5 May.
Begil ning of the
summer.
Seo-man.
.
.
20 May.
,
Boo-siu
|
,
Siu-bun
...
23 Sept.
Kan-ro
...
8 Oct.
Soo-koo
.
.
.
23 Oct.
...
.
.
5 June.
|>
,
.
.21 June.
Seo-sets
.
.
...
7
Nov.
22 Nov.
...
.
7 Dec.
...
22 Dec.
Dai-sets.
^, Too-zi
.
Height of the winter.
6 July.
^
,
Little heat.
Dai-siyo.
.
Great snow.
Height of the summer.
Seo-siyo
Rit-too
Little snow.
Transplanting of the rice.
Seo-kan
...
6 Jan.
Little frost. .
.
23 July.
,
Dai-kan. Great
Great heat.
me, or the 80
th
.
.
20 Jan.
frost.
year begins with Ris-sun (beginning of the spring).
nitsi
8 Sept.
.
Beginning of the winter.
Little plenty.
fatsi ziyu
.
Fall of hoar-frost.
Rik-ka
civil
FdkU-ro.
Cold dew.
Koku-u
The
.23 Aug.
.
Middle of autumn.
Clear.
Ge-zi
Aug.
"White dew.
of the insects.
Sei-mei
7
Local heat.
Kiyoo-tsits.
sun-bun
Tsiu.
Pp ^
...
Ris-siu
Rain water.
Awakening
the second
Beginning of the autumn.
Beginning of the spring
U-sui.
,
Ris-sun yori
day from the beginning of the spring
is
our
CHAPTER 23th of April.
Time
*
Bi-gan (ffi
j^
is
),
NOTATION OF TIME.
IV.
41, 42.
159
very commonly determined after the two equinoctial feasts
which
last
seven days each, the principal feast, that takes
place on the fourth day, falling on the day of the equinox. 42.
Enumeration of months.
Months are reckoned in answer
to the question Iku-t**ki
(
ft
$fc
J), O r
Nan-getsu, how many months? Chinese.
Japanese.
'^
Zl
Fatd-tsUki. Mi-tstiki.
-.
.
fty
=
ft
^
l
Itsi-gets or
}i
-^
Tk-ka-yett,
=
$ Ni-gets
*
one month.
r
ft
9 months.
ft y San-gets
3
Yo-tsUki.
Si-
4
3
Itsu-tstiki.
"ff.
y Go-gets
J-]
5
Mu-ts&ki. Nand-tstiki.
7
Ya-tsuki.
/\ ^
Kdkono-tstfki.
y
A
Fatsi-gets
S 9
y Ku-gets
To-tsiiki.
.
10
If
12
..
To
the question Nan-gwaLt
(of the year) the
,
,
first
,
Yedo Soo
month.
ngdtstt).
Yedo Xan
third
San-gwats,
,
Si-gwats, fourth
Go-gwats,
fifth
a^
ft
^
ft
'4
^
Ni-gwats, second
,
,
at
Sttti-ittrut*
'
''"t"
[,
ft
,
"if
ft
,
""o^^
^
"
~
K>i-,,>i-,,',
^
i
'-
^
As the
civil
named
,
a whole mouth.
tenth
>
Zin-it.i-,ncat*i eleventh
,
%>n-ni-tnc
life;
,
twelfth
In'gin
>
in chronological
after the sexagenary
year of the Japanese
connected with the solar year, the mouths continually
=
eighth ninth
month.
writings and in almanacs the months are also
Itsi-gets,
.
seventh month.
/%u-(/>*t'>i)-,nr.>t.*,
These names are good for the intercourse of every day
The intercalary month.
,
>
RokU-gwats, sixth
l)
which month?
ngat*,
names following answer:
Siyoo-gwats (at
(^ ^ ft /),
is
<
a lunar year
with the
new moon
CHAPTER
160
NOTATION OF TIME.
IT.
and have 29 or 30 days alternately. Thus to the
To keep
or 355 days.
name
of the
common
lunar year belong 354
four seasons even with the revolution of the sun,
the
every two or three years an intercalary obtains the
42, 43.
moon, which
it
month
(Uruu-dznki)
follows,
preceded by the word Uruu
is
added, which
Vy
The
; (ypl ^).
^m^
t=t
following
Enumeration of the
days.
The natural day, from the
rising
43.
month
second
the
thus called
is
Uruu nigwats, = supernumerary second month.
^JaZi x
ypi'V ,7
month
intercalary
7
the setting of the sun,
to
called in
is
U, Fi, Hi; the night 5, Yo; the midday Firu\ the midnight Yoru. The
Jap.
-
compound Firu-yoru, to the Chinese
day and night, means the civil day;
Y
j|i
-$C
it
is
equivalent
Tsiu-ya, and, just as it, applied to the astronomical
>
also.
day
In connection with the year and month, the Chin. 1.
jjgj*
Q
^ ^,
^,
called Jap.
is
day
Ka,
Nitsi (or Zitsu); both are used in counting the days.
manner they count, with
After the Chinese or
civil
ka, to the question:
nitsi,
1 day.
3f,
Ni-ka
nitsi,
2 days.
?
'
San-ka
^
i
Si-ka
?
""",
HH*
lElv
HI*
~
^ ptj
* j|j=j
*, Ikn-ka,
$
lk-ka
Hi*
'^
$jj^%
or without the numerative
'
nitsi,
nitsi ,
how many
days?
3 days.
4 days
etc.
reckoning with the numerative j|f}*, ka (page 150):
after the .
v ~HI^
:
t^
PJ
v ra
*'
:
0^ y ^^
Sanziu san-si-ka nitsino aida,
J^
within 33 to 34 days. If the numerative
means dying-day,
is
* jgj
,
ka
,
is left
out
,
the Si-nitsi (4 days)
superseded by the Japanese
,
because
Yok-ka; for 14 days
Zfyu-yok-ka, for 24 days Ni-ztyn yok-ka, for 34 days San-ztyu yok-ka 2.
days is
,
The Japanese manner and to the 20
expressly
named
th
and 30
of counting, which extends only to the
th ,
refers to the days of a
month
,
when
previously; this not being the case, the counting
be considered to begin from another given date, which however
is
it
also
is
said
etc. first
the
ten
month
must then
not included
in the calculation.
The days of the month,
- -
it
generally begins with the
called, after the question: Idztt-ka ('fnf^
*),
new moon,
are
= which day? or Idzureno fi-kal
CHAPTER *
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
43.
161
CHAFEEE
Ka
If is
NOTATION OF TIME.
IV.
or Nitsi be followed
by
^*
Me
,
43, 44.
32)
(see
equivalent to an express definition of the day by an
^Y
?> Mai-nitsi,
is
^7
said for: daily;
5^,
then this expression
,
ordinal noun of number.
Kaku-zitsu, the next day but
one; M^-ka-meni, on the third day; Mi-ka-me g&t6ni fatsuru nek-ki, a fever which (recurs) every third day, the tertian ague.
arises
on the fourth day from date
is
to day, to
at
Yedo, market has been, of
(or every four days), thus either
"^
th
,
day
day -J-*
etc.).
x
33 rd or 34
44.
;
Muika-meni
fU- PH
^
^*
th
on the 4
,
the 8
th
old, held every fourth
or the 12
th ,
deki agarimasta, he accomplished
*
^
^ *=
i
San-zm san
from which the
Yddo mukdsi yok-ka-me
reckoned, not being included in the calculation.
gtitdni itsi tdtsisi nari,
or 9
Kon-nitsiyori yok-ka-meni,
as the point of departure
si
ka
or on the 1 it
nitsi
day
st ,
5
th
on the 6 th day.
me ni on ,
the
th
day.
Notation of hours.
This dial shows the two methods of marking the hours in use in Japan.
CHAPTER
I.
According to one method of the
the inside
dial, is,
of time
portions
Each
Styo,
=
first
which are named
The Toki
exhibited
after
on
Kok
At
etc.
divided into two halves; the
is
j^, 5,
an hour according
half, being equivalent to
the zodiac, as
Ustno doki, Bull-time,
beginning, the second,
has four subordinate divisions, called 5^lj?,
= the true
to our reckoning,
notches, each of 15
or
^>
minutes), and the Bun has 60
Bun (=15
begins with the -^rj
(IE?)
,
seen, the civil day divided into twelve equal
instead of Told.
called ;$J |",
or proper.
is
163
44.
the original Chinese astronomical
doki, Mouse-time, -ftt-KJpf,
Yedo they say Kok is
as
,
NOTATION OF TIME.
Toki, times),
(^p^,
Neno
^PJ B$ first
IV.
Neno
P*jf
at midnight; thus
fall8
its
doki
^T^, Meo (60 seconds). This cycle or Neno koku, the middle of which
beginning
falls
60 min. before,
end 60 min.
its
after midnight.
^p*
/
Nen6
fl^pjj:
Mouse-time.
dok{-,
J$]}fsfyo, = 11 o'clock in the evening.
=12
sei,
,/
Usind doki, Bull-time.
H^fe
J" siyo
,
sei,
=
1 o'clock in the
=2
,
se,
o'clock
Hare-time.
sei
=6
Tai*un6 doki, Dragon-time.
=
sei,
= 8 o'clock
7 o'clock in the morning.
,
f
'
= 10
^
Yyo,
Our 11 hours 48 min. 2
>
Cock-time,
rfdJW,
=6 o'clock
& f 7ii n<5
tloki ,
Dog-time*
tiyo,
= 7 o'clock in the evening.
Mi t
=8
o'clock i.
,
i,
sec.
Ape-time, *
c/^ti,
= 5 o'clock in the afternoon.
Serpent-time.
o'clock
>
o'clock
Ton wd
Bj
in the
se i,
-4
sei,
o'clock
Goat-time.
^ rfyo, = 3 o'clock in the afternoon.
V
- 5 o'clock in the morning.
s^wo
Sarfind B^F^ ***J ^
sei,
siyo,
ffifc 4f HtJ -v
w
*
,
,
**
Tiger-time.
=4
JFtt9tLzln6 doki,
=2 o'clock
,
o'clock in the morning.
noon.
yo , = 1 o'clock in the afternoon.
morning.
=3
o'clock in the morning.
=12 o'clock
,
^p ^
>
o'clock
= 11
,
TF:$
o'clock midnight.
Hone-time.
,
before midnight
Swine-time.
= 9 o'clock in the evening,
=10 o'clock is
expressed by
^
:
f7/
.
CHAFfER
164
Hlv %A?
X 15 + 3 min.
3
midnight
IE?
HI'**
styo
44.
san-kokft
san-bun ni-meo,
e.
from the beginning of the Mouse-time. Our 12 o'clock our 12 o'clock 15 min. after midnight ~y*/
&o#.
sei sfo/o
numbers, by which
the hour
made known by
is
the
T61ti);
(notches),
T^M
which are
The KokQ,
Rin.
however
or
is
also
Bun
is
and the same from noon
ffi^_
now = 12
BUH
(tenths),
number 10; thus 10
1
=
the
Bun
into
noon
till
10
9, 8, 7, 6,
midnight; these numbers are obtained,
The numbers
9.
times
min. The numbers which have been
which should properly belong to a Tdki,
the number,
2X6
subject to the decimal division into 10 ^l]^,
called
till
on the
strokes
drum. The civil day retains the division into 12, or properly
added to the successive twice six Tokis, are from midnight 5, 4,
i.
The second method, the Japanese proper, supersedes the names of the
bell or
Koku
sec.
r ^"5 5E?i A
is
zodiac with
B^:
2
-f-
Neno
^"^
'-
tffl^l^A?' ^Vwd
2.
(
~
^"v
^v
"l
NOTATION OF TIME.
IV.
1, 2
is
when
subtracted from the
and 3 are not included in the
hour-numbers, as 1, 2 and 3 strokes on the drum or clock belong to the signals of the military and convent service, and a confusion of the two signals has to
be prevented.
The newest information respecting with the notices of
it
this notation of
hours does not quite agree
formerly obtained, and people in Japan
itself,
it
seems,
do not reckon more consistently. Therefore we confine ourselves to the clocks at Yedo. There, at 12 o'clock at noon, the clock strikes 9
J
),
and the Japanese
calls
time Firu k&kon6tsu doki, = noon, time of the nine number, or in short,
this
K&k$n6tsu-d&M
',
or Konondtsti, or even
M'mano
ding to our reckoning of time he counts 10 afternoon Firugo
Jctiktindtsu
k6kti.
From 12
Bun and
calls
to 2 o'clock accor-
our 1 o'clock in the
han ddki, = afternoon 91 time, or. in short, Firu
ktik8n6tsu han] our 2 o'clock Firugo yatsu-doki, or Firuao yatsu, or also Fitsuzino kokil',
at
our 3 o'clock Firugo yau han,
midnight the clock
dtiki,
strikes
etc.,
till
after the
end of the fourth Toki,
nine again, and beginning with Yoru kdkon6tsu
the other six Tokis continue
till
noon. In consequence of this
,
for the Ja-
panese Tokis the following definitions of time are obtained.
1) First a stroke is heard, about a
the warning.
A
minute afterwards a second and immediately
minute later the strokes of the
after that a third, being
hour follow, each stroke with a pause of 10 or 12 seconds,
except the last two, which follow quickly on each other and show that the clock has finished striking.
CHAPTER
TORU
,,
JL
)
,
TO,
NOTATION OP TIME.
o'clock
?
1 o'clock after
*
,
=
midnight.
= 2
A?
8*
Ydtsn-doki,
vj Yqu-han, 8
=3 ,
time,
o'clock after
ARE,
1 o'clock in the afternoon.
,
$, TUU.
=6
v
,
= 2.
,
6J
^,
=6
=8
time,
o'clock in the erening.
= 7 o'clock in the erening.
in the morning.
Itsutsti-d&ki,
6k
AfStrt-ban, 6|,
,
5 th
rtaui ( .
rrJZlT. in the
M*t*u-
7 o'clock in the morning.
ASA,
eremmg.
= 5 o'clock in the afternoon.
6th time.
,
in the
,
o'clock in the morning.
Mutsu-han
time,
= 4 o'clock i n the afternoon.
morning.
Mmsu-doM,
,
8*
N&ndtri-dtH, 7* time,
time,.
= 5 o'clock in the morning. in the
the iftaraotM.
= 3 o'clock in the afternoon.
morning.
v, N&ndtsu-han, 7j
.^.O,
u
l^M-Aan, 8|,
morning.
,
FIRU GO,
= 2 o'clock in the afternoon.
midnight.
N&ndtsu-ddki, 7* = 4 o'clock in the
,
o'clock at noon.
Ydttt-doH,
o'clock after midnight. in the
time,
,
^
A?
9*
K6k6n6lsurd6ki,
= 12
midnight.
Kdk6notsn-han, 9
=
165
44.
at night.
KokVnfant-d8t{, Qth time,
= 12 i
or
IV.
70J?[7. or
time,
70,
lt*ut**-dQk(i
it
aifhu
S*
time,
o'clock in the morning.
=8
o'clock in the erening.
= 9 o'clock in the morning.
=9
o'clock in the eTening.
X, FIRU MAYE,
in the fore noon.
|, Y6t8*ttok(, 4th
ti
m e,
4*
time,
= 10
o'clock in the morning.
10 o'clock in the erening.
= 11
o'clock in the morning.
= 11 o'clock in the eTening
In agreement with the preceding definitions are the notices of time, occuriug. in the Shopping- Dialogues page 17, after the Nagasaki original, page 42, where 3 *) -fct 2 - ZBtoitrfton Aon is to be read: 5^2 -JL \ >y
^&Bf
&
&
CHAPTER
nandtsu made utsini,
dtiki yori
^^'^,
B=5f:
On R.
NOTATION OF TIME.
IV.
between one and four o'clock."
Yau-han doki goroni,
it
BROWN'S Colloquial Japanese, Grammar, page
made equivalent
is
and
also the other Tokis begin
60 minutes
The measurement of the Tokis alone
value
of
for
are the
XL VIII,
to 10 o'clock in the afternoon
doki
/V^ ^pv
about three o'clock."
not in agreement with
the contrary,
44, 45.
earlier,
notices,
occuring in
where -Neno kokonotsu
till
12 o'clock midnight,
than according to our notice.
fixed according to our hours, is, nevertheless,
an equinoctial day, and change (they become longer or
shorter) in proportion as day
and night in the
length. Thus each of the
Tokis from the longest day, if this day including
six
different seasons are of
unequal
the morning and evening twilight be reckoned at 17 hrs. 58 min. (notices are
found which
differ
from
has 2 hrs. 58 min. The Japanese almanacs contain,
it)
every 15 days, the definition of the changeable length of day and night, and the are regulated
time-pieces
hour-ciphers
are
hour-circle into
accordingly,
on loose
Koku
or
plates,
is
which are
are
so
adopted, that the
shifted, whilst the division of the
as also the cyclical division of the zodiac
Bun,
The changing of the hours
therefore they
called
is
fixed.
Tokiwo utsusu.
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
The Japanese measures and weights,
as well as the coinage are for a great
reckoned after the Chinese decimal system, with which, as a rule, the
deal
Chinese names are used, preceded by the Chinese numerals, both modified by the Japanese pronunciation.
In consequence of the modifications, which since 1850 the Government at
Yedo has introduced in the measures and money, the from those given by us formerly and modifications again, ciple
when
of the measures,
people, in Japan
viz.
probably, sooner or later undergo itself,
have agreed about the prin-
about the Japanese foot and
French metre or Netherlands
its
proportion to the
ell.
Measures of length, Sasinome.
45. ,
sasi,
will,
definitions here given differ
S&ku, foot
(
-^ /^.%> Is-sdku, one foot), the
iron foot (Kane-
vulgo Kane-sdku), used by work-people, generally bent to a square and
therefore called the
bent foot
(
$]
3
/^^
Kiyok-sdku], the unit of the Japa-
nese measures, formerly (1831) was found by nice comparison with a standard-
CHAPTER
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND CODJS.
IV.
167
45.
metre to be = 0,303 metre or 0',11'Ml'" of an English foot, since 1850 fixed by the Government at Yedo at 0,30175 metre or 30,175 centimetre, the metre being
reckoned at 3,28889 Japanese ell
or French metre
is
feet.
At the observatory
at YeVlo the Netherlands
reckoned at 3,308 Japanese feet (KaneldJe*)
'),
whereas
the Japanese Department of Marine has adopted 3,289248 Japanese feet for
and a manual published of the Netherlands
at
Nagasaki
When,
ell.
3
)
gives 3,31 Japanese feet as the measure
in 1864, the manufacture of
measures was ordered of A. VAN EM DEN, by the
zira-sdku)
is
stufls,
being = 1,25 iron
used,
a
feet.
Jap. foot. (
J
-y-J, Sun
(
$
#, Bun
(
J
(
4
jf 2,,
Rin
j^$, Goo
(
gz*/ /|y|\
Si
(
JSTo
(
tgjf
,
t '
J
1
ell.
whalebone foot (0[
Divisions of the Sdku:
H
some comparative
Nederlandsche Handelmaatschappg ,"
the Japanese foot was fixed at 0,3035 Netherlands
For piece-goods, except woolen
it 1),
CHAPTER
168
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
IV.
or streets, = 3910,68 metres,
if
the Japanese foot
is
45, 46, 47.
reckoned at 0,30175 metres.
According to the Treaty between Japan and America, concluded in 1858, Art. the Japanese Ri
is
= 4275 yards
(the yard at 0,91438 Neth. <.
N.
whereas
ells,
it
is
amount
said to
to
^
48
33 BTp
ell),
1
7,
thus = 3908,9745
^
5
ft
.
In the Japanese-Russian Treaty of 19 Aug. 1858, Art. 8, on the contrary the Japanese Ri
made
is
equivalent to 3 wersts 332
Ri 3908,68192 Neth.
e.
ells.
Superficial measures.
46.
i.
^ ^,
a square Ken, or ~^j
SX* Bjfc*' Se and 5 Pu breadth,
lfe* o length
Jg
Tan
(
= 300 square Pu.
6 square feet (3,27791025 square metres).
e.
F*M
lfe*
a rectangle of 6
Pw
r Pu
JT-to)i a plane of 20
It-tan
the regular plane of a rice-field.
is
Pu
breadth,
^*
-^ STf v ptj
(
-^
,
It-tsoo
yomo), a plane of 60
PM
length
breadth, = 3000 square Pu.
Measures of capacity (Masttmd) for dry and liquid wares.
^p3,
Soo, Sao
^ ^p^,
(
Js-soo),
unity of the measures of capacity,
formerly distinguished by Europeans with the Malay
name Gantang,
is
0,49 Jap.
long and broad and 0,27 Jap. feet deep, containing 0,064827 Jap. cubic feet,
= 1,893365719029
cubic decimetres, or 1 litre, 8 decilitres, 9 centilitres etc.
Subdivisions of the 3' ffi full
length and 15
'$!:>>
Tsao, Tsoo
Pw
47.
feet
Jp
= 30 square Pu.
~f_
BJj'v,
i.
b
(
o
,
and 50
saschen, which gives to one
9
"0*^ Go-goo,
Soo.
% ffiz &oo pron. go-ngoo, a measure of 5 -p^$T Goo,
decilitres.
,
Ooo, pron.
v, formerly 3
*
G
'
f
-
7^^,
formerly
^
^,
Go
= -^-f, /<' goo),
(
-^ v*, Siy&ku s^y^u-? a ^j?
Multiples of the
^.^
vtgoo
and
,
dktt (
pron.
% ^J *,
measure of T |^
|gj,
Sai
(
^
ffi's
Is-sdku),
&oo.
-
*oo, or |
$ ^!f,
Js-saz),
T ^5 ^f- "^00. f.
W ^^ Soo.
= T5
/&>o.
soo, a measure of 5
ff"|f&0i =9,46682595145
cubic de-
cimetres.
^v,
Pioo, or Tawfcra
(rice), at present contains
b
^J-
,
To, formerly
^
(
-^
^^,
Ip-pioo or Ftt6-tawdra) ; a sack or bale 3 01 ^ ^ ^ ^
^tx^v^^i h (
J
h ,
/Mo),
*^*^
as vessel Tomdstt,
= 10
CHAPTER
^ ,
G6ku
?,
IV.
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COIXS.
(pron. ng6k*)
or 189,3365719029
The
.Remark.
money
(5)
ff
*
fixed salaries of is
allowed them per year or per day, and which
is
The money value of a g6ku
/12.50 Netherlands currency, or according the Japanese
^= ^| H= ^,
*
= 100
Government functionaries are based on the
according to the market-price.
in 1865
^
J
(
litres.
quantity of rice, which paid in
formerly
,
169
47, 48.
+
2X/5 2 X/1,25. "ff J Fdkn g6ku takdsa is an income of 100 Kok or l^jj /1250 Netherl. currency. The pay of a common man ( J exchange^
5?
i.
e.
--
or 6 cent(!) a day. 48.
-ft
Weights, Hakarime. ,
^,
Sai
Kin
(c.),
definition 2 ),
Ik-kin
.
J^-?,
vulgo
-g^f, Goo
/Tv
(
^,
JwKri), =
Sak'
5
(
-^
-
>f,
( '
(
/Tvi
Jte
= T5 /f-J '
5,00),
Ik-kin), the Japanese pound, called by Europeans
weighs according to former notices 0,597
kilo.
JK,,.
They reckon,
*)
at Yedo:
0,6 kilo, according to the latest
CHAPTER
170
Maas. One Mace
^|v>
'M!? Tael
&in
^v
-^
(
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
IV.
monme, or
Itsi
,
48.
^^ B *'
weighs 3,74799 grammes and has,
is-sen),
Itsi-mp, or l
as T o
Tael,
^f!, if the,
counted to be equal to /1, 60 Neth. cour., a value in silver of / 0,1 6 N.
is
The Mon-me
divided into
is
10
^v' %f,
1000
*
10000
mon-me
vulgo condrijn, conderein, cent.
fy^i Fun,
100
Itsi
c.
,
jjjj
=
ni fun,
san-bun, 2,3 Mon-me.
Rin, vulgo
cassie, cash, mokje.
Moo. Hots, vulgo wassie. 1,2
Mon-me, or
San-mon-me
Mon-me
1
A7 mon-me
2 condrijn.
moo, = 3,456 Mon-me,
si-fun go-rin roku
or 3 mace, 4 condrijn, 5 cent (or cash) 6.
^ vX
3
'
^L
'
>
'^ v*
-f"i silver,
Ziu-mon-me, = 10 Mon-me or 10 mace, the weight, which, in
/ 1,60
d
Neth. cour., being according to the Japanese text of Art. 12,
of the Additional Articles to the Netherlands-Japanese Treaty of 30 Ja-
nuary 1856, 6,25
^v = /l,00
With Mon-me they count mon-me (19 mon-me), and sands , ten of thousands
40 Mon-me. \f
"Q v or
/16
p
rist
,
1
).
in the tens (20, 30 etc.), and in the hundreds, thou-
etc.
supersede
Mon-me by
^ , \
~f"!T
ptj
Hiaku me, 100 Me
* |=j
B ^'
Me
;
thus
~"*,
=
-p ^
San-si-ziyu me, 30 to
mon-me, 91 Mon-me. 10 taels or 374,799 grammes, or Mon-me, itsi
'^ '%{^i Ku-ziyu
~\^i
mon-me, Ziu-ni mon-me, Ziu-ku
Neth. cour.
B *'
Kwan-me
(at
(1000)
we = 100
taels.
Jff one
"H^
*
,
Neth. cour.
further: Ziu-itsi
20 Mon-me.
*, F'^r'yu me,
j|
tael.
makes the immaginary coin Tael, Dutch Tail, = 37,4799 grammes, value
in silver alinea
,
Gto-mon-me, = 5 mace or half a
^ v ^ ^v 5t
^ l=f
v
Yedo Kdm-me),
B ^' San-gwan
*?
Af Q ^
go hiaku.
Ik-kwan-me, or
me 3500 me ,
or 350 taels.
1000 fo? Jt^ B"*> Zik kam-me, 10 rists or 10000 me, = 10000 ~ Bvi7 W? -'^ v B^> Hiak kam-me, 100 rists or 100000 wfc,= ^ Sen ngam-me 1000 rists or 1000000 me, = 100000 t Jf ?, B =1000000 W5" B^> Man ngam-me, 10000 rists, *
^
,
'
Sv
I)
In the
official
Dutch translation instead of
gerekend tegen de waarde van /2,50.
it
we
De Mexicaansche
find
:
,,De zilveren Spaansche
mat
dollar tegen /'2,55 Ned. coor."
of pilaar-mat wordt
CHAPTER
IV.
The Yedo Pound or
^
fj
g|
-f-
MEASUBES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
(ft* fi
$
frl, Ytdono
>jj*<
= 0,5996784 Neth. pound,
being = 16
ik-kin),
160 Mon-me or Me, or Sen, weighs 160
,
171
48, 49, 50.
taels
X
3,74799 grammes, which in the above quoted Ban-go gyoo-in >about
for
0,597 N. pound" has been given.
^^
!ft
g|
Itsi-zi, i
Sen or 3/ofi-m,
is
=
^=
#
IL' M2-^-
rin weight.
/wn #0
Iron, copper and bronze coins.
49.
The unit in circulation
is
Mon
,
^
&m
(
^^,
-f*
(= Chin.
mOn)
/*
,
the smallest exchange coin,
Trien), Japanese also Zeni,
Europeans cash, pitje or duit. The
and
called
by the
M
Mon
has a value in silver of one ^ ft ?
.
i
.Rm, and 100 pieces
mace of
(U|
3fcB, #*'&* wow) are reckoned at one Mon-me or
The exchange however
silver.
varies, being reckoned in the
town* of
the Taikun only 96, and in the countries of princes at one time more and, at
another
less.
The
cents with
a
square hole are strung upon straw-ropes to the number
nominally of a hundred
Ten such
representing the value of one
,
strings joined in one bunch,
are
Mon-me
called
$
or mace of
JJ?
silrer.
^fcj, Ik-kwa**
Yedo Ik-kam-mon) or one string of cents, and are worth one Uel or = 10 Mon-me of silver. JH ^"^ ^fcvi Nihcan-mon, two taels; ^ \ 3fc* San gwan-mon, three taels.
mon
(at
UT
The copper the word
j^
coins,
^
which generally bear
Tsu-boo,
= money,
for superscription a
generally have the value of
theless there are larger also, of the value of
^L^^vli!) The new of one at
andof
2X4
hundred Mon-coin,"
Mon-me (f
4 and of 5
^^
Mon
(^^ $*
Too took* MM, of
first cast in
jjfa
f
Afon; never-
tilt.
mow
JVi
).
name-Talae
tiie
the Oik year Ten-boo (1885)
Ten-boo T*wt-boo.
Silver coins.
The unit of the
silver
$&t %^- ffi"
coins
is
the pff v Riyoo,
H^ ^ Ht #v^'
>
pronounced by some
on6
= 4 Mon-me or mace 3 FM or condrin, thus 6&A cents Neth. silver,
1
(^ H^^t>SlS'
^ ^ ^,
0,16 Neth. cour.), was
Yedo, with the superscription 50.
Mon
or 8
year-name bcjkka
%
which has been
^T
must have 43 Mon-me (-
Mai
1 tael
The obloug coin with the
lamp
(vulgo by the Dutch, schuitje,
4 mace)
of
cour. 10 Riyoo of
an oval iflver according to the old coinage represented by called
M
=
(/fa-^ar*),
little
boat),
silver- weight
superscription
ft
S&t.
Itai btt
in
^rst caa* "*
172
CHAPTER
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
IV.
1837, has been found to have a value
worth 33 Dollar-cents or 84 T'oSo cents N. exchange more or
less
also.
of/
0,80
5
50, 51.
Neth. cour.,
and according
c.,
The weight of the
temporary Dollar
to the
unequal; there are some
is
pieces
nevertheless
is
of 8,61 and others of 8,81 grammes.
The smaller square coin of silver with the which 4 go
to
an
Gold coins (under
51.
The unit of gold is
,
Itsi bu gin, first cast
is
the
pjjjj
is
~^.
worth 8 Dollarcent,
Is-su gin, of
^^ full
21 cents N.
c.
the Taikun government).
^^
v Biyoo.
represented by the /\\
is
1854,
superscription
a
PPH
*jj^ -f
^lj ',
Koban
i
^n ^
,
which in virtue of
riyoo
or one Riyoo
,
its
stamp
current without being weighed. According to the coinage then in force the
Riyoo of gold or the Koban was worth 60 Mon-me of
silver, or
/
9,60 N.
and
c.,
divided into halves, fourths, eighths and sixteenths.
An
oblong gold, but properly silver and lightly
Mon-me (f
4,80 N.
Koban
The it is
^ Ni
""*.
scription
pu,
customary to write
The | Koban superscription
is
""*.
-^
Is-siu,
is
Its value is
15
Mon-me
pu, for which
or 1| taels (f 2,40 N.
su, for which in general Nisi
in 1859, are worth 16
which
.
ft Itsi
c.).
represented by an oblong coin of silver and gilt, with the
^ Ni
The Y5 Koban,
30
silver
represents the half Koban.
c.)
an oblong coin with the superscription
is
with the super-
1818 and declared worth in
cast in
first
gilt coin
dollarcents or
42 cents N.
is
said; the
newest cast
c.
also a small silver-gilt coin, has the superscription
;TJ^
called Is-si.
Addition to the edition of 1876. Recently after the legitime heir of the old
Mikado-dynasty has
resumed
the reins of his empire his government has adopted the
gold-standard of which the unit
is
a
Yen || J vulg.
tement of Mr. STANLEY JEVONS 1 ), only three per dollar.
The '.
The gold-coinage
HU
silver , the
of Japan consists of
niille less
according to the sta-
in value than the
possession
fifty,
is
^
[jj
Money and
the
M
,
American
two and one Yen. 2j
Japan. 1870. 2 dollars. The
twenty, ten and 5 Sen
by Prof. W. STANLEY JEVONS.
^ new
(^^) pieces in ,
.
Mechanism of exchange
.
OJ] yjpf
Sen corresponding to a dollar cent and in pieces of copper of 2
Sen or one rin
1)
my
Dai-Nippon Mei-dzi San-nen Ni-yen,
money
J being,
consists of pieces of twenty, ten, five,
inscription of a two-yen-piece in
fractional
ffi
London 1875.
1
,
I
and
V.
ADVERBS. 52.
The adverbs
in Japanese which, as such, always
precede
the word
(verb, adjective, or adverb) that they qualify, are, so far as their origin
con-
is
cerned, to be distinguished as: I.
Adverbs proper.
1.
Primitive adverbs, such as:
2.
Adverbs ending in
Ma,
ktl (in the
truly, perfectly;
spoken language simply u), formed from
adjectives in ki (p. 106), as Haydkii, early; II.
Improper adverbs or
Nouns with
1.
Tto, rery.
Osdkfi, late.
adverbial expressions.
or without the modal case ni or de, included
the adjectives in ki (p. 106,
/>),
ka (p. 116
13) and yaka (p. 117
among which 14), prorided
they are used as substantives concrete.
Verbs in the gerund,
2.
i.
e.
in
the modal
Sadamete, definitely; KessltJ, certainly; Kakite If,
for convenience,
we
1.
distribute the Japanese adverbs
Adverbs of quality, to the question:
Adverbs in ku, derived from adjectives
by to
M:
(kaitt), in writing.
sions in groups according to their signification,
53.
case, charncteriied
we
and adverbial expres-
shall get at:
how?
in ki (see p.
106,
9, B. 2),
M:
174
CHAPTER
ADVERBS.
V.
53, 54.
n the spoken language You, Y6o,
well. (See p. 112. II.)
Y6kU,
Jtli
Yordsiku,
^j[.a*/?,
Yordsiu, well, good.
Wdruku
^L ^^
t
Waruu
^
,
Haydku
,
,
jj||3
Osdku,
X
w
dSH/Ctf'
# 7
J|||
>
>v7f /s *7 >7 / *^C/
.
Kuvdsiku,
T/'
^
*
Zen-zenni,
/
,
difficulty.
CtSHM
63.S11V. /
^^
V ^fv V
(see p.
116,
8.
13):
stillness.
9.
10.
quickly, swiftly.
certainly.
by chance,
,
J^ v
=
i
fortuitously, accidentally.
=> ^J degrees, gradually.
i
Soro-soro to
,
,
-, clearly and distinctly.
0^^^ ^
^^^=,
.Dan-danni,
Soro-soro
9
J^^^=,
Tamasakani,
5.
Kuvdsiu, neatly, exactly.
Sidzukdni, i^V"-, calmly, in
Tasikdni,
quickly,
,
!
Adverbs in ka, with the terminational ni
Sumiyakdni,
Haydo
,
,
^^^^,/7,
Tsurndbirakdni
ill.
,
Kdtau Kdtoo hardly with
*
^
^
i J
bad
,
1.
Os6u, Os6o, slowly.
*
1
IT ^*
7 v>
2.
Haydu
jley?*
Kdtaku "T^" /
i
7?
^J
,
^=f*
15.
degrees.
V
Q
^
Jl!l
>
^7 degrees
,
gradually.
Yara-yara, slowly. Yara-yara yuku, to go slowly, saunter, lounge.
A
Mu-sdto, $f
^^
Musd-musdto without forethought, in confusion, in
-'
opposition to Kuvdsiku, exactly.
18.
what degree?
$ 54. Adverbs of degree, in answer to the question: in
The expressions Ikanimo, in
all
more
much
so, so
23 and 24
cited in
Mo,
respects;
the; lyd,
130:
Ma,
quite; Itsi-dan, wholly;
more; Odkini, very; Sukosi,
still
~iy6,
p.
little;
Nao, once
again so; Mdsu-mdsu, more and more; Fana-
fada, very; Mottomo, utmost; Ito, very; Itdtte, utmost, highest. Besides these:
Ikura, Nani-fodo,
'fnf
^*
=
h
w
Dore-dake, Dore-fodo,
how much?
Dono-kurai ooki
'^ TT g
*?
Yo-fodo,
Mina,
^
^^,
Osi-ndbete
,
3
,
'jnif
;
jgf'; ^ma'n,
g^ ^ ^
,
in
what degree?
19.
4"
1 T
1
how much ?
^5,
Subdte,
together.
iffl (,
^
much?
too.
^3;^
altogether.
06
(See p. 136 ^|$i
28.)
Tonto, in
kini, very.
all.
24.
CHAPTEB
Nokordzu,
wholly, perfectly.
? ;jg? =
Ippaini,
175
without surplus, without exception. (See p. 59.)
^fiXfjg?,
^y^?,
Mattaku,
54.
a^ oy er, entirely.
J^h^j.?,
Koto-got okn,
ADVERB?.
V.
full,
,
abundantly.
--
Tppanni,
^ JB=,
full (to
the brim).
H^-,
y
Is-soni,
^
Kdtsu-te, ffify
means, not at mairu mai,
KdtsU-mata
H
^
Yo-keini,
% \^
f,
*
fl
,
With a subsequent negation, by no Kdtsute wakaranai, it is by no means intelligible, Kdtrtte
not go at
I shall
3
^|"^=,
^g
Zfyu-bunni,
frZ,
tially, thinly.
wholly.
^^^-,
proportionably
it
3?#
is
|Ilt =
/
Pr
e%
manner, here and there, par-
little.
together; very nearly,
about 40.
Tai-soo ooku, far above measure.
more or
leas.
tolerably, for three fourths of the full measure.
pretty long ago.
H, contracted from Yoi-fodo, pretty.
Tsiyau-do yoi,
^g*
scarcely.
richly, abundantly, in multitude.
in general,
^_
Fotondo,
Wadzukani, 'Hl^as,
excessively.
ftc|,
35.
tolerably.
quite.
>
^rv
the more.
the more.
pretty,
,
ty?}^, not much, oydsso, /t,3yi i n sum
C?
much
sparsely, in a scattered
jt
Tsiyau-do, pron. Tkoo-do, |8Jj just.
so
,
Stik6si,
Stikoburu flsdsi,
Yo/odo,
>[
much
so 'ftjjt,
-^ fy?/Ki partly.
~fc* 7tt>
Stikdburu,
^^
in a greater degree, more.
Tdktisdnni (at Yedo),y/5.^
Tai-tei,
*
>
Oydso, pron.
Tai-soo,
30,
"pi 4^v = ^Uji
Itsi-bunva,
Mabarani,
all.
fl,
/jj> ~%
Iydsikiim6, ^ij ^ */? ^
S&i-bun,
29.
wholly, entirely.
,
all, e. g.:
Kdtsu-gdtsu,
together successively, altogether.
T
H,
it
is
S
F '
not f
*
K, proportionately,
rawonbly,
just good.
almost, nearly, scarcely, hardly. Sortva/otomdo tor?*,
hardly enough. Moppara,
^5 1?
Fodo-fodo, Naka-naka,
(ff
J
V
one^y i
it is
mere^7'
almost
SukumStkum6 o6kHm6 ndku, ty'fy + 9 *
^J^trjr*
neither Iww nor more. 50.
176
Tsito,
^"^o
Tsitto,
CHAPTER
V.
jjj?5
^P*- a
j-
ADVERBS.
54, 55. Tsitomo, as
little.
little
as possible, with
a subsequent negation, not in the least.
Yau-yau- (yoo-yoo-) Bakdri,
51.
scarcely, hardly; almost.
sitd,
merely, only. Kore bakari, only
jf#,
52.
this.
A^.% => no ^ enough.
Fu-soktini, ~J\*?
Be'tstim, J^|J^f_, in particular, particularly.
55.
55.
Adverbs of circumstance.
Mti-ydkttni
^ A 3nL?
Ayamdtte,
jlp^.^^, by
Ukegatte,
^^.yy.^.,
Kononde,
jjft^/
vai nty-
=-1
Mtiddni,
^# =
,
in vain.
mistake.
-willingly.
vf* (contracted from Konomite), gladly,
willingly, readily. 60.
^
><
Tasinde (= Tasimite),
lya-nngaramd to
Tomoni,
Tada,
^^
j^^ni
gladly.
t-
j?
P||
alike.
with, together,
'^=,
64.
together.
7, in the spoken language ftnaziu, together, at the same time.
Tada san ka
only, alone, but.
,
nomi, or Tada san ka
nitsi
only three days.
nitsi bakdri,
Saye,
Nerigoroni,
gladly.
* >
Itsuni, Fttdtsuni,
Ondziku, |^
(^ i^^-,
against the grain, reluctantly.
,
\~
^5 ^,
y
56.
^i
66.
park, enclosure
^-^, originally
for cattle; used adverbially it limits
the idea exclusively to what has been mentioned immediately before and answers to
but, as
is
it
by name only.
as
much
Ki-den
surdbd, yevu,
to
who
suru mono, some one, if
as the Lat.
modo
Sono na saye
only.
Sir."
does nothing but drink
spirits.
spirits,
e. g.
:
Mma
to saye siranu, not even
does not even
Dani,
%=-,
know
Sakewo nomi
saye
he gets drunken. equivalent to
not even,
saye nakari, there are not even horses.
Sono na
In connection with a subsequent negation Saye Lat. nee quidem,
know
Sakewo nomi saye-
saye mausu, say only:
one does nothing but drink
siru, to
know by name.
is
Zi saye mi-sirdnu mono, anyone who
the letters.
cognate to Saye, as an adverb, has the word to which
sively limits the idea, before it with or
without inflection,
si-tamave, assume but for as yet a name. will only last a short time.
Ima
e.
g.:
Ima
sibdsi dani ovase
it
exclu-
dani nanori
nan,
now
it
68.
CHAPTER
ADVERBS.
V.
55, 56.
177
Surd, x 9, even, German, sogar, indicates that an unexpected predicate to
emphatically given
the subject of a sentence,
e.
he even does not known
^,
Kata-gata,
Ze-hi,
^*?
^*,
I shall do it in
Don
bo-don
least.
Sukunqu Atemo tan
To-kaku,
if possible.
so or not so, in
^
[^
itsi-yauni ndru-besi,
Fu-ini,
^
7
^** gjf b
^^],
,
^1,
any
case; necessary. Ze-hi fefei-maioo,
either active or not active,
Sai-styo ni vd,
Dai-ni ni vd,
ijj
Itsunivd,
'^
Mata itsunivd,
Sarani, A^OTZO
J^*
^ _^ "~^
= ^,
- _
,
partly,
^^
case.
To-kaku
-
76.
firstly.
>
,
secondly.
on the one hand.
Afatd,
^5
a^80
81.
'
'^ = r, on the other hand. Itdtiuvd maJtoto, mdfa
half.
Nakabdva
.
.
.
,
falsehood.
ndkabdva
[$=
.
.
.
,
82,
partly
.
.
.
,
partly
.
.
.
ijt^ _h^. =
,
further, farther. besides; moreover.
Our adverbs of place and space, such
are generally expressed in Japanese
when they
however, in any
_, again, anew. Kasanete, again.
fokdm, 3jLy
-Sowo ti,yeni,
56.
tfj\ |^ = />,
^p * ^,
case. 74.
should happen in one and the same way.
on one hand truth, on the other
itsunivd itsuvdri,
Ndkabdva,.
%
any
Ndn^dake.
to
synonym
possible,
in
unexpectedly, by chance.
^p ^
,
n**
=
suddenly, at once.
\ ,
Dai-itsi ni vd
if
if possible it
^% ^^
Tama-tama,
get**, at least
at least.
,
To-mo kdku-mo, h'Efc^'E, To-mo kau-mo, Also
lea
case.
any
,
tore wo tirdnu,
70
t ^ h ^, at
J^^^t?,
Jj^*
Rare rura
this.
Sa-naku-tomo
Ndru-dake,
sura kari-kovo
single, alone.
Suku-ndku-tomo, three months.
Kudki
g.:
kuvase tamavu, even the qneen has silkworms fed.
is
86. as of, by, for, in, after,
by connectives expressive of
on
relation, whiih,
are accompanied with another definition, have the latter before
(see Introduction p. 44,
15, B. 1.);
e.
g.:
etc.
them
yt or he, = wards; A'ofro-y*, hither-
wards; yori, = of, out; Kotsira yori, from here. Since compounds with ad verbs of
have been already treated at pages 81, 82, 83, place, belonging to this group,
we
confine ourselves here to a mere citation.
Dokoni, where? Dokoye, whither? Dokoyori, whence? Doltonimo, wherever. 87. it
178
CHAPTER
Idzukunzo, Dotsira, where?
Astikoni, somewhere.
Yosoye, to elsewhere.
Yosoni, elsewhere. Ta-so,
'ftlJ,*
-
Yoso kara, from elsewhere.
jtk^n elsewhere.
92.
come under
Besides these, for the definition of place and space,
Amdneku,
^
Tsikdku,
J^lS ?> near
Tooku,
?, everywhere. Siyo-siyo, pron, so-so, j||
li,^.
^,^7,
Is-soni,
3>
88.
Atsira, anywhere.
Sono tokdroni, there.
tokdroni, here.
Ta-siy6, pron.
56, 57.
Kokoni, Kotsira, here.
Kdsikdni, there.
Kono
ADVERBS.
V.
far;
^
^
\i
notice:
everywhere.
-
Yen-fooni
*||,v
>!?='
^ar>
^5.
Jj/fn'^ at or to one and the same place.
Is-soni yuku, to
go with, to accompany.
Nakani, or Tsiu, Utsfni,
Urdni,
=
pfcj
_t-,
in the midst, amidst, amongst.
within.
,
g^X =
Mayenij Sakmi, Uydni,
pjj_,
before.
5
above.
Migini,
Mavdrini,
^3^
Itsu-ka,
-jof
$
H\5p
Q
%
ij
=
,
to the left.
Ai-tai,
^j"^
;j|J
opposite.
>
whenever, ever.
^^, now.
105.
Itsu
Imani,
month? See
p.
108.
161.
Itsudemo, whenever, always, ever;
made mo, always.
~^ =.
107.
when? how long?
[zo, an emphatic suffix.]
*, what day of the
with a negative verb, never. (imd)
ffiddrini, ~fa
to the question:
when?
*i
Itsumo, ^JX^^ ^^ ffl
Imd
100.
,
time, y
'fnf^
beneath.
Nana-meni, ^j*t ^ = aslant. ^| f = across. X^A*ii=, vulgar. Suzi-kaini, almost opposite.
57. Adverbs of
Itsnzo,
behind.
near, at the side, beside.
against, opposite.
Yokoni, Yoko samani, ,
^g4='
Gururito, round about.
fy%^~,
Sudzi-mukdvini
,
without.
=, round, around.
>j
Guru-guru, around.
Mukdini,
~JC^ =
^Jx=>
to the right.
>|^_,
,
Usirdni, Atoni, Notsini,
Sitdni,
Sdbdni, Katani, Katawarani,
^[^ =
Fokdni, Sotoni,
97.
,
^^1
now.
110.
Imdyori,
g ^ ^^>
henceforth.
^-^^f'?
Ima-made,
hitherto, heretofore.
Ima-madeva, contracted ~imdda, in the spoken language usually Mada, hitherto,
verb,
still,
^j!|,
Lat. adhuc; in connection with negation included in the subsequent
not yet,
C,-
113.
CHAPTER
Tadd-Vma,
I-raiva,
^
^ ^"
\fy
JJv^ -^
Haydkti,
lfl
Mo-Mya Mo-hay au ,
114.
-- Madzu^
Q^,
1.
soon, very soon;
3/bo
2. early.
kairi-de gozaiimdtikd,
do you go again already?
Os6ku
,
jj$j,
^^
ff
once, at a certain time.
,
a& i
jfcj
Mtikdsi,
^^
Inisihd,
^4*1
Tsuini,
^^ =
117.
late.
,
^4r# tokini,
Tsikd-goro,
first,
since.
i
contracted JH/oo , already.
,
179
yori, beforehand.
Hayau, Hayoo,
>
57-
fa ?fc, j*st now.
gf'X^fl' Mae-kata
Maye-kata, beforehand.
^
${**
ADVERBS.
V.
^,
lately.
-- TAkd-d#kd-ni , shortly,
speedily.
"^f, of old, formerly, of yore. Mttkdri yon', of yore.
^^,
of old time, formerly.
a* *ne en<^'
finally,
at last;
ever;
with a negative verb,
never.
^|^t)=5
Sikirini,
i&*
Otte,
Ottskt,
Zikini,
124.
ffi)^> afterwards, consequently; late, henceforth,
Hr -? -
^o ^|J ~Jt
\ji^ =
Suguni,
every moment, without ceasing.
forthwith, immediately, directly,
,
= tono
not*i.
= ntgum, at-no naL
directly, straight.
,
directly, forthwith.
]SJ=,
Sibardku, ^jljj^??, in short, shortly, quickly.
Yau-yaku, Yoo-yaku; JDfJv?' ^J degrees. Tatsi-matsi,
Yagate,
^f?
Ftodtik*,
#>
e
iP^ 8$^=, y(+*/7,
at once
directly; suddenly.
suddenly.
lp|J>ffii^
Soku-zini,
Sai-zen,
JJL|
directly.
Hisd-bitd, long ago.
long.
now
*
ft? "|0v
j 118
/SwWi Ao, long
ago.
-
Kore-kara, hereafter, thereupon. jjfe-^o,
_
in connection witli a sub0equent negation, |ttj^, henceforth,
no more. SfoWra,
^t?'= o
B'
Ktuni,.
^C^=,
quickly, hastily.
Tslyoto,
*
TWtto (^3^
3 t-* *, just hear!
Sono
toki,
?
already.
b),
vulgo TUito, "$.$
Tsidito
B$,
g
h ,
matfi nasare, wait a
then, at that time.
once, for a
moment
moment! 141.
CHAPTER
180
Sono
Notsi-kodo,
^|f
Kono
&
i-go,
^^
Kono-goro, ./Tcwo
^*'
/ JSl
142.
by and by.
H^
Y
57.
thereafter.
lj/ ^|4'
notsi,
ADVERBS.
V.
Notsi-notsi, later.
after this.
there, then.
a
145.
Ao^o, J^J / JJSL^I shortly, lately.
Konoaida, Jfcj
?$% #
Sakini,
^~
{?
$
^
\&
Mo
^J
31 a
Saki-hodo,
^Q^
^ij*'
shortly.
Before,
vltf'>
preceded the present, just now. Saki-goro,
MY**'
?
the time that has immediately
s&k6si sakini, a short time ago.
148.
lately.
>
J us t
now,
150.
presently.
Definite notices of time like to-day, yesterday, to-morrow etc. are expressed
by nouns with or without a previous adjective Kon-nitsi,
^ Kon-nitsiwd;
Kesa,
^",
Sdku-zits,
this
-^^ Q
7 ,
g.
Keo, Kioo,
:
this day, to-day.
152.
morning.
Kinou, ^/7 (contr. of Sakino
|>
e.
definition,
K fi.
"^0?
),
yesterday.
*
Sdktt-gdtsu ,
|f|:
^
last
,
Sdkti-nen,
155.
last year.
,,
*
5
>
morrow.
^
?' to-morrow.
Miyoo-nitsi, $%*?
Miyoo
month.
(nitsino) 050,
Asu-made.
till
to-morrow.
Miyoo-nitsino jiru, to-morrow noon.
to-morrow morning.
Miyoo-ban,
tyj
+,
$&,i
to-morrow
evening.
Miyoo-getsu,
Miyoo-nen,
I^J
Hfj
Miyoo-go-nitsi
Akeno
Akuru
tosi,
^
^v ^^
Akuru
^*,
fi,
nex^ y ear 3
^
tosi,
tyj^n/
^v
next month. 160.
-
"
tyj%-/
u
Rai-nen,
the day after to-morrow; also Asatte,
^1^1
the year
still
^ ^1^1 next month.
Firuni,
_,
For adverbial
to
come, the next year. 165.
by day.
^f*v= definitions,
Ya-tsiu,
^^
Pp^?
to the question:
the repeating numbers cited in
tabi or
nex t year.
to-morrow.
,
Rai-g&sii,
Ya-bunni,
1.
,
f^
167.
at night.
how
often? are used:
32, p. 143: F%t6-tabi or Itsi-do, once; Futd-
Ni-do, twice; Futd-tabi mi-tabi, twice, thrice, continually,
etc.
CHAPTER 2.
Mareni, ^gf ^ =
Suku ndki
06 ki
4^1} f ^ $f
Fu-tosite,
^p
Bj
fjf
*j^j*,
Jj^^
jftmm/
^| =
M
seldom. 170.
now and
then.
from time to time, now and then.
,
sometimes.
V
Tabi-tabi,
,
{,
|jf
often. SiM-sibd, $jb%\, .^w*
m,
181
often.
Ori-6ri or yori-yori, \ R*f^
:$H
57, 58.
168.
^>3U ^^/.,
Ori-fuzi,
ADVERBS.
seldom.
,
tokiva,
tokiva,
V.
Setsn-setau, fff *
"
I
I
$ ^
V
it
often-
a^ every turn.
i>
^g,
175.
-- Ts&n6-dz*nt, generally, always. continuaUy.
OUt&ddsiku, :$y*z^*/>?, manifold, often.
Adverbs of
58.
manner,
177.
indicating the form of thought or speech, in
which the speaker represents the idea expressed in the Affirmative.
1.
H&i,
with
-f,
Soo mdsoo
Stkdto,
it
,
^I'j-,
Td&bani,
variations: hdhi, Az, vulgo hdi, /m, yea.
its
be
will
so.
180.
certainly, truly.
^s^^=>
certainly, truly.
Makdtoni, Zitsuni,
jE?=,
178.
^Hl^? contracted Soo, so, thus, considered more polite than
^r^
Sa-yoo, H4i.
predicate.
in
^Jf^=,
truth,
truly, forsooth, indeed.
JMtiMni,
indeed.
Geni, or Geni-geni,
\f
jjjjf
$$ ^7 ^|=, ^| |^
K&sttdj
rffi T'J
Ari-teini,
}
{,
evidently, doubtlessly.
surely; with subsequent negation:
by no means, not
at
all.
solidly, to the purpose.
h
Ktit6,
,
certainly.
Fit-zen, Jjfc$ ft$ ?' certainly. Fit-dziyoo, i)fr$
Ka-ndrazu,
^v^5"
-^
Itsi-dziyoo,
$%?%,
^v,
certainly, definitely.
definitely.
doubt. certainly, doubtlessly, without
= do not reason! = without Motsi-ron, Mu-ron, Ron-ndku, Roti-n$u, jfl$ jjft, contradiction; not to be contradicted.
+?
Sappari, Sappari-.
.
.
.
><
')
,
sezu, to do
Tyu-zen, Too-zen, leasaka,
in
~%ft$.
+
all
respects; with subsequent negation:
by no means.
@^ ^ J,
properly.
^, in -short.
Sasuka, Sasukani, {^-, notwithstanding.
by no means.
CHAPTER
182 2.
liye,
-f
V.
ADVERBS.
58, 59.
Negative. >
vulgo iiya, no. liya-iiya, no, no.
^c,
Remark. The negative: not, expressed in Japanese by n,
194.
as a rule, is included in the inflection of
the verbs, by which a peculiar negative conjugation arises.
Fu-sinni, Fu-d6-site, 3.
Doozo,
^7 ^
v=
7
b
*/T
|j
195.
uncertainly, doubtfully.
,
suddenly, by chance.
Optative. -jfiif
2^ ^,
f
though, than, Pray! Doozo, kikareyo, hear,
if
you please,
hear though!
197.
Negavdkuvd,
though (contracted from Negai, wish, and Ivdkuvd,
Jp ^ro
so as they say), so as one wishes. (See Shopping- Dialogues p. 11.) 4.
198.
Supposing.
Makotordsiku
Ta-bun,
probably.
,
^>% fy^,
199.
perhaps.
Tokini yottevd, Kotoni yottard, perhaps, according to circumstances. Zi-gi ni yori
^p
,
^
^
? ^^
^
rable, according to circumstances;
Utdgavurdkuva
Zon-bunn6
,
st-dai,
Zon-bunno
gatte.
59.
5*E %
#*
^
7 ^ 7
/>>
ffi-^C /
or
,
^i'-^fi
ni yotte or yottard , if time
under favorable circumstances.
201.
probably.
202.
^F^^'^i
as ^ think; also
Zon-bunni
si-dai siyo-mdtsti ari-mdsuka, are there books also?
conjunctional
adverbs, are treated in the Chapter VllI on the
Conjunctions. \
ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OF THE ADVERBS CITED. The numbers correspond with those .
sita-
Adverbs connecting propositions, such as nevertheless, however,
since they are
Ai-tai
be favo-
.
Asokdni
Asu
.
.
Asu-made Asia
.
Asuta
.
placed after the adverbs treated in
$
53
59.
CHAPTER Fkdsttot
.
.
134.
V.
ADVERBS.
59.
183
184 Os 6u, Os6o
CHAPTER
.
5.
V.
ADVERBS.
59.
VX
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. (POSTPOSITIONS.)
Our
60.
prepositions which
show the relation,
in
which the chief idea
of a sentence stands to other objects or ideas, are superseded in Japanese bj
We
postpositions.
Chief
call
these words are the inflections (see Chapter I, p. 61), ris:
among
-^, ve, he, or =
ni,
,
x, ye,
= with
ni;
,
= 7" 5
>;
,
,
61. 1.
T,
nite
e,
= wards,
p.
yori;
7"
|
,
de (pron. nde)
#2,
j J
70). p.
71).
All other relations are expressed either by:
nouns which,
of a mountain;
te,
,
Local, Modal and Instrumental (see pp. 68,
kara, = out of, from. Ablative (see
as such,
definition, as genitive, before
2.
Dative and Tenninative (see p. 68).
70).
te,
;
to.
relation to, in, to (see p. 68).
K, to, = to (see
-
them words expressive of relation.
Yama
tiydni,
verbs, which being,
and have the further attributive
are declinable
them, as
Yama
Uy4 or
Yamano
9y4, the topmost
on the top of a mountain; or
either in their radical form, or in the
gerund in *,
in proportion as they "govern the accusative, the modal, or the dative have
their object with the inflectional termination
7
,
iw>,
or
=, m,
or
^, w,
before
186
CHAPTER
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
VI.
them, indifferently, whether
61, 62.
noun -substantive
this object is a
verb used
or a
substantively.
used as expressive of relation, are:
Nouns,
62.
Uv6, uye, _t^. 8
1.
j:>
to a place).
above, upon (with reference
1)
Tsukdno uv6ni kiwo uyuru, to plant a tree upon the grave. a tree upon the
ki,
Kono
one.
still
= more
I can
- what
tiydwa deki-masdnii,
not give for
1
it
above which there
fttotsu,
above that, does not happen,
is
Sono uyewa nai (or ari-masdnti)
).
there
,
is
).
upon, after
(with reference to time).
Gin-mi (or Taddsi) no
tivd
fattowo motte bassu (8^-^
2
"
f^f*
( or
"
Y
'
)
j^H" 3
? J^i^T ittf?*)' upon inquiry punish according to law ). ziyau nou-saino uvdvd ($j^/ \~ t ^ 7fS$J ^^^/ _t^->0' upon payment
$f3
is
2
nothing above that 2)
Aru uydni mata
grave.
Tsukdno uveno
)$<,
K ^. Un-
^,*
*/
duty
Sina-monowo
4 ).
uke-totta
(dai-kinwo)
ftydde
Chinese compounds with
upon the throne.
San nen 2.
J^t^
_t ^
uP ori
clouds. --
J^ ^ JlS''
upwards, prior to a time, = sore yori mave.
down! down! = kneel!
springing up from beneath. divisions of a foot
am
less
Sdkuno
Sitayori waki-idzuru midzu, water
sitd,
what
is
under a foot measure, the
Wat&kusiva andtayori sitdde
e ).
gtizdru,
^v ~T** ^^
~T*^
~f**o^
the foot of a mountain.
U-ke, what
~f^^ ^
Jj[
under
is
am
beneath
under the heavens, under
(in) the earth.
* = /Sono ato ~JC ,
nen i-ka, three years since.
1) Shopping-bialogties
3) Treaty
I
^*
Ten-ka,
J&^
the firmament, the earth.
f.
=
thou you.
Chinese compounds with
,
^^ JlX'
~f^^, beneath, under, below.
Sitd~ni sitd-ni,
San-ke
upon.
i-ziyau, prior to three years ago.
Sitfc,
you, I
?
).
ziyqu, zoo,
upon mountains.
v _tx
ill
having
5
received the goods I shall pay (the price)
L i* r v
after
age-masoo,
of the
,
2) Ibid. p. 29.
p. 38.
1858. Art. V.
al.
5) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 13.
2.
4) Ibid. III. 6.
6) Ibid. p. 29.
,
|_Lj
after , since.
vl^^i San
CHAPTER 3.
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
VI.
Mave, Maye, vulgo Mai, lHfX.2
(of
ma, eye, and w,
side, direction),
local or temporary.
before,
Matsu-maye,
-
before the pine-trees.
Yei-ziwo mtnJno martni takavete
you su, she holds the suckling to the breast and suckles a year previous
m,
187
62.
Go
out.
-
')
im-
Itm-ka mat urst
it.
Kaviko idzuru mayeni, before the silkworm comes - from the fifth i. e. before the fifth
-
nen yori mave,
year forward,
year.
Chinese compounds with
v|0v previous 4.
before the front
Kono
to.
^gf
Notsi,
j^"i>
,
zen, before.
*
of.
|f*;, before the door.
P*|
J#
f
|frf.
fi-giri aruiva tono i-zen nite mo, at this date or even earlier
back, whence mUti,
(from no,
hind, after, with a
retreat,
and ft,
which
definition of time, refers to a time
is
*).
place), be-
behind, with
reference to the present, future,
Kaze
okiru notsi, after the rising of the wind.
the wind has blown.
no
Sono
minatowo
notsi yori fttdtsu
a harbour shall be opened
3 ).
-
Omote,
6.
TJra,
^,
^Qf
1||!
yori oyoto ^iyu/atn ha jstsi
of JiraktL bdgi, after the lapse
^
-
,j-
5.
Ima
notsi, thereafter.
^
}%
,
Y
fuL-ite noirf, after
Kaxega
fa *",
18 months from now
from now for the future.
the face, the countenance, the fore-side, before.
the internal, the inside of a garment; the reverse of a
>ji)J!.
coin; the opposite. side of
Iy6no urd, the inner
Ur&m
a house.
won no trd
nan', disgust
is
the reverse of inclination. 7.
TJsiro,
Yamawo
after.
^2x>
kavawo omotenitu, (the
usironisi,
= ground, a river for fore-ground,
it
8.
Saki,
Sakino
^\
tosi,
lU
,
Sakim,
yori
five years. o, only since the last
first!
after you!
9.
for back-
rirejr
before
called uriro.
beforehand, past
-earlier, before.
Go nm baUri
soii/
J^jl* jfcj,
yon beforel
Ato, gltT- t ft}, footstep; behind.
Fttono atoni
1)
is
point, with reference to time,
a former year.
moan tains
has mountains behind and a
Also the inside of a garment, as reverse,
it.
Tillage) has
tsuite
.L Treaty Art. X.
I.
one. yuku, go behind any
8)
XI-
'
Amo
)
ato afterwards.
*
"-
told
CHAPTER
188 10. TTtsi,
pj|
lydno utsini
^
'*
^
^ =)
j^J
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
VI.
within.
ffl.
be within the house.
arti, to
within the ground
,
from out both empires
tttsiyori,
within what
,
2
).
Kiyo-riu-bano Utsini
--
San
within a space of three years. three
fairu, to go in by the window.
tttsive
Yumtno
not
taels will I
).
sell
ittsi
nitsi utside
deki-masu
,
de avu, to meet
San-nenno
utsini,
within
may happen
it
Hiydkn me utside wa ure-masdnu, within (under) ten
3
time
days'
w^
^j| 3
Riyoo k6ku no
).
utsini, as long as it is winter.
Fuyuno
(
Utsiyori fokdwo ukdgavu, to spy from
Tekino utsive seme-iru, to press into the enemy. in the dream.
J
where one has residence
Madono
without.
is
62.
it
Kono
4 ).
the two signs each (whichever
it
ni zi no ntsi idzure naritomo motsiyu
be)
Kuvu
be used.
may
be"si
Utsini , while
,
one
of is
Sina-monowo uke-tordnu utsiwa, dai-kinwa agerare-masdnu, = within
eating.
the not receiving of the goods (as long as I have not received the goods), no
payment
made
will be
5
Men-kiyo nakdrisiga
).
ntsi nite, as
long as there was
no permission.
Much (
'/$
? ft
in use also, are Chinese compounds with j^j iF)
>
wna*
i8
within the seas
,
,
;JT
dai or nai: Kai-dai
K6ku-dai
the continent.
(
|f|
f ft
within the borders of a country. -- K6kft-daino dai-itsino gakH-stya, the
Kono deu
scholar of the empire. this article shall
("0$^ ft
-f)
be made
^e
i 1111108 ^?
over the interior of Japan
(deo) va
Nippon
known throughout
Ka-nai
).
the Japanese empire
Nippon no bu-naiwo
interior. 7
kokti-daive furd-watdsu
(^*
ft
),
6
?^) first
be"si,
Bu-nai
).
riyokqu-su, to travel
what
is
within the house,
the family.
Foka, Hoka, ^f[*, besides; except, without.
11.
Kono fokd
north coast a harbour shall be opened except to the government
except
wry
without.
minatowo
hokft-kdku kisini 6ttd fitotsu
may
castles (prostitutes).
firakft, be"si,
besides
on the
Ydku-siyono fokdve uru-bekardzif,,
).
not be sold
9 ).
Kei-sdno fokd onna\
women
To wo fokdyori todzuru, to shut a door from
Dai-ku sono fokd s6ku-nin wa kane-zdkHwd motsii-masu, carpenters
and other workmen use the
iron-foot.
mastt, there are piece-goods,
and raw materials and
1) Treaty. Art.
VIII.
al.
4) Ibid. p. 4.
7) Ibid. Art. I.
1.
2) Ibid.
Tan-mono
X,
5) Ibid. p.
d. 3
,
5.
I.
13.
8) Ibid. II. 2
to
ara-mono sono foka
ari-
so forth.
3) Shopping-Dialogues,
p.
6) Treaty. Art. II.
17.
9) Ibid.
IL
18.
al.
9.
CHAPTER
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OP RELATION.
VI.
Chinese compounds with
#[,
gwai, outside, without, out of:
P
^
without the gate. [%' Mon-gwai, mouth, out of the mouth of a river or harbor.
PI
12.
Soto,
189
62.
[,
Koo-guai, out of the
originally the back door, at present generally:
#[^,
Sot6-mo for Soto-omo, the back- or winter-side of a mountain. without the
without
Sato no Mrfoiti,
village.
13. Miikavi,
Mukai,
fnj
also
|, |, vulgo
Mukoo
Muka.u,
as substantive,
t
the opposite quarter, the direction opposite anything.
Karega stimi-kava waga-iydno mttkaini dru,
Mukduno
his dwelling is opposite
my house.
fttdwo watdsft, to put people over to the opposite side (of a
kisive
river).
on 7
Avida, Aida,
14.
pjj
7
e
the interval, space between things,
,
3
between;
space between two points of time, while.
Aulano fima, pause, Sono
tween. the
leisure,
Yamano
meanwhile.
cttda,
Kono
opportunity for anything.
aidani mid;6
appearance of water between mountains
ik-ka nenno a?Wa, for the time of one year
is
a valley-brook
called
-
Tada tiyau-baiteo na*u
1
).
nomi, tou-riu-suru koto wo u-t^t, only while they carry on trade, residence (there)
alda, be-
may
'
t'rf
.
'
aiilami
they hold
2 ).
Chinese compounds with
55*
tT'
^'
aM
fn:
'
ff
.
B3 v rocks. 15.
M*'
Xv Naka,
rice-fields.
v' Nin-gen,
Pfl
51
-
B8
*
=
8row between
*
3lJ*
among men; mankind.
the middle, in the midst of, amidst; among.
*Jj J,
Tano nakano riu-sui
between
tyd, a
hut in the middle of the
ff^
(fgv |Jjt/
fo
field.
--
Kiy$*
*t*o mdkamo
^
hrtween two
n nS water 5|C?) *ta
J
mountains. -- Yo-naka, the middle of the night, midnight
ndku kera, crickets that chirp in (between, among) the grass. Chinese compounds with f|l^, Sm-tsiuni
'/S?
(^C?
^ J / $0'
of the sea. pearl-mussels.
#?=) "^
Art. IV. 1) Treaty.
*fc*
al.
the midst:
in
^^o,
beings which lire in fresh water.
2TaH.vmo mono, something
Kai-tsiuni
-
'*''".
3.
trite
^ $.,
that
in
in the
wa, a prodnetioB
aedbiwo torn, to dire into the sea and fetch np
TW-tomm,
)
in the earth.
H*.
"
-
*
CHAPTER
190 in the ground.
H?i/ Pfl^, 16.
-
Dau-tsiu,
mid-way, half-way, on the way.
/
ffi
(from
sdvit,
come near and
ba,
the neigh-
place),
next, at the side of, by.
17. Kata,
koi,
~^j\
come next
(or by) the fire!
with reference to time, as much as
near;
side,
v3f|;|i
against.
Figdsi-kata, Nisi-kata, Kita-kata, Minami-gata
,
the east-, west-, north-, south-
Yo-ake-kata, = the side, on
Kita-katano kazd, wind from the north.
side.
62.
Un-tsiu, in clouds.
Fino sobani
about,
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
ty$i
5|f)|f
Sob a, ^'];^
bourhood,
VI.
which the night goes open, katani, against the this side,
i.
e.
fall
e.
i.
about the
dawn
Sono fino yuvu-
of the day.
Sore yori kono kata, = from there to
of the evening.
since that time.
Chinese compounds:
min, people that
$E^
on
live
jj-jgvi
(at)
Kai-ben, on (near the) sea.
JA
sea.
!/>>>
>?fC?
^t^=
Kai-benno
^JlXx*' -Asiva
sni-
benni siyauzu, the reed grows on the water.
~)j
The spoken language often supersedes Kata with the Chinese P6o (H6o), * Dokoni san ide nasdruka? wither are you going? side, quarter. .
,
no hooni (or h6oye), to Mr. N's.
you
1
Sono f6o, his
).
18. Fotori, jgg, :, 1
Andtano hooni,
side, you. See p.
.
by or
to
84.
round, round about.
Ike no fotorino tsutsumi, a dike round a 19.
at or to your side,
.
Mavari, fcj^
$H)
^11
fish
pond.
circumference, round about, round.
>
Yasiki-mavarini, within the compass of dwellings.
^ ^ OH
Chinese expression.
^3 ^
^
^
=
f
^
v irai >7 ? Wt 2 X"' ^p
neither gate nor fence 20.
To,
^,
BJiL *",
Siu-i,
2 ).
indicates the express coupling of
objects; it is a declinable sufiix and, so far, a
Yebisu-to
wa-b6ku
(^^
sitd,
h
$1^ Pff*"l) -
peace has been
word expressive of identicalness
made with
flowers, birds.
Hana-to
1) Shopping-Dialoguet , p. 16.
tori wo
two or more relation,
with which? -
the barbarians.
tomoni sum, to hold with his master, to be attached to him.
=
^ ^ ^'*^
roun(i about their dwelling place people place
with, Lat. cum,
Dare-to ondzlkoto
^^
round about.
Kimi-to
Hana,
tori,
yekaku, - to paint birds with (and) flowers.
2) Treaty. Art. II.
al.
10.
CHAPTER
Hana
tori-to
Sisi-to
wo yekaku,
VI.
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION. and
to paint flowers
also birds.
62.
191
Swt, lion; Tbra,
tiger.
tordwa, as for the tiger with the lion; or also: as for the lion and the
tiger, provided the principal accent be placed
on
>
Kane-tfydkA-to ku-
tiger."
zira-ziydkuwa doo-kawari mdsuka? = as for the whalebone and the iron foot, what difference is there?
J
Atsi, there; Kotzi, here; At*i kotri-to, there and also hare.
).
... to ... to, repeated after two nouns coordinate, anwera to our
and..., as well, as... also.., Lat. et..et, que..qut.. flowers and birds. sin
kdtsu
Hana-to
both
tori-to,
.
.
.
both
Olanda kdku-wauto Dai Nippon Tai-kunto rlyau-koktno kontsindmiwo jirdkti-sen kotov>6
siyau-baino
the
h6stHte^
King of Holland
and the Tai-kun of Japan wishing
to
commerce of both countries
Nippon-to San-kan-tono attikaino koto, ne-
etc. a ).
extend the relations of friendship and
gotiations of (between) Japan and the Three states. to paint flowers as well as birds. to
and
Faravu ni Nippon
fro to shoot at the mark.
motsiiru
koto
or foreign
samadake ndsi
= there
,
in payments. -
money
here, as without that
Remark.
*)
it
-
The
Midzu dru
going
no ktca-fatwo
either Japanese
characteristic of the coupling ia necessary
does not attract notice.
ndki (see p.
a
torn',
yfkdkv,
fru, in
to gicai-kokft to
with or with oat water
presence or absence of one object near the other dru, present and
tori-to wo
no obstacle to using
is
as in the expression: a valley
If,
Hana-to
-- Yuku-to kaveru-toni matoico
valley
n.
108,
is
the
intended, then the Tartu
30), not present, are used, thus:
with water; MidzH ndki tani, a ralley without
water. 21. Tonari,
^f
(from
to, door, family,
and waraW, row), neighbourhood; next,
close to.
Ydku-siyo no
2v)9rS'
tonarini,
next
the
government house.
a place near ' nei g nbournootl
22. Si-dai,
^^H?*i
Kin-miyo
(*mJo),
-
rank, following, in proportion
to wish, in proportion as Negai-si-dai, according
it
is
to.
wished
4 ).
23. To6ri,
along. jft^, passage;
Waradano
witarli kdtko, silkworms lying along the edge of the feri toarini
straw-tray.
Fama
Shoppy-Dialog^, Art. IV. 3) Treaty.
al.
todrino
p.
a.
Si.
mrd
mina
.
.
.
,
all
)
the villages
Tmty,
rt
*) I**- IV -
tW
along
the strand.
CHAPTER
192
j|f|
my
''
^1
ilJLV'
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
VI.
dau-rino
*S^='
/
according to right.
todrini,
_, following a separate writing
t
1
todrini, after (IL)
Waga kokdroyeno
).
jffi$ /
J^|] ^f
opinion.
Tame,
24.
^^,
purpose, aim, end, on behalf
for, for the service of,
Fit6no tameni,
the destination of a thing.
a place hired for building
kataku-sen tameni, for the maintenance of this article
^^^
/
Kono fitono
for.
fv
'
to, into,
till,
Asu made,
wait?
|^
).
for,
for sale.
instead of,
a
movement
is directed;
fatsi ri ari,
till
to-morrow.
tabino rui
till
from Firato to Nagasaki
till
when (how
ge-saru, clothes, bedding,
between one and four o'clock
day (of the month)
common man 4).
even to
-
shoes, are till
four
Tok-ka madeni deki-mdsu, by the fourth
5 ).
will be ready
it
I
Ten-si yori mdtte siyo-zinni itdru made,
one comes (itdru made) to the
made
it is
must
long)
Kokondtsu han doki yori nandtsu made utsini, = within one
distributed.
o'clock,
okitewo
Uru tameni,
3
aim towards which
the
?
made sanziyu
- from the emperor himself I-fuku, ya-gu,
Tate-monono
Kono
).
barter. Kavarini, in exchange
made watdkusi mataneba naranuka?
Itsu
sake.
until, with reference to place or time, opposed to yori, from.
Firato yori Nagasaki ri.
my
kavarini, for (instead of) this man.
Made, ^TJ^ O J?
26.
2
Tameni,
of.
Waga-tameni, for
others.
su, the less is for the service of the greater.
tameni kari-uru ikkano ba-siyo,
25. Kavari,
on account
of, for the sake of,
on account of
for,
Simo kamino tameni
38
62, 63. A.
B
).
63. Verbs in the gerund, used as words expressive of relation, are
A. With a previous accusative 1.
Motte,
Jj[ _?,
,
^
,
wo
:
using, by means, with, the gerund of Motsi,
to seize,
hold, use.
The
object that
rect of an action It is
=
let
i.
seized, or taken
later to be
e.
JJijf
^^
_J||l
literally:
not the
ij<
Jvij-
poem be abandoned
6.
*
is
means
either the
object di-
of carrying
it
out.
as: i/~]
Taking the poem
III. al. 1. 1) Treaty. Art.
4) Dai Gaku,
*
with the hand,
mentioned, or the
object direct in sentences
7J|^2
kdre,
is
>
let
Siwo it
vnotte
namini tsutauru koto na-
not be abandoned to the waves!
to the waves.
2) Ibid. II. 8. 5) Shopping-Dialogues
3) Ibid. II. 6. ,
p. 17.
6) Ibid. p. 10-
CHAPTER
The
VI.
object of Motte
WOEDS EXPEESSIVF C? BZLATIOX. used as the
is
means
63. B.
193
of carrying out an action in sen-
tences as:
A
ix/pj A.^' Fit6wo motte ftt6wo worn*, Irovawo motte rui wo wakdtett, to divide the
vJ^I mankind.
to treat
mankind
as
classes according to
the Irova. 2.
Tovorite, To6rite, contracted Tootte, JS|* ^, going through or along the gerund of Tovdri, go through,
. . . ,
pass.
Monwo
to6tte,
midst of the 3.
4.
to
Mitsi-suziwo
fire.
Uutdtte
$g,
Pete,
itsi
ri bakdri
to6tU, through the
go along a way.
todtte yuktt.
Tsiitaite, vulgo Ts'tatte, the
Kai-ganwo
Fino nakawo
going through the gate.
gerund of Trftdi, go along. yukdba,
if
one goes a
along the coast.
rt
through, along, during, the gerund of Fe, Ftru, to go
away,
go along. Sono fa fuyuwd 5.
fete sibomazu, the foliage does not fade in the winter.
Noz6kite, Noz6ite,
$^7^
setting behind, excepted, except, the gerund
of Noz6k)i, u (contracted from notsini oki, to set behind). siyo kwa-feiva, tou-zenwo nozdku, yu-syut*-u
Nippon
^^ M?
^ IPI^
copper money,
t?
may
$fe$
^^
be circulated
al 1
ttj^^^t
Wri
9j^
^ 3lC*
(
Japanese money, except
J ).
B. Verbs, used as worths expressive of relation, with a previous local or dative, 1.
ni:
,
ni 6ite, in, at, strengthened local form, of 1 = Fr. en tiablissant the
. .
(^1
c=
establish,
establishing,
),
"J
erect.
When
this
sion: local
in Japan,"
is
document
is
expression:
rfr*
the
dm
<#//,
flf,
or
wSM,
to place;
used, will appear from
Oranda-an
in
Japan, = the
*); in
the expres-
be exchanged at Nagasaki," on the other hand the
tori-karjdsti-le'in*}.
governed by
oki,
>The Dutchmen staying
rendered by Nipponrd
shall
is
expressed by ni 6ite, and the translation runs:
gasakivi dlte is
The
and
(in, at)
gerund of
,
merely ni and when ni 6Ite
the following examples.
Dutchmen
m
In the
first
Kono /on-Wvo ro JVo-
case the definition of place
where?
or
caw
the definition of place, where?, because not dependent on the verb, exchange, it is,
by the addition of
1) Treaty v.
1858. Art. IV,
Mte",
al.
made an
1) IWd. VII.
4.
the Japanese text Art, XI, 3) Ibid, after
adverbial phrase. -- This remark agrees
al.
I; after the
J.
Dutch tot Art. X
,
al.
4.
13
CHAPTER
194 with
all
ment
cited.
The
the
The
derivative
also be
may
okdsitni dttevd (J3f
63.
of place, occurring in the Japanese text of the docu-
definitions
object of 6it6
WOitDS JiXrKESSITE OP RELATION.
VI.
MlJ
7
from
an action, one
t^
^11* =
5?
e.
engaged in,
Fau-s6kuw6
g.:
).
to be fixed or placed, preceded
answers to the expression: the position with relation to;
local in ni,
1
^y violating the Regulations
)
=
oki, viz dkdru,
is
by a
e. g.
:
o fill
$3 -
-?f"v
Kun-sino mononi
*$J^
"til
~^^
tion of the philosopher to the creatures: he loves is
Yorite , Yotte ,
2.
and thus
also
its
^
Korera navo
yotte,
o
>
J. v j
,
^
pq
fjf|
,
= having
siro ni yorite , teki ni
Koreni
its
point of departure
from, in consequence Compare
p.
kuddrazu those yet relying on a ,
of,
on the
71, 72.
castle
,
do not
in consequence of that, therefore.
yotte,
-
in proportion to his strength.
-
Tsi-
Tokini yotte vd, in proportion to
Ironi yotte nedanga kawari mdsu, as the colors are different there
time.
in price
difference
3.
^ i-f~A
_?
o
point of support in,
submit to the enemy.
there
!!
them,
6i.
3
of, the gerund of yori, yoru, to get out from.
ground
Mrani
3
t
rela-
ai-siie zin-sezu,
however not humane towards them. Hia Meng, Cap.
vii, *
korewo
tikdrft,
2
Negaini
).
3
yotte ),
on entreaty.
Aruni
yotte,
is
a
because
is.
TsuMte,
concern, come
Fun6
Koreni
kisini tsuktt, the ship touches the coast.
attributive
form
is
what concerns Tsuite no,
e.
Remark. To Tooteva tewa
)
also, for
g.
7^^^|f ^=
of:
-f>j"l
pression:
ask,
Ooseva
1) Treaty. Art. V. al. 4.
4) Ibid.
VII.
4.
Tooteva means:
mottomo
if
its
^^
f^V'
^u~
4 ).
use.
a,
have been
As gerund
of Tov)i, u
one ask, to the question; and the ex-
naredomo, waga-mini tooteva, kanai-gdtai, thus
2) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 34. 5)
/
concerning, quand
given, without reference to the limitation of to
or tsuite, or
which the written forms: Tbttewa and Tat-
have crept in, the meaning
(^jjJ;),
tsuki,
this.
zini tsuiteno soo-ron, dispute concerning (about) religion
5
the gerund of Tsuki,
to.
tsuiteva, concerning that,
The
^i,,!,, |^, concerning,
vulg. Tsuite,
COLLADO.
p.
57. RODRIGUEZ, p. 86.
3) Treaty. Art. VIII.
al.
1
CHAPTEB
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OP RELATION.
VI.
means: the command
indeed reasonable, but
is
195
63.
one ask me,
if
it
not
is
be carried out.
easy to
4. Itarite,
vulg. Itatte,
tions of time;
= coming
Jg|? |r>
against, towards, the gerund of
Taikunni Matte vd, does
come
it
to, respecting;
with defini-
Itdri.
what concerns the
to the Taikun,
Tfcikun.
Fdritni Matte vd, towards the spring. 5.
Tai-sXt6,
J^-^^^,
towards,
standing opposite,
the gerund of TOI-M, to
be opposite, being the further definition, opposite to which, characterized by or ve, sometimes also by
Oranda-zinve
tai-si
to.
Compare
fouwo
zinva,
who hare
also
trans-
Nippon-zinrdtai-n fouwo okasitaru Orando-
Dutchmen, who have transgressed the law, towards Japanese Mukavite, Mukaite,
6.
68.
p.
dkdseru Nippon-zinva , Japanese,
gressed the law, towards Dutchmen.
its
Makavute, Mukootte,
|S)
|T.
|HJ
1
).
* ?, against,
the gerund of Mukavi, to be pointed against something.
Fitoni mukdite (or m&kdotte) ku-ron-zuru, to contend against some one. Mtlkdrite, Mukdtte,
thing
;
e. g.
|wj
^ ne
towards both
muite",
,
to
nate.
(N't
$&% wf,
^^^7 ^, according to, complying with, the geyield, to follow.
according to, the gerund of Sltagari, to be subordi-
motsuno) atavini
^^}, according
/typ*
sides.
sitagatte
to the noble
6e,
un-ziyquwo fatimu
(of the goods) shall customs be paid
value
some-
run against the wind.
rund of SMagavi, Sttagai, to submit, to Sttagdtte,
of Mtikdrt. be turned against
gerund
$, against, the gerund of J/ut, to turn against
SItag|ute, Sltagoote,
7.
f
Kazdni m&kdtte hdsiru
Mukitt, Muite",
bau ni
*
[Sj
e.
(i.
1 ).
-
A -int
according to the
titagatte (
J("*
JJ
Y
*
yonr) pleasure.
ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OP THK WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION TREATW).
.62.
Aida - Avida
.
.
62. 14.
De =
Ato, behind.
.
.
62.
Fete, through
.
62. 14.
Fokd, without
Ben-Kata ...
62.17.
Fotori, round about 62. 18.
Dai -
62. 10.
Ge = Sltd.
Avida, between
1)
Utri.
Treaty. Art. 5. al
1, 2.
0.
Nite
.
.
.
63. A. 4.
.
62.
.
.
62:
1
1
.
2.
.
He=Ve
S) Ibid. III. 3.
62. 11. 60.
.
IMte^lttite.
4.
60. 11.
63.
E 4.
CHAPTER
196
Itdtte, to,
.
.
.
Kan-Aida. out.
Kara, Kata,
62.
.
.
Ke-Sita. to
Made,
63. B. 6.
To, to, with
Mukoo- Mukau
62.13. 63. B.6.
Mukdote, against
.
.
60.
Nai =
.
.
.
.
.
.
Oitd, in
63. B. 1.
3.
by means 63.
A.I.
62. 13.
Mnkdite = Mukdvite 63. B. 6. Miikdvi., contrary
62. 13.
Mukdvite, against
63. B. 6.
Mukdrite, against 63. B.
6.
M&kdtte = MuMriteGS. B. 6. Miikdvi
Mukavute, against
4.
62.
:
.
62.
.
.
Saki, before nand
.
5.
62. 8.
.
Tsukite,
63. B. 3. Tsntdite, along Ts'tatte
-
62.
63. B.
Sitagoote,
63. B. 7.
Siu-i,
round about
Soba, next.
.
Soto, without Tai-site,
Tamd,
on
count of
63.B.6.
Te, in, with
.
Usiro, behind.
.
62.
7.
Utsi, within
.
.
62. 10.
Uve = Uyt, up
.
62.
1.
62.
1.
Uyt, up Ve, wards, to
.
60. 60.
62. 16.
Yori, out, from
.
.
62. 12.
Yorite,
ac-
.
6.
62.1 9.
63.B.5.
.
3.
62.
;
...
62. 13.
A.
.
.
.
towards
for ,
7.
63. A. 3.
.
Tstitdite 63.
Stta, beneath.
Sitagaute,
63. B. 3.
concerning
Urd, inwards
Sitagdtte, accord, to 63. B. 7.
63. A. 2.
Tmate = TsuMe
62. 22. 2.
62.23.
.
Tovorite, through
Si-dai, following .
62. 21.
.
Todri, along
63. A. 5.
.
Touari, next
60.
Noz6kite, except .
62.20.
63. B. 3.
62.26. 3.
and
Tooteva
Noz6lte=Noz6kite 63. A.5.
2.
To, with, together,
60.
62.
,
Mukdi = Mukavi
.
60.
.
63. A. 2.
Notsi, behind, after 62.
Mave, May e, before 62.
.
....
at, in
:
62. 15.
Todtte- Tovorite
62. 25.
62. 19.
.
Ni,
Omote before
about
of, with.
62. 10.
.
Nite, in, with
round
Mavari,
.
.
A aa,inthemidstof62. 15.
.... .
Utsi
7
....
Mave
Mukau =
Mukitd, against
62.14.
62. 17.
Naka ...
Tsiu =
.
for, in-
stead of
Motte,
2.
63.
63. B. 6.
.
about
against,
Mai
.
63. B. 4.
.
next, to;
Kavari,
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.
concerning,
respecting
Ka = Stta
VI.
on the
ground of
.
Yotte-yorite. 62. 24.
Zen - Mave
60.
Ziyau - Uy6
63. B. 2.
.
.
.
.
63. B. 2.
.
.
.
.
.
62. 3. 62. 1.
OH AFTER
VII.
THE VERB. Man
begreift nichta,
domes EaUtehuag
BU
In the treatment of this chapter, the question, which presents prominently,
is,
itself
most
what are the conjugations! forms of the Japanese verb, and
what do they mean.
Included in
conjugatioiial forms of the
64.
uefct tiiriill
it
is
the answer to the question,
Western languages expressed
The Voices of the Japanese verb
how
are the
in the Japanese.
are:
Intransitive.
Transitive, Factive or Causative.
Passive, but in the form of an Active.
Negative,
since
the verbal terminations contain in themselves a negative
element, n. 65.
The Moods
the same time,
is
are:
the indefinite Root-form; the Imperative which, at
the basis of the Optative;
the indicative
doting form; the
Substantive-form (Infinitive), at once Attributive form (Participle), and a derivative Adverbial form (see declinable,
107).
-
The Root and the Substantive forms
and by declension express the mood
the Conditional etc. junctive) and
definitive of time
are
and cause (Sub-
CHAPTER
198
The Tenses
66.
j^
Gen-zai; root- tense is
is
THE VERB.
VII.
are root-tenses (Present, Preterit, Future,
a Kwa-ko; 7J^ 3J? Mi-rai), and derivative tenses. A indefinite (aorist), when the action with reference to the speaker
^^
present , past
,
i
?
or future
and
,
is
not
and
also expresses the beginning, the
as well as the repetition of
67.
matical and
distinction of
continuance and the ending,
are not noticed in the verb, whereas the
three persons
(I,
gram-
thou, he) as well as that of singular
have remained foreign to the language. (See pp. 73 and 53).
Instead of a
distinction, a
grammatical
qualifying one
by the choice of the verb, by which the speaker
ceable
,
attention to this
an action by peculiar forms.
Person and number
plural,
with reference to a given period of time
,
The Japanese verb pays
represented as perfect or imperfect. distinction,
66, 67, 68.
steps in, noti-
distinguishes his
own
being or acting from that of another person, but particularly noticeable, because
On
he adds the augmentative prefix
or
O
,
which plays so important a part in
the domain of the pronouns (see p, 75), to the verb also, as soon as the action that
expresses, proceeds from a person, to
it
he bears respect, or
is
a con-
imputed to that person. The want of a grammatical distinction of three
dition
is
persons his
whom
own
fully
made good by the manner
in which a courtly speaker qualifies
being or acting and that of another.
The way in which courtesy
expresses itself in the verbs
in an Appendix to this chapter.
of a verb) terminates either in e or
i
these
further explained
essential part or the root
(compare the Latin doce and audi). These
terminations are the verbal element proper, which
engage
is
111. p. 311.
68 The verbal root. Every verbal root (the
or declension.
,
is
subject to transformation
Whereas we, by means of the European
letters are able to dis-
elements from the verbal root and treat them separately, the
Japanese syllabic system of writing represents them as bound to the
final
con-
sonant of the verbal root.
As
the element
i
undergoing a strengthening, in certain cases becomes a or
o, whereas the element e, in the same cases remains unchanged, this leads naturally to a division of the
verbs into two conjugations: a
in e, and a deflecting one in
and an irregular one in i
i,
called
nondeflecting one
by some a regular conjugation in e
CHAPTER
There i,
is
conjugation in
e.
The verbal
verb
is
are enumerated and explained in
to open;
Ake,
99.
root-form, when
it
is
the
first
to
member of
as well as in the coordinate connection of propositions
,
has the peculiarity
not formally,
Kaki, to write; YuJd, to go.
in the indefinite
a compound verb
element
under the nondeflecting
root or the root-form answers logically, but
Infinitive.
A
nonde fleeting
their transformation are ranked
They
199
68, 69.
a group of about forty verbs derived by a
which in respect of
our
THE VERB.
VII.
which
that only the last of the propositions linked together expresses
,
the definition of time and manner, whereas in the preceding sentences the verb is
left in
The
the indefinite root form (compare p. 46).
Bui as
dictionaries of Japanese origin do not point ont the root-form.
a knowledge of
it is
necessary to being able to conjugate a verb, we, here, as
on the foreground.
in our Dictionary, place the root-form
The root-form suffixes (see
7)
is
equivalent to a substantive,
and can be preceded by a
Akeid, to the opening, to open. J.yfoniva,
it is
declinable by
means of
genitive.
Dative and Terminative; Supine.
= Akenba, = Akeba, while one opens.
Local, Modal.
Akete, by opening. Instrumental, Modal.
On
this
69.
principle forms are obtained, which answer to
The imperative mood, Ge-dzino
some of our moods.
kotoba (~fC J9I
J
fjj).
The Im-
in the accented e. perative terminates
In the nondeflecting verbs the root the deflecting the termination
i
at once imperative: Akt^ open!
is
in
changes into e: Kdki, to write; A'lAV, write!
Kuvi, to eat; Kuv4, Kuy4, eat! /m, to go away, 7w, go away! This form p.
ce strengthened by suffixing the exclamation ya, ai,
countries ro 62), for which in the eastern
YuMyo for
may
is
in use
')
AMyo
or
yo
(see
AMro, open!
or Yuktro, go! Seyo or Sero, do!
Instead of eyo the conversational language of Si-kok uses el also, thai
AHi
for na*mr, = well open! Sei for Seyo, do! Y6ku Old* tuuaret,
may
AMyo,
your arrival happen, Kei*), come!
i.
From
e.
Aft, to see,
Japanese Miso and Kikiso
1)
Wagwi
titoori,
uudcr Ro.
- -
be welcome!
(%*
A"/,
come, has Koyo, Act, in SUcot
and A'M, to hear, appear also in the old-
JL
y .
|i||
t
JL
y )
as imperatives.
CHAPTER
200
The termination
tsi
(=ti) changes into
The imperative thus obtained root (see p. 62).
verbal
The
69, 70.
?
with respect to
is
categorical
form the vocative of the
its
imperative, used only to inferiors,
avoided in polite conversation and superseded by
The
from Matsi, to watch; Utsi,
te\
watch! Ute, Uteyo, beat!
MaU, Matey o,
becomes
to beat,
f-,
THE VERB.
VII.
more elegant
is
expressions.
imperative, followed by kasi or gana, has the force of our optative.
oh that you came!
{de nasarei kasi,
70. Closing
form of the verb.
If a verb clpses the sentence in the quality of verb predicate,
verb, then the termination e or
From Ake
is
i
i.
e.
of the root form passes over to the
Aku, one opens; from Yuki, Yuku, one
The
answers to our indicative present.
historian uses
as finite
mute
goes. Logically this it
for the past also,
u.
form
which
he, in his relation, represents as an event taking place before his eyes. (Prae-
sens Historicum). In the application of
The terminations
this rule the following
ai, ei,
oi,
ii,
au,eu, iu,
ui pass into
ou, uu,
ao, eo, iu or iyu, ou, uu.
solve into
Ai becomes au,
it
suits;
Ei, eu (^.^f or
{yu (1 ^-), one says; Oi, oyu (tf
phenomena present themselves:
which in the spoken language
2-), one grows
one regrets; ^ (:.), to get. u (]>), one
13.
Compare pp. 12,
xy),
gets,-
one gets drunken; li (1
old;
lyd,
*
Kui (?1), Kuyu (? iyu
(-f
re-
i),
it
heals.
),
2.)
The
terminations:
become ku, ?.
ge,
^, and
gi,
,
become gu,
?
su,
%.
ze,
^,
zi,
^,
zu,
$
,
tsu,
?.
de,
?%
dzi,ir,
,
nu, %.
ke,
?, and
ki,
%
se,
^,
si,
^,
te,
?
,
tsi,
ne,
%
,
ni,
f
,
The terminations
TC, 2
C,
which the spoken language uses
X7
',
2??
^
ve, -^,
t,
^C, ^t
vi,
(am,
dzu,?*
t, evi,
1 ai, ei, ii, oi, ui ), pass into
vu,
ivi,
7
ovi, uvi), for
77, Z.7 17, ,
(avu, evu, ivu, ovu, uvu), in the spoken language au ($o), eu (eo), iu,
QU, uu. See pp. 12, 13.
(Kirdvu, one shuns) and 3-tf7, (Negdv% one wishes) sound in the
I)
Compare
p.
16, line 7.
CHAPTER
street
THE VERB,
VII.
201
70, 71.
language of Yedo Kira-u, Nega-u, but in the mouth of a polite person
Kirao and Negqo
The
l ).
between au and ou, for which LEON PAGES uses o and o
difference
2
),
mostly remains unnoticed in the spoken language, and both forms are then expressed by oo; fop the sake of etymology, however, a distinction of the two is
highly desirable.
To the
deflecting verbs of this class belong:
Avi, vulg. Ai, to like; /warn, to pray; Kanavi, to be it is
sufficient; Samurdvi, pron, Soordi, wait on;
^1?)' one
Sooroo, vulg. soro ("fj^o
Em, Im,
vulg.
say;
ii,
FMW, ->s,
re,
i^,
and
vulg.
t/m',
Used
,
ww
t*,
H,
9
or
3,
2.^, one
^^^t
Samurdvu, pron.
at the service of 3 ).
gets drunken.
one says.
J
dmdvw or tfmow, one
become Jw,
7*.
w,
nx.
,
wan
-f
^L^y,
Kandvu,
thinks.
bind; ywvw or yuu, one binds.
(to be),
predicate, unchanged. See 71.
?
drwdi, think;
bi,
-4n, toH and
-f
is
on,
vulg. ei, to get drunken, zz.? or
Om6vi, vulg.
6e,
waits
sufficient;
me,
J*
,
and mi,
2.
,
become mw, A.
remain, when they close the sentence as verb
96.
The substantive and attributive form. as
noun
substantive (Infinitive) and attributive (by
way
of participle) .
the nondeflecting verbs supersede their termination e with eru or urii,
and the deflecting
irii,
their
i
i
with
with u.
Ake, to open, becomes Akuru or Akeru.
Mi,
Miru.
to see,
Yuku.
Yuki, to go,
The terminations
eru, iru, oru
Akuru and Miru being equivalent
have more or
spoken language also;
guage
less
to the written language
in use,
is
78.
and in Kiusiu to
confined to the spoken lan-
4 ).
1)
From an
8)
On
be treated 4)
dru,
Akeru,
to Ake-te-oru, Mite-iru or Mite-6ru, see
The form uru of Akuru belongs the
less continuative force,
oral
communication by the native of Yedoj KITAROO.
2) See p.
13, note.
account of the important part, which Soro plays as auxiliary verb ia the epistolary style, still
From an
more oral
particularly hereafter
(
102).
communication by TSUDA SIN ITSIROO.
it
will
CHAPTER
202
As noun
THE VEEB.
VII.
71, 72.
substantive, the verb is, like every substantive declinable,
Kun-sino mitsi
To6kini yukuvd, going into the distance.
yukugb
g&tdst,
the
way
Terawd miruvi
into the distance.
mdtte
,
of a philosopher
Stkdruni
kara, after presentation. since
it
so.
is
trees
,
Ki druw6
because there are trees.
Age-masu
yotte,
= on account of
Yuku yoriva yukdnuga masi,
it
San fao y6ri miruni
the seeing; Mtrunivd, as one sees.
sugdta ondzikdto nari, on looking out from three
appears to be the same.
Kawdkitdru, the become dry,
kitdru
fa wo
te
nite
All the relations
,
ydmano
Fan6 kawakitdruwo m6mu,
leaves one rubs;
on the other hand
in;
Kawa-
it is attributive.
which in a noun are expressed by the forms of declension
be desired to characterise
or Ari-mdsu ka?
attributed to a proposition, just as
it
,
may
as subjective, objective or adverbial.
it
The substantive form with ka is
as suffix is the
form of the question
there? Ari or Ari-mdsu, there
The verbal substantive becomes attributive by
noun
(or mir&nivd)
Mini,
sides, the form of the mountain
substantive in
is
may, thus, by the same means, be
Aru ka?
to see,
Mi,
one rubs the foliage become dry,
m6mu,
being thus;
73, page 206. Remark.
Compare
- what has become dry of the
its
better not to go than to
is
Se^ to do; Suru, the doing; Surnnivd, in the doing.
gO<
a going
as
go to see a temple.
yukti, to
on account of the presence of
g.
tatrfyevd tookini
use an instance,
to
is,
e.
its
direct.
is!
mere subordination
following. Akuru-koto, the deed of opening, the opening.
-
-
to a
Yuku-mono,
the going something, that which goes.
72.
1.
Gerund.
The
inflectional termination
cates the local,
7
,
te, or 7* , de,
which in substantives indi-
modal or instrumental relation, added
to the verbal root forms
a gerund, which characterises the action expressed by this verb as a
nate
local,
Ake
te,
on going. it
came
Tewo
definition of another action succeeding
by, on or at opening, Fr. en ouvrant. Oydbi, to
come
to.
Mite, on seeing.
Kure-gatdni oydUte wagiytni
to the evening twilight, or, in short, at
agtie"
himself.
modal or instrumental
subordiit.
Yukite,
kahe'riki,
= when
evening, one returned home.
fitdwo maneTd-y6bu, raising his hand (he) winks and
calls
people to
CHAPTER
2.
VII.
THE VERB.
203
72.
Modifications introduced into the original form of the gerund by the spo-
ken language: a.
The
k and g;
polysyllabic verbs ending in the deflecting ki or gi, mostly drop the
kite
or gite becomes
Yaite
for
ite.
Yakite,
Taite
Thence:
from
Yaki,
{l|g^, to burn, trans. ,
to burn, intrans.
,
to hear.
^
,
to place.
'^
,
to like.
^
,
to
,
smell,
1%
* \
[
I"
Kaide
Kagide,
Soite
Sogite,
Toite
Togite,
\%
come
to.
CHAPTER
204
Erdnde,
JL?*?,
VII.
THE VERB.
72.
CHAPTER
But
VII.
THE VERB.
be admitted, that after dropping the weak
if it
vowel v equivalent to u
,
205
72, 73.
i,
the remaining semi/
with the preceding a or o passes into ao or oo
A
v
(o
,
o),
then the forms Aote, Naraote, Omoote, also, are only euphonic modifications of the regular forms Avtte, Nardvtte, Omdvtte
etc.
Instances of the use of the gerund.
Kasirdwd
~iddsit
miru, to stick out the head and look.
the causative form of the disused
(P&J ^^y"
7"
&J ^^^^),to
with the hand, to use anything. mottd siyu
t6 sit,
Kuddwo
to appear.
mdttd tenwd ukdgdo
observe the heavens with a tube,
e.
i.
not
M6tte, from Motsi, deflecting verb, to catch hold of
have a broad view.
to
"idi,
Idasl, to produce,
Oy6so fitdno sao-foowo dkagduvd, kasiraw6
he who pays attention to another's appearance, considers the
head as the principal;
literally:
taking the head, he makes
(it)
the chief or the
principal.
Isolated
by va the gerund becomes an adverbial phrase
va being equivalent
te
H'itdno
kimi to
and,
when an
73.
is
l
),
appositive
definition
with
^itdri
he becomes another's lord, he
if
Natte - Narite
that of) humanity.
FVbdri takdku tdndd ameni
100. III.
Examples:
ndtte va, zin ni 6ru
dwells in (his position
be,
to dbd. See
definitive of time,
to
precedes,
,
from Nari, = io
= to become. See
bu-mei-su; kwtdVirdtevd, tobi-s&gdritd
kusd-murd ndkdni trM, the lark, soaring high, goes to the skies, dances and sings; if he is tired, then he descends
gerund trom Tobi,
to soar.
by va, from Kutdbire, fly
downwards.
to
Instead of the isolated
tired.
The verbal root
Tonde,
fatigue, the gerund isolated
Tobi-sagdri, literally: fly-descend,
go in, with the
local,
where? one goes
in.
i.
e.
-
gerund Ndtte vd (by the being, or becoming) often
occurs the expression Ndtte stkdusttt, 73.
--
his grass dwelling.
= by
Kutdbirdte vd,
grow
Iri, iru,
and goes into
in the
= becoming,
Local
so, etc.
for the forming of adverbial phrases
definitive of time (Conjunctive or Subjunctive form).
The
predicate verb of subordinate adverbial sentences, which describe a time
really present, or supposed as present, in the past,
and which in our languages are
connected with the principal proposition by conjunctions such as in
as,
1)
the Japanese
Dai Gaku,
III. 3.
is
placed in the Local in ni,
when,
since,
followed by the isolating
CHAPTER
206 />
particle
(=nva,
Thus
va.
is
THE VERB.
VII.
obtained ni
-f-
va as termination
The subordinate precedes the
nfca).
73, 74.
which fuses into
/^*,
ba
principal proposition.
This termination in the nondeflecting verbs in
form, thus Akdbd, on opening, as or
,
when
and
e
i is
joined to the root
he opens; Nedz)i, iru, to twist,
Nedzibd, as one twists; Moisi, to use, Motsiibd, as one uses; Sii, to die, Siibd, as
one
dies.
In the deflecting verbs the verbal element of sound
,
and changes into
to go,
Yukdbd (vulg.
H6ssi,
^,'V,
e
by which eba
,
Yukiya) on going, as or
Tatsi (- Tati), to arise, ,
watch
,
first
undergoes a strengthening
obtained in the same
when
manner Yuki ;
,
one goes, or when one went.
Ivi, to say, Ivebd.
to long for, ffosseba.
Matsi (= Mati)
is
i
Yomi, to read, Yomebd.
Tateba.
Ari, to be, Ar&)d.
Mateba.
Nari, to be, Nardbd.
Tat6vi, serve for example, Tatdvebd, for
Ndkeri, not to have been, Ndkerebd.
instance.
Examples of the use of
this form.
Satoow6 mazebd tsya-yu adziwdi amdku ndru, = by the mixture with sugar the tea
becomes sweet of
taste.
Maz)e, uru, mix
sunavdtsi fttdwo osdmuru yu&n
w6
sirtt, if
Mlw6
in.
osdmuru yuenwd
then one knows the means to govern others. Sir)i, u, to know. toki sao-siki
w6
'1/0
su-beki tsikdra ndkerebd.
sire'bd,
one knows the means to govern oneself,
waqa-mi w6
urite sao-reiw6
Titsi si-seru
itondmu. at the
time of his father's death not having the means to bury him, he (the son) sold himself and performed the funeral
rites.
Remark. In nondeflecting verbs in explained the substantive form
nation niva, vulgo niwa
is also
e
and
z,
instead of the form eba, here
of the verb with the isolated local termiused.
Motome,
to strive for, to seek;
tomuru, the seeking; Motomuruniva, in the seeking, as one seeks. See
74.
The sition
concessive adverbial phrase, which
we connect with
by means of conjunctional adverbs such
tom6
71.
The concessive form.
ever, but, or
Mo-
is
characterized in Japanese
as
the principal propo-
though, although, how-
by the strong accended form-word
m6
(= Lat. quoque) and precedes the principal proposition.
Opposed to Ama-gum6 ariteva (pron. attewa), amega furu, = while rain-clouds are present, rain falls,
and Ama-gumo ar6ba, amega furu, = as rain-clouds are
CHAPTER
it
present,
rains, is:
sence of rain-clouds it
Ama-gumo it
V1T.
THE VERB.
207
74.
arite-m.6, (dttemd), furdzu,
does not rain, that
is:
although
- also in the pre-
there are rain-clouds,
does not rain.
Consequently the following forms are opposite to each other.
The verb
as substantive.
Akurutomo, the
or
Akurumo,
act of opening.
Akuruvb, the
act of
opening being granted. Tatsuruvih, the act of erecting.
Tatsurumo,
TatsurutoTao ,
or
though
erecting.
Miruv&, the
Mirumo,
seeing.
or JftVMtomo, also (or
even)
the seeing.
Yukumo,
Yukuvb, the going.
or
Yukutomo, also
(or
even)
the going.
Akurunivb, on opening.
Akuruni'mo, even on opening.
Tatsurunivk, on erecting.
Tatsurunimo, even on erecting.
Mirunivb, on seeing
Miruni'm.o, even on seeing.
Yukunivb, on going.
Yukunimo, even
in going.
Gerund. Akdtdvb, on opening, as one opens.
Akdtdmo, though opening, or even
if
one opens. Tattevb, by erecting, as one erects.
Tattemo, though erecting.
Mitevb, on seeing.
Mite mo, even
Yukitevb, (pron.
Yukite (ym'te)-mo, though going.
Yuitivd), by going.
Time-defining Akebb, contracted from Ake-ni-va,
as
Tate'tob, contracted
Yuk^& one
is
,
one
local.
^l^domo,
contracted from Ake-ni-tomO)
Tatedomo, contracted from Tate-ni-tomo,
Yukddomo
,
contract,
is
erecting?
from Yuke-ni-tomo,
Yukendomo, though one goes.
going.
is
sees.
Tatendomo, though one
erecting.
Tatsurel>&, contract, as
from Tate-ni-va, as
contracted from Yukd-ni-va, as
is
one
Akendomo, though one opens.
one opens.
one
if
from Tatsure-ni-va,
erecting.
Tatsure domo , contracted from Tatsureni-tomo, though one
is
erecting.
CHAPTER
208
From
THE VERB.
this analysis it is evident
to write vd is
VII.
and tomo, and
why
M
at another
a fusion of n 4- v, so the impure
d
it
necessary at one time to say and
is
b in la
and domo. Just as the impure
domo
in
74, 75.
a fusion of n
is
+
The Japanese
t.
themselves seem not to appreciate this distinction and forget to characterize
and
h
(to)
by adding the Nigdri-mark
iedom6
Instead of domo,
form of conjugation of
sive
fore
(-f
Im
^
K
or Jt
as
) -(
<>
K
(-f
though
how
calls
definition,
to 2 ); e.g. called
Kuni
or
ari, sono
what
nawo Nipp6n
Sorewa nanito
Nippon.
one
iu ka,
/*,
a:
means: though one says,
by the
is
l
K*e)
ba, and is
also used. This is the conces-
to say, to be called,
*
it
be called. This verb
wu, there
how
is
a kingdom,
is
to ivu, it is said
Yuku
it is
thus means: though
tidfond
t6
that one opens,
it
is
preceded
name
its
Akuru
Akuru
said that people go.
is
suffix is
If the apposition
that called?
a verb, then this stands in the substantive- or in the root-form:
Yuku
and there-
something, as opposition with the to
(va)
K, do.
"J
),
/-
to
to ivu,
fadomd,
said that one opens, or that one is
going, expressions which answer to: although one opens, or might open, although
one
is
Ari
going. 75.
to
Vedomo, even granting the existence, although there
The form of the Future
(^^
is.
jfc%, Mi-rai).
There are different expressions, that signify that an action or state which is
in perspective,
still
is
objective to the willing, being able, having permission
or being obliged. Here the derivative form, which expresses the effort, the incli-
nation or tendency to realize what the verb points out, comes
first
As
is
at the
it
happened or sake
we
same time includes the uncertainty, will
retain this
With regard I.
happen,
it
if
me
happening, has
has been called Futurum dubium. For convenience'
name, even were that of modus dubitativus better
to the
fitted.
form we distinguish the simple and the periphrastic future.
The simple future of J"awafo-language has
nations
anything
under notice.
for characteristic the termi-
and mu, which in nondeflecting verbs in
added to the root, in the deflecting in
i,
e
or
are immediately
i
however, only after this
i
by a strength-
ening of sound has been changed into a (or sometimes for vocal harmony into
The termination mu, according
to the oldest writing ^p:
nounced m, has been in
times superseded by
language by
1) See p. 9.
3?
,
u.
later
In measure
2) See p. 70. V,
f
this
3)
As
A
-or
J^.
A3 )
o).
and pro-
f, n, and in the spoken
(n) counts as a syllable.
in the chronicle Nippon-ki
and in the oldest poems.
CHA.PTBE VII. THE VERB.
209
75.
Ake, to open, future AJcemU (7;Jr), Aken (7 fr* ), in the spoken language 1
Akeu
(
Mi
7
>r 2? )
to see
,
passing to dked.
,
MimU
future
,
L)
( 2.
,
.A/w
( 2.
^)
,
in the spoken language Miu.
Yuki, to go, future Yukamti (3-J? A), Yukon, in the spoken language Yukau (
3.
#
*? )
,
passing to Yukqo
,
Fw&oo
vulg.
also.
Remark. The Japanese writing of the forms of the spoken language to express the pronunciation of
others
7^"^, 2-^^, and even
7^^, 2-#$s some write T^"^ 3.%?, and 7^3^, 2.^^; and instead of 7 > >> (aroo,
from ^1H, to be), 73-^, 7tr^, 7tr^7, and even Q
shall be,
w, to do; future
expressed by ^r
varies:
SamU, San,
in the spoken language
written.
is
00, at
Yedo
soo,
.
Mas)i, u, to be present; future Masamu, Masan, in the spoken language
Afatsi,
Yedo Masoo (Eng. Mashoo).
at
Masqo, Masoo,
wait; future Matamti, Matan, in the spoken language Matqu,
*~?^r,
Matao, Matoo. Avi, pron. Ji, to
fit;
future Avamii,
Avan, in the spoken language Avgu,
Avoo, Awoo. Negdvi, pron. Negdi, to wish; future Negavamu^ Negavan, in the spoken
language Negavqu, Negavqo, or Negawoo.
S&mi, to
X"??', Sumao, Ni, to be
for
up; future Sftmdmft, Sumdn, in the spoken language
sit
nestle,
which the written form 100. I); future Namii,
(see
Ari, to be (see
X
^^
also appears.
Nan.
96); future Ardmtf,, Aran, in the spoken language Arau,
Arao, Aroo.
The termination
mu
,
as characteristic of the
Future
,
is
according to
my
idea
the regular indicative closing form and the substantive form of a verb mi, that expresses a
striving
to be or to
do something. Ardmu, =Aran, the derivative
of Ari, consequently indicates a striving after existence and what
dubious future, tom)e, M, uru
(
is
jj^ *
as the regularly
according to i-),
its
form, a
present.
is
called the
The nondeflecting verb Mo-
generally considered as equivalent to
to acquire,"
but which,
(^|), = to hold, really has nature of Me, mu in its full power.
formed derivation from Mots)i, u
the meaning of strive to hold, shows the
In the same way: Akari, red
light,
glow; lighten, to glow; Akaram)i, u, strive
to glow, in particular, the gradually
becoming
red and ripe of fruit. 14
CHAPTER
210 In
my
opinion, there
THE VERBS.
VII.
forms mi, here, and the verbal derivative
mu, which from a number of
intransitive verb, root-words cited on p. 107 forms a deflecting
the becoming such
word
as the root
,
mu
between the form me,
also a connection
is
75.
and
indicates
treated
adjective
that expresses
equivalent to a Latin in-
is
choative verb in -sco, for instance:
Siro, white;
Sirdmi, albescere to grow white.
Kuro, black;
Kurdmi, nigrescere,
Kura, dark;
Kurdmi,
Taka, high;
Takdmi, to grow high.
Fira,
Firdmi, to grow
sitive
to
flat.
Kata, hard;
Katdmi, to grow hard.
Nuku, warm;
Nukumi,
to
grow warm.
Maro, round;
Mar6mi,
to
grow round.
Ao, green;
A6mi,
grow green. grow hollow.
grow
Kubo, hollow;
Kub6mi,
to
Naga, long;
Nagdmi,
to
Ydsti, easy, quiet;
Ydsumi, to grow easy or Sigdmi, to
tight;
Arata, new;
Ara, wild;
Ardmi,
verbs
in the place of
cited
quiet.
tight.
grow new.
grow
wild.
here become transitive or properly factive: Sirom)e, u, uru, ,
=
whence Yas&me-zi
mo, which causes a is
to
long.
mi nondeflecting me, mu, muru, then the intran-
to whiten ;
blacken; Nukum)e, u, uru, to
and me
grow
Aratdmi; to
we put
We
to
black.
grow dark.
to
Firdmi, to grow broad.
make grow white
rest,
grow
Firoj roomy, broad;
Sige,
If
flat,
to
Kur6m)e
warm,
u
,
uru
to incubate;
($C* ^^)> =
rest,
,
rest- word,
but does not rest,
itself.
,
to
make grow black
,
to
Ydsum)e, u, uru, to make
an expletive
The
particle, like
difference
between mi
frequently overlooked by the Japanese themselves.
return to the Future.
According to Japanese philologers the termination
en or an of the Future signifying uncertainty
with a previous interrogative, mination me
is
used,
when
i.
e.
,
appears particularly in connection
in interrogative sentences, whereas the ter-
the sentence has a definite subject, which
is
fre-
quently strengthened by a successive Koso (= this here); a difference I have not
found actually confirmed.
CHAPTER
THE VERBS.
VII.
Examples of the use of the forms
> y?
*
cited.
y
Yezova fumiki kotoba
^
the
W
It
name
may
ni miyetarazu.
is
Yemisino ten-go naran,
Yezo does not appeal appear in the
of
old language.
be a corruption of Yemisi.
Tamino nn-k6ku yori ohokar&n there
211
75.
koto wo
nozdmu
no prospect that the population
(here) will
,
more numerous than that of neighbouring on.... Nasi, there
iii
V
s >^*|x ='i* x
1
tfil
^
y
is
states. to
hope
not.
^
/5owo jisdsiu sitd tagav&n koto wo osJrw 2 ),
^
(t ne
he feared that
it
might degenerate in time.
doctrine)
Ivaku: Kau-rai tsuini forobimu
become
form of Ohoki or Ooki, much. Noz6rn)i,u,
contin.
Ohokdr}i,u,
koto nasi 1 ),
sirusi
ka
3
behold, he said, a sign that Corea
),
will at last perish. Forobi, nondeflecting verb, to perish. See
99. 24.
Imd sardnto dmovu, k*)Ima sarauto Niva-toriva suman court-bird (the cock)
Nisiyd wataran
to
A
Niva-toriga sumau
wataravu)
to
su
Idzurdno tokdro ni kd tewo kudasan
my
hands? =
handle?
A
i.
K
e.
A Dokowo where
Nanika aran zo? what
may
kotoga arou zo?
($$ ('foj*
*?
Meny-tsze,
The
sistn
A
I.
^^), ~~J\
|5^
-^
; w
.
the
^J j^^))
|X rjr
J
go westwards.
-^*), where shall I lay
= which part
shall I
whither shall I flee? (Zo, an emphatic
(^
^$)i what may there be? =
down
shall I take for
I
shall, or
I. 3.
indicates that the
may
I offer
begin?
A Do
suffix).
A Nanno si-nikui kotoga arau do? = A Nanino nardnu to ivu
that you blame?
do this?
meni kake-masoo ka? what
Book
(^|
I shall
y\ Dorekara fazimeo zo? where
= what should there be,
wo age-masoo ka?
I)
^
tekakdrini siyau-(so-)zo?
Ani korewo nasanyat what, should
4)
pt|
there be, that you do not gladly
A Naniwo
to surtt
&
shall I seize it? S)i, M, to do; future *Y, /o.
v% > ^ &t
tsutsiye nigeyou zo?
now I think of going.
about to go to his roost. Sumav^i, w, to roost.
is
(A
SM,
om6i-mdsu,
shall (or
may)
I
show you?
Sake
you something to drink?
2) Tschuny-yung.
words and expressions, to which
3) Nippon-ki. it is
attached, belong to the spoken language.
CHAPTER
212
A
Kitano Accra kuro-gumoga
at
)
,
If the
Yedo now.
(last night),
then the
rained
Yedo
at
THE VEBB.
75.
orimas' kdra,
ats' matte
as in the north black clouds are
!
ftte ori-masoo
VII.
heaped up
of time 1md (now)
definition
Yedonohoowd tmd amega
is
will
it
,
superseded by sdkuya
after sentence takes the signification of:
A
last night.
Sdku-ban
ittaroo,
be raining
will
it
have
he will have gone yes-
terday evening.
The certain Future
of the written language.
The adverb Masdni, - indeed, certainly a future followed by to su, will certainly
happen or
is
=L
"7^-t-
~^w 4*
tjtf
^
^ irW = tpw j> V| ^ ? /^ -X* ^ |
JJl
^
7C^
^
_/tf^
fe g
S^
^ ^^
-s^^
^ -
s\ |^
*P^
t
*
Masdni sardn
(103).
"^
motte b6ku-tdku to sen t6 su
2
masdni Fuu-siwo
)
,
it is
empire has been deprived of the way of truth and ^
righteousness ; but
Heaven
will certainly use the
a nation or a family
itself?
indeed on
is
the
by grafting
7> ^,
7>
aran or
^
,
language
way
)
,
to raise it.
arame
formed
is
(= shall be) on the substantive
form of a verb, by which aran by aphaeresis becomes ran. E.
Mi, Miru,
the seeing will be, videns
to see; Miru-ran,
Kik)i, M, to hear; Kiku-ran,
= the hearing
As
the Japanese find these words
^t>Rv particle
line 8,
B3J
K^
standing alone.
r
H?
RODEIGUEZ
also,
"?
on
p.
S^'
BROWN,
Colloq. Jap. XII.
III. 24. See J.
3) Tschung-yung ,
XXIV.
LEQOE, Chinese
old
tliev
66 line 27,
uran as particles of the future.
Lun yu
erit.
will be.
expressed in the
idv
g.:
will be.
= the saying
Iv)i, u, or li, lu, to say; lu-ran,
1) B.
3
tei-siyou-ari
then there are certainly signs that give notice of
A. The periphrastic Future of the written
2)
mas-
ter (CONFUCIUS) for a signal bell (for a herald).
Koku-ka masani okordnto surebd, kanardzu if
long that the
The periphrastic Future.
II.
1.
t6 su, will certainly go.
-t
V^T
t '*d& 7
>
'*
h
"tfii
*
__
"
in connection with
^),
Ten-ka no mitsi naki koto Jisdsi. Ten
Jt ^
?
t
j
the expression the meaning that something
gives
at hand.
O _"T* 7
(
classics, Vol. I. pag. 28.
rebus writing by consider raw as a cites
ran and, on
CHAPTER vn. THE VERB.
By
2.
naramu, = naran,
suffixing
.
va
.
B
.
.
will be) to the substantive
Miru-naran, Kiku-naran, lu-naran, =
form of a verb.
A
narame (=
or
213
75.
narito iveru narame
,
will see, hear, say.
people will (narame) have said (iveru) that
A
is
equal to B. 3.
In combination with negative verbs by suffixing aranan
tion of ari -H nan,
shall or
may
Kaswmi tatazumo aranan
By
4.
which the
By
= also the not
'),
s
passes into the impure
ns-z.
.
Mitaran-zu, = visurus
Mitaran-zuran = visurus
est,
,
Ni
,
84.
erit.
101) on
grafting the auxiliary verb mas)i, u, (= to dwell, reside, see
an + masi passes into
.
rising of fog will happen. See
Mi-tari, have seen; Mi-taran, I shall
the form of the Future of deflecting verbs, or
form of the negative verb.
grafting su, suru, fat. suran (= to do) on the form of the Future, by
have seen. 5.
to the substantive
be,
a euphonic modifica-
to be
,
.
.
amasi,
becomes Namasi
e.
.
.
g.
amu,
$j^
-{^
.
aw, by which
.
.
am'
-+
masi
:
* ((
.
=?,)
Nan +
contracted from
,
masi.
Ari, to exist, becomes Aramasi.
>^^
Nari, to be, becomes Naramasi (-f
r
^^
-|j^
^C^ ih^)'
Ktivd-siMri, to be fair, neat, excellent (page 120), becomes Kuvd-sikdramdsi.
becomes Siramdsl, sciturum
Siri, noscere,
Mavusi (pron. Mqosi),
becomes Maviisamasi, Moosamasi.
to mention,
becomes Ivamasi ('ZJ'^
Iv)i, u, to say,
esse.
'fjjf
^)-
Tamav)i, w, to grant, to bestow or confer on, Sak)i, u, to unclose
Hitomo naki tree of the inn,
of last year. The If
Yadono sakurava
"
"
saru tosino
definition of time: saru tost,
=
last year, also transfers
101. 2. a), it is
it
in the verb connected with
rity, seeks for the force of the
racterises it as the
1)
Mi-raino
His Mi-raino
Hiyaku-nin,
sakamasi, the plum-
N.
masi to the
will appear, that the difference of the
the Future, and in the other the root-form. Thus
errs.
Haruso
preterit.
the periphrastic Future Iva-masi with the periphrastic Present
not in masi, but that
he
"
though there was nobody, would nevertheless open in the spring
we compare
Ivi-masi (see
becomes Sakamasi.
to open,
itself,
becomes Tamavamasi.
si
si
when
it,
does not exist
JJb^i
*
is
in the one case being
the native, on old autho-
Future Ivamasi in the termination
(%* ^$3 J
two forms
e
^e
and cha-
st,
'
OT
f *^ e
Future,
s ).
73.
2) This has reference also to the Mi-raino
si,
adopted in RODRIGUEZ filemens.
p. 6<> line 8
and
line
16-22,
CHAPTER
214 In the rebus-writing form Masik)i, u, by ^J
Masi
this
v
formed
1.
by grafting
Miu-zu, visurus
est.
By masoo
2.
sum,
* ne derivative
which the Japanese philologist himHossi, = will, and ~flj*2x, Best, may, and
,
^
(59^
see
95. 2. 2)
).
zu (X), zuru, zureba, on the form of the
(zi)
Future, proper to the spoken language, zi dification of si, su,
an d
Future of the spoken language.
B. The periphrastic is
59^ ^
to
which are to be distinguished from Mazi
It
75.
expressed by
is
ll&l^ forms
the force of ffi%
self 'attributes
THE VERB.
VII.
sureba,
=
t
being the euphonic mo-
etc.
T^^X
to do.
Yukoo-zu, iturus
zu
Akeo-zu, aperiturus
est.
or aroo, the Future of masi and ari,
to the root, the second to the
est.
gerund of a verb.
=
to be, the first suffixed shall write.
Kaki-masoo, I
Kakite (or Kaite) aroo, I shall write.
Remark.
1.
Let us
now
just review the nine
by RODRIGUEZ EUm. pag. 66 Be)ki,
si,
= may,
is
lines
and
a verb. See
the Future of Ni,
Nan,
7
1.
to
particles for the
8.
101.
go away,
Nuran, the Future of Nuri. See
2.
to be in.
Taran)zu, zuru, Future zuran, from Tari. See
a fusion of
See
84.
78.
78.
82.
Si, the Mirainosi, based is
.
85.
Taran, the Future of Tari, to be continually. See
Bay a
.
84.
Tsuran, a variation of Nuran. See
- Tariken. See Ten,
Future" quoted
m
on a misunderstanding. See
p.
213.
75. II. 5.
or n, the characteristic letter of the Future, and haya,
an exclamation, which, as an expression of complaint (Nagekino kotoba), answering to our execrated
Alas," suffixed to a Future, indicates that what
(Baya negavi-sutsuru kokorono teniva nari).
laya! Alas he will become a
pitiful
is
at
Kanasiki mono
hand to
is
nara-
man!
Consequently Motome-baya, Se-baya, Mi-bay a signify, he will, alas! strive for . he will, alas! do, or see. The same may be said of Yoma-baya, from Yomi, .
,
to read;
Narawa-baya, from Naravi, to learn; Nara-baya (not Naruwa-baya) from ,
Nari, to be or to become.
Remark.
Yakazu tomo
2. "
The Future
is
used as a softened Imperative. Thus the poet says:
kusava moye-nan
setaranan, even if
it
H
be not burned
Kasuka-no va off,
N
the grass will
Tada faruno
grow
" f, ni
maka-
luxuriantly, therefore
CHAPTER only leave the
of Kasuka to
field
THE VERB.
VII.
vernal sun. Makasetari, he has
tlie
may have
Makasetaranan, he shall or
215
75, 76.
left it to,
is
used, according to the
Siwori, for the Imperative Makasetareyo. Just so in the colloquial: for
Remark express the
3.
For
so far as they point to
or
permission
it
am
and
able, can,
*jjf
liberty,
$ $f$v^
ide nasareo
the
something future, the verbs which or the
power
anything, come under notice here. They are Be)si, I
Wagun
happen, please come.
arrival
may your
ide nasarei,
left it to.
ku, I
H,
Too-sen tari,
9
it
obligation
to do
may; Ata)vi,
ought to be,
it
v#,
must be,
shall be.
Further illustration of them
104.
given in
is
THE SUPPOSITIVE FORM.
The terminations eba
76.
and aba of deflecting
or iba of nondeflecting,
verbs are the characteristics of the suppositive adverbial proposition, which, as a rule
precedes the principal proposition.
,
They
are
in
,
my
opinion
,
a fusion of
the form of the future en or in and an with the local termination ni and the isolating va.
From Aken-ni-va comes Akeba, T^'^
on being about
open or as one
to
on being about to
see;
go; from Maran-ni-va ,
Mara,
-f
War aba,
>, on being about
since Ake-ni-va
pronounced as Akenba,
open; from Min-ni-va, Miba,
5. '"*,
(Minba),
:f">'^, in the spoken language even fusing into
to be,
might
it be.
clearly noticeable is the difference
and suppositive Yukaba;
Yukeba
)?
from Yukan-ni-va, Yukaba, 2-#/^, on being about to
In the deflecting verbs, junctive
will
1
between the sub-
not so in the nondeflecting verbs,
and Aken-ni-va both fuse into Akeba. For the
definite indication
of the suppositive character the help of the adverbial Mosikuva, vulgo Mosi,
-
albeit, in case of, is called in,
Mosi
sitive proposition.
In the ordinary but for
to
style of
wo
and
it is
placed at the beginning of the suppo-
akeba, might one open the door.
speaking the form
Nara
Nareba also, thus with the signification of
used not only for Nardba
is
if it is,"
and
appears from the examples following:
A
1)
Sore nara (or Sore de wa) kai maloo, as
The
points, which characterise the impure 6a (/<) are
2) Shopping-Dialogues
,
p. 4.
it is
so (= then) I will
commonly
left
,
as it is," as
buy
it 2 ).
out by careless writers,
CHAPTElt VII. THE VERB.
216
76.
Sore ram*, firubefore noon I cannot come. Firu-mayeniwa mairi-ye masentt, Nokordzu 0-kai nasdrti, warn, then (the answer is), in the afternoon ') goni,
ondzi nedan d4 age-masoo, if you
buy
all,
Ydsui (- Yasuki) nara, tori-mdsoo, as
The future in the Local and open,
one
if
them
I will sell it
(if)
same price
for the
cheap, I will take
is
it
-
2
).
3
).
by va (Aken-ni-va, on being about
isolated
to
in the Local isolated open) mutates with the substantive form
shall
by va (Akuru-ni-va, on opening),
from the passage following, taken
as appears
from the introduction to a Japanese-Chinese Dictionary:
atJ
-tt*
:OP'
o Ab ^^ HP 7 ^ K
J* J
t
}*
A
^
"ZT7
*& Sx
3Pit
*j?* **
"T*
-rts
~T"
"ZT
HB
^
p.
JC h
f
2,
y
-Bs >}C
^E
v
i
P^
*,-'
F~it6 to iu zi 100 ractfcwienniva,
v.
giyoo-mon no sitawo miru
Fdna sei-sw6ku -^ one
^-
iu
to
^iH
ki-
besi.
wo raoitomuruniva, Fa no buno
zi
mon no
Fino buno
sita
wo miru
besi.
see^- ^or *^ e WOI> d
^
one ought to look for
-
^ ne
it
FUo (man)
,
then
in the division Fi, under
cl ass : breathing beings.
If one seeks
for the
word Fana
(flower),
one
under the
ought to look for in the division Fa, class: plants. r
That the unfused forms J.^w-m'-va and Yukan-ni-va appear in the written
and spoken language as Terminatives as well, equivalent to the Latin ad aperiendum, ad eundum, cannot surprise us, since the local termination ni used as characteristic of the Terminative. (See Remark.
When
in the
Proem
Mr.
BEOWN, who
E.
panese
were clearly
Teachers
conjunctive fication; it is
is
has adopted
but Mr.
remarkable
p.
3?.
b.
of
my
of the
it,
,
I raised the question
seeing that they
theory, at rational
p.
VII
of these
so
also
g.)
first
explained the
whether or not the Japanese
frequently
confound the two forms.
gives the following as answer to it: ,,Ja-
formations and constantly
affirm
that the
the same in sense as the conditional, and that Yukaba and Yukeba have the same signir
HOFFMANN has how many
I) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
3) Ibid
conscious
know nothing
IV.
eener Japansche Spraakkunst of 1857, p. 146, I
origin of the subjunctive and the^ suppositive form
themselves
7.
is
17.
ably and clearly demonstrated the distinction as above given. Indeed
obscure points in the structure of Japanese words have been elucidated by
2) Ibid. p. 36.
CHAPTER vn. THE VERB. one who has derived
books'" be understood. Before that time I
Japanese
provided
knowledge of Japanese from the study of books."
his
all
course with Japanese, which
217
76, 77.
I
I admit the last,
had not had the opportunity of
inter-
enjoyed afterwards, in 1862.
THE CONTINUATIVE VERBAL FORM.
The
77.
formerly
,
the continuance of
them was
of
iri,
movement and
originally,
have shown
ori, uri, as I
are continuative forms of the verbal element
l
)
forms ari,
derivative
deflecting
i (
68)
and express
,
The
or being in a condition or in an action.
under the influence of a vocal harmony,
is
still
choice
which requires that the vowels of the subordinate
syllables be
accommodated
to
that of the principal syllable.
Ari, Iri and Ori occur as substantive verbs with the signification of 1) to
bo or exist
and
#
or
i
(
^
)
and
,
wi -
seat
,
,
further in
2) dwell , stay as root.
,
(
ffi
o
^
J
)
and have
,
i
,
=
to go ,
These three verbs will subsequently be treated
,
96, 97, 98.
Examples of the derivation of continuative that the forms between
[ ]
Here
verbs.
is
to be remarked,
have not hitherto occurred to me, yet they must be
supposed as basis of the derivative forms. Akdr)i, u, shine, beam.
Aki, light.
Kdki hook
to
;
,
hook
v.
,
i.
Kak)e,
w,
hang, unclose
u,
Satyi,
to open,
v.
v.
uru,
fasten,
Kakdr)i, u, be hanging.
tr.
Sakar)i, u, be in blossom
itself,
or bloom.
i.
[Ag)i, u; rise.]
Ag)e, M, uru,
raise.
Agar)i,
be
u,
rising,
ascending. u,
[Sag)i,
droop,
hang
down.] ,
w
Sag)e,
u,
uru,
cause to
Sagar)i, u, to be drooping.
droop.
augment,
v.
i.
Masar)i, M, to be superior.
.
.
.
zi (=
n
+
si),
not to be.
.
.
.
zar)i,
u,
continually
not to be. Miz)i, w, not to
see.
Mizar)i, seeing.
1)
Prone
eener Jap. Spraakkunst, 1857. $ 37, 41.
u,
not
to
be
CHAMEfc
218
THE VERB.
VII.
77, 78.
Araz)i, u, not to exist.
not to
u,
Arazar)i,
be
existing.
Sadam)e u uru
[Sadam)i, w, to be deter-
,
[Fazirn)i, u, to begin, v.
v.
crimp.
Firom)i, u, to widen,
v.
uru,
u,
begin,
tr.
i.
Tsum)i, u, to accumulate,
Fazimar)i, u, to be beginning.
Tsidzim)e, u, uru, to crimp,
wrinkle;
u,
Tsidzim)i,
Sadamar)i, u, being deter-
mined.
Fazim)e,
i.~\
v.
tr.
Tsidzimar)i,
be
to
u,
crimped.
Firom)e, u, uru, to widen, tr.
Firomar)i, u, to be widened.
amass,
Tsum6r)i, u, to be amas-
Tsum)e, v.
intr.
Ok)i, u,
,
mine.
mined.]
v.
,
to deter-
uru,
u,
sed.
tr.
6k6r)i, u, to be rising, the
rise.
rise.
8k6r)i, u, to be
Ok)i(= Iki),u, breath; flame.
Nok)i, u, recede.
Nok)e,
u, uru, to
put back
,
to bequeath.
Nob)i, u, stretch, to be-
come longer or
make longer
,
u,
to
be
re-
maining.
Nob)e, u, uru, stretch, to
taller.
Nok6r)i
flamming.
or taller.
Nob6r)i, u, to be growing to
higher,
smoke.
ascend,
as
*
Mdtsur)i, u, to be wait-
Mdts)i, u, wait, trans.
** ing:
Ne,
sleep.
Nem)i, u, to
Nemur)i, u, to be sleep-
be sleepy. f
Thence: *
ing.
Famani
(not
JTontfwo mdtsuru,
Yamawo)
attend
nobdri, to ascend a
upon
a god,
make him
mountain. a feast. Mdtsuri (not
matsuri), the attendance, the feast. It is obvious that to this category the derivative adjectives in
also belong. See p.
113.
it
gam
10.
78. ..te ari, ..te ori, ..te I.
karu and
iri.
The continuative verbs Ari, Ori,
Iri (= exist, dwell), in connection with
preceding gerund, form a continuative verb, to which the idea of a perfectum
praesens also of opening, he
is is
attached.
seeing,
is
Akete-ari, Mite-ari,
going, = aperiens
Irn (pron. Mdtte-fru, or Matsite-6ru,
in the doing, he
is
doing.
he
is
est,
Yukite-ari, (he) is in the act videns est, iens
est.
in the waiting, Sltd-oru,
Mdtsttt-
= he
dwells
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
VII.
219
78.
In the choice of Art, Ori or In, in the case before us, the vocal harmony, or rather the easy cadence,
is
which had influence on one
noticeable,
more than another. In writings which pass If the
exclusively.
for pure Japanese te-ari is
of a Japanese scholar
assertion
1
)
is
which I
just,
doubt, the dialect of Yedo uses by preference, iru, seldom of
Miyako generally uses 6ru
6ru, to drink; Strife- 6rtt
to
,
2
dialect
found
may
not
whereas that
drii,
Tab4te-6ru, to eat; Normte- (Nomde-, Nonde-)
).
know. Besides, the
dialect of
Nagasaki has 6ru.
When
the same writer at one time uses te-dru, then again te-6ru, he seems to pay attention
the
or to
ori,
fitd,
the difference
either to
of the
ease
some one who
is
near
of signification which exists between ari and
On
to.
is
fact
Iritsthdno koto wo
kondnde 6ru fitd, some one
fond of antiquities.
Ari, Ori and Iri are inflected as deflecting verbs. See
II.
..tari, ..taru,
96, 97, 98.
the contracted form of te-ar)i, u, in connection with a
noun, whether Japanese
precedent
or Chinese, answers to our verb to be, or
exist, when, connected with a word expressing a quality, cate,
e.
Sobdni dru
is.
the other hand: Tono soba-ni 6ru fitd, some-
one who stands near to the door.
who
Kotode aru, the
cadence.
g.
he
is glad.
Forms
of inflection, the
the closing form, tarn, the substantive,
same
forms the predi-
it
as of
Ari
(
96); tari
is
well as the attributive; taran, ta-
as
ran)zu, zuru, zuran, frequently occur as forms of the future.
Examples:
Kind kimi tari,
if
tareba, sin sin
the master
master, then
^t
o
a
IIT
the ser-
*
2
Wau-siya t&ru fitd, a
who
u
is
man
a ruler.
vant a servant.
o
^
is
is
AU.
jdfo
Dai-kinwo faravu
^e
1
sets
mo dou-you
price, it shall
taru besi
be just so
3
),
also at the
(it shall
be done
in the same way).
1)
Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIROO.
2)
A
native
mousi-mdau,"
i.
of Yedo also told e.
The men
me: ',,0lokowa OOfi-masu
say ori-mosu,
women and
to
mouti mast; kodomo onna
children, Qxi-mdsu.
3) Franco- Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1868, Art. VIII,
al.
4,
wa &i.-masu
to
CHAPTER
220
sei-zin
VII.
THE VERB.
Ttikto,
?
saint, as to worthiness
The spoken language changes
Ten-si tari, as to virtue he
koto
tattdki
tari,
^
78, 79.
he
is
a
a son of heaven (emperor).
tari into
this
is
^"^
dza,
by some written
,
= JTore sai-siyo tari or (Engl. orthogr. ja, Fr. gia) Kore sai-siyo ziya (dza) nari,
;&
>?
genius. Soo ziya, nai,
inonoka,
home. Korega makotoni sen-nin ziya,
thus or not? li ziya, naika,
is it
he an active
is
my
this is
j^f,
man? Fataraku mono
is it
dziya!
he
,
this is really a
good or not? Fataraku is
an active
man
*).
FORMS OF THE PAST TENSE.
*
3
Kwa-ko).
'
means of
are auxiliary verbs of time, by
The form- words of the past tense which derivative verbs are formed. 79.
.
.
tari,
.
.
taru, in the spoken language ta, contracted from te-ari. It, in
connection with a verbal root, expresses continuance in the condition or action,
which, by the radical form of the precedent verb, E-tari"
becoming.
and
I
have gotten"
is
named what
are both
as something just is
com-
called the
pleted present tense.
The spoken language shortens
tari
and tdru to ta, which
admitted into the familiar written language. Opposite to field
or garden have become old,
rubitd; opposite to FurHbitdru ta
spoken language: Since e,
it
is
Fiiriibitd ta
yd sono,
yd
spoken language
gerund are of application is,
field
been
fUrubitdri,
Ta yd sonogdfu-
or garden become old,
is,
in the
sono.
a)
is
te
or de on which, after dropping the
grafted, the rules given
72) for the
(
to the perfectum praesens also, in other words: the e
in the spoken language, simply superseded
becomes Aketd.
Akete
Ta yd sonovd
in the spoken language:
the form of the gerund in
ari (or in the
of the gerund
is,
ta has also
by
a.
Yonde (= Yomite) becomes Yonda,
read.
Mite
Mita.
Naraote (Naravute)
Narqota, learned.
Yuite (= Yukite)
Yuita.
Atte (= Artte)
Atta been there.
Maste(-Masite)
Mas'ta, =been.
Maitte (= Mairite)
Maitta, has
Compare RODKIGUEZ Elem.
p.
84.
,
come
t
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
VII.
221
79.
Whether the perfectum praesens formed by
have an active or a passive,
tari
a transitive or an intransitive signification, depends on the precedent root-word.
Fund
kisini tsuku, the ship
Kisini
to shore.
tsiikitdru
comes to the shore,
lands; tstiMtdrt, has
it
Kisini tsuketdru fund, a
Sina-monowd mdtsi watdri,
one has brought to shore.
that
ship,
F&ndwd
fund, a ship that has come to shore.
kisini tsukdtdrt, one has brought the ship to shore.
come
to import
Motsi watdri tdru sina-mono, goods which one has imported.
goods.
Instances of the use of the Perfectum praesens.
Koy)e, uru, to become thick,
becomes thick from the rain. koyurii
mme,
leaf.
mulberry tached
-
Koyetdrti
thick.
Ameni
mme,
plums,
dew has attached
the
Tsuyu (or Tsuyuno) tsukitdru kuvd, leaves to which dew has
at-
Mitsi wo
tsukitdri,
tsukite
tsiyau-kawo tsurane tari, along the
up a wall of stones and placed the houses of the place satoritdrn fit6 ,
Amanand
(the doctrine).
some one who has understood the way
y6ri kitdru fit6 fitaini tsuno ari, fundni ndritd
kftni
Yetzi-zennd Fino-urdni tsuki-tdri; yueni kono tokorowo Tsnn6-kd
to
nddznku,
come from the country of Amana, have had horns upon the forehead and reached Fino-ura in
in a ship
Tsunoka asa, a
come it,
Yetsizen;
Ameno
(hornshill).
beg you.
I shall not
that
^-^ J$^
ceased.
3/^?$<'2,
is
in
why
people
call
men
sailing
that place;
the
spoken language; yanda
Watdksd
tanomini maitta, I have
yamitdru dsa,
morning when the rain has
to
plum
itself to
thick.
sea-shore one has built -
Tsuyu kuvdni
koyu, the
plum has become
koydtdri, the
Kai-fenwo isi-kabewo
itself.
in a row.
M'me
M'me ameni
corpulent.
plums, that become thick from the rain.
become
that have
fat,
oo-tsi
si-mas 'td, I have understood
fail.
Remark. The perfectum praesens in
tari,
formed from transitive verbs, as
Ake, to open: Tsug)i, u, to pour in; Ir)e, uru, to make to go in, remains transitive even iretari,
tea
though expressions, as Tova aketari, Tsiyava
has been poured, the
fire
has been put in
'),
seem
to plead for the
Opposite to the subject, isolated by va, door, tea, or
stands as predicate: one has opened, poured, put in.
1) Japanese
Fiva
because they are found translated: the door has been opened, the
passive signification. fire,
tsugitari,
and Dutch Dictionary, by the Prince of Nakats.
CHAPTER
222
THE VERB.
The form- word ..dri, ..6ru, 6reba,
80. it
VII.
takes the place of their verbal element
i,
80.
deflecting,
when
in deflecting verbs
expresses the continuance in the past,
Mds)i, u, to be; Masdri, has been.
or the praeteritum praesens.
Er)i, u [to be distinguished from Er)i, u, that as a substantive verb
to choose]
is
old- Japanese
by
a variation of ar)e, u (see
^
attributively used ples:
.
Eri
96), and, just as cm,
the closing form
is
,
is
means
indicated in
era the form of the substantive or
noun; erame, eramu, = eran, the form of the Future. Exam-
Fdna sib6mH^
Fana
the flower fades;
bomdru /ana, a flower which has faded.
sibomeri, the flower has faded; Si-
Umeri, to have
Um)i, w, to bear;
Kisakino umeru ko, the son that the Queen has born; Kisakino umeran
born.
ko, the son that the
shall
Queen
have born.
Remark. The eru used substantively
,
the nondeflecting verbs in 0, superseded (thus Akesi, Aketaru or Akerisi),
or attributively
by
esi
(
is,
particularly with
81), etaru
78) or erisi
(
because the form Akdru already exists as
a variation of Akuru, thus, as participium praesentis. If
it
be admitted that, behind
and thus that Masdri, by which
it
is
equivalent,
eri as I
ellipsis
then
its
suppose, the form Keri
(
82)
is
hidden,
has arisen from Mdsikdrt, with the meaning of signification
is
clearly explained
by the origin
of the form.
Application of this rule.
..ki becomes ker)i, u. Kiki, to hear;
Kiktri,
Yuki, to go;
Yuktri, Sakdri,
Saki, to open,
v. int.
Siki, to spread;
Sikdri,
^
Iki, to live;
IMri,
1
Kate, to write;
Kdk6ri,
.
make
J|J
Remark. The
which
and is
becomes ^=f ^.
stay behind, to post-
pone; N6kos4ri,
verbs,
si
r
Nasi, to make be; Nasdri, Nok6si, to
.
eri;
^3^^.
seri noticed it is
to be
here
is
ser)i, u.
Yaddsi, to lodge; Yddose'ri, Utsttsi, to
jffi
remove; UtsusJri, |||
Terdsi, to make shine; Terasitri, ffi
arisen from
distinguished
a fqsion of the Kwa-konosi and
si,
the termination of factive
from the derivative form eri.
ser)i,
u
CHAPTER
VII.
..tsi (= ti)
THE VERB.
becomes
80.
ter)i, u.
Kdtsi, to overcome ; KaUri,
Tdtsi, to stand up;
Tatdri,
Mdtsi, to watch;
Matdri,
t
Utsi, to strike,
Mdtsi, to take;
Motdri,
]
Fandtsi, to let loose; Fdnatdri, . .
beat
;
Uttri,
\
'.
vi becomes ver)i , u. -f
be called Iveri
Ivi, to say, to
;
Omdvi, to think;
Nivovi, to smell, v. int.', Nivovdri,
,
Omoveri,
Sttagdm, to comply, to suit; Sttagavdri,
Avi, to meet;
Avdri,
Tovi, to ask;
Tovdri,
Naravij to learn;
I-
..mi becomes mer)i, u SUsumi, to advance;
to reside; Sumdri,
Stimi,
Sidzttmi, to sink; Sidzumdri,
r
Susumdri,
.<
Kumi,
to bail out; Kumdri ,
SVbomi, to fade; Stbomdri,
Umi,
to bear;
Tsttbdmi, to bud; Tstibomdri,
Umdri,
..ri bacomes rer)i, u.
^? to become;
Nari, Tsumdri, ^
T ,
to accumulate scatter;
Tsiri,
;
Nardri.
Komdri
Tsumordri.
Masdri,
zw^r-.;
Tsirdri.
Examples of the use of the forms [7sfo?z#&)i, w,
to succeed].
,
Furi,
ij
,
to stick in, int. Komordri.
i)
,
to exceed , to fall
,
down
Masardri.
,
Furtri.
..er)i, u,
Tovi-ya akindvi-ya f$t6 sUdsini
tate-tstidz'ttkdri.
Sdredd tokdro dokdroni tird-mdtsimo ari, the custom-houses and shops (of Simonoseki) succeed one another in one line. Although there are back-streets also.
JV.
[Mds)i, u, to be; Masdri, has been].
kami ya-firo-wani ni having changed into
.
.
fim6no kamiva
1)
is
tokini ndri
.
nusino
god
NN.
kami nari,
masdru kami nari,
a god, that came into existance (ndri-masdrit) ,
Kova
(both the creators) had washed their left eyes.
To be
.
a crocodile eight fathoms long, has. paired with her.
the heaven-illuminating god
(or tsu&ni narerisi)
.
narite, miavi-maseri , as regards the goddess N., the
Amaterdsu kamiva fiddrino mi me-wo aravi-tamdvi-si
when
NN
this is a
distinguished from the auxiliary verb,
tsueni ndri-mas^ru
god that has become a
Mn-i, explained
in
$
I
US.
staff.
CHAPTER
224
THE VERB.
VII.
Kakar)i, u, to be suspended. '{ffj^,
Kami-yoni ameto
3
|
tsutsito
80, 81.
s
M
h J
~
no avidani kakarera. fasi, the bridge (rainbow)
which in the ages, when gods allone existed, was suspended between Heaven
and Earth. \_OTcds)i,
who
panese,
Oranda-zin ve
u, violate.]
Dutchmen have
against
okasi-tdru Oranda-zin va
fouwo
the law
,
tai-si
violated
fouw6
okdsertf,
the law.
Nippon-zinva, Ja-
Nippon-zimai
Dutchmen, who against Japanese have
tai-si
violated
*).
[Tamav)i, M, to condescend, to grant,
Mikotono faki-tamaveru
persons].
German
hoii-ken,
the
geruhen, applied to princely
sword that the prince
costly
has or had girded on.
korewo I
that the
sireri,
way
Mitsino okonavarezaru ware
?Wn, he knows.
know;
[Sir)i, M, to get to
know
not practised, this I have gotten to
is
(this
know). [Itdr)i, M,
at,
come
to (the point
any one
will reach); Itdrdru, the
Sono itareruni oy6nde, getting at
having reached].
= reaching the non plus
it,
having got
having reached
it,
Tsiu you sore itareru kana! oh that one had
ultra.
reached the middle way! [Nok6r)i, u, to be
left],
Nokdrit mono, something that
mono or Nokori-si mono, something that has remained 81.
or
i,
The form-words ..ki
Nokordru
is left.
over.
on the verbal root in
(^f) or ..si (s/), grafted
e
in the narrative style and in poetry characterise the simple perfect absolute,
and, like the Aorist Indie, of the Greek, express the action as completed at a fixed
time and without continuance or repetition. Ki
form (= he was); distinguished
si,
is
the indicative closing-
which passes under the name of Kwa-kono
from the
Gen-zaino
si
(page
si
and
is
to be
107), the form in which the verb
appears as noun substantive or even as attributive (as participle, = been); kerne,
kemu, ken,
the future (= shall or
Ake-ki, Mi-lsi, Yuki-ki, ^4n'-ki,
may have =
been).
aperuit, vidit, ivit, fuit, he opened, he saw,
he went, he was there. .4fo-si, Mi-eit
gone
etc.,
Yuki-si, Ari-si, to have opened
or, attributive, the
it,
to
have seen
having opened, the having seen,
1) The Treaty between the Netherlands
and Japan. t858.
Art.
V,
al.
1 ,
2.
etc.
it,
having
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
VII.
=
Ake-lzen, Mi-ken, Yuki-ken, -4n'-ken,
'
81.
225
aperuerit, viderit, iverit, fuerit,
= he
have opened, have seen, he will have gone, have been.
will
The
relation to the
period, that
With
sentence.
by the Kwa-ko no
defined
action
one, perfect or completed, with
relation to a present, the time indicated
with relation to a preterit
preterit;
is
by the predicate verb which
defined
is
si
it
si
by
is
closes the
thus a simple
becomes, logically, our plusquamperfectum
,
with relation to a future on the other hand our futurum exactum.
Remark. The elements
going and with verbs.
compound
and
ki
si
are
verbs which signify
the precedent verbal root, on which they are grafted, form
Ari-ki and Ari-si thus
mean
the arrival and the departure
of existence; forms which express the idea of having been.
Nous venons
pression:
In the pure Japanese
= io come), or
(ldi,
2f
and
de
As
also
the
Sivi-ne ,
dead rice
^
=
meaning
of
go away sterilis);
Me-sivi,
(Oryza
Derived from Si,
deaf.
(Kan)
and
,
- -
rBJ
ft* ^H
-l
f^Pi
a
h
is
fij/"
Here,
is
^
to
//%
etc.,
whereas
in Sin^i, u, uru, die; Siv)i, iru, to be dead;
whence
dead to the eyes,
=
blind;
Mimi-sivi,
dead to the
have been),
shall
is
indicated in writing
scholars themselves
by
explained as a word
2 ).
as closing form:
1ft?
K no m
"""*-
^*^ ^jft
%
mi wo
i
,
be remarked what
^-
^ 3
^
lai
fasirano kamiva mina fttdri garni narl-masite , mi
kdkftsi
Kamis
BRIDGMAN, page 54, about 2)
Kaheri-ki, 6^-^ 2J"v*> he returned,
the continuative form Sar)i t w, to go away.
by Japanese
i
Jjiftlf
found explained by
84, 85).
occurs
Examples of the use of Ki
1)
e. g.
is
meaning of come, Ki has the forms of Ku, Kuru, Kite
brings the past into doubt"
Jfp
of the past tense
^,
by
Ken, old-Japanese Kemii (=
that
).
style the ki
substantive verb with the
Si with
ears,
JSjj
dire
le
Compare the ex-
J
mutates with nu and tsu (see
it
coming and
tamavi ki, these three Kamis were solitary
and kept
is
and > t*
their persons (themselves) concealed.
mentioned by The Notitia linguae Sinicae of Premare , by
d>
^^
k'iu.
v
Wa-ffw
Sitoori,
under Ken. 15
J.
o.
CHAPTER
226
THE VERB.
VII.
in Examples of the use of the form
a)
also
Ko-zinno iveri-aimo samo arinu ben,
_
say.
Samo, = Slkdmo,
As noun
substantive the form in si or
is
si
mo
kono y%e naran, this
what the ancients have
said (of it),
past form of Ivi, Ii, to
declinable, thus:
what has been. Ari-simo,
the reason
may be
why
what has
also
Nokorisi kavikono siyau
been (subjective substantive proposition). nari
substantive:
manner.
so, in this
Ari-siva, the having been,
1.
noun
Iveri, continuative
this nature.
must have been of
si as
81.
('^^
)
asiku
the silkworms remaining
have become bad of nature. there has been. Ari-sini, 3. Ari-siniva, 4. Ari-site, while
2.
kono kata, since there has been.
5. Ari-si yori
6. Ari-si-yu6, Ari-si-kara, 7. 8.
Ari-sini yorite or yotte, while, or as there has been.
Ari-sikaba (= Ari-si-sikaba)
Yomi-sikaba
sikaba,
,
whereas or since there has been.
,
Narai-sikaba
Mi-sikaba
,
1
),
Motome-
one has sought
as
for, read,
learned, seen. Ari-sika-tomo , though there has been.
=
9. Ari-si nari,
it
has been there.
10. Ari-si koto ari, Ari-si to ari,
Ari-si to kaya, it b)
may be
=
it
is
fact (koto) that there has been.
that there has been.
Examples of the use of the form in
si as
Nokori-si kaviko, the remaining silkworms.
reino koto, the
this
manner
seed,
is
"
mo,
adjective:
Sari-si Fotdke, the departed
are rare.
Kan-kiwo
fit6
.
.
maki-si fatake
sinogisi (or sinogittau)
had
sailed.
mo
Ame
furazu
"
and
fades,
and
dries
N.
asa gotoni sibomi kare-yuku, -
"
up every morning
it
field,
.
ga norisi
when
"
there
but also the
becomes more faded
Sikdruni Ten no kakoni ya ariken, he will thus
drier every day.
.
fi-no kasanareba,
a repetition of not rainy days, then not only the burned
sown plough-land
mare nari, people
in which people have kept off the frost.
fund, the ship in which N. take-si ta
noun
Kono tanewo motome-si
Buddha. Sar)i, u, to go away.
who have procured
-
have
stood
under Heaven's protection.
The Kwa-kono
1)
By
this, is
si
shows
itself also
what RODRIGUEZ page 66
forme particuliere a
la
line
in both the words Figdsi, pron. Fingdsi
7 from bottom says explained: ,,Le conjonctif a encore une
longue ecrite, c'est sikaba, que Ton ajoute aux raclicanx de tous
molome sikaba, yomi sikaba, narai
fifc
les verbes,
comnie
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
227
81, 82.
and Nisi, = East and West, FVngdsi being a contraction of Fmo-mukdi-si kata,
=
the side on which the sun has come to meet, and Nisi an abbreviation of
F4no
the side to which the sun has gone away.
Vm'-si kata,
u
82. ..ker)i,
(= ki-|- eri,
= has been), the
deflecting continuative
form of
ki (=was), characterises the perfect present tense. Forms of inflection, the same as those of eri, thus:
Keri, Kesi, closing-form, = has been.
K6ru, form of the verb, used or having been;
.
.
.
Keru
and
as substantive
adjective,
= the having been,
nari, has been.
Kerebd, as, when, since
it
has been.
Keredomo or Kerutomo, although shall
Keran, commonly Ken,
it
has been.
have been.
Kerdku, adverbial form, = as has been,
Keraba, e.
if it
has been.
li-keraku, as
g.
it
has been said.
Keraz)i, u, negative, = has not been.
ATI, there
Ari-Jd, there was; Ari-keri, there has been.
is;
Ideographically keri, keru
name
of a bird ; that cries
is
expressed by
>5J^ ~j"
,
phonetically by Jj|, the
gM gdri and therefore is called Keri in Japan.
~T
Jj^
J||J
stands for Kereba.
The tive
and
adjectives in ki
105
stki (pp.
107 and 109), which form a continua-
present in kdri, instead of kari assume keri for the form of the praesens
perfectum. Tdka-kdr)i, u,
Taka)ki, ku, high;
is
high;
Tdka-keri, was high.
4
Be)ki,
leu
Nd)ld, ku,
(Ijf"
Urdslsd kayiri nasi,
continually boundless ; nakari-keri,
is
-
-
kagiri
is
is
is
J
)
,
who
= was boundless
- ;
=
ia
kagiri
confirmed by the Japanese spoken and written lan-
declare kari
BKOWN, Grammar, XXIII.
was not.
kagiri nakdri,
and
keri to
we
hesitate to agree with the
be identical. Nevertheless
leave the spoken language of Ye"do full right to use keri, where kari
1) K.
possible.
boundless.
guage, as will be seen by the following examples, opinion of those
not;
was
Na-keri, there
boundless;
nakeri or nakesi,
= has been continually
Since this distinction
= the joy
Be-keri,
possible;
without, ..less, Na-kdri, there
(^^),
Distinguish:
Be-kari,
possible;
),
$
20.
is
,
we
meant.
CHAPTER
228
THE VERB.
vii.
82, 83, 84.
Examples of the use of these forms.
Nippon
[Ydsukii light, easy].
sei
vd tsudzukd ndku ki-teu suru koto ydsu-
kdri kdri, the unmolested return of the Japanese army was easy.
Sono rei-kon ke
\Nari (Nare), to become]. her soul transforming will
Siragano Ten wau his birth, they
to
kaya,
Ten-wau mumare nagaranisite mi kusi
sirokari
kereba,
nadzuke tatematsuru, as Emperor Seinei's hair was white at
to
have called him Emperor White-hair.
Mayu
[Tsiisaki, small].
too small, the thread
ito
tsiisakereba,
fosokusu, if the silk-cocoon was
too fine.
is
Kore yori
[Asiki, bad],
as
narikeru
have become a silkworm.
Sei-nei
[Sir6ki, white].
kaviko-to
site
te-ire
asikereba, notsini iro-irono
yamam
to nari,
from that point, the treatment (of the silkworm) was bad, afterwards
it
gets
to different diseases (different diseases arise).
Ano kodzukaino
\Yor6siki, good].
gdku tstikde-masoo
t6 tim6i-mdstt
= that
J ),
tsiitdmega yordsikerebd, watdk&siwa na-
servant's services having been good, I think
I shall keep him.
Nanu-ka
. .
tari-ki,
. .
ari-kereba,
tari-si, fat
ting the form- word ki, tari-ki,
to
mina-mina yorokobi isami-keri, as we were
on the seventh day, every one was
to depart
83.
tatsu-besi
= he was
si,
keri
. .
tari-ken;
.
full
.
of joy and courage.
te-ki,
. .
te-si, fut
on the continuative form
tari
being; tari-ken, = he shall have been;
(
. .
ten.
By graf-
79) the forms
tari-keri,
= he has
been, are obtained.
The poet supersedes
tari-ki,
tari-si,
tari-ken
with te-ki, te-si, ten, also
Om6vi-tesi and Tsikdvi-tesi are considered to be equivalent to Omovi-tarisi (having
thought) and Tsikdvi-tdrisi (having sworn)
Wasuraruru
"
Fitono inotsino
2
).
miwoba omovdzu; "
"
tsikavi tesi
osikumo aru kana!
3
).
I do not think of myself as being forgotten; oh! the charmingness of the
of the
man who
84. [..id],
has sworn (love) to me, exists
still!
nu, future nan; [nuri], nuru, nureba, future nuran.
Ni, a deflecting auxiliary verb of time, come, by aphaeresis, from
1) E.
2)
BROWN'S, Japanese Colloquial
Wa-gun
life
Siwori, unter Tesi.
N.
689. 3) Hiyafai-min,
N.
38.
*ro,
tnu
CHAPTER
=
to
(to
go away
(
),
o
go or pass away)
,
passing
THE VERB.
on the root of a verb by which ,
and the termination
i,
with %nu into
or of an action,
i.
e.
away of a condition
end. Whereas Ake denotes the
continuance in the opening," Ake-taru
to the old
written language, denotes
Fi
iri
Sidzuminu,
it
sinks away,
fatinu, the sun sets
the action
opening" as an action
Akete-oru
sink;
229
84.
and expressed in the old written language, by
grafted
fuses with %nu into enii,
VII.
it
(and)
first
its
-
termination
inii, implies
coming
e
the
to an
beginning, and
to have opened:"
AMnu proper
the ending of the opening." Sidz&mi, to
goes away into the depth. Fate, disappear; disappears.
coordinated, in the indefinite root-form
(see
Iri, 68).
to go in, appears here as
The
rule
on coordination
excludes the use of the root-forms ni and nuri; since, however, they form the basis of further derivatives, they
must be
first
brought under notice here.
SYNOPSIS OF INFLECTED FORMS OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Ni,
OR GO AWAY.
Nu, =
TO PASS
CHAPTER
230
The
auxiliary
substantive verb
what
something
Remark.
and is,
Ni
(to be)
is,
before
Nu, Nuru
distinguished from the
is
go away)
(to
in the form of a noun. (See
it
100. L).
their derivation, as it appears in the synopsis, the logical result
and
signification there noticed:
confirmed by the definition which the 1.
84.
in-as-much as the latter has the appositive definition
must have the
that they
THE VERB.
Attention must be paid to the three forms of the future nan, nuran
1.
From
niken.
verb Ni,
Vii.
this conclusion is
Siwori gives of the three forms.
Wagun
Xfenva mi-raiwo kakete ivu kotoba nari,
Nan
e.
i.
is
a word used with a
view to the future. 2.
Ranva gen-zaiwo utagavuno
kotoba wan',
brings the present into doubt (should 3.
it
Kenva kwa-kowo utagavuno
kotoba nari,
the past into doubt (should
it
Remark passes into
2.
Since r
Owannu,
-J-
X
*9
(= Aran)
is
a word which
be?). i.
e.
Ken
a word which brings
is
have been?).
&"%
,
being the auxiliary verb nu
Nu
Instead of Ari-nan (there shall or also occurs for
Ran
n by assimilation becomes nn, Owari-nu (=
Owannuno
to this example, called
e.
i.
or the
may
Nu
(^*
5?
it
ends)
with a view
)
of Owannu.
be), in the dialect of
Yamato Ara-nan
euphony.
Examples of the use of the auxiliary verb
ni,
nu.
\TSn.~\Fatovatdkanitiwardte Sjakson-no fudoMro-ni tdbi-iri nu, the dove, pur-
sued by the falcon , flew into S'akya's lap.
Soreyori Sado ve tsuki-nu.
fuu arazareba,
ni zyu fi-meyo tou-riu-su, thence they
As again
was no favorable wind they stayed there
there
,
came till
Umi-nite kazeni aterare, kwan-gun riwo usinavUte, Zin-muno >/L
Z^.v yVv)
wind
at
tok6ro
elder brothers
were
lost the
at different places.
lost
besi, also
besi, it
may be
set-loo
(^J>
iroje
sannin
said, will
Ko-zinno iverisimo
have been
>fcf) no waza kok6roye-nwo.
that there were people,
a murderous occupation.
mi
20 th day.
Kami-agari-si masi-nu, he (the
what the ancients have
[Nuru.] Yau-sanwo
after the
advantage, Zin-mu's three
prince) has gone on high (died). Agari, going up; Si, do.
samo an'-nu
to the island of Sado.
dok6ro nite use-tamavinu, as they were overtaken by
and the government's troops
sea,
Mata zyun
who
so.
fito
mo
arinu
considered the breeding of silkworms
Flsdsiku kai-dei ni fanberi-vxan. aida, > during
my
long stay at the botton of the sea," the beginning of a speech by the sea-god, when he showed himself before the other gods.
CHAPTER
^y
_
w iH
ne
^CA)
Jjjl?
M'mava
it
or:
Midzukdra mdtsur6vi-ndmu
come under subjection of
instead of Matsi-nan, he will wait, uses
[Naba.]
231
84, 85.
Midzukara matsurovi-sitagavi-n'&mvi,
[Nan.] (
THE VERB.
VII.
Matanan
oneself 1 ).
The poet,
also.
fikare-nabs,, asiki mitsinimo iri-nu besi, if the horse is led,
turned into even a bad road.
may have
[Nureba.] Fide-yorimo Tsiyau-zen suddniyabure-nureba,, sadamete Dai-Min yori sukuvdn-kotowd at
om dnhakdrite
,
when Tschao-sien
Fide-yori considering that,
should
have been brought under subjection, help would certainly come from
last
China [Nuran.] Furuki way a iku-yo /0-nuran? the old stone house, it still last?
may it
~fe
^ ^ J^. From jffi
Jjj
appears that by fe-nuran the future (may
the
exactum
fiit.
The
ages
the Chinese translation annexed,
intended
last) is
lasted)
of nu, uses yuku
poet, instead
e.
verse,
may have
(shall or
how many
would be
(^7),
,
whereas by fe-niken
indicated.
= goes, probably
to
up
fill
his
Mdkisi fatdkemd sibomi kare yuku, even the corn land, where one
g.
has sown, goes to fade (and) to dry up. 85.
.
.tsu, tsutsii
(^
?
^
. .
);
tsur)i ,
u eba ,
,
future an, an auxiliary verb
proper to the Yamato dialect and the narrative style, and as such,
of time
grafted on the root, as well as on the future form of a verb,
away
expresses the
going
of an action, or of a condition, and characterises the past time absolute.
Tsu, tsuru passes as a variation of nu, nuru of a proposition tsu (or mostly dzu, of the districts from Owari to
Tsutsu, as a doubling of tsutsu
it
Yedo
Tsuri, continuative,
= has been;
)
(84). As
^*) is in use
predicate closing-form
by preference, in the
dialect
s
).
tsu, implies the
being made equivalent to
z
om 6vitsu-om dvitsu tsuru,
(iterative form), om6vi-
repetition ,
=
thought and thought.
I
= having been; tsurdn (tsurdmu), =
shall
have been.
In the old rebus-writing tsuru lurks under the character )^, which means to
tsudzuru,
sew to; Mi-tsuru, to have seen,
tsuru, to have heard,
1)
3;
^ $&.
denoted by
J^ )^
;
Kiki-
Most common are the expressions "XTe ^i
Nippon-ki>
2) Tsuru to ivu,
by
is
i.
e.
is
also considered as a modification
of te-aru.
contracting Te-aru and te-are , one says tsuru, isure.
Wa-gun Siwori, under Tsu. Vol. 16.
p.
\.
recto.
1
>,Te-aru, teare" tco isudzumete ,,tsuru, tsuri*
Wagun
Siwori under Tsuru,
CHAPTER
32
thought;
85. SJ*
^
litsu, said;
THE VERB.
vii.
y
fy~
^^ ?
Mitsu, seen;
Kikitsu, heard;
,
,J|
omdvitsu,
:?,
Kurdsltsu, become dark.
^,
Hj|ff
,
Examples of the use of these forms.
^e
4u
.,dI
^^
J
___.
=
fffl
-
% ^0 7 , .
|| . II*'
3
-^
"
it"
1^^
tP-t-
Kova
wo nikumi-tamavu mi-tama
keqare ^
masitsii , this (goddess) has arisen fr
m
an emanation
as
,
ni yorite ndri
spirit detesting uncleanness.
* ne
Remark. In the same author, instead of nari-masitsu (- has arisen), maseri, nari-maseru
Inuru
tosi
inquiry was
NN.
made
of this yuite,
ni tovaresi koro, kasikono fuu-doioo kiki tsu,
of
Kono Kamino mi
nan, and nareru nari alternately occur. (Compare
NN.,
when,
last
80).
year
manners and customs of that country.
I heard of the
sudzi simoni sirusitsu or also sirusdri,
Kami, one has made mention of
below
(it)
1
=
as to the pedigree
Dasa
).
Ten-wauno sono ts&mawo tsukavasitsvra. koto wo
kikite,
yosasi tokoroni
tasukdwo moto-
mento omdvti*), when Dasa, going to the place of his destination, heard, that the
Emperor had had
him, he begun
his wife sent to
to think of seeking help
(for her).
Fotot6gisu
"
"
ndki tsiiru kdtawd
Tdda dridkend
"
ndgamureba, 3
tsukizd nokdrerti
).
where the cuckoo has
If I look towards the side,
Then, there only the moon has remained shining by H
Nokordru fdnava
Waremo The remaining
Oh
I too
"
ukitaru
Remark. for
have passed the floating time of
writing,
tsutsu
Nagdra, - in the midst
of,
is
H
while
=
1) Sudzi, the object of the transitive riruri, to
3)
life
(step
by
step).
yukl vd furi tsutsu. it
has snowed (repeatedly).
frequently
identify this tsutsu, with the dzutsu,
2) Nippon-*, 14, 12.
tsutsu,
sugusi tsutsu.
yowo
the high top of the Fuzi
In
tsiri
clear daylight.
flower, has been strewed to day (leaf for leaf).
Fuzino takd-neni
On
mo
kevu
called,
expressed by
(Chapter VIII.
III.
at a time, treated in
mention,
|J
^
is,
^, 2).
a sign
Probably some 35, p. 145.
by inversion, placed before the verb.
-^
used
-
Hiyaku-nin issu,
N.
81.
CHAPTER
VII.
86. SYNOPSIS OF
THE VERB.
86.
THE INFLECTED FORMS.
233
234
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
86.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
235
87.
CAUSATIVE OR FACTIVE VERBS IN Si OR Se. 87.
The causative verbs, which denote a causing to take place
drench (make
rying out of the action, such as our raise (make rise), are formed
by means of the
this
i
in deflecting verbs their termination
i
at the
times, for vocal harmony, into o, see
make go
Nokosi, to
form is
e.
Yuki, to go;
g.
back.
-
The
verbs,
(^^),
isi
,
osi
and
usi) arise , whereas
same time passes into a
(or
some-
76), by which the derivative forms asi
Yukdsi,
make
Noki, to go back;
go.
which have ori or uri
as continuative
103 Si, to do,
88), have osi or usi as their causative form. In
(see
drink),
= to do.
by which the
suffixed to the root,
is
si
derivative forms esi or isi (or sometimes instead of
or osi are obtained;
san
deflecting verb si, su, future
In nondeflecting verbs in e or
or a car-
treated as a substantive verb.
Sometimes nondeflecting se, suru, future sen, takes the place of passes for a syncope of sim)e: uru, future Ivase, have say,
,
to return,
v.
i.]
Kayes)i, u, to v.
M)i,
iru,
3.
N)i,
iru,
See
do.
Manyo
Se 88.
explained
siu,
serve as examples of the derivation of causative verbs:
Kdy)e, eru,
2.
^ff, = have
Kikase, have hear, are at least in the
The following may 1.
en,
S)i, u.
a ,
to see;
~, to resemble;
tr.
make turn back
,
to return
,
In Yedo: Kairu, Kaisu.
Mis)e, eru, uru, to
make
see, to show.
Nis)e, eru, uru, to
make
resemble, to
imitate.
make
Yukas)i, u, to
4.
Yuk)i, u,
5.
Ugok)i, u,
6.
Nom)i,
3% to move,
u,
,
v.
i.
Ugokas)i, u, to move,
;^, to rest, v.
YdsUm)i, u,
to
v. tr.
make move.
Nomas)i, u, to give drink (Fitdni mi-
to drink;
dzuwo, water 7.
go.
i.;
Yasumds)i,
to somebody).
also e, uru, to rest, v.
u',
tr.',
contracted Yasunz)i, u. 8.
^,
Si,
to go
away;
Sas)i, u,
^f^ ^f^
make go away,
to
to send, to dispatch (a messenger). 9.
5
S>', u,
i
10. Kudz)i, uru,
Kuddri,
^,
J))j .^,
^f
,
to do;
to fall
,
descend.
go from above to
below; a line of Japanese writing.
Sas)e, uru, to
make
Kudds)i, u, to v.
tr.
do. Ne-sase, to
make
fall
,
make
to precipitate
,
CHAPTER
236
to unite,
11. Av)i, u,
v.
VII.
THE VERB.
Avas)i, u;
i.',
to soar, fly;
12. ToZ)z, M,
jJI^, to play, to ramble.
13. Asob}i,u,
87.
uru, to unite,
e,
v.
Tobas)i, u, to
make
Asobas)i, u, to
make ramble,
soar or
tr.
fly;
to
amuse,
to please.
Ni
14.
,
15. Nas)i, u, to 16. Nar)i, u,
Dzi
make; to sound,
R||rj\
17. Ter)i, u, 18.
Nas)i, u
to be ; Nar)i, u, to be continually.
),
i.',
^dz)i, u, to
come
Ni, ^Hf
produce.
Nards)i, u, to
make
sound.
start.
to
ride,
Ok6s)i, u, to raise.
JH,^, to go back, to re-
make go back;
Nok6s)i, u, to
^f
,
to
leave behind.
23.
Ots)ij iru, uru,
24.
Ov)i, uru,
to
wax, grow;
^^,
(0)i, u),
Ov6s)i, u,
,
fall,
to
to
fell.
make wax
or grow.
Ov6s)e, uru, or 06s)e, uru, (4J#, obsol.
to bear (on
/
to burden; a charge.
,
,
^
J^
the back);
JH!
make
Otds)i, u, to
to fall;
^^^
tf\
Uruv)i, u,
make
to
off.
make come.
Kos)i, u, to
cede, retreat;
26.
make go out
carry, to convey.
to get up, to rise;
^E^,
^j,
Nos)e, uru,
to come,
2J*,
22. Nok)i, u,
u
shine, to illuminate.
Das)i, u, or ^dds)i, u, to
burden, load. Nor)i,u, to be
,
Ok)i, iru,
Ov)i\
make
Fiinewo Vddsu, to make a ship
=
20. K)i, uru,
25.
to produce.
,
make
a burden; to ride, go in a carriage;
21.
make be
to
Nasas)i, u, to
out of; 19.
,,
Terds)i, u, to
)}f^, shine;
yj ^i -
1
v.
ffi
,
Uruvos)i, u, to moisten, quicken.
to get moist;
j.
27. Or)i, iru,
a
Or6s)i, u, ~TC
to descend;
'
,
to
make descend
(z'
riwo, to throw out the anchor). 28.
to dwell;
Or)i, u,
29. Kor)i, u,
Ords)i, u,
to clot;
,
i,
Kor6s)i, u, to kill; 30. /, to
go away. Yor)i, u, to be going
Tos)e, uru,
fr|,
to get ex-
The root *p
Wagun
dwell.
clot; to kill,
make
to
^f.
kill.
make go away,
to
?
is
preserved in the family
into
Siroori,
^
is
very
under Nati.
,
to exhaust, to con-
sume.
Remark. If we do not, as Japanese etymologists
2}
,
Tstikus)i, u,
hausted or consumed;
of
f
make
send.
31. Tstifyi, iru, uru,
1)
make
w, to
to
Korosds)i, u, to
away;
The change
^ Jg,
common.
name
* J
[jj
2
),
reduce Nasi (= to cause
J K ,
ni
yama, =:
sunrise mountain.
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
VII.
Na (^*), = name,
to be, to give existence to anything) to
Ni, = to be, the soundness of such a derivation analogy of the Latin factivum facio
,
237
87.
is
but derive
it
from
pleaded for, not only by the
which comes from
fio , or the Sanscrit bhd-
vaydmi derived from bhu, to be; but the Japanese causative verbs themselves concur in supporting
it.
Thus we are of opinion
also , that Asobasi (= to please) is
a causative form, whereas the Japanese philologists Asobi-{-masi
(^^
could agree,
if
^p
=
)
see in it a contraction of
b e pleasing oneself; an opinion with which we
*
the passive form Asobasare,
of politeness, did not
l
make us suppose a
= be
an ordinary expression
pleased,
causative Asobasi (= to please), as a
logical necessity.
The
causative verbs derived from intransitive verbs have the object,
made
is
active, in the accusative before them.
makes the
castle shine, enlightens
Tsnkiva
sir o wo
which
terdsu, the
moon
it.
Examples of the use of the forms. korewo nasi, ko korewo n6bu
Tsitsi
tinues
Kimi takawo
it.
ur&vdsi, tdknva
the person. okdsti
4 )
,
mi wo
),
the father originates
the prince lets the falcon
tobdsti,,
made
motte korewo tstikuri nasi-tdri, one has
dkuwo
2
ur&v6sti,
3
),
the son con-
it,
Is-sekiwo
fly.
one stone.
this out of
riches moisten (quicken) the house, virtue,
Zin-siyavd saiwo mdtte mi wo okdsi, fu-zin-siyava mi wo motte saiwo
-
humane man
the
his person to
uses his fortune to exalt himself, the
his fortune higher.
push
inhumane man
Midare, sidzumarazaruwo yasunzi otdsu,
he quiets and subdues those, who behave disorderly and unquietly. yasunzilrw ga gotdsi
5
)
,
it
is
as if
tokiva stinavdtsi tndtsiwd tsukusu,
my be
Kotobawo
life.
Tomiva
tsukiisu, to
Kimi ni tsukdyuru
one quieted a suckling.
when
(I
my) prince
serve, then
exhaust his language,
i.
Sekt-siwo
e.
say
it
all
is
with
that
is
all
to
said.
t'3
-* *
Iraf^ ~2
~^nff.
^
_H^>*
1)
Wagun
i/
~& t
he does Sono kotobawo tsukusu koto wo dzu (pron. ddzu)*), / /
fll^ n0 ^
'
e^
(
ne ^oes n0^ succee d in) exhausting his reasonings.
Siwori, under Asobasv. Tamato Kotoba, II. 42,
r.
2) Tschung yung
13.
S) Dai Qaku.
Dai Qaku. X.
20.
5) Ibid. IX. 2.
4)
6) Ibid. IV.
1.
VI. 2.
CHAPTER
238
VII.
THE VERB.
88.
CAUSATIVE VERBS IN Sime. ^fff
88.
The
^ X
>v
^|^
Ge-dzi-suru kotoba.)
i; ,
causative verbs in sime denote that an order, or in a less
manding tone, inducement
is
given to do an action or realise a condition. They
formed according to the same rule as the causative verbs in
are
causative
or
si
se is
com-
i.
si,
e.
the
superseded by the verb Sim)e, u, uru, ureba, gerund Simete
(contracted site), future
Simen,
^^ ^^
to charge,
make open.
Ake-sime, to
Ake, to open;
'.
1
make
Tairage-sime to order to subdue to
Tairag)e, uru, to subdue;
,
,
subdue. .
.
.
s)e,
uru, do (termination of verbalized
.
.
.
se-sime, to charge to do, contrive that
one does, have done.
Chinese words); Nasas)i, u, to have made;
Nasa-stme, to order one to have made.
Ye-sas)i, u, to cause to get;
Ye-sasime, to contrive to have gotten.
Ari, there
Ard-sime, to order that there be.
is;
Nakari, there
is
Nakard-sime, to order that there be not.
not;
Mdtswrd-sime
Mdtsuri, wait upon, to worship;
When
Sime unites with the causative verbs in
si
,
to order to worship.
a sincope takes place: from 1
Kavdsi -\-sime comes Kavdsime, to have sent back; from Yukds~i-\- sime sime", to
Yuka-
,
order to let (him) go.
Examples of the use of the forms.
Kuniwo
tairage-smiu , he orders the country to be subdued.
simu, he orders the ambassador to be sent back. kusiki
onna narito omovi, tddzusdvete is-syuku
kami, seeing him, he thinks that he
is
hand, and charges him to stay the night. se-simen
to
one
not manure too strongly,
may
te:
Tsukaviwo kave-
Kava-kami korewo mite, (
-^ Tjj^aT^') se-simu, Kava-
a beautiful maiden, leads
Yase-kiwo nivakdni
koydsiwo tsuy6ku-sti bekardzu, to
make
sei-teu-
him by the (
ffi
o
4
ufi*
II
=
=7
i/*y*X
^"^ *&y ^ ^b 5?
7 *
*.
^
P
*
Ondregd mi wo tassento hossiirebd
Mddzu
ta-ninwo tasse-sime yd.
Will you advance yourselves
^rst
let
oiiliers
|
-^| ^)
lean trees grow quickly,
.
=>
~itsu-
,
nelP themselves forward.
CHAPTER Fit6ni yeki
be
THE
VETIB.
am-siniurut0($ sen-itsi (^fp
(^>)
much advantage
VII.
239
88.
)
t6 su, to
manage that
there
KUvandkiwo kiru
for others, I consider the only object.
koto nakard-sime, order that the
chopping of mulberry-trees do not take place!
Kami wo
Kami; Kami wo matsurd-simu
mdtsuri, to worship a
worship the Kami.
Tor)i,
to
u,
Tord-svme, to have
take;
takava karini motsivite, toriwd tord-simuru is
,
he gives order to taken.
it
tori nari, the falcon is
a bird, that
used for the chase, and (by which) people have birds caught.
KUmdosowo
consider; Fdkard-sime, to charge to consider.
sime
tamavu
*)
,
Emperor has
the
it
Sore
Fakdri, to
utsU kotowo fakara-
taken into consideration to beat the
(hostile)
Kumaoso. Ni, sime,
make
to be; Nas)i, u, to
charge to have made. He,
be; to produce; Nasdsi,
who
orders, charges a second person to have
That then
is
the reason,
important a part in the courtly style;
it
is
something done by a
third.
a prince gives order, to take teiwo nasdsimeri t6 dri,
it is
measures
(said) that the
why Nasdstme
the same as if
it
plays so
were said that
Kaku-
that something be done.
Emperor N. has given
order, that
Tsurugiwo sadzukete, Ten-kwauwo korosdsimento
the wrestling games be held. SM,
make produce; Nasd-
handing him a sword, he will have the Emperor murdered.
Remark
1.
The
Dative or Local,
object,
is,
which precedes the verb in sime in the Accusative,
as appears
ordered, not the person
who
is
from the examples quoted, the object of the action ordered. If the latter
is
admitted into the sen-
tence then the old style allows him, as a remote definition, to precede in the
Accusative, e.g. Sukunevro fakdru kotowo ok6navdsi,mu to hold council.
The new
style uses the
,
(the prince) orders
turn of phrase:
Sukune
by ordering Sukune he
has council held," and supersedes simete (ordering) by the syncopated form site; thus Sukune wo
fimewd
sit6
site
(= simete) fakaru-koto wo okonavdsimu.
N.N. kamiwo
Ten-wau Nunaki Iri-
mdtsurdsimu, the Emperor charges the Lady Nunaki
and has the god N.N. solemnly whorshiped.
/
sai-sini tsukavu matsurdstmu ? liCtlT Ten-kano fttdwo site 2 ~fc v people of the realm are let pay their respects at the .
I)
Not fakarisime,
as in the original state.
.
2) Tschung-yung
.
XVI.
3 ),
the
feasts.
CHAPTER, VII. THE VERB.
240
&
1
^
]
MfcJfcJ
w6
Seu-zin
,
ttdrti,
site, koktt-ka wo
one
if
).
88, 89.
man
a
let
osame-sunurebd of
mean
,
sai-kai narabi
character govern the
country and people, calamity and misfortune rise to the top.
A '* I
2M
jflfoo
J
( -jj^
flr?
m
i) wo
the foundation of a long
wo
to-wi
JV.
life.
.
.
t/e-sasimen fa?n^, to
wo
tsukavasite
that one gets
manage
Idzumono Oho-y astro ni
osd-
tokdrono kan-takdrawo tadasdstmu , (the Emperor) sends N... and lets the
murtt,
Kami-treasure be inspected, which
Tamim
kept in the Great chapel of Idzumo.
is
uyuru koto wo osivdsimu, he (the Emperor Shin-nung)
takavesi
-
the
lets
people be taught ploughing and planting.
Remark
('&i
site
2.
-
Site,
= giving order
^^")
Dai-siyau-ni mti-zit4 lets
N.. be beaten
# /^
s/j.
2^7
,
by mei-zite
simdte, is also superseded
N. .wo
(battle
with a precedent Dative.
to...,
Utdsimu
,
(ffjj
giving order to the general
fffclT^v ^
be given him).
^Y
$
^T)
or rei-
M..
to ivu
named M. he .
^^"
^t3 ^
(the prince) giving order to the people, lets silkworms be bred.
THE PASSIVE FORM.
The Japanese language
89.
active form,
verb e
which answers to
(^^i
=
expresses the idea of
get reward" and by means of the nondeflecting
to get, appropriate) forms derivative verbs,
appropriating of an action coming thus
in nature and form
,
to be rewarded" by an
,
which signify the
from without. The Japanese
passive verbs,
are derivative active verbs ; therefore mention can be
made only of the manner in which they
are
derived, but, by no means
of
passive forms of inflection, for e follows the nondeflecting conjugation.
According to their derivation the passive verbs are arranged in three I.
All deflecting transitive verbs in
1.
element
is
i
Kiki,
%
Saki,
f-=^f,
1)
,
can become passive, when their verbal
superseded by e, u, eru, uru,
YaJd, -Y^, to burn; trans. *
i
1
Yake
,
KiU, %
to tear;
Sake",
3..
23.
e.
g.
:
^jr, to be burned, to burn
to hear;
Lai Gaku,
classes:
>r t
to be heard, to sound.
yr>r, to be torn.
oneself.
CHAPTER
3
s.
,
to read;
Um-i,
2?
2.
,
to bear
Arij
79,
,
bring forth
to become.
to be;
Nare,
~j~
^,
to become.
Ore,
)t
^,
to break, mfa-.
9, to break,
E/W,
2? )
v.
fa\
to sell;
??
), to
}
their root-vowel
make;
quently confounded with -^,
,
according to the dialect of Yedo 2.,
x
2.
v,
^ n^;
tie,
without inter-
forms, which are fre-
>i
Miye, 2.X (Miyu,
(Mirti, Mitd), to see.
(/rw,
,
^
L
X 7-
6
#
sale.
to be made.
v,
>?
Miydte,
7,
be sold, to be for
transitive verbs in i, chiefly monosyllabic, attach e to
The writing has x,
position of the y.
y
Tstikiire,
either with or
,
$> i^, to
7re,
The nondeflecting
Mi, i,
to be produced or born.
,
-',
tf
2.
*?
,
to be read.
,
7
On,
,
;*
Are,
9
Tstikttri,
Ume
;
241
89.
to exist;
~jr
]
THE VERB.
Tome, 3
Nari,
,
VII.
^y'ji, to shoot.
;
2. 2.;
Miyuru, i
3- 1^;
Miydtari; or Jf{)e, w, wnt,
become
visible, appear.
Iye,#3~(Iyu,#-3-',Iyuru,#-3-iV',Iyete,
#:c
7-), to
get a shot, be shot. Thence
lyu-sisi, a shot stag.
i
JVz',
s
(Niru,
Tsyawo
>v/),
^ i; Niyeru, i=x V;
JWye, ^=x (Niyu,
to boil; fa-ems.
mrti, boil tea.
NiyUru, ^Z-n/', Niyete, ^17-), mir.
Niye-yu
,
boil;
boiling water.
Remark. If a nondeflecting verb followed by the verb e (= to get) remains in is
its
radical
equivalent,
form in
i,
the
e
retains
its
inherent signification of get;
however, to the expression: get something done,
i.
e.
it
the
being able to realize; thus Mairi-yenu (or in the spoken language Mairi-ye-
masenu
II.
Some
^j?o: T^X)
1
deflecting verbs in
)*
i
the verb e suffixed to the root in or,
I
cannot come.
have &ye or 6ye for their passive form, being i,
after the
on account of vocal harmony, has become
Japanese, and
1)
is
i,
o.
by strengthening has become a This form comes from the old
considered particularly elegant.
Shopping-Dialogues, page 17. 16
CHAPTER
242
Ivi,
-f
to say; to be called; Ivdye,
,
2/y
Siri,
to
,
know;
Siraye
^
Kiki,
,
^>3:,
),
7>x, Kikdye, % 3 x
to
,
X
t
(timdi), to
t^>^
)t
think; Omdvoye",
cogitable.
Jyf
^gj^
thus Kikoyuran
,
,
to avoid
Kikoyen
gative Kikoyenu, not to be heard.
become
,
.
voice.
(timdoye), to be
thought of or
.
rmm
Inflection, regular: Kikoy)e, u, uru, ete, etari etc., e&a, future
+ aran)
.
existing.
to be object of hearing, ffi [^]
Thence Koy6, the sound, Omdvi,
gj|
jSJf
become or be known.
become
to
Ardye,
to hear;
89.
or Ivae, to be said or named,
^x,
-f
1
Ari, 7'J, to exist; ^
THE VERB.
VII.
(= wrw
which too much resembles the ne-
Kikoyeken
^ ^ ^),
(j^
it
have
will
loud.
Remark. The substantive forms Ivdyuru, SirdyftrU, Kikdyuru, Omovoyuru,
mean
that which has been said, called, heard, thought, Ardyuru, that which
has gotten existence, that which appears, and exists. Used attributively, they are equivalent to our passive participle of the past time. Sirdyeru
has been brought to knowledge
Kono mi fasirano kamivd
mono
that temple
is
to be heard here.
people, Buddhas that exist,
Itik 6ye-mdsu)
Ardyuru mono fU6 ,
- all the things, people
,
Hotdke
III.
The most usual
Wr
what
Ano ,
,
tera
the bell of
the things
,
etc.
The forms quoted, Ivdyurn, Sir ay uru, Ardyiirn agree Chinese expressions:
,
ivdyurii Save no
kami ndri, these three Kamis are the so called Leading-gods. no kanega kokomade kik6yu (in the spoken language
is
perfectly with the
gjf So wdi,
derivation of passive verbs
nondeflecting verb Ar)e, u, eru, uru,
is
effected
by means of the
= to become, which
ete etc.,
is
suffixed to
I
the is
substantive form of a transitive verb,
by which
its
weak termination u
elided; thus:
Ake, to open; Akdru, opening; passive Ak6ru-\-dre
Mi.
to see;
Mirn
Miru, seeing;
The etymological dictionary Wagun Siwori,
raye as a lengthening of re, does not say.
= Mirdre,
to be seen.
Fiku -\-dre = Fikdre, to be drawn.
Fiki, to draw; Fiktt, drawing;
1)
-{-are
Akerdre, to be opened.
vol.
37
p.
and siraye as a lengthening of
2 recto sire.
splits siraye into si
What
and raye, declares
the lengthening means, the author
CHAPTEE
According to
this rule the
VII.
THE VERB,
243
89.
passive verbs following are formed.
Nondeflecting. Ag)e, eru, to hoist, raise,
Agerar)e, u, uru
lift;
etc.,
to be hoisted.
u, to be shared.
Wak)e, eru, to share;
Wakerar)e
Tat)e, eru, to erect;
Taterar)e, u, to be erected.
At)e, eru, to touch, hit;
Aterar)e, u, to be touched.
Sadam)e, eru, to define;
Sadamerar)e, u, to be defined.
Sim)e, eru, to charge, to
,
Simerar)e, u, to be charged.
let;
Ir)e, eru, to receive;
Irerar}e, u, to be received.
J, Iru, to shoot;
Irar)e, u, to be shot.
Deflecting. to become.
/, u, verbal element, to be;
Ar)e,u, uru, to get existence
N)i, u, to be;
Nar)e, u, to become.
Nag)i, u, to throw anything forward
Nagar)e, u, to stream. Kava, fata na-
Knsdwo
at its full length. to
mow
nagu,
,
gdru, the river, the banner streams.
grass.
Nuk)i, u, to draw out;
Nukar)e, u, to be drawn out.
Kog)i, u, to burn, scorch;
Kogar)e, u, to be burnt.
Nas)i, u, to cause to be, to produce;
Nasar)e, u, to be produced.
Idds)i, or Das)i, u, to bring to light,
Idasar)e, u, to be produced.
produce
;
Kndds)i, u, to drop; trans, to
let fall;
Kudasar)e, u, to be dropped, to descend. Osar)e, u, to be pressed.
Os)i, u, to press;
Kor6s)i, u, to cause to clot; to
kill;
Korosar)e, u, to be
killed.
Watds)i, u, to set over; trans.
Watasar)e, u, to be set over.
Fanas)i, u, to loosen; trans.
Fanasar)e, u, to be loosened.
make
Otos)i, u, to
Fanats)i
(tsi
=
ti),
fall;
to fell;
u, to loosen
;
Otosar)e, u, to be felled.
Fanatdr)e
,
u,
to
be
loosened
;
to
be
banished. Uts)i, u, to beat;
Utdr)e, u, to be beaten.
Mots)i, u, to catch hold of;
Motdr)e, u, to be held.
Iv)i, u, (li, lu), to say; to be called;
Ivdr)e, u, to be called.
Ov)i, u, to pursue;
Ovdr)e, u, to be pursued.
Kdv)i, u (Kai, Kau), to change, barter;
Kavdr)e, u, to be or
may be
changed.
CHAPTER
244
VII.
THE VERB.
89.
Kttv)i, M, to eat;
Kuvdr)e, u, to be eaten, to be eatable.
Usinav)i, w, to lose;
Usinavdr)e, u, to be lost.
to
w,
Ok8ndv)i,
act,
treat,
perform,
Ok8navdr)e, M, to be treated, performed or committed.
commit;
Yobar)e, M, to be called.
Yob)i, u, to call,
Musub)i, u, to knot, to
Musub6
tie;
(not bd) r)e,u, to be tied, to be
knotted together.
Yom)i, w, to read;
Yomdr)e, w, to be read.
Um)i, w, to bear;
Umdr)e, M, to be born.
Nom)i, M, z,
i,
,
to drink;
Nomdr)e, u,
M, to sell;
Urdr)e,
Sirdr)e, w, to be
know;
Remark
1.
to be sold, to be for sale.
Kirdr)e, M, to be cut.
M, to chop, to cut; M, to
M,
drunk, to be drinkable.
to be
Has the Japanese
known.
passive verb a potential force? Implicit, yes,
vegetables that are eaten," includes
but not explicit! Just as our expression:
the idea, that they are eatable, so the Japanese verb, especially
its
attributive
form, may, in the idea of the speaker, have a potential force, and Kuvareru
= a turnip being eaten, may mean that it is an eatable one. Compare the Sanscrit Amltab'a, - immensa vita, unmeasured and unmeasurable life. into,
Thus when the proposition sold cheaper than those
language
made
Cloths imported from foreign countries , can be
:
in Japan"
*)
,
translated into the Japanese spoken yori, gai-k6k& kara watarimas'ta
Nippon de tslcuremasta tarn-mono
is:
tarn-mono wa yasiiku urare-mas'
2
),
it
declares, that cloths,
which have come from
foreign countries, are sold cheaper, than cloths which are
made
in Japan, and
the Japanese text has a fact in view, that includes the possibility, whereas the
English
can be sold" speaks of the possibility merely.
thing" the Japanese says:
able to understand
Remark
2.
it,
Wakdri-masdntf,
,
=
Not understanding any
I don't understand it; not being
he says Wakdri deki-masdnti.
The language of courtesy, which
gives to the predicate verb the
passive form, although logic requires the active (in treating the forms of courtesy,
1) R.
2)
BROWN,
Why
Colloquial Japanese, p. 8.
not rather:
yasuka ware-mas'.
N.
60.
Gai-koku kara watari-mas'ta tarn-mono wa Nippon de tsiikure mafia tarn-mono yori
CHAPTER
we
THE VERB.
VII.
shall discuss this question further), gives a passive
also.
245
89, 90.
form to intransitive verbs
Verbs of that character resemble the Greek Middle voice, or even the Latin
Deponent Verbs; names, however, with which we
To
shall not
embarras the Japanese.
the passive verbs derived from intransitive verbs belong,
/,
Mair)i, u
(^^),
to enter;
Mairar)e.
Aruk)i, u (^pJis^J*), to step;
Arukar)e.
Ner)i, u
Nerar)e.
(JH^),
to sleep;
Wak)i, u(ffi%), to become divided;
Remark
Our method
3.
Wakar)e, uru, to be divided.
of deriving the passive form,
1857, and afterwards (1863) adopted by Mr.
which
original Japanese method, according to
first
made known
in
BROWN, does not agree with the
R.
for ages a verb
and been inserted in the
u, uru), has been imagined
g.:
Irarje, uru.
iru()jlj^), to dwell, stay; passive
iri,
e.
Raruru
(i.
e.
Rar)e,
dictionaries of the country,
l
as equivalent to the Chinese verb
^? p t
ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PASSIVE VERB.
90.
verb
1.
The
passive,
object,
its
which e.
predicate,
suffers
an action,
is
subject (Nominative), and the
MidzU ug6kasdru,
g.
the water
brought into
is
motion. 2.
The verb remains
action,
ugdkasdru. 3.
passive
is
as
object
Compare
112.
The verb
considered impersonal and the object undergoing the to
the
passive stands in
as a genitive, before it:
in
action,
its
the
Accusative,
substantive form and has
thus
its
complement,
Midzuno ugdkasdruru, the becoming moved
ment) of the water, or even that of the water, which
MidzUwd
(the
move-
moved, which gets
is
movement. 4.
The
racterized
sake of
object,
from which the action proceeds, precedes as complement, cha-
by the termination If
no object
idea of the Greek verb, 5.
The
is
ni.
or
by
.
.
.
no t&mdni, = in behalf of, for the
mentioned, the passive form
medium, or the Latin
definition of the material,
v.
may
also include the
reflexivum.
from which any thing derives
or origin, assumes the genitive or even the ablative form in
yon
its
existence
or kara.
Examples of the use of the passive forms. Midzuvd ftgdstyd nagdru, the
river flows eastwards.
S$ri&n6 de
wd
itr6-
CHAPTEE
246 masenu, for this price
masdnu, I do not
tiri
silkworm
Sirusaretaru mono, it
exercise;
Mi, miru,
of the winds)
~J$
(
is
is
Si ^0
much
mitsi sakdnni
Wau-ziva
taken into the arms and saved (from the
is
Ziyau mon nite
(
fusdgu nari
,
besi
^j
to
v
when
|
made
idaki tortte,
^ v)
wo
is
u, to be
criminal's throat;
set
own
reported that the prince
it is
seme ydburdruru toki , tou-siya
the gate of a castle
is
broken by assault
,
it
Mukdsiva takawo
a fact, that formerly the falcon trained to sport was
it is
up, placed high.
Eubi wo
Manuk)i, M,
sent to his
perch on the right hand. Su)e, uru, to roost; Sues)i, u, to
Su6sar)e,
ma-
Umdre from
dies in the evening,
sata ari,
to practise;
i,
fire).
t6
the morning-face (the flower
sisu,
shut by means of a scythed chariot. Yabur)i, u, to break.
migini suesaresi to nari,
dkondvardru
practised; Okona)vi, vulg.
to see; Miye, to appear, seem.
Mikovro tsukdvasaru
be sent.
will
way
silkworms hatched.
F$t6wo moto-kuniye tsukdvasaru, = the man
#ra/, to bear.
country.
Kono
made known.
born in the morning and
is
Kdvlko umdre-tari, the
or Umaresi kaviko,
Asdgdvo asani umdrete yubeni
out.
90.
Watdkusi kono sindwo sond ndddndewd
*).
Umdretartf,
things
nukaretari, the prince
draw
THE VEEB.
these goods for that price.
seems that this
miydtdri,
to
sell
hatched.
is
not sold
is
it
VII.
make
roost;
Toga-ninno kubiwo kiru, to cut a
mono, one whose throat
kiraretaru (or kirareta)
is cut.
O '
r
^9 JL f-^-*"
Aku-fuuni fanatarete tsdku-gan-si-taru yosiwo tsin-fao-zu, the
,
T
**x ?
2
by an
Fttdni tasinameraru
nan-giwo serdru, = killed
he
,
wind and driven on
ill
is
difliculty is
(
^^
V^" '
caused by others.
"
A^
'
\/f
J}f f
BR i-"-l
) 7, /
= Fyto ni
Ten-wauni korosdru, he
is
bite.
Inuni kamaretdrU fit6, a person bitten by a dog; Kazdni ordru take no ko, a young bamboo cane, which is, or
can be, broken by the wind. ni yadowarete, fore (the
Koreni
y6tte
.
.
.
fi-youni idzu.
k&sd-kari, ine-karite, do-minno
ta-sftki,
Bonzes of Corea) go out at day-wages.
plough the
fields,
mow
husbandmen. Yadov)i, u, to
1)
vexed by others,
shore. Fanatsi, set free.
by the emperor.
Kam)i, u, to
one,
(the ship) has been set adrift
that
Y
^
Hbfir*,
report has been spread,
_
if
Shopping-Dialogues, page
4.
And
Mata
mononi
fiyaku-siyqu
avi onazi, there-
while they, hired by any
grass, cut rice, they assimilate themselves to the
hire.
Fatova takani ovdrtte Syak'-sonno fudokdro
CHAPTER
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
ni tobi-irinw, the dove pursued
Mimana
pursue.
tsuini
247
90, 91.
by the falcon, flew into S'akya's
Sinrano tameni forobosdru, the
lap. Ov)i, w, to
state of
Mimana
is
at
demolished on behalf of (= by and for) Sinra. Forob)i, w, to perish; Fo-
last
robos)i, w, to
^ fe
dies.
& =/= ^2 HMC TEL
_7S*
ffi.
ffi
tyfy
O -
Kono
*
32*
^Eife
Fono tamdni
demolish.
sai(J
f?~
yakarete sinu,
burnt by the
he
fire,
Yak)i, u, trans, to burn.
fit6
that,
kanardzu onino tamdni madovasarento ivaku. that
man
will
certainly be
it
is
misled by the devil.
XE
Madov)i, w, to err, to wander; Madovds)i, w, to make err;
yv
Madovasar)e, u, to be brought so far, that one errs or wan-
Sivo-nawano kori nardru sima, an island caused by the clotting of sea-foam.
Kova Fino-kamino
tsino nareru nari, this (spirit)
produced out of the blood of
is
the Fire-god.
THE NEGATIVE FORM OP THE JAPANESE VERB.
91.
Theory of the Derivation.
I.
In the negative sentence, the Japanese language attaches the negative to the predicate word.
the
existence
It
denies that
of the
an action or
subject or
object,
state exists; but it does not
deny
while the action or state, in which
no one comes; he hears no-
both are concerned,
is
thing." Therefore
unites the negative element, n, with the verbal element
it
existing as positive, as in:
98 and 103) and thereby gets the forms n -h
si (see
pronounced
as ndzi or dzi;
i
= Ml and n
two root-forms, of which the former
+- si
= ZI, j
i
or $/,
proper to the
is
spoken, the latter to the written language.
These terminations, in nondeflecting affirmative verbs, are immediately added to the root (Ake-zi,
7^" ^, Mi-zi, L ^), whereas
at once mutates into a (Yuki, to go,
and
Yukdzi,
follow the deflecting conjugation,
zi
X* zu, at once serve for the substantive
mark
,
omitted
1)
so necessary to distinguish 2. a
#X
in deflecting ones in
^^ ffi
[fc S?,
official
this
not to go).
while the closing form
i
Ni
X nu and
and the attributive form. The Nigorifrom
2.
#X
(to
make go)
,
is
.
For instance, in the
i,
publication of the Treaties concluded with Foreign powers.
frequently
CHAPTER vn. THE NEGATIVE VERB.
248
The root-form conjugation,
is
ni,
91.
which we are obliged to adopt as the basis of the negative
not in use and, in poetry, appears to be superseded by
EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF NEGATIVE VERBS.
Affirmative.
ne.
CHAPTER
II.
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
01.
249
INFLECTION OF THE NEGATIVE VERBS.
Synopsis of the negative forms of inflection, compared with the affirmative.
YUK)i, -u
(deflecting), go;
YUKAZ)i,
-u,
not to go.
CHAPTER
250 Omovanu-{-te
>f
(
Ardnu-}-te(^
tf *t /^
passes into
ffij )
,(
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
7>r",
jfij )
(^P^
8m8vdde,pj:. 8m6vdnde,nok thinking.
M)
t'7%
-Swfe,
^ ^ ^-^ 7",
Om6voy6nu-\-te
pron. Jrawcfo, not existing.
.^racfe,
^ > 7% Sardde
Sa (= stka) ra/2M-j-te(^^n5) &mu-|-te
r%
91, 92.
pron. Sarande not being ,
,
as.
. .
pron. Se-nde, not doing.
Omdvoydde, pron. timdvoydnde, not being thought.
CONTINUATIVE FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE VERB.
92.
which
is
1.
The written language supersedes the termination
zi
by
zar)i,
u,
considered a fusion of zu -\-ari.
7 ^1f 9> n
becomes Akezdri,
Akezi, not to open,
^e opening.
t t
2.^9? no*
to be seeing.
Jlfm, not to see,
Mizdri,
Yukdzi, not to go,
Yukazdri,
i#^f >J>
not to be going.
Masdzi, not to excel,
Masazdri,
^ty*
not to be the better.
Stkdzi, not to be so, as
Stkazdri,
2/^^9,
The forms
for the
l
)
moods and tenses are the same
,
continually not to be so.
as those of ari; thus: zar)i, w,
uni, eba, edomo; Future an; Condit. aba; Preterit zari)ki,
si,
keri, kern, keruni,
kereba, keredomo; Future keran, ken; Condit. keraba.
The written language
2.
attaches ar)z, M, to the negative gerund zi-de
opposes to the affirmative form Ake-te-ari, to be opening
(
and
78) the negative
form Ake-zi-de ari, which, in the spoken language, passes into Akeide
ar)i,
u,
to be in the not opening.
The spoken language
3.
with
uses
its
negative gerund
. . .
nu-de in connection
ar)z, M.
% 7* 7
Akdnii-de ari,
7
Minfi-de ari,
2.
Yukantt-de ari,
z-XZy?*),
From Minde
this
tr
X 7^7
}
)
,
commonly pronounced
as
Akende ar.
Minde ar.
9,
Yukande ar.
derivation arise the very
common
Preterit
Minu-de
atta, has not been seeing, and the Future Minu-de aran,
A
arita, pron.
Min-de aroo,
not be seeing.
will
The poet supersedes the negative termination nu with naki,
4.
(- without, see page 108); thence
naku
1)
1
),
= Omovanu, without
A
nai, naku
Ave-naku = Avenu, without daring; Omova-
thinking.
Might not these be forms, connected with
$
107. 2.?
CHAPTER
The
Yedo
of
dialect
VII.
alike,
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
251
92, 93.
and that by preference, uses nai (= nasi, naki,
without) and the thence derived continuative form Nakdri and Nakeri, as nega-
and supersedes Akdnft, Minti and Yukdnu with the forms Ake-
tive auxiliary verb,
Yuka-nai, Yuka-nakdr)i u, = to
Mi-nai, Mi-nakdr)i, u:
nai, Ake-nakdr)i, u;
,
be without opening, without seeing, without going. Thence t^Yukanaide for Yu-
With
kdzuni, without going.
the derivative form nakari the negative verb follows
the affirmative conjugation, as appears from the examples following:
Ake-nakdrebd
,
nakaraba,
Deki-nakareba
one
is
without opening.
Mi-nakattdrabd
if
one
is
without opening.
Simava-nakatta kara
,
as
,
nakaraba,
as
nakeraba, if
it
TsUkd-nakatta
success.
was
Toba-nakatta soar, to
;
from
,
go out.
did not fly; from Tobi, to
fly.
written language opposes to the forms TsUke-nakatta and Toba-nakatta the
forms: Tsukeru koto nakatta and Tobu koto nakatta, flying did not happen.
pen
one has not applied
to
De, deru,
seeing.
The
,
De-nakatta, he did not come out; from
successless.
he was without
as
one has
Tsuke, to apply.
Mi-nakdtta, he was without seeing. kara,
as or after
;
successless.
if it is
,
to finish.
was without
it
if
,
not finished from Simavi (vulg. Simai),
does not issue or
it
proceed.
nakereba
one has not seen.
as
(nasi), that
Compare Sore
i.
the beginning and the
e.
futd-tabi kitdru koto nasi,
it
does not hap-
he appears for the second time.
POEM OF THE FORBIDDING IMPERATIVE. 93. 1.
The Forbidding Imperative
affirmative verb, followed
nayo
*)
consists of the substantive
by the forbidding na (- Lat.
ne) or
form of the
more emphatically
69.
Compare
Akeru, the opening;
Akerund or Akeru nayo, don't open!
S&ru, the doing;
Surund, don't do!
Wasururit, forgetting;
Wasur&rund
Tatdku, striking;
Tatdlcttnd, don't strike!
Nasdrtt, making;
Nasar&na, don't make!
Kiku, hear; Miru, /Sw,
1-3
see;
doing, from Si;
n/
,
don't forget!
Kikuna, don't hear; Miruna, don't
Suna
"j-
(^^) 3
.
Wagun
5
do not!
Sitoori.
Compare
$
96.
see!
CHAPTER
252
If the idea of
2.
of na or nay 6,
= not
to be
may not
that
continuance
f# ^
Nakare,
92. 4)
(
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
is
,
used.
is
associated with the forbidding, then, instead
mood
the imperative
:),
(fyj
The
93, 94.
action which
is
of Nakdri,
characterized by nakdre as one
be, precedes as subject proposition characterized by koto (= thing);
not doubt! Utagau-koto nakdre (tyl^jk.}, let the doubting not be!, for:
thus: 3.
The forbidding proposition begins with
being in
Na
affirmative root-form, followed
its
iviso, say not.
Na
atasi tokdroni
Nd
nakdrisd, pron.
i
^
$fj gjf
go not elsewhere.
so,
Na
(= Lat. ne), the predicate verb
by so (compare
69).
^ H|
.
gjf
Na
Na yurusiso, grant not! Na motomeso, n'acquerez
nakdssd, not without!
=
must be!
it
pas
.
-
*).
Nakdr)i, w, to
be without 4.
The forbidding becomes a wish
Na
(= Lat. quaesdj.
ivi kasi,
(optative),
may he
when
so is superseded
by
kasi
not say!
Politeness does not allow a person bluntly to use the imperative to his equals
or superiors. Instead of
nasdre-mdsftnd,
under notice,
=
is
Miruna,
see not, expressions such as
not be seen, are used.
let there
Mi-nasdr&nd, or Mi-
kamai kudasdruna*)', forms,
superseded by
=
JSJamaina,
to
let it
not come
which we
shall
return in our illustration of the language of courtesy. Appendix to Chapter VII.
FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE PRETERIT. 94.
1.
The negative termination mi becomes nanda,
~Y
&".
Akdnu, not to open;
Akenanda, not to have opened.
Ddnu, not
Denanda, not
to
go out,
Samdnti,, not to
MinU, not
awake;
to
out.
Samenanda, not to have awake. to have seen.
Minanda, not
to see;
have gone
Yukdn%, not to go;
Yukananda, not to have gone.
MasdnU, not
Masenanda,
to be;
or, in the vulgar language of
Yedo, Masinanda, not to have been. Mi-masdnu, not to Tsure-datsite
Afodori, to
2.
I)
Mi-masenanda
,
not to have seen.
modorananda, they have not come back together (>j^
come back.
(>P 9$ j^)-
see;
J0J {i|f).
Fin wo sirananda, he has not learned to know poverty
Sirii to learn to
know.
The spoken language of Yedo uses the forms Ake-nakdtta, Mi-nakdtta,
RODRIGUEZ, pag
56.
2) Shoppinff-Dialoffues, p. 21.
CHAPTER
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
253
94, 95.
Yuka-nakdtta, = was without opening, without seeing, without going,
from Ake-nakdri, Mi-nakdri and Yuka-nakdri. See
The written language employs
3.
negative
form zari
continuative
which was not agreeable.
(
derived
93. 4.
..zari)ki, si, keri etc., the preterit of the
92. 1).
Osikarazari si tn6tsi
J
)
,
the
life
Osiki, agreeable.
FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE FUTURE.
95. 1. de-ari,
The spoken language, which employs the continuative forms Akdnu-
Minu-de-ari, YukdnU-de-ari, cited in
92. 3.,
makes use of the future
of an, thus arau (TJ^jj*) or aroo, and says: Ak6nu-de-arqu
Mnu-de-arqu 2,
1)
The written language employs ..zaran,
Yukazari
Yukazaran or Yukazu
nan, not to be about to to
a negative future in
Mi-mai,
see.
Yuku-mazi,
Yuku-mai,
go.
Aru-mazi,
Aru-mai,
be.
these examples
.
.mazi, *? &,
has arisen (comp.
,
it is
evident that, in nondeflecting verbs, mazi
is
joined
root, and in deflecting verbs, to the attributive form.
ma,
I consider this the substantive
ndkit-sitd,
as
it
is
not to be sought in zi, but must
ma, which
signifies
room, space,
as there is not even (wo) time (or oppor-
kazdni makdsete yuku,
The action now,
from the example,
Hiyaku-nin,
N.
is
50.
for
used
appears from the expression: Ikariwo ordsuma,
tunity) to cast out the anchor, they abandon themselves to the
1)
see.
nan, not to be about to go.
Mi-mazi,
also with regard to time,
on.
aranan (com-
vulgo Ake-mai, shall not open.
Since the power to indicate the future,
mo
mo
91. II).
Ake-mazi,
in
nan, ..zu
of the z, the vulgar form mai, ?^f
elision
Yukazide and Yukaide,
lie
to
The written language, moreover, has
from which by
to the
the future of the con-
the future Akezaran, or Akezu to nan, not to be about to open.
Mizaran, or Mizu
From
,
and forms from
Mizari
2)
^^ ^
92. 1), or, instead of zaran, ,.zu to
(
75. II, 3),
Akezari
Yu-
,
he will not be opening, seeing, going.
,
tinuative zari
pare
Minu-de-arau
,
which there
something that
is
is
wind and pass
no time or opportunity,
not yet happening,
as it appears
or has not yet hap-
CHAPTER
254
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
With regard
pened (Mi-rai), but no real future. to
ma
what
it
is
be considered as an
may
95.
to the negative
form of nasi (n-\-si=nzi,
elliptical
more probable a fusion of the negative element n with the ,
or
siki, siku, sisi
si
(n -{- siki =
16)
(
ziki ,
^^)
it
for
zi joined
zi,
>),
or
form
derivative
only denies, that time or
opportunity for something exists, and consequently mazi too
The Japanese custom of passing masi
form
is
,
properly a present.
mazi must therefore be disapproved of *).
Mazi, vulg. Mai, are: the adverbial form mdzikttvd, vulg.
Inflectional forms of
maiknvd, and the modal mazikini, vulgo maikini, maini, no opportunity being;
mai
or as, there
toki, if,
no opportunity; mai tomo, even
if
there
no oppor-
is
and moods are expressed by the auxiliary verbs nari,
tunity. Tenses keri,
is
to be,
and
have been. Mazikinari (A Maina); Maziki nar)eba; -edomo, -edo; -aba (A
Ma-
zikinara); Maziki nar)au ,
A-o,
-oo.
(A
Maziker)i,u,
Maiker)i, u); Maziker)eba;
-edomo; Maziken.
Examples When,
of the use of the negative forms.
from some of the passages following, not only the
as it will appear
subject, but the object also, or even the appositive definition of a negative verb , is
isolated
A wa
by va,
or
mo,
it
is
intended to bring out the negation with
more emphasis. [Root-form.]
Ame
tsutsi flrdkesi yori
kono kata ^mdno told fod6 dai-fei-ndru
Yak&no simaydri
koto arazi; nisiva Kikai
figdsi
Oslyuno Sotoga-fdma made gao-
and earth
reino y&ki-toddkazdru tokdromd nd$i, since the development of heaven
To
a state of peace so general as at present, has not existed.
which belongs
the Yaku-island,
of the Eastern
Osiyu,
there
Government does not
the
of
Firdkesi, preterit
Krdke ,
is
=
reach. to
open
itself,
sikyustte
(Dai Gaku,
1)
Jf\
,
7),
Mr. HEPBURN, as a future
not come",
is
to unfold.
Arazi, negative root-form,
coordinative.
=
not exist,
Todokazdru, attributive negative form of
reach to.
Sdnd moto middretd, utsuu-site ,
to the farthest shore
not even one place, to which the authority of
used here because, the connection of the sense
TodoK)i, u,
the region of ghosts,
to
the West, from
differs
sono
site"
osamdru mdnftvd &razi; sono atsuusurU tokdrono mono
utsu-surit
tokdrono
mono
dtsuki koto
= something (mdndvd), of which the top
in his excellent Japanese English Dictionary 2e edition p.
negative
affix
is
kore"
&razu
regulated,
while
197, on defining ,,ji, 2/,
to verbs expressing doubt or uncertainty, ,,Kilaru
from our analysis of mazi.
imdda
mazi, vulgo mai, will
The Japanese themselves however do the same.
CHAPTER the root
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
in disorder, does not exist; neither,
is
which has been made thin,
thick, thin, or that
Yoke mugura
"
sigereru
Fito koso miyene "
In the
body
cell
solitary
,
which has been made
that,
thick.
y ado no
"
akiva Id-nikrri
sabisikini 1
).
where the plant Mugura has sprung np luxuriantly no,
Autumn
to be seen;
is
is
has come.
Miyene, the negative root-form of Miye , to appear.
Aki, autumn; light
[Closing-form.] Ki-sinno tdku-tdru koto, sore sakdn ndru
korewo
K&azu; mononi td-siU nokdsu
kiite
we
and there
forms Miredomo and
(page 109,
tu
^7
N. T'
Korewo mite mizu;
Classics.
and Kiln, to hear, for which
see,
are
Kikedomo,
Bekardzu
used.
=
spiri-
look for them, but do
but do not hear them; yet they enter into
listen to,
Mite and Kiite, gerund of Mi, to concessive
We
nothing without them." LEGGE. Chinese
is
Ted!
how abundantly do
bekar&zu.*),
tual beings display the powers that belong to them.
not see them;
255
95.
Vol.
I.
all
things,
p.
261.
in another edition of the teit the
may
not,
from the adjective Beti
73).
^
Pi
^ipi'*
/
IT/I
O
Sono kiyo-riu-bano siu-ini mon siyouwo
3tr ^
Ide-iri zi-zai-ni-su besi
Jji 3
neither gate
3
around
) ,
this
abode shall
^'
-?
.
and coming
nor fence be placed. In going out in, people shall be free.
o Y
$1/7 f^D ^
*j$
^ 2/
tri
*
^
/fl
f-
Yama-nakani kuro-kino go-siyowo
lil
Wr^
Pb t
/'I 3
SxK
g_
/f^
i-
^V
^
in the building of a
,
palace of barked timber in the mountains (the prince)
7^a
"/
)
tsukuri, ken-yakutoo
I
^ IT
tamiwo rau-se-simezu.
motsivi,
"
'
4
cons i(i ers economy
^
to
J
J
'
and does not permit the people
,
drudge.
[Substantive form.]
$fc^ '^
"til^
~f-
* 2?
ifc
ix^r^ i/"^*'
^^ Tarazdru,
=
^ ^ii
O
Wawwo
i^
ara^w
^/
is
^* ;ix
a
5 )
w?aw
^arazaruva se-zdru nan, a
the king's not exercising the Imperial sway
,
because he does not do
^e
^
^
^
it,
not because he
is
,
not
-
the not being, the negative substantive form of tari,
=
te
an, $78.
II.
Atarastru,
the not being able, from Atdvi.
1)
2)
A
hermit's farewell,
N.
47 of Hiyaku-nin
Tschung-yung or the Mean, XVI.
II. 4) .ZWp/HWt o dai itsiran, Vol.
itsu.
is
Gotfiow
ttryonm THUXB.
of 1868. Art. II 3) Netherl.-Jap. Treaty
1.
1. r.
Tahe mugura
39th king.
5) Meng-ttst,
Book
I,
Pt
I. J 7.
al.
10.
256
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
Mitsino okonavdrezajTu , ware kordwo l
)
oyob&zft.
,
that the path (of the
walked in of the path),
come up
stupid do not
this I
to
Mean)
not walked in
(literally
:
the not being
know. The knowing ones go beyond
it,
and the
it.
Okonavarezaru , not being practised, from Okonav)i,u, v. to overstep,
Tsi-siydva kordni sugu; gu-siyava
sirdri. is
95.
to practise.
Sug}i,u, iru, uru, nondeflecting
Oyobdzu or Oyotdnu, not to reach, from Oyo&)i t u.
go beyond.
Sira-notova urusi
nite nwrazu-site, fi nite
the so called pale arrow shafts,
mo kogazaxuwo
ivu nari, concerning
people understand by them, such as are not
daubed with varnish, nor burnt with
fire.
Ko
Nur)i, u, to daub.
Sinserarezaxuwo omonbakarazu
(~J$*
^^
'jpi )'
waa^
incredible
is
is
not ta-
ken into consideration. Sin-i)e, uru, to believe.
^
^
y 7 Ha fb*-
2.
5
T*T
=eb.
Ip.
3%
7
Mt.
^ =
"M*
A
^?
atta,
I
should like to see
him do
that business,
Osor)e, eru, nondeflecting, to fear.
Onordni sik&z&ru monowd tomotd suru kdto nakdre, make not a
[Attributive.] is
u, to ponder.
undaunted.
#>
who
,
Watdkusi kareqa sono koto wo ds6rez\mi surunowo mi-tdi
monode
^ fa W
K ^ J^'f
person,
Omonbakar)i
not your equal, your mate.
Sikazdru, continuative form of Sikdzu, and this from Si)i, u, to equal.
Kono riwo
Mata sezdru
sir&z&ra. fttd,
someone who does not know
sir&z&ru tok6ro ari, there
tokdro an' 2 ), there
Sir)i, u, to
know.
is
Yoku-s)e, uru, to do good.
Yurano
to
wo
"
Skipper, sailing over the
Oh!
A so
Meni
it
the
that
it is
Tschung-yung. IV.
3) Hyaku-nin,
N.
46.
kadziwo tave!
kovino mitsi kana
mouth by Yura,
of love, that does not
3
).
let loose
know
(pj'^
the helm!
whither }$?$>)
it
na
goes! koto, a matter
not to be seen by eyes, nor to be spoken by any mouth.
Fitoni sirarenu yauni suru, so to act that
[Gerund.] Takava
I)
way
"
miydnu, kutsini ivarenu fodo ki-meo
uncommon,
A
is
"
well.
Sezi, not to do; thence Sezar)i, u.
wataru funa-bito
Yukuyemo sirsam
Mata ydku-
what one does not yet know.
what one does not yet do
is
this law.
tteni
it
be not remarked by others.
sokonezu-sit& , akuni sokonuru
2) Ibid. XII.
mono
nari,
- the hawking-
CHAPTER falcon
is
A
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VIJ.
something (mono) that
257
no harm by hunger, but is spoiled by
suffers
surfeiting:
Faravdzfrsite tori-age mdsu-mai, without paying I shall not receive (the
A
goods.)
Nedanga
the world and unacknowledged, Noff)i, u, to
no change in price takes
kavar&zii sit6, while
Kun-si yowo nogarete, sirarezu-sitb ,
to be
95.
ktiizu
1
the superior
),
not grieved at
is
push back; Nogdr)e, eru, being drawn back.
known; Sirarezu, not
to be
known.
place.
retired
man,
from
it.
Sir), u, to learn to know; Sirar)e ,
Kui,
[Time-defining Local.] Kokdro arazareld, mite mizu, Mite kikdzu, ktirdute,
when
adzlvdiwd sirdzu*),
hear and do not understand;
Compare LEGGE, Kun-si iru
mind
the
we
not present,
is
Chinese Classics. Vol.
t6 sitd,
sinogdzu. Ka-ini
we
I.
taddsiu-sfte',
Kami Tenwo uramizu. Simo
man having
eat.
simowo
artte (dtte),
fit6ni motomc-
fltdwo togamezIL
Karuga yu&ni Kun-siva yasiikini wite motte me'iwd mdtsu*). that (koto nasi) the superior
we
232.
p.
kamiwo fikdzu. Onore'wd
zareba, sunavatsi itrdmi nasi;
what we
taste of
zi-t6ku-sezdru koto nasi. Ziyau-{ni
arite,
t
so"n&
look and do not see;
and do not know the
eat
ttr*
nondeflecting verb, to be grieved at.
It does
not occur
once entered on a fixed position, does
not continue to be himself. Is he in a high situation, he does not contemn his inferiors. Is
he in a low situation he does not try to pull down his superiors. Recti,
fying himself and seeking for nothing from others, he has no dissatisfaction. Since
he
not averse to Heaven, which
is
who
are below him, so
Zi-toku,
nasi
(is
is
man
the superior
Zi-toku \sezdru koto,
self-preservation.
not).
above him, and does not abuse the people,
is
Sinogazu, from Sinog}i, u, to turn
Motomezareba , the time-defining
always contented and abides his destiny.
=
off.
the not remaining what one
Motomezari, not to seek
local of
Manabazaru
for,
and
koto ari, korewo
O
J&T
iffeu'
5^^ jjh
*lt
tffit-'
3
tffi^'
HB
x"
9
v-
b v/l"J
ffi %" 4dth
^
>f?
T
ifft^
^t
9
^ azu
^
nue
it,
[Concessive]. Mi-karino toki
hawking the falcon
1) Tschung-yung.
XL
2)
is
of
it.
it
,
from Motom)e t
Is it that
ttr*.
manandeyoku-se*arQba t razareba,
it,
does not
become
he has not examined something, after the examination understand it
/aarazumo takawo let fly
.
he (the superior man) does not discon-
he does not give
Dai Gaku.
this
and when he learns
thing,
the subject to
happens that he has not learned some-
^ and might he not
princely
^^
^ azu *)
ft
is
Tovazaru koto ari, korewo tovute
-
^ master \^-f
is,
Fikdzu, not draw or drag, from FIt)i,
up. tobdsu, at the time of the
even without design.
VII. 2.
3)
Ttcktmy-ymg. XIV.
4}
Ibid.,
17
XX.
20.
CHAPTER
258
=
Takardzumo
Nippon
zenniva ar-a^aredomo , mare nardzu, = although (this coin)
nite irisi
Irisi. preterit of lr]i,
is
it
ffc
7
^X
7*-^*
-t
V-'
V
y
1^
y
^
-^
"TIC^ ^
if
(a mother)
at
it
then even though she do not hit
it
^^
^ix^Ff *&^
tSfi
duty)
,
sitd notsi tdtsugu (of kd-surii)
has been (a
girl)
Atardzu not ,
who
,
to hit
,
first
not to answer
y&Z^
iv
to,
-^
?
&
may not
articles
far off,
from Tooki (p 108).
kin-gin to gwai-koku
Nippon tsuu-you
karazM. to
T,
ledomo
,
Nippon
ton-sen to
rri
'
yuku
2
bekarazu
)
silver
*.
^B.^"
,
Japanese
and foreign gold and
silver, the export (of it) has
money and uncoined
(not
current
made
no
into coin) gold
diffi-
and
kumsikardzu tomo (or 3
)
,
= even
to
Nippon
Iddomo),
if trade
kin-si no sina-
has no difficulty , concerning
which are forbidden in Japan, in them no trade may be driven.
you forbid
Mata
N.
ix
^
siyau-bai-^tdstt bekardzti,
Nandziga if
There never
be exported.
Siyau-bai-'itdsu koto
mono vd
it.
kwa-heinikosirayezarukin-ginvamotsi-
*.
culty; but Japanese copper silver
she will be not far from
^
4K1-
),
no kin-ginva motsi-yuku koto kurusi-
S3 ^ ~BT -v aE^
?
,
ty\&
=
1
(towards the fulfilling of her motherly
_
rt
monovd ardzu
aims in uprightness of heart
from Atari. Tookardzi, root-form, to be not
K
a ^ 4& 7 ^K^ ffifc-^
sikdu-
learned to bring up a child , and then married afterwards.
,
*,
mo-
t6okardzi;
'
^^f
=?
iiitdmo,
(of
tmdda kdwo ydsVndu kotowd mandnde. o
MC T
'
atardzn. t6
tdmurebd),
c=
[
-^ Z
n ~^
"W h
v
i?*
r>
mot6mebd
Kokoro makotoni korewo
>;
^
v-3^FE
c
?
-v$irx
not rare.
u, to cast, to found.
O
/& ^ \,f*^
95.
fakardzu-site mo from faMr)i, w, to consider, to design.
not a coin cast in Japan,
is
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
sei- ( jjfl it
^) sitimo,
or forbid
it
sarddem.6, even if
sei-sezu.
tomo kareva yahari korewo sum ,
not he will yet do it
is
not
so. Sdri,
de arau,
it.
contracted from Sikdri (page 109
71); to be so.
[Future.] Otoko asdkoni tsuru tokiva at that place, will get
1)
Dai Gaku, IX,
no
uwowo dzu
VIII,
nan
4
),
a boy,
fish.
2.
2) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1858, Art. 3) Ibid., Art
to
al.
1.
XIV,
al.
4.
4) Nippon o dai itsi-ran, Vol. I, p. 11.
if
he angles
CHAPTER
^ ^
fr
* 7
**
b^_^ 7 \
V
^ =
g9
wi arii-mazi, it will not last long, before
?
4g v ^ y
(^?
jg
.-i
yqu-iku-seba
.
1
Tzarz
J*P^ ^v
7
worm) and
mo
-fc
^
#* instead of
ife
^^ T
%
we have
,
happen that one
(the falcon) stays
of not coming
to
on a
let
him
pressions
He tomarite tree,
for
your care,
Kdku-betsu tai-zt-td kotoni
an abbreviation of
we take
orizaruniva (or orizaru kuse araba),
when
7
&,
n/. Compare page 67, line
and does not come
off (or:
ft
>u
3.
when he has
the bad habit
,
(the falcon) does not come off his perch, one must, without baiting,
tsugi,
hunger,
tokuwo
are not such
tsugi,
as:
te-wazawo tsugu rui naradeva, moteivizu,
to
f 7 T*^,
Most fit6wo
the isolated gerund of
osorete
if
the ex-
propagate a family, to propagate the good, to
continue some trade, then (the character Naradeva,
harm.
onzaruniva), itsu-mademo ye wo kawdzu-site, hanahdda
(or
suffer terrible
lydwo
A
pre-
off).
Fokowo onzunba if ttydsti, bdsi,
suffers
no occasion
(soro)
my
according to
If
do with a fusion of 7*
Kino
[Suppositive].
is
Tai-zi-ta koto, a matter of importance.
,
it
no matter of extraordinary importance.
will be
it
ndru-mai,
rear
don't trouble yourself.
it;
naka-naka zi-son-zi oru maziki
tion with regard to the feeding (of the silk-
will then probably not
don't care about
e.
,
one observe the oral communica-
if
),
On-ki-dzukdi-nasdru maziku soro, there i.
the taking of
tatsuru, koto,
Kavi-katano ku-denwo obdye. hon-foowom6tte
y
t^ Wi E&7
v)wo
/=! /=!#
-
scriptions,
your country will
shall take place.
^ *K
:?
#
* /*
it
koto ftsdstki
be subdued by mine.
an oath, that in future no change
>J
259
Nandzino kuni waga-kunino tamtni yoMrdren
Yuku-suyt ^awaru-maziio sei-gon
"t*
95.
W* >g^ ? = ^Ul =
^
fc IX//I h
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
^,
equivalent to tsugi)
Nardn*, not
midzuwo nomazunba,
is
not used.
to be, used aa suppositive form.
in case (the falcon) shunning
men,
does not drink the water.
The negation of a negation
(-&^ "^)
involves a strengthened assertion;
no yuki-toddkazdru tokdromd ntm, there
is
e. g.
Gqu
m
not one place, to which
the authority of the Government does not reach. See page 254.
1}
Yo-san-fi-rok ,
Tart d'elever
les
vers & soie au Japon par
MATTHIF.U BONAFOUS. Ouvrage traduit du teite Japonais par
i. J.
OUKKAKI MORIKOUNI, annutc
HOFFMANN.
et public par
Paris 1818. j 22.
CHAPTER
260
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
VII.
Sirazunbd aru-bekardzu (]^ i.
in the not
e.
one
knowing
y$ -^)
~^\
~flfj
not be
may
,
not be without zeal and diligence,
e.
i.
Sirdzunivd aru bekardzu,
for
= one ought
Fagemi tsutomezumba aru-bekarazu waza nari,
may
95, 96.
to
know.
an occupation in which one
it is
in which zeal and diligence are of
the most importance.
Faru akiva yasezunba aru bekardzu, in spring and in autumn falcon)
must
be lean.
In the oral language the use
is
yauni itasaneba, naranu
must
Yedo
Seneba, naranu,
act so.
to
it
of the time-defining local
express the
street-dialect;
smeba naranft
Ide-tatsi
necessity.
(in the
be).,
necessity." Sa-
Sayooni si-nakeri ya narane),
must happen.
Seneba,
naranu
be thankful for the benefits he receives from Heaven.
man must
Ari-gataki, adj., thankful.
BECOMING AND THE CAUSING TO
96. Ar)i, u, deflecting continuative verb, derived from I (= expire
inflectional forms are: Ari, the root- and,
form (= there
is);
(T^^o 7n30,
it so!
2
by exception
Aru, the substantive form, which
Areba, there or as one
if
go away),
),
is
1
).
Aredomo, although there
is;
future, there will be;
(the termination of an oath).
Aran
koto
also used attributively.
is;
kakuno
Ardba (= Aran
Its
the predicate closing-
Arite, Ariteva, pron. Atte, Attewa, gerund, being, or as one
11.
Comp.
be
,
BE.
being continually in a departing movement, to exist, to be
signifies
Aroo
koto, the
de atta, he was constrained to depart.
Fit6va Tenyori ukuru tokdrono negumiwo ari-gatdkaranoba, naranu,
VERBS EXPRESSING THE BEING, THE
hawking-
(the
lean.
common
very
...ne ba, followed by naranu (not to
one
become
Yas)e, uru, to
A ran, A gotosi
is.
Arau,
(^ $fl
jtfc ),
4- ra'-h va), conditional,
there is, might there be.
Preterit. Ariki; there was.
Aritar)i, u,
and attributive form.
Arisi, substantive Arisi-ytf,6,
a connection cation of
By
2)
come)
,
between
/O
been.
,,
*
and
Naru,
art.
=
They
to
know, that they have
see, as it appears
is
Aru
likewise.
continuative verbs, nor that there
is
from the Wa-gun Siwori, in Aru a mere modifi-
to become, Lat. fieri
this exception they prevent a confusion of the closing
which
Attari, Attaru, Atta, has
whilst there was.
The Japanese themselves seem not
1)
A
form of Ari with that of Are
(
=
to be-
CHAPTER
THE VEBB
VII.
Arisikaba, whilst there was.
261
96.
ARI.
Attareba, as there has been.
Attaredomo, though there has been.
may have
Ariken, there shall or Ariker)i, u, contin. (see
been.
Attaroo, there will have been.
82) , have been.
if
Attaraba,
there has been.
Negative.
A
Ardz)i, u,
Ardnu, not to be,
Ari has the
1.
what
definition,
Arazdr)i, u, contin., not to be.
91;
thing exists, as Local terminating in ni, before
man
Ftt6 ari,
Itsini fttd dri
there are people on the market-place; Fit6 itsini ari
Kin-kwa-san kai-tsiuni
the market-place. is
mountain)
met
the five sorts of grain are
mono
nari, the pith
dri,
illustrious
illustrating it
back to 2.
its
The
also occurs
virtue,
definition
where
it
),
TJC^
the Kin-kwa-san (gold-flower ari, in that
country
sane no &tsini drU
Bin-kuni
ari,
/Sot-
being in poverty and
alctrdkdni suruni dri; tamitoo ardtani
the
way
of the Great Study consists in
is,
followed by the subject, that exists,
hon-batsu ari; waza siu-si art
ro * an<*
-"W^
Mono and Waza As
teral translation should be:
*P
The spoken language it is,
by de,
affairs
),
things have
have end and beginning.
to things, there is a root
and a top
etc.
Conthe
li-
Con-
Mononiva and Wazaniva.
characterises the definition, in
de-ar',' at
1
Monova and Wazava, and
stand for
ceived as local both definitions stand for
this is
people are on
consists in resting in the highest excellence.
a thing
Mono
2Jv $#/
ceived as subject,
= what
^ ^),
without the characteristic of the Local.
^ -W^
3.
),
7Jj
consists in renovating the people (in bringing
it
primitive state!);
lf|* $pf
1
si-sen ni todomdrttni ari
dri',
(
something being in the middle of the kernel of fruit.
is
Dai-Gdk&no mitsivd mdi-tdkuwo
suruni
"ffj
Ninva kudamonono
with.
vaini ari, being in prosperity, having luck. need.
(^ ^
Sono kunini itsutsuno tandtsU-mono
in the sea.
a
it.
Artt fit6, any one being.
is;
where
as subject, the definition
exists,
what
a thing exists,
Sorewa yoki sake de
Yedo da.
ar*,
or sake da,
good wine.
4. If this definition is
an action or a
state, expressed
in the Modal characterized by the termination
te
by a verb,
or de (see
72).
it
is
put
Akete ari,
to be in the opening, to open. 5.
I)
If
it
a quality, expressed by an adjective in ki, as Takaki, high (see
is
Dai Qaku,
$
1.
2) Ibid,
f
3.
262
CHAPTER
THE VERBS ARI, ARE.
VII.
96.
B. 1), the spoken language uses the adverbial form in ku.
9.
Tstikiga takakti,
aru, the high-standing (the culminating) of the moon. 6.
By fusion of the
adverbial
continually to be high.
form ku with
Compare
produced. Takakdr)i, u,
(FU6
ari, people are) prece-
82.
10,
If the definition consisting of a subject
7.
u,
is
ari, kar)i,
and
ari
des a substantive as attributive (or relative) quality, the subject of aru becomes
a genitive definition, and as such generally characterized by no or ga.
aru
itsi,
. .
.
to ari,
an
Yoki nw6i aru expression for
elliptical
saying or the opinion
is
that.
intention, saying was, that
aru or gaaru;
ga+aru
we
.
.
.
.
Nanukani
ivu ari, or
to
.
to
.
.
smell.
omovu
tatsu-besi to arikeri, the
ari, the
meaning,
should start on the ninth day.
aru fit6, an intelligent man.
Sai-tsi
Yekki
mirth; Yekkiga aru koto or Yekkigaru koto, a merry business. Compare
page 114, Remark.
8.
The negative Araz)i, u, = not
the definition, in
which
the Local in ra before
Reini ardzti
(^
it,
a
to exist, just as the affirmative
thing does not exist,
& i Z*
it
jjjfl)?
is
as.g
^1
dJ# ^
:
!/
_
utm
r> ?
ill/
rl"T
^-
l*-Lf
.
9.
elder
",'
3
so
it
Tcane),
is
Ari, has
it is
not, in
isolated it is
Mi fana wo
by
va.
not.
-
not. fit6 fasirdno
Oho-kuni-nusi no
Kami no
mi-nard ardzu.
ani-oto no
Kami-
3 -tut -^
tQ-tei
waosw nari, Yaso Kami or the eighty
superior beings.
This
of one person.
is
not the illustrious
Thus people
call
the row
and younger brothers of the Kami named the Great Land-Lord.
The Passive Ar)e, u, eru, =to become, come into existense,
stars) is a
when
still
Yaso Kami. Kova
particularly proper to the written language. nari,
what
not polite; Reini va ardzu, polite
name Kamis of the
e.
i.
mostly, for the sake of emphasis,
Stkanva (= Stkaniva) ardzu (~^ $
of
.
wood, that has a good
in the spoken language passes into garu.
Sai-tsi no
^^), understanding;
10.
.
ki,
Chinese substantives are made adjectives by the addition of no
Especially,
^*),
Irono (or iroga} aru kumd, colors
a market-place on which are people.
having (colored) clouds.
Fitdno
Kova kegarewd
is
more
motsi usindvu kami
aravi-tamavu tokini axe-masi-tsu, this (the goddess of the falling
Kami, who takes and
looses dirt.
She was (masi-tsu) produced Ore
is
called
as being considered metal in its primitive state
(
Ufa -fe
(the gods of creation) cleansed their noses.
Remark. G6-zar)i, u. The courtly epistolary
style
(are),
Ara-kane (= Are).
and the spoken language,
CHAPTER instead of simple Ari,
THE VERBS GOZARI
VII.
make use
ORI.
,
263
96, 97.
of the more ample Gk>-zari or Gro-zari-masu,
sounding, in a quick pronunciation, as Gozai, or Gozai-mas', in writing expressed 3
by
^f
H*
flip
the honor to be."
Like Ari,
it
Go-za-ari, which
?)
equivalent to the expression:
is
Courtesy employs this word even where
has the complement of what a thing consists,
substantive, in the Local in de, if an adjective in (or u, page 106) before
it.
- -
is
A
Andtadewd gozari-masdnu ; watoMsi
it
myself.
Go
well with you ?
= how do you do? no change at
seat, to sit,
can remove
zi-sinni itdsi-md&ta
means dwell,
itself.
It is preceded
if
which in writing
Oritar)i, M,
^ %3 place.
>
t
A
Otta
m ake
is
ortt,
the dwelling.
(X ? 2).
Ordzu,
down, in speaking
fire.
is
within,
Tschung-yung. X.
wi
where anything dwells, as Local or
is,
Closing-form, subst. and
Or)eba
;t
7^
A
,
edomo
,
aba
,
]
)
^), pron.
dwelling; thence the Preterit
Ordstm)e, M, eru, is
attrib.
as , although ,
,
Gerund. Ortte (X
Ordnu, not to dwell;
^
-
J
,
-
0ro*)t',
- -
M,
to order to
given to place soldiers in the
castle.
Sdk6ni orard, = >Atc
se-
to one superior.
is
at
Fino sobani
home.
Sinra nisino Tcunini
Sinra has dwelt in the western parts.
1)
or
i (-f )
of Ori.
or ori-mdsti,, he
at the side of the
so as ever,
,
In definitions of place the
te).
Passive form, used in speaking, Ordr)e, w, eru.
Utsini
from
which anything
^)-
expressed by
Examples of the use
is it
indifferently.
(^
to dwell, to place;
sit
well?
it
definition of place,
Samitrdiwo sironi ordstmit, order
deatur," for pray
is
by the
Ori)ki, si, keri etc. has dwelled.
he dwells.
Otte,
,
not you; I did
it is
having reference to a living being, that
Conjugation, regular: Root, Ori pron. or', he dwells
noon.
it is
reside;
spoken language makes use of ni or de
,
=
ku
all.
gerund with the termination ni or de (sometimes
6rii
,
a
Nan-
this?
Ai-kavdru gimo gozari-ma&dnu
as also of the condition or of the action, in
form
is
Hirude gozari-mdsu,
it?
it is, if
in the adverbial form in
deflecting coutinuative verb, derived
Or)i, u,
what
e.
i.
ki-gen yortisiu gozari-masti, ka? your disposition
literally: there is
=
H,
not suited.
is
Soreva nanide gozaru? what
dokide gozari-masu ka? what o'clock
97.
it
to have
orisi
Jrfl,
he stays
yon, since the (people of)
Kun-si koreni
6rti J ),
the superior
man
264
CHAPTER
THE VERBS ORI,
VII.
stays there in (in virtue, 1
si'rti,
),
when
home.
flitd
sono 6ru tokdrowo
knows the place where
it
nestles,
97, 98.
Oruni
as in his element).
some where)
(a bird
OSI, I, IRU.
it
at
is
H~it6no kimito ndttevd, zinni ori, hitdno sin to ndttevd, ke"ini ori,
....
when he
lord
kuni-tdmi t6 mazivdrebd, sinni
Jr-ft
2
),
(the noble
when he becomes
of others, he rests in humanity;
rests in reverence (towards the prince)
;
if
man) becomes the
the minister of others, he
he has to do with the people of the
Here we have a succession of three
country, then he dwells in uprightness.
propositions of which only the last has the predicate closing-form oru, whereas
in bot the preceding the indefinite root-form ori
Tabe, to eat; Tabete orA, to be eating. site
Siri, to
Strife ori-mdsu, to
know;
~$t ? jfe
ne
)>
s its
with him, he does not
The
maintain the throne.
e.
g.
^
to print a figure
dsti,,
as
Employed
mouse, and makes
Y #fl ^ %
3-
^S \/ \
"f
make stay some
on or in paper; Kurdiwo
a substantive,
it
refers
it
K
root
i
or
bird-seat, the
temples.
a throne.
1)
6s&, to
something that
to
Kun-siva ydsukini
man
is
= to be in,
ite motte
a variation of Or)i, u.
mdiwo matsU
3
),
the superior
quiet and calm , waiting for the appointments (of
Heaven).
it
Dzu-kinwo kaburazuni
iru, to be
without ha-
Tsikdra ndku narite iru,
Tsikara nqo natte oru, to have become powerless.
The =
where,
stay.
ving a covering on the head.
A
it
'^T* J^"
Pi 1
or
6ru, he
M6ktini inw6 6su, to print a mark in
98. 1 (#), Ite, Iru, nondefl. auxiliary verb,
"mf
kite
5g[
and characterises the word Ndzumi-6si the mousetrap as something that
presses the
?
6rit (
which being derived from the root causative Os)i, u, (|Jpf^)> pron. 6ssu,
wood; Kamini katdtsiwo
Y7C
mite zasite
-
let others see it.
includes the idea of our print,
^
to be drinking.
Karega ima-yquni kimono
I (JHf 'O, nas the original signification of to seat,
presses,
eat, feed; Tabe-
Mottewa ore-domo fitoni misdnU) although he has
dressed in the fashion.
is
6rtt,
Fanawo
be knowing.
beholding flowers.
make
Tabes)i, u,
Nom)i, M, to drink; Nonde
to be feeding.
6rft,
used.
is
Dai Gaku
wi
name of
Kurd-i
Nawi
t
(J^
III. 2.
^) seat, occurs in compounds as. Tori-wi or Tori-i^
certain doors, which are at the entrance to Japanese
(^g),
from K&rd, saddle, thus a seat raised as a saddle,
or Nai, the old- Jap.
name of earthquake; from wa, =
2) Ibid. Ill
3.
3) fschung-yung. XlV.
dis-,
CHAPTER
and
I-su,
i.
=
Vll.
seat-nest, the chair I-ziri, bed.
I-toko, seat.
the house.
NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN
=
I-tsi,
on which one
Iy6 (A
As
verb I, uru
,
sits
IRU.
265
99.
with the legs crosswise. -
in Eastern Japan
2/),
ft/a,
contracted yd,
seat- way, the market-place.
NONDEELECTING VERBS IN 99.
I,
I.
these,
with respect to their conjugation, are connected with the
to be
they are placed here
,
!
).
The conjugation of the nondeflecting verbs
in i
266
CHAPTER
Mesiitdni,
A
NONDEFLECTIN'G VERBS IN
VII.
become
Mesdita, has
99.
IRU.
I,
Mimi-si)i, ifg^ 1
blind.
,
yu, iru, or yuru,
ite,-\X) be ear-dead or deaf, 3.
K)i,
6mu
old-Jap. 4.
5.
,
on
A
,
oo
^^
-^^
I-ki,
^,
^g
to come. Imperat. iyo, oyo, oi, in Sikok ei;
2J*,
?
oozu
,
oozuru ; Negat. 6nu
,
= go and come;
at
,
to breathe, live (>fc). Ik)iru; Ike-iru,
A
Ik)iu; Causat. ds)i, u, to
^
to
come out
=
5J*
achieved; Lat. procedere. Deki, iru,
ite;
make
live, to enliven.
to precede, to be produced, to be
of,
A
Fut.
iu; Negat. inu, vulg. dmt. Caus.
A variation of Deki is 1de"ki.
Dekas)i, u, to produce; thence Dekas mono, a product.
Tsuki, jgjf^. to come to the end, to consume,
6.
Fut. en,
ite;
Yedo anu.
to be living; Fut.
De-ki, yj
Gerund
to get exhausted or
v. i.,
consumed. Tsuk)i, iru; Negat. inu, not to become exhausted; Causat. TsuMs)i, u, to exhaust, to is
consume; Pass. Tsukar)e, uru, to be in a
from deflecting Tsuk)i, u,
to be distinguished
Oki,
7.
to rise, to get up, se lever.
^E^,
make
Causat. 6s)i, u, to 8.
^^
state of exhaustion. It
^P
?
to
come
A
iu;
(ki)
on
OTc)iru, uru, ite, ita; Fut.
rise, to raise, to establish.
Sugi, pron. Su-ngi,
contracted from
j^^,
sue"
+ ra + Id,
-
to
the top (of anything), to rise above, to surpass, exceed. Sug)iru, uru, 6s)i,
to.
go
Causat.
ite.
u. 9.
10.
Pi,
^=
u
Ni, ||
dry. Firu, to dry, v. n. to ebb. Sivono
,
/
,
to be like, to resemble. N)iru, ite,
to be like; Causat. is)e, u, uru, eru, to
11. Ori, ~fC^, to descend.
make
ite
firu told, =
ari
itari;
at
low water.
Negat. izu, not
to like; to imitate. Nise-mono, imitation.
Or)iru, also uru;
Fut. in,
ite, itari;
A
iu; intosu,
to be about to descend; Negat. izu, izar)i, u, not to descend; Causat. Or6s)i, u, to
make
descend.
12. otsi,
^^,
to fall
Attributive iru,
i-mdsft;
down.
also
tits)i, ite,
uru,
Condit. iba; Negat. izu. Causat.
^^, to be Kutsi, ^^, to rot;
13. Mitsi, 14.
(dtso'ru isi,
Ot6s)i, u, to
filled.
v.
itar)i, u,
i.
Mits)u, uru,
A
ita;
Closing-form Ots)u or
a falling stone); Fut. in,
make ite.
fall;
to
Negat. Mite'nu.
to wither. Kuts)iru, uru,
ite.
^^
7$*, to blush, to be ashamed. Fadz)i, u, uru,
ite;
Adverb, urdkuvd; Adj. Fadzukdstki, timid. Causat. Fadzukdsim)e
make
make
afraid.
16. Fadzi, iy6;
iu;
fell.
15. odzi, 'jt^, to be afraid. $dz)u, iru, also uru. Causat. Od6s)i, u, to
any one
A
,
Imperat. uru, to
blush, to shame.
17. Karab)i,
^
-?,
iru, i-nuru, to dry, v.
i.
Kara, halm; Kar)e, uru,
to dry up.
CHAPTER 18.
*
Kabi,
1||2
5
NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN
VII.
IRU.
I,
mould. Kabiru, to grow mouldy: metaphorically: to be grieved.
and
19. Sab)i, uru, to rust; metaphorically: to be solitary 20.
Wab)i, iru,
also
ite etc.
uru,
^
21. Nob)i, iru, ite, $1
stretching,
L, to
v.
go
Yaid-mono wo
wheel.
intercession, to intercede, to excuse.
Kevurino nob6ruwo miru, to see the rise of the
nobdri, to
ascend a mountain. Fact. Nob6s)e, uru, to
to
kurumani nob6su,
v.
Nob)e, uru,
tr.,
work up pottery on the
to
make
potter's
to stretch, to extend, to raise.
22. Kobi, $ff ^, to flatter. Kob)i, iru, uru,
Fitdni kobiru, to
Yamani
sun.
Tsukaiwo Miyakoye nobosete, despatching messengers up to
stretch, or ascend.
Miyako.
still.
to stretch, to be extended. Nob6r)i, u, to be
,
Fino nobdri, the
on a mountain,
aloft
fU^,
to ascend.
aloft,
ascending of smoke.
go
267
99.
ite;
Imperat. iyo; Fut. in,
A
tt2.
-
men.
flatter
23. Korob)i, u, uru, corruption, decay, to pass toward destruction. Causat. ds)i,
u, to cause to decay.
24. Pokorob)i, u, uru,
^g 3
^i to tear, to burst,
intr.,
to rip as
a seam,
open as a flower bud. 25. Forobi,
A
imu, in,
"f
$j&,
Causat.
iu.
to
6s)i,
become destroyed, u, to
to perish. Forob)i, u, t'-nu; Fut.
destroy. Forobosdr)e, uru, to be ruined or
destroyed. 26. Fotob)i (not Fitobi), iru, uru,
to
make
^,
to soften,
v.
i.
Causat. Fotobasi, u,
soft.
27. Purub)i, iru,
uru,
"jjf
^,
to get old, to
grow
old (old, opposed to new).
Transitives.
II.
28. K)i, iru, ite, Fut. in,
29. Kovi,
$Ho A
&iu, ^j|*,
Koi, longing
for.
to put
on
(a dress).
Kov)i, u, iru, uru, to long after, to
love. Causat. Kovos)i, u, to cause to love, to attract one's love; Kovdrtki, char-
ming, amiable. 30. M6tsii,
u (#$**)
).
^J 1
I, to use, to employ. Motsi)i, u, iru, or yuru
Fut. Motstyn; Condit. iba; Negat. izu or tnu
Pass, irare, to be used, to serve,
v.
i.
We
form of Mots)i, u, (fj|), to take hold M6tte (Jj[ I)
is
(^*X
(x v); ),
ttor)t,
warX a;
consider Motsi)i, uru the continuative of,
seize,
use,
of which te Gerund
of relation, with. Some, alequivalent to the word expressive
though incorrectly,
also
write
-tf to
*f7
etc.
The
predicate closing-form
a passive (to be used, to be of use to) perhaps from generally passes for
CHAPTER
268
form with
the analogy of the shoot). See
On its
NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN
Vll.
99.
IRU.
I,
I
the derivative lyu (to get a shot), from
(to
89. 2.
account of the important part, which this verb plays, some instances of
use follow here.
Kordwo
monovd
surtt
t6kn,
kordwo mdtsi-uru monovd stdzukd nardbd, sundvdtsi
which produce them, are quick, and those which use
sai tsundni tdru 1 }, if those
Sono riyau-tanwo
riches will ever be sufficient.
them are slow,
tortte
(A
totte),
sono tsiuwo tamini motsivu'*), he takes hold of the two extremes (of good and
bad) and employs the nisite
his
Mean
them in his government of the
of
midzukdra motsiuru koto wo kondmu
own
own judgement).
self (his
Andta korewo nanini
politely:
31. I,
jf^^o
fond of using
is
motsii nasdriika? for Ite,
more
or,
what purpose do you use
to shoot at, to hit.
Matowo
this?
iru, to
Tori wo iru, to shoot birds. Yumi-iru, to shoot with a bow.
shoot at a mark.
Passive, lye, lyu, to be shot. lyu
^^
Mukui,
being ignorant he
),
Gu
people.
Omae korewo nanini motsiiruka?
shooting Iru,
~"^J,
3
sisi
^^
( fiff
)
,
=
shot meat, venison.
reflecting; 2. retaliation, retribution.
Muku)i, yu, yuru,
to retaliate, to retribute; Negat. izu, izari, not to retribute.
The recent ortho-
32.
1-
A^to
graphy
97
is
erroneous.
wo mukuu, the dog knows favor and
^
7
33. Ab)i, iru
(not uru),
squirt, to cast water
to
wash
this
mean
to
Midzuwo
A
to
ata
wrong.
shoot with bath-water, to splash, to
out. Yu-abiru, to sprinkle
anything with
warm
water,
abiru,
wash oneself or
34. M)i, iru,
m,
-
retaliates
siri,
t squirt cold water. Since, as appears V^j^ ?|C|^ expression, Abiru has the word water for its object direct, it cannot
it.
from
up or
'^^
Inuva on wo
iu;
^s
,
to see. Imperat. iyo;
A
Negat. izu,
Compounded with mi,
to bathe.
A
ite;
Pret. itari,
inu. Pass, iye, iyu, to appear; irare, to
A
ita; Fut.
become
visible.
to see, are:
^?i
35. tlr&-m)i, ite, u, uru,
Fut. imu, in,
Gerund
to see backwards, to be disgusted with...
iu; Negat. izu. Ju
36.
Kangam)i,
iru,
.iH^s.
^,
to look in the glass; to consider.
frfr
37. Kaheri-m)i, iru,
1)
Dai Gaku. X.
19.
|||;>2-> to look back.
2) Tschung-yung VI.
3) Ibid.
XXVIII.
CHAPTER
VII.
NONDEFL. VERBS IN
I
,
IRU.
99, THE VERB NI , TO BE.
100.
I.
THE FOREGOING NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I, ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY. Abi
.
N.
33.
269
CHAPTER
270
Kono
such).
siu
verted to this sect.
no otoni
nan
Addenda
N.
( -=fc
A
THE VERB NARI
VII.
it
lie
,
nan
100.
in expressions as kaze
On
54 lines 16, 17 the verb Ni here treated Ces
nite, site, Etant.
mots s'emploient quelqefois au
trois
the gerund of S)i, u, uru, to do. See
to kaya.
is
lieu
mentioned with the
du verbe
substantif."
Mi
(= to be,
what the subject
what
it is. Inflectional forms, the
same
the substantive form, which Causat. Nareba; Fut.
Nariis used
A
Naran,
Nara
generally abbreviated to
also used as attributive.
is
(see
Ndri
96):
A Na ( 12), Narite, A Natte;
Naru,
Gerund
76).
in:
T6kuvd moto ndri; Salvd
ram' 2 ),
sue"
Fino fikdri akirdka ndri, the sun-
the foundation; fortune the top.
is
(
Naroo; Condit. Nardba, in the spoken language
closing- form
as
Ari
as of
the root- and, though by exception, the closing-form also;
virtue
See
103.
immediately preceded by the definition, of
It is
I).
consists, or
1.
have been con-
will
Nar)i, u, (-{^^), deflecting continuative verb, derived from
II.
is
suffix (= zo) is
*)
II.
V.
words: ,,De , is
100.
has been the sound of the wind.
Remark. In KODKIGUES' Elem.
Site
TO BE.
om6-muki-keru to nan
y?) ni
mere emphatic
ari-keru,
,
light is clear. 2.
Naru
is
keta (or kaku) is
money)
3.
Ame
* HE
tellural
and
-fy
T))
,
stantives
and no
opening
ki ndri
( jspj
is
is
square,
J
'^^
is
an imi-
^^
He?i-
an emanation of the
solar principle.
Naru
The
its
rain (= the rain)
is
atari,
that the shape (of the Chinese copper
ndruva in-yauno
that which
is
attributive
are also silkworms, which 4.
madoka ndruwd Tenni
round, answers to the heaven, that
'
%
in: Katdtsino
ndruwd Tsini narau, =
of the earth.
tation $jp
substantive
attributive
in:
Mata
make yellow
form Naru,
ki-n&ra.
mayuwo
tsukuru kdiko dri, there
cocoons.
A Na,
serves to derive adjectives from sub-
12, "page 115). lydno katavara naru haydsi, a wood
and adverbs. (See
at the side of the house. 5.
(
The Gerund Nartte,
100,
with Narite = ,
Nippon
2)
Dai
Ndtte,
is
generally superseded by Nite and Ni-sitd,
probably to prevent a confusion with Narite, = giving sound, or
I),
1)
A
N
arete ,
o dai itsiran.
GaJcu. X. 7.
= becoming,
VII. 46
recto.
Kokoro-bd.se makoto nari. Kokoro-bdse
ma-
CHAPTER
THE VERB NARE, TO BECOME.
VII.
koto TO. site, siMu-siti notsi kokdro taddsi
the heart
then
is
by the
rule, superseded
not
it is
my
The
truth.
is
will being true,
(
fy J
&) = not
j
to be,
,
is
form ni-arazu or ni-aranu.
analytical
avoided and, as a
Waga
kotoniardzu,
business. (See page 162. 8).
Nari, with
7.
the will
271
III.
rectified.
The negative Naraz)i, u
6.
*),
100.
inflectional forms,
its
particularly its closing-form,
in the
is
written language, used periphrastically also, to lengthen or round off a period,
and
preceded by the predicate verb proper in
is
substantive form.
its
language of Yedo uses Mas)i, u for the same object (see
Kono tokiva comes
amdre-ldzuru ndri, -
kaiko
out. Ide, Idzuru,
come
to
the silkworm cannot bear frost,
if
you have sapan-wood, I
is
cheap, I will take
=
to be
100.
-- Kdiko samusdni tavezu, si-suru nan",
out.
Kmdwo
it dies.
will
kuvdsu naraba,
As
I).
buy
if
one gives
Ydsui nara, tori-md$oo
it too.
kai nasaru nara, if
it.
Nar)e, u, eru, uru (
Examples:
101).
that time that the silkworm
at
is
Andtano hooni so-bok&ga arimdsn nara, sorem6 kai-mdboo*),
grass for food.
III.
it
The spoken
(J|J()t),
there
is
a
s
)
,
if it
you buy.
= to become, Lat.
homonymous Nar)e,
fieri, the passive
of JW,
u, eru, which being formed
from another root Ni, means to be boiled, become tame, the form Nare, when it
means
active
or
to
become,
not employed, but
is
now
generally represented by the
form Nar)i, u, and the immediately precedent, appositive
how
any thing becomes, has to show by
or the adverbial
ku (9, page
fication of to be,
Nari
what
inflectional termination to, ni
not used with the active signi-
is
Na-
but supersedes Nare, - to become, in stead of which
rar)e, u, eru, the passive of
Observations
111), that
its
definition,
Nari, the
concerning
(to be) also is
use
of Nari,
met with.
as
substitute
for
Nare, = to
become. 1.
The
apposition,
characterized
Ame
by the
kdrite
what any
thing becomes,
when
it is
suffix to.
yuMt6ndru,
in*) atataka-ndru tokiva
4}'
Dai Gaku.
ameto nari, samitki tokiva yukito naru
^
yv
\--
>
^
R^ nji ^ Kzx
*
>
*
5) Kanra-oaJki Inn-moo dsu-i.
*eJn-
(or mint wart)
when
2) Shopping -Dialogue i , p. 40.
5.
^ -Wl * *All
Ttn-T*ino
the rain, congealing, becomes snow.
the accumulated tellural matter of the heavens and earth,
1)
some thing concrete,
it is
warm,
3) Ibid. p. 87. I.
7.
recto.
5 )
be-
CHAPTER
272
comes rain, when
THE VERB NARE, TO BECOME.
VII.
it is
becomes snow.
cold, it
100.
III.
Since they are coordinate, the
former of the two propositions closes with the root-form (ame
with the closing-form (yuki
naru. So, likewise, in:
to)
kumdto ndri, Ten-Id
Tsi-ki nobdrite (nobdtte)
are the exhalation of mountains
and
kuddrite'
the latter
to) nari,
Kumova
san-stnno ki nari.
ame to naru nari 1 ), clouds
The exhalation of the earth
rivers.
becomes clouds, the exhalation of the heavens descending becomes rain, rally: is
make
tokinbd, tordmo nezumito naru, if one
even the mouse becomes a tiger;
becomes a mouse.
tiger
if
use of
it (if
one attach no value to
,
it, a
it),
then even the
), if (a
noble man)
Kava
he has humanity for foundation.
Kore naravasi
futdtsu to naru, the river divides into two branches.
2.
one attach value to
Fitdno kimito ndtte vd, zinni 6r&
becomes a prince over others
nari, this has
or, lite-
Motsiiru tokinbd, nezumimo tordto nari; motsiizdru
rain.
becoming
rising
to
wakarete ndri'taru
become a custom.
The apposition, what something becomes, characterized by
ni; a con-
struction peculiar to the classic language.
Kunitsu kami om'na (onna-) ni narite
is
Kova
kami nari
toriid narerisi
-w ^
''
Igfc
ffjj
^) mitstni mukaveri
woman and came
the god of that district became an old
way.
(
( jj
^
~jfe
J^
)$
^
jjjljj
)
,
on the
to meet (him)
ffi
3
-(fjj
), this
a god changed into a bird. Narerisi, the attributive form of the preterit of
80
Nari, (compare this (kami) has
Kova Fino kamino mi-kabanem
line 16).
become the corpse of the god of
fire.
nari-maseru nari,
If ni were superseded
no (thus kabaneno), an existence from the corpse would be meant, writer says of another kami:
Kova Fino kamino
tsino nareru nari
for the ( jffl
by
same
^ J^
^s
a production from (has arisen from) the blood of the fire-god.
Nami kazdmo
tawoyakani narite..., also waves and wind becoming softer...
'{fa
iiDj
this
Ken-go 3.
(
ffi
,
^
:7
*)
ni
what
If the apposition,
page 105),
it
stands in
Kara-kane fitrulsu alloy of copper
and
naru koto
its
becoming sound.
something becomes,
is
an adjective in
iro akalsn
Kcuira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i.
3) Nippon-ki.
14.
13 recto.
(
9.
B.
growing old
,
naru nari, the Chinese metal (an
his color
becomes
red.
no ndku. naritaru koto, the annihilation of a thing that has been.
1)
Td
adverbial form in ktu
narite sono
silver)
,
I. 6. verso.
2)
Dai Gaku.
III. 3.
Aritaru mono
CHAFrBB
THE VERB NASI, TO CAUSE TO
VII.
The material from which any thing becomes,
4.
is
273
100. IV.
BE.
put in the Ablative or
Genitive, characterized by yori or by no.
Midzuyori naru mono, something that nardru nari,
tsino
The
.
6.
a thing becomes,
if it is
a verb,
kori-nardru nari
^^
j|
preceded only by an appositive definition 1
Ni-gwats ni nareba
= when
,
grows calm.
it
it
what
it is
becomes (comes
Mayuni
yamdito ndru, or naru-nari, afterwards
(or
(
.
Jj
o
HI
.
ft
Fu-senwo nasu ness in others,
Kordwo ndsu mities 2.
its
J
),
make
o
to) the second
grow
by ni or
month.
=
as to this,
to be
(
(
100.
I).
ndsti, bdsi,
to
this
must be done.
Tenno nasdru wasawai,
93. 2.).
A. wo B.
one ought not to do
make
Si-
Notei'ni tro-trono
nasu, to
it,
this
cala-
make B. from A. Koreva
Nasaz)i, u; Nasazar)i, u, negat. not cause to be, not produce. best,
to.
= to cause to be; to make
Kortwo
clever.
koto nakdre, do this not!
and
F*it6no zin-saiwo ndstt, originate clever-
to produce evil.
others
e* vrird),
arise all sorts of illness.
ft), from Ni, =
which heaven has caused.
nasazdru
^M
Mayuto) nareba, itowo toragtmH, as
Nas)i, u, deflecting causative verb,
1.
put in
5 >^ /
to be, characterized
cocoons become formed, one has the thread taken from them.
IV.
is
^ft"'* Jffj IT t/fc
Nari, employed impersonally (without a subject, as in Germ,
dzukani naru,
an
a clotting of the sea-foam.
this island is
^
it is
Nan.
Kono simava sivo-awano iii
=
fire,
.
.
by what
definition,
root- form before
^ $fc
Fino kamino
has arisen from the blood of the god of
it
emanation from the blood. 5.
from water.
arises
may
not be done.
3.
Nasas)i, u, causat., to
4.
Nasasim)e, uru, cause that one makes be, give order that one makes, to
produce.
bring about. 5.
let
Nasar)e, u, uru, become produced or done, to happen. Imperative Natdre,
there become done, sounding in the popular language of Nagasaki Nahdri,
Nahai and Naherri
The
use,
trated in the
1)
too
2 ).
which courtesy makes of the passive Nasar)e, u, wru,
Appendix
Dai Gaku. VI.
to this
Chapter
will
be
112, page 312.
2.
Mr. H. 2) Observation by the late
s.
DE SAINT AULAIRE,
interpreter for the
JapancM language. 18
illus-
274
CHAPTER
101. Mas)i,
THE VEEB MASI, TO RESIDE.
VII.
deflecting v., to
u,(^*^,),
101.
abide, reside, originally 1mds)i, u,
from tma, abbreviated
ma (^^), = space,
while, interval and
s)i,
spot, or with reference to time,
Gerund Mastte, by
u, to be active, do.
also; Pret. Maser)i, u, Masik)i, eri,u; Masita, Mas'ta; Fut.
nounced as Masoo
In the epistolary style Masi
page 248).
(see
^^X, ^^X. ^.
mething a kami
and
Kova
preceded by the verb with which
is
by the
u, to exist,
and
where
so-
definition of place,
Oki tsu miyard mdsu kami nari
when an eminent
used as an auxiliary verb,
is
^^X,
superseded by Moos)i,u,
is
'), this is
in the chapel of Oki.
dwelling
Masi
2.
as it, is preceded
in the Local. E. g.
is,
Masoo, pro-
Masdnti, instead of MasariA
Masi supersedes the commoner Ar)i,
style
and just
Or)i, u, dwell,
A
Maite
Vide Addenda n. VI.
In the elevated
1.
A
page 209, line 12). Negat.
(see
Masan,
elision
it is
subject
is
spoken
connected in the root-form
c) in the Gerund. Examples: the Kami enlightening all around, Ama-terdsft Kami,
(
of,
a) Pre-
sent or b) Future), or also a)
.
Kami
A.
ni-mdsu.~\
B.
.
8
va B.
Kamino mi fava ni-masu A.
.
Kami ni-masu
no mi oyano ancestors of
.
,
(Ni, Nite, to be, see
).
kdk&si-tamdviki
3
),
100.
)
,
N
Kono fimdno gamivd
(the gods)
.
JtfJ* h -
ffiJ
7
,ljjj^-
3& n
seru, -
is
masi-mdsti, ,
.
N.
.
si-mdsi-masedom6, sonomi although Buddha and the
Kami-yono mi-sudzi.
4) Ibid.
the
.
.
of the
the
ye to
,
and kept them-
Kamini mi-aui-mas6ri,
(See
this goddess
80). sttd
umi-maseru nari, this island -
have produced attributive
(See
(it)
as
an
Ma-
after birth.
form of Maseri, the preterit of
80).
= to be being.] Ten wau
residing in the palace
1)
Kami
is
r rf.
.
Kamo
three gods were gods standing alone
Kono simavd
%
Tamayori-fimdno mikotova
,
these
^ .
the mother of the
is
Her Highness Lady Tamayori
has matched herself with the god N.
J^^
1.)
.
Konomifasirano Kamiva mina fit6ri-gami nari-masite mi-mi-wo
4
selves hidden.
[.
Ama-
Kamo.
[..nari-mdsu.]
-
called
Kami.
terdsi-m.&Bu [.
is also
N.
.
no miya ni masi-masu , the emperor
Buts zinva fttdno negavini yotte ka-go-(
(^t
spirits
;jfp )
assist,
* J||U
fffl^)
kavi-katani orosoka nareba, ikagava sen?
complying with the wish of men:
2) Ibid.
5) Too-san fi-rok.
3) Ibid. TIL.
1 1
recto.
if,
5
)
in
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB MASI, TO ABIDE.
the rearing (of the silkworm) one .
b)
.
[.
negligent, what will
sukke)no nozdmi masi-masi-keredomo ,
wished to quit the paternal house not grant
is
(i.e. to
By
amasi.]
become a monk), but the father did
gotten, a periphrastic future
is
auasete m&si-tamavu nari
he
literally:
imdsu*), this
J
(^-f),
no verb of which the
is
and as
use, than Masi,
an, by
mikototo teticdrawo
moon-god Susanowono
wrestles with the
A
Korevoa yaburete
it,
how
to enter.
polite
spoken language makes a more frequent
grafted on the root-form of verb, generally has to ex-
press the inflectional forms, whereas the verb itself to which
unchanged,
. .
Fit6 maruni ik&ra faitte ymdsttkd*), in a bale,
goes in it? Fa-ir)i, ^
There
am,
as well in the elevated style as
(masi) measuring his strength etc.
is
torn.
is
Kami
.
75. 5.
Kono Kamiva Susanowono this
),
.
formed. /Sm)t, wru, to go away;
is
Masi in connection with a gerund, used
in the polite conversational.
much
Siyuk-ke
yurusi tamavdzu, he
grafting masi on the form of the Future,
Indtsi sinamasi 1 ), life will perish. See
mikoto,
avail?
it
teitsi
275
him.
it
which amasi
c)
101.
it is
added remains
in its root-form, a knowledge of the conjugation of this auxiliary
verb will be found without any other. The forms, which are in use in the spoken
language, are limited to;
A
Mdsu,
Mas',
Mdsuka?
is
it?
Mdsuna?
is
it
Maseba, as
being.
is,
Masedomo, although not?
Masiyoo,
Mase, imperat. be!
A Maste, A Masta,
Masite,
Masita,
A
Maseng,
From
it is. it
it
dialect
in
H.
Masi
Wagun
for
MATH,
any original Japanese writing, nor observed in conremtioiu
,
published by us, which particularly come under it is
obvious
used as the final word of a proposition indifferently whether the speaker
or the person spoken to or something else,
1)
not.
do these forms belong?
the Shopping-Dialogues
is
is
BROWN, Grammar XXIV,
notice as a faithful representation of the polite language of Yetlo,
that
will be.
has been.
maseba, masedomo, I have neither found
To what
3/aloo, if it is.
Masdnu,
gerund.
A
Masu-nara,
The forma maszru, maszreba, maszredomo, quoted by Mr.
with Japanese.
it is.
Sitoori,
under Sinn,
24. 3) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
is
the subject of
2) Eami-yono mi-tiuin. 4) Ibid. p. 34.
it.
Thus
it
may,
CHAPTER
276
THE VERB MASI
VII.
101, SORAI
without the speaker's attaching any importance to the proposition, and express our
please" just as
Mad
Examples of the use of
102.
round
be used only to
it,
have the honor."
as
little
off
in the spoken language, borrowed from the
Shopping-Dialogues.
Kono fttowa darede yaide ari-masu, he
is
my
your name
is
it
called
.
.
what
-
ari-mastika,
this
man
who
Watdkusino nawa
called?
he? Watdknsino
nawa
Andtano
bosom-friend.
is
.
.
.
to
tsuki-
nanito ii-masiikd?
my name
ii-mdsn,
is
(S.-D. 19).
.
Sinawo miru-kotowa deki-mdsuka? The seeing of your goods place? (deki-mdsuna? cannot
Andtawa
it
take place?) Deki-mdsu,
can take place. (S.-D. 23).
fU6de ari-masuka? Are you an inhabitant of
too-sono
am someone
Watdkusiwd too-sono monode ari-masu, I
Kono nedanwa
it
can that take
ikura si-mdstikd? the price of it
to
this place?
of this place. (S.-D. 20).
how much
does
it
(amount) ?
(S.-D. 34).
Miyoo-nitsl
Go
have understood you. (S.-D. 41).
I
oo-tsi si-masita,
to
itdsi-masoo ,
hen-too
morrow
I will give
you an answer.
(S.-D. 39).
Watdkusiwa korewo zonzi-mase'nu Firu-mayeniwa mairi-ye-mase'nu Rok-kinni atari-mdsuna?
Is
.
do not know
I
it.
(S.-D. 26).
before noon I cannot come. (S.-D. 17).
,
not that about six pounds? (S.-D. 8)
^
Watdksa hanaJidda Go dza-ma
(
3jf
^g s^ fj
"*)
J
).
de gozari-masen kd?
Am
not your disturber? Don't I disturb you? the ordinary question of anyone
unasked pays a
who
visit.
102. Samurav)i,
closing-form Soro,
u (^p A_7
'|/Q O
ravi, from save, at the
answers to our
I
^o>
side,
guarde" and
e
=
^| *
o
^e
^|), also Savurav)i,u, A Sorai; ig i n old- Jap. ^i Sa-mo-
'(pj
^
?
by, and moravi, guard. As noun Samurai (A Sorai) is
the old general
name
for people
on duty at the
court of a prince.
Used
as
lary style, If, is
an auxiliary verb in the written language, it
qualifies the
particularly in the episto-
being as a serving being and humiliates the speaker.
therefore, in a proposition,
of which the predicate verb
named, the unnamed, who speaks or
1) Page 29 of the original edition:
A
acts, is the speaker
is
Soro, no subject
not the person spoken
new familiar phrates. Nagasaki 1859.
CHAPTER
and we assign to those propositions the I or
to,
to the use of Soro the 1.
The
definition,
characterized 2.
in
ite
I
The
definition,
mention, =
I shall
how
line 4).
form
A
nite
Naku
it.
A
it is
not
,
is
of a verb,
is
appropriate to the familiar,
Pf
=
),
it
it
it
is
possible that
is
= Nasi, is
?
there
96,
(See
is
p.
not.
263,
so.
Yordsiku
Tj{IJ ^f
may your deo
On
rise
ai-tate-soro 3.
3^"
^^
*
^D ^?\,^T?
I
as well as the official
Fino sobani
writing.
yy
agdri-soorde, eat heartily
be good!
form of
the fire"*).
5 ),
literally:
Kyoo-go mamdrft-beki ka
tame, to appoint the articles to be
Bu-sata
50ro '
one draws UP a
agree
to.
I
am by
ori-soro, > I
make no mention of
In negations as Agezu-soro,
itdsi-soro tokoroni, while
Deo-ydk&wo tori-kivame
it.
treaty.
do not raise,
--
Sasi-yurusi-sorOi I
Motomezu-soro
,
I
do not try
Ivazu-soro, I do not say, in deviation from the rule, zu
to acquire,
placed
An^fljf* 7vt J 4&*) 1^^ Iff
\sS*^^
soro,
Gozari-mdstt
go-za naku soro,
Q
4.
(*
fa",
an auxiliary verb, expressive of humility, grafted on the root-
Soro, as
JLr
>).
^ f __t ^
=
$%),
With regard
as subject.
a noun, precedes in the Local,
it is
aotdtoi soro 7
= ~Pj"
make mention of
(jptjl^ J|j
Sa-yoo
(
We
277
expressed by an adjective in
is,
Kakuno
soro
s)
when
is,
de (not do)
a thing
*
Go-za soro
3.
a thing
by ni or nite,
Mausi agu-bekn
).
-
what
102.
to be noticed:
is
following
adverbial form in ku.
2
so
THE VERB SORAI.
VII.
instead of zi, the root-form. If soro be grafted on the negative form of the
language, the forms Agdnit -\-soro, Motom4nu-\- soro
which forms may fuse into
7
,
is
used
spoken
7t'anfl-f-oro, are obtained,
>*Xtr Agezoro, Motomezoro, Ivazoro t and are to
be easily distinguished from the affirmative forms Age-soro, Motome-soro , /trt-oro.
Thus
if
in RODRIGUEZ fiUm. page 71
negative form: motome-zoro
1)
,
it
is
said
with
cependant on dit aussi motome soro, wazou
regard to the
(sic)
oro," then
ivazoro are meant.
Here the example
comes under
line 10,
cited in
RODRIGUEZ
lem. page 71 line 12: ..CbrisUm nite
oro," chrutitnussuui,
notice.
2) See page 109
n.
70.
8) Beki, see
pge 109 n.
73.
4) Nieuw verzameld Japansch en Hollandsch woordenb. door den ?ort van NakaU. 1810. 5) Ibid. II. 40 verso.
V. 55 recto.
278
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEBB SORAI.
102.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS OF SAMURAI; A SOORAI,
SORAI, TO BE.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB SORAI.
Future.
Concessive.
.
.
279
102.
Fut
Periphrastic Future.
Soravan zurumo
.
A Soro zurumo
preterit.
Sorobeke-
Soravan zuredomo ASorovanzuredomo
redomo
A Soro zuredomo Conditional.
Soravaba
.
.
A
Soro-
vaba
Soravan ni woitewa
A Soro ni woitewa Soravan monowo
Optative
A Sorovan monowo NEGATIVE CONJUGATION.
Present.
Root-form.
.
.
"Soravazi], not to be.
.
Closing-form.
Future.
.
Soravazu
1
)*
A
Sorovazu,
it
is
Soro maziku soro
not.
,
will not be.
Soro koto maziku soro. Subst.andAttr.
Soravazu,
A
Sorovazu, the not being, not being.
Substant.
,
iso-
Soravazuva, the not
being.
lated.
Gerund
Soravade,
A
Sorovade.
Soravazu site , not being. Time
defining
Soravaneba, when
it
is
not.
Local. Concessive.
.
.
.
Soravanedomo, though
it
is
S6ro mai keredomo,
not.
though
it
migJtt not have been. Conditional.
.
.
Soravazunba if
it
is
not.
Soravazuba
Maziku soravaba, if
Maziku soravaba.
it
should
not be.
I)
for it,
The regular
the deflecting verb Stfraci negative form of
Sdrovazu, and Sorovazu which are more
easily
is
SJracasu.
but the
puken Iwnowfce tut*
the towel* pronounced, ou account of the rule, that
of the subordinate syllables adapt themselves to that of the principal
yllable.
CHAPTER
280
THE VERB
VII.
x o &,
103. S)i, u, uru, (jjj^^ elucidated this verb , so far as it
87,
is
it
here noticed only in
As we have
other relations.
its
1.
as chief word, indicating the person,
Si occurs in
compound nouns,
who
is
employed with something, in
equivalent to our termination er of tiler, potter
= a brick-maker; Mono-si, =
already
used in the formation of causative verbs , in
is
The root- form
it is
103.
to do.
vulg. -ft),
I.
which case
TO DO.
SI,
etc.
Kavard-si,
Lat. opifex, maker; I-mono-si, metal founder; R&su-si,
medicine-maker, physician; Nu-si (contracted from Nuru-si), japanner, Si being generally explained by 2.
as definitive
fjjjj
member
master; or
I/,
before the chief word, as in Si-goto, occupation, where
generally indicated phonetically by
it is
Si-goto
is
met with under the form of fj"
(^
si-waza ka?
and even by
2^,
with the
~^^,
which characters the pure Japanese root, Si, has nothing to do.
signification of
Thus
-ft
fljw 'ft
^
JH ^ .*) wn ose >
^
Soreva idzurega
if*?'.
business
is
this?
'ft^'fH^?
Si-
manner of doing; ft 2x lf, Si-hoo, manner of acting. Si-kata, ^SL^~jj\, manner of handling, also yfit 2x }f|o form of doing, gestures; Teniteno si-kata, /
yoo,
with the hands.
gesticulations
Si-te,
^j^^ ^*^, - work-hand, the hand, the
person that accomplishes a thing. 3.
The root-form
Si further occurs in
to imply that the action expressed
in
includes
itself,
Fundwo
by the verb,
is
an adverbial
as
done, as a definite act, and,
(compare page 236 n. 18).
for the clearing of ships.
j? $#/ ft ^
Ftindno dasi-ba,
ffl
is,
Si-ire ,
or has been, -fr y^.
5
of merchandise. oneself busy (
^ -ff*
^
-f)
cleared.
actually
fr)e,
'
!'*'
^j^~, Sono fund no si-dasi-bano mindtonona, the name of the port at ship
prefix,
the activity of the subject. Examples:
all
das)i, u, to clear a ship
= the place
compound verbs
j&f; which this
uru, to take in, to take up;
the taking in , as exercising a calling , the buying in , purchase /
^t
2x
j^^i
Si-or)i, u, to be busy; Mono-si-or)i, u, to
with one thing or another. va sudeni fai-
(
^
)
seri *)
Nippon ,
ni
^
1) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the
^
7
,
yebumi no
si-mairi
in Japan coming up to the image-
trampling has been already abolished.
ff*
dite
keep
Si-utsi,
the deed.
Si-fardi ,
the payment.
9 Oct. 1868, Art. IV,
al.
2.
CHAPTER
VII.
yr ^ JJLT' "ft
^
fife
*
'
fhsx ]]f, II.
part
it
Acting as verb, plays
,
it is
THE VERB
TO DO.
81,
281
10S.
Si-tate,
erection, making.
Si-toge ,
perfect accomplish.
Si-naosi, polish.
w
is
On
nondeflecting.
advisable that the explanation of
its
account of the important use should be preceded by a
SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS.
Nondeflecting.
Deflecting.
Continuative.
SI
Root-form .... Imperative.
.
Closing-form
[Sur)i, U, not
in use.]
..81, form- word of causative
Seyo, Sero, Sei, Sesai, do.
. .
Su.
.
.
TO DO.
,
verbs, aa
Stiru.
be; ..teyo, imperative;
Subst.and Attr.
Sum,
Terminative..
Suruni,
.
Local
Aim, to make
.
doing. to
.
nt, closing-form.
doing.
Suruni, by doing.
Suruni va. Sureba.
Seba.
Surutoiedomo, Gerund
.
.
.
seba.
if one
Suredomo,
Concessive ....
.
Site.
do.
sit\ doing.
PRETERIT. Closing-form
.
.
Sl-tari
Seri, did.
,
A
Sita, has done. ..sltar)i,
u,
A
..slta,
has done. and
Substant.
Seru, the having done.
Sl-taru,
A
Sita.
Attributive.
Sesi.
Sesini, when one did. Sesinari, has done.
Sesikaba, as he did. FUTURE.
Sen,
&,
A
sJiall
do;
ASe6z)u,uru, ..su-be)ki, ku, si,
Seo,
Senzu.
(p.
NEGATIVE. Root-form
.
.
.
Sezi,
&,
not to do.
[Sezari,
contin.
109 n. 73.
104).
CHAFfEE, VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO.
282
Nondeflecting.
Closing, Subst.
Sezu,
A
103.
Deflecting.
Senu.
Sezaru.
and Attrib.
Gerund
A
Sezuslte,
Sede,
CAUSATIVE.
have done. ..sas)u, . .
A eta,
sas)ete, etari,
Aeo. Con-
Fut. en, tin,
uru, ureba, ure-
domo. Neg. Sasenu. -
Se-sim)e
(^
2/), u,
uru,
.sasim)e, nondefleet. <
.
charge to do; Ger. Se-
slmete ,
let
do, have done.
Sestte ;
contr.
Fut. Sesimen. PASSIVE.
Serar)e, u, uru, nondefl.
uru, be-
u,
..sar)e,
come done.
become done. . .
u
saserar)e ,
^-^
^
,
uru
order
,
is
given to do.
Serarezu,
A
Serarenu,
negative, not to be done.
Compounds with 1.
S)i,
u, uru (to do)
is
Si.
used to derive verbs from Japanese nouns;
e.
g.:
Kari, hunting; Kari-s)i, u, uru, to practise hunting; Firano farani bari-so., people hunt on the plain of Firano. alone in the evening.
7 (
woman,
,
$1$
she
)
t
iVUt
Yome-iri-sitQm6 fu-bo yonde
who has not
yet
1) Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i. IV. 2.
made her entrance
r.
to
ivi,
,
hunting
marriage.
sndeni yome-iri-sita,TU.
mummd as wife,
koto,
woman
as a (married)
imdda yome-iri-sezoxiLwo dzyo ("^^3)
Onnava,
wo fu
Tada fi-knrdni &
Yome-iri - the entrance
to ivu is
l
)
,
=
as to the
called dzyo (maid),
CHAPTER
who
she
THE VERB
VII.
TO DO.
SI,
has already made her entrance as wife,
is
283
103.
called fu.
Also
been married, her parents say, calling her musume (daughter).
way, by means of
Katsi-watdri
A Mumano
river.
In the same
verbs are derived from:
si,
Yome-tori, to take to wife.
a prince.
,
Kami-agari, the rising as Kami, the decease of
Kavawo
a ford.
kasiraga ftgdst-su,
katsi-watdri-suru, the fording of a
the
head faces the
horse's
Ono-ono rdsiya Jigasi-su, each turns either to the west or to the
one does side the
danwa
sowing
Go zume
is
how
form 2.
Mainai serardzu, he
not done.
is
is
a.
legion.
is
it
si-mdsu,
is
five taels.
Kono
not bribed.
ne-
the price
is
*),
it?
Chinese words also are verbalized by means of
si (
^
)
?
^eir number
Examples: Rio-koo-si, to travel.
s^,
Rai-teo-si, to come to court.
Za-si, to
Tai-si, to be opposite to.
TVuu-m, to go through... ^
Fai-si, to greet, salute.
2^,
v
Fai-si, to abolish.
/,
FoM-n-, to be attentive. it',
Rei-si, to order.
,
,
*/,
Tas-si, to
with bait
with
make known.
Tes-si, to penetrate;
Zi-serar)e, u,
allured
un-
derstand.
bait
(bribed).
Gas-si, to
Zai-riu-si, to keep abode.
Nes-si, to be hot.
fit,
agree.
Sis-si, to lose.
Kiyo-riu-si,
Dziu-si, ;$
to arrive.
TMku-gan-si, to land.
Zi-si, to allure
uru,
to be hostile. ',
2xi
Si-si, to die.
(ijS^)'
sit.
You-i-si, to provide...
Rau-si, to weary.
z)i,
east, every
Sono katawa doo Bi-tnds& kaf
Rai-si, to come.
b.
east.
- towards that
sezu,
{kura si-mdsuka (or ari-mdswka, or kakdri-mdsiika)? *), what
of it? its
Kono katani mukdite tane-maki
or that.
this
she has
if
Bos-si, to sink.
to dwell.
Dziu-sai-si, verbalised Chinese words some,
Of the thus
u, uru (&,
X, X*^)
instead of
s)i,
u, uru.
by way of exception, have,
The impure
preceding n, occurs in:
1) Shopping- Dialogues
,
page 3. 34.
2) Ibid. p.
1 1.
t resulting from
284
CHAPTER
to
,?, An-zi,
VII.
remark
f, *?
,
3
11!
*;
rest.)
H&E
make
1.
to
2.
to transform.
revolve;
hand
(tekito,
??,
Gen-zi, to appear.
??,
Gen-zi, to lessen
with the enemy).
2as)i,
?j,
?^,
Mei-zi, to give order.
:,
(J^v
|^j
^) suru
^>,
%/
Fino
2.
vulgo, to think.
&oo-zi
Soo-ron-zi, to converse.
come
to
,
fanasazareba
dsi tsukdrete
,
long perched, and not
he grows
mono water.
|tF
=
if
= very
in
to note
to
A
your
si.
down what one
sees
down what one has
= people speak of the
A
earth.
well.
yfe
desire.
y
jffc J?
^H
'
^jB
^
^^
^"^^^ ^i
Ffodsiku sue-okite
siyau (/ql t)zu, if the hunting falcon be kept
the
\
falcon,
^
f,=
because he
-^ ^
2^r * t ^
is
continually
is
hot,
very fond of fresh
^ %*/?<. %-?7, charging
Fitransi-k6kuno fltd Nipponni
seva (read seba), sono fit6-l>1t6wo Nipponni
$,)
;
abroad, his feet get exhausted by weariness, and
emperor) has silkworms bred.
^
grow
Oo-zi, to answer to.
means
it
I shall satisfy
yamaiwo
let fly
,
Sore takava tsundni nessuru (|^i^ ^)i yueni sei-midzuwo kondmu
sick.
nari,
it,
forth
Foo-zi, to reward.
tooki tsikdkiwo ron-zu,
X, /Soo-tsi-ai-mas'ta, I have understood!
Soo-si-masoo , I shall do
to diminish.
,
Ron-zi, to discourse.
and near (of the distance) of the sun from the
far
offer.
to maintain;
koto wo kakitomeru, to note
and hears. If suru be superseded by seru, seen and heard (remarked).
excite
1.
Examples of the use of Chinese-Japanese verbs Ken-bun
stir,
produce.
to injure.
it,
Zon-zi,
pro i/*/
Son-zi, to suffer damage.
:,
affect,
Ken-zi, to
?>,
Gin-zi, to sing.
;,
Kan-zi, to
?5,
jj,
iff
Kassdn-zi, to be hand to
x>
103.
the feelings.
Go-ran-zi, to please to see.
v i/i
,
An-zi to
San-zi , to scatter.
7,^1 Ten-zi,
*
TO DO.
SI,
distin-
(to
guish from 2fr-*x
bring to
THE VERB
Sit6
all
people (the
kio-riu-(^^
nengoroni dtsukdvu besi
1
),
the French remain in Japan, that people (they) will be treated well.
Remark. If the accomplishing of a thing, instead of the being occupied with to be expressed, then itas)i,
it,
is
of
si,
Vtardsi,
x), to
accomplish,
is
used instead
both in Japanese and Chinese words. Itdsi has arisen by syncope from
which
is
the causative form of%tdr)i, u (J3|f*),
would go) and as such
1)
u (f*|?
signifies the
Franco-Japanese Treaty of 1858. Art.
I.
al.
= has gone (whither he
accomplishment
2. Ibid.
of an action.
IX. 2. XV. 1, 2.
For the
CHAPTER rest, the
THE VERB
VII.
spoken language seems to use
more harmonious than the simple -4"f
A
m-
2
>*
I
rt
W
2/
3
-fa
'
CI
mn
f
^
xn.
285
merely for euphony, as being
?
wU
4db
^c:
itasltarii tokiva,
suppon
9'
Nippon
K*8it fardi-kata itas&su
yakit-
when
1
best ),
without having paid their debts to
Japanese,
X
*
103.
Examples:
5^
/^ft
P
Vtdri also,
vdzttsttt
A
/
4
TO DO.
,
Nippon-zin Fransi-zin yorino laku-zaiwo fara-
^ * ^-70 X * w 8t? as
\\\^ a )
%
si.
SI
Frenchmen, have taken
flight,
the Japanese
make inquiry and make them
authorities shall
pay-
^
Soo-bai-itasu
^ p
-rjl^
-^
M.
-f
2/
yoo
soo-dan
itdsi
Go
tasi-
hen-too itdsi-masoo (tasi
=
masoo, I shall do
When
1.
trade
it
The
su.]
in the accusative.
)
,
morrow
to
I shall
,
A 0-itoma
so.
an object
this verb has
[..wo
masoo
ttdsi)
3
I shall give
^
suru mono
wo
torite
^
(
the mulberry
A Sa-
it.
U, UTU, TO DO.
S)i,
direct, in the accusative, before it, it is tran-
intransitive.
is
what
definition:
a person does, stands, as object direct,
Examples:
^
J^ ^
5 )
)
^ ^^ ,
(totte)
you an answer.
speak with you about
Kareva naniwo sitaruka? what has he done? ijjj
not unwelcome,
4 itasi-masoo, I shall take leave of you ).
ON THE GOVERNMENT OF
but when not,
*"
it
will not be thwarted.
it
III.
sitive,
),
-r
A Miyoo-nitsi A Go
2
kurusikardzu
koto
i
do not do this
I
^jf J)
,
=
this is
and
not
my
,
practises
own hands
sezu
business.
one who practises humanity.
ko-gaiwo si-tomauw, = with her
leaf,
Ware korewo
(?^ Zin wo
Tedz&kdra
(the princess) plucks
the nourishment of children (the breeding of
silkworms). 2.
is
[.
The
.ni su.]
engaged
definition of the
form
.
.
(transitive), provided it be a
ni-s)i, M,
proceeds
From
6 ).
1) Franco-Jap. Treaty. Art.
in nzi
. .
is
what
put in the Local
n-)t, whence
.
.
nz)i
the Gerund nislt6 the form nite arises, by syncope.
XVIII.
I have observed
instead of nzi therefore even
noun,
wrw, sometimes mutating to
1.
al.
2)
RODRIGUEZ
Ibid.
VIII.
1.
5) Ttck*g-y**g. XI.
4) Ibid. p. 41.
3) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 39.
&} The z
which one
or is (intransitive), or in which one causes a thing to be,
one makes of a thing in ni, the
state or of the quality, in
it
myself,
in
is
lem. f 29
so softly
pronounced
,
that one think* he
has adopted the written-forra M.
bean
nyi
CHAPTER
286
Examples
besi ( ^jf
^
SI,
TO DO.
an intransitive
^
ffll
ifei )
one
>
1-nakdrani
signification.
mav
do
Ten-wau fou-zu, = being in the ninth year of
nite)
Nomi
yotsu kado nisttd, sue togaru,
Kono simava mi
the top.
the fruit
island (Slkok, or the four countries)
a name.
is
(^
how many pounds
$j
shall I
A
quadrangular, and pointed at
is
smaller.
sitd,
mayumo
ni sitd seo (//JN^) wart,
Yama-inu va
iro ki ni sitd,
fflj
^=f
ia
'
Motowo fdkdni
koto wo fodok6sft
4 )
,
if
sltd,
sudwo
make
the stag ,
is
(is
the chief), one
how
wo
^
strife,
^ [^
)
,
the
depends on the government of Te-honni suru, set for example.
1)
Shopping-Dialogues , p. 11.
2)
The
inversion:
mayumo
3) Kasira-gaki. XII. 5
Sika
nagasi
and
)
,
the wild dog
tail.
T6k&wo akirdkani
ntsi-ni surebd,
su, he lets virtue
tamiwo arasovdsimete
Futokdro, bosom,
r.
koto va
surfr
making
,
ttbdvu
heart.
Omote, face, front
sono kuni
-
-
,
Korewo side.
Tairdka,
wo osdmurn ni
dri
5 )
the whole empire peaceful and happy
Meateni suru, to
his state.
Dai-setsu
tsivtald instead of Isiisaki
4)
,
Makoto, truth. Sono kokdro basewd
and rapacity.
Ten-ka wo tairaka ni
~|^ ~%f yj^
by over-
like a horse 3
Nisiva gavawo omoteni su, on the west one has a river in front.
2p
is it?
small cocoons.
much
futokdroni si-tsubesi, one ought to take this to heart.
(
n
one excludes the root (virtue) and includes the top (fortune)
one teaches the people
smooth.
ari, this
Banding
tsiisakiwo tsukuru*),
fou siroku
makotonisu, he makes his meaning truth.
level ,
na
Fito fakoni nangin irini si-masuka? l ),
Si, with a transitive signification.
shine.
gotoni
at the point
is
being yellow of color has white cheeks and a long b.
omo
ari,
Tff "fc
feeding, the (silk)worm will remain small and also
gotdku
-
put in a chest? Fyak-kin irini nasdre, put a hundred
Atsukavini sureba, musi tsiisdku
m&mano
dies.
Saki, the point. Sakirizuru tokinva (=
when one
A*)'
Emperor
Roono katawa doo si-mas&ka? the shape of the wax
in.
pounds
j||J
his reign, the
is
bdsi,
the point of departure he must wait.
leads the others
roku-sai ni site
,
one and has four faces; these have each
Tatsi-tokdroni sitd mdtsi tsu
sakini suru tokiniva) fitdwo sei-su,
Fa
Zai-wi ku-nen nisit6 (or
nisttd omo yotsu
fitotsu
(or nite) Mdsi tsu
site
while sitting.
it
the leaf, being in the sixth year, dries up.
yfcarw,
va
103.
:
Si, with
a.
THE VERB
VII.
(y^
mayumo
Dai Gaku. X.
8.
~wJ)
m
set for aim.
suru, to consider im-
serves to bring ont tsiisaki (small) with
5) Ihid.,
X.
1.
CHAPTER
THE VERB
VII.
Atatakani sum, to warm.
portant.
mabirakani suru, to make sider lightly, despise.
TO DO.
81,
103.
Komakani sum,
287
make
to
Tsu-
fine.
-- Karo, light (of weight); Karonzi, to con-
clear.
Omo, heavy, weighty; Omonzi,
to consider weighty.
To
be distinguished from Karokusi, Omokusi, to make light, to make weighty. Sora, empty; Soranzi, to learn by heart.
Fako wa
or amarizu , to think zweet. chest into the bargain.
-
-
Oki-tokei
wo
Ama, mead,
soye ni site kudasare fltdtsti soye ni
Amani
sugar juice; l
)
*,
please to give the
,
si-ma&oo
*)
I will give a
,
time-piece into the bargain.
[..kusu, ..usu.] If the definition of quality
3. e.
and the
w, uru,
)z,
adverbial form in
its
Nagaki, lang,
g.
formed compound
so
object direct, expresses the it
u has
)',
its
lurk behind
is
long;
if
(
an adjective in
ki
(
9),
(or merely u) is used to unite with
Nagaku-si)
,
as long as there is
no
mere carrying out of the idea of the adverb, and, as
appears from the examples quoted,
form Nagasi, =
ku
is
is
equivalent to the predicative closing-
however an object
direct is involved, then the verb
form
transitive signification (the causative
se-su
=
se-simu seems to
In the example quoted at page 269: Tsuriwo y6k&-su^ he handles
it).
the angle well, yoku
a modal definition of the transitively used
is
)',
u, to do,
handle. a.
With an
Wo
intransitive signification ..ku s)z, u, uru appear in propositions as:
and cannot
tooku tobu koto atavdzu
sitd
nagdku
Da va
fly far.
long neck and high
.
.
(if
the tong
C..
to koto-nari,
A
easy.]
Nokordzu
gotoku sureba,
warm and
cool.
is
^
11.
5) Shopping-Dialogues,
p.
r.
36.
kit**** no he
sXte
[TtUkdki^ near.]
A., comes near B.. and
fierce
Ten-wau
light.
and warmer
close,
- -
if
the lips are
[Araki, rough, wild;
JUowo kor6*v
ftmdre-tsuki ardku-site
by nature, was fond of killing men.
when people
are acting in this way.
8) Ibid. p. 39. )
Ibid.
XII.
9.
r.
A., va
from C..-
differs
kai nasdru nurd, yas&ku-stte age-ma$oo*), if you
1) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 12.
3) Kasira-gaki XIII.
j?*)
tail
camel has a
dsi takasi, the
Kutsibiru usuvu-slte, kotoba kar6u-su,
wildly.]
kotowo konomu, the emperor,
Kakuno
it
smooth), the word weighs
is
Arakusu, act wildly, behave
like.]
sitt,
ndtstivd suzusi*), his hair is
{Usuki, thin. Karoki, light.] thin
,
kubi nagdku
.
even than the hair of the fox; in summer ve tsikdkusite
)
Sonoke un-kqu (|S.v
legs.
yorimo atataka nari;
B..
he (a certain bird) has a long
s
- -
\Got6ki ,
[Forf&i,
buy the whole
288
CHAPTER.
you have
stock, I will let
~Y^^
pron. naosu),
YaM.su
1.
1. to
koto nakusite,
God's help.
With
b.
A
2.
Fit6
VII.
it
THE VERB
[Naki, not existing.
cheap.
be wanting, to
Kami no
tdsukd ari, medical treatment failing there
wo nandomo nau
[Fikiki, low, humble.]
downward and look below.
is
he considers others as of no value.
su,
found in propositions
as:
to exalt one's aim, not to give
up
u, uru
s)i,
sum, =
[Takaki, high.] Me-atewo takaku
the eyes
Nakusu(&
think paltry (of no value).]
2. to
fail,
a transitive signification ..ku
one's intention.
103.
TO DO.
SI,
Me wo
is
cast fikikusite utsubukite miru, to
mi wo
[Taddstki, right, upright.] Sono
osa-
mento hdssuru mono va mddzu sono kokdro wo taddsiu-su Sono kokdro wo tadasiuhdssuru
sen to
mono va mddzu sono kokdrobase wo makdto first
govern himself, first
to
aims at truth.
make whole,
yuen nari is
makes
it
to perfect.]
^ fH
$f
^|f"
Zinwo suru to va sono kokdro no
$ ^^
Aj)
^ ^ i&
)
i
stki,
cool.]
coolness.
To wo firaki suzusiku su [FttdsVki,
wo ondziu
besi,
- one-ish, of one
sdzu ,
his heart right,
A
it
mattoo) su,
tdkttwo mattou
of humanity
Korewo make
sum
tokusu, he
[Suzu-
you may open the door and
let in the
sort.]
Koku kawo
fttdtrtusu,
he makes
[Qn&Xfet, identical.]
Tomoni
staying at the same place
common, not
Newo
[Fukdki, deep; Katdki, hard, fast.]
tdku suru kusd nari, =
ever will
not having the middle kingdom in common. Tsiri wo
ondztku sdnu, not having the dust in
with anyone.
who
hot.
the country and people conforming to one mode. tsiu-k6ku
,
^ne practice
[Atsuki, hot.] Atsuku or Atsuu suru, to
quickly.
)
make
will
the means to perfect the heart. -- [Toki, quick, ready.]
does
1
[Mattaki, whole; mattaku- (mattau, mattou,
/
(
He who
his heart right.
ni su
is
a plant, that shoots
its
fukqusi, fozowo ka-
and makes
roots deep,
its
stalk hard. 4.
[to su.]
The appositive
or in imagination merely,
fact
definition, is
what
characterized
a thing
by the
is
made, whether in
particle to,
= to,
(see
page 70. V). If an object direct
is
mentioned in the proposition, the apposition
has reference to the object and
si
has the transitive signification of
take for, consider as; on the other hand
if
no
direct object is
the proposition, the apposition has reference to the subject, and transitive signification of: to a.
1)
4.
we have
(to),
mentioned in
si
has the in-
be actually.
Appositions referring to the subject
Lai Gaku, IV,
make
in sentences, like:
CHAPTER
THE VERB
VII.
TO DO.
SI,
289
103.
Fito to site kau nakivd (or naki monova) tsiku-sauni k6tondrazu, he
a
human
being and
who
or: he
human being
as a
umi maseru
of
destitute
is
filial
the island of Avadsi
nari,
archipelago) as an afterbirth.
is
love, does not differ from the brute;
devoid of etc.
is
who
Avadsino simavd ena to
site
arose (at the creation of the Japanese
Fosi otsuru
ivuva fosini ardzH. Fito no
to
me in
fosi to suru norm, concerning the assertion, that stars fall, they are not stars.
Only
men
for the eyes of
do they appear as
Appositions referring to the object
b.
stars.
we have
in sentences as:
Onoreni sikazdru monowd tomotd suru koto nakdre,
make any one who ,
not as your
is
Kono fan wo dai-itsito Fan to su ( cipal). = Te-fonni
(who
this rule
subesi,
^
self
x b)'
l?7
is
your
may
it
inferior)
must be considered
make
(to)
a
,
not be that (you)
(to)
your fellow.
-
as the first (the prin-
consider as a rule.
rule,
su; meateni su.
Remark.
The
1.
object that
is
taken for anything,
found as object
is
still
governed by a separate active verb, which most frequently gives the way in
which
it
Tenwau
made.
is
appoints Lady
...
fimewo
and makes her
...
(to)
kisagi to si-tamavu, the
tatete
consort. = the emperor takes
emperor
Lady
for
...
consort.
Remark. to
Much
2.
used
is
B.., considers A., as B.
wauwo motte koto su
Waukiwo motte
-
he has Wang-ki for father and
pass as advantage;
vernment does not justice.
),
has A., to B. -
to su,
he makes A..
tsitsitosi,
Wu-wang
find
its
it
for son. -
considers justice as advantage. Or: a go-
advantage in advantage;
it
finds its
advantage in
Rito suruni giwo mottesu*), to use justice as being advantageous.
^ ij ^ *m- Ten-sinwo ^ -i^A^ _ _H8 ^'
miruniva, sono siyu
to
suru tokorotco motifsu*),
I
^
y
Yuru yuru,
to judge of a foreign minister, people take as stand
*S*
V whom
By
the omission of site instead of
P Remark.
he makes his host (him in whose house he
him
stays).
?
3.
loitering,
hesitating,
Yuruyuru
Tschung-yung. XVIII.
4) Meny-tsze, Lib.
.
,
for step (slowly).
1)
Bu-
8 ri to sdzu; giwo motte ri to sw ), a government does not
Kuniva riwo motte
make advantage
1
.,
the formula: A., wo motte B..
II.
to
by degrees.
.to site,
-
we meet with
Yuruyuru ayumi,
suru, slowly, by degrees to do.
2)
Dai Gain. X.
88.
to alone. to
-
go step
Yuruyuru
") IWd. IV. 5.
Cap. HI. $ 45.
19
290
CHAFFER
Yuru yuru
to site (or
THE VERB
VII.
(/V ^7
fappoo
to)
TO DO.
SI,
)
w
103.
spreads gradually in
it
frog)
all
directions.
If the
5.
verb with
a
is
imagination,
form followed by to
Kakuru nasi
to
there
Faru-aMva kagewo
is
Kore yori ttwa nai to.. Itareri, is to
to su,
come
yosi to
sum
Ware
to..
nai,
itareri
have reached the topmost.
prized; in winter the sunshine
is
koto
people consider,
warm
yosi tosu, in the
fuyuva Jinatawo
Tada fikureni kari-suruwo
best.
$&^ %jk^ ^ Kakuru A Kore yori ndwa wanting.
the extreme,
to
tattomi,
autumn) the shadow
(spring
to
come
put in the closing-
'
come
Itari,
I think to have
su,
is
^
no want.
nothing that surpasses that. it.
it
and that in
(to),
etc.
people think, that nothing
that nothing surpasses to
u, uru
s)i,
made
is
thing
or without complement,
koto nasi, there is
su,
is
what any
definition,
appositive
nari, people think
season
is
thought the
it
for the best,
hunt only in the evening. [en-, in-, an- to stu]
6.
The
definition expressed
what purpose
complement, to
a person
is
by a verb with or without
occupied,
is
put in the Future
followed by to s)i, u, uru; whence the forms: ..en to su, ..in to su, ..an to
su
(
A
00-,
oo to su)
iu-i
,
= he
busy about
is
. .
,
he
about to
is
. .
,
Lat. in eo est ut, id agit ut. These forms are equivalent to the Lat.
tativum (moriturio), and, as
Kassen ni yukdn to su
he
,
it, is
fandtte mikotowo yaki-korosanto
tried
fire
unsheathed 7. is
itself
[..to site,
met
often
Kono
about to go to battle.
sum
;
verbum medi-
toki,
Yebisu
domo no ni
fi wo
mikotono faki-tamaveru fou-ken midsu-
when
the savages setting the
field
and mowed the burning grass away.
= ..to
with.
is
. .
burn the prince, the sword which the prince had girded on,
te.]
Comp.
Instead of the gerund to
site
the syncopated to te
130. 48. Examples:
aidani, Fayatomo sedo to
banks) there taka,
to
tries to
express an effort towards something.
kara nukete, moye-kitaru kusawo nagi-faravu,
on
he
3
te
)
,
sivo faydsi,
between them (between the two
the strait of Hayatomo, and the stream
is
rapid.
Kono foM Koorai
Yezo-taka, Riu-kiu-taka to te, kuni-gunini ari, moreover there are, since
THE falcon of Corea, that of Yezo, that of Liu-kiu are met with, (falcons) in every country.
1)
Kono sekiwo Fotokeni
nitari
In our opinion, to estimate to, rightly as
Filo tova,
must b
observed.
it is
to te,
Buts-zqu-sdki
to
mo
ivu, people
here used, what has been said at page 70
,
V
,
respectin g
CHAPTER call that rock,
rock.
THE VERB
VII.
because they think that
Ine'wo tsumide
and
balls to a fort
(A
103. BESI
SI,
it
104.
,
291
resembles a Buddha, the Buddha-image-
tsunde), siro to site ... tatakqvu, he heaps
Yase-kiwo niwakani
fights.
te koyasiwo tsuyoku-su bekardzu, to
(
%$sei-teu-
make meagre trunks of
up
rice-
;M 5) *0-Wnto
trees
grow, they
may
not be too strongly manured.
=
Wf ^
&t*
"Tit*
Ii8
?
_g~
%
Go kokuno wauva Nipponwo semen to te w-nianno m'n a z ^y uwo wa tdsu, the king of the country U, intending
= jB ^
rt
h
make war on Japan, sends a
to "3L.y
s
*
104.
BesI,
force of
may, can,
shall; Beki, adjective, B^k&, adverb possibly, 'jit pLf o
o
jfi
e
/yii*>
2j\ sj-\
" o
| .|
o
& ^J
o
||F HpJ
o
Derivation and signification.
I.
Be
(-^), after the old
ubd and
Zr-^t
2?
form of writing A-^,
urnd (pronounced
,
as
mube (pronounced
mme),
is
in
tion of the origin of Be,
is
still
required,
JE
must be sought
it
i
an investiga-
in the exclamation
as our hem, implies that a person understands something,
= our
The
original form,
m-M,
whereas in the month of a Ye"do gentleman old form
consent
in expressions as
-s:
(be),
may
Mube
sounds clearly as mbe.
nari (sC^jtf 9)4 ji P> granted,
do; Mttb6 nardzii,
it is
not allowed,
root
Be: the predicative
not be;
no external cause preventing the doing of a thing.
1)
-jt
= with *i|p
><&(,
the attributive
and the adverb, bdk&, thus include the idea of may, and of can,
e.
2)
may
it is impossible. possible, Su-be nasi,
adjective, bdki,
lated
it
= one has
occurs as a substantive in the every day expression Su-be nari,
The forms derived from the
i.
write be,
as a substantive with the signification of
A^s, Mube, occurs
the liberty to do, one
whereas
it
we
1
still,
and in he,
according to the rule of euphony passes, in
pronunciation, into mbd, expressed in writing by -^, for which
The
also
*).
m, which, yes.
mbe),
Japanese dictionaries,
and made equal to the Chinese
i)
as
this definition of the idea is practically sufficient,
although
If,
t
word of assent
called a
is
tens
of thousands thither.
7fT expressed in Chinese by j J
it
many
^ ^x
r
^
h
#$'),:
A command
Formerly the Chinese word ffjj (= content)
to do
WM
trans-
Ube or Ume. i ..Suitable,
proper,
fit,
becoming; ought, should."
MEDHUMT, CKuute and Englitk Dictionary.
CHAPTER
292
THE VERB BESI
VII.
and we do
something
is
not included in
it,
Japanese,
if
we
word the
give to this
must, you shall." The of
idea of
MAY.
,
104.
injustice to the politeness of the
signification of our
consent on
one must, you
the one side does not include that
obligation on the other (must), and can,
at its strongest, only contain
an
inducement. II.
Be
belongs to the root-words treated in
adjectives in ki are derived.
9. I. B.,
of which the so called
In accordance with the rule given there, Besi and
Beki in the old-Japanese and in the popular language are superseded by the syncopated form Bei (Iff ^) and the adverb Beku by Beo
and that particularly in the countries
"* ("flf|"$?o
7
"Pf
JSI
7 )
>
east of the Fakone-pass , whereas in Sinano
1
Mei (Iff^) is said, instead of Bei ). With regard to the inflectional forms, they cannot be by a systematic synopsis. The writer confines himself actually rule,
come under
may
yet
forms of Nasi,
his
exist,
he
notice, refers
and with regard
better elucidated than
to those forms ,
which have
to such as, according to the
the reader to the Synopsis of the Inflectional
106.
INFLECTIONAL FORMS OF BESI, MAY, CAN.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB BESI, MAY.
Aorist.
Concessive.
104.
Coo tin.
293
Pres.
Preterit.
Bekaredomo.
.
Bekeredomo.
although.
Adverbial
.
Bekaraku.
.
FUTURE.
A
Bekar)an,
Beken,
ao,
ha-
ve been possible.
oo.
Beranari,
it sJiall
shall be
it
possible
Bekuni, Bekuni
Conditional.
va
if-
,
Bekunba
Bekaraba, if
be
it
it
might be possible.
possible.
,
Bekenba, if
Bekumba. NEGATIVE. Be-nasi, old-Jap.
may
Bekara)zu,
A
nu.
not.
Sube-nasi,
=
it is
Su-bekarazu,
not to be done.
is
it
not possible.
U-bekarazu,
it is
not
to be obtained.
HI. ON THE GOVERNMENT OP Besi.
The verb, which, preceding Besi, will (do) is put, either in its
what
expresses
root, or
its
or, instead of it, in the root, in
i
with
shall or
attributive form. In nondeflecting
verbs both forms are used, in deflecting verbs in
u
one may, can,
nu
i,
only the attributive form in
or tsu as termination. Examples
with nondeflecting verbs: Ake-besi, one can,
may
open.
Mi-besi, one can,
may
see.
Fiyori yokiioo
mite, tandwo a^e-besi. Savo-nadoni tsuri, fikage-nite &ar/:
the weather
is
fair,
you may take out the seed (of the silkworms that have been
put in water), suspend divided;
it
on
Wakerdr%rii-beki, divisible.
sight; Mi-wakerdruru-besi, it
be
sticks
visible;
is
Aravaruru-beki koto,
and dry
A
it
in the sun.
becomes U-beki instead of Urbeki;
-
A
Walcerare, be
Mi-wakerare, to be distinguished at
to be distinguished at sight. visibility.
-
E, Ete
^^^-^y,
-
A
(or Ye, Yefe),
Aravare, to
U, UrU
(get)
Ubeki mono, something one can
CHAPTER
THE VERB BESI,
VII.
Sesime. have
get, something O obtainable. O '
murbesi, one can have done.
Se'simii-be'si
instead of Sesi-
Tas&ke, help, save; Tasuku-besi instead of Tasu-
In a legend S'akya speaks to the falcon: Nandzi kono fatowo
kurbesi.
The
spare this dove.
bdsi,
done;
it
104.
MA.Y.
Ware kono fatowo
falcon answers:
tdstiku-
ware
tdstikdbd,
uvdte si-su-besi, if I spare the dove, I shall die of hunger.
Examples with
^^ ~
*~
deflecting verbs:
Nari, to
f
^
*
.
beki
^
^
of
doing
women
naru-besi, this
Su-
Si. to do.
feasible. Su-beki koto ari, there is a possibility
("Pff "lij)?
tyfc
Onna kono tewazawo
(this).
Korewa onnano
ought to do such work.
which
undoubtedly be that of Oki.
island will
uc.
Kono sima kanarazu Okino-sima
be.
women
su-besi,
work
su-beki tewaza wan', that is a
can or ought to do. Su-beki (being able, or about to do)
here
is
conceived in an active sense, whereas the genitive onnano precedes as attributive
Tomoni
definition.
ivu-besi
speak with one another.
may
people
(IjJ* Jilt ^=f ),
Nivakdni fusegu-beki yaumo nakereba, Kavatsiye nige-yuku, as in the hurry
was impossible
with regard to this
,
regard to this, one
happen "FT
^
may remain
it
not do
may
it.
the latter forbids that
,
"-
)
'
cann
make
t
it
it
may
it
Itdrinu-Msi
(
llj"
The former -
happen.
make
-- Iri-nu
one
or shall
may
or can be called.
may
Ivi-tsu-bdsi , it
allows, that something
and 85, but
to
^^ nu
of the attributive
;
verbs,
deflecting bdsi
(
come
l*f
e.
g.
l.>
j|||
The
go
(Ivi (li),
i
n
-
'
to be called;
Tana-kok6roni megurdst-tsu-be'si
Uru
what one
is
(a variation of no)
relation,
ability to
jjjjj o
pression:
^T
koto wo
o
,
one can
o
^^
tsu,
and WM, treated in
which, as characteristics
is
expressed by Y6kiis)i, u, uru, to do
Negative Yokuse)zu
am
y6kusu^-~L
able to get,
,
it
A
Yokusenu. Prom the ex-
appears that the definition
able for, precedes as object in the Accusative.
sikaustte
(his object),
84
are derived from the old language. See page 67.
do any thing 7j
and
tsti
Also used adverbially Y6ku expresses the ability to do anything, bdkdtte
( ~j$*
Ari, to be;
,A)> one mav 8
- -
to.
I refer both terminations not to the closing-forms
good
not
may
run round on the palm of the hand.
it
IV.
with
,
Tsumabiraka ni su-bekardzu
-
bdsi,
clear.
or can be.
gj?),
Kore va nasaru bekarazu
undone.
The terminations nu and tsu occur in Ari-nu-be'si ,
Koreva nasazdru
to offer resistance, they fled to Kavatsi.
it
jg
notsi jffij
y6ku
||
w,
by .
reflection is
Dai Gaku.
I.
e. g.
Omon-
one able consequently to attain 2.
CHAPTER
w>=
Tada
/#
*\>
*"
wosu
g*
~
*
THE VERBS ATAVAZI, AHETE.
VII
104.
zin-zin ydkii ftt6wo ai-si, y6ku
humane man
the
1
),
alone
2 '.'".
flt6wo nikrimu
koto
able to love others,
is
" "
c
E
=
k6ro ari
^
l^ti
koto
Atdvi, of which Atavdzu
and
=
to
av)i, u,
),
even
if
he were a saint, there would
to-
be
still
fit,
is
or,
is
- the
atavdzu,
acquisition
the negative form,
after the
u
expressed by Atavaz)i,
Wagun
is
is
(
W >p"
- -
not brought about.
composed of Ate, = equivalent,
Siwori, from Atekavi
(^^
^ft)
to take the place of a thing, as an exchange, and means, substantively used,
the value
The Japanese language _
9w
^pf'
considers the treatment,
^
'
half-way) should rest,
is
,
not brought about, = I can not
aguru koto atavdzu, agdte sakinzUru koto atavazdruvd zdkuru koto atavdzu
an excellent
and not the person
which is not of value, or cannot be brought about. 7 ^ are yamu koto atavdzu 3 ) = that I (halting B& ^ 2t T 5c
treating, as that ^m
ndrf.
Fu-senwo mite
To
motsiite tsukusu koto atavazaru
m^
^t" ^ M.T -^
Jfr ~
To dare,
V.
is
it.
vdzu,
it is
(the
6
)
,
=
man
if
there
is
mono aran
*)
,
= that
is
to 868
a mistake.
this (principle)
-
be
not possible, that (a thing) do not perish.
expressed by Ahete, Aete (Ij^cO, the gerund of
AMte
-
-
AMte
atardzu
(_^^
it.
Ahe or
tyL^
-Sy
it.
Ahfa
kotowari-ivu , he dares judge of
wari-ivdnu, he dares not judge of
ardzu
siri-
exhausted by the application, will be something impossi-
Av)e, u, uru, = to answer to... dares not attempt
*),
mite
and not be able to remove
see a good-for-nothing
him, to remove him and not be able to put him away, that
fr
Ken wo
not be able to raise him; to raise him and not be able
fate.
is
m&
- -
rest.
sirizdketd tdosdguru koto atavazdrA va ayamdtsi nari
,
man and
promote him,
Kore wo
be worth
of a thing; thus, as a verb, to be of value, to
(\j[_k)
(Lat. valere).
to
mata yoku-sezaru
Sei-zin to tedomo,
-
to do a thing
- Uru
Lat. non valet,
a
something that he could not do.
The inability
2.
th er8
^
^
'.
HE ?
^a ^e
^
'"
I
^e koto-
Tarazdru tokoro areba, ah&e MUotnezunba
any thing that does not
suffice (if
of character) does not dare not exert himself,
he comes short of) , he - -
he dares not be ne-
gligent.
u^. XII.
1)
Dai Qatu. X.
15.
2) Tsekuny-
4)
Dai Qaku. X.
16.
5) Tichung-yuny.
t.
3) Ibid.
XI.
6) Ibid
XIII
S.
4
296
CHAPTER
THE VERB TASI, DESIROUS.
VII.
AMzu
Remark. The negative
or Ali6nu
^
(
)
j|
105.
joined to the root of a
,
precedent verb, means the not accomplishing of an action; to Fatasazu
(
\S
^
**
J& #)
not to accomplish.
,
Omoi-
- -
,
made equivalent
it is
Im-
Tori- ,
,
Nagare-
*/
ahdzu or ahdnu, mean: not continue meaning, saying, taking, flowing.
VI. That an action or a state
by Too-sen
u
tar)i,
also the ideas, that fitting,
precedes as
Oitdruwo
fair).
is
fitting, or
-
^
is
as it should be,
^
(^^
$f$
one
obliged or even entitled to
is
v#
'))
substantive proposition,
uyamau
koto
too-sen
as
*s
and
that
tari,
The
is
age
by
are
it
what
definition
characterized
is
expressed
Joined to
should be. it.
is
koto
respected,
is
is
(af-
as
it
should be.
^^
Nippon
.
-
Aui
V
'Pt
^
A J\.
*
,
kumasuru koto
3
,p ^
translation
C officers
The desiderative
toosen taru besi
by grafting on the
Ta
(ideographically
the inflectional forms
expressed by
common
stantive
and
attributive form,
adv.
The spoken language, which according
the s, supersedes
Taki and
written), and Tak& by
(A
Mi-tdi),
=
desirous;
Tasi by
-J?^,
desirous
to
takuba, if he whishes to
see.
to
^,
see;
9
to
=
Mi-taku
phonetically by
II.
is
(A
desirous;
%
is
27.
he desires to see;
Mitdi},
"
^Qlt^JjL^ Mi-too) mo
improperly
also write
5
(or
Tdku,
suppresses the k and
which inadepts
Mi-tdsi
ki
them, thus Taki, the sub-
Tai (^-^, for which
Too, for
Taw,
root of the verb, the
Tase, predicate,
Mi-tdku (A Mi-tau, Mi-tao, Mi-too), adv.
|^^
JjL ncti"*),
Mi-
he will not
see.
From to do
1)
after the official
or,
Belonging to the adjectives in
all
even
be proper that
), it will
verbs.
has
Mi-taki
1
be placed on the ships;
Ta, = desirous.
quality
page 109 n. 69),
j^?)
f&ne-bune ni ... yaku-nin nori-
.
on the part of the Japanese government custom-house jlS
word expressive of (see
.
-J^
Desiderative verbs are formed
I.
.
the Japanese government shall have the right ... to place.
:
105.
sei-fu yori
(
the adverbial form Taku or Too, by means of the verb S)i, w, uru,
103),
is
derived Tdku-si or Too-si, to desire; gerund TakusiU or Too-sitd,
Regulations by which the Dutch trade in Japan shall be carried on. Art.
2) This
is
II.
the ,,tomo nai, je ne veux pas," occurring in RODR. Eiem. pag. 54
56
line 4.
CHAPTER in the
THE VERB TASI, DESIROUS.
VII.
Takutewa or Tootewa, the gerund
isolated
=
into Taku-te or Too-te,
elision
spoken language passing by
297
105.
by
tra,
=
desiring;
one desires; Takutemd or
if
Tootemo, though he wishes.
The
Taku or Too
adv.
ri-masil, is desiring;
=
Taku- or Too-omou, or omoi-masil, -
Taku-omoote zVw,
desires,
I desire ;
desirous thinking,
is
Taku-omoote ori-masu, roundabout polite form for:
Tdkti-zon-zi-mdsu , = I
am
desirous ; Mairi-taku-zonzi-mdrii , I will go.
Continuative forms.
II.
we
we
10, to the adv. Taku or Too
1) If according to exist ,
further used in compositions like Taku- or Too-goza-
is
obtain the continuative form Taku
Too
dri or
-\-
nunciation, and in writing also, passes over to Takari,
An
be desirous. Inflection, the same as of Mi-taku cm, Mi-too
Pres.
Gerund. Mi-taku-arite
,
join the verb .4ri, -f-
^*#
an', 'J
i
=
to
which in pro-
= continually
to
96).
(
an', Mitakar)i, u, is desiring to see.
Mi-taku-dtte
Concess. Mi-takuwa aredomo, also
,
Mi-too-dtte, Mi-takarlte,
Mi-tai-keredomo
though he
,
Condit.
Mi-taku-ba, Mi-takereba, Mi-tai-naraba
Future
Mi-takaroo, he
Pret.
Mi-too atta, Mi-takatta, he was disiring to
may
,
A
Mi-takatte.
desires to see.
he desires to
if
see.
desire to see. see.
Mi-takatta keredomo, though he has desired to see. Fut. Perf. Mi-takattaroo
,
may have
he
desired to see.
Derivative verbs of this stamp are: Kiki-taki, desirous to hear,
f^j]
^
|^|-
=
(^^ KC?)'
desirous
do
to
Si-taku- (si-tg,u)-suru
ready.
,
'
Nemu-taki, desirous
A
to
(
N4mu-toi,
fc? JfcJ),
desirous
to
bring about.
not
mo
nai (vulgo nemu-tQU
am
Manabi-taki, desirous to learn.
Nomi-taki, desirous to drink.
sleepiness.
Mede-taki, desirous to love, in love.
the
I.
by
Nemu-
I will sleep.
(A Nemu-tqu wai), I am Ware mata nemu-tak* sleepy.
also I
106.
te sleep, sleepy. -
taku nasi
be ready. Itdsi-taki,
mourn, = sympa-
thetic.
Yuki-taki, desirous to go. Si-taki
desirous to
Ure-taki,
The leaving off of an
action
.the deflecting transitive verb
is
Mak)i,
not sleepy. -
mo
not),
Nttnu-ttua ,
Wa-tokB*i, = selfish;
I.
expressed. u.
From
Alee, to
open,
Mi
to see,
Yuki, to go, are derived by means of Maki: Ake-maki, Mi-maki, Yuka-maJn, to leave off opening, to leave off seeing, not to go farther.
From
the examples
CHAPTER
298
weak
the
forms,
passive
106.
appears, that, just as in the forming of the continuative, factive and
it
given
THE VEUBS MAKI, YAMI, SIMAVI.
Vll.
of the
i
verb undergoes a strengthening.
deflecting
Mak)i, u means to roll up; thence the substantive, Maki, a
mono, a thing that
is
A
rolled.
roll
of writing, that has been used,
up again. Thence, improperly: Sitawo maku, to
grow
speaking, stringless
up the tongue,
roll
Maki-
or
roll,
rolled
is
i.
cease
e.
Itonaki koto wo makite ziwo titdvu, he lays the
speechless.
harp aside and sings a verse.
Joined to a verb with the signification of ceasing to do what the verb ex-
u
presses, Mak)i,
is
expressed by
1^1
$C
Ullf
A
quite
or
MASHI
as
Mi-makuno II.
>
-=?*^)
hossiki
to leave off
an ancient and
.
.
minto hossuru, or
j
A)I into-, to
(
III.
in
my
we
coll.
off
-
word by Mr. HEPBURN, Jap. Engl. which the
final
1872.
Diet.
N
is
now
,,MAKU
substituted,
mitai, desire to see."
become
quiet, to come to ,
rest, Lat. quiescere;
the silkworm leaves off eating. -
strowing food on the floor (to feed the silkworm).
A
Sima)i, u,
J
** phonetically expressed by
^t^^t*
have done with
a thing, to
in the gerund in site
simdi-masoo
,
te
or de
off. It belongs
more espe-
will
have eaten.
Imada waki-simavdzu 1
Kunde stmae
,
to sell out.
my
work.
Watdk&siwa sono
ya-stydkti
A.
my
REMUSAT
left off eating,
= he has eaten.
siyo-
Waki-simquta sake,
Kunde fermented
sufficiently
ni oru sake, beer that has not sufficiently fermented.
simai nasare mase,
may your
Uri-naraute simau,
supper be ended! =
house! the action being represented as finished
in
it.
simoota), I have read this book through-
nonde simad, leave off eating and drinking.
take your supper at
Compare what
,
(A
Kareva kunde simoota, he has he
sometimes also in the verbal root before
,
I shall finish
motsitwo mohdya yomi-simavuta
simaute aroo,
leave
spoken language, and generally has the complement of the action
off,
Si-gotowo
I)
of.
opinion, a distortion of Sttmdvi, to retire to rest, perch as bird, thence
one leaves
beer.
more
with the root of a precedent verb forms a compound verb.
Simav)i, u,
cially to the
out.
JH,?'
he wishes to hear no more of business.
Kaiko k&vd wo kuvi-yamu
.
see,
improperly to
(so)
,
obsolete affix to verbs, for
=
,
Kftvdwo furi-yame, leave as
now
desiring not to hear
f6s$ki,
Mdtstiri-koto wo kikamaku fdssu
Yam)i, u
Yami,
Kika-mdku
Hfc^T'
different signification is given to this
(-=?^o
^
to refuse, to retire, thus
ffl^? iSJL^i Sira-maki, to have done with a thing.
Mi-maki, to cease seeing.
_^t* P^ S _JH,7
=
j||.
rflem.
de la
Gramm.
Chinoise
352 says concerning
j
1
).
tiao.
CHAPTER
ADVERBIAL FORM OF THE VERB.
VII.
make
Simavas)i, u, causat., to
me
vaseyo, let
299
107.
leave off...-- Watdkusini mddz&iute-sima-
have done speaking.
first
Simavar)e, u, uru,
pass., to
be finished.
Kaki-simavaretaru soo-kan, a written
(finished) letter.
107. The adverbial form of a verb, as characteristic of modal propositions,
Kke: as one thinks, as one says,
Of the page 121
,
.a-siku,
=
.
.a-slkuva, =
.
.a-ku,
a-kuva.
. .
means of
slki,
some by changing
siki into
siku assume an adverbial character.
means. This .
.
verbals derived by
Omdvi, to think, to mean,
.
is
is
is
si
d-ku; from Omovdsiku
is
.
.
16, 2),
From
obtained Omovdslktt, - probably, as one thinks or
the axiom. As nevertheless the
a-siku passes into
..like, treated at large in
oistku,
suppressed, for shortness,
is
formed Omovdku and with addition
of the isolating va, Omovdkttvd, = as one means. The same
is
good
of:
^ be called; Sini ivaku (ffi^'
Iv}i, u, to say, to
)
,
=
as
it
is
said in
the odes, according to the odes.
Nori-tamdv)i (
-3^
^y
)
,
or No-tamdv)i, M, to bid, enjoin,
^) =
3L /%
>
Negdv)i, M, to wish; so,
=
so
it
command; Si no nori-tamaedku
according to the master's sentence , as the master says.
Negawdkuba, sa-yoo yorom, =
A
should be according to
my
V?),
Fosdku (gfc
it is
good
wish.
as people say. Mqus)i, w, to say; Mausdku,
desire;
as I wish,
F
t
u,
now
F6u)i, u, to
as people desire, as people will.
have said. Iverij has said; Iverdkuva, as people Ivikeri, has said; Ivikerasi, it is as if people
keraku
(^^
rqkuva, as
it
^^),
Jfc$
had said (compare
as people have said.
Sen-zi
(*jt
18); 7ri-
^ *) "'
"*
has been said in a proclamation by the Mikado.
to fear; Osordktiva Osor)e, uru, old- Jap. also Osori,
(^
}*
'*), as it is to
be feared, as I fear; a polite way of expressing doubt.
= as JVan, to be; Nardku (= Nardtiku), e.
substantive form, see .
_
g.
is,
Kiku-nardku, as one learns.
preceded by a verb in the -
-
Miru-nardku,
u
people
-Utagavu-nardku , contracted C/ta^ptw-ntf*, Tvu-nardku, as people say.
Nardku
probably.
(= Stkdku,
adv.
is
so,
declared to be a contraction of
compare
41 verbs.
it
111.
51 v
v-
s
17)
IR|
')
and, while
8F
&
?M yu
Mm
(to be)
and Kaku
Naraku must
it is
said that
' i "*"
or Ki ^ Ul" Uou of lhe
CHAPTER
300
THE VERB MERI.
VII.
108. -A-
be
or
expressed by g
j|,
people write p|j
:
Remark. The derivative form s?H, elucidated in
which in connection with
si, is
doubt
into
Ki-ni-kerasi,
Fdru
sugite
"
as
if
).
were come.
Consequently Keri (- has been,
82)
Akiva
ki-ni-keri is
3
),
passing
the
84) into
come,
is
autumn
away and
is
come.
-
seems as
it
if
(already) coming.
is
it
ra-siki
18),
had been; Ki-ni-keri (=
it
S&2
contracted
sisi,
and
"f"
"*-
W^
(
ndtsu ki-ni-kerasi*), the spring
=
108. ,.,meri,
which,
as
is
as if it
it is
summer were
the
it
Kerdsi,
1
*t"
16, predicate
ari (to be) passes into ard-siki
also joined to verbs to express
passes
ft
>^^>^|o
gft^ c
seems, an old-Japanese
it is as if, it
resembles Nari (=
said,
derivative form, 4
but expresses some doubt
is)
).
It
follows the indicative closing-form of a verb.
Yebisuno kamino koto yoni samazamani ivu-meri
God
of the
people speak about
Yebis',
5
),
with respect to the history
in the world, as
it
seems, in
it
diffe-
rent ways. Tsigiri okisi
Avarel
Oh dew autumn of to
me
(
nite
6
).
planted with promises! In
my
life,
Alas! the
away (without seeing the promise made (
84), not a nega-
be.
to this category are cited: ?) f$J
Nagdru-meri
(
^g
0f
)
)
,
,
it
seems to become day.
Fatdnu-meri
(
j||
it
-^ ),
is
as if
it
flows
away
,
as if
perishes.
This form
also
is
be distinguished from
to
from ..nameri or ..nanmeri,
to be (see
100.
2) Hiyaku-nin,
5)
^
N.
shall
80),
have been, Future Perfect, of Ni,
I.).
1) Siikost utagavu kotoba nari.
4 ) -f'J
TsuJ)6m-4ri , Nasdsim-dri, being the
Tsubdmi, to bud, and Nasdslme, to order to be made (see
pret. pres. of
as
is
akimo inu-meri
inotsi
Inu, from In)i, u, uru, to go away
performed).
Akdnu-meri
it
"
this year, as it seems, passes
As belonging
"
sasemoga tsuyuwo!
kotosino
of the sprig, that
form of J, to
tive
"
Wagun-Siicori , under East.
47.
tyl~ 7
3) Ibid.
^*f $J%
Nimaze. II. 16 recto.
tiy
^^
6) Hiyaku-nin
7 ,
}
)
N.
^ 75.
N.
2.
-^^9-
Wagun-Siwori , under Keri. 7)
Wa-gun Simon.
CHAPTER
VII.
109. Nasi, Naki,
Naku,
by the .suppression of the
exist
($), not
u (7ft
,
A
*
9, II.
(see
95),
=
301
manner of speaking and writing,
in the ordinary
and k
109.
BE.
page 112), Nai, Mai,
No
Ng,o, whence the written form Woo,
as
pronounced
THE VERB NASI, NOT TO
Nau
(-f!>,
and No), means not to
A r)t,
to be present, to be not at hand, in opposition to to exist.
general sketch in
20,
when
treating of the derivative adjectives in
has already made us acquainted with this word. Here in further particulars, concerning which
nat,
requires to be elucidated
it
the dictionaries generally leave the
all
student in the lurch. I.
The root Na, of which the sound n
negative element (compare
the
is
91, I), occurs, 1.
as
prefix,
Na-wi
nothingness;
our un, in compounds as: Na-yami, = unrest; No-koto,
like
(1 #), Na-i
(:M
),
= un-seat,
un-real, the nothing; whence Aru-fit6wo nami-su
,
i.
e.
earthquake; JVa-mt, the
= Nai-ga
sironi tu
(jJ)t
to
esteem any one as nothing. 2.
as the forbidding not, followed by an imperative, that closes with so.
Na-motom6so, seek not! iviso, it
3.
Na-nakareso, -
say not!
must be
A
also
Na-sizo (^f ^$)
Na-nakasso
*),
In the spoken language na is
Kikuna
( fljj
%
^
r ),
luna (^
*?1r), say not!
Yomaruruna,
This imperative
is
,
you
shall
suffixed to the substantive
Man gindewa
of ten thousand pounds are
Compare RODB. 56,
line
12.
not be raised! not be read!
Afiru-nayo, you shall
not forget.
form of a verb, occurs as characteristic of a
hydku
ntiti
kakari nuitfn4? for (the delivery)
Rinimo
not a hundred days needful?
there are also different sorts of miles,
Dialogues p. 31.
it
let it
strengthened by the subsequent yo.
Wasururu-nayo
negative question.
1)
affir-
Suruna, do not!
hear not!
Ageraruriina, let
masu BOO na?
form of an
Aruna, be not!
see not!
Ha
\
-
the forbidding not, Lat. ne.
Mint net,
4.
-
not be wanting! =
let it is
suffixed to the substantive
raise not!
Ageruna,
see.
do not!
there.
mative verb
not
Na-siso,
-
is
it
iro-iro ari-
not so? Shopping
CHAPTER
302 II.
A
Nasi,
Ato
1.
109.
BE.
Mai, predicate: there is not. there
nasi,
no
nasi, there is
THE VERB NASI, NOT TO
VII.
no
is
/
disgust.
no advantage in
k
it.
Kizu
trace.
nasi, there
Zeniga
is
)
not? = Is there money, or not?
no hurt.
is
no meaning.
naiM? are
ariikd?
1
there
nasi,
Urami
Yeki nasi, there
is
there cents or are there
En-rio nasini handsu koto, to speak without
forethought, not to care about what one says.
To bring
2.
A
va,
A
out with emphasis, the subject of Nasi
it
A
wa, or by mo, = also, even.
=
Fit6 kotomd nai,
there
Fu-s6kuwa
not even a single
is
=
there
by
no want. -
nai, there is
affair,
either
is isolated,
is
absolutely
nothing on hand. [..koto nasi.] If the subject, the existence of which
3.
a substantive proposition, ndsu-koto nasi
(
^
it
no one accomplishes dzune yobu tokivu,
)
= that a person does
,
Takava kureni
alone.
it
fU6wo
becomes shy at the sight of people,
for
Tsikadzukdnu
ne
>
pE
flies
Tsikddzftkti koto nasi
not approach.
,
oes
n
t
this alone , does
not exist
^5)
sorete, mioo-tsoo (ty$
,
^a ~
mite, os6re tonde tsikddztiku koto nasi, if the falcon has
flown away in the evening, and one seeks and
that he approaches.
is
Priori korewo
characterized by koto, affair.
is
$j$ ffi
denied by Nasi,
is
him the next morning, he
calls
around, and
may
for
it
does not happen (nasi),
rounding
off the period
Sari todomaru koto nasi
,
stand
(A ..kotoga
nai),
ne stays not. -- Sikareba kaikova suzusikini masi-
) taru kotova nasi, = that however the silkworm has grown in cool weather,
not
this does
A Nan no
at hand.
is
A Meni za-sen
A
not.
atdru
(^^
(^
kotomd nai
ii-bunm6 nai, there
A Korewo
[..mono nasi] there
kNdnno
exist.
is
lf), there
y6ku-suru mono mo nai, a person
^HE)
to
nai, there >iyuru
is
mono
absolutely nothing
nothing to say.
Tan6simi-suru monoga nai, there
monoga
is
is
who can
(do) such,
no one people may
nothing that comes under notice. nasi, chiefly those (coins) are
trust.
Ohosiku
wanting which
(mono) seem to be counters or model coins. [.
.
tok6ro nasi.] Ki-suru tokoro nasi
A Nokoru
tokoro wa nai, there
is
waruu yuwaruru (- ivdruru) tokdrowd
is
spoken by others.
For ga,
see
page 64.
ififfi V/-
it 9 \
)S)f 1*"IM Hlf 1/9
) '
,
there
no more room, = every place
ni
I)
(x
nai, there
is
is
is
no support. **
taken.
&FUo
nothing, about which
ill
CHAPTER
THE VERB NASI, NOT TO
VII.
the definition that this or that is
4. If
it
subject,
is,
for the sake of clearness,
separated from the predicate. is
The
5.
it
nai,
is
Kono yumivd
is
not
A
Waga-tomode nai,
ASau
it
my
business;
it
literally:
A .Saw dewa
is
is
put in the Local, cha-
is
A
it
nai,
Sono yauni nai,
A is
not capricious.
-
-
A Sorewa
not we.
it is
A Waga
to
it
not
is
so.
sayaude
(^ $P
ivu kotowa nai,
naika?
not so
Na-kotodew* de nai t
koto
nai,
it
it
is
it
-
it.
-
not so?
is it
-
'*7 &)
not so,
said, that it is
not occur anywhere that people say that
-
so.
is
it
J^>* $&1?
nowhere
is
it
)jj: c
wa
does
not
-
so.
A Sousita kotodew* nai, it is not a busiAMwwdewa nai (^ ^fC Jjfj, one may not overlook; to. A Iwanudewa, nai (^ W^' one mus 8Pea not
is
indeed look
A
not
is
it
Kore fodoni nai,
even of importance.
is
A-Rt fat niwa
so.
^
^
*'
it.
6.
[..kunai] The
definition denied
also precedes as an adverb. --
Umaku
tasty.
e.
also,
g.
1.
A Nai,
syok-mdts
umaku
in
is
Used
ANai (^
as a
noun
mono and Naki-koto,
is
-f ,
at the
vulg.
substantive,
i.
e.
f it
same time
nai,
writing,
that meat
is
not
(j?jj|
^),
e.
not without reason that this
done.
is
attributive
the finger, whose *).
means: nothing, and answers to Naki"
to consider others of
make
an
adhering attribute
a thing or a matter that does not
nakini ardzu, = &lso that people
n. IV.
its
i.
as
also),= ..less, the adjective form.
-
suru, to consider as nothing, to cipher away.
See Addenda
manner of
compound words used
Na-nasi-yubi, the nameless (the fourth) finger,
Naki,
siront suru
in the easy 1
nai syok-mots, distasteful meat.
predicate definition: na-nasi III.
by
kKono
Remark. The predicate Nasi
1)
not,
does not concern me; I have nothing to do with
it
ness of that nature.
about
--
stupid.
it
dew&nai,
(or Sou)
may
a thing
not so as...
is
t\Dokode m6 sou de nai
one
is
it
no nothingness,
is
it
nai,
what
A Waga mamardwo,
much. --
bow
tsikdra ndsi, this
powerless,
not sagacity,
..wo yauni nai,
thus
ftto nasi, the > brimstone island"
Iwaugasima
appositive definition,
is
A wa,
by va,
by one of the terminations ni, de, ni wa or dewa.
racterized
A
willingly isolated
without people, has no inhabitants.
without strength,
predicate to a precedent
is
wanting,
303
109.
BE.
no
this, is
-
exist.
Fitiwo naiga
value.
-
-
(vulg.
NaJrini
t
\L$)
Kore wo nasumo y*r$-
not a icause-lessneas,"
i. e.
it
is
CHAPTER
304
2.
not
The
attributive
-
Naki,
3.
(
109.
Wai, = paltry, in the original signification of not
a
e.
i.
present,
de-
Naki-mono, vulgo Nai-mono, a thing not existing, a nothing.
-
Aru fitono naki-kotowo Naki-ato
A
Naki-fUo, a person not existing,
existing.
funct.
THE VEEB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).
VII.
~t"
^
)
,
hear of one's not being (his being dead).
to
kiku,
-
a trace effaced.
As attributive adjective
has the definition, what there
is
(= without, Lat. absque, sine) Naki, as a genitive
not,
before
it,
A Nai
either with or
without tbe genitive termination no or ga.
A
Tsuiye-naki koto atavdzu, continuance
is
= an end must come.
impossible,
- Tsikdra-naki yumi, a powerless bow, a bow without strength. -- Ato-naki nari,
koto, power-less-uess.
appeared, = Ato nasi, there it
is
no
trace of
that has limitation.
A Mi no
- -
A
place in which he can settle, a wretch.
,
Tsigaino nai
without a
gakega, nai,
life's
A
exertion or care. --
no
To ga nai
"Remark.
of the last three examples, what
Naku
IV. The adverbial form k in the easy written
is
have
manner
been written. See
The form Naku
is
dinate propositions. See
nothing too 2. -
(
little,
Among
used 9.
,
2.
- -
nothing too much.
Poets
Naku
3.
Omova-naku,
-
2?
,
Nau
of.
for ,
~Y
7 Navu also
which noo , no or no
idzu to naku
,
- without
were the uninflected verbal root in coor,
Kake-mo naku, amari-mo
^ -^ - -
Omovdnu, not the
-fc
nasi,
there
is
^.
Maka-naku, - Makanu, not to think. See
adverbial
Iki-taru kizi
of a living pheasant, one
applicable.
supersedes the termination ..nu of the negative verb.
Nakuva, A Nakuwa,
not, failing
which
for
,
Ng,o ,
may
nakuva,
to roll
up
92. 4.
form isolated by va,
as predicate verb in adverbial propositions, with the is
is
all.
as if it
B.
disfavor.
page 64 respecting ga
Nani-to naku
9. II.
Ave-naku, = Avdnu, not to dare. 106).
~f~
sounding in pronunciation as Ngru
,
chiefly
.
said at
no kok6ro-
(*f^), = without, by the dropping of the
of writing passes to
anything whatever, = nothing at 1
is
it
t^Kokdroni monoga
= Urami naki, without
evil in the heart,
yauniwa naranu,
Tanomini sum monoga, nai,
without anything or anybody in which one has support. nai, having
has dis-
a person without a
A Fei-sei
not of that nature that there should be no difference.
is
it
koto nari, it is a matter
no nai mono
oki-dokoro
=
-- Kiwamarino naki koto nari,
it.
Kiwamarino aru
a matter without limitation.
is
a thing without trace
is
it
Tsikara-naki
A
loa, is
used
meaning ofasorifthere
si-taru kiziwd
t6ru-b6si,
take a dead one (to feed the falcon).
failing
CHAPTER VH. THE VERB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).
Nakunba, Nakumba. The
4.
isolated
by
ra,
Nakunba
local
109.
contracted from Nakuni, and
means in case of not existing,
there
if
dk&Xtt fetsurdvu koto naku, tonde ogoru koto naktunba, without flattery, and being rich,
is
poor,
you think of
Compare BODE.
it?)
This Local form
may
is
305
is
Mddzu-
not.
tfcan?
if
one, being
how then? (what do
without pride,
56.
even close a rappositive proposition, but
therefore no
is
modus
conditionalis.
O
B
f-
^^7 5Cv
^
SY
HJv
*
/%
?
3^
5^:f
*
A
5.
^
J^-^ S
^ *
.Y
/N
mitsiva an-min dai ittino keo nardba,
/-szyo&'wo
-^C^
nitsimo
nakunba aru bekarazu,
anc^ Ceding are the principal acts -^
welfare of a people, they
,;
Nakutewa, = Naotewa,
never
may
as clothing
towards the fail for
a day.
contracted from Ndkusttdwa. See below
V,
1, NdkAsi.
Naku to mo = Naku to iedom6
6.
there
is
not, granted that there
is
Naku to
or
,
not,
= even
iu to
if
mo
there
,
though
it is
said that
not.
is
V. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH Naku.
As such come under and NdkU-ndri.
=
Nakard&me, Nateri
Explanation.
Naku-s)i, u, uru, not to be, to be
1.
si,
notice: Ndku-si, Ndku-se, Nakdri^
to do (see
wanting, a
coupling of
103. III. 3), antithesis to Ar)i, u, to be present.
Naku and
The spoken
language, which makes from Naku-si, Ngu-si, (lr?r ^), N$o-si, changes the gerund Ndku-site, by syncope into Naute, Noote, and Ndkti-stteva into
wa
1
),
= by or through want
Ya-tsiuva
of, or: as there is not.
Nippon ydku-sioyori
yurtisi
Examples:
naku-slto,
ni-ordsu-bekardzu
night, without permission of the Japanese officers, no goods -
Nippon ydkH-nin
3
ndk&sttd
),
may
*),
at
be unloaded.
without there being Japanese
officers
Zin-sinno rei siru-koto arazdru-koto ndku-titte (or nau-sfte), gfkdu-sltj
present.
Ten-kano mono is
tatsi-avi
Ngutewa, Nooto
ri
arazdru koto nasi
4
),
the spiritual part of the
human
heart
not without knowledge, and so also are the things on earth not without
natural (the
Kotoba
laws.
king)
goes
away
ndkft-slte
again.
kdnawdnu, without money no
1)
In RODHIGUFZ
2) Art. II.
Treaty of 1859.
al.
kaheri-tamavu
without
,
(saying)
a
word
A Kane go, nau-tfte (or Kanega nakvtewa) success. - - A *Anohttotod ori-ori kami-irewo ndr* -
-
lem. p. 55 line 3 below,
Nbwctawa should stand
instead of
Nbttw* ,
=
our Vaoiewa.
3 of the Regulations by which the trade in Japan shall be carried on, belonging to the
3) Franco-Japanese Treaty of 1838, Art. VIII,
al.
4.
4) Dai Gain, V.
80
2.
306
CHAPTER
NAKU-SE, NAKARI, NAKERI, NAKU-NARI.
VII.
kusft (or nakusare-masti)
A
Nakii-s)e, uru,
lie
,
109.
always losing (read wanting) his pocket-book".
is
N|o-se (^">7^), contracted from Ndku-s^m)e, u, uru, = to
despise.
A
(^^X
Fitdwo nantomo noosuru
others for anything,
who
n/)
mono, = a person, who does not respect
respects others for nothing.
Naku and
Nakar)i, u, continuative, not present, a fusion of
2.
the inflection of Ari. See
Kono
boundless.
Urdstsa kagiri nakari keri, the joy has been
92. 4.
zeni, men-kiyo nakarisiga utsinite,
yoni nawo nokoreri, of
this
follows
now
coin there are
still
iritaru
faya
mono imano
several copies (mono) re-
maining, which, while there was no permission, were prematurely struck
As
a form of the forbidding Imperative,
notice. See
"fetff**
-ffSL
3
^
T
Tsiu-ziyo mitsiwo sdru koto
93. 2.
~J& M* i^^T* Zt JWL a
^
?
>Kx-
i/'T*
o
AH=
o
r.^:
If
=
O
fodokdsite
negavazunbd.
nakdre.
whoever
and
kind,
'
^[=f never deviates far from the way (from the
^.^ n'
T&
ixA^i T
\s
ti
i
The Chinese word
fxtdni fodok6su koto
honorable
is
tintirdni
*7
y >pl TT 1-^ X-J
t-
particularly under
tdokardzu. Korewo
ift^ A&
b
^** ^^-/a ^,$ -Jt-^
Nakdre comes
off.
f^|, tsu,
is
moral law). If a person does not wish that /
be applied to him, he
(this or that) it
apply
to others!
may
Tschung-yung. XIII.
to be considered as a contraction of
not
3.
~jfe tsi-yu,
- towards, and may here not be translated by Derived from Nakdri not,
e.
i.
- order *iv
3. (
80.
is
happen =
^
,
is
Nakarasim)e
forbid.
See
,
u, uru, = to command that there be
Kuvanokiwo
88.
kiru-koto ndkardsimu,
given that the chopping of the mulberry-trees do not it
is
forbidden to chop the mulberry-trees.
Nakeri, Pret. pres. there has not been, follows the 92. 4).
Nivakdni fusegu-beki yqumo nakereba,
.
.
inflection of. .eri, esi
Kavatsiye nige-yuku, as
in the hurry there was no opportunity for defence, they fled towards Kavatsi.
Remark. The spoken language of Yedo seems to use Nakdreba for Nakdreba, thence s>Siv6- (si6-)
4.
kega nakereba (or nakutewd) adziwaiganai,
Naku-nar)i, u,
A
become powerless. sumed.
A
not good without
salt".
Nao-nari, Noo-nari, to become nothing, to come to
nothing, to be consumed. See
become powerless.
it is
100. III.
(^
o
Tsikdra ndku-narite iru,
Sakeva ndku-nartta,
A
^ -
o
A
^).
Tsikdra naku-naru, to
Tsikdra nao ndtte iru, to have
Sakewa nqo-natta, the wine
is
con-
Urevino yumdga naku-nanta, the unpleasant dream has disappeared.
Aritaru mono no ndku-naritaru koto, the plerishing of a tjiing, that has existed.
CHAPTEE
VII.
THE VERB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).
100.
SYNOPSIS OF THE INFLECTIONAL FOEMS AND DEEIVATIVES OF NA)SI, KI, KU,
NOT TO
BE.
307
308
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
JiASI
109.
(NAKI, NAKU).
Continuative.
Pret. pres.
Present.
Root-form
.
Nakari tari,
Nakari.
.
A
Nakari, there
is not.
,
keri,
Nakaru.
has not been.
Attributive.
.
.
Local, defini-
A Nakattato
tive of time.
Gerund
Nakaru.
Nakaru ni.
Nakaritaruni
Nakaru ni
oltewa.
Nakarite
A
,
was
there
Nakari-ki, there Nakeri, there was
Nakari-si.
Nakaritaru,
Nakaru wa.
Nai-
there
,
has not been. Substant. form
A
Nakeri,
t#
Nakari-keri .
Nakari-si
Nakarita, Nakatta,
Closing- form
Preterit.
not.
Nakesi.
Nakari-si nari. Nakari-si.
Nakesi, Nakeru.
Nakari-si ni.
Nakeru ni.
A Nakari tani, A Nakattanu
Nakatte.
Causal form
.
A Nakattareba.
Nakareba.
Nakereba, there
Concessive
.
A Nakattaredomo.
Nakaredomo.
.
Nakarutomo.
was
as not.
Nakeredomo, though
it
was not.
Nakeru to mo. FUTURE.
Nakar)an, ame,
A Nakarao (Nakaroo, Nakaro).
Nakaran
z)u, uru,
A Nakaro z)u Conditional
.
.
,
uru.
Nakaraba. IMPERATIVE.
Nakare. Optative
Nakare
kasi.
Nakare gana.
CHAPTER
COMPOUND VERBS.
VII.
110.
309
NEGATIVE.
Nakaranu,
must be
it
there.
^
Nakerananarami,
p]"
^,
Nakini arazu, Nakinarazu,
Na
it
nakasso,
may
it
must have
it
been.
not without...
is
not be wanting.
REMARKS ON THE COMPOUND VERBS, 110.
The subordinate
The
it is
be a substantive or a verb.
compounded, may 1.
which precedes a verb with which
definition,
substantive
may be
It is the object direct in
its
object direct, or indirect. See
3. II. 1
Ama-govi, Tsi-govi, to long for rain,
and
2.
for milk; it is
the object indirect in Ama-kudari, descending from the sky. II. 1.
The verb, preceding another verb
remains in
root-form.
its
Kor6s)i, u, to
object.
The
kill;
chief
Fitdwo
subordinate
as
qualifying definition,
word of the compound governs the accidental i-kordsi,
utsi-kordsi,
sdsi-kordsi
to shoot
a
person dead, to strike dead, to stab dead.
To
the qualifying definitions belong verbs like Os)i, u, ffl
,
to press, to
do with emphasis; Osi-yar)i, u, throw away; Osi-ir)i, w, to intrude. ~ffi%, to strike, with a blow, or suddenly; iitsi-or)i, tru, to pounce,
Uts)i, u,
as a bird of prey Sasi,
99.
(
Mes)i, u,
w, to dispatch
,
^
fit6wo tsukavasi, .
.
11); Sirowo utsi-i)de, dzuru, to
make a
sally.
N
any one.
invite, call up, qualifies the action as one
,,
Mesi-tor)i, u, to take
by higher command;
N
n.
^tf^, send away; Ok)i, u, place; Sasi-oki, set aside, put away; Fttowo
sasi-tsukavas)i
has
I.
.
.
100
mesi-kavesi-tamavu
by order, to ,
which takes place
arrest a person;
(the prince) sends people to
M ..ye
M
.
.
and
brought back.
Avi, Ai,
together,
>|{Ji>
Lat. con; Ai-katar)i, M, speak together; Ai-gutu,
consult together. 2.
The
definition of the particular (as in flying
compound verb
direction of an action incorporated
upwards or downwards)
,
is
in a
not expressed in Japa-
nese, as in other languages, by a prefix or a preposition, but as the principal
part of the expression, by a verb, that
is
preceded by the mention of the action
as a subordinate definition. Leaving the indication of such dictionaries,
we
Ag)e, uru,
_
compound verbs
to the
here confine ourselves, for the sake of brevity, to a few examples. .,
trans., expresses the
moving upwards, Sag)o, uru,
310 the
CHAPTER
movement downwards.
COMPOUND VERBS.
VII.
Tori-age, to take up, to raise.
Sasi-age, Sasdge, to
draw up.
Mqusi-age, to men-
Motsi-age, to bring up.
present.
tion (a thing to a superior).
Fiki-age, to
Fiki-sage, or Fiki-or6si, to
Tobi-agar)i, u, to fly upwards.
gari, contin., intr.
110.
draw down.
Agari, Sa-
Tobi-sagari, u, to fly
Nob6r)i, u, to go upwards, Kudar)i, u, to go downwards. to
run upwards. Ir)i,
u,
^7^,
to sprout out.
u,
Fase-nob6ri,
Nagare-kudari, to flow downwards. to
go into, Ide, Idzuru,
Faye-iru, to grow inwards.
trude.
downwards.
Otsi-iru, to fall into ...
trans.; Ot6si-ire, to
Ir)e, uru,
^, to come out.
{Jj
make a thing
Osi-iru, in-
Faye-idzuru,
fall in..
Idas)!,
Tori-idas)i, u, to take out of.
causat.
Koni)i, u,
yA,?,
intr.,
go inwards. Kom)e, uru,
to
mas)i, u, to
make go inwards.
Nomi-komu,
to swallow.
TTtsus)i,
u, ^j?%
Fino teri-komu, the shining in of the sun.
Kugiwo (Kusabiwo)
to remove.
,
Ko-
to bring in.
tr.,
-
utsi-komu, to drive in a nail.
Fakobi-utsusu , to transport.
Kaki-utsusu,
to write over again, to copy.
Kaher)!, u, kaheru, to
fly
to turn back,- Kahes)i, u, to
{j||;>,
back.
Mav)i, u,
make turn
back.
Tobi-
Tori-kayesu, to take back.
move
to
||E,
Mi-mavi, to look around.
in a circle.
Mavar)!, u, continually to go round. Mavas)i, u, to make go round.
Nagare-mavaru
,
to flow round.
Fiki-mavasu, to draw a thing round-about.
-
Tori-mavasu, to turn round.
^^,
Tsuk)i, u,
ga okani nagare-tsuku Tovor)!, u,
A
intr., ,
= on,
Kisini tsuku, to come ashore. --
to.
A
Fune
the ship drifts ashore.
|^*,
To6r)i, u,
to
go through, to
pass.
Fino nakawo
to-
)
voru, to go through the midst of the
Tovos)!, u,
A
To6s)i, u, to
fire.
Nagare-tovoru, to flow through.
make go through,
Ovi-to6su, to drive through.
-
'
Matowo
Ovi-to dsaretaru , driven through.
Watar)i, u, watdri,
to
cross
$^#,
to
pass,
a river.
to
Kavawo
i-to6su, to shoot
go from one
through a target.
side to the other.
katsi-watdri, to
wade through a
Kavawo river.
Tobi-watari, to fly over.
Watas)i, u, to make pass over, to carry over.
Yaku-soye fitowo fiki-watdsu,
to transport people to the office. Tsir)i, u,
Fou-bouye
^t),
intr., to
nige-tsiru,
Ovi-tsirasu, to scatter.
spread, scatter; Tsiras)i,u, caus., spread, scatter.
they fled to
all sides.
Tobi-tsiru, to spatter abroad.
CHAPTER
VERBS OP COURTESY.
VII.
111.
311
APPENDIX. DISTINCTIVE VERBS
AND VERBAL FORMS EXPRESSIVE OF COURTESY.
111. Courtesy in language and writing
in Japan, not confined to the
is,
priveleged classes of society; cast ages ago in distinct forms and,
stamped by the law,
it
we may
add,
has penetrated to the lowest grades of society and spread
over social intercourse a gloss of reciprocal respect, which
is
indeed not to be
found among any other people on the globe. courtesy in language and writing
Besides,
is
not the consequence of recent
development: even the oldest Japanese historical book, the Yamdto-bumi of the eighth century
page 36)
(see
is
characterized
by a courteousness of expression
which, the not unfrequent insignificance of the contents considered, cannot be acquitted of extravagance.
So long as courtesy governs the oral and written intercourse of a people, the forms belongs to the study of the language, and since
appreciation of
its
have treated
in the chapter on the Pronouns,
tion
it
on the verbs and verbal forms
also with
we
are obliged to
fix
we
the atten-
which courtesy gives gloss to
its
language.
The 1.
chief features of the Japanese courtesy are:
The
polite
speaker distinguishes the conditions and actions of persons
beyond him by the honorary prefix $Pvo* ^n or 0- S66 P*^6 2. He does not say or require, that another person, whom he himself, should do
be done,
i.
^*-
places above
any thing himself, but says or requires only, that the action
he places the passive form as predicate to the subject, that
e.
really
performs the action. 3.
He
considers not only persons of higher station, but even his
as being in a higher position,
of descent, whereas to his 4.
He
is
own
equals
and with the actions of others connects the idea
own he
gives that of ascent.
in proportion as he scrupulous in the choice of synonimous verbs,
wishes to express the same idea in a more or teach him to distinguish the degrees.
less exalted style.
Letter-writers
CHAPTER
312 112.
To
satisfy the
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
112.
demand, which represents the person beyond the speaker
not as acting himself and thus as not immediately coming in contact with persons of lower station, the active form of the predicate verb
90. 2).
of the original active proposition (compare
Karuno Oho-kimiwo mavu)
dai-sini sadameraru
1
is
the pecu-
Examples:
(instead of saddmu, or sadame-ta-
)
(the emperor) declares the Great-prince
,
has been
it
introducing any modification in the construction
of the expression,
liarity
as
and here
by the passive form, without
said, simply superseded
is,
Karuno hereditary
Ten-wau arutoki takaki okani nobdmte, kono kunino
Zin-mu
prince.
nitdruwo
katatsi akitsumusini
mile, fazime'te Akitsu-simato nadzukeraru (instead of nadzuku),
-
Emperor Zin-mu,
once climbing a height, seeing that this country (Japan) resembles the light-insect (the dragon-fly)
kwanwo the
,
first
gave
the
it
name
M.
L. va
of Light-island.
N. no
ni
sadzukeraresi (instead of sadzukesi) to ari, people say, that L. has given
office
Naniwo
M.
of an N. to
iwasare-mastta ka? what have you said?
Iwasare from Iwasi, make say, and this from Ivi, to say.
Much
in use are the honorary passive forms:
1.
sare, Nasare-mas)i, u, 4. Nasaserare, 5. Arasare, serare.
Serar)e, uru, pass, of S)e, uru, to do, to
tou-riu-seraru
2
(instead of tou-riu-su)
)
Kei-ko Ten-wau Siganite fou-gyogyo-si tamavu)
Emperor Kei-ko
,
Great-prince N. dies.
seraru , 3
)
,
(the king) sabres
me'rdru, were used, 2.
do.
Na-
Irare, 7. Irasare, 8. Ira-
6.
Explanation:
1.
seraru
Serare, 2. Saserare, 3.
it
Yamato-Take
* (
Jj$
fj|p
M. down
,
=
N. no Oho-kimi
kiri-korosi ,
and banishes N.
action runs, as
effected that
N. wo If,
may u wo
kau-zi-
ru-zai-
(
(
^ j^
^g >& ) ^fp ^ )
instead of seraru , to kill
se's'i-
and to banish.
one does; from Sas)e, uru, to make
it
is
it
were, over three wheels, by which a person of high
causes an inferior to have a thing done.
station
-
3) seraru (instead of fou-gyo-su or fou-
dies at Siga.
M. wo
some time.
stays there
would mean, that the king gives order
Saserar)e, uru,
The
- -
,
Yamato-Take sibaraku
effect.
ken-zi-saseraru (or ken-zi-sase-tamavu)
,
Go-beo (jifp^
JH^)
ni
the prince has cocoons offered in
the ancestral temple. 3.
Nasar)e, uru,
from Ni, to be
1)
Nippon o-dai
^^ J^^ 100).
(see
itsi-ran.
II.
^
^ e done, from Nasi, make
Naniwo nasaruka? what
8 verso.
2) Ibid.
exist,
and
does your honor?
3) Ibid. II. 6 verso.
thia
CHAPTER VH. VERBS OF COURTESY.
in
313
112.
the familiar style of speaking and writing as an auxiliary verb grafted on
the root of another verb,
makes known, that the action which
it
is
done, pro-
ceeds from the person spoken to, or even merely from another person than the
Examples from the spoken language:
speaker.
Say'oo nard, nasare!
down.
ndsare!
tsuke"
may Your
sitting
Korewo
kasi-
do
You
rest
live?
(0
Yoku
- -
this.
happen! = good
it
Dokorit
rest!
if
- -
Kosikakeni
me
kake
kake nasare,
seat.
vulgo
stimai
sit
Korewo Go-
this.
notare"!
ydsumi
ydtumiu&\
nasartka? where
yanie nasaretemo, kono Xy&oa deki-masenH ,
Nokorazu
or not, there ends the matter.
yasulm-siU age-masoo,
wo
tsukd) nasare, lend (give)
kai nasaretemo,
you may buy
me!
it
give
on a chair happen, = take a
ran nasare, please look at
may Your good
if it is so,
you buy the whole stock,
kai ndsarH nard,
Roo
I will sell it cheap.
kai-nasardnuka? dont you buy wax?
Nasare-mas)i, u, the same as Nasare, only more round-about, vulgo Natari-
masu
also (see
Go
doing?
A
101).
Naniwo
an-sin nasare-mase
nasare (vulg. nasari)-masuf what are you
depend on
,
Watakusino mausu kotowa
it.
wakari nasare-masuka? do you understand what
I
say?
Sa-yquni nasare-ma**
kamai nasare-masu na! take no pains! -- S%k6simo
ka? will you do so?
kamai nasare-mastina, don't trouble yourself about; don't care for mitsiwo are
ide nasare-mase,
you going?
Douzo
Idzure yori
fairi nasare-mase, if
Nasaserar)e, uru,
4.
this
go
way.
t ,
f\'"i<
whence do you come?
Ide nasare-masttaf
|^ %, ^jlb* J^
-
ide nasarc-nuu&f whither
Idzureye
you please, walk
it.
in.
care
is
taken that a thing
is
or made; the passive of Nasase, have made, and this the causative form of to
make. The action or the
AW,
here runs over four wheels.
Arasar)e, uru, pass, of Arasi, to have be, and this from Ari, to be.
5.
A
effect
done
Dorega
sukide arasare-masii ka? what
is
there of your desire?
what do
like?
you
A
Araserar)e, uru, vulgo for Iraserare.
how
your son?
is
Sotite
ko-aama \kagadt. ara*frare-ma**i
okHsamawa Vkagade araerare-ma*u? and how
is
your lady? 6. Irar)e,
(JSi)
uru, to be placed in the condition of dwelling, paw. of /, Iru
to dwell, be
zi-masdnu, I do not 7.
somewhere, stay
know your
(see
98).
Anata traruru toMrowo eon-
dwelling-place.
Irasar)e, uru, pass, oflrdsi,
make
dwell, thus to be placed in the condition
CHAPTER
814 of
making dwell, =
irasai masi),
little
= you are welcome. you been
this
Mo
to be (somewhere).
a
stay
VERBS OF COURTESY*
VII.
Yoku
longer.
112, 113.
sukosi irasare-mase (low language
irasare-mastta ,
you are well placed,
come on, how have
Sate, fisabisa ikagade irasare masu,
long time.
Ikagade
(vulgo irasai-) masu?
irasare-
how do
you do? Iraserar)e, uru, to be placed in the state of dwelling,
8.
ka-nai
samawa ikagade
A Kuwa
fen-
Itsi bet
fire).
last separation,
113.
i
rai
-^
(
J^|)
^^)
J^jJ^
A
nese themselves reduce this word to
compound of the
old Tabi,
wo motte fitdni tamavu
^fl^Sv = ^^^
ikagade iraserare-mastta? since our
J
),
)
Tama
,
-R ^
literally: to confer
Rokuwo
2
to a higher sphere.
- to give, and Avi,
,
= jewel
'JEj*u
5
&f^ *tj 9
to bestow,
,
Although the Japa-
we
it
for a
to meet. Thence;
Mono
,
take
something on a person.
^ifcp
^
so-sinni tamavu, (the king Zin-mu) grants in-
auxiliary verb grafted on the root of another verb
action as proceeding from a
higher person, whether
expressed by j$j^ and phonetically by or
(come near the
fire
servants.
his
As an
be near the
00 %" % Tamai, Tam)au, oo, JMa^ ^ !5nr H /
grant, give, when the giver belongs
comes to
Go
how have you been?
Tama)vi, vu,
I.
y
,
A
to be.
masu? how are your family?
iraserare (vulg. irassai)
jjs^) ni iraserare-mase
( *J^,
=
fo
Jff,
Examples
by the
it
characterizes the
divine or princely.
answers somewhat to the
have the goodness" used by courtesy, German geruhen,
in tales, rightly left out
,
is
It is
please"
however, at least
translator.
:
Tedzukara kuvdwo leaves with her
torite
ko-gaviwo si-tamavu, (the princess) plucks mulberry
own hand, and
feeds silkworms.
Sono
Tauyori takawo
notsi
ken-ze sikdba, Mi-kariwo moyovasare, s^o-teowo tordsime-tamavu,
when
afterwards
falcons has been brought as presents from China, (the Japanese prince) caused
hawking
come
to
come more into fashion; and had
into fashion.
suddenly.
Tor)i, u, to take.
caught.
JV.. tatsimatsi mtindsiku
Mayov)i, u, to naru, N.
Iku-fodomo ndkU kano feme" m&ndsiku nardse-tamavu
after, that lady (a princess)
1) Nippon-ki.
all birds
dies.
2)
Nippon o-dai
itsi-rdn.
,
.
dies
immediately
CHAPTER
&, >3
%>
K -f
^
tt 7 JP-V
Kun-tsiu
rhf*
si-tamavui),
nite
113.
315
mi mi wadzuravankwrttd
fodo-ndktt fou-kivo
.
T-
rt
prince), while he
(the
with the army,
is
1
/*t
jL x
VERBS OP COURTESY.
vil.
M
.
taken unwell and dies shortly
is
Old writers hare To6)t, w, = to give, instead of
*t~ _
>7
after.
Tamavi
also; thence:
Osame-tabin
toki,
= when N.. go-
a
verned
).
For further examples from the top.
274
p.
page 230
20.
1.
A
Tamavar)i, u,
II.
see
p.
290
line 11 1.
from the bottom.
239
p.
1.
8
9 from the bottom.
Tamauri, Tamor)i, u, the continuative form of Tamavi,
which however supplies the place of the passive form Tamavare, = to be granted, not in use (compare Nari as substitute for Nare,
an auxiliary,
also as
joined to the root, or to the gerund of a verb.
is
Kore Tenno tamavdru wan,
Jj^z
^
J^j"
^
ifL
^^
'
**
a P*68611 * from Hea-
Ko-zi-kini Izanagino mikoto yori Amaterasu Ohon kamive
ven.
wo
100. HI), and, like Tamari,
tamavarisi koto
wo
iveri, in
(the god) Izanagi a necklace mestte go ini dziyo-
inviting
Nuno fonwo
him
,
raises
san-bydku-tan ...
(3L
:'*
him
the book of antiquity
was presented
it
is
mi kubi-tama
mentioned , that by
Kore wo
to the goddess of the sun.
tfc= ^5t1T) serare^ ...no nawotamavari, (the king)
/
to the fifth rank
wo Hdku-sai kok-wau
and confers on him the name of
NN.
ni tamavari
ni tamavu, (the Jap. prince) gives three
(j|f|)*
hundred pieces of
-
. .
ya zyu-man silk to
NN.,
a hundred thousand arrows. king of Petsi, and presents (his minister)
A
TTke-tamavar)i, u,
(^ ^),
Uke-tamdri
to
have the honor to receive
-Tsiy6k&wo uke-tamavari (from a superior), or to hear.
A
the king's orders. I have
had the honor
uke-tamavari-mastta,
the night.
Go
Go
to receive
your advice.
^ (
$]J
^* ^
we
1)
3)
let
uk-tomvatta or tamotta,
Sak*-ya yukiga fori-nuuHto it
Ka-roo (jj
*
to
has snowed during
^?)
I
wish to
ftnJtoo idasite to-
the honor, that the secretary (of (skippers are speaking) enjoy
the governor) has our ships cleared.
goodness to
A
to receive (^jffc jfif ),
^) uke-tamavari-tdkti zoixi-tnd**,
have the honor to hear, how you do. mavari-keri,
-St) wo
JJ'*'
*)
have had the honor to hear, that
I
sa-u
i-ken (^JJ
3*
me
A
Muizuwo nomateU
tamor*,
drink fresh water.
Nippon o-dai tin-ran,
I, I.
10.
16.
8)
**-g** Siwori, under
= have
the
CHAPTER
316 114.
By
Matsur)i,
be
for the object,
Kami wo
tstiri,
to
Kamis," by celebrating
As
conti-
(^f
show
to
~^ti^i
/JitJ"f
re-
^enwo ma~
to earth, to ancestors,
to heaven,
homage
honor, Mdtsuri, being the feast
feasts to their
itself.
qualifying auxiliary joined to the root of a verb, Mdtsuri unites with
One
the idea of reverential homage.
two masters
koto atavdzu , serving
the expression
Kimi ni
:
tsukavu
(
_4s* "
~
^
z.
reverentially
When tomo tsukamatsuri-masoo
,
A
is
says: Futdrino kimini tsitkavuru
impracticable.
mdtsuru koto
tsuko)
J
)
respect to
,
(A is
serve
it
tsukoru)
shown by
my
prince
High
2
).
the
excessively
speaker says to his equals:
polite
itoma tsukamatsuri-mdsU
accompany you, or
I will
we may put down such
take leave of you,
More
Zo-teini tsuko-mdtsttru, to serve the Most
with respect. 2
Tsiwo mdtsuri,
mdtsitri,
people do
mdtsuri,
As
that he speaks of or to.
= to wait (compare page 218), Mdtsuri
(^jf^),
homage. Thence Ten wo
spectful
profound respect
continual waiting, solemn attendance,
means
jfllfi)
114.
the speaker expresses the most
a person or a thing,
it
nuative form of Matsi jf|[
u
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
own
politeness to his
,
I
The
account.
rule requires Tstikai- or Tsukae-mdtsuri, yet this, for ease in pronunciation, passes
into Tsuko-
(?%?)
Tate-matsiiri ,
or Tsukd-mdtsuri. Tsukd-matsttri soro to
,
^pj;
offer
/
(
respectfully and solemnly
\JL
vh)'
from Tate
,
,
set
up-
right.
Kono
toki ama-bito
fardkano uwowo Ten-ioauni tate-matsuri
si
koto cm'
appears that, then, the divers solemnly presented a redbellied fish to the
Deva-kuniyori kavikowo kavu mono wo tate-matsuru
peror.
of
4 )
,
Deva persons, who breed silkworms, are solemnly presented Tsusima yori sirokane wo tate-mdtsuru
5
)
,
from the island of Tsusima
silver is
Hakusai had presented
king of Japan).
is
joined to the root of a verb,
Em-
(to the emperor).
ffakftsaino tate-matsureru te-f$t6, artificers,
Tate-matsuri
), it
from the country
presented (to the emperor). (to the
3
whom
as a qualifying auxiliary, to
characterize the action as respectful, solemn.
Onna besi
e
1)
)
,
(
OTl
^^)wo Yamato
your name
I
must
Tschung-yung XIII.
2) Yamato nen
dai.
5) Ibid. II. 29
r.
I.
Take no Mikototo mausi-tatematsuru
respectfully
call
( tp ^ ^si ^.^^^ Yamato Take no Mikoto (compare
2) Ibid. XlX. 21
V,
4) Ibid. III.
6) Ibid.
I.
4
22.
r.
CHAPTER
p.
228
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
Ten-wquwo umdni
line 8).
317
115.
tasuke-nose-tote-mdteuri, Kavatsive nige-yuku
1
),
they respectfully help the emperor to mount a horse and escape to Kavatsi. It is in earnest, kitdrite
gavi
the historian says:
kor6si-tate-mdtsiiru
Ten-wquwo
respectfully
when
not in irony,
a )
nriko uka-
in and
steals
Makowa,
prince
,
Makowano
the emperor.
kills
Tate-matsurar)e , uru, the honorary passive, honoring, in the eye of the speaker
,
him who
also
tate-mdtsurdrtt
respectfully offers or presents. If in the preceding
were used, instead of tate-mdtvuru
the speaker would
,
example
show
his
respect towards the murderer.
The
and occupations
states
ticular
must be understood 4.
which courtesy pays par-
and the expressions of which, to be properly appreciated,
attention,
Showing;
to the qualification of
also,
Saying;
5.
are: 1.
Being, existence;
Doing;
and Coming.
Going
6.
Giving;
2.
3.
Seeing,
Explanation:
115. BEING.
The spoken language, which
1.
language, instead of 3.
On, Ori-masi
6.
Fanberi and
it
uses 1.
Mad
upon
(^
style
by
^
pa
Ari
(
96);
Ari-man
(
101);
(
102);
Moosi.
7.
),
2.
101);
(
97); 4. Gozari, Gozari-masi (p. 263 /2m.); 5. Soro
(
Fanber)i, u, Pamber)i, u,
6.
leaves the use of JVari, to be, to the book-
stay or be
'^9,
^a^JJ
somewhere (^E),
it
of old is
^^9,
expressed in the epistolary
(wait upon), and declared as equivalent to Somurovi,
A. B. sa-uni fanberite
(*
~fa*
1
ffi'%
)
?)
means wait
Swot
(
102).
mdtsHri-kotowo tori-okondvu, (the
and left (of the sovereign), carry Ministers) A. and B. taking the places right
on the
affairs of
Yumiva Zin-dai
government.
from the time of the gods. Compare page 230 7.
u, Maus)i, O
mention. The
A
Moosi,
no attention
significations, although
one Chinese sign
In the former verb also,
it
(
^
qualifies
Nippon o-dai
)
iisi-ra*.
is
is
to
line
bow has
3 from the bottom.
show oneself
respectful ; 2.
used, requires the distinction of
paid to
it,
existed
^,to its
two
by the Japanese, who use but
for both.
signification,
to receive respectfully;
1)
word
in which this
way
1-
f.? ^* S ^ |.f, *s
yori fanberi, the
as
definitive or as defined part of
the action as
a compound
submissive, respectful: AfytMt-wfe
is
show oneself submissive. The Uke-mqusi on receiving to
2) Ibid.
CHAPTER
318
Man
root
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
116, 116.
seems to be the same as occurs in Mqu-k)i, uru
court in solemn procession , Mesi-mguko- (not ka) simu
make a solemn
person to court, and in Mairi, to
placed after the root of
think that this Mausi, Matt?'
101)
(
(^
^J
(
to
l|IJ)i )
^|
come
to
to send for a
,
Japanese philologers
entry.
a verb, frequently passes into
l
).
Yamdto Takeno Mikoto kuni made yuki-tamqvu
2
),
Ise Dai-zin-Guu yori fou-kenwo mausi-ukete,
prince
Yamato Take
Surugdno
respectfully from the
receives
temple of the Great Spirit at Ise the precious sword and departs to the country
A
of Suruga.
Kaki-tome-mqusu bekiya
of it?
Sa-yqu naraba
respectful
leave of you;
On
motte
^
( ^jf>
Ep
llj"
)
if I shall
,
wakare moosi- (= masi) masu, as
it
take a note
is
so,
Oriwo
ordinary expression for our: Farewell!
the
tsikadzukini nari-mousi-taku-zon-zite
,
I take
tada ima-made yen-in mqusi soro,
wishing for an opportunity humbly to come in contact with you, I have only it till
delayed
now.
whom you
of
3.
,
is
soro , I see the
man
expressed by
uru, to do
S)i, u,
2. Itas)i
wo mi-mousi
fandsi-mousi-soro fit6
speak.
116. DOING 1.
A
u
(
Itasi-mas)i ,
,
103), Si-mas)i, u, to be doing
u
to accomplish (p.
,
3
Asobas)i, u, the causative form
amused (Saru yedanl asobu, the ape the honorary passive Asobasar)e,
is
)
284 Rem.) more ,
among
^^ ^ y
(
101). stately
than
Si.
of Asob)i, u (j$f;>>), to play, to be
playing
uru
(
the branches), and further
)'
take pleasure in any
*
occupation , are used both for the qualification of what persons of rank do. See
page 237 line
A Go Korewo
5.
Id-gen yoku asobasi-soro , His Honor's disposition (cast of mind)
obosimesi asobasi-soro, |i|
M4
.11 11, It
^ T'
3
basaru beku soro, literally: ,
for.
* ^"
1)
MASU go-bini
2) Tamato nen 3) According
Your Honor means
pl ease t
please
come
to
good.
Kono fooye On-ide
this.
aso-
outgoing be to this
may your
my
is
house.
noki asobasare!
go back (or out of the way)!
tsukete ivuva ofoku
MAUSUno
riyaku nari.
Wa-gun
Sitoori,
under
Mow.
dai. I. 22. v.
to
the
Wa-gun Siwori, Asobasu
is
a
contraction
of
iM^V 4^ ^ /\ *Trr
.
Asobi-masu.
\J
,,Inisiye this
yori,''''
so
it
word the doing
adds, ,,Ki-nin kotowo nasaruruwo kaku of noble persons.
iveri"
it
is
an old custom to designate by
CHAPTER
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
319
117.
117. SEEING and SHOWING.
Mi, Mite, Miru
1.
can I see your goods?
Do
in the distance.
99 n. 34), to
(
Watdkusiwa kdsukdni funtwo rot-mo*u,
)
they say for
mie-masu or mieru?
Sun^kowo
Mis)e, eru, to show.
2.
Yedo Watakusiwa kaskani /uniga
in
it really
I see ships
the ship comes in view.
I
e.
i.
Sinawo miru kotowa deki-masAka?
see.
mise!
2
),
me
let
see a desk, or in
more round-about language of Miyako: Bun-kowo Go ken (^IjJ^
the
Jf,
*e
)
kudasare mase.
^?
Pai- (Hai-) ken,
3.
Kore wo fai-ken
O meni
4.
j^^,, to look on with respect, with interest
itdsi-masu , or fai-ken tsukamdts&ri-soro , I have the honor to see
kak)e, eru,
B-jl*
Q
*
it
bring a thing under Your
*
meni kake-masoo &?*), what
show Your Honor?
shall I
O meni
kakar)i, u, = to appear before His or
meni kakari-masoo
nitsi
4
),
=
to
morrow
myself be seen by you, I shall
let
-S*^' =
Naniwo
Honor's notice, to show a thing..
5.
-
kakari mastta
5
),
is
it
call
I shall
Your Honor's
come under your
Afiyoo-
notice, I shall
mem
Tadaima fazimete
upon you.
for the first time that I
eyes.
come under your
notice,
=
it
is
for the first time that I have the honor to see you.
Go-ran (^tp 3
*
6.
^
),
the glance of a noble person.
-Go-ran-z)i, u, uru, to honor with a glance. Ten-wguno on fava sou-ziyyu
wo
ik-ken Go-ran-
^
^
(
mother of the emperor, and
,
^)
^
^
?,) zite ,
kok6ro yoku , waran-tanuiru
upon the
at the first glance
)
,
the
becomes glad of heart
prior,
smiles.
In the familiar his equals, to
look at
this.
style of
show them
speaking and writing the speaker applies Go-ran to
respect.
Kore wo Go-ran-zerare or Go-ran nature, please ,
Naniwo Go-ran nasdr&kaV), what
you wish to see? the shopkeeper asks Go-ran nasare, go and see what
itte
118. SAYING. Iv)i, u, I)i,
1.
what
1)
The
is
idea of
u (-^),
5) R.
his customer.
BROWN,
Coll.
N.
7) Shopping-Dialogues,
1048. p.
1.
you looking
at,
what do
NanicU gozari-ma*&kal
it is.
saying
expressed by
is
Anatano
Ii-mas)i, u.
-- Watakusino nawa your name?
Shopping-Dialogues, p. 23.
are
.
8) Ibid. p. 8.
.
.
to tt-rooau 1 ),
3) Ibid.
6) Nippon o-dai itn-ra*. II. 16
8) Ibid. p. 19.
nawa
p. T.
1.
nanito ii-rmuu&af
my name
is
4) Ibid.
...
p.
18.
CHAPTER
320 2.
VII.
Nori-tamav)i, u, to order,
3.
a thing (faow. kotowo)
communication
when speaking ^i P ron
^^^
Osiy)e, u, uru,
VERBS OF COURTESY.
107, p. 299
of the master (see
a person by teaching, places him
to
who
above him,
receives
1.
15).
Uru, to teach, to communicate
ossiy)e, n,
-
118.
Wareni
it.
who makes
(not ware wo)
the
osfyeyo
= teach me or communicate to me, sounds modest; Andtani ( ^J$^), 3jfc^ osiye-mdsu, = I teach you or communicate to you, is considered presumptions. Tamini
uyuru koto wo osiyestmu
takahe'si
1
),
(emperor Schin-nung) has the people
taught ploughing and sowing.
^*,
O6s)e, uru,
4.
to charge (fctowo kotoni, a person with anything), see
87 n. 25. Thence the passive 06serar)e, uru,
To
structed.
a superior one says:
you spoken so? to an (ffl
&i
rr
TT
n. 46)
We
f^f
^
mdsttka? can you
let
me
me
hear!
tell
hear! tell
me?
it
oose-tsukeraruru aida, as or since
make
129,
(s.
A
Tono-
tell
me! speaking
<
f||l *%
Kikosiines)i, u, [M! ? -??
Maus)i, u,
2 .
).
nobleman. -
^5 ,,
>
kikaseru koto,
others.
u, to speak respectfully to one's superior, to
what
is
o
^
pf said as
a Substantive objective phrase, this with the particle
I
ii
to let hear.
It has the definition of
Jap. Encycl. vol. 103.
Watakusini
to let hear, inform.
^^ ^, A Moos)i,
the more distant object, to
-
kikase nasaru kotoga deki-
Fttono kokdroyeni naru koto wo
mention, declare; expressed ideographically by -j^
=y
Kikastme, old- Jap. Ki-
to a
Watakusini
me.
it.
A no
people hear, from Kiki, to hear.
which tends to the interest of
Kik6-sim)e , uru ,
if it is
uru
,
nasard, learn from him, ask him.
kiki
^*
^ ^
Oose-tsttk)e,
oose-tsukerareta , the master has said this to us, or charged us with
kikase nasare! let
6.
sono toorini ittaka?
Thence the honorary passive 06se-tsukerar)e uru,
Kikas)e, eru, = Kikasime, to
to tell that
sono toorini ooserare-mas'taka? have
(the sovereign speaks) have given orders to sail to Japan.
katani
kame!
.
Nipponye to-kaiwomo
sama korewo 5.
.
Anatawa
Omae
inferior:
speak to, to address
"f*J")i
A
i"^l> to ^ e cnarged, in-
^j?
who in
or
where one
r.
^
-jgy
^^
^|
an Accusative to
o
,
)^f
and
o ,
before it, whereas
mentions, as Dative or Local
^
jJ=
Wa-gun Siwori under Matuu.
o
7 r\
g^
-*&
^
l=?
=
3^1 *s
2)
'f
CHAPTER
mausu,
sa&w
1
),
118, 119.
Q%
_|f jg|
Jff |
ff =
T^}
^
he speaking to Buddha says.
as
,
^^
^ ^
God __ Butj ni
W^?,%
T&\, yatstiko
to
2
as
)'
to
(the prince
midzuki-monowo sadzuku
narite,
nanito moosi-masft ka ?
Mausi
is
3
)
,
what
is
to define; Mausi-sadame,
^ _t ^^
uru,
Moosi-ire,
is
this called in
=
,
confined to the
motte moosi-ire-soro
is
offer,
grafted, it is expressed
or saying, e.g. Sadame,
Nandziye
it
soro
(
^ ^|)
K
Nandzim) lo-kanwo
(or
letter.
you by
Yaht-ninye
to the officers.
grafted on the root of a verb
Age-masu, to
is
say towards above, to communicate to a superior;
to
Age-mausu or Age-mausi as
Japan?
I have the honor to inform
,
Sorewa Nippon dewa
ivi-sadame, to define with words; Age, to raise; Mcnui-
mausi-tassu-besi , notice shall be given of
Mausi
A
speaking
proposition to one's equal.
,
Nagaku Nipponno
maosu, he declares that he will
best to
used as a root, on which another verb
thereby, that the action
If
^wite wwu-
Mawsi-tamavakura,
the emperor) says. --
always be the servant of Japan, and pay tribute.
ag)e,
00-
..
f r r?
If
321
Tsubusani sono koto wo mausi-soro, I mention this minutely.
precedes. teini
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII,
of the colloquial. See
it
stands for
3/os)i',
M, 4|J
of the epistolary style
Addenda
n<>.
101.
,
the same
is
VI.
119. GIVING. 1.
if
he
As from is
courtesy the speaker places the person addressed
own
his equal, he qualifies his
the giving of another as a
giving as an
downward one:
above him, even
upward movement, and
he uses Ag)e, uru, to reach up-
wards, in opposition to the honorary passive Kudasar)e, uru, to be
from on high, to descend (page 243 it
appears
who
line 22),
let
down
and since from this distinction
gives, the speaker or the person spoken to, the express mention
of a pronoun in connection with these and similar verbs
is
superfluous,
),
after I
as
the following examples show:
A
Dai-kin wo
age-wos# kara, uke-tori-gakiwo ktiddsare
you the price give
= the
me
price will not be reached
immediately?
1)
Mausaku,
upward
Mdasdru ka f e )
Dai-kin wa tadatma
Dai-kinwa
a receipt.
,
to
will
4
have paid
agerar^nti. (or agerare-matenti *) ,
you by me = I ,
you give
me
will
the
not pay the
money
price.
for the goods
Tadalma ktidasaru kotowa deki-masenukaf), cannot you give
see $
2) Nippon-lei. Vol. VII. 14
107.
4) Shopping-dialogues,
p.
14.
5) Ibid. p.
13.
r.
3) 6)
Ibid. p.
.
13.
MOWN,
Coll.
N9
7) Ibid. p.
21
(it)
366. 13.
322
CHAPTER
me
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
Anata-sama yori kudasareta kane
immediately?
masenu, of the money given by Your Honor writes 2.
it
mo
itsi-pu
tsukaiva itdsi"
a Japanese grisette
is
who
have not yet spent one bu.
I
it
119.
Sasag)e, uru, (from Sasi, to show, and Age, to raise),
^ ^ o
o
^,
holding a thing up, to present to a person in a higher station.
Sinrano tsnkai N.N.
comes and solemnly kitsunewo sasdgu 3.
1
),
N.N., ambassador of Sinra
offers presents (to the emperor).
Tanbano kuni yori k&rdki
mitsnkiwo sasdgu
kitatte
a black fox from the country of Tanba
2 ),
is
offered (to the emperor).
Kudasare, joined to the root or to the gerund of a verb, characterizes the
action as one proceeding from the person spoken to. It sounds
Nasare
(
more courtly than
100. IV. 5).
kudasare (vulgo kudasai), or kudasare-mase, or
kai
kai nasare! please .
.
to
The chapman: San-byakume
buy. 3
~T*^*
give you
pay 30
pl ease to
)'
20
come to-morrow!
Mo
take no pains.
what higher. it
mioo-nitsi
Tsikadzukini
approach him, = allow
me
to
|ij T*)
^5
buy
N.
87
see
him
tstike
to
kudasare!
)
,
nasare! please give
it
me! Ts&ke has reference
to the person
spoken
>"
**n
-zr n
R^
*&? ~
t*?*s
/
1)
>
Fyak-kwanni tamavu tablets,
^
Yamato nen-dai.
7
), if
,
you give
8 )
,
zin, gi rei, tsi, sinno
to the speaker
fudawo
to give order is self-evident.
torastmete
-
mono wo
the emperor orders the assembled officers to take
on which one of the words humanity,
justice etc. is
written and thereby bestows gifts.
III. 3 v.
)
to.
to take" places the person ordered beneath the one who orders
WL-r
5
10.
Torasim)e, uru, also Toras)e, uru. That the expression:
-j
please to
please to set the price some-
r
^
i),
kamai kudasaruna
you. 6
I will
to add to, expresses the idea of giving, without any
and the honorary passive Nasare 5.
7
all.
1
A
.
.
kudasare! please to
Gok' yasUku-site kudasaru nard, nokordzu kai-masoo
Tsiik)e, uru,
In
boast.
ide (^jfj)*
sukdsi ne-masite kudasare
Remark. For Kudar}i, u
4.
O
nari (^tfj* J^JM)
present
as cheap as possible, I will
-
^
W? H
\^
The buyer: Ni-bydkume de agemasoo,
taels!
Doozo
taels.
de kudasare!
2) Ibid. III. 4
21.
3) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 38.
r.
4) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 19.
5) Ibid.
7) Ibid. p. 36.
8) Yamato nen-dai. III. 6 v.
p.
6)
Ibid. p. 38.
CHAPTER 6.
Yar)i, u,
VII.
VERBS OP COURTESY.
120.
to cast, throw, send (fttoni
$U^,
some one);
it
message.
Kono mononi kane
humbles the
receiver.
Tsukaiico
323
mono wo,
to send a thing to
yari ncuare, please send
me
a
yare! give that person one bu!
itsipu
120. GOING and COMING are expressed by
Mair)i, u, solemn entry, to enter (a palace or temple) in solemn proces-
1.
son.
A ^~A
fj!
procession,
o
^~S%-
o
hold a stately procession, and
to
whither one
where one
goes or
fuku su
2
2p 7
(
ffi %)
1
walk in
to
The by
definition:
or
r
y,
ni.
prince Ten-inn, yielding, waits upon
),
Kau-raimo
.
.
Go
tsin
^
^ J)
($JJ
nt mairite
of Corea come into the imperial
al so *hey
)
M, to enter.
ir)t,
enters, precedes, characterized
Ten-mu unadzuite 0-maeve mairu His Highness (the Mikado).
From Mad, Man,
/-
camp and
submit themselves.
In the familiar tari, to
one
on an equality with him.
is
by Mairi spoken
come
own coming
if one's
come,
it
A
to
you
to
(or
2.
ye-
(^f
1
-f
^jp
)
if it
Mairar)e, uru,
means
his
3.
iH Ati
own coming
(or kai-mononi) maitta (^j^i*
A
masdnii, I cannot is
come
wanting,
to the person ),
Watdksa kono fltdtoo
A
with me. (Shopping-Dial. 18).
occurs,
is
person
if
I have tsurete
Firu-maye
before noon. (Sh.-Dial. 17).
used by the speaker, instead of A/otri, by
who
comes.
Mairas)e, uru, cause to enter solemnly, cause a thing to enter solemnly,
h
o
1
4.
*
o
lUc-
/ivlA
The giver humbles
himself, and raises the receiver.
Mairasar)e, uru vulg. Marase, (passive of Afot'rcm), to be admitted with
solemnity.
An
example from RODR.
excellent
was solemnly admitted
the administration of baptism
to
Mairi the giver of the baptism
is
placed
Ide, Idzuru
Joam Baptuta Jt*u
(
|fj
Nippon o-dai tin-ran.
II.
)
to
page 4
r.
come out
to
J. C.
-- Here by
beneath the recipient, whereas the
passive form mairasareta expresses the respect of the 5.
105: S.
sadzuke-mairasareta or Sadzuke-tatemateurareta, 8. J. B.
Christoni JBaptismawo
)
meant, even
to send a thing to a person in a high station, to offer a thing solemnly.
e.
1
first
of an honorary passive, from respect towards the person
way
i.
pronoun of the
to buy) goods.
man
maitta, I have brought this
niwa mairi
If the
Watdksa sinawo mini look at
nsed instead of Ki-
is
to the person spoken to is
indicated that the speaker
is
to.
and writing Mairi
style of speaking
speaker towards
of, to appear,
and
1) I*m*to N*-4ri.
I.
2
T.
the giver.
CHAPTER
324 6.
u (_t#0,
Agar)i,
VERBS OF COURTESY.
VII.
come up,
to
The former points
the speaker.
the action. Fino ide
is
O
sun-rise,
or His rise takes place,
or nasare-mase,
Kono mitsiwo
e.
ide
this
whither are you going? -
know
nasare!*), fix your attention on
Akariwo motte
wait there! nasare,
i.
Dialogues
e.
may
it
it
and
Tastkdni
certainly?
--
Ori or Iri
tsukdte, mite
ide nasare, bring a light.
ide
ide nasare! 3 ),
Atsirani matte
see!
96, 97,
ide nasare-
strife' (site)
kiwo
(
agdri
($Q*
\^ #*)
your coming take place, says a merchant for: come in! (Sh.-
1).
Taken in an ample
sense,
by another's coming the speaker understands a
meeting, a concession to the speaker's wish, offer
Wa-
go with me.
ide nasare-mase,
do you, or does he
*),
,
ide nasarei
whence are you coming)?
98), in connection with a precedent gerund.
)
Idzuku ye (or Idzuku yon)
way.
(or
jpT
j
ide nasare,
be welcome!
ide!
ide nasaritka?
go
( trjj
Yoku
ide also takes the place of the auxiliary verb Ari,
mdsnka?
nasaru
you or he comes.
you going
'^ p)y^ = )
(
Your coming,
Yoku
ide nasare-mase ,
ide nasare-masu? whither are
tdkusi to 'issoni
only to a person beyond
ide (f^J^ HJ-r)' ^he rising, the appearing
Dokoni
kasi! oh that he came!
A
i.
abbreviated,
or,
rise, are applied
to the beginning, the latter to the duration of
of persons beyond the speaker, His or
= Your
120.
Ari gdtoo, no
you sake?
= why do you not
rise?
for:
I
why
e.
g.
thank you.
:
Sake wo age-masooka?
Nazeni
may
I
agari nasardnukd?
don't you concede,
do you refuse?
why
(Shopping- Dialogues 21).
Agarasar)e, u, uru, to be raised, from Agarasi, to make Agari, to
The
rise.
rise,
and
this
from
passive form, for honor's sake used in deference instead of
Agari; also Agaraserar)e , uru.
Makar)i, u, evidently a continuative verb and as
7.
Mak)i, u, = io leave
off
think derived from
I
106), means a continual leaving off of work, i.e. to
(
have furlough (Hd. Urlaub) or vacation, to be out of service for a time; to
go on furlough
4 ).
It
was formerly used
to go elsewhere for a time, 1f
1*0
away, the
1) R.
4)
JH
o
^i
pass, of
to
N.
visit.
It is expressed
by
who
^
o
must be distinguished from Makar)e,
Mak)i,
BROWN, CoU. Jap.
MAKARU
an(l
on a
for people in service,
14.
left
j||
o
the capital
ffi
2) Ibid.
N.
34.
-^
e
eru, to be sent
u.
va koto sumile sono ba wo sirizoku koto nari.
o
3; Ibid.
N.
36.
CHAPTER vn. VERBS OF COURTESY.
019 J&st W^
Yamdto firm mikotovi makari-mousi-tamamte ivaku
33L+,
= "T^
JJK$
g Yamato take) paying a
TdP-Q.
<[/
^.^
( a ^ I se )
T-^
IT
_Pf> I
325
120.
A
says...
visit to
(the priestess)
l
),
(prince
Yamato
fime
Watakusiwa omaeno katani makarau,
or makari-masoo , I shall come and visit you.
When
the
chapman
not come to you, he declares that he
Aru
wa makdri-mastnu =
says : Sono ne de
,
not willing to
is
for that price I will
sell
for that price.
tok6roni makdri-aru, to be
somewhere on leave, to be somewhere; to be there
for a time, but not definitely.
Bu-zini makdri ari-mastl, = he finds himself
for a time at ease, it is well with him.
used for
call
visit
to
u
tsikd-dzuku, the night dztiki,
Mioo-nitsi makdri idzu
Makari therefore
morrow.
Tsika-dzuk)i ,
,
seems to unite with
it
only for a time."
on you 8.
is,
at the
j|t
&
>
come i n ^
^
moth comes
The going out
me
to have
of the Mikado
beri,
possibly I
,
=
t fle
bori
)
,
s
),
r.
become your
become acquainted with you.
to spread
u, uru, or
^jv
^
happiness in going; on the *"
J^ T O }
nari.
the emperor repairs to the country of N. arite,
kaheri tamavdzH.
-
Tenni no-
the emperor Ten-tsi once went into the mountains and
did not return. Should he have gone to
16. 1) Nippon-ki VII.
Thence Tttkd-
tstkddziikini nari-mastte yoro-
you.
Ten-wau aru-toki yama-sinaye giau-gau
tamavu ni ya?
just
Fii.ru tomoriini
neighbourhood.
other hand the going out of the Tai-kun was expressed by $|) a
may
indicates discretion , politeness.
called Mi-yuki-s)i,
is
Giao-gao-s)i, u, uru, or Giao-gcio-ari
Ten-wau N. kunini giau-gau-su
of furlough,
the idea
tsikddzUkini nari-maail, I
make acquaintance with
kobi-mdstf,, it is agreeable to
it
in contact with the lamp-light.
an acquaintance, one known.
acquaintance, I
Ten-tsi
same time
to die" will, our derivation considered, not appear strange.
Placed before another verb
on a
That Makari
Heaven?
II. 10. 2) Nippon o-rfai iiti-ran.
r.
3) Ibid. II. 4
T.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS. 121.
As
the relation indicated by conjunctions, in which propositions stand
to one another,
is
either a
coordination
or a
subordination, Grammar
coordinative and subordinative conjunctions.
tinguishes
dis-
Consequently
we
arrange the Japanese conjunctions as follows:
A. COORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. I.
Copulative conj. ..mo.
II.
Disjunctive conj.
III.
Adversative conj.
Mottomo.
7.
Aruiva.
11.
Mata, ..mo mata.
8.
Matava.
12. Nagara,
Katsu, Katsuva.
9. ..ka,
1.
Mo, ..mo,
2. 3.
..ka.
5.
Narabini.
6.
Kanete.
..yara, yaran.
(Nga), Ga-
16. Kono-yiieni. Sore-kara.
Koreni
14. Sari- (San-) nagara.
Soredewa, Soowa.
18. So site, Sogote.
19. Sate. 20. Sunavatsi.
V. Explanatory conj. yotte.
Slkasi.
Sava-ive.
15. Yavari.
TV. Conclusive conj.
17. Sorede,
[tera.
13. Slkasi-nagara,
10. ..ya, ..ya.
4. Oyobi.
Na
21. Kedasi.
22. Tadasi. 23.
Anzuruni.
CHAPTER
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
121, 122.
327
B. SUBORDINATIVE CONJ., GOVERNING THE ADVERBIAL PROPOSITION THAT PRECEDES.
Conjunctions of place and time.
I.
24. Tokoro, Baso.
27. Setsu.
31.
25. Tokoro ni,
28. Migiri.
32. Avida. Aida.
36. Yori.
29. Utsi, Hodo.
33. Uye.
37. Kara, ..noni.
34.
38. Made.
A Tokoro de. 26. Toki.
30. II.
a.
39.
Toorini.
Ma.
b.
Mave, Maye.
b.
Comparative,
III.
43. Yueni.
35.
Notst
Conjunctions of quality and manner.
40. Yauni,Gani.
a.
Ma-ma.
41. Got6)si, ki, ku.
Proportional conj.
42. Fodo, Fodoni.
Conjunctions of causality,
used in the notice of an actual cause. 44. Kara.
45. Niyotte, Aida, Tsnki, Tsuite.
Conjunctions used in the notice of a possible,
'.
e.
a future and thug
an uncertain cause (Conditional conjunctions). 46. Naraba, Nara, in connection with Moslkuva, Mosiva, Mosi.
IV. Conjunctions of the purpose. 47. Tame*ni.
48. Tote.
V. Conjunctions of concession. 49. ..mo.
52.
55. Slkamo.
..
50.
..tomo.
53. Slkaredomo, Saredomo.
56.
Somo-8omo.
51.
..domo.
54. Soredemo.
57.
Mamayo.
The
relative comparative of propositions. 58. ..yoriva musiro.
Explanation. A. OOORDINATIVB CONJUNCTIONS.
I.
122.
1.
racterizes {he
Copulative or oodrdinative conjunctions.
..mo, 'fa*, adverbial
word which precedes,
as added to, or
made equivalent,
Kore,
this: j
this,
suffix,
= too, also, Lat. que, quoque, cha-
either subject or object of the proposition,
to another subject or object already mentioned.
Korem6,
this too,
him; KorewomA, him
even
too.
this.
328
CHAPTER
As
VIII.
an interrogative pronoun
suffix to
(Lat. quisque). See
it
contains
all
that
is
included in the
Dare, = who? (Lat. quist)
interrogative, as individuals together.
= whoever
122.
CONJUNCTIONS.
Daremd,
page 102. 131
It characterizes the concessive proposition. See
n.
50.
..m6, ..m6, = both., and.., as well., as also.., not alone or not only,
but also..
Kazdmd namim6
= neither wind nor waves become
abate,
2
TT*
\)
7 Avugi
^
3S
?
-|
7
^
f^
Ziyun tsukuri-tamdvu
t6m6
tsukuri-tamdvu
iveri 1 ),
to
- concerning
m6
mata Bu-wau
the fan,
it
is
said
that (to)
Schun has made
as also that (to)
it,
has
Wu-wang
made'it.
EE? Mata,
^#
= too,
junction
Oogi) va ,
still.
'
JEO'
2.
A
(
= both wind and waves do not
sidzttmardzu,
5#i=twig, something that is double; as adverbial and, moreover (sono uy<[), likewise, or also, unites
con-
both
coordinate names, and equivalent propositions, and refers to the word or proposition, that
follows
Andtano kinu-mono mata momen-mono
it.
fabawa ikura ari-mdsukd? your
2
what
),
woolen goods the iron foot
for
Mata * ^ >#
_^y
the length (and) breath of one piece of
is
is
used as also the ken (an
^v *jL
Mandnde
tokini
T
:p
7 ^ _, j v ^ ^ ,
a thing (and)
practise
it
continually,
,
feet).
(^^); thence
Kono futd
fasirano
,
the sameness of the subject
kamimb mata... mi-mi wo likewise (matd)
Mata
s
sa-too ari-mdsu nard, sore wo kai-masoo ),
1.
2. r.
is
kdkusi tamdlki, also (mo) both
concealed.
Mata
= and
if
(^)
you have sugar,
2) Mopping-lHaloffuet , p. 33. 5)
Compare page 225.
points to the equality of
with that expressed in the preceding proposition.
VIII.
and pre-
mo, and that of the predicate by the
suffix
the beginning of a proposition
4) Lun-yu, Cap.
to the subject
the formula ..mo mata..
these gods kept themselves
1) Kasira-gaki.
this not agreeable too?
If the subject as well as the predi-
dicate of a precedent proposition
by the
is
made equivalent
cate of a proposition is
expressed
At
of 6
)
korewo narau mata yordkobasikardzuya? *), to learn
t
adv. mata
ell
3
refers to the predicate in propositions like: (^f^fl)
..m6 mata, = likewise.
t
naga
Ke-oriwa kane-zak mata kenwo motsii-mdsu
and cotton-goods?
silk-
it-tan no
p.
40.
its
contents
andtano fooni I will
buy
S) Ibid. p. 28.
it.
CONJUNCTIONS.
VII.
3.
Katsu,
moreover,
^Hv TcS^-EL* come
also
329
Katsu va, Katsu wa,= and also,
Lat. quoque, continuative conj., characterizes the proposition or the
part of the proposition that follows
i^l f
wa
H.ff, isolated by va or
12&.
H.-y
J|lt
an addition to the precedent
as
it,
clause.
Kon-sin katsu Soo-fon' ), friendship and trade. P*l!f jftY* 1
Fadzi
T&,>
Ma'ru 2 ), people
kdtsU
artte
grow ashamed and
to perfection.
Katsu mata,
H. ^]>, moreover
also,
than so much the more.
Katsii-katsu = moreover and moreover all and all. ^ = reach to, as conj. to and with, inclusive, unites two 4. Oy6bi, 2fc *,> ,
,
removed from each other, comprising the
objects
them. It
a
is
synonym
of Made-m.6. (See
The abroad,
is
.ra itdru
made or
=
..yuki-tsttkite,
coming
Japan
appoint consuls
shall
al.
and commercial
7 -, besides, also, from Narab)i, u, to place oneself next, b and propositions. - - Morokosi narabini Ban-goni dzuu-turu
3
),
Japanese
of the said Treaty, containing the stipulation: injured," after the building of churches
^^
ffi)^
5J|^*>
is
a * *^ e
and Japanese
rice
the beginning of a proposition Narabini
Kanete,
agents
l|fi
kome narabini Nippon no mugi
6.
and
4, by:
mono, a person versed in the Chinese as also in foreign languages.
At
to..,
26).
expressed in the Treaty of 1858, Art. I
substantives
joins
.
n.
that
stipulation
Narabini,
5.
62.
of
between
series of similiar things
is
met with
And
e.
Nippon no
wheat.
g. in Art.
Vll
al.
2
these buildings shall not be
conceded in the previous proposition.
same time, gerund
of Kane, to take
with or together, to comprehend, comprise, embrace, characterizes an apposition.
N.N., Bungono kami kanete Nagasaki Go-Bu-gioo, N.N., prince of Bungo
and governor of Nagasaki. II.
Disjunctive conjunctions,
between propositions that reciprocally exclude or may supersede each other. 123. separates,
1.
Aruiva, Arttiwa,
J^
^
,
contr. of dru ivu ca,
7W
as
someone says
),
with the signification of or, or also, substantives and propositions
of 1858, in the beginning. 1) Netherl.-Jap. Treaty
4)
=
1
'
)
&M*JW,
II. 3.
S)
Tmty.
11.
19.
CHAPTER
830
123.
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
Kono
which may take the place of each other.
figiri aruiva sono i-zen
J
nitemo
),
at this date or earlier.
Aruiva repeated has the power of exclusion.
Aruiva kono
figiri, aruiva
sono i-zen, either at this date, or earlier.
Matava, Matawa, the mata
7.
or" in
consul or consular agent"
^ X*-
is
expressed in
the Treaty Art.
Nippon ki-kwan matava i-ninno yaku-nin
2
),
2
of rank or also
officers
Japanese
Andta wa Egeres mata va Oran-mo-zi wo
commissioners.
al.
I.
^ WE^U"^ #"' #? Av,
#*
rnatava.-- ft j
by va, = or also, then well. The
isolated
do you
kaki ka?,
write English or Dutch? 9.
. .
^
*
ka
,
||ft
and pronounced with emphasis
as suffix
,
of the direct question;
characteristic
Aril there
Jfjf o
o
e.
g.:
F$t6kd? a man? Arttka?
is
there?
as a suffix, ..ka, ..ka, takes the place
our disjunctive either.., or.., Germ, entweder.., oder
Soreka ardnuka?
it.
ka, koreka koi to iye!
Remark. In
(^
JJJJ
.
^
^
Jj$)>
^s
so
its
disjunctive
of
Yamaka? Kumoka?
.
^
far off I cannot
A
no^ so ?
ig
that or this (one or the other) to come!
tell
opinion, ka gets
my
.
= whether mountain? or cloud? being
to6ku-site siru-koto nasi,
lity
original
is!
In alternative propositions repeated
know
,
power from
its
Sore
4 ).
original qua-
of an interrogative particle. Sore and kore are thus characterized by ka as
undetermined points of interrogation. Besides the alternative question: or not?
is
it
so
expressed by two coordinate questions, of which one as well as the
is
other closes with the interrogative particle ka, thus Sa-yoo de dri-masiikat Sa-
yoode ari-masdnu ka? = stuff?
is
it
so?
is
it
not so? The question: Is
5
)
=
is
it
silk
stuff?
is
it
woolen
stuff? If this alternative question is
put, without any modification, dependent on the subsequent
to
that), or of to tovu (= ask if), the expression is obtained: to
1)
or woolen
sounds in the spoken language: Kinu-monode dri-mdsUkdl ke-oride dri-
mdstlka^
ask
it silk
if
it
silk
is
Treaty. XT.
or woolen
p.
59
5) Shopping -Dialogues , p.
16.
COLLADO,
(= to think
think that,
Thus, when ..ka, ..ka answers to our
or
dis-
2) Ibid. IX. 6.
1.
3) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 14.
4) Compare
stuff.
8m6u
Petrus vel Joannes."
The
original
line 7
has Okakika
for
kaki-mdsuka.
from the bottom. ,,Pedro ca luan ca
coi to iye, die
quod veniat
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
is
it
junctive either.., or..,
123.
because the questions themselves are disjunctive or
alternative.
Since OdTcata means
for the
most part, in general"
(see
page 175 n. 44),
Odkata sayoode gozdri-masoo , odkata sayoode gozdri-mdsti-mai of course also means
In general to say:
may be
it
may be
It
so, in general it
so, in general, or
character in those two propositions
is
it
not be so," for which
may
not." Consequently the disjunctive
1
).
10. ..ya, *Y, disjunctive but not exclusive suffix et;
are used
not expressed by Ookata, but by the mere
antithesis of the propositions themselves
Taya sonova fttrubitdri
we
may
= or, and,
1
),
w,
Lai. t*/,
garden or (and) field has become old, in the spo-
,
ken language: Taya sonoga
Dzu-kinyd kdsawo
fitrubita.
to take
nu/ru,
off
kerchief or (and) hat.
Stbayd 8d6rowo motte sekiwo tstkuru, to make mats of
underwood or thorns.
Fandsiyd wardu koye, noises of talking and laughing.
Also ya
just as ka, properly the closing particle of a question, it
is,
simple or disjunctive, and as that about which a question this
particle
is
also called ivayuru utagainoya,
Ano fltowd
tainty.
is
kitdr&yd?
he coming?
Mikado fei-anni mdsttyd? inaydf
not?
),
is
is
uncertain,
is
Slkdr&yd, inayd*
=
3
put,
the so called ya of uncer-
e.
i.
is
may be
the
Mikado at
his
it
so or
ease or
not? = how does the Mikado?
Asa yuvuni
oyani kau-kau
Kamiya Fotokeno He who early and
"
(3$
megumi aru
"
ff$)
fUowd
*
ben.
late does his duty towards his parents,
Shall have the grace of the gods and of Buddha.
Yara, properly Yaran, = Ya -faran, =
if
arau yara, watdkusiva uiagaute JrS, I doubt koto yara sirarezu,
yara
it
not
is
iranu 4 ), whether
is
it
III.
11.
124.
1) 2)
Compare
^
h
Pf ft
R.
;> *~
WROWN,
/ Rfl '**
4) Borrowed from
T
Coll.
^
4h,
COLLADO,
if
Mr. N.
known what matter a
man
it is.
or a brute
I
will
tamaga k*rude come. -- Idxurcno
A
Flt6 yara fnto-Joo
. .
do not know.
Adversative conjunctions.
al^C^t), though, M6tUm6 properly concessive conjunction, originally
Mottomo
adversative or
though,
there shall be? --
Jap. Ti-
(improperly
LV.
line 3
expressed
from tbe bottom.
raff** Sivori, under
pag. 60,
by
7*
3) Xiffo*-**.
XXVI.
9.
CHAPTER vui. CONJUNCTIONS.
332
= with
^),
my
also, modified for vocal harmony Mottomo,
(this)
opinion, elliptically for Sore wo mdttemo,
An
other hand.
/C
^
\.
^
w
?
-IfL
^ z
ffl 3
j&$- >| h\3? S.i/ ^
r/f
HI
?
4f f* $
^
-
Jill
^
^
.
v
kardzti,.
kamai-arw koto
^^
^
*
y
* a^ e
the
),
,
though, on the
munitions of war
fr
om
By
proposition
be sold
That
exclusively.
Motte as
contents
following
may
fo-
On 6 another will not, how-
the
of
resumed whereas the
are
That
1
government
sucn
the
example,
.
mm
noticed.
^
.
^L conceded.
this..
all
gwai-koku-zin tagaino tori-fikiva sasi-
J aP anese
ever be
**
1:
^e
re ig ners
'
T?'^. -=*-
Mottomo
J\\V
/
'
*
i-
with
m
put,
Gun-yoono so-butsv a Nippon yakft-sono fokdve urU-be-
fiJr-
*
=.
is
example:
O vl ^
124.
appears from this
it
previous
proposition
mo stamps them
suffix
Mottomo contains an
antithesis,
as is
the logical consequence of the concessive character of the previous proposition.
The Japanese
74.
Compare
are accustomed not to distinguish the
Mottomo from the adverb Mottomo, according perly
M6tom6 and
eminence" racter
As
page 134) and
(see
^Q
by which
,
a proof
manner .E7
*j-
v
-
or
jg
^Q
also express the conjunction
official
,
=
utmost
,
by
Mottomo by the cha-
has become a stumbling-block for
it
om
many
a translator.
Dutch translation of the above men-
dezelve aan vreemde natie'n te verkoopen
Of another
article
of examining goods ;ix
by
of writing pro-
Oorlogsbehoeften zullen alleen aan de Japansche regeering ver-
kocht worden EN -
expressed
necessary to cite the
it is
tioned article:
paling."
ideographically
manner
to the old
conjunction
i.
;/,
e.
is
2
)
also
buiten deze be-
in which the description of the tedious
,
followed
the examination,
is
by:^Q^(p|^'^^^[^^P B
however,
shall
'
55
take place without any
extraordinary waste of time, the Dutch translation drawn up by Japanese inter-
EN" (and) instead of however, whence
preters has
it
appears that they, misled by
the Chinese character, have misconceived the force of the conjunction Mottomo. 5'^^ Remark. The Mottomo occurring in Go motto mode ari-mdsu (WI 3
*^
^R^^^ X
3
),
You
the adverb used
what you have
1) Treaty. II.
1
are right) as
of the everyday colloquial language,
a substantive, and the phrase, which
said is incontestable.
This expression
is,
is
is
elliptical,
by the by,
8.
2) Art. III. al. 5 of the Ki-soku or Tariff belonging to the Treaty of the 18 Aug. 1859.
8) Shopping-Dialogues
,
p.
13.
evidently
means:
also con-
CHAPTER vni. CONJUNCTIONS.
124.
333
nected with a particular shrewd hero of antiquity, one Mr. Mottomo (^ft),
had applied
We
to
leave this as 12.
name
himself the
Nagara,
we
find
of
^j$ ^g
Doo-ri,
',
Qa, = in the midst
a word expressive of relation, arisen by syncope from sake of euphony has taken the place of
the midst of sleep , not sells,
in
its
Naka
one
sleeps.
sonavareru mono, something inborn. Nagdra
= the
Pjl),
a
The
8
)
antithesis is
no elephants.
but has been
.-1/vV-ga,
4
Ano
,
g.
=
it
So-fukuwo ki-nagdra ma-
sentence containing a statement
antecedent proposition. It
it
is
,
3 ).
It is put, like
is
was good so,
,
and
Coll.
23.
end
to or
$f j. (0* followed by a
more than the
although, though, yet, howeTer I
see
your goods?
kokoni te-hon-girega ari-md** kara , kordteo Go-ran na-
amdri sam&sava
Jap. LV. LX1I. 9.
B) Shopping-Dialogues, p
is
as I have patterns here, please see them.
($)
at the
made a mistake.
mostly simple SUcasI,
which must be of value equal
equivalent to:
Wafftm Sivori, under Mottomo.
BROWN,
Nagdra,
yet he has
(^^)
3) R.
in the place of
katava kokfoozasiva yordgiugozari-mastag*,
Deki-mdsii. Sikasi
however
Nd
with putting
Sinawo mirft-kotowa deki-mdg&ka? can
I}
twulzuki-
.-lr/V-nagara, though there was..
nevertheless.
slkasi fikage yosi;
yet he
borders on China, has (ne-
it is so, exhibits the previous proposition as conceded,
sdre*), yes;
is
simply ga (at YeVlo nga) of Nagdra, to which
his intention
though
nagara, = since
13. SlkasI
=
)
who
from Nakara
Kono kuni Dai-Afinni
itself
justly attributed
of the concessive proposition.
matsigai-masta
a person
more emphatically expressed by Nagdramd.
(if possible), also retains
the force of
is
though he wears mourning,
,
The spoken language, which contents Ndrit-ddke
e.
nagdra, kisa ardzu, this country, though vertheless)
Ffl),= from the
|||
to be distinguished
is
attends to affairs of government.
&
gara, which for the
$
an antithesis to the antecedent, Nagdra
is
kiki-tamavu
tstiri-kotowo
=. ^
(
Naka
I-nagdra uru-mono
equivalent to: nevertheless, yet,
W? ^
-t
kara
of, whilst, properly
Fino nakara, noon.
half.
If the subsequent proposition
? $* y
).
uru mono on the contrary, a hawker. Umare nagarard
sitting; Motsi-yukite
o
1
root- or attributive form before it Ne-nagdra, in
as long as
:
right, reason
e.
i.
it.
vulg. Gatera, abbrev.
midst, and has a verb
who
1
asiri;
motion* do-ma
8) Niffom
o^n
*) IWd- P- *1-
w
tW-ri. IL
"*
Ob-gain <<;i
>
T.
CHAPTER
334
finatamo yosi
much
too
1
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
in the breeding (of silkworms) on tubs,
),
injurious, however as
cold
or
14. Sari-nagara
,
which contains an
it is so,
is
it
is
SIM'
so, is
15. Yavari,
$jff
dziga sei-sitemo,
him
forbid
indicated by
f\ $f$
[||J
,
bv
although
more decidedly
antithesis is
expressed by Sari-nagara md or Sikasi-nagaram6. ,
^$$)'
vul S
equivalent to:
is
notwithstanding, nevertheless. The
but not ideographically
good, but
put at the beginning of a propo-
and therefore
antithesis,
is
good.
San-nagara ($$Y)rV9<>
syncope for Sikdri-nagdra = since
shadow
soon as (the silkworms) are brought out
of doors and fed there, sunshine also
sition,
124, 125.
is
San-nagdra
phonetically,
*^*
however, yet, nevertheless,
A Nan-
still.
tomo, kareva yavari sore wo surudearau, whether you
sei-sdztt
or not, he will do
it
nevertheless.
IV. Conclusive conjunctions,
preceding the proposition, which expresses a consequence. 225. 16.
The
adverbial expressions formed with ..yueni,
Kono yudni) Karuga yudni, Sore
yue'ni, or also
.
.kara and ..niyotte:
simply with Yudni, there-
fore.
kSoreda kara,
Sore-kara,
Koreni it is so,
ydtte,
Soostta kara vulgo Soosite kara,
Soreni ydtte, therefore. Sikdruni ydtte, or Sdrfoni ydtte, since
therefore.
Further elucidation follows in
A Sorede,
17.
^
dai-zi
na koto wo tdssu
thus
listen!
,
of
^ ^f-
so
is
it
^*,
Soredewa,
sore de
,
~fa
^
7^ ? '
?JH
^
=?*')
>7
43, 44, 45.
so, thus, I
kike ! 2
),
then, =
communicate an
then
affair
of importance
(as it is so) I will
Soowd makdri-mase'n&
3
)
,
buy
,
it.
so I cannot consent to it,
not to be done. (For Makdri compare page 325, line
it is
si-masoo , I shal do
Yama-mayu
A Watdkusi
ni ydtte.
Sa-yau-wa.
,
^^55,
from Stkau-site, = since
1)
N.
a contraction of Stkdkuva, Sikauwa, so, or in the opinion of Ja-
18. Soo-slte, vulgo So-site,
A Soo
129,
l^Soredewd kai-masoo
ASoowa, panese
thence, then.
kai-foo fi-den.
I.
j^is
also
Z^L^
ffil
r^
Sosste
so, thus, then. See Shopping-Dial,
5.)
written,
contr.
page 15. Comp.
it.
I.
iij
Shopping'-Dialogues ,
p.
10.
3) Ibid. p. 3.
CHAPTER 19. Sate,
$|
meaning goes, comes
proposition, expresses a
quence flows, Sate
etc.
125, 126.
is
ft
&&*, = (this)
^
fljj
consequence, even
^
(5oo)
same thing, placed
to the
335
beingso,
M
which
.
faj
at the beginning of
a
the idea, from which the conse-
if
not expressed as in: >So then the day approaches, on which"
is
expressed by
20. Siinavatsi, modified
= the right way; tively:
CONJUNCTIONS.
Sateva, so, thus, a fusion of Sikdrtte, * * &T some, also of
according to as the
VIII.
^^ for
,
sometimes also by vocal
4%
.
harmony from Sundvo-tfi (IP 11 *
itf S& IF?. **U
) *
adverbially: right, directly (Germ, geradenvxgt) , conjuncis
consequently,
placed at the beginning of the subsequent proposition,
which expresses the consequence.
It is also used
with the power of ritMicft,
/-\
Sen-kou-stirti
tok6row6
WZ>a, tfinavdtsi miuini fo&ari
knows what precedes and what and
effect),
then one
is
follows (if one
'), if
one
knows the cause
$r
near the path of wisdom.
year of Ansei, consequently (or viz) the year 1858
s ).
V. Explanatory conjunctions. 226. 21. Kedasi,
^,
= namely, for, though, Lat. warn, at the begin-
ning of a sentence, which explains the proposition preceding, mostly giving a reason.
Yun-dzukawo
the hilt of a
bow
is
nigirito fvu.
Kedasi tana-kok6roni nigiruno tok6ro nan, which
called nigiri (hilt), it is the place at
it is
held with
the hand though.
The shade
of doubt ascribed to Kedasi by some philological Japanese
justice, not admitted
by
with
others.
^9^*, = properly, devoid of other
22. Tadasi,
is
definitions,
forsooth,
ia
placed at the beginning of a proposition, which explains a preceding assertion by
a particular circumstance and generally confines
guished from the adv. taddsi gulden nari,
23.
Anzuruni,
Tada, only
European
silver
^T^^^-,
(see p.
it
176 n.
66).
two hundred Jfot,
= in
my
It is to
to that.
Ygu-ginni i.
e.
Dai Gaku,
$
3.
MyaJiit tnot,
guilders.
opinion; Remark, precedes
which the writer has to remark on the saying or another.
1)
be distin-
2) Neth.-Jtp. Treaty.
Art
XL
al.
6.
that,
336
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
127.
B. SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS, THAT GOVERN ADVERBIAL PROPOSITIONS.
I.
127. 24. Tok6ro,
Conjunctions of place and time. J j^/f
where
conjunction of place
or Ba-so,
?
= place,
mata asokoni sini-masoo, where thou
ktisimo
answers to our adverbial
&Andtano
page 97).
(see
it
sinuru tokdrode watd-
I too will die"
diest,
nige-sarisi tokoronivd (or ba-sonivd) fitdri tatte-oru, alone to
mina
where
ing,
all
have
).
remain stand-
Kavi-tatento omdvu tokdrono do-ma?),
fled.
Mina
1
a patch of
ground, where people think of breeding (silkworms).
Tok6ro ni
25.
A Tok6ro de
,
characterizes the attributive proposition
,
preceded, also as an adverbial definition of time, and
it is
Mina mina yorokobu
as.
whilst everyone (on board)
= every one was
arose,
tokdroni,
was
by which
equivalent to: whilst,
is
sonoyo nivakdni oo-kaze fuM-kitdri-keri
,
full of gladness, in that night a storm suddenly
glad, as a storm arose etc.
SikdrtL tokdroni, as it is
so, it being such.
B^:, time; Tokiva, Tokini, Tokiniva = Tokinva,
26. Toki,
when.
of,
one
Mono-kuu tokini monogatdri
dru tokivd, san nitsino utsi ame-furu
when
dry, three
days
sum
koto
there ,
bdsi ),
when
do not do that!
wise you 4
masita
)
,
there
is
a moon-hood.
them.
if it
happen
will be etc.
when
27. Setsii,
I
|[[f |>,
to
rains within
...
styu-fo nado
sftru koto
tau-zen taru
etc.,
Japanese
officers
Sore wo sftrund; sayooni ndru tokiva semerareruzo,
then you will be blamed, = do not do
so,
E^Yedo
went
it
Sono tate-mono wo
happen that people repair buildings...
after
(when
people say that the weather becomes
a sun-hood (a circle round the sun), and that
shall
it
have to look
will
to idri,
aran tokiniva, Nippon ydku-nin korewo ken-bun
when
s
is
at the time of eating
Find kasd dru tokivd, fiddri; tsukino kasd
eating) one does not talk.
is
sdzu,
at the time
Yedo
e
,
it,
other-
yukimasita toki RokU-go gawani midzuga masithe water in the river
Rokugo was
division of time. (See page 158).
nitemo kiravu nari; mottomo no-gaino setsiiua kurusikarazu
high.
Taddsi idzureno kaze 5 )
,
properly one must
avoid every wind; at the time of the breeding (of wild silkworms) in the open fields
however,
1) R.
4)
BROWN.
it
does not matter.
Cott. Jap.
LVII. LVI.
2) 5)
Yama-mayu
fi-den. III. ..
I.
1.
3) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. II. 7.
CHAPTER
The
them in
as Toki,
way its
CONJUNCTIONS.
127.
337
words expressive of relation, which define time are used in
rest of the
the same
VIII.
e.
i.
they are preceded by the proposition governed by
attributive form. If they occur with a
gerund preceding, they then
belong, adverbially, to the subsequent principal proposition. 28. Migiri,
= street-cutting
3fl|,
stones of a staircase;
Fund no
of Sfau (n. 27).
Synonym
tstydku-kanno migirini, on the arrival of the ship.
29. Utsi,
ori-masita
j^J
utsi ni ,
kwa-zi ga ari-mastta
[on-siro no]
Ma, Rlj^,
naktl-site,
AF#om
|, Utsiwa, Utsini, within; while. See page 188.
was
[in the palace], whilst I
30.
paving with flag-stones, also the
),
space of time.
step,
fig.
1
1.
*)
,
there
was a conflagration
at YeVlo.
Ikariwo or6u ma mo
space, interval; 2. opportunity.
kazeni makasete yuku, not even having had time to drop the anchor,
they drifted before the wind. 31.
occasion,
often
as
>
Ma-ma ni,
1. at
every time that.
as,
every place, wherever;
Repetition of
uru koto an, at the digging up of old
soils,
page 54), sy-
(see
or ground on which temples have
Kane wo
stood, rare stones are frequently discovered.
Mono wo
as the bell is struck.
K ^
Tabi-tabini,
Ma
on every
2.
Ko-tsi matava siya-tsiwo forite (fotte) 1 ma* mam ki-tekiwo
of Aida-aida.
nonym
^
V
Ma-ma, f^^
^
\
ma-mam,
t6r&
titefl
ma-mam',
as often
as often as
any thing
is
taken,
= as often as.
Tabi-gotoni, >_-.
Goto ni
Ya wo
,
?3
J:
,
fandtsu tabi-gotoni (or
Ya
every shot of an arrow (or so often as an arrow
while. See page 189.
Aida,
33.
Uye, _t5> above, upon, on. See page
34.
Mave, Maye,
]|jf
X, vulgo Mai, before. See
done before
come back"
I
maeni
stte
maim
I shall finish sigotowo sit4 simai-maloo,
simae, get
it
properly: I don't come; I
1)
cutting is
flies).
32.
|Hj,
first
shall
my
have done
or Mi-gin t contracted from Miitino kin, way-catting, ,
186. p. 187.
>
Watdhuino katru
A > Watdktoiwa
8 ).
business before
my
I
matron*
return"
BROWN,
Wa-gvn
Sitoori,
CoU. Jap. LVI.
under Migiri.
M wme
y, from Mint-tin,
=
.
3) Ibid.
K.
161.
),
-
business.
on In rainj because the row of flag-stones laid at short distance* from one another to step
called Migiri.
2) E.
o/*uru, to call out at
no tobu gotoni) koytwo
)
Ibid.
LVI.
n
"tor-
wmthcr
CHAPTER
338
^4>
35. Notsi,
VIII.
after. See page 187.
Ame
f > since.
36. Yori.
tsutsi
1
tokdrowa firake-masita
Q
f* ^jgg
^ t
katani tanonde. naosi-te morai-mastt . I cannot read
^* ?
I shall request the interpreter to translate
^
-
^
-4r*
7
*E^ix
^$
according to , in the
^'
Ifii??
'
itdsi-mdstta, I
40.
)
,
Tabdte
conjunctions, equivalent to: like, just as, so as.
,1
way
=
>
in the
way, on the passage
3
obsol. Gteni,
^|^=,
(as
in the
would gladly have
people must go
to
work
page 191),
you
ffl
%
todrini
prescribed).
manner
of,
in the
Fltdno suku yauni
Omdvuyau, the meaning.
).
(see
Andtano osfyuru
have acted according to your direction
Yguni, AYooni,
of...
that , properly a word expressive of relation.
to do as others
way surfc,
Kaviko kuvd ni fanarenit yau ni su-besi
it.
so, that the silkworm be not removed from
&Fit6-bit6no osoreru yooni okonai-masita, he behaved of him"
A
he went, after he had eaten.
R&ino to6rini, according to the law.
that, so that, as if
please give
--
Conjunctions of quality and manner.
Comparative
39. To6rini,
2
,
Age-mdsu
to, till. See page 192.
II.
15
kara yuki-masita
(for tabeta)
Made, J^f-,
128. a.
me
a receipt. Vulgo also with a gerund preceding.
and thus
it
A
it.
^ara uke-tori-gakiwo kudasdre, after delivery by
Oil*
ss
38.
Watakusi-niwa yomenu kara, tsuu-zi-
-M* %
\
*/ ^=1 ,* PR)
^
(vulgo masite) yori, dno
that place has been opened, since they came.
after, see page 72.
|?,
O
XHI
MB,
-j-
),
firdkesi yori kono kata, since heaven
A Mairi-masita
and earth have developed themselves.
37. Kara,
127, 128,
CONJUNCTIONS.
so, that people
,
its food.
were afraid
4).
41. Gk>t6)si, ki,
ku,
-t-l*
3*
3*
3*
fij ^9-i
J-
-to -^
^/
'2^
equivalent to
to be as if,"
tion before
as complement.
it,
when
_t_^
o
$W5
it,
^
^ e like...
(see
page 109 n.
7), is
used without a subject, has a proposi-
Akuw6 kondmu monovd wazdvaiwo mandku;
ta-
toveba fibikind otdni o6-suruga got6si, whoever loves evil, draws upon himself adversity; it is, to use a comparison, as if the echo answered the sound.
sa-yauni yomu-beku naraba, in case one must read
so.
Mosi sa-yauni yomu-
bekiga gotdkti naraba, if one ought to read so (which the speaker doubts).
R BROWN,
Coll.
3) Comp. page 85
Jap.
2) Ibid. LVI.
LVII.
Dono yau
etc.
and 131.
4) H.
Mosi
BROWN, LVII.
CHAPTER
Proportional
b.
tion to, how,
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
much
I
am
A
strength reaches.
so
much,
as
in proportion to, for so far as, so
Tsikarano oydbu fodoni, for BO far
Watdkusi va kiu-sdktl-m-tai fodo
so tired, that I long for rest.
word that says
propor-
the.
Fodo (A Hodo), Podoni, jgf., = much as, so much that. Comp. page 131.
my
339
conjunctions, which express a proportion as: in
so
42.
as
128, 129.
..va ..to ivu
Ptsdstki fodo ooi
. .
in proportion to the long lasting,
i.
e.
m
tstkareU oru,
fodono kotoba rum,
(kHtodni hodo
001*),
A Ooi
the longer, the better.
.. is
= much
hodo yoi 1 ),
the more, the better.
Flsdsi-kereba ftsdstki fodo 061, the longer, the more.
Haydkerebd haydki fodo
yoi, the sooner, the better.
Areva nomeba, nomft fodo
kavakiga tsuydku ndrti, the more he drinks, the more thirsty he
simani
as
arisi
fodo, as
as
long
we were on
a
is.
Warera kono
this island.
Saru fodoni, f||/t-^|* =, arisen by syncope from Stkdr&fodonij =
for so far
so, is placed at the beginning of a sentence. Sari-fodoni is also
met with.
it is
Conjunctions of causality.
III.
129.
Conjunctions of propositions, which notice an actual, past or
a.
present cause. Yue, $fcz, now commonly written
43. of,
2.-*.,
because, as, whereas, while, with an
which
is
kwan6
attributive definition preceding,
sometimes qualified as a genitive by ga.
tsiyori figdslni
ytidni Nit-t6ut6
atdrti,
from the middle kingdom (China)
lies
= cause; Yueni, for reason
t'rfi,
Sore Nippon-gdkuva
the country of Japan, as
towards the east,
it
bean
Ten-kani kfda-mono
of the (country) to the east of the sun.
TVt'u-
the
cxU-u,
name
it
there
den-fataw6
sokondvu yiteni fitdni kariwd osive-tamdviki, as many animals were upon the earth
and did damage to the lands, he Ten-kani midz& kdsiva kinuni
odsi ytteiii,
mono wo
people wrote on
silk;
with that indicating tdttosito it
sii,
1)
H.
BBOWM, LVII.
as rivers are
kakisi yftdni,
on the earth in great numbers.
kamito ivu
zi ito-fcnwo
silk (j).
makes
its it
Ydma
-
3/iB-
kakeru*)^ formerly
thence the character indicating paper (|ft)
on account of
bears trees, that
(a certain prince) taught the people hunting.
ia
combined
takakigd yUeni tdttokardzu; ki
m6tU
height, a mountain does not deserve honor; thai
deserving of honor.
FtM
koretdrugk
8) Kuira-gaki. VIII.
1
r.
yfem
tdtto-
340
CHAPTER
ar&w6 mdtte
tsi
tdttosi t6 su,
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
a person
129.
not respectable on account of acquired
is
bulk; having understanding, that makes him respectable.
Compounds with Yudni, placed
as illative conjunctions at the beginning of a
proposition:
^/
Kono yueni,
Afc?' = there fore.
Kono yudni kun-sivd mddzu
ts&tsusimu 1 ), therefore the philosopher applies himself particularly to
kSore
^ $?
yfte'ni,
=
virtue.
so, since it is so, therefore, thence, Lat. ergo,
the
of a country depends
management 44.
Kara, {Jj^
= from,
5
|||
Yedo,
from which
pendent on Kara
used as a substantive.
Go-ran nasare 3), as patterns are hodo 6s6i kara
an
kara, tsiisdku miye-mdsu distant.
Kara
e
),
=
after
kara yuki-masita
you 7 )
,
it
4 )
have thought of having eaten
sidzumi masita, the ship sunk after
Compounds with Kara, placed
,
as it is late to day, I shall return
Fosiwa
tai-soo to6%
it
as
it,
please
buy
my
goods.
I)
g
-^
A Tabete
he went. Fane wa iwa ni atatte kara
,
ASoosite (properly
Soo-sita) kara,
ASoosite, So
H.
Dai Gaku. X.
site,
illative
conjunctions at the beginning of
thence, then.
then.
2) Ibid. IX. 5.
6.
8) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 23. 6)
,
p. 39.
4) Ibid. 7) R.
,
struck on a rock.
vulgo Soreda kara, thence.
,
it is
kai ku-
a proposition:
Sore kara,
go-
The verb de-
with the signification of after, especially when
shall
after
house.
conjunction
Kan-ben-si masiyoo kara, watdkusind sinamo
preceded by a gerund. dasdre
own
the stars seem small, becauee they are more or less
),
also used
is
illative
therefore
&Kon-nitsiwa yo-
morrow. Os6i stands for Os6ki of the written language. 5
),
Te-hon-girega dri-mdsukara, korewo
hand, please see them.
at
2
his
the subsequent proposition flows.
mtyau-nitsi kaheri-masiyoo
,
wo totonouruni
characterizes the proposition
it
being
series of propositions prece-
upon the management of
verns as the cause, is
the"
its
placed at the beginning of a
Lat. ex (see page 71), as
peculiar to the spoken language of
to
is
which contains the consequence of a
Kdr&gd yueni kuniw6 osdmuru kotovd
ding.
-
therefore.
f r such reasons,
Karttga yueni, by apheresis for Sikdrugd yueni, = on account of
proposition,
tdkuni
p.
41.
BROWN, LVI.
5) B.
BROWN, LVII.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
129.
&
45. ..niydrite, old-Jap. ..niyote, vulgo ..niydtte,
gerund of...
= preceding from.., having
of yon,
It is preceded
\ *r* T
form with or without the
y6ri
Sadond sima made ya sima mddzu umi-maseru kuni
sima-kuni t6 {vu
the eight
'),
isles
Kamin6
as they constitute the land first produced. yotte
P
4Ft
KJ
'
ktiddrind
ite
substan-
Avadzino gima
ndrttni yortte lines
Oo Ya-
beginning
Great land of eight isles,"
Fiydku-koTcUw6 uyuru kototco y6ki-tu
mono wo tsukuru mono wo Nou-nin
(y6kusu) in cultivating the hundred (-
>
ttt
T
mentioned in the preceding
with Avadzi and ending with Sado are called the
I B9 ^*
governs, in
it
tive
--
-
foundation on.., because
its
by the causal proposition, which suffix ni.
341
ivu
to
all)
a
)
with respect to his ability
,
kinds of grain, the producer
is
called
Nou-nin (husbandman).
Compounds with
..ni ydtte,
as illative conjunctions placed at the beginning
of a proposition:
Koreniy6tte, Sore ni ydtte, therefore, Lat. Slkarii ni y6tte , or Saruniy6tte,
as
it
is
igitur.
so,
such reasons, therefore,
for
consequently.
Remark.
..ni ydtte is, in the official style, superseded
of relation Aida, = between, while
= respecting both words b.
(
63. B. 3).
must
At
have causal
(
62 n. 14), and Tsuki, Tsukito, Tsuite, have come under our notice, in which
least, places force.
by the words expressive
Compare page 320,
line 14.
Conjunctions of adverbial propositions, which indicate a future, possible
cause (Conditional conjunctions).
We
may
not pass them over in silence, because they are suggested by others
although they do not really local,
and thus
if,
exist.
We
have alone to do with a time-defining
with a view to the spoken language, we confine ourselves to
Nari, to be, with the form Naran-tokini
- when
simply Naru-tokini,
is,
Naraba, ANara,=
if it
a verb in the substantive form. it
is
takes
1)
3)
so,
then I
Nara
is
shall
I.
shall be, for
it
used, or, instead of
buy
it.
shall be;
it,
which also
with the suppoaitiTe
4
p.
Shopping Dialogues
,
p.
r.
4.
it
is
preceded by a substantive or by
J tSa-yoo ward, or Sort nara, kai-maloo ),
If the speaker intends to say: as it
for a contraction of Nareba.
Ko-si kei-dzu.
= when,
76, thus, to stick to JVart, with
form explained in ,46.
it
,
)
/try mayenivxi
Kanra-yM.
IV.
4
r
is
if
so, then he
CHAPTER
342 1
warn, firugoni"
I can't
them
same
at (?*) the
If
price.
If the
it
3
mere
),
cheap, I will take
is
l^Nokordzu
price.
Yasui nara, tori-masoo"
nasare.
In the afternoon then."
come before noon.
2
kai nasdru nara, ondzi nedande age-masoo
,Nokordzu I will sell
).
129.
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
= Buy
all
)
in addition to Naraba, use
^
^ Man-itsi
nedande
kai-
insisted on, then,
is
of the adverb:
one against a thousand.
,
will take all,
the pieces at one and the same
Mdsikiiva, or simply Mosiva, Mosi, = in case of, ~7j
you
it.".
made
is
if
fei-kin
or probability of the statement
possibility
,
^
if.
$R
Its place is at the
^*. =
beginning
or
,
even after the subject of a subordinate proposition, whereas the predicate verb of that statement, if is
not attributively connected with toki (as Naru-toki),
it is
put in the suppositive form (Naraba) or occurs as the gerund. Mosi stkdru in case
t?a,
ritej
it is
in case
va (see this
^^fflSjfrrti Mosi
page 109
n.
only
71),
If this
compound.
an abbreviation of
mo
is
mo
timdi,
Mosi
stkd-
is
=
..ish,
..like, isolated
by
remains as the nucleus of
ma
( |j|f "*)
=
,
actually
ex-
,
equivalent to the Latin veri-similiter ; if
it
= thought, then M6si-kuvd means probably, likely,
Mosi
of the goods refuses such.
or cat?
Inukat mosikuva
ta no kdku-zin so-seino
Oranda-zin mo dou-yau ni siyo-seraru Msi
,
so;
nekoka*?
a dog?
Ni-nusi mosi korewo inamu tokiva*), in case the owner
or perhaps a cat?
va
of Mo-siktivd,
a variation of the
Inuka nekoka? dog?
peut-etre.
might be
it
evidently the adverbial form of Siki,
is
plained at page 130, M6-s%kuvd is
sikdrabd, if
so.
is
it
As Sikuva
so;
toki
5 )
,
if
takawo gen-suxu toki
amount of the import
the
duty be lowered for another nation, the Dutchmen shall be placed on a like
Mosi
footing.
tsi-sesimu bdsi
gi-deu-(deo)si gdtaki tokiwa, sono zi-genwo
6 )
,
if
such
may
be
difficult to
determine
,
brought to the knowledge of the government and (by
...
sei-funi mesite styo-
this it)
question shall be
be
gata minato, mosi sono minatowo aki-gataki koto arava (read ar aba), kata nite betsuni fitdtsuno minato narabini mttrawo
gata
town
... aku-be'si 7 ),
Nii-
settled.
Nippon
nisi no
the port of Nii-
in case a difficulty might arise about opening this port, a harbor and shall
be opened elsewhere on the West-side of Nippon.
1) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
2) Ibid., p. 36.
17.
4) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. III. al. 3. 7) French-Jap. Treaty. III.
al.
5)
5.
Ibid. III. al. 7.
Mosi siyau-zen
3) Ibid. p. 37. 6) Ibid. II.
al.
9.
CHAPTER
san kin i-ziyauwo motd-watarabd
than three pounds (of opium).
2
there
if
),
),
130.
Mosi yo-gi naki
might be some
343
in case a merchant vessel might import si-sai arlte,
sumazu domo, deu-ydkuno omJm&kiva kono
siyo tori-kayesi
6&i
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
kono Id-gen
more
t*iu
fon-
ki-gen yori tori-okondvu-
matter, which cannot be avoided, the
trifling
spirit of the Treaty shall be acted upon, even
if
the ratification of the document
(containing the Treaty) within the fixed term shall not have taken place.
IV. Conjunctions of the purpose.
130. 47. of,
it is
ga, as .
.
Jj5 =
of Tam4,
,
purpose, aim, end,
properly a word expressive of relation (see page 292
is
when
.
Tam6ni,
used as a conjunction
suffix
of the genitive, before 3
siyo-riki-su best
Uru tamni,
the verb in
,
for
)
,
its
n.
on behalf
for,
24), and has,
substantive form with or without
Ki-sdkH wo siyun-riu-sesimuruga tamtni
it.
in order to have the rules followed , aid will be given. Tsutsi suna yeni
sale.
-
fukaranu tam, kazdtco Krptw Wri,
take care to shelter the place from wind, to the end that earth and sand be not
blown on the food
(of the silkworms).
The verb dependent on Tamdni termination r/,
nitive
when
the attainment of the object
Kono
belonging to the future. this clause, there shall etc.
put in the future with or without the ge-
is
is
rectify
not alone to see
Kagamiva
if
still
sttgdtano yori-asiwo mtruroo, kokorono
the countenance
and reform the wrong and the right
48. Tote, the syncopated t6
considered as
okitewo katdkusen tameni, in order to carry out
ktyoku-tsiy6kuwo taddsi aratameng* tamd nart, object
is
tite,
= with regard is
(i. e.
to the mirror, its
beautiful or ugly, but also to
the moral nature) of the heart.
of to, = to, and
the gerund of *), u, urn,
attrf,
to do.
Preceded by a verb in the future the object, which
Motomen
to
su
Motomen
to
te,
to
fou
came
1)
is
-
still
..ttsu means
,
belongs to the future. (Compare
thus = acguisitunu
est,
being about to get,
i.
e.
he
is
Neth
Japan
to search for a
-Jap. Treaty.
III. al.
5.
103,
about to get;
6.
7.
page 290).
Motomen
for the purpose of getting.
mono fu-zino gKsuriwo motomentote Nippon vf to
to be active to carry out
traf
to tttt
~ Siu-^/u
a certain Siu-fu
remedy against death.
)
TWd XT. at
.
or
3) ""d. VIII.
al
f.
344
CHAPTER
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
131.
the
The spoken language supersedes Motomen by Motomeo expressions: Motomeo to sum tokoroni, on the point of
sum mono, some one who may
is
(see
page 209), thence
acquiring; Motomeo to
on the point of acquiring; Motomeo
to te,
that he
also, properly an adverbial postposition (see
122),
acquire.
V. Concessive conjunctions. 131. 49. .
when
Mo, ^J;*, =
it is
put after the predicate verb of a subordinate causal proposition, it characterizes it, as one granting that something is real or possible, whilst the state-
ment thus conceded it
limited or revoked by a proposition immediately following
is
(adversative proposition).
noticed in
as
it
has been already
put in the substantive form with the local termination
is
74,
The verb dependent on mo,
m
or
also in the gerund.
A
Akuruni mo,
Miruni mo,
Yukuni mo.
Aketemo,
Mite wo,
YuTdte
Ika-yquni ndsitemd, however
nasaretemo, kono uytwa deki-mastnu further.
*)
I don't care; take it or leave
50.
..tomo,
Yuku-tomo.
matter from which side he . .
Opposed a fusion
may
dom6, K-t = ndom6, ,
to
J
Akeba
,
>r rt ,
of Akenitomo,
from
contr.
ni, Local,
is
j?*.
Stopping Dialog
2
)
it
,
does not
is
is
and
tornd.
Akedomo
Comp. page 207.
7?
K*,
by
to.
it is
likewise
Aredomd, = though there it is
called, though..,
is.
not so,
with a pre-
See page 208.
T6mut6 Wd8m6, mddz%sikiwo wdsururu
koto nakare!
jj
^-1.^
^^C
J
1)
^IKp
T
|>
^ r
ffi&X
,
substantive form. Akuru-
not, and Saranedomo, = though
though
^Cfr
its
come.
vious appositive definition characterized
^
or not; I cannot go
Idzurdno kdtaydri mairu-tom 6
come Arademo and Sarademo. Compare 258. 52. ..ied6m6, = though it is said,
X TTV
it
yame
it.
and opposed to Arebd there
Yutte) mo. koi nasaretemo,
you may buy
the fusion of Akeniva,
From Aranedomo, = though
t
A
also, with a verb preceding in
FE,
tomo, Miru-tomo,
51.
be made. --
it
(A
Tdttositd
Udom6, iydsikiwo wdsururu
koto nakare.
t Though you are rich, do not forget the poor! f * Though you are honorable, do not | ^^f forget low people!
,
p.
.
39.
2 ) French-Jap. Treaty. III.
13
CHAPTER en
f -J&ir
Jg|^
VIII.
-^^ uno ,
CONJUNCTIONS.
ko-ganew6 t*umfit6
though gold
^
131.
not
i8
is
345
Wom6,
heaped up to the amount of a thousand
^^
**' t0 *idom Ai
one
to
^'8
-
"tody-
-*
this also be granted, it
5 53.
Sikaredomo,
#,
so, root
>),
though
not certainly happen that...
syncopated Saredomo, =
form of Sttar)., u, = to be
cessive
may
kotowom6
..
.-kotova bxsttt nazdr* btoi
(see
thongh
it is
page 109
no.
8O , the con71).
Soredemo, = also then, the modal of Sore, = such, followed by antithesis of the conclusive Soredewa (see page 334 n o. 54.
,/u>,
]?).
55.
Sikam6,
56.
Somo-somo, ^jj
= but; abbreviation of SikarMomo.
FWno gen-*# rfi}|, naru, slkamd kortni tagaute, twu-sezdrasimlt*), to oppose men, although they are accomplished and wise, and not allow their advancement. as concessive
^
),
,
= or
,
explained by the Japanese themselves
concedes the antecedent statement, however introduces an adver-
*),
sative clause. It
means properly
of StkdkUmo (just as SoAte of
so as so as,"
SIMM
no.
Some Japanese
13).
sore mo, others of
a fusion of
page 334
*ltt, see
the adversative force of Taddsi (see page 335
is
no.
SUamo, and
no. 18)
this
and stands with
22) or of Sikd*i (see page 333
etymologists think Somo-somo an abbreviation of Sor*,no
Satemo satemo, which, so far as the meaning goes, approaches
our derivation.
In the beginning of a speech as
it
serves to
an opposition of other opinions. In
ductory word
(f|
fZf/ ^?,
nearly to an expression like:
^
g^ x
-tui
-
,
^
^^
^
this quality
and English 5)
a
y>^,
However
The
it
^a?
6
),
we
assigu
6)
T.U.I- u u
I
$
10.
be"
may
to be said,
stamped as an introwill
approach most
5 ).
does he strive for it? or does one give
commencing
particle at
4) to
Somo-umo
does
not agree
with
it
(atooru) to
him?
O^hi. X. U.
2) /)
Dictionary. sense
is
is
Korewo motomurukaf Somo-somo korewo atavuru
particle denoting or, either: also a
Yaponsko-Eusskii Slowar.
it
Fat-gono kotoba), and
1) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. II. al. 6.
3)
announce that which
lj
^
moreover."
3S. ^ /
that attributed
to
MKDRUMT
*& it
in
,
ooKHKiwrncN
CHAPTER
346
j?
\
...
X
^
E&t
nil ir
^ *^
^
'
*^
"i/^v^
.
3.
Yv ^
13 #
3.%
;ftjj^
(fct
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
/Sfc'-ro
131, 132.
kiyoo wo tovu. Si no no-tamavaku,
^a ^ foku-fauno ktyoo ka? somo
7
^a?
1
),
ktyoo
somo nandziga
kiyoo
Tsze-lu asked about energy.
Do you mean
The Master
said,
the energy of the South? the energy
^r/
5*R^
Hffiv
of the North? or your -3P-^ x^
\7_j
Nan-foon6
own energy?
>**\
Mamayo,
57.
in case 2
core que, quoique" it
word,
for in
)
occurs with the
it
meaning
attributed to it of * en-
Japanese writtings I have never yet met with
must, to have a concessive force, be reduced to the form of
page 337 n. 31) modified for the sake of euphony, and thus mean
(see
Ma-ma mo however
often," being equivalent to Toki-tokimo or Tabi-tabimo. The expression: ever often he tries
he does not succeed in
it,
it,"
this
How-
would thus be equivalent
to
Kokoro-miru mamayo deki-masdnn.
Remark. The
suffix
mo
gives to all the conjunctions definitive of place and
time, or properly words expressive of relation, cited in i.
characterizes the antecedent proposition
e. it
,
127, a concessive force,
which the word expressive of
rela-
tion governs, as concessive, while the subsequent proposition comes out with an
adversative force
3 ).
The 132. 58. Musiro,
verb
,
it
relative comparative of propositions.
^*x, =
in preference, rather, Lat. potius, as an ad-
put at the beginning of a subsequent proposition , to the contents of
is
which preference
is
given above that expressed in the antecedent proposition. As
starting point of the comparison the antecedent statement
Next in
to
Yuku yoriva yukdnuga mdsu, -
Remark,
p.
131,
is
Yuku
(or
it is
is
characterized by yoriva.
better not to go than to go," cited
Yukan, Future) yoriva musiro yukunayo!
rather
do not go, than go! Whereas the state or action, to which the preference given
may
be represented as one commanded or future, the state or action of
the antecedent proposition
may
be a present, or likewise a future one, as appears
from the following saying of Kung-tsze (Lun-yu, Cap.
we
give three Japanese translations, which
1)
is
Tschung-ynng , X.
3) According to
lie
1,2.
OOSCHKEWITSCH Yap. -Ross, slowar, Mamayo
Ill, Pa-yi,
4), of
before us.
2) RODRIGUEZ signifies
$
83.
Wprotschem
(besides).
which
CHAPTER
2
l
I.
3
II.
2
i
As
3
CONJUNCTIONS.
VIII.
132.
to festive ceremonies, be rather sparing than
extravagant; as to mourning, be rather grieved
!
than pay attention to observances."
I
In the translation
*
7
As
A
if
^
X
7
and 2 the subsequent pro-
in the Future, whereas in 1 the antecedent pro-
conceived as Present, in 2 and 3 as
is
position
jd\
1
taken as Imperative, in 3 as a wish,
is
position ;*",
347
Future.
In Mr.
*
\ Chinese
r
^
iv
LBOOE'S
j.
text this
m nines,
it
in
vagant;
is
excellent version
of the
passage runs: >In festive ce-
better to be sparing than extra-
the
ceremonies
of mourning,
it
is
better that there be deep sorrow than a minute attention to observances."
Remark.
= in case
Japanese etymologists see in
1.
explanation that does not preposses us in
its
(i.,
a variation of Mori
129 n. 46), and explain ro as an
see
of,
3/uat'ro
favor.
auxiliary word"
an
1
);
Should not AAtriro much
rather be equivalent to the syncopated form of Masu-siro (^j^-/ ^teaO, and thus
mean >more price"
higher value"
or
With regard
Used as an adverb, a word with
to the so called auxiliary
teaches us, that in the eastern Japan
nese Dictionaries the signification of
do so or so (see
).
more than any other, would be equivalent
this signification, at least
preference."
2
is
105),
Sou-si-tai
and Kau-ri-tai,
given to Musiro and y
e.
to desire to
is
introduced by Afutiro. ,
willingly, rather; and makes use of other expedients
Si-sen yoriwa naka-nakani nokoraau snte-oken^ I will rather give
too.
than
i.
In Japa-
tro.
The spoken language supersedes Musiro with Naka-nakan\ = almost,
2.
and Nenyoroni, =
rather,
Watahmwa
die.
I think, that it
is
yuku yori yulri-masdnu fooga yororii
to
it"
4
);
literally:
think, that
it
is
up
all,
*on-n'-w4*i
better not to go, than go. I would rather not go.
nidti to om6i~natare! Suffer gai-suru yoriwa fitdni gai-seraruruga
than do
>by
Wa-gun SiWn
(nt'ng, willingly); it is plain
that the writer aims at the optative proposition, which
Remark
ro, the
supersedes the termination
it
A
word
to our
'),
Fttowo
wrong rather
better to be injured by others, than
to injure others!
1)
Wa-gun
3) R.
Sitcori,
BROWN,
Coll.
under Afmiro. Jap.
N.
419.
ft)
Compare Naiya
4) Ibid.
NT
873.
tiro,
worth nothing,
f
109.
I.
I.
CHAPTER
348
ALPHABETICA
Aida ... No.
32.
Anzuruni
.
23.
....
7.
Aruiva
Baso
.
.
24.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
132.
.A.
I.
3D ID IE 3ST ID
SIGNS IN JAPANESE BOOKS. [Page 11]. ON ARBITBARY GRAMMATICAL
VoL
WA-ILAN SAN-ZAI DZU-E, (After the Japanese Encyclopedia
A
a period single complete sentence,
and sentences, which we are used chin.
is
called
to separate with
^J
? ,
15.
17 reno).
Ku,
chin.
commas
are called
Riu\ clauses
gj
Tou,
,
Teu.
The
which
sign,
like
our
full-stop.,
the close of a period
indicates
ia
the
'
.
the right of the last character, placed at the side, to
or
The same sign placed between two
characters, but
more or
fa less to the right
the place of our of the supposed diameter of the writing-column , supplies
A
*
the
to
point
the attention on
character right of a
(
-&
-) is
used to
comma. fa
mark
it,
to fix
a word This mark corresponds to our underlining of
it.
-
the spacing in print.
In Japanese school-books a tube-shaped mark at the side of, or
(&% mes
^ (
5|
I*,
and a pin-shaped
are used |
the Ku,l,i-yu-l.;ti between the Chinese characters. The former, on the left of Yearred stroke is )
or tube-shaped
Dai-hei),
as a coupling-sign latter, the
placed
on the right of the names of functionaries
(
^
)
and
f|
ttU
jzp The
j]
between the characters of the
names of books.
red stroke, appears on the left Bari-siyu-Uki or pin-shaped
ADDENDA.
350
of the names of things, on the right of those of places and as a coupling-
between names
sign
of persons of antiquity.
To couple Chinese If
coupling-sign.
these
characters,
the
characters
are
Chinese sign to
or
)\\
inserted as a
Chinese
place on the right of the cha-
its
^|
(Sen-tsiuni).
)\\
)\\
(Kan-won).
the contrary, if the translation (Yomi) of these characters
given, the coupling-sign
it is
is
between them, but somewhat to the right of the diameter of
the writing-column.
On
(Kukn)
be read according to the
pronunciation (Koyd), the coupling-sign has racters, or even
|
is
is
required
then placed to the left of the characters, or
if
inserted between them, to the left of the diameter of the writing-column.
If,
(Kava-nakani).
)\\
)\\
)\\
$
iff
$3
qfy
(Mono-gatari).
!
with such combinations transposition-signs (Kaydri-ten) are used besides,
they unite with the coupling-stroke
(-)
whether
the
diameter
the
coupling-stroke
of the
is
to
writing-column
to be translated into Japanese, of
is
=j
=\
see page 32, 33).
The
distinction
right or to the left of the supposed
the reader of a Chinese text that
for
much importance,
as it
makes known
to
is
him,
where he has to use the Koyd, and where the Japanese word (Yomi). There are books for the use of schools, in which
this difference is carefully
attended to, whereas in other works not a single coupling-sign
The
difference
the
to be found.
between the coupling-sign placed on the right, or on the
the supposed diameter has not been, to of
is
Japanese
language, nor was
my
it
left,
of
knowledge, noticed by any student
discovered by myself
till
late
Grand Study"
(1871).
(^
When,
in 1864, I published the Chinese text of the
Td-hiti)
with an interlinear Japanese translation, I was unacquainted with
&jk, it
and the coupling-signs have not always been placed in accordance with the rule here treated.
Whoever
could suppose, that a mark, apparently so insignificant,
should have an underpart to play of so
much
importance.
ON QUOTATION. The quotation in Japanese writing above the words quoted.
If the
is
indicated
by a rectangular hook placed
writer inserts the quotation in
the
midst
ADDENDA. of what he
is
351
relating, he closes the quotation with to (See
used instead of
. .
= says
to ivu,
that.
74 pag. 208.)
(Compare
tence closes with a quotation, then to
is
V) which
7,
is
If the sen-
omitted.
o ^J \
**-
L.
^
y
^ ^
Ima
waravi
i'mz
saran
now go away"
I will
to
>
K
t
C
^
71
hossu" to, tatgi-wakarekeri , the gentleman laughed:
(said he)
went away.
arose and
,
[Page 21 line 12.] ON ACCENT.
II.
The accent
in Japanese words
upon the accented on the
first;
made by a
is
syllable; as a general rule, in
slight elevation of the tone
words of two
syllables
it falls
in words of three syllables on the penult; in words of four syl-
on the anti-penult.
lables
*
*>
>
But the accent always
falls
upon the
syllable that
has a double or prolonged vowel sound; as Ikd (Ikoo), Yosatd, li-katem, /i-fou-
Yn-mesi (Yuu-mesi).
keru,
Hdna, a
thus nose,
falls
it
In words of two and
has the accent on the
flower,
upon the
last.
panese-English dictionary, 1872. Additional remark. is
Ihetdka;
three the
it
accent
f.
falls
i.
falls
it
upon the
an #, then
it
first,
if
falls
j.
on the
is c.
final
HEPBURN, Ja-
falls
on the penult,
on the anti-penult, Musdtftne.
on the penult,
the last syllable
not pointed out, but in this case the dodri the accent falls
and in Hand, the
XV.
p.
if it
K6tabi, TdtsttgH, Ydsuri, Ydbtiri.
on the
first."
In polysyllabic words the accent
syllables the accent falls
first,
first syllable;
Has{, a bridge, the accent
In
and in Hdsi, chop-sticks,
syllable,
like syllables, the accent varies;
first
is
In words of
belong, bnt being short on
In words of two syllables the
not long.
If both are long,
and principal rule
is
admitted.
it is
In
on the penult.
III.
[Page 30, 31.] ON CHINESE DIALECTS.
The
three dialects, those of
Hdn,
U and
Tang, mentioned and
elucidated at
ADDENDA.
352
30 and 31, are, according to a statement, since come to our knowledge,
pp.
from a Japanese
scholar
the
province
the
Official language
Che-keang
A
Mandarin.
or the
rare, the
As
more
the dialect of
1
),
that of Fnh-chow
,
(
^
(^
Hang-chow ( jfig
jty
)
,
Capital of Ffth-keen also called
Kwan-yin), by others,
-jlj',
Capital of
$\)i
correct instruction in the Official language
,
and
Kwan-hwa, is
extremely
so, as both the other dialects are generally in use.
this statement furnishes a satisfactory
answer to the question concerning
we
the presumed historical value of the Chinese dialects extant in Japan,
con-
sider ourselves required to quote the original expressions of this statement also. .
T
"l
ffl
r *
'J
*H
*
ma
;
1
-4r
K
t
IV. [Page 107, 3
The is
a.]
-si
predicative
REMARK ON
of the
also attributive used in
-si.
in
adjectives
compounds,
-ki,
if their root is
the quality expressed by
if
monosyllabic,
them
is
to be
considered as from the beginning in the object existent.
Ne-nalsi-kusa
whereas
same
,
is
a herb which the speaker finds, and declares to be rootless,
Ne-nasi-kusa
distinction
is
is
a herb which
to be observed in
is
generally stamped rootless.
compounds,
as:
Na-nasi-yubi, the nameless finger, the ring-finger. less
word
1)
child, ,
viz.
the child
who
a false rumour. Tosi-fito
l/y jjji ylyl
1804; reprinted
in
Jg>
Si-iei
<
( ^i|)
kai-kwan,
1858. Preface, p.
I
blindman's
plays
verso.
=
f"t
a
)
,
round
The
buff.
Me-nasi-tsigo
Ne-nasi-goto ,
as a personal
,
the eye-
a rootless
name.
to elucidate the four tones,
by Kav-mon Sen-set,
ADDENDA. V. [Page 250, a
substantive
92. 1 after line 10.] Remark. If zar)i, u,
in the Local, or by an
affirmative verb,
and
Fdnani
stands
zarikeri
adverb
is
preceded by
in hi, it stands as a substantive
a fusion of the emphatic particle zo and ar)t, u. Thus
is
Sdmukuzo
zarikeri, for
353
Fdnani zo
for
arikeri,
=
arikeri,
cold has
it
- a
flower has
been; SdmUku
it
been.
VI. [Page 270.] REMABK ON ..to kaya.
To
the term to nan,
by which no
it
own
Ari-si
may
is
may
it
(can
is
as
or not,
it)
viz.,
Motsiwo
well think about wine.
it
torite
that he took this cakes and has eaten them.
siyau-Cy^t)
Hawks
seri to kaya.
since the period of the Five
for
writer,
has
who mentions
who made the
it
may have
may
be that
In grasping a wine cup, one kuvi-keru to kaya. It
may
be,
Takava Morokosi Go Teino tokiyori
hunting have been presented, as
it
seems,
Emperors of China.
Ogami-tamavite utsusi-tamavi-keru copied (the godly being
may happen,
to be traced in the interrogative particles
Saka-dzukiwo toreba, sake wo omovuto kaya.
may
it
designated, whereas the origin of kaya, the
exponent of a facultative utterance,
^)
substantive form before it
will happen. Also here to is used elliptically for ....
it
to ivu with which a quotation
ka ya ("Pf
its
kaya, Aran-to kaya,
to
be, that
pri-
introduced.
is
has a substantive, or a verb in
Aru-tokaya,
happened,
on the part of the speaker, but a mere
categorical certainty
vate opinion of his
To kaya
be that), approaches to kaya, an expression,
may
(it
same
to
his
kaya.
Adoring, as
it
appearance before him).
said, he
An
-
other
Uttun-tamavcri, he
says categorically,
fact,
may be
copied.
VII. [Page 276, 315, 320.] EEMAKK ON
In the epistolary Maus)i, u,
&.
It
*t?^
style Jf
-*vis
^7S^o
has the complement of
the verb in the root-form before
Bu-sa-ta silence, I
(% T
Masi
ty*
pron.
what
by the old form MaosH, u,
Moon, which
is
wrongly expressed by
a thing consist*, and
this
being a verb,
it.
= Silence has been, jft*) watMtta,
via. I
preserved
have been slack (or negligent) in writing and visiting = Su-ao-ta Udri
H
ADDENDA. mdsita.
tanomi mausi masu
Deki-masu to
an end
may
(
pj
),
=
there
is
a request to
DeJci-mausi soro
,
it
shall
(it will be finished, or be ready).
You =
tanomi masi-masu.
,
happen
,
it
goes
,
it
is
Masi-besi, - Maosi-beku
hanasi mausi-mastta fitowo mi-masti, I see the
be.
spoke, =
^
,
man
of
coming soro,
whom you
hanasi mausi soro fttowo mi-masi soro.
IR,
Page 157
line 8
fr.
Page 158
line 7
fr.
bottom. For:
^
\
T
|
ifc
A
Read:
bottom. For: 1873 Read: 1875.
\
I
it
A^
ALPHABETICAL INDEX OF JAPANESE WORDS, TREATED ON IN THIS GRAMMAR.
'-
-aran, adv. of place
A,
79.
-aba, (-eba, -iba), verb, terminations
215.
A6)i, iru, verb
268.
Ada, pronoun
=
Adzuma,
Aga
for
Aga-tsuma
Waga
.................. ...............
riphr. future
=
Aranan,
termination of the pe-
verb,
-arame,
Annan
aranan, neg. verb, termination
84.
Aranu (-niaranu
88.
Arasar)e, torn, Araterar)e,
for
naran)
25S.
295.
An ........ 214. Ara:)i, u, neg. verb ................ Arazu (-niarasu for narasu) ......... Are, Arera, pronouns ......... 85. 80. Ar)e, *, em, passive verb ........... verb .......... 114 125. IBS. Ar)i,
296.
art, (-iri, -vri, -Nn), contiu. verbal trrniinatiou-
Agaraserar)e , uru, verb of courtesy
324.
Arnu, Aroo, future of
Agar)i, u, verb of courtesy
324.
Ag)e, uru, verb of courtesy
321.
Ago,
83.
Aga-kimi
83.
Aga-ko
Ah)e, Av)e, uru, Aete, Ahete, verb
Ahezu, Ahenu, neg.
verb.,
=
Aida, word express, of relation
Fatasazu .
.
.
....
178.
Akeno ton, adverb
180.
=
-a-siku, -va, adv. term, of
verbs
Akuru
fi, adverb
Anata,
Ano-kata,, pronoun
Ano, pronoun.
Amur*
136. 140. 174.
ni, conjunction
Aru-fif6,
......
97.
an,
209. 88. 108.
................ ..................
179. 180.
(-en, -iti, -on, -tui), causative vrrb. ter-
minations
anki,
....................
-oiiti,
verb,
terrain,
pas*,
235.
forming adjetivi. 121.
of oourtoy of Jnttui
.
AuM ...... .................. Atdko, pronoun At6k6*i, adverb ........ Atabat)i, M, the caus. form of
.
.
818. 818. 81. 178.
180.
88. 104.
886.
.......
tokini, adverb
AtobaMr)e, uru,
213. 275.
=
200.
181.
Asatte, adverb
-an-masi, form of the periphrastic
an, verb, termination of the future
103.
202.
.
Aru
180.
future
202.
pronoun .............. 9.
180.
178.
=
Ari-teim, adverb
299.
Amatuiku, adverb
amasi,
,
Arnica, conjunction
Akuru ton, abverb
Amari, adv. of degree
,
125.
189. 337. 341.
Ai-tai, adverb
-a-ku, -akuva,
Inuerart),
of courtesy of
-arasi (-an),
=
.......... 27L
/(=
SIS.
pass,
324.
=
880.
213. 258.
A ran ........... derivative termination .......
83.
Agarasar)e, uru, verb of courtesy
Agimi, Agi,
......
212.
Art, adverb
180.
INDEX.
356
Page.
Page.
Asu-made,
180.
Dani, adverb
Asuta,
180.
Dano, Tano, Dono, Tono,
295.
Tare, interr.
Atavaz)i,
negat. vert
,
Ata)vi, u ==. ate
Ateni
-+- av)i, v, verb.
.
.
215. 295.
.
for dzutsu
Dare,
176. interr.
85.
jron
88.
pron
102.
Dare-mo, pronoun
=.
88.
146.
Dazo,
Ato, ordinal numeral
143.
-de, (-nite), (-nde), suffix of relation. 61. 70. 173. 185.
Ato, Atoni, word express, of relation
187.
Atsi, pron. of place
82.
Atsira, adverb
Am, A
Ai, Ai-tagai-ni, expression of reciprocity
=
Avida
178.
Aida, word
expr. of relation
....
Ayamatte, adverb -dye, -oye, verb, terrain, indicating the passive.
.
95.
Darezo,
interr.
-de, -te, verb, termin. indie,
Do, To,
wa,
-la, va,
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79. 97.
176.
Doko,
241.
Dokoni, Dokoni mo, Doko ye, Doko yon, adverbs, 177.
60.
numerals
suffix to
Bakdri, adverb numerals
suffix to
San,
Sara, plural
interr.
=.
-baya,
80.
Be)Kt,
Ben,
M,
=
=m
si
Kata, word
Bo
142.
Dono-kurai ooki, adverb
.
(5)
feasts
176.
Dotsira, adverb
151.
Do-tsutsi, interr. pron
158.
Doude
53. 7.
Bu,
a space of time
42.
Dai,
na (nda), verb.
u,
genit. part.
term,
.
.
97. 67.
of the past
for
Dai, Nai,
=
Dare
(tare)ga, interr. pron. 82.
numbers Utsi,
word
88.
142. express,
of relation 188.
Dai-icsi ni va, adverb
177.
Dai-ninivd, adverb
177.
-daka, for de dru-kd
Dan, Tan, Dan-dan
Chin, numerative (10)
ni, adverb
85.
Dou-)si, site, sita, interr. pron
=
-dla,
220.
tari
67.
-dzu, -teu, gen. particle suffix to
-dzu, -tsu,
-e,
-e,
numerals
145. 232.
em,
u,
uru;
-y)e,
u,
uru,
era,
verb,
240. 241.
88.
152. 174.
he, ve, ye, dative
numerals.
.
144.
and tenninative parti-
cle -e,
220.
prefix of
82.
101.
pron
-e, he, ve, ye, suffix of multiplying
tense
Daga, toga,
interr.
,
termin. passive form
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79.
for
178.
E.
D. am,
(Ikade)
82.
pron
167.
of length
-tar)i,
interr.
163.
Bun-siyau, epistolary style
de
interr.
Dore,
Dotsi,
147.
-fa,
85.
pron
182.
190.
1 percent
=
interr.
Doozo, adverb
174.
.
129.
-da,
Doo,
174.
Dore fodo, adverb
.
negative prefix
-da,
A
Dono yau,
85.
pron
127. 215. 291.
Bu,
Da, Ta,
pron
88.
Bon-zi, the Brahmanical writing
Bun, measure
interr.
174.
and Fin, prefixes expr. of gender
Bun,
85.
Dono,
interr.
85.
177.
pron
Betsuni, adverb
Bi-gan, equinoctial
bo-don, adverb
Dore-dake, adverb
express, of relation
Bi, Chinese numerative
Don
57.
...
kdta, interr. pron.
291.
he
-\-
= Dono +
Donatd,
Donna,
336.
ube, time,
207. 344.
suffix
144.
-m(-n) -\-haya, suffixed to a future. 214.
Be, mule,
163.
pron
176.
58.
suffix
Ba-so, conjunction
202.
Doki, Toki, space of time
190.
isolating suifix
.
143. 144.
.
-domo, -tomo, conjunction
expr. of relation
.
.
266.
-do, do-me, suffix of iterative numerals.
-domo, -tomo, plural
Bai,
the gerund.
De-k)i, iru, verb
189.
B. Ba, noun forming
pron
61. 67. 185.
ei,
imperative form of verbs
199.
-eba, (-iba, -aba), verb, termin. conditional. 206. 215. -en, (an, in, on), verb term, future -er)i,
u, eba,
209.
verb, termin. praet. praesens
.
.
222.
-eru, (uru, iru), verb, termin. substantive form. 201. -eri,
=
-esi, (isi,
-esi,
ar)i,
u, continuative form
osi, usi, asi), causat.
etaru,
end, form
107.
form of verbs. 234. 235.
of the past tense
.
.
.
INDEX.
P
or in the dialect of Tedo
,
H.
,
Fu-i Page.
Jap. and Chin, numerative 149(6). 151(4).
Fa, Wa,
Fadz)i, uru, verb
857
t, adverb.
177.
Fuiii, Chin, numerative (20)
153.
Fun, a silverweight
1"0.
numerative (16)
266.
Ftiri, Jap.
151.
Furub)i, iru, uru, verb
181.
FitrH-koto; Yamdto-kotobd ,
Fai- (Hai-) ken, verh of courtesy
319.
FXru-koto-bumi ; Ko-si-ki, a Jap. book
88.
Fami, Jap. numerative
149.
FVru-kotono ban, a Jap. book
88.
.
,
Fai, Hai, Chin, numerative Fai, Hai,
Ha, Hei,
(7)
adverh
(4)
Fana-fdda, Hana-Mda, adverh
149.
267.
=
old Japanese
.
85.
134.
Fu-sinni, adverb
ls_>.
317.
Fu totum,
176.
Fasira, Jap. numerative (1)
148.
Futari, numeral
139.
Fatsu, Fazime-no
143.
Fit-torite,
adverb
181.
Fuu, Chin, numerative (25)
153.
Fanber)i, u, Famber)i, u, verb of courtesy
Faydku, Faydu, Fay60, adverb
.
.
174. 179.
Fei, Hei, Chin, numerative (12)
152.
Fei, Hei, adverb
181.
Fete, word express
,
of relation
adverb
Fuu-to-ki, a Jap. book
87.
G.
193.
Fi, neg. prefix
129.
-go,,
(nga, na), gen. particle
61.
Fi, adverb
181.
-ffa,
no index of the subject
84. 188.
F)i, iru, verb
266.
-go,
Fidari ni, adverb
178.
Ga-gen
Fiki, Hiki, Chin, numerative (3)
151. 53.
Ga-gen siyu ran, or Miydci-koto-alstimc , a Jap. book
3S.
149.
-gana -kasi , exclamation expressing the optative.
900.
Fin, So, prefixes express, of gender Fira, Jap. numerative (10) Fira-gdna-gaJci , Firo-gdna , a form of writing. 6.
Firuni, adverb
22.
-gara (kara) koso,
Fisa-bisa, adverb
179.
-yarii,
Fisdsii ato, adverb
179.
,
adverb
Fit-dziyoo, adverb
Fito, numeral
= ga
word
Si/a,
888. express, of relation
no kotobd,
G<--d:i
Fitotsu, numeral
133.
Gcki-tokit-suru,
Fitotsti ni, adverb
176.
Fit-zen, adverb
181.
Gen, Kan,
139.
Gen, Geni-geni, adverb
-fo, -ho, -vo,
Fodo, Fodo
ni, adv. of degree, conjunction 131. 339.
in
180. 148.
Imperative mood.
139.
numerals
....
Gc- (ziyoo, (tin, ge)
Fitori, numeral
suffix of
363. 59.
Gattira, conjunction
=
57.
184.
aru, addition to Chin, substan-
-\-
181.
Ge,
.
yori va
form adjectives
tives to
-gata, plural suffix
53. 137.
88.
.
=
179.
96.
Fito, (Aru-fito), pron. indef.
a Jap. book
-gara, plural suffix
180.
Fisdsikii
888.
(for tiagara), conjunction lea-si kdktt,
83.
transposition
of
.
.
.
199.
Ch incur words
reading
Oat-sat,
=
A\da, word expr. of relation
.
189.
1M.
Present tense
198.
month, notation of tune. 159.
Fodo-fodo, adverb
175.
Gttstt,
Fokd, word
188.
Qiao-gao-t)i,
Fokd-ni, adverb
178.
Go, honorary
Fokorofyi, uru, verb
267.
Go, Sat,
152.
Go,
190.
G6kH, a measure of capacity
267.
Goo, a measure of length
267.
Goo, a measure of capn>
Fotondo, adverb
175.
Goo, a weight
169.
Fotori, word
190.
Go-ra*-a)i, u, uru, verb of courtesy
819.
Fots, Hots, a silverweight
170.
Gotoni, conjunrtinn
887.
Fu,
128.
Gotti/)ki,
182.
Go-won, a Chin,
express, of relation
Fan, Hon, Chin, numerative Too, H6o
(9)
(for kata)
Forob)i, u, verb Fotob)i, iru, uru, verb
express, of relation
neg. prefix
Fu-do
site, adverb
Grata,
=
TtilJki,
uru
(-art),
verb of courtesy
prefix to Chinese
after
.
.
',
conjunction dialect
836. 75.
and before
Notti, word express, of relation
ku,
.
words
143. .
.
.
187. 189.
.
167. 168.
888. 80.
INDEX.
358
Page.
Gozdri, Gozari-mas)i , u for Ar)i,
Gu, pron. of the
1st
u
263. 74.
person
Guru-guru, adverb Gururito, adverb
Gwai,
178. 178.
.
=. Foka, word
express, of relation
.
188.
.
form of writing
Gyoo-sio, a
H
5.
Wi,
-si,
9.
verb. term, of the substan-
-uru),
(-erii,
form
tive
201.
Isasaka , adverb
181.
-isi, (-asi, -esi,
-usi), verb,
-osi,
termin. of the
form
235.
....
=
Itarite,
175. 178.
word
112.
Itatte,
/, Iru, auxiliary verb
264.
Ito, Ito-ito,
I, Iru, verb
268.
Itsi-ban. Itsino,
language
word
Itatte,
express, of relation
Itds)i, u, verb Itdsi-mdsi
forms of the spoken
adject,
172.
Is-soni, adverb
An, In,
106. 217. 260. 263.
56.
V
V
.
and
55.
Is-siu, Is-su-gin, a silver coin
verb, roots of the contin. verbs,
-Jd
-iru,
Issai-no, expression indicating the plural
Ori
4 for
...
Irovd, the Jap. alphabeth
causat.
See F. I.
I,
Iro-irono, expression indicating the plural
of the superlative
express,
word
.
195.
284. 318.
....
express, of the superlative
.
134.
134.
words express, of the superla-
tive
135.
(aba, eba), verb, termin
215. 206.
Ide, Idzuru, verb of courtesy
323.
Itsi-bunva, adverb
175.
249.
Itsi-dan, adverb of degree
130.
Itsi-dziyoo, adverb
181.
-iba,
-ide for -zite,
-ide
in the dialect of
form
an,
the
of
Miyako ....
spoken
for
language
250.
-zi-de-ari
Idzu, Itsu, interr. pron
97.
79.
Idzuku, Idzuko, Idzuko ni zo (Idzttkunzo), Idzuku ni kd (Idzukunkd)
81.
Idzukun zo, adverb
178. 89.
Idzure, Itsure, interr. pron -iedomo
(to),
=
to ivu
domo, conjunction,
suf-
208. 344.
fix
liya, liya-iiya, liye, adverb
182. 101. 102.
tta, Ikade, Ikaga, interr. pron
Ikan
for Ikani, interr.
pron
Ikani-mo, adverb
Ika-yau, Ika-sama,
interr.
Itsi-pu, Itsi bu-gin, a silver coin
162.
Itsu de mo, adverb
178.
Itsu
adverb
178.
Itsu mo', adverb
178.
Tea,
Itsuni, adverb
176.
Itsuniva, adverb
177.
Itsu zo, adverb
178.
lv)i,
u, I)i, u, Iimas)i, u, verb
Ya, Yo,
lyd, lyo,
131.
comparative
101.
lya-nagara mo, adverb
176.
130.
lydsiku mo, adverb
175.
101.
pron
319.
lya-iya, adverbs express, the
E.
266.
Ik)i, iru, verb
Ikka, ikkdno, numeral
53.
Ka, adverb
of place
79.
142. 150(2) 160.
Ikkoo, adverb
179.
Ka, Chin, numerative
Ikura, adverb
174.
Ka, Nitsi
(Zitsit)
161.
IkX-tari
139.
-ka, interr. suffix
89. 98. 202. 330.
Ima, Ma, noun, adverb
274. 178.
Imdda, adverb .Ima,
Ima
178.
made, adverb
Ima yon,
ni,
178. adverbs
178.
Ka,
=
Sita,
word
express, of relation
....
186.
-ka, in Nagasaki-dialect for Jd termin. of the attrib.
-ka,
106.
adject
term
of adjective
derivated
from nouns
...
74.
-in, (-an, -en, -on), verb, termin. of the future.
209.
-ka, improperly used for -ga
Inisiye, adverb
179.
Kab)i, iru, verb
267.
Ippai ni, Ippan ni, adverbs
175.
Kaherim)i, iru, verb
269.
I-raiva, adverb
179.
Kai, a Chinese numerative (14)
313.
Kai-sio, Sin-zi, Sei-zi, a form of writing
Imdsi,
qualifying pron. of the 2th person
Irar)e, uru, verb pass,
Irasar)e,
uru , Iraserar)e , uru, verb
(-ari,
pass,
of
Kak)e, uru;
313. 314.
courtesy -iri,
of courtesy
-ori,
-uri), contin. verbal termin.
.
116.
subst
217.
Kamdsiki, tives.
.
Kakan (Ome
=
ni),
61.
82.
152.
...
5.
verb of courtesy. 319.
Sikd-mdsi-siki , termin. of adjec.
124. 125.
INDEX.
= Aida, word
Kan,
-kan for ken, kemu,
.
express, of relation
.
.
.
suffix
189.
Keta, adverb
180.
225.
Ketnte, adverb
181.
Kana, Kana-monzi, Kana-gaki, Japanese writing-
Ki, honorary prefix
form
5.
Kanarazu, adverb
181.
Kanete, conjunction
329.
Kangam)i, iru, verb
269.
Kano, pronoun
84.
Kan-wx>n
80.
-Tcara
a Chin, dialect
,
suffix express,
,
of relation.
Karab)i, iru, verb
267.
.
=.
134.
yoriva
76.
-*i, termin. of adjectives -*', -ri, verbal t,
105. 110.
284
termin
in., verb
72.
53.
gender Kikat)e ,er*,ime, KHotim)e, MTU .
Kiionmafc
820.
Kare, pronoun
86.
Kitsid-M, Ktint*, adverb expreanng the
+
-ku
-kari for -keri in the spoken language of Yedo. 227.
h'iu/ii,
Kasanete, adverb
177.
Ko, noun A", Me,
200. 252.
=
-kasi,
-kasiki,
124.
termin. of adject
Kdnkoni, adverb Kasira
,
Jap. numerative (3)
=
Kdsoko
Kdsiko
Kata, word
express, of relation
Kata-kana, k k.-gaki,
k.
80.
:.
80.
148.
Kokdro-dfO-tara
92.
Kokn, space of time
168.
190.
KOHO, KoMO-kafa, pron
177.
Kou-nitti, adverb
84. 104.
180.
KOHO, for Koreao
Kono aida
87.
adverb
,
180.
174.
KOHO
Katani, Katawarard, adverb
178.
Kama hodo, adverb
Katsu, Katsv va, conjunction
829.
KOHO
176.
Kumnuff, adverb
176.
Ktmo tok6ro*i, adverb.
175.
KOHO yueni, conjunction
KdtsH-te, Katie, adverb
Kau-si,Kdo-si,
=
o
Kavd
for
85.
Ka-yau-ri
'.
M7.
Ko6)i, int, urn, verb
KdtakH, Katdv, Kdtoo, adverb
Kdtsii-mata, adverb
52.
Koban, a gold coin
178.
6.
Kdtsti-gdtsu, adverb
of gender
sufliies express,
Kokomi, adverb
k.-momi, a form of
writing
79.
l'78.
81.
Kata-gata, adverb
153.
Koto, pronoun
81.
Kdsikd
179.
adv. of place
Ko,
exclamation expressing the opta-
18L
Kiyatu, Kiak, Chin, numerative (15)
340.
tive
180.
mptrUtire. 1S5.
adverb
Kdru-gd yueni, for Sikdr&ga ytieni
-gana,
169.
Kitto, adverb
ar)i, u, terrain, of adjec-
107. 113. 262.
-kasi,
74.
.
180.
Kioo, adverb
=
to.
Ki/niu, adverb
30.
tives
,
verbs of courtesy
Kimi, pron. qualifying the person spoken Kin, a weight
Kara-koto, Chin, dialect
-kar)i, a,
2M. 27.
Ki and Mi, for Ko and Me, word* fxpra*. of
61. 71. 185. 334.
338. 340.
-kara (gara) koso,
559
adverb
fforo,
i-ffo,
adverb 176. .
.
.
.
.
178.
.
Kore, pronoun
<
o
88
Karevd, pron. demonstr
Kore kara, adverb
179
Kavari, word express, of relation
192.
K
Kaya
863.
Korv6)i, urn, verb
i67. 167.
(-/'o)
<>r<-
ni yottf
,
rnnjunrlioii
X2.
Kot
....
65.
Kofooa,
....
181.
Koto-f6tok*
,
885.
Koto-gttok*
,
119.
Knfitmi yoftmni, adverb
Ken, a measure of length
167.
Kotti, pronoun
-ken, kemtt, verbal termination
225.
Kitfjtira
Kaytri-ten, marks of going backwards Kdzti-kdzil-no
=
Ke,
,
expression of the plural
Sita, word
express, of relation
Kedari, conjunction -keki, -koki, (-ke, -ko), terrain, of adject.
Keo
,
.
ru,
.
180.
adverb
-ke)ri,
.
,
form of the past tcnie
.
.
222. 227.
,
a measure of length
Kova,
=
,
verb
adverb
*r,
69.
171.
.
...
for Korftra,
Koc)i, iru,
S41.
42.
rxprcttion of thr plum)
adverb
i
pronoun
verb
....
87.
INDEX.
360
=
Koye,
Page.
Won
4.
Ko-zi-ki, Furu-koto-bumi , a Jap. book
Ku,
a Chin, numerative (6)
29.
Mata, adverb and
36.
Mata
151.
106. 173.
-ku, adverbial termin.
Kudasar)e, uru, passiv. of Kudasi, verb of cour-
4.
itsuniva, adverb
30.
177.
Matsi, Mdtsuri, verbs of courtesy
316.
Mattaku, adverb Maus)i, u,
321. 322.
tesy
Kun, Toku, Yomi
conjunction. 133. 177. 328. 330.
175.
A Moos)i, u, verb of courtesy.
317. 320. 353.
Mavari, word expressive of relation
190.
Mavarini, adverb
178.
148.
Mave, Maye, word expressive of
.
.
.
Kuts)i, iru, uru, verb
266.
Mavi, Mai, Melodramatic and Epic poems.
.
.
Kuvd-si)ku, u, adverb
174.
Maye-kata, adverb
179.
Maye-ni, adverb
178.
Kutsi, a Jap. numerative
Kwa-ko, =.
Kwan,
(2)
Praeteritum
198. 220.
a Chin, numerative (19)
Kwan-me, a
silverweigth
-mazi,
170.
-mazi (A -mai), kini,
253. 274. 337.
Me,
149.
Me,
a Jap. numerative (12)
=
prefix
Mei, instead of
Mabarani, adverb
175.
Mei-
Mada, adverb
178.
Men,
express, of relation. 71. 192. 329. 338.
254. 144. 162.
= Monme
187.
Made, word
(A -mai
-mai tomo, -maziki
numbers
suffix of ordinal
130.
Me, noun
Ma, Man,
-mazikiivd, -mazikini
maini) -mai-toki,
Me
Ma,
38.
nari, negat. verbal terminations
Ma, = Ima, noun Ma,
187.
mai, neg. verbal termin. of the future. 253.
153.
M.
relation.
and Ko,
170.
....
suffixes^ express, of gender
Bd
=
(Eei-~)site,
instead of
52.
292.
(Sesi, Sekf)
Simete
240.
Meno
52.
Men, Chin, numerative (22)
153.
Madzu, adverb
179.
Meo, a^space
Mai, a
171.
Meppoo, adv. expressing the superlative
135.
Mai, a Chinese numerative (8)
152.
-meri, verb, termination
300.
Mai, conjunction
337.
Mi, honorary
187.
Mi, pronoun
silver coin
= Mave, Maye, word Mai = Mavi =
Mai,
-mai
express, of relation.
38.
-mazi
253.
Mairar)e, uru, Mairasar)e, uru, verbs of courtesy. 323.
Mi,
Mi
of time
75.
prefix
89. 91.
instead of
and
163.
Ma,
130.
prefix
TLi, instead of
Me
and
Ko
52.
268. 319.
M^i, iru, verb
Mair)i, u, verb
323.
Midzukara,
Makar)i, u, verb
324.
Migini, adverb
178.
Mak)i, u, verb
297.
Migiri, conjunction
337.
181.
Mi-mi, pron
182.
Mina, adverb
337.
Mi-rai,
346.
Mis)e, uru, verb of courtesy
adverb
Makotom,
Makotordsiku , "adverb
Mama, Mamani, Mamayo,
conjunction
conjunction
v-kdna, a form of writing yov-siu, a Jap. li,
Maru,
,
little
ring indicating a modification of sound.
Masdni, adverb Masi,
= Jww,!pron^indicating
ken to Mas)i, u, auxiliary verb
Future tense
6.
Mits)i, uru, verb
86. 9.
182. 212.
the person spo-
213. 274. 353.
.
.
.
.59. 174.
319. .
139.
266.
Miyavi-koto-atsame , or Ga-gen siyu-ran, a Jap.
book
38.
Miyoo-dsa, adverb
180.
Miyoo-tan, adverb Miyoo-getsti,
,
180.
adverb
180.
180.
Miyoo-nen, adverb
180.
Miyoo-nifsi, adverb
180.
180.
Masi, Masdri, Masdreri, verb
133.
Miyoo-nitsino dsa, adverb
Masi, inaccurate form for Mazi
254.
Miyoo-nitsino firu, adverb
Mdsu-mdsu, adverb expressing the comparative. 131.
.
198. 208.
Miyoo-go-nitsi, adverb 74.
92.
92.
Mitari, triad
140.
Tsin, pronouns
89.
pron
express, of the plural
6.
181.
= Amari
n,
Maro
book
adverb
reflective
Mi-yuki
s)i, uru, verb,
of courtesy
180.
325.
DK
X.
361
Pig*.
Mo,
instead of Ma, (page 130)
-mo, -mo -mo,
-mo-mata,
342.
suffix,
102. 133. 206. 254. 302. 327. 328. 344. 346.
Mo,
prefix
Mo-haya. Mo-hayau, adverb
Momo
Yorodzu), numeral
(Tsi,
Mon, Sen
(Zeni), a copper coin
Mono, pron.
indefinite
Mono-gatan,
historical narrative
-ma...
-mayo,
251. 801.
Nado, expressing the
179.
Nagare, a Jap. numerative (19)
171.
Nat, noun substantive
169.
Not,
=
96.
Naka, word
38.
Ndkabdva, adverb
179.
Naka-naka, adverb-.
175.
Nakani, adverb
215. 342.
=r
267.
Nakar)i,
Motsi-ron, adverb
181.
Na)ki, km,
189.
847.
Mtuiro, conjunction
175.
forbid-
neg.
=
verb,
,
A
ri,
Nakm
-f-
806.
ari
Nai, verb
Nakm
)e, torn,
Nm
250.
verbs,
806.
expression of the plural
Nami,
Mottomo, conjunction
331.
-nan (-zu to mam), negat verbal, termin
-ma, verbal tennin. of the future Mitte,
58.
-nan (-mi mam, -to mam)
291.
Nana-meni, adverb
178.
adverb
176.
-nanda, negat. verbal termin
252.
-aft,
Mukoo, word
Mukaini, adverb Mukaite, Mukavite, word express, of relation
.
Nami
w*
Nandoo
instead of
Nando,
interr.
178.
Nandote, Nami to te, instead of Nami to JUi,
195.
interr.
to
99.
99.
pron
99.
pron
Nand:i (Nammdn, Na-mot*i), pronoun
Mvkarite, Mukatte, Mukavte, MQkoote, word 195.
express, of relation
259. 269.
189.
express, of re-
lation
Nam,
.74.
interr.
Nani, Nam,
195.
Nami-fodo, adverb
Muku)i, yuru, verb
268.
Nani-gari, Namt-kmre, Nami-kon, interr.
Munariku, adverb
176.
Nani mar*, Nami mato,
Mtine, a Jap. numerative (2)
148.
-nanmeri, -mamtri
Muron, adverb
181.
Nanno,
Mtua-miisdto, M&idto, adverb
174.
Na* ton
Musiro, conjunction
346.
MWcdsiyori, adverb
Mukite, Mvite, word
express, of relation.
Mu-ydk&ni, adverb
.
.
.
176.
pronoun*.
etc.
=
42.
128. 301.
Na, Na,
a negative interr. suffix
Na,
instead of
Na,
variation of
Nd,
Naru,
terrain, of adjectiv.
No
instead of Ndril-ddke
.
.
100. 69,
Sam
nm
proa.
Namto,
to,
.
Now,
100.
interr.
99.
adverb expreat. the comparative.
Narabi, noun sobitantive 247.
a negative prefix
.
.
.
.
.
181.
215. 270. 841.
-naraba, conjunction
N.
Na, noun, (nomen)
.
pronoun
Nao,
101.
prooou. 100.
interr. proa.
instead of Nami-mo, interr. to,
98. 99.
.
174.
-nara for -marata and -mania.
negative element
expreae.
the person spoken to
179.
N,
SIS.
208.
MuK)ai, -am,
mkdri,
....
time
tibe,
MMdni,
808806.
127.
-naki, A-JKIJ, -makm, instead of
Naku-nar)i, m,
251.
auxiliary verb.
134.
perlative
188.
252.
Motri)i, iru, yuru, verb
su-
.
ding -nakari, -nakeri,
192. 289.
.
178.
149.
Mottomo, Motomo, adv. expressive of the
.
96. relation
Nakdre, imperative form, continual! ve
Moto, a Jap. numerative (5)
Motte
278.
177.
Moppara, adverb
.
.
of relation
express
Moo, adverb
56.
149.
word exprew. of
Utti,
Naka-naka-ni,
.
282. 888.
Na/iai, Nafidri, NaAerri, instead of N**drt
170.
Mori, Mosiva, MonkHvd, conjunction.
59.
plural
Nagdra, conjunction
Moo, a silverweight
Moro-morono, expression of the plural
forming the forbidding
to,
imperative
130.
139. 140.
Mon-me, a silverweight
-tta, I
conjunction.
301. 114. 270. 61. 67.
838.
191.
.
829.
Narabini, conjunction naramit, maram
,
NaraM)i, m, verb
Nar)e,
m, mm,
marami, verbal termin.
verb
.
.
.
218.
27L
... .
.
Nar)i. m, verb
271. 270.
m Nar)i, m, used instead of Nar)t,
271.
(Oymari, verb of courtesy
***.
INDEX.
362
Page.
177.
Ndni-dake, adverb Naru,toki-ni, .==.
O.
114. 270.
-naru, termination of adjectives
Naran
Nas)i, u, verb,
==_ni
Nausi, Noosi, o
Naute, o
341.
toJcini
+ si, A
verb. 236. 273.
causat.
Noote,
=.
0, On, honorary 0,
and Me,
Naku-si, 305.
Nakusite
-woba
-oba ,
75. 198. 311.
prefix
numerative (7)
a. Japanese,
(wo
,
+ va)
,
149.
of gender
suffixes express,
suffix
...
51.
53.
indicating the
99.
accusative
Nanzo
100.
Obitaddsiku
-ne, neg. verbal termination
248.
Odore, a variation of Onore, determin. pron.
-neianaranu, expression of necessity
260.
Odz)i, iru, uru, verb
Negavdkuvd, adverb
182.
Oite(-ni dite),
Nen, Tod, Tose, year
154.
Okeru, verb
194.
157.
Ok)i, iru, uru, verb
266.
Nazeni
instead of Nan-se-ni
=
Nazo,
Nen-goo,
yearnames Naka
Nengoroni,
=
naka-ni,
Musiro
176. 347.
.
.
333.
-nga, conjunction -ni,
-nu from
Ni
(ni
+
u, auxiliary verb of time 229. 230.
iri)i,
...
Nife, Nan, verb, to be in
i),
269.
-ni, -nu, neg. verbal termin
247.
-ni, suffix express, of relation.
61. 68. 173. 185. 193.
266.
N)i, iru, verb
Nigoreru koye, impure sounds Nigori , the points indicating tbe impure sounds.
Nin, a Chinese numerative (1)
Ning
=
Chinese,
,
Nippon
sio ki
or
Musiro
Yamdto bumi, a Japanese book.
-nite, -de, suffix express,
Nite and Ni-Ate,
=
Nite,
-ni
yorite
,
of relation.
.
266. express, of relation.
.
.
193.
.
Teniwova, Teniwa, Sutegana, Jap. de-
nominations for particle
43.
0-mdye, 0-mde, 0-mdi, honorary pron.
indicat-
ing the person spoken to
Omote, word
On,
103.
76.
0-meni-kak)e, eru, ar)i, u, verb of courtesy
.
express, of relation
instead of
319. 187.
Ono
52.
9.
-on, (-an, -en, -in), verbal termin. of the future. 209.
9.
Onari, verb of courtesy
325. 91.
150.
Onaziki, adjective
347.
Ono, Ono-ono, pronoun
89. 91.
Onodziikdrd, pronoun.
89.
Onore, pronoun
89. 90.
61. 70. 185.
Oo-kata, adverb
29. 36.
Narite
.
.
93.
175.
.
131. 175.
Ookini, adverb expressing a comparative.
site.
285.
Ooki tokiva, adverb
Ka, day
160.
Ookuno, Ohokuno, expression indicating the plural. 55.
-ni
yote,
-ni yotte,
conjunction.
334. 341. -no,
word
90.
.
270.
Ni
Nitsi (Zitsu),
=
,
181.
172.
5.
coins
Nipu, Nisu, gold
Oki-zi,
62.
adverb
suffix express, of
the genitive. 61. 66. 135. 142.
06s)e, uru, verb of courtesy
320.
Ooserar}e, uru, honorary pass, of 06se
320.
Ora, variation of Are, subst. pron. 86. 91. 103.
Ore,
No, a Japanese numerative (11)
149.
Ori, a Jap.
Nob)i, iru, verb
267.
Or)i, u, verb
Nokordzu, adverb expressing the plural
.
.
59.
Nori-tamav)i , u, verb of courtesy Notsi, word express, of relation.
181.
149.
numerative (8)
193. 263. 266.
175.
Or)i, iru, uru, verb
320.
-on, (-ari, -iri,-un), contin. verbal termination. 217. 181.
187.
Ori-fuzi, adverb
Notsi, conjunction
338.
Ori-ori, adverb
181.
Notsi-hodo , adverb
180.
Oi)i, u, verb.
264.
Notsini, adverb
178.
-osi,
Notsi-notsi, adverb
180.
-osiki,
193.
Osi-ndbate, adverb
Nozokite, Nozotte, word u, uru
.
.
express, of relation.
.
-isi, -usi), caus.
(-asi, -esi,
-asiki, verb, termin.
verb, termin.
forming adjectives
235. .
121. 174. 320.
285.
Osiy)e, uru, verb of courtesy
-nu instead of -no
294.
Os6kii, Ostiu, Osdo, adverb
-nu, -nan, -nuru, verbal termin.
229.
Ottir)i, u,
-nu de ar)i, u, negat. verb, termin
250.
Ots)i, iru, uru, verb
266.
Otte, adverb
179.
-ns)i,
.
-nva,
=
ni
-nzi,
==
nis)i
.
+ ,
va,
suffix
,
u, uru, to do, to be
69.
285.
Otdveri, verbs
.
133.
179.
Otts'ke, adverb
Owannuno nu
.
174. 179.
.
230.
INDEX.
363
!**
,
-dye, -aye, verb, terrain, indicat. the passive.
.
Qytibi, conjunction
Oydso, $y6sxo, adverbial expression
....
241.
San-dai kdlm-nki, a Japanese book
329.
Sdn-nagara, conjunction
38.
Ml
T
142. 151.
Oydso, adverb
175.
P.
Sao, Soo, anit of the measure* of capacity.
.
.
Sappari, adverb
168.
181.
Sara ni , adverb
177
Sore domo, conjunction
HI HI
Pioo, Tawdra, a measnre of capacity
168.
Sari-nagdra
Pu, Tsubo, a
168.
Sard fodoni
339.
172.
SdrHni yotte
8S4.
Pu
measure
superficial
(Itsi-pu, Ni-pu), gold coins.
........
R. -ra, suffix expressing the plural
56.
Sart-nayara nuf, conjunction.
,
.
.
.
Satdg}^, uru, verb of courtesy
HI
SattLka, adverb
18L
Sate, Sdtecd, conjunction
HI
Rai-getsu, adverb of time
180.
Safin, a Chinese numeraire (23>
153
Rai-nen, adverb of time
180.
Saye, adverb
178.
Sayoo, adverb
181.
212.
Sazo, conjunction
125.
-*
-ran,
-arame, verb.
-aran,
term,
expressing
the periphrastic future -rasiki,
=
aranki, rdtka, term, of adject
Rei- (Mei-)rite,
=
.
.
nte, nmete
HI
-ten;
-tttrtt,
-nm)c,
Se, a superficial measure
Rin, a space of time
164.
Stti
Rin, a measure of length
167.
Sei-zi, Sin-si, a
Rin, a silverweight
170.
Sekki, a space of time.
.
form of writing
Sen (Zeni, Man), a copper coin
153.
Sen, Go,
Riyoo, unit of old gold coins
172.
Sen-dai
an exclamation
-yo,
199.
Ron-ndku, Ron-nau, adverb
teri
Jku-xi
n
kwa-kono
w
(ki, ku)
Sai, adverb, prefix expressing the superlative.
.
Sai, a measure of capacity -Sat,
a weigth
Sttfstt-tettit,
-tt,
135.
S)i, M, KTM, verb
168.
-tt,
=
169.
Si,
}', Chinese
-tn
t
time
158. 336
181.
eaont
verb*.
270
Ml.
exprcMinn* indicating the gem-
der of birds
148.
-', (Oen-sai no
Saki, word express, of relation
187.
Saki-goro, adverb
180.
-ti
180.
-,
=
58.
Ifa/fe, expreoive of the superlative.
adjective
ki,
), termin
...
(Jfirm no n)
.
106.
107. 884. .
.
)
of length
in, tan, verb
.
184.
of the praedkatire
..
(KtM-tono
muare
Si, a
.'.i
818. 800.
Si,
178. 180.
.
-tut
177.
Saki ni, adverb
from
HI
.
-tan (-J0), termination of
179.
Saki-hodo, adverb
36.
.
dutinguish
adverb
107.
267.
Sai-tiyoniva, adverb
Usiro)
to
m)
and
Sai-zen, adverb
Saki, Tsugi (Ato,
erf)
-f-
in 148.
the derivative form ter)i, w (a fusion of the
181.
SaV)i, uru, verb
5.
171.
Japanew book
fon-ki, a
(causal,
Seftit, division of
substantive form of
....
before and after
s. -to,,
163
.
158.
147.
=
HI 168.
and Siyo, notation of time
Riyoo, a Chinese numerative (18)
-ro,
ter-
885.
168.
Bu
verb,
mination
240.
Ri, measure of length
Rin, Wari,
t,
ttrm,
HI
818. 814.
888. 884.
HI 17. 265.
SdkU-geftH, adverb
180.
Sdlril-nen, adverb
180.
,
adverb
179.
SdkK-ziti, adverb
180.
,
adverb
181.
Santa, pron. expressing the person spoken
Sama-samano, expression Samtiravfi,
,
Savilrao)i,
to.
.
indicating the plural. ,
Sored,
liary verb
Sa-ttdku-tomo , adverb
San-bu fon-nyo, a Japanese book
Son,
Sf)i,
word
.
exprett. of relation
74.
Si-dai,
55.
SidsiUMni, adverb
.
.
Stta wJ, conjunction
auxi-
276279.
SiJttre
177.
SHar*
36.
Sikati
domo, conjunction ni yotte, conjunction ,
conjunction
191.
174 845.
HI HI HI
INDEX.
364
Page.
-sikd-siki, terrain, of adject
124.
Soo-sitd Teara, Soo site kara, conjunctions
Slkdsi-nagdra , conjunction
333.
Soo wa, conjunction
Sikasi-naffdramd, conjunction
334.
Soo-zi, a
Sikdto, adverb
181. 110. 119.
terrain, of adject
-siJci,
.
.
334.
334.
form of writing
6.
87.
Sore, pron
Sore da kara, conjunction
334. 340.
Sikirini, adverb
179.
Sore de, conjunction
334.
-siku, adv. terrain
299.
Soredemd, conjunction
345.
Simav)i, u, Sima)i, u, verb
298.
Soredewa, conjunction
334.
235. 238.
Sim)e, uru, verb, terrain reflect,
Sin,
pronoun
Sina-zinano , expression indicating the plural
.
form of writing ...
Sin-zi, Sei-zi, Kai-sto, a
Sita, word express, of relation
334. 340.
93.
Sore kara, conjunction
55.
Soreni yotte, conjunction
334.
Soro-soro, Soro-soroto, adverbs
174.
5.
186.
Sitagaute, Sitagoote, word express.
Sitagdtte,
88.
Soregdsi, pronoun
Sosite, Sosite kara, conjunctions
334.
So-so, adverb
178.
word
of relation
195.
Soto,
Sitdni, adverb
178.
Sotoni, adverb
178.
240.
Sotsi,
pronoun
82.
270.
Sowo
-site,
=
simete
-site (*'-)
and nite,
=r
narite ,
-stu, siyu, sit,
su,
siu-dzyu,
suffix
Siu-i,-
word
=
58.
190.
express, of relation
poetically for Soreioo
87.
Su, expression of the plural
expressing
the plural
-su,
-zu,
=
tsu
56.
.
.
Subete, adverb
265.
Sudani , adverb
166.
Sudzi, a Japanese numerative (9
Slydkii, saint, a measure of capacity
168.
Sudzi-makdvini, adverb
Sf)i, iru,
yuru
67.
174.
Sty a feu, Sdku, a measure of length
Siv)i,
189.
express, of relation
179. 1
Siydku,
sdk', a
169.
weigth
Suff*)i,
149.
)
178.
iru, uru, verb
266.
Siyo and Set, notation of time
163.
Suguni, adverb
Siyo-siyo, adverb
178.
Siigurete, adv. expressing the superlative
56.
Siyo, expression of the plural -siyu, su, suffix for
144.
sort-numbers
179.
,
.
.
.
Sui-bun, adverb
135.
175.
Sukdburu, adverb
175.
adv. expressing the comparative
Siyu, siyu no, expression indicating the plural.
55.
Sukdsi,
So, adverb of place
79.
Suku-nald told, adverb
181.
suffix
199. 252. 301.
Suku-ndku md, adverb
175.
-so,
emphatic
.
131. 175.
139.
Suku ndku tdmo, adverb
177.
Soba, word express, of relation
190.
Sumdvi, r=r Simavi, verb
298.
Sobani, adverb
178.
Sumiyakdni, adverb
174.
-so, -so-dzi, terrain,
SoJco,
of numerals
pronoun
Solco-moto,
=
Asoko-moto, pronoun
80.
Sun, a measure of length
167.
81.
Sunavatsi, conjunction
335.
177.
So&ti, a Chinese numerative (26)
154.
Surd, adverb
SokH-zini, adverb
179.
Sutegdna, Teniwova, Teniva, Oki-zi, Jap. deno-
Somo-somo , conjunction
345.
Son, pron., honorary prefix Sdndta,
=.
Sono
+
kata, pronoun
Sono, Sono-moto, pronoun
76.
minations for particle
178.
84.
T.
84.
Sono fokdni, adverb
177.
To,,
Sono notsi, adverb
180.
-/a, -ta)ki, ku, si,
Sono told, adverb
179.
Tabi, an obsolete verb
Sono tokdroni, adverb
178.
Tabi, Tabi-me,
Sono
ni adverb
43.
Suzi-kaini, adverb
Da,
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79.
desiderative verb
suffix to
97 296. 314.
numerals
....
143. 144.
337.
178.
Tabi gotoni, conjunction
Soo, a Chinese numerative (17)
153.
Tabi-tabi, adverb
181.
Soo, adverb
181.
Tabi tabini, conjunction
337.
iie
INDEX.
365
-
A
Ta-lun, adverb
182.
Tada, adverb
176.
sama-gata, pron.
Tada ima, adverb
179.
ken to
Tadasi, conjunction
335.
interr.
pron
82.
Tagamni, Ai-tagaini, expression of reciprocity.
95.
Toga, Daga,
Tai-gai, adverb
175.
Taino kotoba, Jap. denom.
for
noun
43.
Tai-sauno, Tai-teino, expressions indicating the
indicating the person spo-
75. 103.
=r
-te-mo,
Te-mee, Temae-tama, Temat-
mo
Site-mo,
102.
Temtoova, Tenita, Stttegana,
denominations for
Oki-si,
Particle
To and Ye,
79.
distinction of the
To,
165.
-to -to
Tai-soo, adverb
175.
-to, suffix express, of relation
Tai-tei, adverb
175.
-to,
297.
To-kakH, adverb
175.
T6ki, Doki, a space of time
=
Taku-ari, Too-art, contin. verb.
.
.
Takv.-ta.nno, expression indicating the plural.
=
tote,
289. 290. 291. 343. 177.
Takusi (Tain), verb
80.
Toki MI yotte va, adverb
Tamasakani, adverb
174.
Toicitoo
Tama-tama, adverb
177.
Tofcdro,
v.,
ATamauri, Tam6r)i, u, verb
315.
A
Tamavfi, u,
Tama)i,
v.,
Tame, word
express, of relation
Tameni, conjunction Tan, Dan, a Chinese numerative (10) Tan, a
measure
superficial
Tdno (Tono), Dd-no (Dono), Donna,
u,
=.
+
te
ari,
terrain,
-tar)i,
A
u,
ta
,
da,
.
886. 97.
Yomi
4. .
.
149.
844
Tomo kakumo, adverb
152.
Tomom,
168.
Tonari, word express, of relation
57.
177.
adverb
176.
Tono, DOMO, (Tamo
Da HO),
190.
.
interr.
pronoun
.
Tonto, adverb
220.
the past tense. 228. tan)ki, si, ken, verb, terrain, of
88.
174.
Tbo-M, Kara-Mo, a Chin,
80.
dialect
Tookn, adverb
dla, verbal terrain.,
80.
.
843.
adjec-
auxiliary verb of the past tense
166.
.
-fdmd, -vuf, concessive suffix, conjunetion. 206.
114. 116. 219.
tives
.
-tomo, -domo, expression of the plural
88.
of
.
314.
85.
Tare, Dare, Dore, interr. pronouns -tar)i,
Tokorode, Tokdromi, conjunctions
TokV, Kttn,
S36. 189.
the changing of the hoars
tit tutu,
195.
interr.
pronouns
168.
7Wuw, conjunctions.
Tomdya, Tomai, a Jap. numeratire (18)
Tamoo, verb of cour-
tesy
Tokini, Tokittiva,
Tokoro, noun substantive
of
courtesy
61. 70. 185. 190.
.
.
to nte
Told,
Tamavdr)i,
168.
191.
55.
.
97.
names of the ten-
Tomdtti, a measure of capacity
195.
Tak&dnni, adverb
42.
To, Do, adverb of place
Tai site, word express, of relation
Takari
Japanese
series cycle
55.
plural
Te-mdye, Te-mai
178.
Todri, word express, of relation
19L
Todrini, conjunction
888.
Too-tcn-tar)i ,
Todte,
=
215. 296.
verb
,
Tomrite, word express, of relation. 198.
Tootcva, word express, of relation
194.
Tasinde, adverb
176.
Too-st*, adverb
181.
Ta-siyo, Ta-lo, adverb
178.
Tordnm^,
817.
-tote, conjunction
174. 181.
Tankdni, adverb
Ton, Tote, JVM,
of TateTate-mdttitrar)e, urn, honorary passive
mdMlru Ta(e-mdtitir)i,
Tatri,
,
verb of courtesy
expressing the plural
suffix
HTM, Torat)a, tarm, verb of courtesy 822.
816. 58.
to
tt
mo,
=
-to
SM
t*
mo;
-fota,
179.
Ttttewa, tattoo*
181.
Totont, word
Tawdra, Pioo, a measure of capacity
168.
Tti
=
tooteta
of pronouns
gerund
208.
-te in, verb,
terrain
218.
Ttikd-dtikami, TJU*~foro t adverbs
Te-dzti-ltara,
98.
pronoun
-te)ki t -si, ken,
=
tan)ki,
ri,
ten
228.
198.
(Homo, Y6rddtm), numeral tti, -tm t (dsi), termtn. of numerals.
-to, -de, verb, terrain, of the
on,
to
198.
express, of relation
Tti, ttira
-te ari, -te
=
70. 10S.
Tail-sen, adverb
61. 178. 185.
848.
UWM
Tatsi-matri, adverb
-te, suffix express, of relation
154.
year
noon,
lnka-dt*k)i,
,
adverb
suffix
verb of courtesy
.
140. 189. .
80. 88. 187.
179. 825. 178.
INDEX.
366
Page.
Page.
38.
Tsin,
Maro, pronouns
186.
TJtd, lyric
Tsito,
Tsitto, adverb
176.
Utdgavurakiiva, adverb
Tsiu, Setsu
158.
Utsi,
word expressive
Tsiu, Ziyoo, Ge, numerals
143.
TJtn,
Tltsini,
Tsiu,
189.
Utrini, adverb
Tsiu, adverb
178.
Uve, Uye, word
Tsiyau, Ttoo, a measure of length
167.
Uye, conjunction
337.
Tsiyau, Tsoo, a superficial measure
168.
Uyeni, adverb
178.
= Naka
Tfiyao,Tsoo, a Chinese numerative (11).
.
.
.
Tso, a Chinese numerative (16) -tsu,
a suffix express, of relation
-tsu,
termin. of numerals
Pu,
Tsubo,
...
u.
Twite, Tsukite, word express, of relation
=
.
.
.
=
Aida,
-ni
=
Tsukti or Tsukd-matsuri,
V. -wa, -la, isolating suffix. 60. 61. 106. 131. 254. 302.
-ve,
-e,
mdtsiiri, verb of courtesy
,
,
-ve,
.
,
.
and
61. 67. 185.
-he, -ye, suffix of multiplying numerals. 144.
-e,
w. Wa,
143.
-wa, -va, -la, isolating
179.
Wa, Fa,
a Japanese
194.
Wa, Fa,
a Chinese numerative (4)
adverb of place
79. suffix.
60. 61. 131. 254. 302.
149.
numerative (6)
151. 267.
Wab)i, iru, uru, verb
80.
Wa-dono, pronoun
159.
WadzuTcani, adverb
266.
Wdga, pronoun
83.
Waga-mi, pronoun
91.
tsukai- or tsukae.
-he, -ye, suffix expressing the dative
terminative
231.
yottek\.
month
Gwats\
186.
-vet,
322.
Tsuk}e, uru, verb of courtesy
TsuK)i, iru, verb
178.
168.
,
Tsuini, adverb
Tsuki, Getsu,
337.
express, of relation
231. 232.
Utiro)
Tsuki, Tsukite, Tsuite,
188.
of relation
153. 61. 67. 294.
Tsudzuru, verb ,
182.
.
179.
138.
u, variation of n)i,
a superficial measure.
Tsugi, Saki (Ato
.
175.
Tsiyoto, Tsiotto, Tsdito, adverb
-tsutsii; tsur}i,
'
Utsiwa, conjunction
152.
.
Tsiyau-do, Two-do, adverb
-tsu,
poems
316.
Wagi-m6ko,
=
175.
83.
Waga-lmo'ko
38.
book
TjtH#fo'ra&i,. adverb
174.
Wa-gunno
Tsune-dzune, Tsuneni, adverb
181.
Wa-mei-seo, a Jap. book
38.
Wa-nami, pronoun
80.
Tsusima-won
,
a dialect (Go-won)
Tsutdite, Ts'tatte, Tsutsi,
word
30.
.
.
193.
80.
82.
express, of relation.
noun
siwori, a Jap.
80.
Wa-nusi, pronoun
86. 103.
Ware, pronoun
147.
Bu, Ein
-tsutsu, improperly nsed for dzutsu
232.
Wari,
Tsuu, a Chinese numerative (24)
153.
Waruku, Waruu, adverb
U. -it,
200. 201. of adject
me, Ume, Mule, Be, Ukegatte, adverb TJke-tamavar)i , TJra,
word
s
M, A
..
^
= ,
.
m+
he
emphatic
-wo,
suffix
291.
Wokiy , improperly used
176.
.
Uke.-tam6ri , verb of courtesy. 315.
expressing the accusative
Urdni, adverb (-an,
-iri,
178.
-on), contin. verb, termin.
.
.
217.
-uru, (-eru, -iru\ verb, termin. of the aubst. form. 201.
"Uruu-dzuki , intercalary -usi, (-asi,
-esi,
-isi,
month
-osi),
causat. verb, termin. 235.
Usiro (Ato), Saki, Tsugi TJsiro,
word
express, of relation
Usironi, adverb
160.
61. 62.
for Oki-zi, Jap. deno-
43.
mination for particle
4. 29.
Won, Koye
187.
express, of relation
62.
suffix
-wo,
113.
Y.
Uram)i, uru, verb ...................... 269.
-uri,
217. 263.
Wi, I, noun substantive
verbal termin
-M for ku, termin.
174. 80. 103.
Watdkusi, pronoun
Ta, lya, To, lyo, adverbs expressing the com131.
parative
ya
.
.
.ya, -yara
.
.
.yaran, conjunctions
....
331.
180.
Ta-bunni, adverb
179.
Yagate, adverb
117.
143.
yaka, termin. of
187.
Yamdto-lumi
,
Nippon-sto-ki
178.
Yamdto-kdna
,
a form of writing
adjectives ,
a Jap. book. 5. 29. 36. 6.
INDEX.
367
Page.
Yamdto-kotobd, Furu-koto, old Japanese.
.
35. 36.
.
PlfC.
Yoto
Yoioni, Yatoye, adverbs
Icara,
=
Yam)i, u, a verb
298.
-yotte,
-yara, -yaran, -ya, conjunctions
331.
yotte, conjunction
Tara-yara, adverb
174.
You, adverb
Yar)i, u, verb of courtesy
323.
Youno
174.
YUe, Ytieni, conjunctions
180.
Yuu
Ydsuu, adverb
Ydsiiku,
Ya-tiiu, adverb
A
Ydtsu-k6,
Ydkko,
Ydtsii-kdre,
-yonte, word express, of relation
.
194. 334. 174.
kotobd, Jap. denomin
for
verb.
.
.
.
43.
S34. S39.
and Si, Chinese expressions indicating the
gender of birds
Ydtsii-bdra,
53.
74.
pronouns Yau-ni, Yoo-ni, adverb and conjunction.
.
site,
179.
Yoo-yoo site, adverb
176. 334.
Yavdri, conjunction ye, -e,-he t -ve,
suffix
expressing the dative and
terminative
z.
181. 338.
Yau-yaku, Yoo-yaku, adverb
Yau-yau
178.
61. 67. 185.
mo arena*,
-zaran, -zu to nan, -z*
neg. verb
termin
253.
-zar)i, v,
neg.
-zari)ki,
',
verb, termin
250. 353.
253.
verb, termin
ken, neg.
Ze-hi, adverb
=
177.
-ye, -e, -he, -ve, suffix of multiplying numerals. 144.
Zen,
Ye and To ,
Zeni (Sen, Man), a copper coin
171.
Zen-zenni, adverb
174.
distinction of the
names of the ten155.
series cycle -y)e,
urn;
e, uru,
verb, termin. of the passive
form
Move, word
Z}i, u, urn,
=
express, of relation
$)',
,
240. 241.
-)', M, neg. verb, termin.
Yeda, a Jap. numerative (151
149.
Zi (Itti-zi), a silverweigth
dollar
172.
Zi-bun, pronoun
Yen-fooni, adverb
178.
-zide ari,
Yen,
=
=
171. 94.
Zi-gini yottara, Zi-gini yotte, adverbs
79.
-ziki,
-yo, an exclamation
62. 199.
Tsin), pronoun
Yo/odo, adverb
175.
Yo-fodo, adverb
136. 174.
947.
260.
verb, termin
neg.
194.
283.
72.
86.
.
nti
Yo, adverb of place
Yo (Maro,
.
nrn
Yi, verb, root of -yori
=
.
188. 119.
-nti, termin. of adjectives.
Zikini, adverb
179.
Ziku, Chinese Numerative (21)
153.
Zi-rin,
93.
pronoun
Zifst (Nitn),
160.
Ka, day
Yo-keini, adverb
17B.
Yokoni, Yoko-samani, adverb
178.
Ztyao,
=
174.
Ziyoo,
Tnu, Oe (Kami, Naka, Simo)
294.
Ziyoo, Zoo, a measure of length
167.
80.
Ziyu-bunni, adverb
176.
84.
Zi-zen, pronoun
Y6ku,
7
Ydkui)i, u, uru, a verb
Yomi, Kun, Tdkti
4.
Yono, pronoun
Yoo, a Chinese numerative (18)
Zittuni, adverb
152.
-zo,
182. 185. 838. yori, suffix express, of relation. 61. 71.
so,
-yorite,
=
-yotte,
word
express, of relation
.
194.
-yori-yori, adverb
181.
Yorddzu (Homo, Tn), numeral
140.
YoronkH, Yordnu, adverb
174.
Yoso for Yoko, pronoun
81.
Uye, word
cmphat.
=
-to,
181. express, of reUtion
foro,
301.
suffix
188.
877. 67.
ttn
tn, turn, znran, snnba,
adverb
180.
94.
= nn + ton = ,
.
89. 98.
Zon-bttnnd n-dai, adverb
-tu, in
.
143.
suffix
emphatic
.
verb. term.
.
.
813. 814. 180. 171.
Hoffmann, Johann Joseph A Japanese grammar. Second edition
PLEASE
CARDS OR
DO NOT REMOVE
SLIPS
UNIVERSITY
FROM
THIS
OF TORONTO
POCKET
LIBRARY
